CONTENTS

Page
Preface iii
Contents v
List of Diagrams viii
Explanatory Notes x
Abbreviations xi

Part I
CHAPTER 1
Planning a Passage
Ocean Passages for the World (1.1) 1
Charts and Publications (1.9) 1
Natural Conditions (1.13) 3
Passage Planning (1.23) 13
Additional Considerations (1.25) 13

CHAPTER 2
North Atlantic Ocean
Winds and Weather (2.1) IS
Swell (2.11) 16
Currents (2.14) 16
Ice (2.25) 18
Notes and Cautions (2.30) 19
Routes to and from Kap Farvel and Davis Strait (2.46) 20
Routes to and from Strait of Belle Isle (2.52) 22
Routes to and from Saint John's Harbour, Newfoundland (2.57) 22
Routes between Cabot Strait or North American ports and Europe (2.62) 24
Routes between North American ports, West Indies or Caribbean Sea and Africa (2.76) 27
Routes between West Indies or Bermuda and Europe (2.80) 27
Routes between English Channel and Strait of Gibraltar or intermediate ports (2.91) . . . . 31
Routes between English Channel and West coast of Africa, Cape Town or the Indian Ocean
(2.96) 31
Routes between North America and places between Gulf of Mexico and Cabo Calcanhar
(2.101) 33
Routes between North-east coast of South America and Eastern part of North Atlantic Ocean
(2.111) 37
Routes between Eastern part of Atlantic Ocean and Recife (2.116) , 37
Routes to and from Arquipelago dos Acores (2.125) 38
Routes to and from Arquipelago de Cabo Verde (2.130) 38

CHAPTER 3
South Atlantic Ocean
Winds and Weather (3.1) 40
Swell (3.2) 40
Currents (3.11) 40
Ice (3.16) 41
Notes and Cautions (3.21) 41
Routes off East coast of South America (3.31) 43
Routes off West coast of Africa (3.41) 44
Transatlantic Routes (3.46) 46
Southern Routes (3.48) 46
 CONTENTS (CONTD)

CHAPTER 4
Caribbean Sea and Gulf of Mexico
Winds and Weather (4.1) 51
Swell (4.5) 51
Currents (4.11) 51
Notes and Cautions (4.15) 51
Routes (4.21) 52

CHAPTER 5
Mediterranean Sea
Winds and Weather (5.1) 56
Swell (5.11) 57
Currents (5.16) 57
Ice (5.21) 57
Routes (5.25) 57
List of Distances (5.35) 58

CHAPTER 6
Indian Ocean
Winds and Weather (6.1) 59
Swell (6.21) 62
Currents (6.31) 63
Ice (6.41) 65
Notes (6.45) 66
Red Sea and Persian Gulf (6.51) 66
Routes between East coast of Africa, Arabian Sea and Bay of Bengal (6.55) 66
Routes to and from Port Louis (Mauritius) (6.90) 77
Routes to and from Mahe Island (Seychelles Group) (6.106) 80
Western approaches to and passages off the Australian coast (6.120) 81
Routes on the East side of the Indian Ocean (6.140) 83
Trans-ocean routes (6.150) 85

CHAPTER 7
Pacific Ocean and seas bordering it
Winds and Weather (7.1) 97
Swell (7.25) 101
Currents (7.32) 102
Ice (7.41) 104
Navigational Notes (7.46) 105
Passages between Torres Strait and East coast of Australia (7.51) 107
Routes between Australia, New Zealand and islands in the South Pacific Ocean (7.57) .. 109
Routes through Eastern Archipelago, South China Sea and Solomon Sea (7.110) 114
Routes through seas of the Western Pacific Ocean (7.161) 127
Routes on Western side of Pacific Ocean (7.195) 138
Routes on Eastern side of Pacific Ocean (7.220) 141
Routes to and from Honolulu (7.231) 145
Routes to and from Papeete (7.250) 149
South Pacific Trans-ocean routes (7.270) 155
Mid-Pacific Trans-ocean routes (7.300) 160
North Pacific Trans-ocean routes (7.350) 169

Part II

CHAPTER 8
Introductory Remarks and Atlantic Ocean and Mediterranean Sea Sailing Routes
Introductory Remarks (8.1) 182
Routes from Europe (8.2.1) 182
Routes in Mediterranean Sea (8.19.1) 188
Routes from West coast of Africa and from Atlantic Islands (8.25) 189
Routes from West side of Atlantic Ocean (8.44.1) 191

CHAPTER 9
Indian Ocean, Red Sea and Eastern Archipelago Sailing Routes
Routes from Cape Town or Cape of Good Hope (9.1.1) 196
Routes from East coast of Africa and Mauritius (9.9.1) 201
Routes N-bound or S-bound through Eastern Archipelago (9.30) 203
 CONTENTS (CONTD)

Routes through Red Sea (9.55) 220

Routes from Aden (9.60) 220
Routes from West coast of India and Sri Lanka (9.70) 222
Routes from ports in Bay of Bengal (9.90) 225
Routes from ports in Burma (9.105) 227
Routes S-bound or W-bound from Singapore or Eastern Archipelago (9.115) 227
Northern Australia to Sydney, Indian Ocean and South China Sea (9.130) 229
Routes from South-west and South Australia (9.140) 230
Routes from Sydney to ports in Indian Ocean (9.160) 231
CHAPTER 10
Pacific Ocean Sailing Routes
Navigational Notes for Pacific Ocean (10.1.1) 233
South Africa and Southern Australia to Pacific Ocean ports (10.2.1) 233
Routes from Sydney (10.4.1) 234
Routes from New Zealand (10.11) 237
Routes from island groups between Nouvelle Caledonie and lies de la Societe (10.19) .. 237
Routes from Singapore and Eastern Archipelago (10.30.1) 238
Routes from Bangkok or Ho Chi Minh City (10.39.1) 242
Routes from ports in China (10.42.1) 243
Routes from Manila (10.58) 247
Routes from Japan (10.64.1) 248
Routes from islands in North Pacific Ocean (10.74) 250
Routes from Prince Rupert, Vancouver or Columbia River (10.86) 252
Routes from San Francisco (10.89) 253
Routes from Central America and Panama (10.102) 255
Routes from South American ports (10.113) 256
Routes from Cabo de Hornos (10.126) 258
TABLES, GAZETTEER AND INDEX
Table A—Beaufort Wind Scale 261
Table B—Seasonal Wind/Monsoon Table—West Pacific and Indian Oceans 262
Table C—Tropical Storm Table 263
Gazetteer , 265
Index to General Subjects and Routes , 283
 DIAGRAMS

No. Page
Limits of Volumes of Admiralty Sailing Directions Front end-papers
(1.9) Limits of Routeing Charts 2
(1.11) Limits of Gnomonic Ocean Charts 2
(1.13a) World Climatic Chart—January following page 4
(1.13b) World Climatic Chart—July following page 4
(1.17a) Wave Heights—January following page 4
(1.17b) Wave Heights—April following page 4
(1.17c) Wave Heights—July following page 4
(1.17d) Wave Heights—October following page 4
(1.19a-d) Current Roses—November-March 6-9
(1.19e) World Predominant Surface Current Distribution—November-March 9
(1.19j) World Predominant Surface Current Distribution—May-September 10
(1.19f-i) Current Roses—May-September 10-13
(1.26) Load line rules, zones, areas and seasonal periods following page 14
(2.48) ROUTES—Kap Farvel <-> Northern Europe 21
(2.50) ROUTES—Canada <-• Europe 23
(2.63) ROUTES—North America <-• Europe 25
(2.76) ROUTES—West coast of Africa <->• Europe, East coast of US and West Indies 26
(2.82) ROUTES—Straits of Florida -> Europe: Bermuda Islands *-> Europe: Europe <-» West
Indies Passages (Alternative routes): N American Ports *-* Gulf of Guinea and Cape Town 28
(2.85) ROUTES—West Indies Passages <-> Europe 30
(2.102) ROUTES—Straits of Florida -> North America: West Indies Passages and
Barbados «-» North America 32
(2.105) ROUTES—Cabo Calcanhar «-> North America, Caribbean Sea and Rio Para 35
(2.111) ROUTES—Eastern side of North Atlantic Ocean <-> Rio Para and Recife 36
(2.130) ROUTES to and from Ponta Delgada and Porto Grande 39
(3.32) ROUTES—East coast of South America 42
(3.42) ROUTES—West coast of Africa from Cape Palmas to Cape Agulhas, and across northern
part of South Atlantic Ocean 45
(3.48) ROUTES across southern part of South Atlantic Ocean 49
(4.21) ROUTES—Caribbean Sea and Gulf of Mexico 50
(5.27) ROUTES—Mediterranean Sea—Western part 54
(5.29) ROUTES—Mediterranean Sea—Eastern part 55
(6.55) ROUTES—South Africa «-» Mozambique Channel and Port Louis 64
(6.58) ROUTES—Africa <-> Aden, Persian Gulf and Karachi 69
(6.63) ROUTES—Aden <-• Persian Gulf and Karachi 71
(6.65) ROUTES—Africa <-• Bombay and Colombo 72
(6.67) ROUTES—South Africa *-> Bay of Bengal 73
(6.76) ROUTES across Arabian Sea 75
(6.92) ROUTES—Port Louis and Mahe Island «-» Africa, Aden and India 76
(6.98) ROUTES—Port Louis «-» Eastern Archipelago and Australia 79
(6.111) ROUTES—Mahe Island <-> Fremantle and Cape Leeuwin 81
(6.122) ROUTES—Western approaches to North Western Australia and Torres Strait 82
(6.140) ROUTES—Bay of Bengal <-+ Australia 84
(6.150) ROUTES—Cape Town <-> Eastern Archipelago and North Western Australia 86
(6.151) ROUTES—Durban <-» Eastern Archipelago and North Western Australia 87
(6.157) ROUTES—Cape Town and Durban <-> South Australia 88
(6.160) ROUTES—Cape Town and Aden <-> South Pacific Ocean 88
(6.161) ROUTES—Mombasa <-» Eastern Archipelago and Australia 92
(6.164) ROUTES—Aden <-> Singapore, Torres Strait and Darwin, South Australia and
South Pacific Ocean 93
(6.173) ROUTES—Eastern side of Arabian Sea -• Australia 95
(7.52) ROUTES—Brisbane •-+ Torres Strait 107
(7.57) ROUTES—South-east coast of Australia <-» New Zealand 110
 DIAGRAMS (CONTD)

(7.65) ROUTES—East coast of Australia <-> Auckland and South Pacific Islands 106
(7.79) ROUTES—Torres Strait <-> New Zealand: Papeete <-> Australia and New Zealand 108
(7.111) ROUTES—South China Sea 112
(7.122) ROUTES—Guam and Yap <-> Eastern Archipelago, Apia and Suva 116
(7.128) ROUTES—Singapore <-> Selat Lombok and Selat Wetar 121
(7.130) ROUTES—Torres Strait +-> Singapore, Balik Papan and Tarakan 122
(7.131) ROUTES—Singapore and Selat Sunda <-> Eastern Archipelago and Yap 123
(7.138) ROUTES—Bangkok, Ho Chi Minh City and Hong Kong <-» Eastern Archipelago 120
(7.146) ROUTES—Manila <-> Java Sea 125
(7.163) NORTH-SOUTH ROUTES through the Eastern Archipelago 126
(7.175). ROUTES—East coast of Australia and New Zealand ++ Solomon Sea 130
(7.176) ROUTES through Solomon Sea and Caroline Islands 132
(7.180) ROUTES—Caroline Islands <-> North West Pacific Ocean 133
(7.195) ROUTES—Singapore, Hong Kong, Yap and Guam *-* Shanghai and Japan 136
(7.203) ROUTES—Australia, New Zaland and Nukualofa <-> Honolulu: Suva and
Apia <-> Guam, Yap, Manila, Hong Kong and Honolulu 140
(7.205) ROUTES—Apia and Suva «-> Yokohama 139
(7.221) ROUTES—Dutch harbor <-> North America, and routes off the West coast of North America 142
(7.222) ROUTES off the West coasts of Central and South America 143
(7.231) ROUTES—Honolulu <-> South Pacific Ocean 144
(7.237) ROUTES—Honolulu •-> North Pacific Ocean 146
(7.250) ROUTES—Papeete «-V North and South Eastern Pacific Ocean 148
(7.251) ROUTES—Papeete «-> North Pacific Ocean 150
(7.255) ROUTES—Papeete <-> Eastern part of Pacific Ocean 151
(7.270) ROUTES—Australia and New Zealand «-» Panama and South America 152
(7.271) ROUTES—South America <-> Apia, Suva, New Zealand and Australia 153
(7.275) ROUTES—South America «-> Apia and Suva: South America <-> New Zealand and Australia:
Panama -» New Zealand 154
(7.301) ROUTES—Australia, Suva and Apia <-> Panama 156
(7.302) ROUTES—Guam, Australia, Suva and Apia <-> Panama 157
(7.308) ROUTES—Basilan Strait, San Bernadino Strait and Balintang Channel -» Panama 158
(7.314) ROUTES—Singapore and Manila *-> Panama 164
(7.318A) ROUTES—New Zealand, Suva and Apia <-» North America (Central part) 162
(7.318B) ROUTES—New Zealand, Suva and Apia <-> North America (Northern part) 162
(7.319) ROUTES—Australia, New Zealand, Suva and Apia <-» North America 163
(7.334) ROUTES—Australia, Yap and Guam <-> N America 166
(7.352) ROUTES—North Pacific Ocean—East-bound I 168
(7.356) ROUTES—North Pacific Ocean—East-bound II 170
(7.357) ROUTES—North Pacific Ocean-East-bound III 172
(7.369) ROUTES—North Pacific Ocean—West-bound I 174
(7.376) ROUTES—North Pacific Ocean—West-bound II 176
(10.132) The World—Sailing Ship Routes folllowing page 260
 EXPLANATORY NOTES

Ocean Passages for the World is kept up to date by supplements, each new supplement cancelling the previous
one. In addition important corrections which cannot await the next supplement are published in Section IV of
the weekly editions of Admiralty Notices to Mariners. A list of such corrections and notices in force is published in
the last weekly edition for each month. Those still in force at the end of the year are reprinted in the Annual
Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners.

This book should not be used without reference to the latest supplement and Section IV of the
weekly editions of Admiralty Notices to Mariners.
Remarks on subject matter
Geographical positions refer to the largest scale Admiralty chart. Those of the arrival and departure
positions in the Index are precise, and wherever practicable are the same as those given in Admiralty Distance
Tables. Positions used in the Gazetteer are approximate.

Names have been taken from the most authoritative sources. Obsolete names still appearing on the chart at the
time of publication of this edition of this book have been included in the Gazetteer.
Since charts used for passage planning are usually of a small scale and tend to be the last to be corrected for
name changes, it may be necessary to consult larger scale charts or Admiralty Sailing Directions to identify places
where the name has been recently changed.

Units and Terminology

Bearings and directions are referred to the true compass and when given in degrees are reckoned clockwise
from 000° (North) to 359°.
Bearings used for positioning are given from the reference object.
Bearings of objects, alignments and light sectors are given as seen from the vessel.
Courses always refer to the course to be made good over the ground.
Winds are described by the direction from which they blow.
Tidal streams and currents are described by the direction towards which they flow.
Distances are expressed in International Nautical Miles of 1852 m.
Depths are given below chart datum, except where otherwise stated.
Heights of objects refer to the height of the structure above the ground and are invariably expressed as '.. .m in
height'.
Elevations, as distinct from heights, are given above Mean High Water Springs or Mean Higher High Water
whichever is quoted in Admiralty Tide Tables, and expressed as, 'an elevation of.. .m'. However the elevation of
natural features such as hills may alternatively be expressed as '...m high' since in this case there can be no
confusion between elevation and height.
Metric units are used for all measurements of depths and short distances, but where feet/fathoms charts may
be referred to, these latter units are given in brackets after the metric values for depths shown on the chart.
Time is expressed in the four-figure notation beginning at midnight and is given in local time unless otherwise
stated. Details of local time kept will be found in Admiralty List of Radio Signals.
Conspicuous objects are natural and artificial marks which are outstanding, easily identifiable and clearly
visible to the mariner over a large area of sea in varying conditions of light. If the scale is large enough they will
normally be shown on the chart in bold capitals and may be marked 'conspic'.

Prominent objects are those which are easily identifiable, but do not justify being classified as conspicuous.
 ABBREVIATIONS

The following abbreviations are used in the text.

Units
°C degrees Celsius kw kilowatt(s)
dwt deadweight tonnage m metre(s)
fm fathom(s) mb millibar(s)
ft foot (feet) MHz megahertz
grt gross register tonnage mm millimetre(s)
hp horse power MW megawatt(s)
kHz kilohertz No ordinal number
km kilometre(s) nrt nett register tonnage
kn knot(s)

Directions
N north (northerly, northward, northern, S south
northernmost) SSW south-south-west
NNE north-north-east SW south-west
NE north-east WSW west-south-west
ENE east-north-east W west
E east WNW west-north-west
ESE east-south-east NW north-west
SE south-east NNW north-north-west
SSE south-south-east

Times
ETA estimated time of arrival UT Universal Time
ETD estimated time of departure UTC Co-ordinated Universal Time
GMT Greenwich Mean Time

Radio
DF direction finding HF high frequency
RT radio telephony VHF very high frequency
WT radio (wireless) telegraphy UHF ultra high frequency
LF low frequency Navtex Navigational Telex System
MF medium frequency

Vessels and cargo

Aux Y Auxiliary Yacht LNG Liquefied Natural Gas
HMS Her (His) Majesty's Ship LPG Liquefied Petroleum Gas
MV Motor Vessel POL Petroleum Oil Lubricant
MY Motor Yacht Ro-Ro Roll-on, Roll-off
RMS Royal Mail Ship ULCC Ultra Large Crude Carrier
SS Steamship VLCC Very Large Crude Carrier
LASH Lighter Aboard Ship

Tides
HW High Water MLHW Mean Lower High Water
LW Low Water MLWS Mean Low Water Springs
MSL Mean Sea Level MLWN Mean Low Water Neaps
MHWS Mean High Water Springs MLLW Mean Lower Low Water
MHWN Mean High Water Neaps MHLW Mean Higher Low Water
MHHW Mean Higher High Water HAT Highest Astronomical Tide
MHW Mean High Water LAT Lowest Astronomical Tide

Navigation
ODAS Ocean Data Acquisition System Satnav Satellite navigation
SBM Single buoy mooring Lanby Large automatic navigation buoy
SPM Single point mooring TSS Traffic Separation Scheme

XI
 ABBREVIATIONS (CONTD)

Organizations
IALA International Association of Lighthouse IMO International Maritime Organization
Authorities NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization
I HO International Hydrographic Organization RN Royal Navy

Rescue and distress

AMVER Automated Mutual Assistance Vessel SAR Search and Rescue
Rescue System
 LAWS AND REGULATIONS APPERTAINING
While, in the interest of the safety of shipping, the Hydrographic Department makes every endeavour to include in its
publication details of the laws and regulations of all countries appertaining to navigation, it must be clearly understood:
(a) That no liability whatever can be accepted for failure to publish details of any particular law or regulation, and
(b) that publication of the details of a law or regulation is solely for the safety and convenience of shipping and implies no
recognition of the validity of the law or regulation.
CHAPTER 1
PLANNING A PASSAGE
OCEAN PASSAGES FOR THE WORLD
20
1.1
Ocean Passages for the World is written for use in
planning deep-sea voyages. It contains notes on the
weather and other factors affecting passages, directions
for a number of selected commonly-used routes, and 25
distances by those routes.
Chapters 2-7 describe climatic conditions, and give
routes, with notes, recommended for power vessels for
the area with which each chapter deals.
Chapters 8-10 give the usual routes which were used 30
by sailing vessels, but see 8.1.1 before use, since these
routes have not be adjusted to reflect current regulations
and changed conditions.
The book should be used in conjunction with the
appropriate charts and publications mentioned below. 35
Routes
1.2
Power vessels have been regarded as of moderate
draught and belonging to three catgories: 40
(a) Full-powered, or able to maintain a sea-going speed
of 15 knots or more.
(b) Moderate-powered, or able to maintain a sea-going
speed of between 10 and 15 knots.
(c) Low-powered, having, or reduced by towing or 45
damage to, a sea-going speed of less than 10 knots.
The special requirements of ships drawing more than
12 m are not covered.
The routes given herein are mainly for vessels in
categories (b) and (c). Those in category (a) would, in 50
most instances, plan to take the shortest navigable route
between ports. Yet even such vessels would find, in
some cases, a considerable saving in wear and tear, in
time, and in fuel by following the routes given.
Routes for low-powered vessels are not shown on the 55
diagrams.
Directions
1.3
For each route, the directions, which have taken into 60
consideration all available experience from sea, offer a
guide for planning. Conditions, however, rarely being
precisely as predicted, the advice should be kept under
review in the light of existing circumstances.
65
Departure and Arrival Positions
1.4
Where distances are given for routes, they are
between positions used in Admiralty Distance Tables.
For a port or harbour, the position quoted is usually the 70
TO NAVIGATION
pilot ground or anchorage, and may be a considerable
distance from the named port itself.
Distances
1.5
The Figure of the Earth used for computing distances
is the International Spheroid.
Distances are given in International Nautical Miles of
1852 m to the nearest 10 miles for passages of more than
1000 miles and to the nearest 5 miles below that figure.
Radio Aids
1.6
Though most ocean-going ships are fitted with radar,
and many make use of radio facilities for position fixing,
routes in this book do not rely on such aids to navigation,
except where specifically stated.
Details and limitations of such radio facilities are
given in the following volumes of Admiralty List of
Radio Signals.
Volume 2. Radiobeacons, Radio Direction-finding
stations, Radio Lighthouses, Coast Radio Stations
providing QTG service, and Radar Beacons.
Volume 5. Decca, Consol, Loran, Omega and Satellite
Navigation Systems.
Gazetteer
1.7
The geographical positions of places and features named in
the text are given in the Gazetteer. The positions, except
Departure and Arrival Positions (1.4) are approximate and
only intended to assist in locating the place or feature on the
chart.
Index
1.8
Routes and other subjects in the book are given in the
Index.
Routes are listed under their place of departure. If the
starting position is a precise one, its latitude and
longitude are given.
CHARTS AND PUBLICATIONS
Routeing Charts
1.9
The series of Routeing Charts are an important aid to
passage planning. They show, month by month,
weather and ice conditions, ocean currents, load line
zones, and some recommended tracks and distances.
Limits of the charts are shown on Diagram (1.9).
 PLANNING A PASSAGE

(1.9) Limits of Routeing Charts

(1.11) Limits of Gnomonic Ocean Charts

 PLANNING A PASSAGE
Each chart is published in 12 versions, one for each
month of the year.
Ocean Charts
1.10
For the selection of suitable charts, which can be
obtained from Admiralty Charts Agents, Catalogue of
Admiralty Charts should be consulted. The Catalogue,
as well as Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to
Mariners, gives the addresses of all Admiralty Chart
Agents throughout the world.
It is emphasized that ocean charts are still mainly
based on sparse and inadequate sounding data obtained
from a wide variety of sources of varying reliability and
accuracy. Sounding coverage is best along well-
frequented routes, but even in these waters
undiscovered dangers may still exist, especially for
modern deep-draught vessels.
For further remarks on such dangers and for the
reliance to be placed on charts, see The Mariner's
Handbook.
Gnomonic Ocean Charts
1.11
For laying off great circle courses, Gnonomic Ocean
Charts are often convenient. The limits of those
published to cover the Atlantic, Indian and Pacific
Oceans are shown on Diagram (1.11).
Chart 5097 and 5098 of the North and South Pacific
Oceans are drawn with a greater range of latitude than
the gnomonic charts of the other oceans. By suitably re-
numbering the meridians of the Pacific Ocean charts,
they can be readily adapted for similar latitudes in other
oceans.
Chart 5029—Great Circle Diagram can also be used
for laying off great circle courses, particularly those
between positions outside the limits of the Gnomonic
Ocean Charts.
For the computing of positions for the laying off a
great circle course, see Admiralty Distance Tables.
Publications
1.12
For the coastal parts of the routes given herein, for
port arrival information, and for other information
affecting passages, the following publications should be
consulted.
Admiralty Sailing Directions give local
conditions, directions, regulations and port
information. Limits of the various volumes are shown
on the front end-papers of this book.
Admiralty List of Lights give details of navigational
lights and fog signals.
Many alterations to lights, especially those of a
temporary but operational nature, are promulgated only
as corrections to these volumes.
Admiralty Tide Tables give predictions of tidal
heights throughout the world, and of certain tidal
streams.
Tidal Stream Atlases give details of tidal streams in
the vicinity of the British Isles, and in certain other
localities.
Admiralty List of Radio Signals gives
comprehensive details of radio facilities available to the
Mariner including navigational warning and weather
services, radio position fixing facilities, and pilot and
port services.
Admiralty Distance Tables can conveniently be
used for comparing distances by different routes
through archipelagos or round land masses, and for
1.15
connecting distances by routes in Ocean Passages of the
World to other ports.
Admiralty Notices to Mariners should invariably
be consulted for recent, imminent and temporary
5 changes of navigational information. They can be
obtained gratis from Admiralty Chart Agents, see 1.10.
Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to
Mariners contains reprints of all Temporary and
Preliminary Notices affecting Admiralty charts and
10 corrections to Admiralty Sailing Directions, in force on
1st January of the year of publication. It also amplifies
information given on a number of subjects mentioned in
this book, and contains Annual Notices covering others
matters of interest to the mariner including:
15 List of Admiralty Charts Agents.
List of Ports where Admiralty Notices to Mariners
are available for consultation.
Distress and Rescue at Sea.
Territorial Waters and Fisheries Jurisdiction
20 Claims.
Information concerning Submarines.
The Mariner's Handbook gives general
information on the supply, upkeep and use of Admiralty
charts and publications, weather, ice, navigational
25 hazards, and other subjects.
Chart 5011 gives the meanings of all symbols and
abbreviations used on Admiralty charts.
30 NATURAL CONDITIONS
Climatic Conditions
1.13
World Climatic Conditions are shown on Diagrams
35 (1.13a) and (1.13b). The diagrams give the general
distribution of atmospheric pressure, wind, sea surface
temperature, fog, currents and ice. Their accompanying
notes should be read carefully.
The general principles of maritime meteorology, of
40 ocean surface current circulations, of the formation and
distribution of ice, and of the formation of fog are given
in The Mariner's Handbook. A more detailed treatment
is given in Meterology for Mariners, published by Her
Majesty's Stationery Office.
45 The climatic features of particular oceanic areas are
given at the beginning of the appropriate chapters in
Part I of this book.
Seasonal winds
50 1.14
Over certain parts of the oceans the general
distribution of pressure and winds, such as the Trade
Winds, is greatly modified by the seasonal heating and
cooling of adjacent large land masses. The result is a
55 seasonal reversal of the prevailing wind over the
adjacent oceans, known in low latitudes as 'Monsoons'.
The seasons of the principal Monsoons and their
typical strengths over the areas concerned are shown in
the Seasonal Wind/Monsoon Table (Table B).
60
Tropical Storms
1.15
Signs of Tropical Storms, their typical behaviour,
and precautions which can be taken to avoid them, are
65 described in the The Mariner's Handbook. For particular
areas, they are described in Admiralty Sailing
Directions.
The Tropical Storm Table (Table C) shows areas
usually affected and in .which period of the year storms
70 can be expected.
1.16 PLANNING A PASSAGE

Depressions Surface Current Distribution for the World for

1.16 November to March and May to September.
In middle latitudes, depressions which usually sweep It should be appreciated that the number of current
in an E direction across the oceans of the N and S observations available varies enormously, being greatest
hemispheres, are the dominant influence on the weather. 5 in the areas of the principal shipping routes. In other
Of immense power, they cover great areas of the oceans parts of the oceans, particularly in polar regions,
with uninterrupted winds of long duration, and build up observations are sparse.
extensive areas of high seas and heavy swell. They are an The diagrams show the Predominant Direction of the
important factor in deciding the route of a passage. currents.
10 1.19.1
Sea and Swell Predominant Direction is the mean direction of the
1.17 90° sector containing the greatest number of vector
Sea is the name given to waves in what is known as the representations of all the current observations in the
generating area where the wave are formed by the wind. area.
The following terms are used to describe the height of 75 1-19.2
sea waves. Constancy, as indicated by the thickness of the arrow
Height in metres on the diagrams, is a measure of the persistence of a
Calm—glassy 0 current. Low constancy, for example, implies marked
Calm—rippled 0-0.1 variability in rate, and, particularly, in direction.
Smooth wavelets 0.1-0.5 20 Change in currents is continuous and most marked in
Slight 0.5-1.25 tropical waters. Variability of direction occurs in the most
Moderate 1.25-2.5 constant currents, and in many other areas the predomi-
Rough 2.5^ nance of the indicated direction is often minimal.
Very rough 4—6 On average, over the greater part of the oceans the
High 6-9 25 proportion of current observations of less than j knot is
Very High 9-14 between 50 and 66 per cent.
Phenomenal Over 14 1.19.3
Parts of the world where the overall Predominant
1.17.1 Direction is relatively constant are shown in Diagrams
Swell is the wave motion caused by a meteorological 30 (1.19e) and (1.19j) as numbered areas. The mean of
disturbance, which persists after the disturbance has observations in these areas are shown as Current Roses
died down or moved away. Swell often travels for in Diagrams (1.19a-d and f-i).
considerable distances out of its generating area. Current Roses are derived from all available
The following terms are used to describe swell waves. observations of \ knot or more for the 5-month period in
35 the area depicted. They are considered to be
Length of wave Height of wave representative of the entire distribution throughout the
Short 0-100 m Low 0-2 m area concerned. In many cases little change is apparent
Average 100-200 m Moderate 2-4 m from winter to summer but in others almost complete
Long Over 200 m Heavy Over 4 m. reversals are evident.
40
1.17.2 Ice
Areas where rough seas or heavy swell can be expected 1.20
are shown on Diagrams (1.17a-d) which indicate the Ice limits and drift, and ice reporting services in
percentage frequency of waves equal to, or greater than particular areas are given at the beginning of the
3.5 and 6 m, for the different seasons. 45 appropriate chapters of this book.
Over recent years, with increasing availability of
Abnormal Waves information from satellites, it has become apparent that
1.18 the variability of ice extent from year to year is probably
Wherever sea or swell waves encounter a seabed rising much greater than was previously thought. There may
steeply from deep water, a strong opposing tidal stream 50 also be a tendency for some trends to continue for a
or current, or are reinforced by waves of another wave •number of years.
system, they may be distorted to form large abnormal
waves. Where waves are normally large, such abnormal Coral Waters
waves may be massive, steep-fronted, and capable of wreak- 1.21
ing severe structural damage to the largest of ships. 55 Coral reefs are often steep-to, and depths of more than
Places where abnormal waves have been reported, 200 m may be found within 1 cable of the edge of a reef.
usually near the 200 m depth contour at the steep edge of Soundings are therefore of little value as a warning of
a continental shelf, include: parts of the Norwegian Sea, their proximity. The soundings furthermore, shoal so
off the entrance to Chesapeake Bay, off the N W coast of rapidly that it is sometimes difficult to follow the echo
Spain, and off the SE coast of Africa. It is from off the SE 60 sounder trace, and the echo itself is often weak owing to
coast of Africa that most reports have been received and the steep bottom profile.
most research carried out on these waves. For further Navigation among coral reefs is therefore almost
information, see The Mariner's Handbook. entirely dependent upon the eye, and in oceans areas
where these reefs abound the greatest care is required.
Currents 65 Whenever possible, passage through the worst parts of
1.19 such areas should be made in daylight, and every
The principal currents of each ocean are described at precaution should be taken to keep an accurate check on
the beginning of the appropriate chapter of this book, the ship's position.
and in greater detail in Admiralty Sailing Directions. For additional information on navigation in coral
Diagrams (1.19e) and (1.19J) show the Predominant 70 waters, see The Mariner's Handbook.
 EXPLANATORY NOTES
GENERAL The information incorporated in this chart deals
with average, not actual, conditions and this is
therefore a Climatic, and not a Weather Chart.
Unless otherwise stated, the chart represents
the characteristic state of affairs for January
(approximately the height of the northern winter
and southern summer).
For detailed information about any particular
part of the world, reference should be made to the
appropriate Weather Handbooks, Climatic and
Current Atlases, Admiralty Pilots and Ice Charts.
PRESSURE
Pressure, like wind, is a variable quantity. On any
given day in January the actual pressures recorded
and the arrangement of the lines of equal pressure
(= isobars) may be quite different from those
shown on this chart. This is especially likely to be
the case with the "travelling Lows" (or depressions)
which usually move from West to East across the
temperate zone. The "Highs" (or anticyclones)
are much less mobile and their day-to-day variations
of pressure much smaller. This is the main reason
why the Trades, for instance, are steadier in force
and direction than the Westerlies of the North
Atlantic.
WINDS The arrows give a general picture of the prevailing
winds over the oceans. Where these winds are
unusually steady, as in the Trades, the arrows have
been strengthened: in such cases it can be assumed
that the winds blow in the direction indicated on
more than 2/3rds of all occasions. Where the
arrows are broken or omitted altogether, as in the
heart of the High and Low pressure areas, there
the winds are variable.
GALE FREQUENCY Gales and low pressures usually go together:
this is the main reason why they are mostly confined
to the extra-tropical depression zones of the world.
5-10 days/month
Winds of force 7 or more occur on more than
> 1 0 days/month 10 days a month in the darker-tinted areas. Such
winds occur on 5-10 days a month in the lighter-
tinted areas.
SWELL No attempt has been made to show the
distribution of swell, but it can be inferred broadly
from information on the chart. Low or moderate
swell is liable to occur to leeward of all the main
wind belts; there is, for instance, a persistent short
and low — at times moderate — swell along the
E. African coast during the N.E. monsoon. Heavy
swell is generally only produced in the extra-
tropical gale zones; however, in favourable circum-
stances it generates up to 3,000 miles beyond the
confines of these zones. These circumstances are
most likely to arise in the rear of the eastward-
moving depressions where, in the Northern
Hemisphere, the winds are N. Westerly and in the
Southern Hemisphere, S. Westerly. From this it
follows (i) that heavy swell is more likely to out-run
the gale zones on their tropical, than on their
poleward flanks, and (ii) that it is more likely to
be experienced in the eastern than in the western
sides of the oceans.
TROPICAL STORMS In low latitudes gales are almost entirely confined
to those areas frequented by tropical storms. In a
normal year the number of such storms seldom
exceeds two a month in any one area. In the
S Indian and S Pacific Oceans the cyclone season
usually lasts from December to April; in the South
Atlantic and north of the equator there are generally
no tropical storms in these months.
INTERTROPICAL The chart shows the mean monthly position of
CONVERGENCE the Intertropical Convergence Zone. The severity
ZONE of the weather near the Zone depends upon the
degree of wind convergence occuring there and
(EQUATORIAL TROUGH)
(DOLDRUMS) varies both in space and time from clear skies,
when there is no convergence, to squalls, with
heavy rain and thunderstorms, when the conver-
gence is marked.
CURRENTS Only the location and direction of the main
ocean currents are indicated. Except where the
winds are generally light and/or variable, as in the
vicinity of the Equatorial Counter Currents, there
is close agreement between the direction of the
current and that of the prevailing wind. A direct
result of this is that, according to whether the wind
blows from warmer to colder latitudes, or vice
versa, the surface water temperatures will be
above, or below, the average for the latitude. Some
idea of the relative warmth or coldness of the
currents is given by the extent to which the sea
isotherms in the vicinity of the current arrows
bend polewards or equatorwards respectively;
thus the Benguella Current is obviously cold, the
Agulhas Current warm.
SEA TEMPERATURE Unlike pressure and winds, the day-to-day
variation of sea temperature is very small; monthly
changes of more than I°-2°C are unusual, and
year-to-year departures from the mean monthly
value are of the same low order.
In the open ocean, and along leeward shores, sea
and air temperatures agree fairly closely (within I 0
or so); thus the February sea temperatures off
Scilly is approximately 9°-IO°C. and the average
air temperature for the same place 8°C. Along
windward shores, especially in high latitudes,
differences up to IO°-2O°C. are not uncommon.
Sometimes the air will be this much colder than
the sea (e.g. in high latitudes in winter); at others
(e.g. in summer along the west coast of S. Africa)
the sea will have the lower temperature.
FOG Sea fog is likely to form wherever warm air
passes over cold water; it is most likely to be
persistent where the sea isotherms lying athwart
at least 5 days/month the track of a wind blowing from warmer to colder
waters are packed closely together. Areas in
which sea fog may be encountered on at least 5 days
a month are indicated by a light stipple.
ICE Ice is about the most variable of all the elements
depicted on this chart. The year-to-year
fluctuations in the limit of pack-ice (or icebergs for
that matter) are often very considerable. For
instance, in some seasons Jan Mayen remains
almost completely ice-free; in others it cannot be
approached by a ship not specially strengthened,
until July. Icebergs (formed by the "calving" of
ice from continental ice-caps and valley glaciers)
are liable to be encountered beyond the pack-ice
limits at all seasons of the year, but mostly in early
summer. They melt fast once they have drifted
into comparatively warm water e.g. the Gulf
Stream.
NORTHERN HEMISPHERE
Mean limit of ^/8pack-ice at time of greatest extent
(March but February in Gulf of St Lawrence)
Approximate limit of Icebergs — October
to November (mean least extent)
SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE
Mean limit of 4/8 pack-ice at time of least extent
(February, March)
Extreme limit of iceberg sightings
(at all times of the year)
RAINFALL This is another uncertain quantity, and the
amount falling in a particular January may bear
little relation to the averages shown on the chart;
< 1"
especially is this the case with areas lying near the
1- 4" lower limit of the l"-4" zone. Over the oceans
the only habitually rainy areas are the Doldrums
4-8" and the storm (depression) belts of middle and
>8
high latitudes. The Trades and N.E. Monsoon
blowing, it will be noticed, off arid lands, are
practically rainless.
 EXPLANATORY NOTES

GENERAL The information incorporated in this c h a r t deals CURRENTS Only the location and direction of the main
with average, not actual, conditions and this is ocean currents are indicated. Except where the
therefore a Climatic, and not a Weather Chart. winds are generally light and/or variable, as in the
Unless otherwise stated, the chart represents vicinity of the Equatorial Counter Currents, there
t h e c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s t a t e o f affairs f o r J u l y ( a p p r o x i - is close agreement between the direction of the
mately the height of the northern summer and c u r r e n t and that of the prevailing wind. A direct
southern winter). result of this is that, according to w h e t h e r the w i n d
For detailed information about any particular blows from warmer to colder latitudes, or vice
part of the w o r l d , reference should be made to the versa, the surface water temperatures will be
appropriate Weather Handbooks, Climatic and above, or below, the average for the latitude. Some
C u r r e n t A t l a s e s , A d m i r a l t y Pilots and Ice C h a r t s . idea of the relative warmth or coldness of the
currents is given by the e x t e n t to which the sea
PRESSURE Pressure, like w i n d , is a variable quantity. On
isotherms in the vicinity of the current arrows
any given day in July t h e actual pressures r e c o r d e d
bend polewards or equatorwards respectively;
and t h e a r r a n g e m e n t of t h e lines of equal pressure
thus the Benguella C u r r e n t is obviously cold, the
(= isobars) may be quite different from those
Agulhas Current warm.
s h o w n on this chart. This is especially likely to be
t h e case w i t h t h e " t r a v e l l i n g L o w s " ( o r d e p r e s s i o n s ) SEA TEMPERATURE Unlike pressure and winds, the day-to-day
which usually move from West to East across t h e v a r i a t i o n of sea t e m p e r a t u r e is v e r y s m a l l ; m o n t h l y
temperate zone. The "Highs" (oranticyclones) are changes of more than I°-2°C. are unusual, and
m u c h less m o b i l e a n d t h e i r d a y - t o - d a y v a r i a t i o n s o f year-to-year departures from the mean monthly
pressure much smaller. This is the main reason value are of the same low order.
w h y the Trades, for instance, are steadier in force
In the open ocean, and along leeward shores,
and direction than the Westerlies of the North
sea and air t e m p e r a t u r e s a g r e e fairly closely ( w i t h i n
Atlantic.
l° or so); thus the August sea temperature off
WINDS T h e arrows give a general picture of the prevailing Scilly is a p p r o x i m a t e l y I 5 ° C - I 6 ° C . and t h e average

winds over the oceans. Where these winds are air temperature for the same place I7°C. Along

unusually steady, as in the Trades, t h e a r r o w s have windward shores, especially in high latitudes,

b e e n s t r e n g t h e n e d : i n s u c h cases i t can b e a s s u m e d differences up to IO°-2O°C. are not uncommon.

that the winds blow in the direction indicated on Sometimes the air will be this much colder than

more than 2/3rds of all occasions. Where the t h e sea ( e . g . in high latitudes in the w i n t e r h e m i -

arrows are broken or omitted altogether, as in the sphere); at others (e.g. in summer along Trade

heart of the High and Low pressure areas, there wind coasts) the sea will have the lower

the winds are variable. temperature.

GALE FREQUENCY Gales and low pressures usually go together: FOG Sea fog is likely to form wherever warm air
this is the main reason w h y they are mostly confined passes over cold water; it is most likely to be

5-10 days/month to the extra-tropical depression zones of the w o r l d . persistent where the sea isotherms lying athwart
Winds of force 7 or more occur on more than at least 5 days/month the track of a wind blowing from w a r m e r to colder
=•10 days/month 10 d a y s a m o n t h in t h e d a r k e r - t i n t e d areas. Such waters are packed closely together. Areas in
winds occur on 5 - I 0 days a month in the lighter- •>10 days/month which sea f o g may be encountered on 5 - I 0 days a
tinted areas. month are indicated by a light stipple; for 10-20
days a m o n t h areas are s h o w n by a d a r k e r stipple.
SWELL No attempt has been made to show the distri-
b u t i o n o f s w e l l , b u t i t can b e i n f e r r e d b r o a d l y f r o m iCF I c e i s a b o u t t h e m o s t v a r i a b l e o f all t h e e l e m e n t s
information on the chart. L o w or moderate swell depicted on this chart. The year-to-year
is liable to occur to leeward o f all the main wind fluctuations in t h e limit of pack-ice (or icebergs for
b e l t s ; t h e r e is, f o r i n s t a n c e , a p e r s i s t e n t m o d e r a t e — that matter) are often very considerable. For
at times heavy—swell along the N.W. coast of instance, in some seasons Jan Mayen remains
India during the S.W. monsoon. Heavy swell is almost completely ice-free; in others it cannot be
generally only produced in the extra-tropical gale approached by a ship not specially strengthened,
zones; however, in favourable circumstances it until July. Icebergs (formed by the "calving" of
penetrates up to 3,000 miles beyond the confines ice from continental ice-caps and valley glaciers)
of these zones. These circumstances are most are liable to be e n c o u n t e r e d beyond the pack-ice
likely to arise in t h e rear of the eastward-moving l i m i t s a t all seasons o f t h e y e a r , b u t m o s t l y in early
depressions where, in the Northern Hemisphere, summer. They m e l t fast once they have drifted
the winds are N o r t h W e s t e r l y and in the Southern into comparatively warm water e.g. the Gulf
Hemisphere, South Westerly. F r o m this it follows Stream.
(i) that heavy swell is more likely to out-run the NORTHERN HEMISPHERE
gale zones o n t h e i r t r o p i c a l , than o n t h e i r p o l e w a r d Mean limit of d 8 pack-ice at time of least extent
flanks; and (ii) that is m o r e likely to be experienced (September)
in the eastern than in t h e w e s t e r n side of the oceans. A p p r o x i m a t e limit of Icebergs— M a r c h to June
(mean greatest extent)
TROPICAL STORMS In low latitudes gales are almost entirely This does not include exceptional
confined to those areas frequented by tropical SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE sightings in E part of N Atlantic)
storms. In a normal year the number of such Mean limit of 4 <8pack-ice at time of greatest extent
storms seldom exceeds t w o a month in any one (September and October)

area. In the N Indian and N Pacific Oceans the Extreme limit of iceberg sightings
(at all times of the year)
cyclone season usually lasts from May to
December; in the N Atlantic from May to
November. South of the equator there are no RAINFALL This is another uncertain quantity, and the
tropical storms in these (winter) months. a m o u n t falling in a particular July may bear little
relation to the averages shown here; especially
INTERTROPICAL The chart shows the mean monthly position of < 1"
is this the case with areas lying near the lower
CONVERGENCE the Intertropical Convergence Zone. The severity 1-4" limit of the I"-4" zone. O v e r t h e oceans t h e only
Z O N E of the weather near the Zone depends upon the habitually rainy areas are the Doldrums and the
degree of wind convergence occuring there and 4-8' storm (depression) belts of the middle and high
(EQUATORIAL TROUGH)
(DOLDRUMS) varies both in space and time from clear skies, latitudes. The N.E. and S.E, Trades, blowing, it
>8"
when there is no convergence, to squalls, with will be noticed, off arid lands, are practically
heavy rain and thunderstorms, when the conver- rainless.
gence is m a r k e d .

Local Magnetic Anomalies
1.22
In parts of the oceans, particularly where volcanic
action has taken place, Local Magnetic Anomalies have
been reported.
For remarks on Local Magnetic Anomalies, see The
Mariner's Handbook, and for details of reports see
Admiralty Sailing Directions.
PASSAGE PLANNING
1.23
The selection of the best track for a passage demands
skilled evaluation of a number of factors, the principal of
which are the sea conditions, winds and currents which
it is expected to encounter, and the way the ship herself
in the particular circumstances will react to them. Such
factors as likelihood of damage to ship or cargo, as well as
fuel economy and time on passage will also need to be
considered. Some cargoes, such as that carried on deck
and livestock, are likely to be more susceptible to the
weather than others, and may therefore affect the choice
of route or speed.
Weather Routeing
1.24
Having planned the passage taking into account the
normal conditions, consideration should be given to the
actual conditions which it is expected will be
encountered.
With the aid of the latest weather forecasts, weather
maps and ice charts (2.25.1), a system of Weather
Routeing enables the original route to be modified to
make best use of the actual weather pattern and the
alterations taking placing in it. This will produce the
greatest economy in fuel expenditure and reduce the risk
of heavy weather damage to the ship and her cargo.
Weather Routeing Services are provided by the
Meteorological Office: details can be obtained from Ship
Routeing Service, Meterological Office HQ, London
Road, Bracknell, Berks RG12 2SZ. Certain other
government and consultancy firms provide similar
services.
The trained and experienced forecasters who operate
these services from a weather centre, if given details of
the ship's performance, can apply the latest weather
information and long range forecasts to determine the
best route for her. Then, while on passage,
modifications of the route can be passed to the vesel by
radio to enable her to take early action to avoid areas
where adverse conditions may develop, or to take
advantage of a route, possibly longer but offering more
favourable conditions.
Adequate Weather Routeing can often be carried out
on board by a competent weather forecaster if the ship is
on a regular run, able to receive the appropriate forecasts
and reports, and fitted with a facsimile recorder.
ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS
1.25
In addition to the uncertain changes of natural
conditions, consideration should be given to the
following matters.
Load Line Rules
1.26
The zones, areas and seasonal periods defined in
PLANNING A PASSAGE 1.30
Statutory Instrument 1968 No 1053—The Merchant
Shipping Load Line Rules, 1968, as amended, are shown
on Diagram (1.26).
The rules apply to all ships except ships of war, ships
5 engaged solely in fishing, and pleasure yachts.
Offshore Installations
1.27
In some parts of the world oil and gas fields are found
10 many miles offshore. The rigs, platforms, and associated
moorings, mooring buoys and pipelines, used in
operating the fields form hazards to navigation. Many of
the fields lie within Prohibited or Restricted Areas, and
most of the installations are protected by Safety Zones.
75 For descriptions of installations and Safety Zone
regulations, see The Mariner's Handbook and Annual
Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners.
20 Traffic Separation Schemes
1.28
Where mam shipping lanes converge to enter straits or
channels or to round headlands. Traffic Separation
Schemes have, in many places, been established.
25 All such Schemes are listed in Annual Summary of
Admiralty Notices to Mariners which indicates which
Schemes have been adopted by IMO; they are also
shown on appropriate charts and referred to in
Admiralty Sailing Directions. Rule 10 of International
30 Regulations for Preventing Collisions are Sea 1972 applies
to all IMO-adopted Schemes. Regulations for
unadopted Schemes are given in Admiralty Sailing
Directions.
In this book, reference is made to Traffic Separation
35 Schemes in waterways through which the routes
described pass, but not to those in the immediate
approaches to ports or inner coastal waters.
40 Areas to be Avoided
1.29
Areas which are to be avoided for various reasons have
been established in some parts of the world.
All such areas which are IMO-approved are shown on
45 Admiralty charts and described in Admiralty Sailing
Directions.
World Wide Navigational Warning Service
50 1.30
Navigational warning messages to give early
information of important incidents or changes which
may constitute a danger to navigation are promulgated
by the World Wide Navigational Warning Service. The
55 Service consists of three warning systems.
NAVAREA Warnings which are issued for each of
the 16 geographical areas which cover the sea areas of the
world. They normally provide sufficient information to
enable vessels to pass in safety through main shipping
SO lanes clear of the coast.
Coastal warnings which are used for information of
importance only in a particular region. They are
broadcast by the country concerned.
Local Warnings which usually refer to inshore
65 waters and do not carry information needed for ocean
passages. They are often issued by coastguards, port or
pilotage authorities.
For details of the Service, see Annual Summary of
Admiralty Notices to Mariners and Admiralty List of
70 Radio Signals Vol 5.
1.31 PLANNING A PASSAGE
Ship Reporting Systems
1.31
The purpose of such systems is to enable positions of
ships in oceanic areas to be maintained ashore to
facilitate search and rescue operations when they are
required. The systems also enable vessels responding to
distress calls to continue on their voyages with
minimum delay.
Ships of all nations are encouraged to participate in
these systems.
AMVER (Automated Mutual-assistance Vessel
Rescue System) is such a system, and is operated on a
world wide basis by the US Coast Guard. Certain other
countries operate somewhat similar systems for
particular areas off their coasts. For AMVER and some
of the systems, participation is voluntary, in others it is
mandatory.
For details of these systems, see Admiralty List of
Radio Signals Vol 1 and Annual Summary of Admiralty
Notices to Mariners.
Pollution of the Sea
1.32
10 International regulations concerning pollution of the
sea by oil or other substances are contained in
International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution
from Ships, 1973 (MARPOL 1973) as amended by the
Protocol of 1978, and known as MARPOL 73(78.
15 Details are given in The Mariner's Handbook.
 CHAPTER 2
NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
WINDS AND WEATHER
Intertropical Convergence Zone
2.1
In the North Atlantic Ocean, the belt of calms and
light variable winds, known as the Intertropical
Convergence Zone, Equatorial Trough or Doldrums,
which lies between the Trade Winds of the two
hemispheres remains N of the equator throughout the
year. Its mean positions for February and August
respectively, when it reaches its S and N limits, are
indicated on Diagrams (1.13a) and (1.13b). The actual
position is subject to much day-to-day variation, as is
also the width of the zone, which averages about 200 to
300 miles but may at times be reduced to almost nothing
by a strong burst of one or both Trade Winds.
There is evidence to show that showers, squalls, and
thunderstorms are more common within 200 to 300
miles from the African coast than in the W part of the
area.
Visibility in the Intertropical Convergence Zone is
invariably good except in rain.
South-west Monsoon
2.2
In summer, the intense heating of the land mass of N
Africa lowers the atmospheric pressure over that area
and distorts the Equatorial Trough towards N. The
South-east Trade Wind (3.1) is drawn across the
equator and is caused to veer by the earth's rotation, so
that it arrives off the W coast of Africa between the
equator and about 15° N, E of about 20° W, as a SW
wind which is known as the South-west Monsoon. This
monsoon, which is accompanied by cloudy weather and
considerable rainfall, lasts from about June to the
middle of October; the rainfall is heavy on the coast
between The Gambia and Liberia. Visibility is good at
this season except in rain.
During the rest of the year winds in this area are
mainly N between Liberia and Mauritania, but are
mostly from between S and W in the Gulf of Guinea; in
both cases they are generally light. Between November
and February a dry, dust laden E wind known as the
'Harmattan' occurs at times. Weather at this season is
generally fine, but visibility is often only moderate due
to haze, and it may become poor while the Harmattan is
blowing.
Towards the beginning and end of the rainy season,
that is in April and May, October and November,
violent thunderstorms accompanied by severe squalls,
generally from the E, occur at times near the coast.
These are known locally as 'Tornadoes', but they should
not be confused with the storms of that name which
occur in the interior of the United States and of
Australia, to which they bear no relation.
North-east Trade Wind
2.3
The North-east Trade Wind forms the SE and
equatorial sides of the clockwise circulation round the
oceanic anticyclone situated in about 30° N. This Trade
Wind belt extends from the African coast as far W as the
Caribbean Sea and the Gulf of Mexico, blowing from
the NNE on the E side of the ocean and from a little N of
E in the W part of the zone. The S limit of the North-
10 east Trade Wind is marked by the Intertropical
Convergence Zone. The winds blow permanently with
an average strength of force 4, though on rare occasions
they may increase to force 7 or decrease to force 2. In the
Gulf of Mexico (4.1) they are more variable both in
15 direction and strength; between October and April they
are sometimes interrupted in that area by strong or gale
force N winds known as 'Northers'.
In the NE part of the Trade Wind zone the weather is
generally fair or fine with small amounts of detached
20 cumulus and little or no rain. Cloud cover and showers
increase towards the Intertropical Convergence Zone
and towards the W part; in the latter area rain is
comparatively frequent, particularly in summer.
Haze occurs frequently in the E part of the Trade
25 Wind zone; it is caused by the dust or sand carried
seaward by the prevailing offshore wind. Sea fog forms
at times in the NE part of the zone over the cold water of
the Canary Current (2.15). In the W part of the zone,
visibility is good except in rain.
30
Variables (Horse Latitudes)
2.4
A belt of generally light and variable winds over the
oceanic area of high pressure extends across the ocean in
35 about 30° N, oscillating from about 28° N in winter to
32° N in summer. The predominant winds in this area,
E of about 20° W in winter and 30° W in summer, are
from between N and NE and form an extension of the
North-east Trade Winds, particularly in summer.
40 Weather in the E part of the zone is fine with little
cloud; in the W part there is more cloud, and rain is fairly
common. Visibility in the E part is often reduced by haze
and sometimes by fog for the reasons explained in article
2.3.
45
Hurricanes
2.5
Hurricanes occur in the W part of the North Atlantic
Ocean. They affect in particular the Caribbean Sea, the
50 Gulf of Mexico, Florida, the Bahamas, and Bermuda,
with the adjacent ocean areas. They occur from June to
November and sometimes in May and December, with
their greatest frequency from August to October.
More detailed information on storm frequencies will
55 be found in Admiralty Sailing Directions. Notes of
precursory signs and avoiding action are published in
The Mariner's Handbook.
Westerlies
60 2.6
The N part of the Atlantic Ocean experiences
predominantly unsettled weather on the polar side of the
oceanic anticyclone. As a result of the almost continuous
passage of depressions across this zone in an E or NE
65 direction, the wind varies greatly in both direction and
strength, and there is a high frequency of strong winds.
Gales are common, especially in winter. The stormiest
belt extends roughly from the vicinity of Newfoundland
to the channel between Iceland and Foroyar. The
70 central and E sections of this belt are especially stormy
15
2.7 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
and winds of force 7 and over may be expected on 16 to
20 days per month in January and February; in July,
which is the quietest month, the stormiest area remains
SW of Iceland but the frequency of winds of force 7 or
above is only about 7 days a month in it. Close to the
coasts of Greenland, Iceland, and Norway, katabatic
winds are common.
Fog and visibility
2.7
The frequencies of fog and poor visibility are
indicated on the Routeing Charts and the subject is
treated at length in the relevant Admiralty Sailing
Directions. In the region of the Westerlies, overcast
skies, with periods of rain or snow, alternate with brief
fine spells. Cloud amounts are generally large. The part
of the North Atlantic Ocean most affected by fog lies E
and S of Newfoundland.
In the vicinity of the coast between Long Island and
Nova Scotia, and the Newfoundland Banks, fog is very
prevalent in late spring and early summer, being due to
the movement of warm, moist air from S or SW over the
cold Labrador Current; over a large part of this area fog
is experienced on more than 10 days a month. It is also
liable to occur at times in other parts of this zone—
usually in spring and early summer and in association
with winds from between S and SW. Visibility is good
with NW winds, except in showers.
The North Polar regions
2.8
The greater part of the region lying on the polar side
of the Westerlies is denied to navigation on account of
ice. The prevailing wind is from some E point, though,
as in the case of the Westerlies, great variations in
direction and strength are caused by the passage of
depressions across the area. Gales are common, but less
so than in the Westerlies.
Weather is generally very cloudy, and precipitation,
usually in the form of snow, may occur at any time.
Fog, often of the arctic sea-smoke type, is prevalent in
summer.
Further information is published in Admiralty
Sailing Directions.
SWELL
Height and Direction
2.11
Between the equator and 30" N, frequencies of swell
greater than 4 m in height rarely exceed 2 to 4 per cent.
One of the most persistent swells is from NE, between
Islas Canarias and the NE coast of South America. In
the extreme SE, off Freetown, S and E swells prevail.
Between 30° and 40° N, frequencies of swell greater
than 4 m in height are: April, 10 per cent; May to
August, 5 to 10 per cent; September to November, 10
per cent; December to March, 20 per cent. The
predominant direction is from between W and NW.
Between 40° N and 60° N, frequencies of swell greater
than 4 m in height are: April, 20 per cent; May to July,
10 per cent; August and September, 20 per cent;
October to March, 30 per cent. In December and
January, a maximum of 40 per cent is reached in an area
centred on 55° N, 2,2° W. Throughout the year swell
comes mainly from between SW and NW, with swell
from W predominating.
Length of swell
2.12
Swell in the Atlantic Ocean is generally short (less
than 100 m) or average (100-200 m) in length. However,
long swells may be found from time to time, though they
are less frequent than in the Pacific Ocean.
CURRENTS
10
North and South Atlantic Oceans
2.14
The Atlantic Ocean is dominated in equatorial
regions by the semi-permanent N and S sub-tropical
15 anticyclones centred in latitudes 25°-3O° N and S
respectively.
Under the influence of the North-east and South-east
Trade Winds the respective clockwise circulation of the
N gyre and counter-clockwise circulation of the S gyre
20 ensure a steady transport of water to the W between
25° N and 25° S, the N and S boundaries varying by a
few degrees with the season. Just N of the equator a
counter-current sets to the E between the North and
South Equatorial Currents over a narrow latitude band
25 for part of each year.
Polewards and across the belt of variable winds near
the centre of the gyres weaker E-going flows are
generated under the influence of W winds blowing
around the Icelandic and Sub-Antarctic low pressure
30 belts. Again, in both hemispheres, there is a weak return
flow to the W adjacent to the land masses in polar
latitudes.
North Atlantic Ocean
35 2.15
The North Equatorial Current setting W to the S of
the main sub-tropical gyre provides a continuous supply
of warm water into the Caribbean Sea and Gulf of
Mexico. This is supplemented through the year by a S
40 equatorial flow that has crossed the equator, and been
diverted to the WNW by the prominent NE coast of
Brazil. However, from May to November a good deal of
this water turns E into the Equatorial Counter-current,
which then splits, some continuing E, the rest turning
45 back NW to join the North Equatorial Current. In the N
winter an anticlockwise circulation develops at about
7° N, 47° W, probably because of interaction between
the North Equatorial Current and a weakened
Equatorial Counter-current. The WNW-going sets
50 along the Brazilian coast are of large constancy with
average rates of between 2 and 3 knots.
The combination of warm surface waters and a steady
inflow into the Gulf of Mexico allows a noticeable 'head
of water' to develop. The resulting outflow through the
55 Straits of Florida is further enhanced by recurving
equatorial waters being topographically accelerated
through Old Bahama Channel onto its E flank. This
combined flow is initially named the Florida Current
and later the Gulf Stream. Average rates in the highly
60 constant main stream reach 3-3^ knots during the
summer months between 25° N and 30° N at 78°-80° W.
Rates decrease to the N to near 1J knots in the vicinity of
Cape Hatteras where the current commences to turn
away from the shore and set in a broad' E to ENE
65 direction towards W Europe. In this general area, to the
NE of Cape Hatteras and S of Newfoundland, the
current is joined on its W flank by cooler water that has
originated in the N part of Baffin Bay and steadily moved
S gathering melt water from the Canadian mainland and
70 island coasts. South of Newfoundland more fresh and
 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
cool water from the Gulf of Saint Lawrence adds to the
formation of a marked temperature discontinuity both
at the surface and at depth as the cold and warm currents
converge. The cold Labrador Current is turned through
S to E on the N side of the warmer Gulf Stream. The
combined flow then continues ENE at a reduced rate
and greater variability as the North Atlantic Current.
Approaching the coasts of W Europe the S part of the
flow is turned gradually through SE to S and the N part
continues to the W of the British Isles and on to the N
coast of Norway and the Arctic basin. The relatively
weak but general S-going drift E of 30° W and between
25° N and 45° N is known as the Azores Current in the
W, the Portugal Current off the Iberian coast and the
Canary Current in the SE. Average rates are \-\ of a
knot and constancies low, increasing to moderate or
more in the Canary Current.
The N part of the North Atlantic Current continues
towards Iceland but to the SW of the island part is
turned NW as the relatively warm Irminger Current.
The W part forms a weak counter-clockwise eddy
between S Greenland and Iceland and the E part
continues clockwise around Iceland rejoining the NE-
setting North Atlantic Current. There is a diffuse
counter-clockwise circulation between the N coast of
Norway, Spitsbergen and NE Greenland. This is
complex and probably consists of a number of minor
eddies formed along the boundary between the
predominant warm N Atlantic water in the SE and the
cold outflow from the Arctic basin in the N and W.
To the NW of Norway the warm N-setting current
diverges, part passing to the W of Spitsbergen and part
continuing around Nordkapp, into the S part of the
Barents Sea and along the W coast of Novaya Zemlya.
As the warm more saline water meets the colder fresh
Arctic water it sinks but continues into the Arctic basin
as a sub-surface warm current.
The East Greenland Current emerges from the Arctic
as an extension of the Transpolar Drift and continues
SSW, the cold temperature being maintained by melt
water from the ice edge, glaciers and fjords. Rates are
mostly near \ knot but increase to near 1 knot at times
during the summer months, particularly S of Denmark
Strait. Currents are mostly variable in the central
regions of the main gyres and of near moderate
constancy along the E coast of Greenland. Off Kap
Farvel the combined East Greenland and recurving
Irminger Currents turn N along the SW coast of
Greenland. The circulation in Davis Strait and Baffin
Bay is broadly counter-clockwise with a tendency for a
N and S gyre. The strongest of these generally weak
currents are on the W side. Farther S the flow becomes
more organised continuing SSE as the Labrador
Current thus completing the gyre.
Equatorial Counter-current
2.16
South of about 10° N the currents are more complex
and show a marked seasonal variation. Lying between
the North and South Equatorial Currents, which both
set W, the E-setting Equatorial Counter-current
fluctuates throughout the year. It is a minimum during
March and April when there is little evidence of any E-
going sets in the W, and it is only evident from 20° W in
the E. During the late spring a small area of E-going sets
appears off the NE coast of Brazil between the equator
and about 4° N. This gradually moves NW and expands
E over the following few months emerging with an
extension to the W of the Guinea Current. By the late
2.18
summer and early autumn the Counter-current is at its
maximum extent from near 50° W to its confluence with
the Guinea Current in 20° W. During November and
December the Equatorial Currents tend to merge near
30° W. A slow contraction of both the E and W sections
of the Counter-current takes place over the following
months to the spring minimum. Constancies in the
Counter-current are mostly moderate or high and
average rates are between 1 and \\ knots. The width of
10 the Counter-current varies continuously but is usually
between 4° and 6° of latitude and is centred at about
7°N.
15 Newfoundland Banks
2.17
After passing the Strait of Belle Isle and the E coast of
Newfoundland, the Labrador Current covers the whole
of the Grand Banks except, during summer, the extreme
20 S part. A large branch of the current follows the E edge
of the bank; this is the part which carries ice farthest S to
reach the transatlantic shipping routes. Another branch
rounds Cape Race and sets SW. Although some of the
water that has passed on to the Grand Banks continues
25 in a more S direction, especially during August to
October, the bulk of it sets SW and continues, as a SW-
going set, to fill the region between Newfoundland,
Nova Scotia, and the Gulf Stream.
The Labrador Current subsequently continues S
30 along the coast of the United States as a cold current as
far as about 36° N from November to January, 37° N
from February to April, 38° N from May to July, and
40° N from August to October. Between the S limit of
the Labrador Current and the Tail of the Bank, the
35 warm and cold waters converge on a line which is known
as the 'Northern Edge' (or sometimes the North Wall) of
the Gulf Stream.
The E end of the Northern Edge presents the greatest
hydrographic contrasts to be found in the world, the
40 water changing from the olive or bottle green of the
Arctic side to the indigo blue of the Gulf Stream: a
temperature change of 12° C to 0° C has been recorded
within a ship's length.
The currents off the coasts of Labrador and
45 Newfoundland are complex; for details, reference
should be made to Admiralty Sailing Directions.
North Sea
50 2.18
A branch of the North Atlantic Current diverges from
the main flow NE of the Shetland Isles and flows S,
fanning out E towards the S part of Skagerrak, along the
E coasts of Britain as far as the Thames estuary. It is
55 there joined by a branch of the North Atlantic Current
which passes through the English Channel and the
Strait of Dover, the combined currents then flowing
along the Netherlands and Jutland coasts. This current
then flows round Skagerrak in a counter-clockwise
60 direction and finally sets N along the W coast of
Norway.
The outflow from the North Sea forms the Norwegian
Coastal Current and is probabaly the most constant part
of the circulation. In about 62° N this current rejoins the
65 main branch of the North Atlantic Current flowing
towards Nordkapp.
In most parts of the North Sea, except in Skagerrak,
these currents are small and mostly insignificant to
navigation compared with the predominant tidal
70 influence and the effect of wind drift currents.
17
2.19 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
Western approaches to English Channel.
2.19
After SW or W gales, a set towards the mouth of the
Channel may be expected, at a rate depending on the
locality, strength, and duration of the gale. In winter,
sets of up to 1J knots are sometimes recorded, mainly in
directions between ENE and SE, but the tidal streams
are responsible for most of the water movement within
the 200 m line.
Bay of Biscay
2.20
Off the mouth of the Bay of Biscay the current is
trending SE and S to form the beginning of the Portugal
Current (2.15). A branch enters the bay and recurves W
along the N coast of Spain, but over most of the bay the
currents are highly variable with a tendency for
directions between E and S to predominate. The speeds
for the most part do not exceed 1 knot and very rarely
reach 2 knots.
Following W or NW gales E-going sets occur off the
N coast of Spain, sometimes attaining a rate of 3 knots
off Bilbao and 4—5 knots at the head of the bay
particularly when current and tidal stream are in the
same direction.
ICE
General remarks
2.25
The following brief account of ice in the North
Atlantic Ocean is by no means comprehensive. Before
undertaking voyages through areas in which ice is likely
to be met, The Mariner's Handbook and the relevant
Admiralty Sailing Directions should be studied, as well
as the monthly Routeing Charts, which show the ice
limits. These limits are also shown approximately on
Diagrams (1.13a) and (1.13b), but they may not always
agree with the Routeing Charts which endeavour to
show the extreme limits on a monthly basis as far as this
is possible with the limited and variable data available.
2.25.1
Five-day Ice Charts, obtainable from the Director
General, Meteorological Office, Met.O.la(l),
Headquarters Annexe, Eastern Road, Bracknell, Berks,
RG12 2UR should also be studied.
Facsimile broadcasts of ice charts are also available, as
set out in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Vol 5.
A factor always to be borne in mind where ice
conditions are concerned is their great variability. For
this reason, and on account of the sparsity of
observations in many areas, the charted positions of ice
limits must be regarded as approximate. The dates
which follow refer to average conditions.
Ice limits and drift
2.26
The Routeing Charts show the influence of the ocean
currents (2.15 and 2.17) in setting the pack ice over
much of the area of the Grand Banks of Newfoundland
from the latter part of January until May, while the E
part of the ocean remains ice-free to high latitudes.
Almost all the icebergs which menace the North
Atlantic routes originate in the glaciers of the W coast of
Greenland where they are calved at a rate of several
thousand a year. Most are carried N by the West
Greenland Current, round the head of Baffin Bay, and
then S by the Canadian and Labrador Currents, and
when they finally reach the shipping routes they may be
several years old. The bergs calved on the E coast of
Greenland also drift S, and may be met off Kap Farvel.
Some drift across the East Greenland Current and may
be met throughout the year on the E flank of that
current, extending SW from the W extremity of Iceland.
Others drift round Kap Farvel, but they do not survive
the relatively warm water of Davis Strait and are not a
source of danger on the regular transatlantic routes.
Icebergs may be found beyond the limits of the pack ice
at all seasons, but mostly in early summer; in winter
10 many are frozen into the pack ice.
Ice in specific localities
2.27
Kap Farvel. The greatest distance at which bergs are
15 met S of Kap Farvel is generally about 120 miles. This
usually occurs in May when they may be encountered as
far E as 66° N, 32° W. Their least extent is in December.
Bergs are not usually met S of 48° N between September
and December, but may be encountered in any month N
20 of 52° N.
2.27.1
Saint Lawrence River below Montreal is closed by
ice between early December and mid-April.
Commercial navigation ceases in most parts of the Gulf
25 of Saint Lawrence by mid-December; in the S part,
navigation is not considered safe between early
December and mid-April.
2.27.2
Strait of Belle Isle is generally not navigable from
30 late December until June.
2.27.3
Cabot Strait is usually navigable from mid-April
until February. Pack ice arrives from N off Cape Race
about the end of January in an ordinary season,
35 extending round the coasts of the Avalon Peninsula in
February, until early May.
2.27.4
The Grand Banks of Newfoundland are entirely
free of pack ice between July and December inclusive.
40 Pack ice reaches the banks in January and extends
farthest S in March and April, on the E edge of the
banks. In very rare seasons, dangerous pack ice may
extend to the Tail of the Bank and even S of it but, on
average, the floes begin to break up on reaching 45° N.
45 In the region of the Grand Banks, the worst season for
icebergs is between March and July, with April, May
and June as the months of greatest frequency. Bergs are
not often found S of 40° N or E of 40° W, though
occasionally they may be considerably outside these
50 limits. They are particularly prevelant around the E
flank of the banks, on which many of them ground. More
detail is given in Admiralty Sailing Directions.
2.27.5
Denmark Strait is normally free of ice on its E side
55 throughout the year, but on rare occasions, as in the
spring of 1968, the ice spreads across from Greenland to
close the strait. Icebergs may be met throughout the year
on both sides of Denmark Strait.
2.27.6
60 White Sea is normally closed to navigation from
about mid-December to mid-May.
2.27.7
Kol'skiy Zaliv. The N part remains open throughout
the year but, from December to April ice forms along
65 the shore and at times breaks away, to be carried out to
sea. It may be a hindrance for three or four days at a time
in exceptionally cold winters.
2.27.8
Norwegian coast. None of the main ports on the W
70 coast is ever closed by ice, and the closure of Oslo is rare.
 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
2.27.9
North Sea. Serious ice conditions in the entrances to
German, Netherlands and Danish ports, lasting from 1
to 4 weeks, occur about two or three times in ten years at
some time between mid-January and early March.
Ice Information Services
2.28
Ice information, comprising up-to-date reports and
forecasts from Gulf of Saint Lawrence, the Grand
Banks of Newfoundland, Greenland, Iceland and the
NW approaches to Europe are transmitted from the
coast radio stations listed in Admiralty List of Radio
Signals Vol 5, and can be obtained from the
Meteorological Office, Met.O.la(l), Headquarters
Annexe, Eastern Road, Bracknell, Berks, RG12 2UR.
International Ice Patrol is operated by the US
Coast Guard with the primary object of collecting data
and warning shipping of the amount and extent of
icebergs and sea ice in the vicinity of the Grand Banks.
The service operates principally between the parallels of
39° and 50° N and the meridians of 42° and 60° W during
the ice season from February or March until about the
end of June.
In spite of the efforts of the International Ice Patrol
bergs are known to drift unnoticed into the usual routes
in the vicinity of the Grand Banks. For details of the
International Ice Patrol, see Admiralty Sailing
Directions and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Vol 5.
Ice Advisory Service, maintained by the Canadian
Coast Guard during the winter navigational season, is
based on aerial reconnaissance. Reports of existing and
forecast ice conditions are broadcast from certain
Canadian radio stations. For details of the service, see
Admiralty Sailing Directions and Admiralty List of
Radio Signals Vol 5. Ice Navigation in Canadian Waters,
issued by the Canadian Coast Guard, should also be
consulted.
2.28.1
Caution. Carefully conducted tests by the
International Ice Patrol have shown that radar cannot
provide positive assurance for iceberg detection.
Seawater is a better reflector than ice. This means that
unless a berg or growler is observed outside the area of
'sea return' or 'clutter' it will not be detected by radar.
The average range of detection of a dangerous growler, if
detected, is only 4 miles.
Radar is a valuable aid, but its use cannot replace the
traditional caution exercised during a passage passing
near the Grand Banks during the ice season.
NOTES AND CAUTIONS
Ocean Weather Ships
2.30
Certain services to shipping are provided by Ocean
Weather Ships stationed in the North Atlantic Ocean.
See Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners.
Western approaches to the English Channel
2.31
When navigating in these waters it is essential to
assess the surface drift current caused by lately
prevailing winds as well as the present winds. See 2.19
and Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Traffic Separation Schemes (1.28) have been
established in the English Channel and its approaches,
and off Fastnet Rock.
Chart 5500—Mariners' Routeing Guide—English
2.36
Channel and Southern North Sea, displays much
information useful for passage planning, routeing and
radio and pilotage services in the area it covers.
He d'Ouessant
2.32
Mariners approaching lie d'Ouessanat Traffic
Separation Scheme (1.28) must guard against the
danger of being set E of their reckoning. Unless certain
10 of the position, this scheme should be given a wide berth
and a depth exceeding 110 m maintained.
Bay of Biscay and West coasts of Spain and
Portugal
15 2.33
There may be a strong E-going set off the N coast of
Spain after a W or NW gale (2.20).
An onshore wind brings cloud that develops into fog
or thick mist when it reaches the elevated land at both
20 the N and S points of the Bay of Biscay.
Traffic Separation Schemes (1.28) have been
established off Berlenga, Cabo de Roca and Cabo de
Sao Vicente
25 Strait of Gibraltar
2.34
In thick weather, when approaching the Strait from
the Atlantic Ocean, soundings should be taken until the
position is certain. Caution is necessary since the
30 currents, tidal streams and eddies between Cabo de Sao
Vicente and Isla de Tarifa are very variable. In the Strait
itself with a strong W wind, the flow of water (the
resultant of tidal stream and current) is liable to reach a
rate of 6 knots.
35 A Traffic Separation Scheme has been established in
the Strait.
Strait of Belle Isle
2.35
40
Approaching from the E in low visibility, soundings
on the banks E of Newfoundland and Labrador will be
found of great assistance if not certain of the position.
A Traffic Separation Scheme (1.28) has been
established in the Strait.
45
Newfoundland coasts
2.36
Fog is exceedingly prevalent off the S coast of
Newfoundland, especially in summer. The set of the
SO current and the indraughts into the deep bays,
particularly on their E sides, should be guarded against.
Approaching from the E in thick weather,
radiobeacons on the E coast of Newfoundland or other
radio aids, and soundings over the Grand Banks and
55 Ballard Bank should indicate the position with enough
accuracy to round Cape Race in safety.
Although the current between the Grand Banks and
Newfoundland ordinarily sets SW at a rate which may
slightly exceed 1 knot, it is not unusual, particularly for a
60 short period before a gale, for the current to be so
disturbed as to set across its ordinary direction or even to
be reversed on the surface. Close inshore, it is affected
by the tidal steams.
The currents between Cape Race and Saint Pierre are
65 irregular, with a greatest rate of 1 knot, and are
influenced by the wind, and, near the shore, by the tidal
streams. See Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Approaching from the W, Cape Pine and Cape Race
should not be closed in depths of less than 55 m unless
70 certain of the position.
19
2.37 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN

Grand Banks of Newfoundland banks of Newfoundland N of 43° N and to pass outside

2.37
The principal shipping routes from N European ports
toportsontheE coast of the U S, and to the Gulf of Saint
Lawrence through Cabot Strait, lead over or near the
Grand Banks.
They are among the busiest routes in the world. At the
same time they are amongst the most dangerous.
Icebergs, growlers and pack ice are common in this
region notorious for the frequency and density of its
fogs. Many depressions pass close to the area so that
gales are frequent and severe. In addition, many fishing
vessels are found throughout the year on the Grand
Banks, as well as vessels and platforms used to exploit
oil, gas and mineral deposits.
In view of these hazards the International Convention
for the Safety of Life at Sea, (1974) advises that all ships
proceeding on voyages in the vicinity of the Grand
Banks should avoid as far as practicable, the fishing
regions known or believed to be endangered by ice.
The International Ice Patrol Service also advises
against venturing into pack ice N of 45°30' N before the
5 middle of April.
Bermuda
2.38
Extreme caution is necessary in the vicinity of
10 Bermuda due to the extensive and dangerous fringing
reefs, skirted on their N and W sides by an Area to be
Avoided by certain ships: see Admiralty Sailing
Directions.
15 Penedos de Sao Pedro e Sao Paolo and Ilha
de Fernando de Noronha
2.39
When approaching these islets caution is necessary as
the South Equatorial Current sets to the WNW past
20 them at a rate of 1-2 knots.

ROUTES TO AND FROM KAP FARVEL AND DAVIS STRAIT

Davis Strait 2.49.1

2.46 For Trondheim, the route passes between Iceland
For directions and ice conditions in Davis Strait, and Foroyar to the pilot ground in Gripholen, thence
Hudson Strait and Hudson Bay, see Admiralty Sailing 30 through Indreleia.
Directions. For Ice Advisory Service, see 2.28. 2.49.2
For Bergen, the route passes between Foroyar and
Kap Farvel Shetland Isles.
2.47 2.49.3
In view of weather and ice conditions off the coast of 35 For Lindesnes, the route passes between Fair Isle
Greenland, see Admiralty Sailing Directions, the routes and Orkney Islands.
which follow are taken from 58° 30' N, 44° 00' W, about 2.49.4
75 miles S of Kap Farvel. Oil and gas fields, with platforms, drilling rigs, and
associated pipelines and buoyage, are situated in the
Kap Farvel <-> Nordkapp 40 North Sea and extend as far N as the 200-m depth
2.48 contour.
Diagram (2.48) 2.49.5
The hazards of navigation in high latitudes are Distances: Trondheim 1590 miles;
described in The Mariner's Handbook. For remarks on Bergen 1490 miles;
Ice, see 2.25-2.27. 45 Lindesnes 1580 miles.
The directive force of the earth's magnetic field is
weak, and values of the magnetic variation change Kap Farvel <-> British Isles, Biscay and
rapidly along this and other routes from Kap Farvel. northern Spanish ports
Furthermore, local magnetic anomalies have been 2.50
reported in the vicinities of Jan Mayen and Iceland, 50 Diagrams (2.48), and (2.50) for La Gironde and Vigo.
particularly in depths of less than 135 m, and off the For information on W approaches to English
Norwegian coast. Channel, lie d'Ouessant, Bay of Biscay and W coasts of
2.48.1 Spain and Portugal, see 2.31-2.33.
The route from Kap Farvel is by great circle, passing Routes (see 2.47) are by great circles, but ships for
through Denmark Strait and 30 miles Sof Jan Mayen, to 55 Biscay ports should pass at least 10 miles SW of
Nordkapp. Chaussee de Sein.
2.48.2 2.50.1
If Denmark Strait is not navigable, passage must be Distances: Cape Wrath 1210 miles;
made S of Iceland, by great circle from Kap Farvel to Inishtrahull 1200 miles;
63° 20' N, 16° 00' W, thence by great circle. 60 Fastnet Rock 1250 miles;
2.48.3 Bishop Rock 1400 miles;
Distances: N of Iceland 1810 miles; La Gironde* 1710 miles;
S of Iceland 1910 miles. Vigo 1640 miles;
* 70 miles from Bordeaux.
Kap Farvel <-> West coast of Norway and 65
North Sea Davis and Hudson Straits <-> European ports
2.49 2.51
Diagram (2.48) Diagram (2.50)
From Kap Farvel (see 2.47) routes are as direct as From the N and E parts of Davis Strait, routes are as
navigation permits. 70 navigation permits to the position S of Kap Farvel
2.51.1 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN

(58°30'N, 44°00'W), thence as at 2.48-2.50 to For information on W coasts of Spain and Portugal
destination. and Strait of Gibraltar, see 2.33 and 2.34.
2.51.1 2.51.2
From Hudson Strait (61° 00' N, 64° 50' W): Distances from Hudson Strait:
For places N of Leixoes, routes are by great circle to Kap Farvel (58° 30' N, 44° 00' W) 650 miles;
Kap Farvel (58° 30' N, 44° 00'W), thence as at Places N of Leixoes: Add 650 miles to distances in
2.48-2.50. 2.48-2.50.
For Leixoes and Lisboa, routes are direct by great Leixoes 2340 miles;
circle. Lisboa 2440 miles
For Strait of Gibraltar, the route is by great circle to 10 Strait of Gibraltarf 2720 miles.
Cabo de Sao Vicente, thence as navigation permits to the
Strait. t 6 miles S of Europa Point.

ROUTES TO AND FROM STRAIT OF BELLE ISLE

Strait of Belle Isle—References 2.54.2

2.52 20 To Bergen, great circle passing between Foroyar and
Ice, see 2.27 and 2.28. Shetland Isles.
East approach to Strait of Belle Isle, see 2.35. 2.54.3
For Lindesnes, great circle passing between Fair Isle
and Orkney Islands.
Strait of B e l l e I s l e <-> N o r d k a p p 25 2.54.4
2.53 For warning of North Sea oil and gas fields, see 2.49.4.
Diagrams (2.50), and (2.48) for Nordkapp 2.54.5
The route from Strait of Belle Isle is through Distances: Trondheim 2160 miles;
58° 30' N, 44° 00' W, thence as at 2.48.1. Bergen 2050 miles;
2.53.1 30 Lindesnes 2140 miles.
If Denmark Strait is not navigable, passage must be
made S of Iceland, by great circle from Strait of Belle
Isle to 63° 20' N, 16° 00' W, thence by great circle to Strait of Belle Isle <-> British Isles and
Nordkapp. Biscay ports
2.53.2 35 2.55
Distances: N of Iceland 2390 miles; Diagram (2.50)
S of Iceland 2490 miles. For information on W approaches to the English
Channel and on Bay of Biscay, see 2.31-2.33.
Routes are by great circle to destination.
Strait of Belle Isle <-> West coast of Norway 40 2.55.1
and North Sea Distances: Cape Wrath 1760 miles;
2.54 Inishtrahull 1720 miles;
Diagram (2.50) Fastnet 1710 miles;
From Strait of Belle Isle, routes are as follows. Bishop Rock 1860 miles;
2.54.1 45 La Gironde* 2150 miles.
For Trondheim great circle to the pilot ground in
Griphelen, thence through Indreleia. • 70 miles from Bordeaux.

ROUTES TO AND FROM ST JOHN'S HARBOUR, NEWFOUNDLAND

References 55 by great circle to a position off Cabo de Sao Vicente,

2.57 thence as navigation permits.
Ice, see 2.27 and 2.28. 2.58.1
Western approaches to the English Channel, see
2.31. Distances: Cape Wrath 1800 miles;
lie d'Ouessant, see 2.32. 60 Inishtrahull 1730 miles;
Bay of Biscay and W coasts of Spain anad Portugal, Fastnet 1680 miles;
see 2.33. Bishop Rock 1810 miles;
Strait of Gibraltar, see 2.34. La Gironde* 2080 miles;
Coast of Newfoundland, see 2.36. Vigo 1870 miles;
65 Lisboa 1950 miles;
St John's Harbour «-> Places between Cape Strait of
Wrath and Strait of Gibraltar Gibraltarf 2220 miles;
2.58
Diagrams (2.50) • 70 miles from Bordeaux.
Routes are by great circle, that to Strait of Gibraltar 70 t 6 miles S of Europa Point.
 2.62 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN

ROUTES BETWEEN CABOT STRAIT OR NORTH AMERICAN PORTS AND EUROPE

References 5 2.63.1
2.62 To Trondheim. Great circle to 61° 14' N, 6° 40' W
Traffic Separation Schemes, see 1.28. (10 miles S of Foroyar), thence rhumb line to the pilot
Weather Routeing, see 1.24. ground in Gripholen, thence through Indreleia.
Ice, see 2.25-2.28. 2.63.2
Western approaches to the English Channel, see 10 To Bergen. Great circle to a landfall on Sumburgh
2.31. Head, thence as navigation permits.
lie d'Ouessant, 2.32. 2.63.3
Bay of Biscay and W coasts of Spain and Portugal, To Cape Wrath. Great circle to 57° 50' N, 18° 00' W,
see 2.33. thence direct.
Strait of Gibraltar, see 2.34. 15 2.63.4
Newfoundland coasts, see 2.36. To places S of Cape Wrath. Great circle to
Grand Banks of Newfoundland, see 2.37. destination.
Distances, see 2.67.

20
Routes between North American ports and
Departure Positions
2.62.1
Diagram (2.63)
Recommended routes between Cabot Strait, Halifax 25
or the N part of the E coast of the United States and
Europe skirt the S side of the Grand Banks, passing
through, or S of, Position BS, 42° 30' N, 50° 00' W, to
avoid the hazards of crossing the Grand Banks (2.37).
There are alternative routes to or from Biscay ports 30
and places farther N, passing 20 miles S of Cape Race.
They are usable between May and November.
In recommending routes to and from ports SW of
Cape Race, account must be taken of the seasonal
movement of ice in the Grand Banks area (2.27.4). It can 35
never be assumed that a particular route will be clear of
ice; constant study of ice reports, and the utmost
vigilance at sea, are essential.
2.62.2
From Cabot Strait, routes from the Traffic 40
Separation Scheme (1.28) are either S of the Grand
Banks to Position BS, or along the S coast of
Newfoundland to Cape Race.
2.62.3
From Halifax, routes are either through 43° 00' N, 45
60° 00' W (50 miles S of Sable Island) to Position BS, or
direct to Cape Race.
2.62.4
From Boston, routes are direct to either Position BS
or Cape Race. 50
2.62.5
From places between Boston and Chesapeake
Bay, routes are either direct to Position BS, or to
43° 00' N, 60° 00' W and thence to Cape Race. Routes
from New York and its vicinity pass S of Nantucket 55
Lanby.
From Chesapeake Bay to Strait of Gibraltar, the route
is by great circle to Cabo de Sao Vicente, passing S of
Position BS, thence as navigation permits.
60
Position BS <-> Europe
2.63
Diagrams (2.63), (2.48)
To Nordkapp. Great circle to 57° 50' N, 18° 00' W, 65
thence great circle to 70°45'N, 20° 30'W, thence as
navigation permits.
Cape Race «-> Europe
2.64
Diagrams (2.63), (2.48)
To Nordkapp. Great circle to 57° 50' N, 18° 00' W,
thence as at 2.63.
2.64.1
To Trondheim. Great circle to the pilot ground in
Gripholen, thence through Indreleia.
2.64.2
To Bergen. Great circle to a landfall on Sumburgh
Head, thence as navigation permits (as at 2.63.2).
2.64.3
To Cape Wrath. Great circle to 57° 50' N, 18° 00' W,
thence direct.
2.64.4
To places between Cape Wrath and Bay of
Biscay. Great circle to destination.
West-bound alternative route
2.65
Diagram (2.63)
From Strait of Gibraltar bound for New York, some
advantage in weather and currents may be obtained by
passing 20 miles S of Sao Miguel, Arquipelago dos
Acores, thence by rhumb line to Nantucket Lanby,
thence as navigation permits.
Distance: 3240 miles.
2.66
For low-powered West-bound vessels, routes are as
follows.
From Strait of Gibraltar bound for Halifax, by rhumb
line, S of Arquipelago dos Acores, to 36° 00' N,
45° 00' W, thence as navigation permits.
2.66.1
From Vigo, Lisboa or Strait of Gibraltar bound for
Boston, Chesapeake Bay, or places between them, routes
are seasonal.
May-September, S of Arquipelago dos Acores,
thence:
Along the parallel of 36° N to 65° W, thence:
As navigation permits to destination.
2.66.2
October-April, direct to 33° 15' N, 20° 00W, thence:
Along the parallel of 33° 15' N to 65° 00' W, thence:
As navigation permits to destination.
 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 2.81
Distances in miles
2.67
Cabot Strait Halifax Boston New York Delaware Bay Chesapeake Bay
Via BS C. Race BS C. Race BS C. Race BS C. Race BS C. Race BS C. Race
Nordkapp 3380 3070 3480 3240 3780 3590 3940 3800 4020 3880 4100 3970
Trondheim 2940 2600 3040 2770 3340 3120 3500 3330 3580 3410 3660 3500
Bergen 2780 2480 2880 2650 3190 3000 3350 3210 3430 3290 3510 3380
Cape Wrath 2450 2140 2550 2320 2860 2660 3010 2870 3100 2950 3180 3040

Inishtrahull 2340 2060 2440 2240 2750 2590 2910 2800 2990 2870 3070 2970
Fastnet 2240 2000 2340 2180 2640 2520 2800 2730 2880 2810 2960 2900
Bishop Rock 2360 2130 2460 2310 2760 2660 2920 2870 3000 2940 3080 3040
La Girondef 2590 2410 2690 2570 3000 2920 3160 3130 3240 3210 3320 3300

Vigo 2330 2430 2740 2900 2980 3060

Lisboa 2370 2470 2780 2940 3020 3100
Strait of Gibraltar** 2620 2720 3020 3180 3260 3340*

* Great circle direct to Cabo de Sao Vicente.

** 6 miles S of Europa Point.
t 70 miles from Bordeaux.

ROUTES BETWEEN NORTH AMERICAN PORTS, WEST INDIES OR CARIBBEAN SEA AND
AFRICA

North American ports or West North American ports «-+ Gulf of Guinea,
Indies «-» West coast of Africa South-west coast of Africa or Cape Town
2.76 2.77
Diagram (2.76) See 3.63 and 3.61.
Subject to the ordinary requirements of navigation, 35
all routes, except those passing through Arquipelago dos Colon or Tobago <*-> Gulf of Guinea or
Acores, are by great circles. South-west coast of Africa
For routes calling at Arquipelago dos Acores, see 2.78
2.125. See 3.62.
2.76.1 40
Distances in miles: Caribbean Sea -* Cape Town or Indian
Ocean
Casablanca Dakar Freetown 2.79
New York •3140 3320 f375O Diagrams (4.21), (3.42)
Delaware Bay 3220 3360 J3780 45 Routes through the Caribbean Sea are as at 4.26 and
Chesapeake Bay 3290 3390 f3800 4.27 from Gulf of Mexico to its E end, thence direct as at
NE Providence 2.107 (in reverse) to 4° 40'S, 34°35'W, off Cabo
Channel 3590 3400 3700 Calcanhar, thence great circle to destination.
St Lucia/St Vincent Distances in miles:
Channel 3150 2540 2830 50 Colon St Lucia/St Vincent
Tobago 3190 2530 2800 Channel
Cape Town 6450 5370
* Via Nantucket Lanby Cape Agulhas(15'S of) 6540 5470
tVia 10°40'N, 17°40'W Cape of Good Hope
55 (145' S of) 6530 5450

ROUTES BETWEEN WEST INDIES OR BERMUDA AND EUROPE

References Bermuda, see 2.38.

2.80 Caribbean Sea entrance channels, see 4.21.
Western Approaches to the English Channel, see
2.31.
Approaches to Gulf of Mexico
2.81
lie d'Ouessant, see 2.32. Diagram (4.21)
Bay of Biscay and W coasts of Spain and Portugal, see East-bound passages from Gulf of Mexico are recom-
2.33. mended through Straits of Florida, thence N to take full
Strait of Gibraltar, see 2.34. 70 advantage of the Florida Current, the Gulf Stream
Grand Banks of Newfoundland, see 2.37.
27
 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 2.85.4
and the North Atlantic Current (2.15), as well as the pre- 2.83.1
dominantly W winds of the N part of the North Atlantic Distances from Straits of Florida: Lisboa 3630 miles;
Ocean. For directions for passage via Straits of ** Strait of Gibraltar 3840 miles
Florida to the departure position (27 o 00'N, 79°49'W),
off Jupiter Inlet, see Admiralty Sailing Directions. 5 ** 6 miles S of Europa Point.
West-bound passages are recommended either
through Providence Channels or through Old Bahama Bishop Rock -> North-East Providence
Channel and Nicholas Channel. Channel
Routes in Gulf of Mexico and Caribbean Sea, and the 2.84
approaches thereto, are continued in Chapter 4. 10 Diagram (2.82)
The route is by great circle to Position BS (42° 30' N,
50° 00' W), thence by another great circle.
Straits of Florida -> Vigo and European 2.84.1
coast farther North For low-powered vessels, an alternative route may be
2.82 15 preferred by great circle to 36° 00' N, 35° 00' W, thence
Diagrams (2.82, 2.63) by another great circle.
From 27° 00' N, 79° 49' W, at the N end of Straits of 2.84.2
Florida, routes are: Distance: (via Position BS): 3500 miles.
Through 30° 00' N, 79° 40' W, keeping in the main body
of the Gulf Stream, thence: 20 West Indies passages or Bermuda <-» Europe
Through 35° 30' N, 72° 40' W, thence: 2.85
Great circle to Position BS (42° 30'N, 50° 00'W), Diagram (2.85) for West Indies passages; (2.82) for
thence: As at 2.63.4 to destination. Bermuda
2.82.1 Subject to the ordinary requirements of navigation,
Distances from Straits of Florida: 25 including on certain routes avoidance of Bermuda (2.38)
Nordkapp 4660 miles; Fastnet 3520 miles; and passage through Arquipelago dos Acores, routes are
Trondheim 4220 miles; Bishop Rock 3640 miles; by great circles. See also 2.31-2.34.
Bergen 4060 miles; La Gironde* 3870 miles; 2.85.1
Cape Wrath 3730 miles; Vigo 3610 miles. Diagram (2.82)
Inishtrahull 3620 miles; 30 Alternatively, W-bound vessels particularly low-
powered ones, from Bay of Biscay or places farther N,
* 70 miles from Bordeaux. bound for Sombrero Passage or the passages farther W,
may prefer the following routes to avoid the effects of the
Straits of Florida -» Lisboa and Strait of E-going North Atlantic Current and the predominance
Gibraltar 35 of W winds and head seas in the N part of the North
2.83 Atlantic Ocean.
Diagram (2.82) 2.85.2
From 27° 00' N, 79° 49' W, at the N end of Straits of From S part of Bay of Biscay:
Florida, routes are: Rhumb line to 44° 15' N, 8° 30' W, thence:
Through 30° 00' N, 79° 40' W, keeping in the main 40 Rhumb line to 36° 40' N, 24° 45' W, thence:
body of the Gulf Stream, thence: Great circle to 30° 00' N, 45° 30' W, thence:
Great circle to Lisboa or Strait of Gibraltar, in the Great circle to destination.
latter case adjusting course to avoid the islands of 2.85.3
Arquipelago dos Acores. From N part of Bay of Biscay and places farther N:
For information on W coasts of Spain and Portugal 45 Great circle to join the route at 2.85.2 in 36° 40' N,
and Strait of Gibraltar, see 2.33 and 2.34. 24° 45' W, passing N of 44° 15' N, 8° 30' W.

2.85.4
Distances in miles.

Great Circle Alternative Route

Bishop La Vigo Lisboa Strait of Bishop La
Rock Girondef Gibraltar** Rock Girondef

NE Providence Channel See 2.84 3730 3450 3450 3670 See 2.84.1 3980
Turks Island Passage 3450 3650 3330 3310 3510 3710 3770
Mona Passage 3470 3640 3310 3260 3450 3640 3700
Sombrero Passage 3310 3470 3120 3070 3250 3450 3510
Barbados 3410 3530 3170 3080 3230
Bermuda 2760 2980 2690 2690 2930

t 70 miles from Bordeaux.

** 6 miles S of Europa Point.

29
 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
2.98.4
ROUTES BETWEEN ENGLISH CHANNEL AND STRAIT OF GIBRALTAR OR INTERMEDIATE
PORTS

General Notes 5 good offing is advisable, when coasting the normal route
2.91
Diagram (2.76)
Traffic Separation Schemes exist in the entrance to
the English Channel and off the Spanish and Portuguese
coasts: for regulations governing them, see Admiralty 10
Sailing Directions.
When rounding lie d'Ouessant in uncertain weather
great care should be taken, see 2.19, 2.31, 2.32 and
Admiralty Sailing Directions.
The incidence of fog in the vicinity is high, and it is 15
important to remember, when in fog, that it is not always
possible from the land to determine the existence of fog
banks in the offing and that fog signals may not therefore
be in operation.
Between lie d'Ouessant and Cabo Finisterre, a 20
general E-going set may be expected. Onshore winds
bring cloud, which may develop into low visibility near
the coast.
The coast between Cabo Ortegal and Cabo Finisterre
is a dangerous landfall except in good weather, owing to 25
the E-going set of the current, the tidal streams, and the
risk of poor visibility with low cloud which may obscure
the lights. Approaching across the Bay of Biscay, a
landfall should be made at Cabo Villano which is high
and easily recognised. In poor visibility, soundings will 30
give a good indication of the distance off the shore. See
Admiralty Sailing Directions.
West of Spain and Portugal, although in general a
for N-bound traffic follows the coast to Cabo Finisterre
more closely than that for S-bound traffic.
The channel between Ilha Berlenga and Cabo
Carvoeiro is clear and deep and may be taken in clear
weather. When uncertain of the position near Os
Farilhoes and Ilha Berlenga, it is vital to gain sea room
since sounding gives little indication of the vicinity of
these islands. For general remarks on depths off these
coasts, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
In the vicinity of Cabo de Sao Vicente, the currents
set strongly along the coast and have a tendency towards
the cape. S-going currents predominate. N-going
currents are especially likely to occur during SW gales.
For the approach to Strait of Gibraltar, see 2.34.
For fishing grounds, and amplification of these notes
see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
2.92
Distances in miles.
lie 'Ouessant
430 Vigo
640 225 Lisboa
930 520
Strait of
295 Gibraltar**
•* 6 miles S of Europa Point.

ROUTES BETWEEN ENGLISH CHANNEL OR STRAIT OF GIBRALTAR AND WEST COAST OF

AFRICA, CAPE TOWN OR THE INDIAN OCEAN

General notes Direct to pass 15 miles S of Cape Agulhas.

2.96 Or, if entering the Indian Ocean (3.23). Great circle
For passage across the Bay of Biscay and off the coast to 36°45'S, 19°00'E.
of Spain and Portugal, see 2.91. 45 For distances, see 2.100.
The charting of the coast between Cabo Bojador and
Fleuve Senegal is reported to be inaccurate, and at night, English Channel <-» West Africa and Gulf of
as there are few lights, it should be given a wide berth. Guinea
For general remarks on the reliability of charts of the W 2.98
coast of Africa, see Admiralty Sailing Directions. 50 Diagram (2.76)
Abnormal refraction occurs at times off the African For Casablanca. As at 2.91 along the coasts of Spain
coast. and Portugal to Cabo de Sao Vicente, thence as
For remarks on routes to and from the Indian Ocean, navigation permits.
see 3.23. 2.98.1
55 For Dakar. As at 2.97 to 20' 50' N, 18° 10' W, off Cap
English Channel «-> Cape Town or Indian Blanc, passing between Tenerife and Gran Canaria,
Ocean thence as navigation permits.
2.97 2.98.2
Diagrams (2.76), (3.42) For Freetown. As at 2.97 to 10°40'N, 17°40'W,
From lie d'Ouessant (2.32) the route is: 60 thence direct to the outer end of the channel leading to
Rhumb line to 43° 00' N, 10° 00' W, 30 miles off Freetown.
Cabo Finisterre, thence: 2.98.3
Great circle to 20° 50'N, 18°10'W, passing For Gulf of Guinea. As at 2.97 to 10°40'N
between Tenerife and Gran Canaria, thence: 17° 40' W, thence:
Rhumb line to 10°40'N, 17°40'W to clear the 65 Through 4° 20' N, 9° 20' W, thence:
breakers off Arquipelago dos Bijagos, thence: Through 4° 06' N, 7° 54' W (20 miles SSW of Cape
Either, Palmas), thence:
Great circle to Cape Town. As navigation permits to destination.
Or, if rounding Cape Agulhas, 2.98.4
Great circle to round Cape Point, thence: 70 For distances, see 2.100.
31
 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 2.104.1
Strait of Gibraltar <~> West Africa, Gulf of 2.99.1
Guinea, Cape T o w n or Indian O c e a n For Cape Town or Indian Ocean, routes are coastwise
2.99 to 10°40'N, 17° 40' W, off Arquipelago dos Bijagos,
Diagrams (2.76, 3.42) thence as at 2.97.
For W African ports and Gulf of Guinea from Strait 2.99.2
of Gibraltar, routes are as direct as navigation permits. For distances, see 2.100.

Distances between English Channel, Strait of Gibraltar, West Africa and Cape of Good Hope
2.100

10° 40' N, 17° 40' W (Bijagos,

Arq dos)
4° 06' N, 7° 54' W (Cape Palmas)
Cape Town
Cape Agulhas(15'Sof)
Cape of Good Hope (145' S of)
6 miles S of Europa Point.
Coastwise.
E of Islas Canarias, and joining route from lie d'Ouessant in 20° 50' N, 18° 10' W.

ROUTES BETWEEN NORTH AMERICA AND PLACES BETWEEN GULF OF MEXICO AND CABO
CALCANHAR

General Notes For directions for Straits of Florida, see Admiralty

2.101 Sailing Directions.
For recommended approaches to the Gulf of Mexico, For distances, see 2.108.
see 2.81. 45
For directions for passages through the West Indies North A m e r i c a n ports <-> West Indies
channels or along the E coast of the US, see Admiralty 2.103
Sailing Directions. Diagram (2.102)
In Cabot Strait, a Traffic Separation Scheme (1.28) For West Indies passages. Routes are by rhumb
has been established. 50 lines.
For routes passing near Bermuda Islands, see caution 2.103.1
at 2.38. For Barbados. Routes are by rhumb lines, passing E
The Gulf Stream (2.15) is the main factor affecting of Barbuda and the Lesser Antilles.
voyages in the part of the ocean between Gulf of Saint 2.103.2
Lawrence and the Bahamas. 55 For distances, see 2.108.
A strong N-going current will be encountered for 200
miles in the N approach to North-East Providence North A m e r i c a n ports <-> Rio Para
Channel. 2.104
Diagram (2.105)
Straits of Florida -+ North American ports 60 Routes from N of Cape Hatteras are by great circle to
2.102 5° 00' N, 47° 30' W, thence as navigation permits to the
Diagram (2.102) pilot ground off Salinopolis.
From 27° 00' N, 79° 49' W, at the N end of the Straits 2.104.1
of Florida, routes are: North of Bermuda, the Gulf Stream will be felt:
To 30° 25' N, 79° 40' W, thence: 65 squally weather is frequent within its limits, and fog is
To 31° 11' N, 79° 15'W, thence: prevalent along its N border.
Continuing in the main body of the Gulf Stream to On the S part of these routes, full allowance is
34° 00' N, 75° 49' W, thence: required for the effects of the W-going North Equatorial
As navigation permits to destination, passing E of Current and the E-going Equatorial Counter-current
Diamond Shoal Lighthouse. 70 (2.15 and 2.16). Great care must be taken not to make a

33
2.104.2 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN

landfall W of Ponta da Atalaia because, in that region, Caribbean Sea -> Rio Para
fresh to strong ESE winds and rough seas may be 2.106.3
expected, with occasional poor visibility. The route leaves those to Cabo Calcanhar in 6° 20' N,
2.104.2 47° 30' W, thence as navigation permits to the pilot
For distances, see 2.108. 5 ground off Salinopolis.
Alternatively, a curving track, keeping about 100
North A m e r i c a n ports «-» Cabo Calcanhar miles offshore will shorten the distance by about 100
2.105 miles, but the adverse current will be stronger.
Diagram (2.105) 2.106.4
Routes are by great circle to 4° 40' S, 34° 35' W, 60 10 Distances.
miles ENE of Cabo Calcanhar. Cabo Calcanhar from:
For cautions regarding Atol das Rocas and dangers N Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent Channel 1930 miles;
and NW of Cabo Calcanhar, see Admiralty Sailing Tobago 1870 miles;
Directions. Rio Paraf 820 miles.
For distances, see 2.108. 15 Rio Paraf from:
Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent Channel 1320 miles;
Caribbean Sea and Rio Para -> Cabo Tobago 1260 miles;
Calcanhar
2.106 t Rio Para to Belem: 125 miles.
Diagram (2.105) 20
From the channel between Saint Lucia and Cabo Calcanhar -» Rio Para and Caribbean
Saint Vincent, the route is direct to 5° 00' N, 45° 00' W, Sea
or even farther N, to avoid the strength of the Guiana 2.107
and South Equatorial Currents, thence direct to Diagram (2.105)
4° 40' S, 34° 35' W, off Cabo Calcanhar, making due 25 For caution regarding dangers N and NW of Cabo
allowance for the W-going set. Calcanhar and off Fortaleza, see 2.106.2 and Admiralty
2.106.1 Sailing Directions.
From Tobago, the route joins the above route in Approaching Rio Para from the E, attention must be
irOO'N, 56°2O'W. paid to Recife Manoel Luis. The coast is low and devoid
2.106.2 30 of prominent features, so that reliance must therefore be
From Rio Para, it is possible to take advantage of the placed on non-visual methods for fixing the position.
tidal streams and an E-going counter-current by For the Caribbean Sea, routes are direct.
keeping close inshore if conditions permit. See 2.107.1
Admiralty Sailing Directions. Distances from Cabo Calcanhar:
An oilfield, with platforms and associated pipelines 35 Galleons Passage 1830 miles;
and buoyage, is situated close within the 100-m depth Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent Channel 1910 miles;
contour 40 miles NNW of Fortaleza. Tobago 1830 miles;
For caution regarding Atol das Rocas and dangers N Rio Paraf 820 miles.
and NW of Cabo Calcanhar, see Admiralty Sailing
Directions. 40 t Rio to Belem: 125 miles.

Distances in miles
2.108
From Cabot Strait Halifax New York Delaware Bay Chesapeake Bay
Straits of Florida 1630* 136OJ 900 800 690
NE Providence Channel 1570# 1300 890 790 680
Crooked Island Passage§ 1580* 1330 970 880 770
Turks Island Passage 1650* 1420 1130 1040 940
Mona Passage 1800* 1590 1360 1290 1190
Sombrero Passage 1760* 1560 1420 1360 1280
Barbados 2070** 1900 1800 1750 1680
Rio Paraf 2950** 2840 2800 2850 2790
Cabo Calcanhar (60' ENE of) 3390** 3330 3460 3440 3400
t Rio Para to Belem: 125 miles.
{ E of Georges Shoal.
§ 10 miles NE of San Salvador.
* W of Sable Island.
•• E of Sable Island.
 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN

&
S'QOW 48'OCW
4«4O-5, 34'35'W

Longitude 60 West from Greenwich

(2.105) ROUTES — Cabo Calcanhar < > North America, Caribbean Sea and Rfo Para\

35
 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 2.121
ROUTES BETWEEN NORTH-EAST COAST OF SOUTH AMERICA AND EASTERN PART OF
NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN

General Note and References 5 2.111.2

2.111 Distances from Rio Paraf:
When approaching the coast between Trinidad and Bishop Rock 3670 miles;
Cabo Calcanhar, the effects of the Equatorial Current lie d'Ouessant 3650 miles;
and Counter-current will be felt. See Admiralty Sailing La Gironde* 3690 miles;
Directions. 10 Vigo 3300 miles;
References: Lisboa 3140 miles;
Western approaches to the English Channel, see Strait of Gibraltar** 3210 miles;
2.31. Casablanca 3040 miles;
lie d'Ouessant, see 2.32. Dakar 2000 miles;
Bay of Biscay and W coasts of Spain and Portugal, 15 Freetown 2100 miles;
see 2.33. Ponta Delgada 2580 miles;
Strait of Gibraltar, see 2.34. Porto Grande 1680 miles;
Las Palmas 2530 miles.
Routes
2.111.1 20 t Rio Para to Belem: 125 miles:
Diagram (2.111) * 70 miles from Bordeaux.
In general, great circle tracks are recommended. ** 6 miles S of Europa Point.

ROUTES BETWEEN EASTERN PART OF NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN AND RECIFE

General Notes between Fuerteventura and Gran Canaria, thence great

2.116 30
For information on W approaches to the English
Channel, Bay of Biscay, W coasts of Spain and Portugal
and Strait of Gibraltar, see 2.31-2.34.
Penedos de Sao Pedro e Sao Paolo (Saint Paul's
Rocks) (2.39) and Atol das Rocas, which are both low- 35
lying and dangerous, as well as Arquipelago de
Fernando de Noronha, lie close to the routes to Recife,
and in the main stream of the W-going South Equatorial
Current.
The coast S of Cabo de Sao Roque should be 40
approached with caufton: currents, which often set
onshore, should be guarded against.
Landfall off Recife should normally be made in
8° 00' S, 34° 40' W, 10 miles E of Ponta de Olinda, or N
of this position from October to January. See Admiralty 45
Sailing Directions
For destinations S of Recife, see 3.31-3.36.
English Channel *->• Recife
2.117 so
Diagram (2.111)
From the English Channel, routes are by great circle,
passing W of Madeira to 17° 00' N, 25° 30' W, 6 miles W
of Santo Antao (Arquipelago de Cabo Verde), thence
direct to Recife, passing between Atol das Rocas and 55
Ilha de Fernando de Noronha (2.39).
Distance to landfall off Recife:
lie d'Ouessant 3720 miles.
Lisboa <-» Recife 60
2.118
Diagram (2.111)
From Lisboa the route is direct to the channel
circle to Recife, passing E of Arquipelago de Cabo Verde
and W of Penedos de Sao Pedro e Sao Paolo and Ilha de
Fernando de Noronha (2.39).
Distance to the landfall off Recife: 3130 miles.
Strait of Gibraltar <-» Recife
2.119
Diagram (2.111)
The route from Strait of Gibraltar is:
Along the African coast as far as Dakhla, thence:
Direct to 17° 30' N, 20° 00' W, thence:
Direct to l°00'N, 30°10'W, 45 miles W of
Penedos de Sao Pedro e Sao Paolo, thence:
Direct to Recife, passing W of Ilha de Fernando de
Noronha (2.39).
Distance to landfall off Recife (from 6 miles S of
Europa Point); 3120 miles.
Las Palmas <-> Recife
2.120
Diagram (2.111)
The route from Las Palmas rounds the E side of Gran
Canaria, thence joining the route from Lisboa (2.118) S
of that island.
Distance to landfall off Recife: 2440 miles.
Porto Grande«-»Recife
2.121
Diagram (2.111)
From Porto Grande, the route passes through Canal
de Sao Vicente, thence direct to Recife, passing between
Atol das Rocas and Ilha de Fernando de Noronha (2.39).
Distance to landfall off Recife: 1600 miles.

37
2.125 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN

ROUTES TO AND FROM ARQUIPELAGO DOS AZORES

Routes Dakar 1460

2.125 5 Port Grande 1250
Diagram (2.130) Rio Para*** 2580
Subject to t h e o r d i n a r y r e q u i r e m e n t s of navigation, Barbados 2350
Arquipelago dos Azores can be approached by great Sombrero Passage 2310
circle routes from all directions. Mona Passage 2500
A Traffic Separation S c h e m e (1.28) has been 10 Turks Island Passage 2540
established in C a b o t Strait. F o r o t h e r hazards to North-East Providence Channel 2690
navigation, see 2.31-2.38. Bermuda 1930
T h e islands lie in the m a i n flow of t h e Azores C u r r e n t , Straits of Florida® 2790
and S of the p r e d o m i n a n t l y W w i n d s of t h e N o r t h Delaware Bay 2310
Atlantic Ocean. 75 New York 2230
2.125.1 Halifaxf 1770
Distances in miles from Ponta Delgada: Cabot StraitJ 1670
Bishop Rock 1110 St. John's, Newfoundland 1330
lie d'Ouessant 1100
La Gironde* 1190 20 * 70 miles from Bordeaux.
Vigo 825 ** 6 miles S of Europa Point
Lisboa 770 *** Rio Para to Belem: 125 miles
Strait of Gibraltar** 985 t Via Position BS as at 2.62.3.
Casablanca 920 t Via Position BS as at 2.62.2.
Las Palmas 775 25 @ Direct. If E-bound (see 2.83), 2880 miles

ROUTES TO AND FROM ARQUIPELAGO DE CABO VERDE

Porto Grande *-* English Channel and especially feel the force of the Canary Current setting to
Western Side of North Atlantic Ocean the SW: several wrecks have been caused by
2.130 disregarding it. The currents between the islands of the
Diagram (2.130) group are frequently strong, irregular, and influenced
Subject to the ordinary requirements of navigation, by the wind. For further details of currents, see
Arquipelago de Cabo Verde can be approached by great Admiralty Sailing Directions.
circle from the English Channel or from the W. Local magnetic anomalies have been reported in the
A Traffic Separation Scheme (1.28) has been vicinity of Arquipelago de Cabo Verde, especially off the
established in Cabot Strait. For other hazards to 40 W side of Sal, off the E side of Boavista, and near Fogo
navigation, see 2.31-2.38. and Brava.
2.130.1 For information on Strait of Gibraltar, see 2.34.
Distances from Porto Grande in miles: 2.131.1
Bishop Rock 2170 For Dakar and Banjul, the routes pass N of Boavista.
lie d'Ouessant 2120 45 For Freetown and ports farther S, the routes pass S of
Rio Para*** 1680 Santiago.
Tobago 2090 For ports in the Gulf of Guinea (see 3.41), routes pass
St Lucia/St Vincent Channel (for through 4° 20' N, 9° 20' W, and thence through
Caribbean Sea) 2090 4° 06' N, 7° 54' W, 20 miles SSW of Cape Palmas.
North-East Providence Channel (for 50 2.131.2
Gulf of Mexico) 2940 Distances from Porto Grande in miles:
Bermuda 2340
Delaware Bay 2950 Strait of Gibraltar** 1560
New York 2890 Casablanca 1390
Halifax 2560 55 Las Palmas 870
Cabot Strait . 2510 Dakar 470
St. John's, Newfoundland 2290 Banjul 515
Freetown 885
••• Rio Para to Belem: 125 miles. Monrovia 1070
Cape Palmas* 1300
Port Grande <-> Strait of Gibraltar and West
Africa
2.131
Diagram (2.130) * 20 miles SSW of Cape Palmas.
The E islands of Arquipelago de Cabo Verde more ** 6 miles S of Europa Point.
 CHAPTER 3
SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
WINDS AND WEATHER
General information
3.1
The wind system of the South Atlantic Ocean
resembles that of the North Atlantic, except that the
circulation round the oceanic anticyclone is anti-
clockwise, and there is no wind corresponding to the
South-west Monsoon of West Africa. There is no
Intertropical Convergence Zone, and there are no
tropical storms.
The South-east Trade Wind forms the equatorial
side of the circulation round the oceanic anticyclone,
which is centred in about 20° S to 28° S. It is the
counterpart of the North-east Trade Wind, and blows
with equal persistence and constancy of direction, from
about SSE on the E side of the ocean to almost E on the
W side. It extends as far N as the equator in winter (July)
and to within two or three degrees of it in summer
(January). The average strength of the South-east Trade
Wind is similar to that of the North-east Trade Wind
except N of 10° S, E of about 10° W, where it averages
only force 2-3.
Weather is similar to that of the zone of the North-east 35
Trade Wind, except that fog is frequent over the cold
waters of the Benguela Current close to the coast of
South-west Africa between 20° and 30° S.
The Variables (Horse Latitudes), a belt of light and
generally variable winds in the neighbourhood of the
oceanic areas of high pressure, extend across the ocean in
about 29° S, oscillating from about 26° S in winter to
about 31° S in summer. Conditions are similar to those
in the corresponding zone of the North Atlantic Ocean.
East of the prime meridian winds are predominantly
from between S and ESE, being in fact an extension of
the South-east Trade Wind. In the W part of the zone
NE winds are commonest, particularly in summer.
The Westerlies (Roaring Forties). South of about
35° S, W winds predominate. As in the North Atlantic
Ocean, the almost continuous passage of depressions
from W to E causes the wind to vary greatly both in
direction and strength, and winds from any direction
can be experienced; the centres of the depressions
generally move from the vicinity of Cabo de Homos in
the direction of South Georgia and then approximately
along the 50th parallel. Gales are very prevalent; S of
about 40° S, even at midsummer, winds reach force 7 on
from 7 to 9 days per month, and S of about 43° S and E of
about 40° W the frequency rises to about 15 days per
month. In winter this latter frequency is general S of a
line joining the Falkland Islands and Cape of Good
Hope, while most of the area between this line and the
30th parallel has from 5 to 10 days per month with winds
of this force.
Weather is of a similarly variable nature to that
experienced in the corresponding zone of the N
hemisphere.
Fog is not uncommon in summer, and is generally
associated with winds from warmer latitudes.
10
SWELL
Zones
3.2
is Fewer observations of ocean swell are available from
the South Atlantic Ocean than from the North Atlantic
Ocean. The South Atlantic Ocean, for purposes of swell,
can be conveniently divided into three zones. For length
of swell, see 2.12.
20 0°-20° S. Slight to moderate swell, rarely heavy; from
SE in the E part of the zone, and from between SE and E
in the W part.
20° S—40° S. The swell is mainly moderate, but
sometimes heavy. In the E part of the zone it is from S;
25 the direction is variable in the W part, with a high
proportion from between NE and N. Reports of
confused swell are frequent.
40° S-60° S. The swell is mainly moderate, but in the
extreme S it is often heavy.
30 Throughout the year, the worst conditions are likely
to occur between 40° S and 50° S. The depressions,
which are of much the same size as those that produce
the North Atlantic winter storms, move in continual
succession from W to E, usually along tracks S of 50° S.
The strongest winds blow from NW with a heavy
overcast sky on a falling barometer; they are followed by
SW winds as the barometer rises and the sky clears.
Heavy swell is present for between 30 per cent and 70
per cent of the time between 50° S and 60° S. In
40 summer, the frequency of high seas and swell decreases
towards the circumpolar trough which generally lies in
about 64° S, where the mean wind speeds are less than
further N, although relatively small strong gales occur
from time to time.
45 Most of the very high seas and swell appear to be
raised by the Westerlies. Freak waves, which are almost
certainly due to a number of component wave trains
becoming momentarily in step, are a very real possibility
which appears to be increased in the vicinity of shoal
50 water and when the wave train is moving against the
current. See 1.18.
CURRENTS
55
North and South Atlantic Oceans
3.11
The current circulation systems of the whole Atlantic
region are outlined at 2.14.
60
South Atlantic Ocean
3.12
Just S of the Equatorial Counter-current, the South
Equatorial Current sets W to the N of the sub-tropical
65 gyre which circulates water in a counter-clockwise
direction between W Africa in the E and S America in
the W. Off SW Africa the Benguela Current sets NW
with moderate constancy fanning out to the W from its
left flank as it progresses.
70 Two main factors combine to form the Benguela
 SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
Current. Offshore the main circulation carries relatively
cool water ENE from the sub-Antarctic and then turns
N as it approaches the coastal shelf of SW Africa.
Inshore the South-east Trade Wind blowing
persistently from the land, removes the surface water
seaward and allows cooler sub-surface waters to rise as
replacement. This enhances the temperature gradient
with the Benguela Current appearing as a cool current.
On the left flank of the S part of the Benguela Current a
narrow mixing zone approximately 3°-5° of latitude
wide, extends from about 30° S, 0° through 34° S, 10° E
to near 38° S, 20° E. Along this axis there is continuous
interaction between the E-going sets of the South
Atlantic Current, the ENE-going flow of the Southern
Ocean Current and the general NW-going sets of the
combined Agulhas and Benguela Currents. Areas of
local convergence and divergence occur with marked
variations of both sea temperature and sea state.
As indicated on Diagrams (1.19e) and (1.19j), the
Benguela Current gradually turns W towards South
America as the South Equatorial Current. This current
is stronger on its equatorial flank where its N boundary
extends across the equator. To the S towards the axis of
the gyre, constancies and rates both decrease, becoming
variable and mostly less than | knot.
Approaching the Brazil coast near Recife the current
diverges, the N part continuing WNW towards the
Caribbean Sea (see 2.15) and the S part turning S as the
warm Brazil Current. The latitude at which this division
occurs varies at the coast from about 8° S in summer
(December) to near 12° S in winter (June). In central
longitudes near 20° W the axis of the gyre also fluctuates
by about 5° being farthest N near 20° S in the winter
months.
The Brazil Current extends S to the latitude of Rio de
la Plata where interaction with the N-flowing cold
Falkland Current occurs. Fanning out from its left flank
into the open ocean leads to a belt of E-going sets
between 30° S and 40° S. This flow is sometimes
referred to as the South Atlantic Current to distinguish
it from the much cooler Southern Ocean Current which
extends ENE from Drake Passage and continues to the E
passing S of South Africa into the South Indian and
Pacific Oceans as a circumpolar current.
The Falkland Current derives from the Southern
Ocean Current as it enters the South Atlantic Ocean.
Most of it passes W of the Falkland Islands but some
continues to the S of the islands before turning N,
joining the main stream in about 45° S. There are
indications of marked eddies associated with patches of
warm water penetrating well S in longitudes 50-55° W
from the S part of the Brazil Current.
ICE
General remarks
3.16
For general remarks and references, see 2.25, which
are also applicable to the South Atlantic Ocean.
For facsimile ice charts and ice forecasts from
Antarctica, see Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Vol 5.
Pack ice
3.17
The approximate mean limits of pack ice are indicated
on Routeing Charts, Climatic Charts and US Marine
Climate Atlas of the World (1981 Edition).
The main whipping routes of the S hemisphere are not
affected by pack ice, but in the South Atlantic Ocean its
3.21
presence prevents the use of a great circle track between
Cape of Good Hope and Cabo de Hornos except during
March, April and May.
The long-term average position of the pack ice (4/8
5 concentration) in August to September, at its greatest
extension, runs from about 60° S, 60° W to a position
just E of South Georgia in about 54° S, 30° W. Thence,
it extends E while gradually increasing in latitude to
about 55° S on the meridian of Greenwich and about
10 58° S in 50° E. This is an average position of the edge of
the pack ice which in severe years, can be appreciably
farther N.
The average position of the edge of the pack ice in the
months of least average extension (February-March) is
15 well S of the foregoing positions. In those parts where
the Antarctic continent extends continuously to lower
latitudes, ie from 10° W through 0° to 160° E, the
average ice edge at this season does not extend much
beyond 100 miles from the coast and in some places
20 retreats to the coast. Off the Weddel and Ross Seas the
ice is more extensive, reaching its farthest N on the
parallel of about 62° S between 20° W and 60° W. It is
stressed that these are average positions.
25 Icebergs
3.18
The Antarctic icebergs, unlike those of the North
Atlantic Ocean, are not usually carved from glaciers, but
consist of portions that have broken away from the great
30 ice shelves which surround parts of the Antarctic
continent. They are consequently flat-topped, and they
may be of immense size.
The extreme limit of icebergs, irrespective of season,
is illustrated on Diagrams (1.13a) and (1.13b), and for
35 each month on US Pilot Charts (1983)—Monthly
Weather Hazards. In the S hemisphere, icebergs are
liable to be encountered in lower latitudes in the South
Atlantic Ocean than in the other oceans of this
hemisphere. Near the coasts of Argentina and S Brazil,
40 icebergs may be found as far N as 31° S. Abnormally,
one has even been reported in about 26° S, 26° W. In the
rest of the South Atlantic Ocean, icebergs are largely
confined to latitudes S of 35° S.
The relatively simple nature of Antarctic geography,
•*> with an almost symmetrical flow of currents round a
nearly circular continent, means that there is less cause
here than in Arctic waters for a great concentration of
icebergs in a few comparatively narrow 'lanes'. Some
concentration does occur due to the deflection and
50 concentration of the E-going circumpolar stream by the
projection to the N of Graham Land. Some of the
icebergs in the resulting NE flow between South
America and Graham Land are carried into the Falkland
Current which takes them N as far as, or even beyond,
55 the estuary of Rio de La Plata. Another branch of the
NE-going flow through Drake Passage continues NE
and passes E of the Falkland Islands, carrying icebergs
to similar latitudes in the more central parts of the South
Atlantic Ocean.
60 Due notice should be taken of the caution at 2.28.1
regarding the use of radar for detecting icebergs.
NOTES AND CAUTIONS
65 Penedos de Sao Pedro e Sao Paolo and
Una de Fernando de Noronha
3.21
Caution is necessary in the vicinity of these islands as
the South Equatorial Current sets WNW past them at a
70 rate of 1-2 knots.
41
SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
 SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
Rounding Cabo de Hornos
3.22
Off Cabo de Hornos, W winds predominate with at
least 30 per cent of force 7 or more throughout the year.
The current off the cape is usually E-going. Swell is
mainly from the W throughout the year, heavy on 25 per
cent of occasions. Icebergs may be encountered.
3.22.1
Estrecho de Magallanes provides an alternative
route between the E and W coasts of South America. It
is regularly navigated by ocean-going vessels. Although
caution is required in making the passage, the difficulties
and dangers in navigating the strait, in either direction,
are the same as those experienced in other narrow
channels and harbours, but they are accentuated by the
prevalence of bad weather and by the generally foul and
rocky characters of the anchorages.
Manoeuvreability of a vessel is important: an
unhandy or low-powered vessel is at a disadvantage in
those parts of the strait where rapid action may be
required to counter strong cross-tidal streams, or where
there is risk of meeting another vessel simultaneously
with one of the violent and unpredictable squalls which
are common.
W-bound vessels avoid the adverse currents and
gales, and the heavy head seas, so commonly
experienced in rounding Cabo de Hornos and off the
archipelago NW of the cape: the risk of encountering
icebergs is avoided, and there is usually a saving in
distance.
E-bound vessels in bad weather may find it difficult to
make a good landfall which is essential before a vessel
enters the strait. Tidal streams in the E part of the strait
ROUTES OFF THE EAST COAST OF SOUTH AMERICA
Notes and Cautions
3.31
Between ports on the E coast of South America,
routes are coastwise and are not described in this book:
Admiralty Sailing Directions should be consulted.
Generally speaking, all routes are as direct as prudent
navigation permits, but off-lying shoals make wide
divergence from the coast necessary in some places,
notably near Arquipelago dos Abrolhos, Cabo de Sao
Tome and Banco do Albardao. All ships, particularly
deep-draught vessels, should note the dangers which
extend offshore between the parallels of 15° S and 22° S,
particularly the ridge extending 600 miles E from the
coast which terminates in Ilhas Martin Vaz: this region
is largely unsurveyed.
An oilfield, with platforms, pipelines and associated
operations, is situated about 50 miles SE of Cabo de Sao
Tome.
Known dangers are described in Admiralty Sailing
Directions, but it should be borne in mind that modern
deep-draught ships may come to grief on shoals over
which their predecessors passed with impunity.
3.31.1
Currents, in general, move water towards Rio de la
Plata; S from Cabo Calcanhar and N from Cabo de
Hornos, though the latter set is well away from the coast.
Off the coast S of Peninsula Valdes currents are very
variable, and within 20 miles of the shore tidal influences
only are felt. Onshore currents are prevalent at any time
of the year between Cabo de Sao Roque and Cabo Frio.
Seasonal changes in the coastal currents should be
noted. See 3.12 and Admiralty Sailing Directions.
3.33
tend to be less favourable to an E-bound ship than a W-
bound one.
Some Masters favour the passage of the strait both W-
bound and E-bound, particularly for vessels W-bound
5 in ballast.
For further information and details of pilotage
requirements, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Rounding Cape of Good Hope
10 3.23
The SW-going Agulhas Current flows off the SE
coast of South Africa (6.36). It is strongest in the vicinity
of the 200 m depth contour, and at times reaches a rate of
5 knots.
75 To the S of the cape, W winds predominate from
April to September, and winds of force 7 or more can be
expected for about 30 per cent of the time. From
October to March winds are more variable in direction
and the frequency of strong winds is less.
20 Tankers, other than those in ballast carrying only
residual cargo, navigating off the coasts of South Africa
are governed by regulations regarding the offing to be
kept: see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
3.23.1
25 Entering the Indian Ocean. There is a choice of
either making Cape Agulhas, and thence keeping
inshore of the Agulhas Current (as at 6.55.1), or passing
S of the current through 36° 45' S, 19° 00' E (145 miles S
of Cape of Good Hope).
30 3.23.2
Leaving the Indian Ocean. The Agulhas Current
should be sought, but avoiding the dangerous seas and
abnormal waves (1.18) found at times in its vicinity.
Advantages may be taken of these currents by making
40 N-bound passages between Rio de la Plata and Cabo
Frio closer inshore during May, June and July than at
other times, with due regard to the possibility of onshore
sets.
45 Cabo Calcanhar or Recife <-> Rio de la Plata
and intermediate ports
3.32
Diagram (3.32)
Routes are as direct as navigation permits, taking due
50 precautions against onshore currents.
For distances, see 3.37.
Rio de la Plata «-» Cabo de Hornos and
55 intermediate ports
3.33
Diagram (3.32)
The N-going Falkland Current (3.12) will affect
voyages between Rio de la Plata and the Falkland
60 Islands or Estrecho de Le Maire, or, to a lesser extent,
Estrecho de Magallanes.
Approaching Estrecho de Magallanes, special
attention is required as the range of the tide is great, and
the tidal streams at the entrance run with great strength,
65 causing at times an indraught towards Banco Sarmiento
and the dangers extending from Cabo Virgines. The
tidal streams in the strait are a controlling factor in the
choice of the time of arrival.
For choice of route round Cabo de Hornos or through
70 Estrecho de Magallanes, see 3.22.
43
3.33.1 SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN

For directions for approaching the Falkland Islands, The route is as direct as navigation permits, passing
see Admiralty Sailing Directions. either S or N of the Falkland Islands.
For dangers from icebergs, see 3.18. Distances between Stanley and Estrecho de
3.33.1 Magallanes (3 miles S of Dungeness):
Routes are as direct as navigation permits. 5 S of Falkland Islands 420 miles;
For distances, see 3.37. N of Falkland Islands 445 miles.
3.33.2
For Low-powered vessels the following routes are Falkland Islands *-* East coast of South
advised. America
South-bound. If bound Estrecho de Magallanes or to 3.35
intermediate ports, keep inshore to avoid the strength of Diagram (3.32)
the Falkland Current, which at a distance of 50 miles Routes are as direct as navigation permits.
offshore, has been known to set N at a rate of 50 miles a For distances, see 3.37.
day. S of Cabo Corrientes, only the tidal streams are felt
within 20 miles of the land. With W winds, better 15 Falkland Islands <~> Cabo de Hornos
weather is experienced close inshore than in the offing. 3.36
North-bound. Between Estrecho de Magallanes and Diagram (3.32)
Rio de la Plata, the route keeps between 20 and 50 miles The route is as direct as navigation permits, either
to seaward of the rhumb line track to obtain full benefit through Estrecho de Le Maire or E of Isla de Los
from the Falkland Current: this increases the overall 20 Estados.
distance by about 40 miles. Distance by either route: 435 miles.
Falkland Islands - ' Estrecho de Magallanes Table of distances
3.34 3.37
Diagram (3.32) 25 Distances in miles.
Cabo
Calcanhar*
210 Recife**
600 395 Salvador
1270 1070 Rio de
740f Janeiro
2060 1020 Rio de
2260 173Of la Plata
1390 410 Bahia
2620 2420 2090f Blanca
Comodoro
3050 2850 2510t 1810 840 510
Rivadavia
Estrecho de Magallanes
3340 3130 2810 2120 1170 865 445
(3' S of Dungeness)
3470 3270 2940 2260 1340 1070 675 Cabo de Hornos (5' S of)
3060 2850 2520 1850 1000 785 530 Falkland Islands (Stanley)
* 4° 40' S, 34° 35' W.
** For distances from places S of Recife to landfall off Recife, given at 2.116, add 5 miles.
t E of Parcel dos Abrolhos.

ROUTES OFF WEST COAST OF AFRICA

General notes
3.41
Voyages between ports on the W coast of Africa are
•nainly coastwise, and routes are as direct as prudent
lavigation permits.
Caution. The coast between Rio Cunene and Walvis
Jay is known as the Skeleton Coast, having been the
cene of innumerable shipwrecks, not only from the
mperfect nature of the surveys, but because currents
etting onshore are frequently experienced: in addition,
og is prevalent, especially in winter. See Admiralty
Sailing Directions.
Abnormal refraction, liable to cause appreciable
rror in sights, occurs at times near the coast, especially
ff SW Africa.
Oilfields with numerous structures, pipelines and
ibmerged obstructions, sometimes marked by buoys,
exist within the 200 m depth contour between Benin
55 River and River Congo.
Tankers, other than those in ballast carrying only
residual cargo, navigating off the coasts of South Africa
are governed by regulations regarding the offing to be
kept. See Admiralty Sailing Directions.
60
Arquipelago dos Bijagos <-> Cape Town and
intermediate ports or the Indian Ocean
3.42
Diagram (3.42)
65 The route between 10°40'N, 17°40'W, off
Arquipelago dos Bijagos, and Gulf of Guinea is given at
2.98.3.
Between ports in Gulf of Guinea and Cape Town or
the Indian Ocean, routes are as direct as navigation
70 permits.
3.43 SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN

Tables of distances
3.43
Distances in miles.

Arquipelago
dos Bijagos*

295 Freetown

705 530 Cape Palmasf

1080 900 380 Takoradi

1400 1220 695 320 Lagos

1600 1420 895 525 270 Bonny River

1760 1570 1050 685 426 160 Douala

1760 1580 1060 715 500 270 220 Libreville

2000 1820 1300 1000 840 630 610 410 Pointe Noire

2220 2140 1620 1380 1270 1070 1040 840 465 Lobito

3370 3200 2720 2590 2560 2380 2350 2150 1810 1400 Cape Town

3480 3310 2830 2700 2670 2490 2470 2270 1930 1520 Cape Agulhas(15'Sof)
Cape of Good Hope
3510 3340 2870 2750 2720 2540 2520 2320 1980 1570
(145' S of)
* 10°40'N, 17°40'W.
t 4° 06' N, 7° 54' W, 20 miles SSW of Cape Palmas.

TRANSATLANTIC ROUTES

Northern Routes Table of Distances

3.46 40 3.47
Diagram (3.42) Distances in miles.
General information.Routes are by great circle in
both directions between Rio de la Plata or S American Recife Salvador Rio de Rio de
ports farther N and ports on the African coast N of about Janeiro la Plata
25° S, and between Recife or Salvador and Cape Town, 45
Cape Agulhas or Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of). Takoradi 2130 2460 2960 3900
Lagos 2450 2770 3260 4190
3.46.1 Bonny River 2610 2920 3370 4270
Caution. Vema Seamount lies in 31° 48' S, 8° 20' E, Pointe Noire 2790 3040 3370 4170
about 500 miles WNW of Cape Town. It has a depth of 50
l l m over it and constitutes a danger to deep-draught Cape T o w n 3320 3340 See See
ships. Cape Agulhas* 3410 3430 3.49 3.51
Cape of Good and and
3.46.2 Hope (145' S of) 3390 3390 3.50 3.52
For rounding Cape of Good Hope, see 3.23. 55
* 15 miles S of Cape Agulhas.

SOUTHERN ROUTES
General information Rio de Janeiro -» Cape Town or the Indian
3.48 Ocean
Diagram (3.48) 3.49
South of about 25° S, E-bound routes are, in general, 65 Diagram (3.48)
by great circle, but W-bound routes are by rhumb line to Routes are by great circle.
reduce headwinds and adverse currents. Distances:
For rounding Cape of Good Hope, see 3.23. Cape Town 3280 miles;
Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of) 3350 miles;
70 Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of) 3290 miles.
 SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 3.57
Cape Town or the Indian Ocean -> Rio de Distances from Estrecho de Magallanes (3 miles S of
Janeiro Dungeness):
3.50 Takoradi 4820 miles;
Diagram (3.48) Lagos 5080 miles;
Routes are direct by rhumb line. Bonny River 5110 miles.
Caution. Vema Seamount (3.46.1) lies close N of the
route from Cape Town. Estrecho de Magallanes <-> Pointe Noire
Distances: 3.54
Cape Town 3320 miles; Diagram (3.48)
Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of) 3390 miles. 10 Route is by rhumb line to 47° 50' S, 60° 00' W, thence:
3.50.1 Rhumb line to 43° 50' S, 50° 00' W, thence:
For low-powered vessels, to take advantage of better Great circle to Pointe Noire.
weather and more favourable currents, the route is Distance from Estrecho de Magallanes (3 miles S of
through: Dungeness): 4910 miles.
29°50'S, 10°00'E, thence: 15
25° 50' S, 0° 00', thence: Estrecho de Magallanes —> Cape Town or
22°50'S, 10° 00' W, thence: the Indian Ocean
21°10'S, 20°00'W, thence: 3.55
21° 10' S, 30° 00' W, passing S of Ilha de Trinidade Diagram (3.48)
and Ilhas Martin Vaz, thence: 20 Routes are by rhumb line to 47° 50' S, 60° 00' W,
To Rio de Janeiro. thence:
Rhumb line to 43° 50' S, 50° 00' W, thence:
Rio de la Plata -» Cape Town or the Indian Rhumb line to 41° 10' S, 40° 00' W, thence:
Ocean Rhumb line to 40" 20' S, 33° 00' W, thence:
3.51 25 Great circle, passing S of Gough Island, to
Diagram (3.48) destination.
Routes are by great circle. Distances from Estrecho de Magallanes (3 miles S of
Parts of the tracks lie within the extreme iceberg Dungeness):
limits. Cape Town 4170 miles:
The most S points on the routes are: 30 Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of) 4210 miles;
For Cape Town 41°00'S, 20°00'W Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of) 4130 miles.
For Cape Agulhas 41°50'S, 18°15'W 3.55.1
For Cape of Good For low-powered vessels, the routes are by rhumb line
Hope (145'S of) 42°30'S, 17°30'W to 36° 00' S, 40° 00' W, thence rhumb line to 36° 00' S,
Distances: 35 25° 00' W, thence great circle to destination, passing
Cape Town 3610 miles; close S of Tristan da Cunha Group.
Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of) 3650 miles;
Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of) 3570 miles.
3.51.1 Cape Town or the Indian Ocean —» Estrecho
Low-powered vessels may usually avoid ice by 40 de Magallanes, Falkland Islands or Cabo
passing through 36° 00' S, 40° 00' W; thence by rhumb de Hornos
line to 36° 00' S, 25°OO' W; thence by great circle to Cape 3.56
Town or Cape Agulhas, passing close S of Tristan da Diagram (3.48)
Cunha Group. If entering the Indian Ocean via Cape of Routes are by rhumb line to 35° 00' S, 40°00'W,
Good Hope, (145 miles S of), the farthest S point will be 45 thence by rhumb line to destination.
38°3O'S, TOO'W. Distances in miles:
Estrecho de Falkland Cabo de
Magallanes Is Hornos*
Cape Town or the Indian Ocean -> Rio de (3' S of
la Plata 50 Dungeness) (Stanley) (5' S of)
3.52 Cape Town 4510 4170 4620
Diagram (3.48) Cape Agulhas
Routes are by rhumb line to 35° S, 40° W, thence (15'Sof) 4570 4220 4670
rhumb line to Rio de la Plata. *W of Falkland Islands and through Estrecho de Le
Distances: 55 Maire: if E of Falkland Islands and Islas de los Estados,
Cape Town 3700 miles; subtract 25 miles.
Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of) 3760 miles. 3.56.1
3.52.1 For low-powered vessels, routes are by the rhumb line
For low-powered vessels, the route follows the direct tracks to Rio de Janeiro (3.50) as far as 27° 00'S,
rhumb line for Rio de Janeiro (3.50) as far as 20° W, and 60 20° 00' W, thence rhumb line to 35° 00' S, 40° 00' W,
continues thence by rhumb line to Rio de la Plata. thence rhumb line to destination.
Although this route increases the distances by about Although this route is about 150 miles longer, the
250 miles, lighter winds and more favourable currents advantages of lighter winds and more favourable
are experienced. currents should more than compensate.
65
Estrecho de Magallanes <-> Gulf of Guinea Falkland Islands -> Cape Town or the
3.53 Indian Ocean
Diagram (3.48) 3.57
Routes are by rhumb line to 47° 50' S, 60° 00' W, Diagram (3.48)
thence by great circle to destination. 70 The great circle distance to Cape Town is 3370 miles
47
3.57.1 SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN

but the track reaches 53° S, and it cannot therefore be From Cape Town. Great circle to 14°40'N,
recommended on account of ice and weather. 24° 55' W.
The normal route is: To Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of). Great
Rhumb line to 43° 00' S, 47° 00' W, thence: circle from 14° 40' N, 24° 55' W.
Rhumb line to 41° 10' S, 40° 00' W, thence: Between Cabot Strait or Halifax and 14°40'N,
Rhumb line to 40° 20' S, 3 3 W W, thence: 24° 55' W the route is by great circle.
Great circle to destination, passing S of Gough In Cabot Strait, a Traffic Separation Scheme (1.28)
Island. has been established.
Distances: 3.61.1
Cape Town 3800 miles; 10 For New York, all routes are by great circle to or
Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of) 3840 miles; from destination.
Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of) 3760 miles. 3.61.2
3.57.1 Distances in miles.
For low-powered vessels, routes are by rhumb line to Cabot Strait Halifax New York
36° S, 40° W, thence rhumb line to 36° S, 25° W, thence 15 Cape Town 6450 6490 6790
by great circle to destination, passing S of Tristan da Cape Agulhas (15
Cunha Group. miles S of) 6560 6600 6900
Cape of Good Hope
Cabo de Hornos -> Cape Town or the (145 miles S of) 6580 6630 6910
Indian Ocean 20
3.58 South-west coast of Africa and Gulf of
Diagram (3.48) Guinea <-> Colon (for Panama Canal)
Routes are either through Estrecho de Le Maire or E 3.62
of Islas de los Estados, as at 3.36, to join the routes from Diagrams (3.42), (4.21)
the Falkland Islands (3.57) off Stanley. 25 From ports S of Douala, routes are by great circle to
Distances: Galleons Passage, thence as at 4.28 to Colon.
Cape Town 4230 miles; From places between Douala and Takoradi, routes
Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of) 4270 miles; are round Cape Palmas, thence great circle to 11° 35' N,
Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of) 4190 miles. 60° 35' W ( 15 miles N of Tobago), thence as at 4.28 to
30 Colon.
Cape Town -> Galleons Passage and Colon 3.62.1
(for Panama Canal) W-bound, benefit may be obtained by making use of
3.59 the W-going South Equatorial Current (3.12) and
Diagrams (3.42), (4.21) North Equatorial Current (2.15 and 4.11).
From Cape Town or Cape Agulhas routes are by great 35 E-bound, currents in general are unfavourable, but it
circle to 4° 40' S, 34° 35' W, off Cabo Calcanhar, thence may be possible to make use of the E-going Equatorial
direct to Galleons Passage (2.107), thence as at 4.28 to Counter-current and Guinea Current.
Colon. 3.62.2
Distances in miles. Distances to Colon:
40 Lobito 5830 miles Bonny River 5240 miles
Cape Cape Agulhas Pointe Noire 5620 miles Lagos 5040 miles
Town (15'Sof) Libreville 5410 miles Takoradi 4730 miles
Galleons Passage 5260 5360 Douala 5400 miles Cape Palmas (20' SSW of)
Colon 6430 6530 4350 miles
45
Cape Town —> Northern part of Caribbean
Sea and Gulf of Mexico Gulf of Guinea <-> North American ports
3.60 3.63
Diagrams (3.42), (4.21) Diagrams (3.42), (2.82)
From Cape Town and Cape Agulhas routes are: 50 Routes are direct to Cape Palmas, thence:
Great circle to 4° 40'S, 34° 35'E, off Cabo Direct to 4° 20' N, 9° 20' W, thence:
Calcanhar, thence: Direct to 14° 40' N, 24° 55' W, SW of Arquipelago
Direct to Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent Channel as at de Cabo Verde, thence:
2.107, thence: Great circle to destination.
As at 4.26 to Yucatan Channel, or to Mona Passage 55 From Lobito, however, the route is direct to
and through Old Bahama Channel to Gulf of 14° 40' N, 24° 55' W.
Mexico. In Cabot Strait, a Traffic Separation Scheme (128)
Distances to Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent Channel: has been established.
From Cape Town 5340 miles; 3.63.1
From Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of) 5440 miles. 60 Distances in miles.
Cabot Strait Halifax New York
Cape Town <-> Cabot Strait, Halifax or New Lobito 5430 5470 5780
York Pointe Noire 5120 5160 5480
3.61 Libreville 4880 4920 5240
Diagrams (3.42), (2.82) 65 Douala 4870 4910 5230
For Cabot Strait or Halifax routes are: Bonny River 4720 4760 5080
From Cape Agulhas. As navigation permits to Lagos 4520 4560 4880
round Cape Point, thence great circle to Takoradi 4200 4240 4560
14° 40' N, 24° 55' W. (Routes to or from Cape Cape Palmas
Agulhas are not shown on diagrams.) 70 (20' SSW of) 3820 3860 4180
 CHAPTER 4
CARIBBEAN SEA AND GULF OF MEXICO
WINDS AND WEATHER
General description
4.1
Over the Caribbean Sea, NE to E winds prevail
throughout the year, while over the Gulf of Mexico the
wind is generally lighter and more variable in direction,
though frequently from between NE and SE. In coastal
waters, strong N winds may reach gale force at times
over the Gulf. For the whole area, wind speeds are
mainly light or moderate except for occasional
hurricanes, see 2.5, which may affect the area from June
to November. Most hurricanes track N of Cuba, and
they rarely occur S of 15° N.
The weather over the area is generally partly cloudy
with scattered showers. Sunny spells are frequent and,
from May to December, periods of heavy rain and
thunderstorms are frequent. Squalls may occur at
anytime, but fog seldom occurs at sea.
Visibility is generally good throughout the year
though it may at times be drastically reduced by heavy
rain.
For Northers, see 2.3.
SWELL
General description
4.5
Swells are generally lower in the Gulf of Mexico than
in the Caribbean Sea.
In the Caribbean Sea the prevailing direction is from
NE to E; in the Gulf of Mexico, from March to
September it is from E to SE, and from October to
February it is from NE.
Highest swells occur in an area round 13° N, 77° W in
the Caribbean Sea, especially in June and July, when the
frequency of swell greater than 4 m is 20 per cent. These
swells are invariably short or average in length.
CURRENTS
General description
4.11
The North Equatorial Current (2.15) flows WNW
through the Caribbean Sea with little change of
direction until it approaches Yucatan Channel where it
turns to the N. It leaves an anti-clockwise eddy in the S
part of the sea, Sofaboutl2° N. There is also an E-going
counter-current close to the S coast of E and central
Cuba.
In the Gulf of Mexico, part of the N-going flow from
Yucatan Channel fans out in directions between SW and
NW. Currents setting in these directions occupy most of
the Gulf W of a line from Cabo Catoche to close W of the
Mississippi delta. From the NW flow along this line,
water fans out NE and then shortly recurves to join the
SE flow extending from the Mississippi delta to the W
approaches to Straits of Florida. This SE-going stream
joins the NE-going stream which emerges from Yucatan
Channel and the combined flow continues E, and
through Straits of Florida as the Florida Current. The
emerging stream meeting the NW flowing water of the
North Sub-tropical Current, turns N off the E coast of
10 Florida and forms the beginning of the Gulf Stream.
Along the W coast of Florida there is a N-going
current which, with the SE flow coming from the
Mississippi delta, forms an anti-clockwise eddy in the E
part of the Gulf of Mexico.
15 There is little seasonal variation in the pattern of the
currents.
The average current rates in most of the Caribbean
Sea are about 1 knot, increasing on the W side of
Yucatan Channel to about 4 knots. The strongest
20 currents are observed in Straits of Florida in about
25° 00' N, 80° 00' W and for about 300 miles N from that
position. Here the average rate is nearly 3 knots in
summer and 2\ knots in winter.
Over most of the Gulf of Mexico the average rates are
25 about 1 knot, but N-going sets of about 1^ knots are
reported in summer near the Mexican coast N of
Tampico and SE-going sets of a similar magnitude for
much of the year between the Mississippi delta and
Cuba.
30
NOTES AND CAUTIONS
Navigation
35 4.15
In the Caribbean Sea and Gulf of Mexico, and in the
channels leading thereto, great care is necessary near the
cays and banks, as some of the charts are based on old
and imperfect surveys.
40 Furthermore, depths over the shoals may be less than
those charted owing to the growth of the coral of which
many of them are composed or to the imprecise nature of
the least depths reported over them. Shoal water should
be approached with caution at all times and given a wide
45 berth when conditions for fixing are poor: many of the
banks are steep-to.
4.15.1
Caution. Strong currents can be expected in the
entrances and channels leading to the Caribbean Sea and
50 Gulf of Mexico, particularly in Straits of Florida.
Having chosen the route, the mariner should
invariably consult Admiralty Sailing Directions for
details of currents and tidal streams affecting it.
55 Entrance Channels
4.16
Diagram (4.21)
The Caribbean Sea may be approached through
Crooked Island Passage, Caicos Passage or Turks Island
60 Passage, all of which lead to Windward Passage.
Crooked Island Passage is the most frequently used.
Caicos Passage is not lighted, and Turks Island
Passage, not lighted in its S approach, is not
recommended for N-bound vessels at night.
65 Other entrances in common use are:
Mona Passage, which is much frequented and
presents no difficulty. Although subject to heavy
squalls it is safer than Turks Island Passage.
Sombrero Passage, which is not lighted in its S
70 approach.
51
4.21 CARIBBEAN SEA AND GULF OF MEXICO
The Channel between Saint Lucia and Saint
Vincent.
The passages N and S of Tobago.
In many cases routes through the various passages
ROUTES
English Channel <-> Caribbean Sea and Gulf
of Mexico
4.21
Diagram (4.21)
Routes are as follows.
Belize. Providence Channels or Turks Island
Passage and Windward Passage are suitable.
Kingston or Colon. Turks Island Passage and
Windward Passage are suitable.
Colon or Curacao. Mona Passage or Sombrero
Passage are suitable.
Gulf of Mexico may be approached, either N of
Cuba, through Providence Channels or Old Bahama
Channel and Nicholas Channel, or S of Cuba through
Caribbean Sea and Yucatan Channel. For routes within
Gulf of Mexico, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Straits of Florida, through which the current runs
strongly to the N, is best for departure from Gulf of
Mexico.
For distance through these passages, see 4.29.8 and
2.85.4.
Bermuda —> Habana
4.22
Diagram (4.21)
The route is through North-East Providence
Channel, North-West Providence Channel and Straits
of Florida.
Distance: 1130 miles.
4.22.1
For low-powered vessels, routes from the W end of
the North-West Providence Channel are:
Either,
Across Straits of Florida to Fowev Rocks, thence:
Close off Florida Reets, as directed in Admiralty
Sailing Directions, to Sand Key, thence:
Across the Florida Current again to Habana.
Or, preferably by day,
Along the W edge of Great Bahama Bank to
Habana. See Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Habana —> Bermuda
4.23
Diagram (4.21)
The route is through Straits of Florida, thence direct
from the NW end of Little Bahama Bank.
For Caution on approaching Bermuda, see 2.38.
Distance: 1150 miles.
Bermuda <-> Kingston
4.24
Diagram (4.21)
From Bermuda the route is through either Crooked
Island Passage or Caicos Passage (see 4.16), thence W of
Great Inagua Island and through Windward Passage.
Cautions. Morant Cays have been the scene of many
wrecks. Currents in their vicinity vary greatly, both in
direction and rate. If passing them at night, ships should
keep well N of them.
For Caution on approaching Bermuda, see 2.38.
differ little in distance, and selection will depend
principally on the ship's particular requirements.
For distances from these passages, see 4.29-
4.29.8.
4.24.1
Distances:
Via Crooked Island Passage 1180 miles;
Via Caicos Passage 1110 miles.
15
Colon (for Panama Canal) <-» Gulf of Mexico
4.25
Diagram (4.21)
North-bound. From the entrance to the canal
20 between the breakwaters off Colon, the route runs NNE
to round New Bank at a prudent distance, thence direct
to Yucatan Channel.
South-bound. From Yucatan Channel the route is:
To a position outside the 200 m depth contour off
25 South-West Point, Grand Cayman Island,
thence:
To a point off the SW extremity of Pedro Bank,
thence:
Either, direct to Colon, passing between New Bank
30 and Alice Shoal or, if unsure of the position, the route
continues SE till New Bank has been cleared and a SSW
course can be set for Colon.
Caution. New Bank and Alice Shoal are charted
mainly from a survey of 1835.
35 Due allowance must be paid to the prevailing W-
going current between Colon and Jamaica.
A vessel entering the W part of Gulf of Mexico from
the Caribbean Sea should be kept in the deep water in
Yucatan Channel, all precautions being taken against
40 the N-going current and her position continually
checked to identify the point of crossing the edge of
Campeche Bank.
The edge of the bank is generally marked by ripplings,
and only a short distance within it the water becomes
45 discoloured. The bank has not been subjected to a
modern survey, and new reports of shoal patches are
often received, so sounding should be continuous when
crossing it. Dangers on the bank are steep-to and
sometimes indicated by discoloured water.
50 For routes W of Thunder Knoll, and from Yucatan
Channel to ports in Gulf of Mexico, see Admiralty
Sailing Directions.
4.25.1
Distances from Colon, passing W of New Bank: if
55 passing E of New Bank, add 15 miles:
Cabo Catoche (28 miles ENE of) 965 miles;
Cabo San Antonio (10 miles W of) 900 miles;
New Orleans (Mississippi River South Pass) 1380
miles;
60 S entrance to Panama Canal (Balboa) 45 miles.
Yucatan Channel *-* Eastern part of
Caribbean Sea
65 4.26
Diagram (4.21)
Cabo Catoche should be given a wide berth on
account of the shoals N of it.
East-bound. From 7 miles S of Cabo San Antonio,
70 the route is:
 CARIBBEAN SEA AND GULF OF MEXICO 4.Z9.8

Along the S coast of Cuba to pass 5 miles S of Cabo Habana 585 miles;
Cruz, thence: New Orleans (Mississippi River Gulf Outlet Canal)
5 miles S of Navassa Island, thence: 1060 miles.
5 miles S of Pointe de Gravios, thence: Via Windward Passage:
To a position 5 miles S of Alta Vela. 5 Kingston 480 miles;
This track, mostly under the lee of the land, makes use Belize 1080 miles;
of the E-going counter-current (4.11). Off the coast of Colon 980 miles.
Cuba between Cabo San Antonio and Cabo Cruz, 4.29.3
special caution is required because onshore sets Caicos Passage via Old Bahama Channel:
sometimes run strongly. '0 New Orleans (Mississippi River Gulf Outlet Canal)
West-bound. From Alta Vela the route passes N of 1070 miles;
Jamaica, thence as direct as navigation permits to Cabo Habana 590 miles.
San Antonio. Kingston, passing W of Great Inagua Island 390
miles.
Eastern part of Caribbean Sea ~* South 15 4.29.4
American ports Turks Island Passage via Old Bahama Channel:
4.27 New Orleans (Mississippi River Gulf Outlet Canal)
Diagram (4.21) 1160 miles;
For destinations E of the Caribbean Sea, the best Habana 685 miles.
route from Alta Vela passes between Saint Lucia and 20 Via Windward Passage:
Saint Vincent and S of Barbados. Belize 1030 miles;
Colon 925 miles;
Colon (for Panama Canal) <-> Trinidad, Kingston 420 miles.
Galleons Passage and Tobago To Tampico and ports in Gulf of Mexico farther
25 S, Yucatan Channel gives the shortest route: to ports N
4.28 and E of Tampico, Old Bahama Channel gives the
Diagram (4.21) shortest.
East-bound passages are best made keeping close 4.29.5
inshore, passing S of Aruba and Curacao, and through Mona Passage
Canal de Margarita. 30 Kingston 520 miles;
West-bound, advantage can be taken of the W-going Curacao 390 miles;
North Equatorial Current, by passing N of the outlying Colon 885 miles;
islands and dangers. Belize 1180 miles.
Distances from Colon (by either route): 4.29.6
Trinidad (Port of Spain) 1140 miles; 35 Sombrero Passage
Galleons Passage 1170 miles; Kingston 755 miles;
Tobago (15 miles N of North Point) 1180 miles. Curacao 500 miles;
Colon 1090 miles;
Distances from entrances to Caribbean Sea Belize 1410 miles.
4.29 40 4.29.7
Diagram (4.21) Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent Channel
Straits of Florida (N end) Barbados (Bridgetown) 85 miles;
Dry Tortugas (24° 30' N, 83° 05' W) 285 miles; Kingston 950 miles;
(From Dry Tortugas (24° 25' N, 83° 00' W) to N Curacao 480 miles;
end 290 miles.) 45 Colon 1150 miles;
New Orleans (Mississippi River Gulf Outlet Canal) Belize 1590 miles.
720 miles; Via Mona Passage and Old Bahama Channel:
Habana 285 miles. New Orleans (Mississippi River Gulf Outlet Canal)
4.29.1 1860 miles;
North-East Providence Channel 50 Habana 1370 miles.
Dry Tortugas (24° 30' N, 83° 05' W) 380 miles; 4.29.8
New Orleans (Mississippi River Gulf Outlet Canal) Galleons Passage
805 miles: Kingston 1010 miles;
Habana 370 miles. Curacao 480 miles;
4.29.2 55 Via Mona Passage and Old Bahama Channel:
Crooked Island Passage (from landfall on San New Orleans (Mississippi River Gulf Outlet
Salvador) via Old Bahama Channel: Canal) 1960 miles.

53
 CHAPTER 5
MEDITERRANEAN SEA
WINDS AND WEATHER
General remarks
5.1
The weather of the Mediterranean Sea is markedly
seasonal, being characterised by hot dry summers with
mainly light or moderate winds, and mild rainy winters
with a rather high frequency of strong winds and gales.
The situation of this sea, surrounded by land, much of
which is either mountainous or desert, and the indented
nature of parts of the coast, leads to the occurrence of a
large number of local winds, many with special names
and characteristics, and some of which can give
extremely violent conditions. Information concerning
these local winds will be found in Admiralty Sailing
Directions.
Over the greater part of the open waters of the
Mediterranean Sea, winds from between N and W are
the most frequent, though the passage of depressions
across the area causes great variations in both the
direction and force of the wind. From about November
to March these depressions are frequent and often
vigorous, while from about May to September they are
less common and much less intense.
For convenience in describing the winds and weather
of the Mediterranean Sea, the area has been divided into
the W part of the Mediterranean Sea, W of the Sicilian
Channel, and the E part, E of the Sicilian Channel.
It is emphasised that the statements which follow
apply to the open sea away from the influence of the
land, in the vicinity of which marked differences are
likely to be found.
Western part of Mediterranean Sea
5.2
November to March. In the more confined part of
the area W of about 1° W, winds mostly blow parallel
with the coast, westerlies being somewhat more
common than easterlies from January to March, and
very considerably more frequent in November and
December.
Over the remainder of the area as far E as the
longitude of Sardegna the most frequent wind
directions are from between N and W, with a bias
towards the latter direction in the S part of the area.
In the N part of the Tyrrhenian Sea there is no clearly
predominant wind direction, though winds from some
N point are more common than those from a S point. In
the S part of this sea and in the Sicilian Channel the
prevailing direction is NW.
In January, the stormiest month in most of the W part
of the Mediterranean Sea, winds reach force 7 or above
on 6-9 days per month in the NW and on 3-7 days per
month elsewhere. Most of the winter gales are from
between N and W, though NE gales are not uncommon
and gales from other directions may occasionally occur.
Weather at this season is subject to rapid changes due to
the passage of depressions with their associated frontal
belts of cloud and rain; the rain is usually heavier but of
shorter duration than in the British Isles.
Visibility over the open sea is generally good except
when reduced by rain, but it may at times be only
10 moderate with winds from a S quarter.
5.2.1
May to September. In that part of the area S of
about 40° N and W of the longitude of Sardegna, winds
are most frequent from between E and NE or from
75 between W and SW, the former being slightly more
common. Elsewhere, from June to August the most
frequent wind directions are from between N and W,
but in May and September there is no clearly
predominant wind direction.
20 Winds are likely to reach force 7 or above on 1-3 days
per month in the NW part of the area; elsewhere, winds
of that strength are rare at this season, but in September
the mariner should be alert to the possibility of rapid
development of depressions and squalls which can give
25 unexpected onsets of strong winds.
Weather in July and August is generally fine with little
or no rainfall, especially in the S and E. Cloud amounts
are larger and rain is somewhat more common in May
and September, especially in the latter month and NE of
30 a line joining the Gulf of Lions, Sardegna, and Sicilia.
Visibility is generally good, though occasional patches
of sea fog may be experienced in early summer, and with
winds from a S quarter haze is sometimes prevalent.
5.2.2
35 April and October. In the transitional months of
April and October conditions can be taken as
intermediate between winter and summer, though it
must be realised that considerable variations are likely
from year to year.
40
Eastern part of the Mediterranean Sea
5.3
November to March. S of about 35° N, winds are
most often from between SW and N, while N of that
45 parallel between Sicilia and Greece there is no clearly
prevailing wind direction.
In the greater part of the Adriatic Sea and the N part
of the Aegean Sea winds from between N and E are the
most frequent, though these are often interrupted by
50 winds from a S quarter blowing in advance of an
approaching depression.
In the S part of the Aegean Sea, S winds occur more
frequently than in the N. However, winds blow mainly,
as in the N, from between N and E.
55 The confined nature of the Adriatic Sea gives rise to
many local effects, details of which will be found in
Admiralty Sailing Directions.
At the height of the season, winds are likely to reach
force 7 or above on 6-9 days per month in the Aegean
60 Sea and E part of the Ionian Sea, and 3-6 days per month
elsewhere in the area.
Weather at this season, as in the W part of the
Mediterranean Sea, is subject to rapid changes caused
by moving depressions, and the statements made in
65 article 5.2 for that area apply equally to the E part of the
Mediterranean Sea.
Visibility is generally good except when reduced by
rain, but with winds from a S quarter, which are
experienced in advance of a depression, it is often only
70 moderate.
 MEDITERRANEAN SEA
5.3.1
May to September. Over the whole of the E part of
the Mediterranean Sea, other than the Aegean Sea, the
prevailing winds are NW throughout the period, and
particularly persistent in July and August and E of the
20th meridian, where winds from directions other than
between N and W are uncommon.
Over the Aegean Sea, the prevailing wind is N; here
also, the degree of persistence is particularly high in July
and August, during which months the great majority of
winds are from between NE and NW.
From May to August winds are likely to reach force 7
only on rare occasions, except over the Aegean Sea in
July and August, where winds of this strength may be
expected on one or two days per month. In September
the frequency of these winds is 1-3 days per month over
most of the E part of the Mediterranean Sea, but the
mariner should be particularly alert to the possibility of
rapid development of depressions and squalls which can
give unexpected onsets of strong winds and violent
conditions.
Over the greater part of the open waters of the area,
weather at this season is fine with small amounts of cloud
and little or no rain, especially in the S and E of the area
in July and August. Over the N part of the Aegean and
Adriatic Seas, some rain is likely throughout the period.
Visibility is generally good, though occasional patches
of sea fog may be experienced in early summer, most
often in the N part of the area; with winds from a S
quarter, haze is sometimes prevalent.
5.3.2
April and October. In the transitional months of
April and October conditions can be taken as
intermediate between winter and summer, though it
must be realised that considerable variations are likely
from year to year.
SWELL
General remarks
5.11
Heavy swells are more frequent in the W part than the
E part of the Mediterranean Sea.
ROUTES
General note
5.25
Routes from the Strait of Gibraltar and Port Said to
principal ports in the Mediterranean Sea are given
below. Main routes through the Adriatic and Aegean
Seas are described in Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Dhiorix Korinthou
5.26
The saving of distance by using Dhiorix Korinthou
(Corinth Canal) instead of entering the Aegean Sea
through Steno Elafonisou is most marked in the case of
passages between ports in the Adriatic Sea or on the W
coast of Greece and ports in the Aegean or Black Seas.
To a lesser degree there is a saving of distance between
Stretto di Messina, and ports in the Aegean and Black
Seas.
Thus, from Brindisi the saving to Piraievs is about
5.27.1
In the W part of the Mediterranean Sea, between
Corse and Islas Baleares, the percentage frequency of
swell greater than 4 m is:
June to September 1-2 per cent.
October 2-5 per cent.
November to March 10 per cent.
April and May 2-5 per cent.
These swells are invariably short or average in length.
10
CURRENTS
Mediterranean Sea, Adriatic Sea and
Aegean Sea
15 5.16
In the Mediterranean basin, the rate of evaporation is
about three times as great as the inflow from the rivers
which discharge into it. In consequence, there is a
continuous inflow of surface water through the Strait of
20 Gibraltar from the Atlantic Ocean.
Evaporation causes the Mediterranean water to
increase its salinity; this dense water sinks and its excess
emerges through the Strait of Gibraltar as a W-going
sub-surface current, and a smaller quantity similarly
25 reaches the Black Sea.
The main body of water entering the Strait of
Gibraltar flows E along the N coast of Africa; this is the
most constant part of the main circulation, but it
gradually loses strength as it penetrates E. On reaching
30 Malta Channel part of it turns N to circulate counter-
clockwise in the Western Mediterranean; the remainder
continues through the Malta Channel and along the
African coast, turning N at the end of the Mediterranean
Sea and then returning W along the N shores until it
35 reaches the Ionian Sea, where it turns S to rejoin the
main E-going flow. Branches of this current enter the
Aegean and Adriatic Seas, giving rise to counter-
clockwise circulations in those areas.
40
ICE
5.21
No ice occurs in the Mediterranean Sea.
130 miles, and to Istanbul about 100 miles: from
Messina to Piraievs it is about 80 miles, and to tstanbul
50 miles. For regulations regarding the canal, including
55 pilotage, maximum permissible draughts and times of
opening, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Strait of Gibraltar -» Western part of
Mediterranean Sea, except South shore
60 5.27
Diagram (5.27)
Full advantage should be taken of the E-going current
by keeping well away from the Spanish coast and
passing about 20 miles off Cabo de Gata.
65 5.27.1
For places between Barcelona and the region of
Genova. Routes for ships passing N of Islas Baleares
continue about 20 miles off the Spanish coast until
departure can be taken for destination from abreast of
70 Cabo de San Antonio.
57
 5.27.2 MEDITERRANEAN SEA

5.27.2 current, thence along the Spanish coast to Strait of

For Napoli. Routes pass close S of Capo Spartivento, Gibraltar, keeping as close to the coast as navigation
thence as navigation permits. permits.
5.27.3 5.30.1
For Palermo or Messina. Routes are direct to the N 5 From Tarabalus, the route is direct to join the above
coast of Sicilia, passing N of the dangers extending N route at the end of the Traffic Separation Scheme off
from lies de la Galite, and giving Keith Reef a wide Cap Bon.
berth. From the Algerian coast, routes join the above
route off Cabo de Gata.
Western part of Mediterranean Sea, except 10 5.30.2
the South shore -» Strait of Gibraltar From Adriatic Sea or Dhiorix Korinthou, alternative
5.28 slightly shorter routes are through Stretto di Messina,
Diagram (5.27) where a Traffic Separation Scheme (1.28) is in force,
All routes make Cabo de Gata, thence follow the coast thence along the N coast of Sicilia, thence joining the
as close as navigation permits to Strait of Gibraltar, to 75 route at 5.30, N of lies de la Galite.
avoid the full strength of the E-going current.
5.28.1 Routes to and from Port Said
From Marseille or Barcelona, routes make the 5.31
Spanish coast at Cabo de San Antonio and thence follow Diagrams (5.29), (5.27)
it to Cabo de Gata. 20 From places in W part of Mediterranean Sea, S and W
5.28.2 of Barcelona, E-bound routes join 5.29-5.29.2: W-bound
From North Italian ports, routes passing N of Islas routes are as at 5.30 until N of lies de la Galite, thence,
Baleares make the Spanish coast at Cabo de Palos, and either following that route for W ports, or as navigation
thence follow the coast to Cabo de Gata: those passing S permits to other destinations.
of Islas Baleares make Cabo de Gata direct. 25 Between Port Said and other places in Mediterranean
5.28.3 Sea, including Barcelona, routes are direct. For
From Messina or Palermo, routes are direct to descriptions of routes through Adriatic and Aegean
Cabo de Gata, giving Keith Reef and the banks Seas, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
extending N from lies de la Galite a wide berth.
5.28.4 30 Distances through Mediterranean Sea
From other ports, routes are as direct as navigation 5.35
permits to Cabo de Gata. Distances are in miles, and are for the routes
described at 5.27-5.31.
Strait of Gibraltar -» Algerian coast and Where E-bound and W-bound routes differ in
Eastern part of Mediterranean Sea 35 distance, the list gives the E-bound distance and
5.29 indicates by note where the difference is appreciable.
Diagrams (5.27), (5.29) Suez Canal. Distance from the Fairway light-buoy
From Strait of Gibraltar, full advantage should be off Port Said to the seaward end of Newport Rock
taken of the E-going current by keeping well away from Channel in the entrance to Suez Bay is 99 miles.
the Spanish coast. 40 Strait of Port
To Isola di Pantelleria the route is: Gibraltar Said
10 miles N of Alboran, thence: Algiers 415 1500
Along the African coast, keeping 10-20 miles off the Barcelona 525a 1590b
salient points, and through Canal de la Galite, Marseille 705a 1510c
passing 5 miles N of Cap Serrat, Les Fratelli and 45 Genova 865ad 1420
Ras Enghela, thence: Napoli 980 1110
Through the Traffic Separation Schemes (1.28) off Stretto di Messina 1030 935
lies Cani and Cap Bon, thence: Venezia 1720ef 1300
5 miles N of Isola di Pantelleria. Trieste 1720ef 1300
For African ports, the above route is left as 50 Steno Elafonisou 1380e 565
appropriate. Piraievs (via Dhiorix
5.29.1 Korinthou) 1430e —
For Tarabalus, the route continues direct from the Piraievs (via Aegean Sea) 1490e 590
end of the Traffic Separation Scheme off Cap Bon. Thessaloniki 1700e 730g
5.29.2 55 Canakkale Bogazi (The
For Malta, the route from Isola di Pantelleria passes Dardanelles) (SW entrance) 165Oe 65Og
5 miles N of GHawdex, thence to Malta. Izmir 1640e 610g
For other destinations, routes from Isola di Beirut 2O2Oe 220
Pantelleria are as direct as navigation permits. Port Said 1910e —
60 Tarabalus 1080e 990
Eastern part of Mediterranean Sea and Malta 980e 935
Algerian coast -» Strait of Gibraltar
5.30 Notes
Diagrams (5.27), (5.29) a. W-bound subtract 10 miles
From E Mediterranean ports, except Tarabalus, 65 b. N or S of Sicilia.
routes are as navigation permits to a position 5 miles N c. N of Sicilia. If S of Sicilia, add 55 miles.
of Isola di Pantelleria, thence through the Traffic d. N or S of Islas Baleares.
Separation Schemes (1.28) off Cap Bon and lies Cani to e. W-bound add 15 miles.
a position 25 miles N of lies de la Galite. Thence to Cabo f. S of Sicilia.
de Gata, avoiding the full strength of the E-going 70 g. Via Steno Karpathou.
 CHAPTER 6
INDIAN OCEAN
WINDS AND WEATHER
6.1
The following description of the winds and weather of
the region of the Indian Ocean amplifies the general
statement given in The Mariner's Handbook. More
precise information about oceanic winds and weather or
detailed information about specific localities should be
sought in the appropriate Admiralty Sailing Directions.
In reading the following description reference should be
made to World Climatic (Diagrams (1.13a) and (1.13b))
and to Routeing Charts 5126(1) to 5126(12).
North Indian Ocean
6.2
The Winds and weather of the whole North Indian
Ocean are dominated by the alteration of the Monsoons,
which are seasonal winds generated by the changes in
pressure resulting from the heating and cooling of the
land mass of Asia.
South-west Monsoon
6.3
From June to September the heating of the Asiatic
land mass results in the establishment of a large area of
low pressure centred approximately over the NW part of
India. T h e South-east T r a d e Wind of the South Indian
Ocean is drawn across the equator, deflected to the right
by the effects of the earth's rotation, and joins the
cyclonic circulation round the area of low pressure
mentioned above. T h e resulting SW wind, felt in the
North Indian Ocean, the Arabian Sea, and the Bay of
Bengal from June to September is known as the South-
west Monsoon. T h e general distribution of pressure and
wind at this season is shown on Diagram (1.13b), from
which it will be noted that in the E part of the Arabian
Sea the prevailing wind direction is more nearly W than
SW.
T h e strength of the wind varies considerably between
different parts of the ocean. It is strongest in the W part
of the Arabian Sea where, over a considerable area, the
wind averages force 6 at the height of the season and
reaches force 7 or above on more than 10 days per
month; the worst area is some 250 miles E of Suqufra,
where in July about half the observations report winds
of force 7 or above.
In the extreme N part, and in the E part of the Arabian
Sea in July and August, the monsoon wind averages
about force 4, although it often freshens to force 5 or 6,
and attains force 7 on more than 3 to 6 days per month N
of about 10" N.
In the Bay of Bengal the average strength of the
monsoon wind is force 4 to 5; over the greater part of the
bay the wind reaches force 7 or above on 5 to 10 days per
month in July and August.
Between the equator and about 5° N , and E of 60° E,
winds are generally lighter and only average about force
3; they are also considerably more variable in direction,
though generally from between S and W.
In Malacca Strait the wind is mostly light and is
subject to considerable variation in direction and
strength due to land and sea breezes and other local
influences. In the N part of the strait the winds are most
often SW, while in the S the most frequent direction is
SE. Although the Monsoon is generally light, there are
10 often periods of stronger winds accompanied by squalls
which sometimes reach gale force. Of particular note are
the squalls, widely known as 'Sumatras', which blow
from some W point and occur most frequently at night;
they are described in Admiralty Sailing Directions.
75 T h e weather over most of the North Indian Ocean
during the South-west Monsoon season is cloudy and
unsettled, with considerable rainfall, especially off the
W coasts of India and Burma, where it is very heavy. In
the W part of the Arabian Sea, however, cloud amount
20 and rainfall decrease towards the N and W and both are
generally small in the vicinity of the African and Arabian
coasts. Rainfall is also small at this time in the immediate
vicinity of the E coasts of Sri Lanka and India as far N as
about 15° N.
25 Visibility is good in most parts of the area except when
reduced by rain, and in the N and W parts of the Arabian
Sea where it is often only moderate and sometimes poor
within about 200 miles of the coast particularly during
the South-west Monsoon period, when, although the
30 sky may be clear, the surface visibility may be reduced;
in this latter zone in July and August visibility is likely to
be less than 5 miles on about 50 per cent of occasions
because of dust haze.
T h e waters off the S Arabian coast in the vicinity of
35 the Kuria Muria Islands are frequently affected by sea
fog during the South-west Monsoon.
North-east Monsoon
6.4
40 From November to March, a NE wind is experienced
in the North Indian Ocean, the Arabian Sea, and the Bay
of Bengal. This wind is known as the North-east
Monsoon. The general distribution of pressure and
wind at this season is shown on Diagram (1.13a), from
45 which it will be observed that over the E part of Arabian
Sea, and towards the equator, the prevailing wind
direction is more nearly N than NE.
There are two areas in which the Monsoon is subject
to considerable interruption, or in which the wind is
50 rather variable in direction. The first is in the Arabian
Sea N of about 20° N, where the variations in the
direction and strength of the wind are caused by the
passage of depressions across Iran or along the Makran
coast, and the second is between the equator and about
55 5° N, and E of about 90° E, where winds, though mostly
N, are generally light and somewhat variable in
direction.
Over the greater part of the North Indian Ocean the
strength of the North-east Monsoon averages force 3 to
60 4 at the height of the season, though towards the equator
it averages force 2 to 3, except W of about 5 5° E; it is also
only light in the Malacca Strait. Winds are likely to reach
force 7 only on rare occasions.
The weather in the Arabian Sea and Bay of Bengal is
65 generally fine with small amounts of cloud and little or
no rain. Cloudiness and rainfall increase towards the S
and E, especially in December and January when
considerable rain occurs in the S part of the Bay of
Bengal S of a line joining the N extremities of Sri Lanka
70 and Sumatera.
59
 6.5
Visibility over the open ocean away from the effects of
land is generally good or very good at this season, and
fog is unknown. In the N and E parts of the Arabian Sea,
however, visibility is often reduced by dust haze,
especially in the latter part of the season, while in the N
part of the Bay of Bengal it may be reduced by smoke
haze and land mists carried seaward by the prevailing N
winds.
Inter-monsoon seasons
6.5
The months of April and May, and October, are
characterised by the N and S shift across the area of the
Intertropical Convergence Zone (6.10) and by the
progressive replacement of the North-east Monsoon by
the South-west Monsoon in April and May, and vice
versa in October. The South-west Monsoon becomes
established in the S earlier than in the N, and the reverse
is true for the North-east Monsoon. The width of the
Equatorial Trough, however, varies greatly from day to
day and its movements are irregular; consequently the
whole area can be regarded primarily as one of light
winds (apart from squalls and tropical storms) with a
rather high frequency of calms, and with the oncoming
monsoon becoming gradually established.
Except in squalls, which are common, or in
association with tropical storms, winds over the open
ocean are likely to reach force 7 or above only on rare
occasions, but in the W part of the Arabian Sea between
5° N and 10° N and W of 55° E, SW winds of this
strength may be expected on about 2 days in May. In the
Malacca Strait Sumatras (6.3) occur occasionally.
The weather varies considerably, fair or fine
conditions alternating with cloudy, squally weather with
frequent heavy showers and thunderstorms; these
conditions spread N during April and May, and retreat
S during October. In the N part of the Arabian Sea,
however, fine weather predominates during these inter-
monsoon months.
Visibility over the open ocean is good except when
reduced by heavy rain. Near the shores of the N and E
parts of the Arabian Sea, however, it is sometimes
reduced by dust haze in April and May.
Gulf of Aden
6.6
The winds in the Gulf of Aden form part of the
monsoon circulation of Asia; the North-east Monsoon
prevails but winds are constrained by topography as
they enter the Gulf of Aden and blow generally from an
ENE or E direction, veering sharply to SE on nearing
the Straits of Bab el Mandeb. In May, wind direction is
variable, while from June to September SW winds
prevail.
In the Gulf of Aden wind speeds average force 2—4
from December to March, but winds are funnelled in
the approaches to the Straits of Bab el Mandeb to reach
force 5 to 6 and occasionally force 7 to 8 in the Straits:
otherwise gales are rare. From June to September
within the main part of the Gulf, the strength of the
South-west Monsoon averages about force 4, and winds
reach force 7 or above on 1 to 2 days per month. The
average strength of the wind and the frequency of gales,
however, increase rapidly towards the E end of the Gulf,
and E of Raas Caseyr winds are likely to reach force 7 or
above on 10 to 15 days in July. Tropical cyclones are
very rare in the Gulf, only 3 or 4 being experienced in the
last 50 years.
INDIAN OCEAN
Weather and visibility
6.7
The weather over the whole of the Gulf of Aden is
generally fine, with small amounts of cloud; when
5 rainfall does occur it is in the form of showers and may
be heavy. Total rainfall is slight.
Over the open sea, fog and mist are rare except in the
extreme E part of the Gulf of Aden during the South-
west Monsoon season. Sand and dust haze is however
10 widespread from June to August, visibility at this time
of year being less than 5 miles on about 1 day in 4 or 5 on
the African side of the Gulf of Aden, and 1 day in 2 on
the Arabian side of the Gulf. In September the
frequency of haze decreases greatly, while from
15 December to February it is not usual. Sandstorms,
which mostly occur in the Gulf of Aden from May to
August or September, may occasionally reduce visibility
to 50 metres or less.
20 Gulf of Oman
6.8
The following remarks apply to open water away from
the local effects of land. Near land, land and sea breezes
and other local effects are likely to cause considerable
25 modification. Detailed information about specific
localities will be found in Admiralty Sailing Directions.
From December to February, winds are mainly from
some N point with NW as the most frequent direction.
Occasionally, South-easterlies may occur ahead of
30 depressions advancing across the Persian Gulf. From
March to May winds are very variable, with north-
westerlies decreasing and south-westerlies increasing in
frequency until, by May, the latter winds predominate.
From June to August the prevailing wind is SE, being an
35 offshoot of the South-west Monsoon of the Arabian Sea.
From September to November the frequency of SE
winds decreases and that of northerlies increases, but
wind direction is, in general, very variable.
Winds reach force 7 on about 1 to 2 days per month
40 from December to March, but rarely attain force 8.
Squalls are common. On rare occasions the Gulf may be
affected by a tropical storm originating in the Arabian
Sea.
Rain and large amounts of cloud are practically
45 confined to the period November to April, and are
associated with E-moving depressions, in the intervals
between which fine weather with small amounts of cloud
prevails. In summer, the influence of the monsoon
causes an increase in cloudiness in July and August.
50 Visibility is for the most part good or very good from
November to February; after this, dust haze causes a
progressive deterioration until in June and July,
visibility is less than 5 miles on 10 to 12 days per month
over the open sea, and still more often near the coast.
55 Dust haze decreases considerably after July.
Duststorms or sandstorms occur in all seasons, but are
most frequent during June and July and least so during
the winter; during their occurrence they often reduce
visibility to less than 500 metres.
60
South Indian Ocean
6.9
The winds and weather of the South Indian Ocean are
governed by the advance of the North Indian Ocean
65 monsoon into the S hemisphere from November to
February and its retreat from June to September; the
result is the establishment, in this zone, of alternating
seasonal winds. S of this zone the normal wind and
pressure distribution, as outlined in The Mariner'i
70 Handbook, prevails.
 INDIAN OCEAN
Intertropical Convergence Zone
6.10
This region is known variously as the Intertropical
Convergence Zone (ITCZ) the Intertropical Front
(ITF), the Doldrum belt, the Equatorial Trough, the
Equatorial Front, or the Shearline. It is, in the Indian
Ocean, S of the equator from about November to April,
and reaches its most S position in February. The winds
and weather are similar to those encountered in the
Intertropical Convergence Zone in other oceans, and
consist of fair weather, calms, and light variable winds
alternating with squalls, heavy showers, and
thunderstorms. Both the width of the belt and its
position vary considerably from day to day; the former
averages about 200 miles but it may at times be much
more, while at others it may be reduced to almost
nothing by a strong burst of the South-east Trade Wind.
Visibility in this zone is good except in heavy rain.
North-west Monsoon
6.11
During the period from November to March, when
the Equatorial Trough is situated in the S hemisphere,
the North-east Monsoon of the North Indian Ocean is
drawn across the equator, deflected to the left by the
effect of the earth's rotation, and is felt in the N part of
the South Indian Ocean as a NW wind, known as the
North-west Monsoon. See Diagram (1.13a).
Winds are in general light, and vary considerably in
direction, but in the W part of the zone the prevailing
direction is more nearly N than NW, and becomes NE
close to the African coast and N of about 10° S. In the
Mozambique Channel a N wind prevails as far as 15° S
to 17° S; it is here known as the Northern Monsoon.
In the E part of the ocean just S of Jawa, and in the
Timor and Arafura Seas, the prevailing wind direction
is between W and NW.
Except in squalls, which are common, or in
association with tropical storms (6.15) winds over the
greater part of the zone are likely to reach force 7 or
above only on rare occasions.
The weather is generally rather cloudy and unsettled,
and rain, mostly in the form of heavy showers, is
frequent. Visibility is good except in rain.
South-east Trade Wind
6.12
This wind blows on the equatorial side of the anti-
clockwise circulation round the oceanic high-pressure
area situated in about 30° S. In this ocean, however, the
oceanic anticyclone seldom consists of a single cell; more
frequently it contains a more or less regular succession
of E-moving anticyclones, from the N sides of which
blow the Trade Wind, permanently and with little
variation in direction throughout the year.
In the summer, the South-east Trade Wind extends
from about 30° S to the Equatorial Trough,the general
direction of the wind being from between E and SE over
most of the area, but becoming S off the W coast of
Australia, and mainly SW off its NW coast though in the
latter area the direction is much more variable than in
the Trade Wind proper. In the S part of the
Mozambique Channel an extension of the Trade Wind
gives prevailing S to SE winds. Diagram (1.13a) shows
the area covered by the Trade Winds at this season.
In winter, the South-east Trade Wind extends from
about 27° S to the equator, though N of about 5° S and E
of 70° E they are weak, and though generally from some
6.14
S point, they vary considerably in direction. Elsewhere
over the greater part of the open ocean winds are almost
exclusively from between SSE and ESE, but in the E
part of the area and in the Timor Sea the predominant
direction is somewhat more E. In the Timor and
Arafura Seas the South-east Trade Wind is sometimes
referred to as the South-east Monsoon in
contradistinction to the North-west Monsoon (6.11),
which prevails there in summer. In the Mozambique
10 Channel an extension of the South-east Trade Winds
gives prevailing S to SE winds over the whole length of
the channel from about April to September. These
winds are known as the Southern Monsoon in
contradistinction to the Northern Monsoon (6.11),
15 which prevails in the N part of the channel in summer.
Diagram (1.13b) shows the area covered by the South-
east Trade Wind at this season.
The average strength of the South-east Trade Wind is
force 3 to 4 in summer and force 4 to 5 in winter; it
20 reaches a mean of force 5 between about 10° S and 20° S
and 65° E and 100° E when at its strongest during the
winter. In summer, winds are likely to reach force 7 or
above on 1 to 3 days per month over the greater part of
the zone, rising to 3 to 6 days per month over the central
25 part of the area. In winter, winds of this strength are
likely to be encountered on 1 to 3 days per month in the
E and W parts of the zone, while over a considerable area
between about 65° E and 90° E their frequency rises to 6
to 9 days per month as shown on Diagram (1.13b). In the
30 Timor and Arafura Seas winds are unlikely to reach
force 7 on more than 1 or 2 days per month.
The weather over the open ocean is mostly fair or fine
with skies about half covered, but belts of cloudy
showery weather occur at intervals. To the NW and N of
35 the Australian continent, between the NW part of
Australia and Jawa, and in the Timor Sea and, to a lesser
extent, in the Arafura Sea, cloud amounts and rainfall
are small from April to September, while the South-east
Trade Wind prevails in these regions. Extensive dust
40 haze prevails here, especially in the Timor Sea and
towards the end of the season. Elsewhere in the South-
east Trade Wind zone visibility is good except in rain.
45 Variables
6.13
To the S of the S limit of the South-east Trade Wind,
there is a zone of light variable winds in the area of the
oceanic high pressure region. In winter the centre of the
50 high-pressure region is located in about 30° S, while in
summer it moves to about 35° S over the greater part of
the ocean, dipping somewhat farther S near the SW part
of Australia.
The weather also varies considerably in this zone,
55 alternating between fair or fine conditions near the
centres of the E-moving anticyclones and cloudy
showery weather in the intervening troughs of low
pressure. Visibility is generally good except in rain.
60
Westerlies (Roaring Forties)
6.14
To the S of the high pressure region mentioned in
articles 6.12 and 6.13, W winds predominate. As in the
65 Westerlies of other oceans, the almost continuous
passage of depressions from W to E causes the wind to
vary greatly both in direction and strength; the centres
of most of these depressions pass S of 50° S. Gales are
very prevalent in the zone of the Westerlies especially in
70 winter, during which season winds reach force 7 or
61
 6.15 INDIAN OCEAN
above on 12-16 days per month S of about the 36th
parallel; during summer, winds of this force are likely to
be encountered on 6 to 12 days per month S of about
40° S. Routeing Charts 5126(1) to 5126(12) show the
regions in which gales are most common.
As in the Westerlies of other oceans, the weather is
very variable, periods of overcast skies and rain or snow
associated with the fronts of E-moving depressions
alternating with fairer conditions. Fine weather is,
however, seldom prolonged, and cloud amounts are
generally large throughout the year.
Visibility varies considerably; with winds from a S
point it is generally good, while N winds are often
associated with moderate or poor visibility. S of the 40th
parallel visibility of less than 2 miles may be expected on
perhaps 5 days per month, while fog is not uncommon
during the summer; it is usually associated with winds
from a N point.
Tropical storms
6.15
Tropical storms occur in the Arabian Sea, the Bay of
Bengal, and in parts of the South Indian Ocean. They
are described, and advice on avoiding them is given in
The Mariner's Handbook. Information regarding storm
frequencies and tracks will be found in the appropriate
Admiralty Sailing Directions, or on the Routeing Charts
5126(1) to 5126(12).
Tropical storms are known as 'Cyclones' in the area
covered by this chapter, except off the W, NW and W
coasts of Australia where they are known as
'Hurricanes'.
In the Arabian Sea, Cyclones occur in May, June,
July, October and November, the periods of greatest
frequency being June and November. Although they
have been recorded, they are extremely rare in July,
September and December. They are unknown from
January to March and in August.
In the Bay of Bengal most cyclones occur from May to
November, with May, June, October and November as
the months of greatest frequency. They occur very
occasionally in March, April and December, and are
almost unknown in January and entirely so in February.
In the South Indian Ocean, cyclones occur from
December to April, the period of greatest frequency
being between January and March; they also occur
occasionally in November and May.
In the Timor Sea and the Arafura Sea, and off the W
coast of Australia the hurricane season and the period of
greatest frequency are the same as for the cyclones of the
South Indian Ocean, except that hurricanes are not
known in May.
For the effect of tropical storms upon the currents, see
The Mariner's Handbook.
0°-20° S
25° E-70" E
Direction Predominantly SE. SE through S to SW.
Height Low or moderate, at times heavy Moderate or heavy.
between 10° S and 20° S.
70°E-110°E
Direction S to SE. Mainly SW to S.
Height Mainly moderate. Moderate or heavy.
SWELL
Arabian Sea and the Bay of Bengal
6.21
5 The swell is governed by the direction and strength of
the monsoon winds. In the Arabian Sea a swell from the
SW becomes established during May and persists until
September. A swell from the NE becomes established
during November and persists until March. There is no
10 predominant direction in April and October and the
swell is normally low or moderate in the changeover
months and mainly moderate once the monsoon is
established, though from June to September a heavy
swell may be encountered. In the Bay of Bengal a swell
15 from the SW becomes established during March and
persists until October. A swell from the NE becomes
established during November and persists until
February. Swell is normally low or moderate except for
the period from May to August when it is moderate or
20 heavy. In Malacca Strait there is no predominant
direction of swell. Throughout the year swell is
normally low and only on rare occasions does it become
moderate.
Swell in the Arabian Sea and the Bay of Bengal is
25 normally short or average in length. However, on about
10 per cent of occasions swells of over 200 metres may be
encountered; such swells are almost invariably low in
height.
30 Gulf of Aden
6.22
A swell from the SW occurs from June to September
and a swell from between E and NE from November to
March. These swells are low or moderate. There is no
35 predominant direction in April, May or October, when
the swell is mainly low. The length of swell is generally
short, though a small number of average swells do occur.
Gulf of Oman
40 6.23
Swell is from the NW from December to February
and from the SE from June to August. At other times
there is no predominant direction. The swell is normally
low or moderate and only rarely heavy. Most swells in
45 the Gulf of Oman are short, and have periods between 3
and 6 seconds.
South Indian Ocean
6.24
50 Swell is a regular feature. The swell generated by the
depressions S of 50° S often travels to all parts of the N
and S Indian Ocean; more than one swell is frequently
present, and confused swell is often reported. As shown
by the following table, it is normally moderate to heavy.
Zone
20''-35° S 35°-50° S
Some NW but mainly W to SW.
Moderate or heavy.
Some NW but mainly W to SW.
Moderate or heavy, with waves
greater than 6 m quite common.

In length, it covers the complete range from short to
long; many swells are of average length but lengths of
over 300 metres are not uncommon.
Abnormal waves may occur, see 1.18.
Speed reduction in relation to sea
conditions
6.25
During the North-east Monsoon and Southern
summer period, from about November to March, sea
conditions in the Indian Ocean do not call for particular
comment except that, S of 40° S, they are such as to
cause ships on W headings to find it necessary to reduce
speed for more than 10 per cent of their voyage time.
The southern summer is, however, the season of
greatest frequency of tropical storms in the South
Indian Ocean, see 6.15.
At the peak of the South-west Monsoon period, in
July, speeds of ships in the Arabian Sea may have to be
reduced for more than 60 per cent of the time when
steaming into, or across, wind and sea, and about 20 per
cent of the time in following seas. In the S hemisphere,
seas in winter are higher than in summer and the South-
east Trade Wind and the Westerlies are at their
strongest. It is apparent that winter storms in the South
Indian Ocean have their greatest frequency in about
80° E and lesser concentrations about 60° E and 110° E.
During the transitional periods, in April and October,
sea conditions, though less severe than in July, may
affect speed on the E-W tracks across the Southern
Ocean. Speed reduction may be necessary S of 35° S on
these tracks for more than 10 per cent of voyage time.
CURRENTS
North Indian Ocean
6.31
Currents in the North Indian Ocean are reversed in
direction seasonally under the influence of the
monsoons. These comprise the currents of the Arabian
Sea and Bay of Bengal, and the Somali Current. Along
the equator, between 2° N and 2° S, an E-going current
(the equatorial jet) appears twice a year in the transitions
between monsoon seasons. See Diagrams (1.19e) and
(1.19J).
The South-west Monsoon circulation is fully
established from June to September. April and October
are months of transition. In May and November, which
are also to some extent transitional, the circulation more
resembles that of the four subsequent months. The
North-east Monsoon circulation occurs from December
to March. The currents are therefore described below
for four periods, December to March, April-May, June
to September and October-November.
North-east Monsoon period, December to
March
6.32
In the open waters of the Arabian Sea and Bay of
Bengal, the current sets in a general W direction. In the
central Indian Ocean, along the equator, the last
remnants of the equatorial jet are still running E in
December, and are replaced by a broad flow to the W in
January-March. Round the coasts, the current flows 65
counter-clockwise in December and January, but
gradually changes to clockwise in February and March.
This is in response to changes in the distribution of wind
stress, though the winds are still predominantly from
the NE. In the Bay of Bengal, coastal currents are
INDIAN OCEAN 6.36
generally clockwise from early February. In the Arabian
Sea, the onset is more gradual and is not complete on all
parts of the coast until the end of March. In February,
the current flows S W off the coast of Somalia S of about
5 8° N, but farther N it sets NE. In March the S limit of
the NE flow is near 4° N.
Transition period, April-May
6.33
10 Currents are weak and variable in the central regions
• of the Arabian Sea and Bay of Bengal in April, and set
weakly E in May. The clockwise coastal circulation in
the Bay of Bengal is strengthened. Along the equator,
the E-going equatorial jet appears first in mid-April
15 between 70° E and 90° E. By early May it extends from
55° E to 95° E. On the E African coast, the NE flow is
present everywhere by late April, and the clockwise
coastal circulation in the Arabian Sea strengthens
during May with the onset of the South-west Monsoon.
20
South-west Monsoon period, June to
September
6.34
The clockwise circulation of the coastal regions of the
25 Arabian Sea and Bay of Bengal persists and strengthens.
The Somali Current continues to flow NE, attaining
very high rates. Mean values of 3 knots, and maximum
values of 8 knots, have been reported. It should be
noted, however, that the synoptic pattern of flow in the
30 Somali Current may differ from the climatological
mean. In June the current usually turns away from the
coast between 2° N and 6° N, and a separate clockwise
loop is found between the latitude of that turning point
and S of Suqufra. The same pattern often persists in
35 July. In late July or August the latitude at which the
current turns offshore migrates N to about 10° N. In the
open waters of the Arabian Sea and Bay of Bengal
currents generally set to the E. Along the equator, the
equatorial jet decays during June and is replaced at most
40 longitudes by weak W-going currents. In late
September the beginnings of the next equatorial jet can
be seen.
Transition period, October-November
45 6.35
Currents in the open waters of the Arabian Sea and
Bay of Bengal become weak and variable, and gradually
increase to the W. The coastal circulation of the Bay of
Bengal becomes anti-clockwise in mid-October,
50 increasing in strength through November and
continuing along the E and S coasts of Sri Lanka. In the
Arabian Sea, the development of an anti-clockwise
coastal circulation is more gradual. It is present off the
W coast of India and the S coast of Arabia by early
55 November, but off Somalia a NE flow persists at all
latitudes until mid-November, which by the end of the
month has been replaced by a SW flow between 3° N and
7° N. The E-going equatorial jet increases in rate and
length during October and is fully developed by early
SO November.
South Indian Ocean
6.36
The main surface circulation of the South Indian
Ocean is counter-clockwise. The W-going flow of the
South Equatorial Current of the Indian Ocean lies well
S of the equator, thus differing from the South
Equatorial Currents of the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans,
which extend in latitude a few degrees N of the equator.
70 Its N boundary is at about 6° -8° S, varying according to
63
 INDIAN OCEAN
longitude and season. To the N of that, in the North-east
Monsoon the E-going Equatorial Counter-current can
be seen, at least in the W part of the Indian Ocean,
originating at the convergence of the N-going East
African Coast Current and the SW-going Somali
Current. At the beginning and end of the North-east
Monsoon, the Equatorial Counter-current merges into
the equatorial jet, also E-going, and it is difficult to
distinguish between them. However, the Counter-
current is relatively broad, weak (typically |—1 knot) and
variable, whereas the equatorial jet is narrow (within 2°
of the equator), of greater rate (typically 1-2 knots) and
relatively steady. In the South-west Monsoon there is
little evidence of any E-going flow S of the equator, the
currents between 2° S and 7° S being mostly weak and
variable.
The W-going South Equatorial Current splits on
reaching the E coast of Madagascar, at 16° S. The In-
going branch turns W round the N extremity of
Madagascar and continues W to split again off the
African coast near Cabo Delgado. Some goes N into the
East African Coast Current, the rest goes S into the
Mozambique Channel. South of 16" S, the current near
the E coast of Madagascar runs SSW. In the open ocean,
average rates in the South Equatorial Current are ^—J
knot, but much larger values are found inshore. Within a
few miles of the E coast of Madagascar, average rates are
1-2 knots, and 3 knots or more is sometimes reported.
Off the SE coast of South Africa the S-setting
Mozambique Current is supplemented by the South
Equatorial flow setting W to the S of Madagascar. This
combined strong SW flow continues along the coast as
the Agulhas Current reaching average rates of 2-3 knots
and maxima of about 5 knots, between 30° S and 34° S.
Average rates seem slightly higher during the summer
and autumn months than in winter and spring. During
the latter two seasons the sparse data available suggests a
greater extension of the Southern Ocean Current to the
N. This in turn restricts the extension of the Agulhas
Current to the S in 20° E to 22° E. The low constancy of
predominant currents off Cape Town in winter also
suggest that at times the surface flow nearer the coast
and into the South Atlantic Ocean may be markedly
restricted. In open waters E and SE of the coast between
Durban and Cape of Good Hope and to the S of
Madagascar continuous interaction between the warm
waters of the recurving South Equatorial Current and
the ENE-going sets of the Southern Ocean Current lead
to many eddies and much variability of direction and
rate. These ENE-going sets continue across the South
Indian Ocean but constancies and rates decrease to the
N. Any weak predominance of E-going sets changes to
W-going N of about 25° S in summer and near 30° S in
winter, at a longitude of 80° E. Approaching the W
Australian coast the circulation is not well-defined.
During autumn and winter sets off the coast are
moderately constant, S-going, turning SE to E off Cape
Leeuwin. In spring and summer coastal eddy and
counter-current activity N of 33° S show little marked
predominance but W of 113° E there is a tendency for
NW or N-going sets to extend in a widening band
merging into the South Equatorial Current between
16-20° S and 95-105° E. The more constant part of this
current is often referred to as the West Australian
Current and is evident for much of the year, particularly
N of 25° S. South of this latitude during autumn and
winter the South Indian Ocean Current extends farther
N and E before merging into the S-going coastal flow,
with increased rates and constancies off Cape Leeuwin,
and entering the Great Australian Bight.
6.43
Off the NW Australian coast and in the Timor and
Arafura Seas historical data are sparse. The general
indications are a weak predominance of W-going sets
ESE of Timor turning SW for much of the year. During
5 the late summer period a reversal to variable or E-going
sets occur in the E part of the Arafura Sea.
70 ICE
General remarks
6.41
The following brief account of ice in the South Indian
75 Ocean should not be taken as complete or in any way all-
embracing. More detailed information than can be given
here will be found in the following publications, which
should be consulted before undertaking passages S of
the latitude of Cape Agulhas.
20 Admiralty Sailing Directions covering the
appropriate areas.
The Mariner's Handbook.
Charts 5126(1) to 5126(12)—Monthly Routeing
Charts for the Indian Ocean.
25 Washington, US Navy, Oceanographic Atlas of the
Polar Seas, HO 705.
A factor always to be borne in mind where ice
conditions are concerned is their great variability from
year to year. For this reason, and on account of the
30 sparsity of observations in many areas, the charted
positions of ice limits should be regarded as
approximate.
35 Pack ice
6.42
The long-term average positions of the pack ice (4/8
concentration) in August to September, at its greatest
extension, see Diagram (1.13b), runs from about 55°S
40 on the meridian of Greenwich to 58° S, 50° E and 60° S,
110° E. Continuing E, the edge lies near 61° S as far as
160° E. For least average extension, see 3.17. None of
the normally inhabited places in the South Indian Ocean
is affected, but great circle sailing between the more S
45 ports in South Africa and Australia is interfered with.
Icebergs
6.43
50 The icebergs that occur in the South Indian Ocean are
not, in most cases, calved from glaciers, but consist of
portions that have broken away from the great ice
shelves which fringe parts of the Antarctic continent.
They are consequently flat-topped, and they may be of
55 immense size.
The mean limit of bergs reaches its farthest N
between 20° E and 70° E in November and December,
when it runs from about 44° S in the longitude of Cape
Agulhas to about 48° S, 70° E. It is farthest N in
60
February and March E of the 70th meridian, when it
runs between the 48th and 50th parallels as far as 120° E,
and thence to about 55° S in the longitude of Tasmania.
In May and June the mean limit of bergs is everywhere S
of the 50th parallel, and between the 120th meridian and
65
the longitude of Tasmania it is S of 55° S.
With regard to extreme limits, the season varies
considerably from one longitude to another, and,
moreover, factors other than climatic may be
70 responsible for abnormalities, so that it is probably best
to regard this limit as unrelated to the time of year.
65
6.45
Earthquakes, for example, may give rise to an excessive
formation of tabular bergs. The extreme limit of
icebergs, indicated on Diagrams (1.13a) and (1.13b) and
Charts 5126(1) to 5126(12), starts at 35° S near Cape
Agulhas, gradually recedes to 38° S as it approaches
100° E, and advances again to 35° S between 100° E and
110° E, and recedes through 44° S near 130° E to about
46° S at 150° E.
RED SEA AND PERSIAN GULF
6.51
Routes through both the Red Sea and the Persian
Gulf, and the weather, swell and currents affecting
them, are described in Admiralty Sailing Directions.
ROUTES BETWEEN EAST COAST OF AFRICA, ARABIAN SEA AND BAY OF BENGAL
Cape Town —• Durban and Mozambique
Channel
6.55
Diagram (6.55)
Dominant factors are the Agulhas Current (6.36)
flowing S and W with considerable strength, and the
heavy seas and swells generated by S gales.
Counter-currents are common near the coast between
Cape Agulhas and Durban, though such currents are
very narrow to the NE of East London. Eddies between
these counter-currents and the Agulhas Current can
create local onshore sets, sometimes strong, which have
been the cause of many strandings, particularly to the W
of Cape Saint Francis. See Admiralty Sailing
Directions.
6.55.1
From Cape Town the route to Durban keeps as close
to the land as safe navigation permits in order to be out of
the strength of the Agulhas Current, and to obtain the
possible benefit of counter-currents, whilst avoiding the
heavy and dangerous seas, and abnormal waves (1.18),
which may be encountered in the vicinity of the 200 m
(109 fm) contour during S and SW gales, particularly off
East London. At all times great care should be taken to
avoid salient points, and to be vigilant against
indraughts into bays. If uncertain of the position, depths
of more than 75 m (41 fm) should be maintained.
Tankers, other than those iti ballast carrying only
residual cargo navigating off the coasts of South Africa
are governed by regulations regarding the ofHng to be
kept: see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
An Area to be Avoided (1.29), of radius 6 miles, is
centred in 35° Ol'-7 S, 20° 51'-2 E.
For Mozambique Channel, the route continues from
Durban as at 6.57.1.
6.55.2
From Cape Town to Mozambique Channel, passage
can also be made keeping to seaward of the main part of
the Agulhas Current, and passing through:
36°45'S, 19°00'E, thence:
Great circle to 34° 30' S, 32° 30' E, thence:
Rhumb line, nothing to the W, to 30° 00' S,
38° 20' E, thence:
INDIAN OCEAN
NOTES
Oilfields
6.45
Oilfields, with platforms, drilling rigs, and associated
buoys and pipelines extend nearly 100 miles seaward
from Bombay: see (1.27). For recommended routes
through them, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
15
Distances:
Aden to Suez 1310 miles.
Strait of Hormuz to Khawr al Amaya (Pilots) 495
miles.
Through the E part of Mozambique Channel,
passing E of lie Europa, to join the N-bound
30 route (6.57.1) in 17° 00' S, 42° 15' E.
This route is 275 miles longer than the coastal route.
6.55.3
Distance:
From Cape Town to Durban (keeping inshore): 800
35 miles.
Mozambique Channel —> Durban or Cape
Town
6.56
40 Diagram (6.55)
The S-bound route through Mozambique Channel
(6.57.2) is on the W side of the channel, in the
Mozambique Current. Thence the Agulhas Current
should be held by keeping from 20 to 30 miles from the
45 coast as far as Mossel Bay. During SW gales off the SE
African coast a very dangerous sea will be experienced
near the seaward edge of the continental shelf (1.18).
There is considerably less sea near the coast, and if a
distance of about 3 miles or less is kept off the shore, the
50 reduction in the sea will more than compensate for the
loss of favourable current. As directed in 6.55.1, a depth
of 75 m (41 fm) should be maintained if uncertain of the
position.
After passing Mossel Bay, course should be shaped to
55 round Cape Agulhas and Cape of Good Hope.
Tankers, other than those in ballast carrying only
residual cargo, must pay due attention to the regulations
regarding the offing to be kept off the coasts of South
Africa; see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
60 Distance: Durban to Cape Town 825 miles.
Routes through Mozambique Channel
6.57
Diagram (6.55)
65 When choosing between a route through
Mozambique Channel or one E of Madagascar,
consideration should be given, not only to the
navigational hazards presented by the islands and shoals
in the N approach to Mozambique Channel, but to the
70 restrictions they impose on freedom of manoeuvre on
 INDIAN OCEAN
the approach of a tropical storm, of which little warning
may be expected in these waters.
The currents near the W coast of Madagascar are little
known. In mid-channel and extending at least halfway
towards Madagascar, the predominant flow is NE-going
at rates of about | knot, but both direction and rate are
highly variable.
On the African side of the channel, the Mozambique
Current sets strongly in a SSW direction, following the
coast; in the region of Mozambique this current is
thought to extend about 50 miles off the coast during
most of the year, increasing to nearly 100 miles in June,
July and August. It is strongest from October to
February, rates of 4 knots being attained occasionally.
Inshore counter currents are common near Banco de
Sofala and in Bahia de Maputo.
The situation in Mozambique Channel, where strong
SSW-going currents suddenly give place to moderate or
possibly strong currents in the opposite direction, has
obvious dangers. The boundaries of the currents vary
with season and weather, and their rates may differ by as
much as 4 knots from those anticipated.
6.57.1
North-bound. From the vicinity of Durban, the
route opens from the coast to a distance of about 100
miles and passes through:
27°15'S, 36" 00'E, thence:
17° 00' S, 42° 15' E, passing either W of Bassas da
India or E of lie Europe, thence:
11° 35' S, 42° 50' E, thence to destination.
The route E of lie Europa will encounter less adverse
current but is 30 miles longer.
6.57.2
South-bound. From 11° 35' S, 42° 50' E the route is
through:
15°00'S, 41°20'E, in the full strength of the
Mozambique current thence:
17°00'S, 40°20'E, thence:
25°OO'S, 35°30'E, thence to destination.
Mozambique Channel <-» Aden
6.58
Diagram (6.58)
The East African Current flows continually N from
Cabo Delgado coastwise past Mombasa, giving way in
about 2° S to the Somali Current.
The Somali Current is SW-going from December to
February at rates of about 2 knots, occasionally reaching
3 or 4 knots. In March the SW-going set weakens but
continues S of about 4° N: N of that latitude the current
turns to the NE. Between April and May the S part of
the current turns to the NE, so that a NE-going current
is established along the whole coast until September,
often with rates of from 4 to 5 knots, and sometimes as
much as 7 knots. In October the NE-going current starts
to weaken, and gives way in November to a SW-going
set between 5" N and 10° N, which starts offshore.
North of 10° N, the NE-going set continues inshore
until December when it turns to establish the SW-going
current along the whole coast.
A definite width cannot be assigned to the coastal
currents between Cabo Delgado and Raas Caseyr; the
NE-going current which reaches its full strength
between June and September is stronger nearer the
coast and decreases rapidly at a distance of over 50 miles
offshore. S-bound shipping will therefore benefit by
keeping a good offing.
6.58.1
Rounding Raas Caseyr. Passage may be made,
either N of Suqujra, giving that island a berth of at least
6.58.5
40 miles, or between 'Abd al Kuri and Raas Caseyr, but
the latter is the usual route. Particularly during the
South-west Monsoon, when better conditions of wind
and sea can be expected S of Suqufra.
5 Ships not fitted with radar or other radio position-
finding system, uncertain of their position, should
however take the route N of Suqujra where, if stormy,
there is ample searoom (see 6.58.2).
6.58.2
10 Suqufra. Owing to the imperfect nature of the
survey, navigation in the vicinity of Suqufra must be
undertaken with caution.
It is dangerous for vessels not fitted with radar to
make Rhiy di-Irisal the E point of Suqutxa, during
15 either monsoon. In the North-east Monsoon the land
may be obscured about sunset by heavy rain squalls: in
the South-west Monsoon the lower land E of the
mountain range is often obscured by haze. Depths off
Rhiy di-Irlsal are considerable, and sounding gives no
20 warning of the dangers which extend from the shore.
Currents in the vicinity are strong and irregular.
6.58.3
Raas Caseyr and the coastline in its vicinity are
charted from old and imperfect surveys, and should be
25 regarded as approximate and approached with caution.
Many wrecks have occurred on the coast S of Raas
Caseyr, and great caution is necessary when steering
NW and N towards and past this headland in the South-
west Monsoon. The weather and sea are then at their
30 worst, the N-going current at its strongest, and the land
generally covered by thick haze.
A resemblance exists between the profiles of Raas
Caseyr and Raas Shannaqiif, 10 miles SSW, but Raas
Shannaqiff is 927 m high, and Raas Caseyr only 238 m:
35 they are separated by a broad comparatively low sandy
plain. In hazy weather, the steep fall of Raas Shannaqiff
may perhaps be dimly seen when it bears less than about
270°. If Raas Caseyr has not been sighted, as often
happens if the haze is thicker near sea level and obscures
40 that light-coloured hill, Raas Shannaqiff may be
mistaken for Raas Caseyr with disastrous results.
In the South-west Monsoon Raas Xaafuun should be
made before Raas Caseyr.
By day there is usually a gradual change in colour of
45 the water from blue to dark green as the land is
approached; the sea also becomes smoother and swell
tends to come from E of S when N and W of Raas
Xaafuun.
When making Raas Caluula and Raas Caseyr from the
50 Gulf of Aden, allowance must be made for the
possibility of a SW or onshore set, particularly during
the North-east Monsoon.
6.58.4
Routes. To summarise, for passages between
55 Mozambique Channel and Gulf of Aden, the normal
route in both directions passes between 'Abd al Kuri and
Raas Caseyr, and between intermediate coastal
destinations passages should normally be made
coastwise in both directions.
60 6.58.5
South-bound, however, the strongest effects of the
South-west Monsoon (June-August) and of the NE-
going current between Raas Caseyr and Comoros may
be avoided by passing through:
65 8° 00' N, 52° 40' E, thence:
1° 10' N, 55°OO' E, thence:
Joining the route through Mozambique Channel in
11° 35' S, 42° 50' E.
This adds 220 miles to the distance between Raas
70 Caseyr and Comoros.
67
6.58.6 INDIAN OCEAN

6.58.6 rhumb line to Mombasa.

Distance in miles: Distance: 2720 miles.
Cape Town Durban 6.61.1
For low-powered vessels in the full strength of the
2620 N(A)(G) # 1830 N* 5 South-west Monsoon, a more S route after leaving the
Mombasa
2580 S(G)t 1770 Sf Indian coast is preferable, through 12° 50' N, 70° 00' E,
thence through 6° 00' N, 67° 00' E, thence direct to
4020 N(A)(G) 3230 N Mombasa.
1620 N or S Aden
3970 S(G) 3180 S 6.61.2
10 October to April, direct by rhumb line.
N = N-bound S = S-bound. Distance: 2350 miles.
* Via 6.57.1 f Via 6.57.2.
(A) For Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of) add 95 Karachi -> Mozambique Channel, Durban
miles. and Cape Town
(G) For Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of) subtract 130 15 6.62
miles. Diagrams (6.58) and (6.55)
Routes are seasonal as follows:
African coast <-> Persian Gulf May to September, parallel to the Indian coast to
6.59 70° E, thence:
Diagram (6.58) 20 Due S to 15° 4 0 ' N , 70° 00'E, thence:
From ports South of Comoros, routes are as at 6.55 Direct to 10° 07' S, 48° 05' E, 20 miles E of Astove
and 6.57.1 to 11°35'S, 42° 50'E, thence through Island, bearing in mind the strong W-going set of
8° 00' N, 52° 40' E, thence as navigation permits to the the Equatorial Current in that region, thence:
Traffic Separation Scheme (1.28) through Strait of 20 miles SE of lie Mayotte, passing W of lies
Hormuz, passing at least 50 miles E of Suqufra. 25 Glorieuses and Geyser Reef, thence:
6.59.1 17° 00' S, 40° 20' E, on the S-bound track through
From Mombasa, the route follows the trend of the Mozambique Channel, thence:
African coast and joins the route above in 8° 00' N, As at 6.57.2 and 6.56 to destination.
52°40'E. The part of the voyage between Astove Island and lie
6.59.2 30 Mayotte should be undertaken by day, if possible: see
South-bound during the South-west Monsoon, an Admiralty Sailing Directions.
alternative is to cross the monsoon area with its adverse Distances: Durban 4180; Cape Town 4970 (G).
currents as soon as possible. (G) For Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), subtract 130
From the Traffic Separation Scheme (1.28) offRa's al miles.
Hadd, the route is S along the meridian of 60° E to 35 6.62.1
6° 30' N, thence either direct to Mombasa, or to join the For low-powered vessels in the full strength of the
route from Karachi to Mozambique Channel (6.62) in South-west Monsoon, a more S route after leaving the
10°07'S, 48°O5'E. Indian coast is preferable, through:
6.59.3 12°50'N, 70°00'E, thence:
Distances from Strait of Hormuz in miles: 40 6° 00' N, 67° 00' E, thence:
S-bound in Rejoining the route above in 3° 00' S, 54° 00' E.
N-bound S-bound SW Monsoon 6.62.2
Cape Town 4700 (A)(G) 4650 (G) 4830 (G) October to April, direct to 10° 07' S, 48° 05' E, thence
Durban 3910 3850 4040 as at 6.62 above.
Mombasa 2330 2330 2630 45 Distances: Durban 3920 miles;
(A) For Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of), add 95 Cape Town 4710 miles (G).
miles. (G) For Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), subtract 130
(G) For Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of) subtract 130 miles.
miles.
50 A d e n <-» P e r s i a n G u l f
African coast -> Karachi 6.63
6.60 Diagram (6.63)
Diagram (6.58) East-bound. The route through the Arabian Sea
From the African coast, routes are as at 6.59 and keeps as close as practicable to the Arabian coast, having
6.59.1 to 8°00'N, 52°40'E, thence rhumb line to 55 regard to the variability of the current, and avoiding a
Karachi. close approach to the Gulf of Masirah, see Admiralty
Distance: Cape Town 4730 miles (A), (G). Sailing Directions. From the Traffic Separation Scheme
Durban 3940 miles. (1.28) off Ra's al Hadd, the route is as direct as
Mombasa 2360 miles. navigation permits to the Traffic Separation Scheme
(A) For Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of), add 95 60 through Strait of Hormuz.
miles. During the South-west Monsoon the weather is
(G) For Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), subtract 130 generally very hazy along the Arabian coast, so that
miles. though the sky may be clear, the land may not be visible
until close inshore.
Karachi -» Mombasa 65 Distance to Strait of Hormuz: 1420 miles.
6.61 6.63.1
Diagram (6.58) West-bound. After passing Muscat, the route keeps
Routes are seasonal as follows. close to the Arabian coast as navigation permits. This is
May to September, parallel to the Indian coast to especially advisable during the South-west Monsoon,
70° E, thence due S to 17° 0 6 ' N , 70° 00' E, thence 70 when the full force of the wind, and the NE-going set,
 INDIAN OCEAN 6.64.1

will be felt only in the vicinity of Kuria Muria Islands, or from Karachi.
and of R'as al Kalb. Distance: 1460 miles.
6.64.1
West-bound in the South-west Monsoon, an
Aden <-> Karachi 5 alternative route is by keeping parallel to the Indian
6.64 coast to 70° E, thence:
Diagram (6.63) Due S of 12° 50' N, 70° 00' E, thence:
In either direction, routes follow those at 6.63 Direct to 13° 00' N, 55° 00' E, thence:
between Aden and Kuria Muria Islands, thence direct to Direct to Aden.

69
 6.65 INDIAN OCEAN

This route is about 800 miles longer, but largely Cape Town and Durban -> Colombo or Bay
avoids the head wind and heavy sea. of Bengal
6.67
Cape Town and Durban -> Bombay Diagram (6.55) with Diagrams (6.65) for Colombo or
6.65 5 (6.67) for Bay of Bengal
Diagrams (6.55) and (6.65) West of Madagascar.
West of Madagascar. Routes from Cape Town and To One and Half Degree Channel, routes are as at
Durban are as at 6.55.1 or 6.55.2 and 6.57.1 as far as 6.55.1 or 6.55.2 as far as 17° 00' S, 42° 15' E, off lie Juan
17° 00' S, 42° 15' E, in Mozambique Channel, thence: de Nova in Mozambique Channel, thence seasonal as
Between lie Anjouan and lie Mayotte, thence: 10 follows.
9° 30' S, 45° 30' E, 30 miles W of Aldabra Group, April to October, through 8° 30' S, 50° 40' E, 30 miles
thence: NW of Wizard Reef, passing 30 miles E of Geyser Reef
Direct to Bombay. and lies Glorieuses, thence to One and Half Degree
By day, after passing lie Anjouan, a route may be Channel, taking care to avoid the islands and shoal water
taken between Assumption Island and Cosmoledo 15 at the SE extremity of Seychelles Bank.
Group, and thence to Bombay. When uncertain of the Attention must be paid to the currents S of 5° S,
position, the route W of Aldabra Group should always especially near Wizard Reef, where they will probably
be taken, owing to the strength and variability of the W- be NW-going, and to the W-going current which sets
going current in the locality. strongly past lies Glorieuses and Geyser Reef: see
Distances: Cape Town (coastwise) 4650 miles (G); 20 Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Durban 3860 miles. 6.67.1
(G) For Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), subtract 130 November to March, between lie Anjouan and lie
miles. Mayotte, thence:
6.65.1 9° 30' S, 45° 30' E, 30 miles W of Aldabra Group,
East of Madagascar. From Cape Town the route is 25 thence:
as at 6.55.1 as far as Great Fish Point, thence: 3° 00' S, 54° 00' E, 50 miles NW of Seychelles
Round the S end of Madagascar at a distance of 60 Group, thence:
miles or more offshore, to seaward of the To One and Half Degree Channel.
strongest part of the Madagascar Current (6.36), Attention must be paid to the W-going current which
thence: 30 flows strongly past the N point of Madagascar.
Direct to Bombay, passing W of Saya de Malha From One and Half Degree Channel, routes at all
Bank, but giving Agalega Islands a wide berth. seasons are as direct as navigation permits to
From Durban, the route runs direct to join that from destinations.
Cape Town S of Madagascar, keeping the same distance To Rangoon, the shortest route is through Preparis
off that island. 35 South Channel.
Distances: Cape Town 4700 miles (G); 6.67.2
Durban 3950 miles. East of Madagascar.
(G) For Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), subtract 130 Routes are as at 6.65.1 until the S end of Madagascar
miles. has been rounded at a distance of 60 miles or more
6.65.2 40 offshore, thence seasonal as follows:
From Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of) routes are May to September, 60 miles SE of Mauritius, thence
as follows. E of Diego Garcia, thence as navigation permits to
West of Madagascar, as at 6.55.2 to join that at 6.65 destination, using Ten Degrees Channel if bound
in 17° 0 0 ' S , 42° 15'E. Rangoon.
Distance: 4745 miles. 45 6.67.3
East of Madagascar, by great circle to 34° 30' S, October to March, through 14°00'S, 60° 00'E,
32° 30' E, thence great circle to join the route from Cape thence as navigation permits to destination, using
Town (6.65.1) S of Madagascar in 26° 45' S, 47° 45' E. Preparis South Channel if bound Rangoon.
Distance: 4680 miles. 6.67.4
6.65.3 50 In April either route may be used.
For oilfields seaward of Bombay, see 6.45. 6.67.5
From Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of). The
Bombay -> Durban or Cape Town route is by great circle to 34° 30' S, 32° 30' E, thence by
6.66 great circle to join the routes passing E of Madagascar in
Diagrams (6.65) and (6.55) 55 26° 45' S, 47° 45' E.
Routes are by rhumb line to 10° 07' S, 48° 05' E, 20 6.67.6
miles E of Astove Island, thence as at 6.62 to destination. Distances in miles:
Distances: Durban 3830 miles;
Cape Town 4620 miles; Cape Durban Cape Durban
Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of) 4490 60 Town Town
miles. (G)
6.66.1
For low-powered vessels in the full strength of the West of Madagascar
South-west Monsoon, a more S route is preferable, April to Oct Nov to March
through: 65 Colombo 4510(A) 3710 4640(A) 3850
6° 00' N, 67° 00' E, thence: Madras 5O3O(A) 4240 5160(A) 4370
Joining the direct route above in 3° 00' S, 54° 00' E, Paradip 5480(A) 4690 562O(A) 4830
NW of Seychelles Group. Calcutta
6.66.2 Approachf 556O(A) 4770 5690(A) 4900
For oilfields seaward of Bombay, see 6.45. 70 Rangoon R. Ent.* 5660(A) 4870 5790(A) 5000
 INDIAN OCEAN 6.68.3

East of Madagascar One and Half Degree Channel, thence:

May to Sept Oct to March 8° 30' S, 50° 40' E, 30 miles NW of Wizard Reef,
Colombo 4450(a) 3690 4380(a) 3620 taking care to avoid the islands and shoal water at
Madras 4930(a) 4170 4880(a) 4130 the SE extremity of Seychelles Bank, thence:
Paradip S36O(a) 4600 S310(a) 4560 Passing 30 miles E of lies Glorieuses and Geyser
Calcutta Reef to join the S-bound route through
Approachf 5430(a) 4670 539O(a) 4630 Mozambique Channel in 17°00'S, 40° 20'E,
Rangoon R. Ent.* 552O(a) 4770 5470(a) 4740 thence:
As at 6.57.2 and 6.56 to destination.
t Calcutta Approach to Calcutta: 125 miles. 10 Distances: Durban 3730 miles;
* Rangoon River Entrance to Rangoon: 40 miles. Cape Town 4520 miles (G).
(A) For Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of), add 95 (G) For Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), subtract 130
miles. miles.
(a) For Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of), subtract 20 6.68.2
miles. 15 Low-powered vessels during the South-west
(G) For Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), subtract 130 Monsoon should consider a diversion to the S, by a route
miles. from the coast of Sri Lanka across the equator into the
South-east Trade Wind, passing S of Diego Garcia,
thence to the N end of Mozambique Channel, and
Colombo -* Durban or Cape T o w n 20 thence as at 6.57.2 and 6.56 to destination.
6.68 6.68.3
Diagrams (6.65) and (6.55) East of Madagascar, routes are seasonal and as
West of Madagascar, in all seasons routes are follows.
through Eight Degree Channel, thence: November to March, via 5° 00' S, 70° 00' E, passing S
3°00'S, 54°00'E, NW of Seychelles Group, 25 of Maldives and W of Chagos Archipelago, thence:
thence: 14°00'S, 60°00'E, thence:
10° 07' S, 48° 05' E, 20 miles E of Astove Island, 20 miles SE of Madagascar, to take advantage of
thence: Madagascar Current (6.36), thence:
As at 6.62 to destination. Either direct to Durban or, if bound ports farther
Distances: Durban 3820 miles; 30 W, to a landfall on Cape Recife, thence keeping in
Cape Town 4610 miles (G). the Agulhas Current (6.56).
(G) For Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), subtract 130 Distances: Durban 3620 miles;
miles. Cape Town 4360 miles (G).
6.68.1 (G) For Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), subtract 130
In April and October, an alternative route is through 35 miles.

71
 INDIAN OCEAN 6.69.4

6.68.4 6.69.3
April to October, E of Diego Garcia, thence: West of Madagascar. Only in April and October is
20 miles SE of Madagascar, giving Cargados the route through Mozambique Channel advised.
Carajos Shoals a wide berth, thence: Routes from Bay of Bengal pass through the Traffic
Either direct to Durban or, if bound ports farther 5 Separation Scheme (1.28) off Dondra Head, thence
W, to a landfall off that port, thence coastwise to through One and Half Degree Channel, thence as at
avoid the heavy weather prevalent to seaward at 6.68.1.
this season (6.56). 6.69.4
Distances: Durban 3670 miles; Distances in miles:
Cape Town 4460 miles (G). 10 Cape Town Durban
(G) For Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), subtract 130 West of Chagos Archipelago
miles. Madras 4870 4130
Paradip 5300 4560
fCalcutta Approach 5380 4630
15 *Rangoon River Entrance 5470 4730
Bay of Bengal -> Durban or Cape Town East of Chagos Archipelago
6.69 Madras 4950 4160
Diagrams (6.67) and (6.55) Paradip 5370 4580
E of Madagascar, routes are seasonal as follows: fCalcutta Approach 5450 4660
November to March, W of Chagos Archipelago, 20 *Rangoon River Entrance 5530 4740
through 5° 00' S, 70° 00' E, thence as at 6.68.3. Mozambique Channel
6.69.1 Madras 5050 4260
May to September, E of Diego Garcia, thence as at Paradip 5480 4690
6.68.4. fCalcutta Approach 5550 4760
6.69.2 25 *Rangoon River Entrance 5650 4860
June to August an alternative route from Rangoon is S fCalcutta Approach to Calcutta: 125 miles.
of Great Nicobar Island, thence by rhumb line passing •Rangoon River Entrance to Port of Rangoon: 40 miles.
N of Mauritius to join the seasonal routes from Colombo For Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), subtract 130 miles
(6.68.4), 20 miles SE of Madagascar. from Cape Town distances.

Diagram (6.55)-

Lettered Positions
1°35'N, 73°40'E
9°30'S, 45-30'E
M 26°45'S, 47°45'E
N 8°30'S, 50°40'E
O 25°25'S, 47°OO'E
P 5°00'S, 70°00'E
Q 14°00'S, 60°00'E
- N . Summer T 3°00'S, 54°00'E

i i i l i l ] i l i i i l l i i i i | l l l i

Longitude 80° East from Greenwich'

(6.67) ROUTES-South Africa Bay of Bengal.

73
 6.70 INDIAN OCEAN

Bay of Bengal—Routes Distances by One and Half Degree Channel:

6.70 Colombo 2560 miles;
Routes in the Bay of Bengal offer little opportunity for Dondra Head (10 miles S of) 2550 miles.
diversion, even at the cost of distance, to reduce the
adverse effects, or to take advantage of wind and current. 5 Colombo or Dondra Head -> Mombasa
Rangoon to Dondra Head is the only route which may 6.75
be diverted to advantage, where the full strength of the Diagram (6.65) (showing route from Colombo only)
South-west Monsoon in June, July, and August, may be At all seasons the route is through One and Half
avoided by a route from Rangoon through 5° 50' N, Degree Channel, or Kaashidoo Channel if the
94° 30' E, passing E of Andaman Islands and Nicobar 10 conditions at 6.79.4 can be met.
Islands, thence direct to the Traffic Separation Scheme Distances:
(1.28) off Dondra Head. Colombo 2560 miles;
6.71 Dondra Head (10 miles S of) 2550 miles.
Distances in miles. 6.75.1
15 October to April, an alternative route is through Eight
Dondra Degree Channel.
Head 6.75.2
For low-powered vessels from May to September, an
550 Madras alternative route which should be considered crosses the
20 equator into the South-east Trade Wind, passing S of
980 570 Paradip Diego Garcia, thence as navigation permits to
Mombasa.
1060 650 110 Calcutta Approachf
Aden -» Bombay
1160 985 680 640 Rangoon R. Ent.* 25 6.76
Diagram (6.76)
Singa-
1470 1580 1540 1520 1060 October to April, the route is direct.
pore
Distance: 1650 miles.
t Calcutta Approach to Calcutta: 125 miles. 6.76.1
* Rangoon River Entrance to Rangoon: 40 miles. 30 May to September, the route is through 13° 00' N,
55° 00' E, thence rhumb line to Bombay.
Distance: 1680 miles.
Mombasa -+ Bombay 6.76.2
6.72 For oilfields seaward of Bombay, see 6.45.
Diagram (6,65) 35
May to September, the route follows the trend of the Bombay —• A d e n
African coast, taking advantage of the East African and 6.77
Somali Currents, both NE-going at that season, to Diagram (6.76)
1° 30' N, 45° 50' E, thence rhumb line to Bombay. October to April, the route is direct.
Distance: 2400 miles. 40 Distance: 1650 miles.
6.72.1 6.77.1
October to April, the route is through 2° 30' S, May to September, during the South-west Monsoon
44° 50' E, thence rhumb line to Bombay. the best route depends on the strength of the monsoon.
Distance: 2410 miles. In May and September the route is through:
6.72.2 45 19° 00' N, 70° 00' E, thence:
For oilfields seaward of Bombay, see 6.45. 18°30'N, 65° 00'E, thence:
17°30'N, 60°00'E, thence:
As navigation permits to Aden.
Bombay -* Mombasa Distance: 1660 miles.
6.73 50 6.77.2
Diagram (6.65) In June, July and August, when the monsoon is at its
At all seasons the route for fully-powered vessels is strongest, the route follows the parallel of Bombay to
direct. 18° 45' N, 59° 40' E, about 100 miles from the Arabian
Distance: 2390 miles. coast, thence closing and following the coast as near as
6.73.1 55 navigation permits, as at 6.63.1.
For low-powered vessels during the full strength of During the South-west Monsoon the wind and sea are
the South-west Monsoon, the route is through 6° 00' N, at their height between 66° E and 60° E. The adverse
67° 00' E, thence to Mombasa. current may attain a rate of 2 knots in the middle of the
6.73.2 Arabian Sea, and occasionally 3 knots in the W part of
For oilfields seaward of Bombay, see 6.45. 60 that sea and off the Arabian coast.
Distance: 1680 miles.
6.77.3
Mombasa -> Colombo or Dondra Head For low-powered vessels in the South-west Monsoon
6.74 the route is:
Diagram (6.65) (showing routes to Colombo only) 65 6° 00' N, 67° 00' E, thence:
At all seasons the route is through either One and Half 6° 00' N, 60° 00' E, thence:
Degree Channel or Kaashidoo Channel. If the ship's 8° 00' N, 52° 40' E, thence:
position is in doubt, the former is preferable as the W Between Raas Caseyr and 'Abd al Kuri (6.58.3),
entrance to Kaashidoo Channel is not easily identified; thence:
see Admiralty Sailing Directions. 70 To Aden.
 INDIAN OCEAN 6.79.1
6.77.4 Distances:
For oilfields seaward of Bombay, see 6.45. Colombo 2110 miles;
Dondra Head (10 miles S of) 2170 miles.
Aden -> Dondra Head or Colombo
6.78 5
Diagram (6.76) Dondra Head and Colombo -> Aden
In the Gulf of Aden and Nof Suqufra, allowance must 6.79
be made for the possibility of a set towards the S shore. Diagram (6.76)
Vessels using Eight Degree Channel should keep October to April, routes are through Eight Degree
nearer to Minicoy Island than to Maldives; see 10 Channel, thence:
Admiralty Sailing Directions. Either S of Suqujra, bearing in mind the difficulty
6.78.1 of identifying the landfall (6.58.3),
October to April, the route is between Raas Caseyr Or through 13°00'N, 55° 00'E, thence N of
and 'Abd al Kurt (6.58.3), thence through Eight Degree Suqufra, observing the directions at 6.58.2
Channel. 15 Distances:
Distances: Colombo 2080 miles; S of Suqujra:
Dondra Head 2140 miles. Dondra Head (10 miles S of) 2140 miles;
6.78.2 Colombo 2080 miles.
May to September, to avoid the heavy cross-sea S of N of Suqufra:
Suqufra caused by the South-west Monsoon, the route 20 Dondra Head (10 miles S of) 2170 miles;
is through: Colombo 2110 miles.
13° 00' N, 55° 00' E, passing N of Suqujra, thence: 6.79.1
Either direct or through Eight Degree Channel. May to September, the choice of a route depends

(6.76) ROUTES across Arabian Sea.

 INDIAN OCEAN

(6.92) ROUTES—Port Louis and Mah6 Island < *• Africa, Aden and India.
 INDIAN OCEAN 6.90.1
largely on the power and sea-keeping qualities of a Karachi and Bombay +-* Colombo or
vessel. Dondra Head
For large vessels of high power, routes are: 6.81
Through Eight Degree Channel, thence: Diagram (6.76)
10° 00' N, 60° 00' E, thence: 5 Routes are as direct as navigation permits.
13°00'N, 55°OO'E, thence: For oilfields seaward of Bombay, see 6.45.
N of Suqujra to Aden. For the possibility of onshore sets, see Admiralty
Distances: Sailing Directions.
Dondra Head (10 miles S of) 2190 miles; Distances in miles:
Colombo 2130 miles. w Bombay Colombo Dondra Head
6.79.2 (10 miles S of)
For normal vessels, routes are: Karachi 500 1340 1420
Through Eight Degree Channel on the parallel of Bombay — 885 960
T 30' N, thence:
8° 00' N, 60° 00' E, thence: 15
Either, Selat Benggala
8° 00' N, 52° 40' E and round Raas Caseyr to Aden; 6.82
Or, This channel, off the N end of Sumatera, offers a
13° 00' N, 55° 00' E and N of Suqutra to Aden. deep-water route for E-bound approach or W-bound
Distances; 20 departure for vessels using Malacca Strait. SW or NW
S of Suqufra: winds prevail in it according to season. There is usually a
Dondra Head (10 miles S of) 2310 miles; NW-going current of 1 or 2 knots in the fairway, but
Colombo 2260 miles. near the SW shore the streams are tidal, and low-
N of Suqufra: powered vessels needing anchorage while the stream is
Dondra Head (10 miles S of) 2250 miles; 25 adverse may take advantage of this. See Admiralty
Colombo 2200 miles. Sailing Directions.
6.79.3
For low-powered vessels, alternative routes are:
Either, through Eight Degree Channel, thence:
6° 00' N, 67° 00' E, thence: 30 Malacca Strait
6° 00' N, 60° 00' E, thence: 6.83
8° 00' N, 52° 40' E and round Raas Caseyr to Aden. Malacca Strait and Singapore Strait together form the
6.79.4 main seaway used by vessels from Europe and India
Or, provided that Olivelifuri, the islet marking the bound Malaysian ports, Singapore and ports farther
N side of the entrance to Kaashidoo Channel, can 35 NE. They provide the shortest route for ships trading
be made between sunrise and noon, the route is: between the Persian Gulf and Japan.
Through Kaashidoo Channel, thence: The least depth in the fairway is about 25 m, but there
4° 44' N, 60° 00' E, thence: are many areas of sandwaves: depths and the con-
8° 00' N, 52° 40' E, and round Raas Caseyr to Aden. figuration of the channel are liable to change. Deep
6.79.5 40 draught vessels should therefore take particular note of
For all small vessels, the route is: the latest reports of depths in or near the fairway.
Through One and Half Degree Channel, thence: Tidal streams are strong. Navigational aids are
2° 00' N, 60° 00' E, thence: difficult to maintain and may be unreliable.
8° 00' N, 52° 40' E and round Raas Caseyr to Aden. Local fishing craft with nets may be encountered in
45 Malacca Strait.
Strait of Hormuz +-» Colombo or Dondra Rules for vessels navigating through Malacca Strait
Head and Singapore Strait are given in Admiralty Sailing
6.80 Directions.
Diagram (6.76) These factors, and the density of traffic, make
The route from the Traffic Separation Scheme (1.28) 50 navigation through the straits difficult, particularly for
through Strait of Hormuz is as direct as navigation deep draught vessels. In addition, the long run of more
permits to 13° 00' N, 74° 10' E, off the Malabar coast, to than 250 miles through the straits demands long periods
avoid Barsas de Pedro and the shoals E of Lakshadweep, of considerable vigilance to maintain the required safe
thence to destination. standard of navigation.
Distances: 55 Distance:
Colombo 1800 miles; Selat Benggala to Singapore (N or S of Pulau We): 615
Dondra Head (10 miles S of) 1880 miles. miles.

ROUTES TO AND FROM PORT LOUIS (MAURITIUS)

Port Louis <-> Cape Town or Durban
6.90
Diagram (6.55)
West-bound from Port Louis routes are to 20 miles
SE of Madagascar, thence seasonal as at 68.3 or 68.4.
6.90.1
East-bound from Cape Town routes are:
Either as at 6.55.1 as far as Great Fish Point,
65 thence:
Round the S end of Madagascar at a distance of 60
miles or more offshore, to seaward of the
strongest part of the Madagascar Current (6.36),
thence:
70 As navigation permits to Port Louis.

77
 6.90.2 INDIAN OCEAN

6.90.2 6.93.2
Or, to keep to seaward of the main part of the April to September, from Raas Caseyr, through the
Agulhas Current: South-west Monsoon to cross the equator in about
Through 36° 45' S, 19° 00' E, thence: 72° E, or even through One and Half Degree Channel,
Great circle to 34° 30' S, 32° 30' E, thence: 5 thence:
Great circle to pass S of lie de la Reunion, thence: S, passing E of Chagos Archipelago, into the
To Port Louis. South-east Trade Wind, thence:
6.90.3 SW, through 12° S, 70° E to Port Louis.
From Durban the route passes S of Madagascar,
keeping 60 miles or more off that island, thence as 10 Port Louis <-> Karachi
navigation permits to Port Louis. 6.94
6.90.4 Diagram (6.92)
Distances from Port Louis in miles: The normal route is direct, passing W of Saya de
Cape Town Durban Malha Bank.
W-bound 2300 (G) (November-March) 1550 75 Distance: 2740 miles.
2350 (G) (April-October) 6.94.1
E-bound 2300 (G) (Coastwise) 1560 S-bound in the full strength of the South-west
2450 (A) (Outside Agulhas Monsoon, the route for fully-powered vessels from
Current) Karachi is:
(A) For Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of), subtract 20 Parallel to the Indian coast to 70° E, thence:
180 miles from Cape Town distance. S to the equator in 70° E, thence:
(G) For distance from Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), E of Cargados Carajos Shoals, thence:
subtract 130 miles from Cape Town distances. To Port Louis.
6.94.2
Port Louis <-» Ports in Mozambique Channel 25 For low-powered vessels the route from Karachi is:
6.91 E of Lakshadweep, Maldives and Chagos
Diagram (6.55) Archipelago, thence to Port Louis.
Routes between Port Louis and the NW coast of
Madagascar pass N of that island. Port Louis <-> Mahe Island
Routes between Port Louis and the W coast of 30 6.95
Madagascar, or ports on the African coast S of 18° S, Diagram (6.92)
pass S of the island. For fully-powered vessels the route is as direct as
navigation permits.
Port Louis <-> Mombasa Distance: 950 miles.
6.92 35 6.95.1
Diagram (6.92) For low-powered vessels routes are seasonal as
For fully-powered vessels and N-bound low-powered follows:
vessels the route is as direct as navigation permits. November to March, N-bound, W of the direct route
Distance: 1430 miles. until in the North-west Monsoon.
6.92.1 40 6.95.2
For S-bound low-powered vessels the following S-bound, E of Saya de Malha Bank, thence S until
seasonal routes are advised: well into the South-east Trade Wind, thence to Port
November to March, N of Seychelles Group, thence: Louis.
E of Saya de Malha Bank, thence: 6.95.3
S into the South-east Trade Winds, thence: 45 April to October, N-bound, as direct as navigation
To Port Louis permits.
6.92.2 6.95.4
April to October, similar to that for November to S-bound, E to about 70° E, thence S until well into the
March, but the E course is held to about 70° E before South-east Trade Wind, thence to Port Louis.
turning S and making into the South-east Trade Wind 50
to about 12° S, 70° E, thence to Port Louis. Port Louis«-»Bombay
6.96
Diagram (6.92)
Port L o u i s <-+ A d e n North-bound, from Port Louis the route is W of
6.93 55 Cargados Carajos Shoals and Nazareth Bank, and E or
Diagram (6.92) W of Saya de Malha Bank, thence to Bombay.
For fully-powered vessels and N-bound low-powered Distance (W of Saya de Malha Bank): 2530 miles.
vessels the route is as direct as navigation permits, 6.96.1
passing E or W of Seychelles Group according to the South-bound, from Bombay the route is:
circumstances. 60 Direct to the equator in 66° 45' E, thence:
Distance (W of Seychelles Group): 2340 miles. E of Nazareth Bank, thence:
6.93.1 E of Cargados Carajos Shoals, thence:
For S-bound low-powered vessels the following Direct to Port Louis.
seasonal routes are advised: Distance: 2520 miles.
October to March, from Raas Caseyr, through the 65 6.96.2
North-east Monsoon to cross the equator in about 64° E, In the full strength of the South-west Monsoon, a
thence: better route for fully-powered vessels from Bombay
S, passing E of Saya de Malha Bank, into the South- may be:
east Trade Wind, thence: Along the normal route as far as 70° E, thence:
To Port Louis 70 S to the equator in 70° E, thence:
 INDIAN OCEAN 6.100.2
Rejoining the normal S-bound route E of Cargados Port Louis <-• Torres Strait or Darwin
Carajos shoals. 6.100
6.96.3 Diagrams (6.98) and (6.122)
For low-powered vessels, the route from Bombay is E For observations on the approaches to Torres Strait
of Lakshadweep, Maldives and Chagos Archipelago, 5 and Darwin, see 6.120-6.122.
thence to Port Louis. October to April, routes from Port Louis are by great
6.96.4 circle to 11' 30' S, 118° 00' E, to pass N of the usual track
For oilfields seaward of Bombay, see 6.45. of hurricanes, thence:
Either, by the Ocean Route at 6.122.2 to Torres Strait
Port Louis <-> Colombo 10 or Darwin.
6.97 Distances: Darwin 4340 miles;
Diagram (6.92) Torres Strait 4980 miles.
The route in either direction passes E of Diego
Garcia. 6.100.1
Distance: 2140 miles. 15 Or, through 12° 40' S, 123° 45' E, S of Cartier Island,
thence through Osborn Passage to join the
Port Louis «-> Singapore recommended coastal route to Darwin or Torres Strait.
6.98 Distances: Darwin 4300 miles;
Diagram (6.98) Torres Strait 4970 miles.
The route from Port Louis is direct to Selat Benggala, 20
thence through Malacca Strait (6.83). 6.100.2
Distance: 3330 miles. May to September, routes from Port Louis are by
great circle to 15° 30' S, 120° 00' E, thence joining the
Port Louis <-» Selat Sunda recommended coastal route S of Browse Islet as at
6.99 25 6.154.4.
Diagram (6.98) Distances: Darwin 4290 miles;
Route is direct. Torres Strait 4970 miles.
Distance: 2960 miles.
6.101 INDIAN OCEAN

Port Louis <-> Fremantle or Cape Leeuwin Distances from Port Louis:
6.101 E-bound: Fremantle 3190 miles; Cape Leeuwin 3140
Diagram (6.98) miles.
Routes are direct: E-bound by great circles, W-bound W-bound: Fremantle 3220 miles; Cape Leeuwin 3170
by rhumb line. miles.

ROUTES TO AND FROM MAH£ ISLAND (SEYCHELLES GROUP)

Mahe Island «-» Cape Town or Durban To Mahe Island.

6.106 If the South-west Monsoon is still blowing strongly in
Diagrams (6.92), (6.55) 3° N, 60° E, the SE course should be held until the
South-bound, routes are as navigation permits to 20 15 monsoon's strength is lost before turning S.
miles E of lie Mayotte, thence 1T 00' S, 40° 20' E on the
S-bound track through Mozambique Channel, thence
to destination as at 6.57.2 and 6.56. Mahe Island <->• Bombay
Distances: Cape Town 2920 miles; 6.109
Durban 2130 miles. 20 Diagram (6.92)
6.106.1 The usual route is direct.
North-bound, routes are as at 6.55.1 or 6.55.2 and Distance: 1750 miles.
6.57.1 as far as 17°00'S, 42°15'E in Mozambique 6.109.1
Channel, thence as navigation permits to Mahe Island. For S-bound low-power vessels in the South-west
Distances: Cape Town 2900 miles; 25 Monsoon (May-September), the route is through 6° N,
Durban 2110 miles. 67° E, thence to the equator in 59° E, thence to Mahe
Island.
Mahe Island <-> Mombasa 6.109.2
6.107 For oilfields seaward of Bombay, see 6.45.
Diagram (6.92) 30
For fully-powered vessels and W-bound low-
powered vessels the route is direct.
Low-powered vessels from April to October require Mahe Island <-> Colombo
to make allowance for the probability of a head wind and 6.110
the strong N-going current setting along the African 35 Diagram (6.92)
coast. North-east-bound, the route is through One and
Distance: 950 miles. Half Degrees Channel.
6.107.1 6.110.1
For E-bound low-powered vessels, alternative routes South-west-bound, October to April, the route is
are as follows: 40 through Eight Degree Channel: May to September, the
October to April, close N of the direct route until the route is through One and Half Degree Channel.
North-west Monsoon is picked up in about 45° E. Distances:
6.107.2 via One and Half Degree Channel 1640 miles;
April to October, if unable to make Mahe Island on via Eight Degree Channel 1700 miles.
the direct route, the E course should be held until past 45 6.110.2
Seychelles Group and the island can be approached North-east-bound routes for low-powered vessels
from the N. are as follows.
November to March, through:
Mahe Island «-> Aden 4° S, 70" E, thence:
6.108 50 Across the equator in 80° E, thence:
Diagram (6.92) N to make the coast of Sri Lanka in 80° E, thence:
The usual route is direct to and from Raas Caseyr, see To Colombo.
6.58.3. 6.110.3
Distance: 1410 miles. April to October, through either Eight Degree
6.108.1 55 Channel or Kaashidoo Channel, the latter being more
For low-powered vessels alternative routes are as direct, but advisable by day only.
follows: 6.110.4
October to March, S-bound, along the Arabian coast South-west-bound routes for low-powered vessels
until able to weather Raas Caseyr, thence direct to Mahe are as follows.
Island. 60 October to April, through Eight Degree Channel,
6.108.2 thence:
November to March, N-bound, across the equator in SW to the equator in 54° E, thence:
about 61° E, thence into the North-east Monsoon until To Mahe Island.
able to weather Suqufra: see 6.58.2. 6.110.5
6.108.3 65 May to September, after establishing a good offing
April to September, S-bound, round Raas Caseyr, from the coast of Sri Lanka:
thence: S, across the equator into the South-east Trade
Through 3° N, 60° E, thence: Wind, thence:
S, across the equator and into the South-east Trade S of Diego Garcia, thence:
Wind, thence: 70 To Mahe Island.
80
 INDIAN OCEAN
Mahe Island <-> Fremantle or Cape
Leeuwin
6.111
Diagram (6.111)
East-bound routes are through 11° 30' S, 60° 00' E,
thence by great circle to destination.
WESTERN APPROACHES TO AND PASSAGES OFF THE AUSTRALIAN COAST
General Information
6.120
The following notes on passages in Australian waters,
details of which will be found in Admiralty Sailing
Directions, have some bearing on routes in the Indian
Ocean which have terminal positions in Australian
waters or in the Pacific Ocean.
Recommended Tracks
6.121
The waters off the N, NW and W coasts of Australia
have not been thoroughly surveyed: less water than
charted may exist. Many banks in Timor and Arafura
Seas, including Sahul Banks and those lying between
them and Melville Island, are unsurveyed, and
particular caution is necessary in their vicinity.
Recommended tracks through these waters, surveyed
to a width of 10 miles on either side, are indicated on the
charts and described in Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Approaches to Timor and Arafura Seas
6.122
Diagram (6.122)
From the South Indian Ocean there are two
Routeing Positions for approaching Arafura Sea.
6.122.2
Distances: Fremantle 3800 miles;
Cape Leeuwin 3780 miles.
6.111.1
West-bound routes are direct by rhumb to Mahe
Island.
Distances: Fremantle 3770 miles;
Cape Leeuwin 3760 miles.
The N position, l l ° 3 0 ' S , 118° 00' E, is used for
15 routes through Timor Sea passing between Timor on
the N and Sahul Banks and the dangers extending NW
from Melville Island on the S.
The S position, 15°3O'S, 120° 00'E, lies in the
approach to the seaward end (14° 30' S, 121° 30' E) of
20 the recommended coastal track which leads S of Browse
Islet and inshore of Sahul Banks and other off-lying
dangers, to Darwin and along the N coast of Australia.
South African traffic generally uses the S approach,
except during the summer season of hurricanes, when
25 the N approach is preferable.
6.122.1
From the Arabian Sea or Bay of Bengal, Timor
and Arafura Seas may be approached, either through a
Routeing Position (6° 25' S, 102° 30' E) to the W of Selat
30 Sunda, or through Malacca Strait and the Java, Flores
and Banda Seas.
From the Routeing Position, the principal routes
continue as follows to Torres Strait and Darwin.
6.122.2
35 Ocean Route. South of all the islands E of Selat
Sunda to pass through 11° 30' S, 118° 00' E. Thence,
either through 12° 40' S, 123° 45' E, S of Cartier Island
and through Osborn Passage for Darwin, or continuing
6.122.3 INDIAN OCEAN

S of Roti and through the deep water trench between 6.122.7

Timor and Sahul Banks for Torres Strait, or to Distances:
approach Darwin through North Sahul Passage. Ocean Route*
6.122.3 Torres Strait 2410 miles.
Selat Sumba Route. South of Jawa and through 5 Darwin: N Sahul Passage 1770 miles.
Selat Sumba, Selat Ombai and Selat Wetar for Torres Osborn Passage 1730 miles.
Strait, or through Selat Sumba, Selat Roti and North Selat Sumba Route*
Sahul Passage for Darwin. Torres Strait 2380 miles.
These wide and deep straits present no difficulty to Darwin 1780 miles.
navigation, particularly to ships fitted with radar. 10 Java, Flores and Banda Seas Routef
6.122.4 Torres Strait 2190 miles.
Java, Flores and Banda Seas Route. Through Darwin 1640 miles.
Selat Sunda, Selat Sapudi, Flores and Banda Seas (as at
7.129.1), and Selat Wetar, thence to Torres Strait * From Routeing Positions 6° 25' S, 102° 30' E.
passing S of Duddell and Volsella Shoals, or through 15 t From Selat Sunda 6° 00' S, 105" 52' E.
North Sahul Passage to Darwin.
This route leads between the shoals E of Selat Sunda, Fremantle
through Selat Sapudi and Alur Pelayaran Wetar: it 6.123
demands close attention to navigation. Approaching Fremantle from the S, unless certain of
6.122.5 20 the position, the coast between Cape Naturaliste and
Currents in Java and Flores Seas are to the advantage Rottnest Island should not be closed to depths of less
of E-bound shipping during the North-west Monsoon than 55 m (30 fm) till N of Naturaliste Reefs. Thence N,
(November-March), otherwise currents are a vessel may stand into 37 m (20 fm), coarse brown sand
predominantly W-going on all three routes. mixed with shells, and occasionally gravel and small
6.122.6 25 stones. The depth of 37 m (20 fm), however, will be
Torres Strait, which connects Arafura and Coral found within \ mile of the dangers off the W extremity of
Seas, is described, together with its position used for Rottnest Island: vessels bound N of Rottnest Island
distances in this book, at 7.53; for further details see should, therefore, not go into less than 55 m (30 fm) as
Admiralty Sailing Directions. the island is approached.
 INDIAN OCEAN
Cape Leeuwin
6.124
The distance to which submerged dangers extend off
a long stretch of the coast in the vicinity of Cape
Leeuwin, and the frequent thick weather that prevails 5 Shark and crawfish fishing fleets operate off the S
with strong onshore winds and a set towards the coast,
render it very desirable to give this dangerous cape a
wide berth in all but settled weather. From 15 to 20
miles is a good offing to take, and 34° 28' S, 114" 45' E,
20 miles WSW of Cape Leeuwin, which has been used 10
unless otherwise stated as a routeing position in this
book, will suit most passages without appreciable
increase in distances.
If approaching from the N, vessels passing offshore,
and not calling at Fremantle or other ports N of Cape 15
Naturaliste, will generally be outside the 200 m (109 fm)
depth contour from Houtman Abrolhos to the
approaches to that cape. They should keep in depths of
more than 55 m (30 fm) until clear of Cape Leeuwin. If
running in to make Cape Leeuwin Light, great caution 20
should be exercised. Mist hangs about the land when it is
clear at sea, and with weather at all thick the light may
not be visible as far as Geographe Reef. Sounding
should never be neglected, and vessels should not stand
into depths of less than 128 m (70 fm). 25
Fishing
6.125
Crawfish fishing takes place between the W coast of 30
Australia and the 200 m (109 fm) depth contour
6.140.1
between the parallels of 24° S and 34° S, particularly
between January and May, and November and
December. It is prohibited from 15th August to 14th
November.
coast of Australia and the coasts of Tasmania, up to 90
miles from the coast between 37° 30' S, 140° 00' E and
37°OO'E, 149° 55'E.
Routes East of Cape Leeuwin
6.126
In either direction, routes between Cape Leeuwin and
Investigator Strait (for Adelaide), between Cape
Leeuwin and Cape Otway (for Bass Strait and
Melbourne) and between Cape Leeuwin and South
West Cape, Tasmania, (for Hobart), are direct.
For notes on coastal passages through and E of Bass
Strait, see 7.51.
Adelaide
6.127
Routes between Adelaide and ports farther E are
through Backstairs Passage.
With SW or W winds, currents, setting onto the land
at rates up to 2 knots are sometimes experienced
between Cape Willoughby and Cape Otway.
Torres Strait <-> Hobart—West-about
distances
6.128
Distances in miles.

Torres Strait
830* Darwin

1620 920 Port Hedland

2500 1820 980 Fremantle

2630 1940 1110 175 Cape Leeuwin

3810 3130 2290 1360 1180 Adelaide

4100 3410 2580 1650 1470 460 Port Phillip for Melbournef
4280 3590 2760 1820 1650 760 Hobart
* Via Cape Van Diemen. 730 miles via Clarence Strait.
t Port Phillip to Melbourne: 40 miles.
For distance E-about, see 7.54.

ROUTES ON EASTERN SIDE OF THE INDIAN OCEAN

Bay of Bengal <-> North coast of Australia
6.140
Diagrams (6.140) and (6,122)
The choice between an entirely ocean route, W of
Sumatera and S of Jawa, and a route passing partly
through the Eastern Archipelago, is governed by
considerations of draught, weather, distance and season.
Ocean routes may join those at 6.122.2 and 6.122.3
in the Routeing Position (6° 25' S, 102° 30' E), or the
Java, Flores and Banda Seas Route (6.122.4) in Selat
Sunda.
6.140.1
Malacca Strait Route. Malacca Strait, which may
be entered from Selat Benggala, leads to Singapore
Strait whence a number of alternative routes, given at
7.129-7.129.4, lead through the Eastern Archipelago to
Selat Wetar and thence into Arafura Sea.
60 The following route has been used for computation of
distances:
From Singapore Strait, through Selat Karimata and
Selat Sapudi, thence through Selat Lombok for Darwin,
or through Java, Flores and Banda Seas and Selat Wetar
65 for Torres Strait.
For Bay of Bengal and Malacca Strait, see 6.70 and
6.83.
For W approaches to Australian waters, see 6.122.
For routes through the Eastern Archipelago, see
70 Chapter 7.

83
6.140.2 INDIAN OCEAN

6.140.2 t Calcutta Approach to Calcutta: 125 miles.

Distances in miles: * Rangoon River Entrance to Port of Rangoon: 40
Torres Strait Darwh miles.
Ocean Route 50 J Via Osborn Passage. If via N Sahul Passage, add
(6.122.2) 45 miles.
Madras 4180 3500
Calcutta Approachf 4280 3600
Rangoon River Entrance* 3920 3240
Selat Sumba Route 55 Western side of Bay of Bengal <-> West coast
(6.122.3) of Australia
Madras 4150 3550 6.141
Calcutta Approachf 4250 3650 Diagram (6.140)
Rangoon River Entrance* 3900 3300 Routes are direct, passing W of Nicobar Islands for
Java, Flores and Banda 60 Paradip and Calcutta.
Seas Route Distances, by great circle, in miles:
(6.122.4)
Madras 4140 3590 Madras Paradip Calcutta
Calcutta Approachf 4240 3680 Approach^
Rangoon River Entrance* 3880 3320 65 Port Hedland 3020 3120 3120
Malacca Strait Route Fremantle 3380 3550 3560
(6.140.1) Cape Leeuwin* 3460 3650 3676
Madras 4080 3510
Calcutta Approachf 4020 3460 * For rounding Cape Leeuwin, see 6.124.
Rangoon River Entrance* 3560 2990 70 t Calcutta Approach to Calcutta: 125 miles.
 INDIAN OCEAN 6.152.1
Rangoon <-» West Coast of Australia
6.142
Diagram (6.140) Port Cape
Alternative routes are, either the ocean route S of Hedland Fremantle Leeuwin*
Nicobar Islands and W of Sumatera, or through Ocean Route 2770 3200 3300
Malacca Strait and Selat Sunda. Malacca Strait 2820** 3320 3430
For routes from Singapore through Eastern
Archipelago, see Chapter 7. fRangoon River Entrance to Port of Rangoon: 40 miles.
6.142.1. *For rounding Cape Leeuwin, see 6.124.
Distances from Rangoon River Entrance in miles.t 10 ••If via Malacca Strait and Selat Lombok: 2780 miles.

TRANS-OCEAN ROUTES

Cape Town <-> Selat Sunda Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of) 5120
6.150 miles.
Diagram (6.150) 20
East-bound, the route is: Durban <-> Selat Sunda
Across the W-going Agulhas Current to 36° 45' S, 6.151
19° 00' E, 145 miles S of Cape of Good Hope, Diagram (6.151)
thence: East-bound. The route is along the parallel of 30° S to
Great circle to 33° 45' S, 36° 30' E, thence: 25 56° 30' E, thence great circle to Selat Sunda, passing N
Great circle to Selat Sunda, passing N of Cocos or of Cocos or Keeling Islands.
Keeling Islands. Distance: 4460 miles.
Distances from Selat Sunda: 6.151.1
Cape Town 5240 miles; West-bound. October to April, the route is direct by
Good Hope, Cape of (145 miles S of) 5060 miles. 30 great circle.
6.150.1 Distance: 4440 miles.
West-bound, October to April, the route is: 6.151.2
Great circle to 33° 45' S, 36° 30' E, thence: May to September, the route is the E-bound route in
To a landfall on the African coast near Great Fish reverse.
Point, thence: 35
Keeping in the Agulhas Current as at 6.56 as far as Cape Town and Durban <-> Singapore
Mossel Bay, thence to Cape Town. 6.152
Distances: Diagrams: Cape Town (6.150); Durban (6.151)
Cape Town 5130 miles; Routes are either through Malacca Strait or through
Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of) 5000 miles. 40 Selat Sunda.
E-bound routes to Malacca Strait (6.82 and 6.83) are
6.150.2 as at 6.67.2-6.67.5. W-bound routes from Malacca
May to September, the route is: Strait are by rhumb line, passing N of Mauritius, to join
Great circle to 30° 00' S, 56° 30' E, passing N of the route from Colombo (6.68.3 or 6.68.4) 20 miles SE
Cocos or Keeling Islands, thence: 45 of Madagascar.
Along the parallel of 30° S to a landfall on the Routes through Selat Sunda (6.150 or 6.151, and
African coast near Durban, thence: 7.127) may be used E-bound or W-bound. But when W-
Coastwise to Cape Town to avoid the heavy bound for Durban the Malacca Strait route is
weather prevalent to seaward at this season preferable.
(6.56). 50 6.152.1
Distances: Cape Town 5250; Distances from Singapore in miles.

Cape Town Durban

Malacca Strait
E-bound Oct-March 571O(a)(G) Oct-March 4950
May-Sept 563O(a)(G) May-Sept 4890
W-bound Nov-March 563O(G) All seasons 4870
April-Nov 5680(G)
Selat Sunda
E-bound All seasons 5810(a') All seasons 5030
W-bound Oct-April 5700(G) —
May-Sept 5820(G) —
(a) For Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of), subtract 20 miles.
(a') For Cape of Good Hope (145 miles S of), subtract 180 miles.
(G) For Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), subtract 130 miles.

85
 INDIAN OCEAN

Passage between South Africa and Sound. The route is that for Torres Strait as far as 39° S,
Australia 45° E, thence:
6.153 Great circle to 35° 30' S, 80° 00' E, thence:
Between the South-east Trade Winds and the Great circle to 15° 30' S, 120° 00' E, thence:
Roaring Forties, there is a zone of light variable winds 5 Joining the recommended track (6.121) S of Browse
lying with its axis in about 35° S in the S summer and Islet, thence to destination.
30° S in the S winter. 6.154.3
The Southern Ocean Current, with a mean rate of ^ For destinations West of Yampi Sound. The route
knot or less, has an indefinite N boundary in the South is that for destinations between Darwin and Yampi
Indian Ocean, but E-going sets predominate as far N as 1° Sound as far as the meridian of 115° E, thence as direct
30° S, or the S limit of the South-east Trade Wind. as navigation permits to destination.
The rhumb line between Cape Agulhas and Cape
Leeuwin coincides with the parallel of 35° S, and is 4711 Cape Town -> North-west and North coasts
miles in length. The corresponding great circle is only of Australia—May to September
4501 miles in length, but its vertex is in about 45° S, in 15 6.154.4
the storm-ridden waters of the Roaring Forties. Great For Torres Strait, Darwin and other destinations
circles to places farther along the S coast of Australia East of Yampi Sound. The route, in spite of the
pass even farther S, increasing the probability of adverse Agulhas Current, is:
encountering ice bergs, and approaching the limit of Along the parallel of 35° 30' S as far as 80° E,
pack ice (6.42). 20
thence:
It is therefore evident that any attempt to shorten a Great circle to 15° 30' S, 120° 00' E, thence:
voyage by great circle sailing between the two continents Joining the recommended track (6.121) S of Browse
is likely, except on the most N tracks, to put a vessel at Islet.
risk of delay due to the weather, and in the case of W- 6.154.5
bound voyages, due to stronger adverse currents, with 25 For destinations West of Yampi Sound. The route
an additional risk that pack ice may be encountered. is that for destinations E of Yampi Sound as far as
Consequently, E-bound routes to the S and W coasts 35° 30' S, 80° 00' E, thence: great circle to 19° S, 115° E,
of Australia usually comprise a composite route with a thence as direct as navigation permits to destination.
limiting latitude of 40° S in summer and 35° 30' S, in 6.154.6
winteif. 30
Distances in miles from Cape Town:
W-bound routes, to avoid the head winds and adverse Oct-April May-Sept
currents of the direct routes, keep well to the N. From Torres Strait 7050(a') • 6880(G)
the S and W coasts of Australia they pass in all seasons Darwin: via North Sahul
through or N of 30° S, 100° E. If bound Cape Agulhas in Passage 6410(a') —
the S summer, the route continues from 30° S, 100° E by 35 via coastal route *6370(a') **6200(G)
great circle to join the parallel of 35° S in 65° E, which it Port Hedland 5430(a') 5400(G)
follows to a landfall on Cape Saint Francis: in the S * Via Osborn Passage. ** Via Browse Islet.
winter it follows the parallel of 30° S to the African coast (a') For distance from Cape of Good Hope (145 miles
off Durban before turning S to continue coastwise as at S of), subtract 180 miles.
6.56. 40
(G) For distance from Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of),
Voyages between South Africa and the NW and W subtract 130 miles.
coasts of Australia are little affected by the foregoing
considerations. However, in view of the possibility of Durban — > North-west and North coasts of
encountering hurricanes off the NW coast of Australia, Australia
the routes for Darwin and the Arafura Sea from October "5 6.155
to April keep away from the coast and pass close S of Diagrams (6.151) and (6.122)
Roti and Timor. For Torres Strait and Darwin, from October to
For restrictions on tankers, other than those in ballast April routes are by great circle to 11° 30' S, 118° 00' E,
carrying only residual cargo, navigating off the coast of thence as at 6.154 or 6.154.1.
South Africa, see Admiralty Sailing Directions. 50 6.155.1
May to September routes are by great circle to
15° 30' S, 120° 00' E, thence joining the recommended
Cape Town -» North-west and North coasts track (6.121) S of Browse Islet.
of Australia—October to April 6.155.2
6.154 55 For destinations between Darwin and Yampi
Diagrams (6.150) and (6.122) Sound. Routes at all seasons are by great circle to
For Torres Strait. The route is: 15° 30' S, 120° 00' E, thence as at 6.154.2 to destination.
Across the Agulhas Current to 36° 45' S, 19° 00' E, 6.155.3
145 miles S of Cape of Good Hope, thence: For destinations West of Yampi Sound. Routes at
Rhumb line to 39° S, 45° E, thence: 5° all seasons are by great circle to 19° S, 115° E, thence as
Great circle to 11° 30' S, 118° 00' E, to avoid the direct as navigation permits to destination.
possibility of hurricanes, thence: 6.155.4
Continuing by the Ocean Route (6.122.2) through Distances in miles from Durban:
Timor and Arafura Seas. Oct-April May-Sept
6.154.1 65
Torres Strait 6350 6250
For Darwin. The route is that for Torres Strait as far Darwin: via North Sahul
as 11° 30' S, 118° 00' E, thence through either Osborn Passage 5720 —
Passage or North Sahul Passage. via coastal route *5670 **557O
6.154.2 Port Hedland 4770 4770
For destinations between Darwin and Yampi 7
" * Via Osborn Passage. ** Via Browse Islet.

89
6.156 INDIAN OCEAN

North-west and North coasts of Melbourne, thence great circle to South West Cape,
Australia —• Durban or Cape Town— Tasmania, thence as navigation permits to Hobart.
October to April 6.157.1
6.156 Shorter but more boisterous routes are:
Diagrams: (6.122) and (6.151) for Durban or (6.150) 5 Through 36° 45' S, 19° 00' E, thence:
for Cape Town Rhumb line to 44° S, 40° E, thence:
From Torres Strait. The route follows the Ocean Rhumb line to 45° S, 65° E, thence:
Route at 6.122.2 to 11° 30' S, 118° 00' E, thence: Along the parallell of 45° S.
Either, great circle to Durban: For Fremantle the route is by great circle from 45° S
T)r, great circle to 35° S, 65° E, thence: 10 65° E.
Rhumb line to a landfall on Cape Recife, thence: For Adelaide the route leaves the parallel of 45° S in
Coastwise as at 6.56 to Cape Town. 92° 26' E and follows the great circle to Investigator
6.156.1 Strait.
From Darwin. The route is through North Sahul For Melbourne the route leaves the parallel of 45° S
Passage to join the route from Torres Strait SE of 15 in 107° 20' E and follows the great circle to Cape Otway,
Timor. thence as direct as navigation permits.
6.165.2 For Hobart the route continues along the parallel of
From places between Darwin and Yampi Sound. 45° S to 130° E, thence by great circle to destination.
Routes are by the recommended tracks (6.121) to
15° 30' S, 120° 00' E, thence either great circle direct to 20 Cape Town -* West and South coasts of
Durban or great circle to join the route from Torres Australia—May to September
Strait to Cape Town in 35° S, 65° E. 6.157.2
6.156.3 To avoid the probability of foul weather farther S,
From places West of Yampi Sound. The route is as routes are:
direct as navigation permits to 20° S, 115° E, off Monte 25 Through 35° 30' S, 20° 00' E, thence:
Bello Islands, thence either great circle to Durban or Along the parallel of 35° 30' S, which, if strictly
great circle to join the route from Torres Strait to Cape followed, passes close under West Cape Howe to
Town in 35° S, 65° E. Investigator Strait which leads to Adelaide.
For Fremantle, the route is by great circle leaving
North-west and north coasts of 30 the parallel of 35° 30' S in 90° E.
Australia -> Durban and Cape Town—May For ports East of Adelaide, routes are by great circle
to September leaving the paralle of 35° 30' S in 115° 00' E, S of Cape
6.156.4 Leeuwin.
From Yampi Sound and all places farther East. 6.157.3
Routes are by the recommended tracks (6.121) to 35 The possibility of encountering icebergs on these
15°3O'S, 120° 00' E, thence great circle to 30° 00' S, routes at any time of the year cannot be discounted, see
56° 30' E, thence along the parallel of 30° S to Durban, 6.43.
or continuing thence for Cape Town as at 6.56. 6.157.4
6.156.5 Distances in miles.
From places West of Yampi Sound. Routes are as 40 Cape Town to: Oct-April (a') May-Sept (G)
direct as navigation permits to 20° S, 115° E, thence (6.157) (6.157.1) (6.157.2)
great circle to join the route from ports N of Yampi Fremantle 4840 4790 4870
Sound in 30° 00' S, 56° 30' E. Adelaide 5820 5660 5950
6.156.6 Port Phillip for
Distances in miles: 45 Melbourne* 6030 5820 6230
Durban Cape Town (G) Hobart 6150 5870 6400
Torres Strait Oct-April 6350 7000 * Port Phillip to Melbourne: 40 miles,
May-Sept 6260 7050 (a') For distance from Cape of Good Hope (145 miles
Darwin Oct-April 5710 6370 S of), subtract 180 miles.
May-Sept 5580 6370 50 (G) For distances from Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of),
Port Hedland Oct-April 4730 5360 subtract 130 miles.
May-Sept 4750 5540
Durban -> West and South coasts of
(G) For distances to Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), Australia
subtract 130 miles. 55 6.158
Diagram (6.157)
Cape Town -> West and South coasts of October to April, routes join those at 6.157 from Cape
Australia—October to April Town, by great circle from Durban to 40° S, 77° E.
6.157 6.158.1
Diagram (6.157) 60 May to September, routes join those from Cape Town
Routes are across the Agulhas Current to 36° 45' S, by great circle from Durban to 35° 30' S, 67° 30' E.
19° 00' E, 145 miles S of Cape of Good Hope, thence: 6.158.2
Rhumb line to 40° S, 55° E, thence: Distances in miles.
Along the parallel of 40° S. Durban to: Oct-April May-Sept
For Fremantle the route continues by great circle 65 Fremantle 4250 4270
from 40° S, 77° E. Adelaide 5230 5350
For Adelaide and Melbourne routes continue by Port Phillip for
great circle from 40° S, 100° E. Melbourne* 5440 5630
For Hobart the route continues by great circle from Hobart 5560 5800
40° S, 100° E to 41° 30' S, 122° 50' E, on the route to 70 * Port Phillip to Melbourne: 40 miles.
 INDIAN OCEAN 6.163.3
West and South coasts of 6.159.1
Australia -+ Durban or Cape T o w n From 30° S, 100° E, routes are seasonal as follows:
6.159 October to April, for Durban, by great circle.
Diagram (6.157) For Cape Town:
All routes throughout the year pass through or N of Great circle to 35° S, 65° E, thence:
30° S, 100° E. Rhumb line to a landfall on Cape Recife, thence:
From the S coast of Australia and Tasmania this Coastwise as at 6.56.
position is approached through 34° 37' S, 115° 08' E, 15 6.159.2
miles S of Cape Leeuwin, and thence by rhumb line. May to September, routes are along the parallel of
Although a great circle track from Tasmania direct to 10 30° S to Durban, continuing thence for Cape Town as at
30° S, 100° E might appear preferable, it would only 6.56.
save about 20 miles, and adverse winds with head seas 6.159.3
would be more likely. Distance in miles:

Fremantle Adelaide Port Phillip Hobart

for Melbourne

Durban
October-April 4350 5510 5800 5980
May-September 4410 5570 5860 6040
Cape Town(G)
October-April 4970 6130 6420 6600
May-September 5200 6360 6650 6830

* Port Phillip to Melbourne: 40 miles.

(G) For distances to Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), subtract 130 miles.

Cape T o w n -> N e w Zealand a n d Pacific 30 passing 50 miles N of Chagos Archipelago, thence to

Ocean Selat Sunda.
6.160 Distance: 3980 miles.
Diagram (6.160)
October to April, routes are as at 6.157 for Hobart as M o m b a s a <-> Singapore
far as 41° 30' S, 122° 50' E, thence: 35 6.162
Either, great circle to 47° 50' S, 167° 50' E, ENE of Diagrams (6.161)
Snares Islands; Or, great circle passing close S of From Mombasa the route is:
Tasmania to Cook Strait. Through One and Half Degree Channel, thence:
6.160.1 Through Selat Benggala, thence:
Ifthe shorter route to Hobart as at 6.157.1 is taken, it 40 Through Malacca Strait to Singapore.
should be left in 45° S, 130° E, and great circles followed Distances: 3990 miles.
thence to Snares Islands or Cook Strait.
6.160.2 M o m b a s a <-• North a n d w e s t coasts of
May to September, routes are as at 6.157.2 for ports E Australia
of Adelaide as far as 35° 30' S, 115° 00' E, S of Cape 45 6.163
Leeuwin, thence: Diagram (6.161)
Great circle to a landfall on South West Cape, For Torres Strait and Darwin, in either direction,
Tasmania, thence: routes from Mombasa are either, as at 6.161 to Selat
Great circle to Snares Islands or Cook Strait. Sunda, thence:
6.160.3 50 Through Java and Flores Seas, and Selat Wetar, as
Distances in miles from Cape Town: in Java, Flores and Banda Seas Route of 6.122.4;
6.163.1
Snares Cook Strait Or, 50 miles N of Seychelles Group, thence:
Islands {Wellington) Through 4° 00' S, 73° 30' E, passing N of Chago
Oct-April: (6.160) 6970(a') 738O(a') 55 Archipelago, thence:
Shorter route (6.160.1) 6650(a') 7100(a') Joining the Ocean Route of 6.122.2 in 11° 30' S,.
Mav-Sept 7240(G) 7630(G) 118° 00'E.
6.163.2
(a')For distance from Cape of Good Hope (145 miles For places between Darwin and Cape Leeuwin
S of), subtract 180 miles. 60 East-bound. From Mombasa routes are:
(G) For distance from Cape Agulhas (15 miles S of), 50 miles N of Seychelles Group, thence:
subtract 130 miles. Through 4° 00' S, 73° 30' E, thence:
Through 10° S, 80° E, thence:
As direct as navigation permits, either to the
65 appropriate recommended track (6.121), or to
Mombasa «-> Selat Sunda destination.
6.161 6.163.3
Diagram (6.161) West-bound. From the Australian coast S of Darwin,
From Mombasa the route passes 50 miles N of routes are by great circle, as near as navigation permits,
Seychelles Group, thence through 4° 00' S, 73° 30' E, 70 keeping N of 30° S, 100° E.

91
6.163.4 INDIAN OCEAN

(6.161) ROUTES—Mombasa Eastern Archipelago and Australia.

6.163.4 40 6.164.3
Distances in miles: For low-powered vessels, routes are as follows.
From Mombasa: October to April, round Raas Caseyr thence:
Java, Flores & Banda 1° 00' S, 72° 20' E, in March and April direct, but in
Seas Route Ocean Route October to February via 3° 00' N, 60° 00' E,
Torres Strait 6170 6150 45 thence:
Darwin 5620 5520 2° 20' S, 76° 30' E, thence:
3° 00' S, 94° 30' E, thence:
E-bound W-bound To Selat Sunda.
Port Hedland 4790 4720 6.164.4
Fremantle 4840 4570 50 May to September, as for fully-powered vessels as far
Cape Leeuwin 4860 4530 as Dondra Head, thence:
Across the equator in 96° 30' E, thence:
Aden -> Selat Sunda Along the W coast of Sumatera by either the outer
6.164 route, W of all the islands, or the middle route
Diagram (6.164) 55 between the islands in the offing and those
October to April, the route is round Raas Caseyr, adjacent to the coast (see Admiralty Sailing
thence through One and Half Degree Channel, and Directions) to Selat Sunda.
thence to Selat Sunda.
6.164.1 Selat Sunda -* Aden
May to September, the route is: 60 6.165
N of Suqutra to 13° 00' N, 55° 00' E, thence: Diagram (6.164)
Through Eight Degree Channel, thence: October to April, the route is to a landfall on Dondra
Landfall on Dondra Head (as at 6.78.2), thence: Head, thence as at 6.79 to Aden.
To Selat Sunda. Distance (N or S of Suqutra): 3860 miles.
6.164.2 65 6.165.1
Distances in miles. May to September, the route is:
Oct-April May-Sept Through One and Half Degree Channel, thence:
Selat Sunda 3840 3860 8° 00' N, 52° 40' E, thence:
Routeing Position Round Raas Caseyr to Aden.
(6° 2 5 ' S , 102° 30'E) 3650 3670 70 Distance: 3940 miles.

Q9
 INDIAN OCEAN 6.166.1

6.165.2 6.165.4
For low-powered vessels routes are: July and August:
November to March: Through 2° 30' S, 65° 00' E, thence:
Between Pulau-pulau Mentawi and Sumatera, 1° 10'S, 61° 30'E, thence:
thence: 5 8° 00' N, 52° 40' E, thence:
Through Selat Siberut, thence: Round Raas Caseyr to Aden.
Across the equator in 97° 00' E, thence:
1° 50'N, 95°OO'E, thence:
5° 00' N, 90° 00' E, thence:
5° 30' N, 85° 00' E, thence: '0 Aden <-> Singapore
Through the Traffic Separation Scheme (1.28) off 6.166
Dondra Head, thence: Diagrams (6.164)
As at 6.79 to Aden. Routes are as for the Malacca Strait route of
6.165.3 6.167-6.167.2 (E-bound) or 6.168.2 and 168.4 (W-
April, May, June and September: '5 bound).
Through 8°00'S, 68° 00' E, passing close S of 6.166.1
Chagos Archipelago, thence: East-bound, alternative routes are those at 6.164 and
8° 00' N, 52° 40' E, thence: 6.164.1 from Aden to Selat Sunda, thence as at 7.127 to
Round Raas Caseyr to Aden. Singapore.
6.166.2 INDIAN OCEAN

6.166.2 6.168.3
Distances by full-power routes in miles: May to September, from the Routeing Position, the
route is as at 6.165.1 to Aden.
Oct-April May-Sept 6.168.4
E-bound: Malacca Strait 3620 (S) 3650 (N) 5 From Selat Benggala the route is direct to the Traffic
Selat Sunda 4410 4430 Separation Scheme (1.28) off Dondra Head, thence as at
VV-bound: Malacca Strait 3620 (S) 3780 (S) 6.79.2 to Aden.
(N) and (S) = Through Eight Degree Channel and 6.168.5
North or South of Suqutra. An alternative route from the Selat Sumba Route is:
10 From Selat Sumba to 9° 30' S, 113° 00' E, thence:
6° 30' S, 80° 00' E; thence:
Aden -> Darwin or Torres Strait 4° 00' S, 73° 30' E, thence:
6.167 N of Chagos Archipelago to 3° 00' N, 57° 00' E,
Diagrams (6.164) and (6.122) thence:
Across the W part of the Indian Ocean and through 15 To join the route from Selat Sunda (6.165.1) in
the Arabian Sea, routes are seasonal as described below. 8° 00' N, 52° 40' E.
East of Sri Lanka, the choice between an open ocean
route and a voyage through the Eastern Archipelago will Aden +-* Darwin or Torres Strait—Distances
be governed by draught, weather, endurance and 6.169
season. 20 Distances in miles.
Ocean Route, Selat Sumba Route, Java, Flores and
Banda Seas Route and Malacca Strait Route, which lead
from the Indian Ocean to the N coast of Australia, are E-bound W-bound
described at 6.122-6.122.4 and 6.140.1. From Aden to To Aden from
6.167.1 25
October to April, the route is round Raas Caseyr, Route Torres Darwin Torres Darwin
thence either: St. St.
Through One and Half Degree Channel, thence:
Either direct to Selat Sunda (as at 6.164) and via Ocean (6.122.2)
Java, Flores and Banda Seas Route, 30 Oct-April 6050 537O| 6050* 537O*t
Or direct to the Routeing Position (6° 25' S, May-Sept 6080 5400f 6150 5460f
102° 30' E) and via the Ocean or Selat Sumba Selat Sumba (6.122.3)
Routes. Oct-April 6020 5390 6020* 5390*
Or, through Eight Degree Channel, thence: May-Sept 6050 5420 6110 5480
Through the Traffic Separation Scheme (1.28) off 35 May- Sept (Alt) — — 6220 5600
Dondra Head (as at 6.78.1), thence: Java, Flores and Banda Seas (6.122.4)
Direct to Selat Benggala and via Malacca Strait Oct-April 6030 5480 6020* 5470*
Route. May-Sept 6050 5500 6130 5580
6.167.2 Malacca Strait (6 .140.1)
May to September, the route is: 40 Oct-April 6120 5550 6120* 5550*
N of Suqutra to 13° 00' N, 55° 00' E, thence: May-Sept 6140 5570 6280 5710
Through Eight Degree Channel, thence:
To a landfall on Dondra Head (as at 6.78.2), thence * Passing S of Suqu{ra: if passing N, add 30 miles.
direct to: either Selat Sunda and via Java, Flores t Through Osborn Passage.
and Banda Seas Route, or the Routeing Position 45
and via the Ocean or Selat Sumba Routes, Aden -> Fremantle or South coast of
Or through the Traffic Separation Scheme (1.28) Australia
off Dondra Head, thence via Selat Benggala and 6.170
the Malacca Strait Route. Diagram (6.164)
6.167.3 50 The route is:
For distances, see 6.169. Round Raas Caseyr, thence:
4° 00' S, 73° 30' E, thence:
Great Circle, either to Fremantle, or to 34° 28' S,
Darwin and Torres Strait -» Aden 114° 45' E, 20 miles WSW of Cape Leeuwin, to
6.168 55 join the routes to the E (6.126).
Diagrams (6.122) and (6.164) Distances: Fremantle 4920 miles; Cape Leeuwin 4950
For the part of the voyage E of Sri Lanka, the Ocean miles; Adelaide 6130 miles; Port Phillip for Melbourne
Route, Selat Sumba Route, Java, Flores and Banda Seas 6420 miles.
Route and the Malacca Strait Route, described at Port Phillip to Melbourne: 40 miles.
6.122.2-6.122.4 and 6.140.1, should each be considered. 60
Across the Indian Ocean and Arabian Sea, routes are South coast of Australia and
seasonal as described below. Fremantle -» Aden
For distances, see 6.169. 6.171
6.168.1 Diagram (6.164)
October to April, from the Routeing Position 65 October to April, routes are those at 6.170 in reverse.
(6° 25' S, 102° 30' E), the route is as at 6.165 to Aden. 6.171.1
6.168.2 May to September, routes to Cape Leeuwin from the
From Selat Benggala the route is direct to the Traffic E are as at 6.126.
Separation Scheme (1.28) off Dondra Head, thence as at From Cape Leeuwin or Fremantle routes are by great
6.79 to Aden. 70 circle to 8° S, 68° E, thence:
 INDIAN OCEAN 6.172.1
Either, Aden -> New Zealand and Pacific Ocean
Through 8° N, 60° E, thence: 6.172
Through 13° N, 55° E, thence: Diagrams (6.164) and (6.160)
N of Suqujra to Aden. October to April, routes are:
Or, 5 Round Raas Caseyr, thence;
Through 8° 00' N, 52° 40' E, thence: Through 4° 00' S, 73° 30' E, thence:
Round Raas Caseyr to Aden. Great circle to 41° 30' S, 122° 50' E, thence:
6.171.2 Either, great circle to 47° 50' S, 167° 50' E, ENE of
Distances in miles to Aden: Snares Islands;
N of Suqu{ra S of Suqufra 10 Or, great circle passing close S of Tasmania to Cook
May-Sept Strait.
Cape Leeuwin 5120 4990 Distances: Snares Islands 7400 miles;
Fremantle 5120 4990 Cook Strait (Wellington) 7830 miles.
Adelaide 6300 6170 6.172.1
Port Phillip for 15 May to September, routes are:
Melbourne* 6590 6460 As for October to April as far as 4° 00' S, 73° 30' E,
Oct-April See 6.170 thence:
Great circle to 35° 30' S, 115°00'E, S of Cape
* Port Phillip to Melbourne: 40 miles. Leeuwin, thence:

Diagram (6.122)

Lettered Positions
E 13°00'N, 74-10'E
K 34°28'S, 114°45'E
O 6°25'S, 102°3O'E
Z 11°30'S, 118°00'E

(6.173) ROUTES—Eastern side of Arabian Sea Australia.

95
6.173 INDIAN OCEAN

Great circle to a landfall on South West Cape, Strait of Hormuz, Karachi, Bombay and
Tasmania, thence: Colombo <-» West and North-west coasts of
Great circle to 47° 50' S, 167° 50' E,"ENE of Snares Australia
Island, or to Cook Strait. 6.174
Distances: Snares Islands 7430 miles; Diagrams (6.173) and (6.122)
Cook Strait (Wellington) 7820 miles. Routes from Strait of Hormuz, Karachi and Bombay
are as at 6.80 or 6.81 as far as the latitude of Cape
Cormorin if bound W coast of Australia, or as far as
Strait of Hormuz, Karachi, Bombay and Point de Galle if bound NW coast. Thence routes are by
Colombo «-• Darwin or Torres Strait 10 great circle to the W coast, or by rhumb line and as
6.173 navigation permits to destinations on the NW coast.
Diagram (6.173) 6.174.1
Between Strait of Hormuz and Dondra Head, routes Distances in miles:
are as at 6.80 and 6.81.
East of Sri Lanka, the same considerations apply and 15 Cape Fremantle Port
the same routes are advised as at 6.167 or 6.168. Leeuwin Hedland
6.173.1 (2ff SWof)
Distances in miles:
Strait of Hormuz 4950 4890 4620
Route Strait of Karachi Bombay Colombo 20 Karachi 4490 4430 4160
Hormuz Bombay 4030 3970 3690
Colombo 3180 3120 2830
Ocean (6.122.2)
Torres Strait 5790 5330 4870 4010
Darwin* 5110 4650 4190 3320 25 Ports in the Indian Ocean <-> East coast of
Selat Sumba (6.122.3) Australia
Torres Strait 5760 5300 4840 3980 6.17S
Darwin 5160 4700 4240 3380 The choice between a route N or S of Australia
Java, Flores and Banda Seas (6.122.4) depends both on the distance, which may vary with the
Torres Strait 5770 5310 4840 3980 30 season, and the climatic conditions on each route.
Darwin 5220 4760 4290 3430 In the following table of distances, Brisbane
Malacca Strait (6.140.1) (Caloundra Head) is taken as the central Australian port,
Torres Strait 5870 5410 4940 4080 and distances are quoted from it in miles. A comparison
Darwin 5300 4840 4380 3520 for Sydney may be obtained by adding 470 miles to N-
35 about distances and subtracting that amount from S-
about distances.
* Via Osborn Passage. Caloundra Head to Port of Brisbane is 35 miles.

Between Brisbane (Caloundra E-bound* W-bound Reference and Remarks

Head) and: S-about N-about S-about N-about (Common Reference
7.51-7.53)

Good Hope, Cape of (145 miles S of) O-A 6810 O A 8190 —- — 6.154, 6.156, 6.157, 6.159
Cape Town O-A 6990 O-A 8370 O-A 7390 O-A 8320 6.154, 6.156, 6.157, 6.159
M-S 7190 M-S 8200 M-S 7620 M-S 8370
Durban O-A 6400 O-A 7670 O-A 6770 O-A 7670 6.155,6.156, 6.158, 6.159
M-S 6600 M-S 7570 M-S 6830 M-S 7580
Mombasa 7300 7470* 6970 7470* 6.126, 6.163
Aden 7390 O-A 7360* O-A 7390 O-A 7390* 6.126, 6.167-6.171
M-S 7390* M-S 7430 % M-S 7470*
Strait of Hormuz 7390 7110* 7390 7110* 6.126,6.173,6.174
Karachi 6930 6650* 6930 6650* 6.126, 6.173, 6.174

Bombay 6470 6190* 6470 6190* 6.126,6.173,6.174

Colombo 5620 5330* 5620 5330* 6.126, 6.173, 6.174
Madras 5900 5400f 5900 5400f 6.126, 6.140, 6.141
Calcutta Approach** 6110 5340f 6110 5340f 6.126,6.140,6.141
Rangoon River Entrance§ 5740* 4880f 5740 4880f 6.126, 6.140, 6.142

All S-about route via Bass Strait: all N-about routes via Torres Strait and Inner Route (7.52.2).
Seasonal Routes: O-A = October to April; M-S = May to September.
* Via Ocean Route (6.122.2).
** Calcutta Approach to Calcutta: 125 miles.
t Via Malacca Strait Route (6.140.1).
% S of Suqutra.
§ Rangoon River Entrance to Port of Rangoon: 40 miles.
 CHAPTER 7
PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS
WINDS AND WEATHER
7.1
The following description of the winds and weather of
the Pacific Ocean and adjacent seas amplifies the general
statement given in The Mariner's Handbook, For more
precise information regarding oceanic winds and
weather, the mariner is referred to Charts 5127 (1) to
(12) Monthly Routeing Charts for North Pacific Ocean
and Charts 5128 (1) to (12) Monthly Routeing Charts for
South Pacific Ocean. Detailed information about specific
localities should be sought in the appropriate Admiralty
Sailing Directions. In reading the following description
reference should also be made to World Climatic Charts
(Diagrams (1.13a) and (1.13b)).
In the E part of the Pacific Ocean, the winds and
weather conform, in the main, with the text-book
description of oceanic winds and weather published in
The Mariner's Handbook. In the W part of the ocean,
however, the seasonal heating and cooling of the Asiatic
land mass results in the establishment here of a
monsoonal regime. Conditions are further complicated,
in the region between Australia and the Philippines, by
numerous islands, many of which are of some size and
height, causing marked differences in the winds and
weather experienced in different localities. These local
effects are dealt with in the Sailing Directions.
North Pacific Ocean
Intertropical Convergence Zone
7.2
The Intertropical Convergence Zone remains
permanently N of the equator in longitudes E of about
160° W. To the W of that meridian, it lies in the S
hemisphere from about November or December until
April or May; in the summer of the N hemisphere it is
virtually non-existent W of about 150° E. In the W part
of the North Pacific, therefore, the Intertropical
Convergence Zone is really only in evidence during the
change of the monsoons, from about mid-September to
mid-November, and from about mid-April to mid-
May. The weather of the Intertropical Convergence
Zone is that typical of the Zone in other oceans, ie light,
variable winds with calm alternating with squalls, heavy
showers, and thunderstorms; but W of about 130° W,
the frequency of calms and variable winds is
considerably less than in the Intertropical Convergence
Zone of other oceans, and most winds are from an E
point. The mean positions of the Zone in January and
July are shown on Diagrams (1.13a) and (1.13b). The
actual position is subject to much variation, as is the
width of the zone, which averages about 150 miles. The
worst weather is generally experienced when the Trade
Winds of the two hemispheres meet at a wide angle.
Visibility is normally good, except in heavy rain.
Seasonal winds of eastern North Pacific
Ocean
7.3
In summer, E of about 120° W, and between the
Intertropical Convergence Zone and the equator, there
is an area covered by prevailing SW winds, see Diagram
(1.13b). These winds are of a monsoonal nature, and
10 result from the summer heating of the North American
continent, which causes a reduction of pressure over that
area, and a distortion of the Intertropical Convergence
Zone to the N; the South-east Trade Wind of the South
Pacific Ocean is drawn across the equator, is deflected to
15 the right by the effect of the earth's rotation, and is felt as
a SW wind in the area under consideration.
Over the greater part of the area these winds prevail
from about June to October, and replace the North-east
Trade Wind which prevails there in winter, see 7.4. The
20 duration of the season of these south-westerlies varies
with latitude, being longest near the equator, near which
S to SW winds are prevalent in most months E of
100° W.
Winds are mostly light or moderate, though squalls,
25 in which the wind may at times reach gale force, are
rather common. Tropical storms, see 7.10, also produce
strong winds and gales at times.
The weather is generally cloudy and unsettled, and
rainfall is considerable, it is, in fact, these winds which
30 bring the rainy season to much of Mexico and Central
America. Visibility over the open ocean is generally
good except in rain.
North-east Trade Wind
35 7.4
The North-east Trade Wind blows on the equatorial
side of the large clockwise circulation around the oceanic
high pressure area situated in about 30° N. This 'high'
lies farther N and is somewhat more intense in summer
40 than in winter, and, while in the former season it
generally consists of single cell, in the latter it more often
represents the resultant of a succession of anticyclones
moving E across the North Pacific from Asia, and
becoming stationary over the E part of the ocean. In
45 summer, the Trade Wind blows in the region E of about
150°E, and between the Intertropical Convergence
Zone and about 32° N; the limits are not fixed, but
fluctuate considerably. To the W of 150° E the Trade
Wind gives way to the South-west Monsoon of the W
50 part of the North Pacific Ocean, which is described at
7.6.
As with the Trade Winds of other oceans, these winds
are remarkable over large areas for their persistence and
steadiness. T h e general direction and steadiness of the
55 wind in different parts of the zone can best be seen from
a study of Diagrams (1.13a) and (1.13b), which will
show that the direction becomes more N (or even NW)
near the American coast, and mainly E in summer, in the
SW part of the area covered by these winds.
60 The strength of the North-east Trade Wind averages
force 3—4, but it often freshens to 5—6. Winds are likely to
reach force 7 or above on 1-3 days per month in the heart
of the Trade Wind; in the vicinity of the Mexican coast,
N of about 10° N, and between about 90° W and 100° W,
65 the frequency rises to 3-6 days per month from
November to February. Apart from squalls, winds of
this strength are unlikely within about 600 miles of the
equator.
The typical weather of the Trade Wind zone is fair,
70 with scattered showers, and skies about half covered by
7.5 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS
small cumulus cloud. At times the Trade Wind becomes
unsteady, being interrupted by a day or two of unsettled
showery weather with occasional squalls. In the NE part
of the zone, near the American coast, cloud amounts are
generally smaller than elsewhere, and rain is rare.
Visibility over the open ocean is generally good,
except in rain, but there is often a light haze which
restricts visibility to between 8 and 15 miles; showers,
cloud and haze usually increase when the wind freshens.
Dust haze is sometimes prevalent off the American coast
and is associated with fresh or strong offshore winds.
North-east Monsoon
7.5
In the winter of the N hemisphere, the cooling of the
Asiatic land mass results in the establishment of an
intense area of high pressure over Mongolia and the E
part of Siberia. The anticyclonic wind circulation
resulting from this pressure distribution gives rise to the
establishment at this season, of NE winds over the W
part of the N Pacific Ocean, S of about 30° N and in the
South and East China Seas, and Yellow Sea. The N and
E limits of the area covered by the Monsoon are not very
well defined. On its E side it merges with the North-east
Trade Wind of the central and E parts of the N Pacific
Ocean, while to the N it gives way to the prevailing
westerlies of higher latitudes.
The time of onset of the Monsoon varies with latitude.
In the N it begins about September, while towards the
equator it does not become established until November.
In April it becomes less steady, the prevailing direction
becomes more E and winds with a S component are
more frequent.
The general direction and steadiness of the Monsoon
are indicated on Diagram (1.13a); at the height of the
season, in January, winds over the open waters of the
South China Sea and E of the Philippines are almost
exclusively from between N and E, while in the Yellow
Sea the direction becomes more N, and over the S part of
Japan it is NW. Wind direction becomes more variable
as latitude increases. The strength of the wind over the
open sea averages about force 5 in the N part of the
monsoon zone, increasing to force 6 in the Taiwan
Strait; farther S it decreases to an average of force 5 in
the South China Sea and force 4 S of 10° N. It becomes
less steady, lighter and more N in direction towards the
equator and amongst the islands of the Sulu Sea and the
Celebes Sea.
The movement of depressions in an E direction across
the area also affects the strength of the wind. As far E as
the general longitude of Japan there is often no closed
wind circulation round newly formed 'lows'; their
passage is marked by a slackening of the monsoon ahead
of them and a freshening, often to gale force, in their
rear.
At the height of the season in December and January,
winds are likely to reach force 7 or above on 6-10 days
per month over much of the area between Vietnam,
Luzon, T'ai-wan and Japan, as indicated on Diagram
(1.13a); the stormiest area is E of Luzon and T'ai-wan,
where winds of this strength are likely on more than 11
days per month. In the Yellow Sea their frequency is
about 3-6 days per month, while S of the 10th parallel it
decreases to 0-3 days per month.
To the N of about 20° N, overcast skies with periods
of light rain or drizzle are typical during this season,
especially from January to April, though at times there
are periods of more broken skies, and in October and
November generally fair conditions prevail along the SE
coast of China. In Bo Hai and Liaodong Wan,
immediately to leeward of the Asiatic land mass, a good
deal of fine and settled weather with only small amounts
of cloud prevails. S of about 17° N, over the open sea,
skies are only about half covered and there are occasional
showers; cloudiness increases again towards the equator
and showers become more frequent.
The weather in the vicinity of land is greatly affected
by the degree of exposure to the prevailing monsoon.
Where the monsoon blows onshore, and especially when
10 the coast is backed by high ground, cloud amounts are
larger and rainfall is heavier than over the open sea,
while to leeward of high ground fairer conditions
prevail. Information about specific localities is
published in Admiralty Sailing Directions.
15 Over the open ocean, visibility is good except in rain.
Off the coasts of China and Vietnam, poor visibility
becomes increasingly frequent after December, and
mist or fog may occur on more than 10 days per month in
the vicinity of North Vietnam in February and March,
20 and on 8-9 days per month off Hong Kong in March and
April. In Bo Hai and Liaodong Wan, strong NW winds
at times bring dust haze from the interior of Mongolia.
South-west Monsoon
25 7.6
In the summer of the N hemisphere, intense heating
of the Asiatic land mass results in the formation of an
area of low pressure centred approximatley over NW
India with an extension over the E part of Asia, see
30 Diagram (1.13b). The South-east Trade Wind of the
Pacific and Indian Oceans is drawn across the equator
and is deflected to the right by the effect of the earth's
rotation. This wind, known as the South-west
Monsoon, is felt in the W part of the North Pacific
35 Ocean and the South and East China Seas and Yellow
Sea as a prevailing S to SW wind, and in the Japan Sea as
a S to SE wind. The N and E limits of the Monsoon are
ill defined but, W of about 140° E and S of about 40° N,
winds are predominantly from between SE and SW at
40 the height of the season, in July. The general direction
and steadiness of the winds at this period are indicated
on Diagram (1.13b). The Monsoon is steadiest in the
South China Sea, where nearly all winds are from
between S and W; farther N and E they are much more
45 variable in direction, and in the early part of the season
N of about 25° N, travelling depressions may cause
winds from any direction; along the China coast
between 20° N and 30° N, and in the vicinity of T'ai-
wan, north-easterlies are still more common than south-
50 westerlies in May.
The average strength of the Monsoon over the open
sea is about force 3—4 in the South China Sea and force 3
elsewhere, but squalls, in which the wind may reach gale
force, are fairly common. Apart from these squalls or in
55 the vicinity of tropical storms (7.10), winds do not often
reach force 7 in the monsoon season. Land and sea
breezes prevail close to the coast, and calms are not
uncommon.
The weather over the open sea away from the effects of
60 land is mainly fair, with skies about half covered, and
with occasional showers. Over the coasts, especially if
exposed to the Monsoon and backed by high ground,
cloudy weather with frequent heavy rain prevails.
Visibility over the open ocean is good except when
65 reduced by rain, but along the China coast there is a high
frequency of sea fog in certain months, due to the spread
of warm moist equatorial air over water previously
cooled by the NE winds of the winter Monsoon. The
water recovers its normal temperature progressively
70 from S to N, and the foggy season reaches its maximum
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS
in April off Hong Kong (8-9 days per month), in June off
Chang Jiang (12 days), and in July off Shandong Bandao
(12 days). In the Japan Sea, fog occurs on 3-4 days per
month, and on 5-7 days per month offN Honshu. After
these months the incidence drops sharply to about 2
days per month, and fog is rare in the later part of the
season.
Variables
7.7
In a belt extending across the central part of the
Pacific Ocean, and situated in about 25° N-30" N in
winter, and 35° N—40° N in summer, there are variable
and mainly light or moderate winds in the vicinity of the
oceanic anticyclone. In the E part of this zone winds are
mainly N in all seasons, and form a N extension of the
North-east Trade Wind around the E flank of the
oceanic 'high'. In the W part of the zone, in summer,
winds become mainly S and merge with the South-west
Monsoon described in article 7.6, while in winter they
give way, W of about 150° E, to prevailing NW winds
forming part of the circulation of the North-east
Monsoon.
In summer, winds are generally light, and are likely to
reach force 7 only on rare occasions except in association
with tropical storms, (7.10), and E of about 140° W,
where they may be expected to reach this strength on
1-4 days per month, the higher figure applying towards
the American coast, near which strong N to NW winds
are common. At the height of the winter season in
January, winds may be expected to reach force 7 or
above on 1-3 days per month E of about 140° W, and on
3-6 days per month W of that meridian, increasing to
6-10 days per month in the area covered by the North-
east Monsoon W of about 150° E, described in article
7.5. The weather in summer is generally fair or fine near
the normal position of the oceanic 'high', see Diagram
(1.13b), which at this season usually consists of a single
cell, and rain is infrequent. Cloudier conditions prevail
E and W of the area of high pressure; rainfall is light on
the E side, towards the American coast, but more
common to the W. In winter the 'high' shown on
Diagram (1.13a) usually consists of a series of E moving
anticyclones, near which fair or fine weather prevails,
the intervening troughs of relatively low pressure being
characterised by cloudy, showery weather. Visibility in
winter is mostly good except in rain, and over the open
ocean fog is not common. In summer fog and poor
visibility become increasingly frequent towards the N
limit of the zone (40° N at this season); in the W this is
due to the N flow of warm moist equatorial air over
progressively colder water, aggravated off the E coast of
N Honshu by contact with the cold Kamchatka Current;
in the E it is due to a similar cooling by the California
Current. Over much of the zone fog may occur on 3-4
days per month at this season, rising to 5-7 days per
month off the coast of California.
Westerlies
7.8
On the polar side of the oceanic anticyclone, the
prevailing winds are from some W point, but summer
and winter conditions are markedly different, and it is
convenient to treat the two periods separately.
In winter, N of 40° N, the almost continuous passage
of depressions from the vicinity of China and Japan in a
NE direction towards the Aleutian Islands and S Alaska
causes winds to vary greatly in both direction and
strength, and winds from any direction may be
experienced. As can be seen on Diagram (1.13a), strong
7.10
winds and gales are frequent. The region of highest gale
frequency extends from E of Japan to the area S of the
Aleutians and the Alaska peninsula; in this region winds
are likely to reach force 7 or above on 12 to 18 days per
5 month.
The main feature of the weather is its great variability,
periods of overcast skies and rain or snow alternating
with fairer intervals. Fine weather is seldom prolonged
and cloud amounts are generally large. Although fog is
10 not common at this season, rain and snow often reduce
visibility drastically; visibility is also often only
moderate with winds from a S point, but is generally
good (except in precipitation) with N or NW winds.
In summer, depressions are less frequent, much less
15 intense, and their tracks are farther N than in winter.
Winds, therefore, although they still vary a good deal
both in direction and strength, are much lighter, and
gales are far less common. Over the greater part of the
zone, winds may reach force 7 or above on 15 days per
20 month S of about 50° N; the quietest month is July,
during which winds of this strength are unlikely on more
than one day on average. N of the 50th parallel
observations are scarce, but the frequency of gales is
probably the same as above.
25 Over the greater part of the zone the weather is very
cloudy and foggy; W of about 160° W fog occurs on
about 5-10 days per month in most parts, rising to more
than 10 days per month over large areas, see Diagram
(1.13b). This high incidence is due to the N flow of warm
30 moist S to SW winds over progressively colder water, in
particular over the cold waters of the Kamchatka
Current. East of 160° W the frequency is less but it
increases again to 5-10 days per month towards the W
coast of America over the cold waters of the California
35 Current. Apart from fog, visibility is generally
moderate.
Polar Easterlies
7.9
40 Since, in winter, the tracks of most depressions are S
of the Aleutian Islands, the prevailing winds in the
Bering Sea at this season are often E. As in the case of the
Westerlies, great variations in both strength and
direction occur, due to the passage of some depressions
45 close to and across the area. The N part of the zone is not
navigable on account of ice; in the S part winds may
reach force 7 or more on over 10 days per month.
The weather is generally very cloudy, and
precipitation, usually in the form of snow, is frequent,
50 amounts being greatest in the S. Visibility is often poor
because of snow.
Tropical storms
7.10
55 In the W part of the North Pacific Ocean these storms
are known as 'typhoons', and in the E part as
'hurricanes'. They are fully described in The Mariner's
Handbook, with their warning signs, and advice on
avoiding them.
60 The area mainly affected by typhoons is W and N of
the Caroline Islands and Marianas Islands, and includes
the N part of the Philippines, the N half of the South
China Sea, the vicinity of the China coast and T'ai-wan,
the East China Sea and Japan. Although typhoons may
65 occur in any month, more than half are experienced
from July to October, and nearly 90 per cent between
May and December inclusive; September is the month
with the greatest frequency with an average of just over 4
storms. The number experienced in any month varies
70 greatly in different years.
99
 7.15 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS
Taking the area as a whole, no month is immune from
typhoons, but some parts of it are free from them in
certain months, notably the China coast,Taiwan Strait,
and the W part of the East China Sea, in which areas it is
most likely that they will be encountered from
December to April.
The area mainly affected by hurricanes is the vicinity
of the Pacific coast of America between about 10° N and
30° N; they have, however, been recorded as far W as
130° W to 140° W, generally in the early part of the
season.
Almost all hurricanes occur in the period from June to
October, the month of greatest frequency being
September, with an average of 2 storms; they are
occasionally recorded in May and November, and very
occasionally in December; they are unknown from
January to April. As with all tropical storms, the number
experienced in different years varies greatly.
More detailed information regarding the frequency of
typhoons and hurricanes in different localities will be
found in Admiralty Sailing Directions.
South Pacific Ocean
Intertropical Convergence Zone
7.15
As stated at 7.2, the Intertropical Convergence Zone
remains N of the equator throughout the year in
longitudes E of about 160° W. In more W longitudes it
lies in the S hemisphere from about November or
December to April or May, reaching its extreme S
position in February. The seasonal movement of the
zone in the W part of the South Pacific is thus large, as
also is the day to day variation in its position, especially
in the extreme W in the vicinity of N Australia and New
Guinea. The width of the zone averages about 150 miles,
but it may at times be as little as 50 miles and at others
over 300 miles.
The weather is that typical of the Intertropical
Convergence Zone elsewhere, in which calms and light,
variable winds and fine weather alternate with squalls,
heavy rain (most often in the form of showers), and
thunderstorms. Conditions are generally more severe in
the W part of the South Pacific Ocean than elsewhere in
this ocean, due to the wide angle at which the South-east
Trade Wind and the North-west Monsoon, see 7.17 and
7.16, meet. Visibility over the open sea is good except in
heavy rain.
North-west Monsoon
7.16
During the summer of the S hemisphere, pressure is
low over the N part of the heated Australian land mass,
and the Intertropical Convergence Zone is located over
that area. The North-east Monsoon of the W part of the
North Pacific Ocean is drawn across the equator, and
deflected to the left by the earth's rotation. It is felt over
the South Pacific Ocean, W of about the 180th meridian
and between the equator and the Intertropical
Convergence Zone as a prevailing NW wind known as
the North-west Monsoon. The season of this monsoon
varies somewhat with latitude; in the vicinity of N
Australia it is generally only firmly established in
January and February, while farther N in the Java Sea
and the Banda Sea it normally blows from December to
March.
The general wind direction is indicated on Diagram
(1.13a); winds are mainly from N and NE near the
equator, and back gradually to between NW and W in
more S latitudes. Over much of the area the constancy of
the Monsoon is not great, and winds from other
directions are also experienced, though at the height of
the season and away from the effects of land, winds from
between S and E are uncommon; in the vicinity of the
5 numerous islands, local effects may give rise to variation
in both the direction and force of the wind.
The strength of the Monsoon is generally only light or
moderate, but squalls, in which the wind may reach gale
force, are rather common. Apart from these, or in the
10 vicinity of tropical storms (7.20), winds of gale force are
unlikely. The weather is generally cloudy, and rain,
usually in the form of heavy showers, is frequent over
most of the area. In the vicinity of land, the wind often
varies greatly over short distances; off coasts exposed to
15 the monsoon especially if backed by high ground,
rainfall is often very heavy and cloud amounts are large,
while off sheltered coasts fair weather and less cloudy
conditions prevail. Visibility over the open sea is
generally good except in heavy rain. Information
20 relating to specific localities is published in Admiralty
Sailing Directions.
South-east Trade Wind
7.17
25 The South-east Trade Wind blows on the equatorial
side of the oceanic high pressure area situated in about
30° S. In the E part of the zone the Trade Winds are
maintained by the semi-permanent anticyclone situated
towards the E side of the ocean and shown on Diagrams
30 (1.13a) and (1.13b), while in the W they are due to
migratory anticyclones moving E from the vicinity of
Australia.
Over the greater part of the ocean, the N limit of the
Trade Wind is defined by the Intertropical Convergence
35 Zone. In the winter of the S hemisphere, E of about
120° W, and W of about 140° E, the N limit is the
equator, N of which the Trade Wind recurves to form
the South-westerlies, and the South-west Monsoon of
the E and W parts of the North Pacific Ocean
40 respectively; these winds are described above among
those of the North Pacific Ocean. The S limit of the
Trade Wind is situated in 15° S to 20° S in winter and in
30° S in summer.
As with the Trade Winds of the other oceans, those of
45 the South Pacific Ocean are remarkable over large areas
for their persistence and steadiness. The general
direction and constancy of the wind can best be seen by
studying Diagrams (1.13a) and (1.13b). In the vicinity of
the W coast of South America the Trade Wind blows
50 from between S and SE, while farther W the direction
becomes predominantly E. It becomes SE again in
winter W of about 160° E and over the seas N of
Australia, where it is sometimes known as the South-
east Monsoon. W of about 140° W, from November to
55 April, the Trade Wind is unsteady over large areas, and
though the predominant direction remains from
between NE and SE, winds from other directions are
rather frequent. The average strength of the Trade
Wind is about force 4, but it often freshens to force 5 or 6
60 over large areas. Over the greater part of the Trade Wind
zone, winds of force 7 or above are unlikely on more than
1 or 2 days per month and, apart from short-lived
squalls, are rare within 10 degrees of the equator. In an
area between the NE coast of Queensland, Nouvelle
65 Caledonie and Vanuatu, however, the frequency rises to
3-6 days per month for much of the year.
Over the open ocean the characteristic weather of the
steady South-east Trade Wind is fair with occasional
showers; skies are about half covered with small
70 cumulus clouds, and there is a slight haze which reduces
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS
visibility to between about 8 and 15 miles. S h o w e r s ,
cloud and haze generally increase w h e n t h e wind
freshens. To the E of about t h e 180th m e r i d i a n , a n d
between the equator and about 8° S, b u t varying
somewhat with the season, there is a belt in which
rainfall and cloud amounts are generally small. T h i s dry
belt widens towards the coast of S o u t h America to
include most of the area covered by t h e T r a d e W i n d ;
weather here is cloudier and overcast skies are c o m m o n .
From November to April, W of about 140° W, b u t
excluding the dry belt m e n t i o n e d above, weather is often
unsettled, the T r a d e W i n d becomes unsteady, and is
followed by a period of cloudy, showery weather before
settling in again with increased strength and some
squalls from between S and E.
Over the seas N of Australia, d u r i n g t h e season w h e n
the South-east T r a d e W i n d prevails in these regions,
namely from April to S e p t e m b e r or O c t o b e r , cloud
amounts and rainfall are small; extensive d u s t haze
prevails, especially towards the e n d of t h e season, d u e to
the persistent offshore winds from t h e increasingly dry
interior of the continent. T h e s e conditions are m o s t
marked in the T i m o r Sea, b u t are also prevalent in the
Java Sea and Banda Sea, and to a lesser extent in the
Arafura Sea. Visibility in haze is often less than 5 miles.
Fog and mist are rather c o m m o n t o w a r d s t h e coast of
South America over the cold waters of t h e Peru C u r r e n t
(7.34) but rarely occur elsewhere.
Variables
7.18
Between the S limit of the South-east Trade Wind
and the N limit of the Westerlies, there is a wide belt of
variable winds of mainly moderate strength. T h e
approximate area covered by this belt extends from
25° S to 40° S in summer, and from 20° S to 30° S in
winter. It does not, however, extend completely across
the ocean. To the E of about 85° W, S to SE winds
prevail, forming a S extension of the South-east Trade
Wind around the E flank of the oceanic 'high'. Except in
the E part of the zone referred to above, winds vary
considerably in strength as well as in direction, and in
general, strong winds become more frequent with
increasing latitude. Over the greater part of the area
winds are likely to reach force 7 or above on 1-3 days per
month, rising to 3-6 days per month towards the S limits
of the zone. This latter frequency is also reached in many
months over large areas W of about 160° W.
The weather is variable, being governed largely by the
E-moving anticyclones already mentioned. Near the
centres of these anticyclones it is fair or fine, while the
intervening troughs of low pressure are characterised by
cloudy, unsettled weather, with rainfall increasing
towards the S. To the E of 85° W to 90" W, rainfall
becomes progressively smaller towards the N and E, and
it is very infrequent in the vicinity of the American
coast. In this area, cloud amounts are often large, and
overcast skies are common in winter.
Visibility is generally good in the N part of the zone
except when reduced by rain, but the frequency of
moderate and poor visibility increases with latitude
towards the S limits of 40° S in summer and 30° S in
winter; visibility of less than 5 miles is recorded in some
ten to fifteen per cent of ships' observations in summer,
and five per cent in winter. It is generally associated with
winds from some N point.
In the extreme E part of the zone, over the cold waters
of the Peru Current, fog is rather prevalent, and off the
W coast of South America it occurs on 3-5 days per
months towards the S limit of the zone.
7.25
The Westerlies
7.19
The Westerlies or 'Roaring Forties' predominate S of
the belt of high pressure described in articles 7.17 and
5 7.18. As in the zone of the Westerlies in other oceans, the
almost continuous passage of depressions from W to E
causes the wind to vary greatly in both direction and
strength. Gales are very common, especially in winter,
during which season winds are likely to reach force 7 or
10 above on 5-10 days per months over most of the area
between 30° S and 40° S, and on more than 12 days per
month S of the 40th parallel. One of the stormiest areas
is to the W or NW of Cabo de Homos, in which region
winds of this strength are likely on about 20 days per
75 month from July to September. In summer, gales are
somewhat less common and occur farther S. To the E of
about 150° W, and between 40° S and 45° S, winds are
likely to reach force 7 or above on 5-10 days per month,
and S of the 45th parallel the frequency rises to more
20 than 10 days per month. To the W of 150° W, the area of
highest gale frequency is farther S, but in few parts of
the zone of the Westerlies, namely S of the 40th parallel
at this season, is the frequency less than 3-5 days per
month. Diagrams (1.13a) and (1.13b) give an indication
25 of the distribution of gales in summer and winter
respectively.
As in the Westerlies of other oceans, the weather is
very variable, periods of overcast skies and rain or snow
associated with the fronts of E-moving depressions
30 alternating with fair weather. Fine weather is seldom
prolonged and cloud amounts are generally large at all
times.
Visibility also varies greatly; with winds from a S
point it is generally good, while N winds are often
35 associated with moderate or poor visibility. Fog is rather
common in summer and may be expected on 3-5 days
per month.
Tropical Storms
40 7.20
Tropical storms are known as 'hurricanes' or
'cyclones' in the South Pacific Ocean. They are
described, and advice on avoiding them is given, in The
Mariner's Handbook.
45 The area mainly affected is W of about 155° W and S
of 8-10° S. Most storms occur from December to April,
and the season of greatest frequency is from January to
March; they are not unknown at other times and the
actual number of storms varies from year to year. The
50 movement of storms in this area tends to be erratic and
difficult to foretell.
More detailed information about the frequency of
hurricanes in 'specific localities will be found in
Admiralty Sailing Directions.
55
SWELL
7.25
60 The North Pacific Ocean, east of 160° W, has large
areas devoid of recorded observations of swell.
Information is therefore confined to certain localities.
Off the coast of America between 20° N and 35° N a
swell from the NW, mainly low or moderate and rarely
65 heavy, persists throughout the year. N of 35° N, the
swell is mainly from the NW in summer, but from
between NW and N in winter.
To the N of 50° N, swell is predominantly from SW to
W throughout the year though there is an increased
70 frequency from W to NW in October, December and
101
7.26 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS
March. From October to April heavy swell is reported
on about 20 per cent of occasions and on rather less than
10 per cent in the remaining months.
A swell from NE persists throughout the year SE of
Hawaii. It is normally moderate or heavy, and may
extend as far as 130°W and, in winter, as far as the
equator.
Off the American coast, S of 20° N, swell is mainly
from the N in winter and from the S in summer; it may
be heavy in winter.
7.26
The North Pacific Ocean, west of 160° W has
many islands which frequently interrupt the swell waves
particularly S of 20° N and near the Aleutian Islands.
The statements which follow apply to the uninterrupted
areas. In the SW part of the North Pacific Ocean, the
swell is governed by the monsoons.
From the equator to 20° N, a NE swell predominates
from November to March inclusive. It is mainly low or
moderate, but it is heavy on 10 per cent of occasions.
The South China Sea is affected by a swell from the
SW, sometimes moderate but only rarely heavy, from
June to September inclusive.
To the N of 20° N and W of 140° E, there is no
predominant direction, though a swell from the NW is
often found. Swell in this region is normally moderate or
heavy; the frequency of heavy swells is about 30 per cent
in the area close E of Japan.
7.27
The South Pacific Ocean, west of 160° W, is
encumbered by islands which interrupt swell waves.
The following statements therefore apply only to areas
where there are few islands.
From the equator to 20° S, swell is predominantly
from between NE and SE, and is mainly moderate in
height.
From 20° S to 30° S swell is frequently from between
SE and SW but no direction predominates. In this
region swell is normally moderate or heavy.
From 30° S to 50° S swell is predominantly SW
moderate or heavy. S of 30° S two or even three swells
are often present and reports of confused swells are
frequent.
To the S of 50° S, swell comes mainly from between
NW and SW, moderate or heavy.
7.28
The South Pacific ocean, east of 160° W embraces
vast areas for which swell data are almost non-existent,
particularly between 30° S and 50° S and between 80° W
and 120° W. Available data show the following.
Off the coast of South America, between 10° S and
40° S, a swell from S to SW persists throughout the year,
normally moderate but heavy at times.
From the equator to 20° S and from 100 miles off the
coast of South America to 130° W, a SE swell
predominates. It is mainly moderate, though
occasionally heavy.
From 30° S to 50° S and between 130° W and 160° W a
moderate to heavy swell from the SW predominates.
Swells over 6 m in height are a common feature S of
35° S.
To the S of 50° S, swell comes mainly from between
NW and SW, and is either moderate or heavy. As in the
W part of this ocean, reports of confused swell are
frequent S of 30° S.
7.29
Length of swell in Pacific Ocean. In the North
Pacific Ocean, swell is normally average in length
though short and long swells can also be encountered. In
the South Pacific Ocean, most swells are short or average
in length, but waves of more than 300 m in length occur
quite often and it is in this ocean that the longest swells
occur.
In the South Pacific Ocean, abnormal waves may
5 occur, see 1.18.
CURRENTS
General remarks
70 7.32
The Pacific Ocean, like the Atlantic Ocean, is
dominated in equatorial regions by the semi-permanent
N and S Subtropical anticyclones. These generate a
wide expanse of W-going sets of moderate constancy
15 between about 25° N and 25° S with a slight movement
of the N and S boundaries from summer to winter.
Separating the N and S Equatorial Currents; the
Equatorial Counter-current sets E with a low to
moderate constancy for much of the year. Polewards of
20 the Sub-tropical gyres, E to ESE-going sets in the N
hemisphere and E to ENE going sets in the S
hemisphere are assisted by the temperate latitude W
winds of the Aleutian low pressure in the N and the
Roaring Forties of the S hemisphere. The increased
25 frequency of mobile depressions in higher latitudes
leads to a general reduction in both constancy and rate of
predominant currents. Often the predominance of a
particular direction is only minimal, any other being just
as likely.
30
North Pacific Ocean
7.33
The combined, generally low constancy counter-
clockwise circulation in the N and the more constant
35 clockwise circulation in the S part, show much similarity
to the North Atlantic Ocean.
The North Equatorial Current sets W off the coast of
Central America and quickly expands into a broad
current spanning 5° to 10° of latitude at its E and W
40 extremities and near 18° in central longitudes near 180°.
Its general latitudinal boundaries vary with longitude
and season. In middle longitudes some predominance of
W-going sets extends to about 25° N in winter and near
30° N in summer. Rates and constancies are higher on
45 the equatorial side and diminish with increasing latitude
as the North-east Trade Wind decreases.
The North Equatorial Current is strongest during the
North-east Monsoon with an average rate of about 1
knot. As it approaches the Philippine Islands in about
50 12° N it diverges. The S part turns SSW passing
through the islands into the Sulu Sea and also rounding
the SE coast of Mindanao into the Celebes Sea. Here a
counter-clockwise circulation persists throughout the
year. Just N of Halmahera in longitude 128° E a
55 combined outflow from the NE part of the Celebes Sea
and Molucca Sea merges with the recurving North
Equatorial Current as the Equatorial Counter-current
(7.35). This sets E, intermittently and with variable
constancy, across the ocean so that at times its N
60 boundary forms the S limit of the North Equatorial
Current (and its S boundary the N limit of the South
Equatorial Current).
The N part of the North Equatorial Current
continues to turn through N N W off the E coast of
65 Luzon and T'ai-wan to N and NE, forming the Japan
Current.
The Japan Current, also know as Kuro Shio, is a
warm boundary current similar to the Gulf Stream of
the North Atlantic Ocean. It passes W of Nansei Shoto
70 until near their N end where the main flow turns E
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS
through the islands and thence NE along the S side of
the Japanese islands. A W branch diverges with the
weaker part entering the East China Sea and the
remainder continuing to the W of Kyushu and into the
Sea of Japan as the Tsushima Current.
The Japan Current continues NE later turning E and
fanning out towards the W coast of N America as the
North Pacific Current, a broad drift between 35° N and
50° N. To the N the circulation in both the Sea of
Okhotsk and the Bering Sea is broadly counter-
clockwise. This allows cold water to pass SW along the
coast of Kamchatka through Kuril'skiye Ostrova
towards the NE coast of Japan. This cold current is
known as the Kamchatka Current and continues off the
Japanese coast to near 35° N where it turns E on the N
side of the Japan Current to form the Aleutian Current.
In a similar manner to that within the Gulf Stream,
eddies are formed along the interaction zone between
the cold and warm water. Some of these may last for
months, sometimes years, and major displacements of
the Japan Current axis have been observed at such
times.
The North Pacific Current is joined by the colder
water of the Aleutian Current on its N flank as it crosses
the Pacific Ocean. On approaching the American coast
in about 135° W and between 45° N and 55" N the North
Pacific Current diverges. The N part of the Aleutian
Current turns NE and then NW past Queen Charlotte
Islands. This flow is known as the Alaska Current as it
continues along the coast of Alaska towards the E end of
the Aleutian Chain. Some water passes through the
islands in a generally N direction forming the E side of
the Bering Sea counter-clockwise circulation. The
North Pacific Current and the remainder of the Aleutian
Current turns SE and then SW as the relatively cool
California Current which runs parallel with, but clear
of, the Californian coast.
At certain times of the year, particularly during winter
months when the continental high pressure is dominant,
a counter-current sets N between the offshore California
Current and the coast. Known as the Davidson Current
this supplements the Alaska Current at times. During
the rest of the year the space between the California
Current and the coast is filled by irregular eddies.
Off the Californian coast the predominant sets for
most of the year are to the SE but recurvature into the
North Equatorial Current commences S of 35° N and
the resulting divergence to the S enhances local
upwelling.
South Pacific Ocean
7.34
The South Equatorial Current sets WNW to WSW
with a moderate to high constancy for much of the year.
Its N boundary lies just N of the equator being on
average near 1 ° N in the W and E and near 6° N in central
longitudes between 150° W and 120° W. Average rates
of the predominant W-going sets decrease from near 2
knots in the N to about J knot near 20° S. Constancies
decrease to low (less than 50%) S of about 20° S and also
generally as far W as about the 180° meridian. This
latter effect is less apparent during the S winter when
moderate constancies continue as far W as the Solomon
Islands. The weaker and less constant W-going sets are
sometimes referred to as the South Sub-tropical
Current.
The pattern W of 180° becomes more complex
towards Melanesia, Indonesia and Australasia. The
South Equatorial Current tends to diverge slightly with
the N part from June to August continuing WNW along
7.35
the N coast of New Guinea, and then recurving N and
NE to join the E-going Equatorial Counter-current.
The S part sets WSW through the Fiji Islands towards
the E Australian coast. This is the broad pattern for most
of the rest of the year, except for a period from
December to February, the season of the North-west
Monsoon with low pressure over the extreme N of
Australia. Then the South Equatorial Current does not
pass into the Equatorial Counter-current; it recurves to
10 the SW and flows past the N coast of New Guinea in a
SE direction. There is thus a complete reversal of
current along this coast during the year.
In the S part of the Coral Sea near 20° S, the
Equatorial Current, on meeting the coast diverges, the
15 N part soon decreasing and becoming variable. The S
stream intensifies off the coast as the East Australian
Current, a typical but limited warm western boundary
current. It is weakest during the S winter when the N
extension of the Southern Ocean Current increases eddy
20 formation E of Tasmania. The East Australian Current
mostly degenerates in a marked counter-clockwise eddy
in the SW part of the Tasman Sea, but the main flow
passes both W and E of New Zealand as it continues
ENE across the South Pacific Ocean.
25 A large area of variable current exists within the
extensive counter-clockwise gyre of the South Pacific
Ocean. Weak predominances of direction depend on the
season. During the winter months the approximate
latitude at which ENE-going sets are replaced by W-
30 going sets lies near 30° S, off the E coast of Australia and
in longitude 85° W off Chile. In central longitudes, from
140° W to 170° W the latitude of changeover is near
20° S.
During summer months WSW-going sets extend to
35 about 45° S in these same central longitudes but currents
are very variable with no predominances exceeding the
low category. Near 45° S the E-going current splits, the
N part recurving through NE to set N and later NW as
the Peru Current thus completing the counter-
40 clockwise gyre. The S part continues E turning through
SE to S off the coast and is then drawn into the main
stream which passes Cabo de Homos, through Drake
Passage, into the South Atlantic Ocean.
As the broad Peru Current moves N, water from its
45 left flank is continuously fed into the South Equatorial
Current so that by about 5° S only a narrow coastal
current remains to enter the S part of Gulf of Panama.
This coastal current varies with the season and is subject
to much local variability, usually in association with up-
50 welling.
Pacific Equatorial Counter-current
7.35
This counter-current sets E between the two W-going
55 Equatorial Currents and is situated entirely N of the
equator. The precise mechanism of its formation is not
known but many factors probably contribute in
different parts at different times.
When an average is calculated using all observations
60 the current appears as a continuous feature from just N
of the Celebes Sea in the W to Gulf of Panama in the E.
Its main axis lies slightly convex to the equator being
near 2° N—4° N in the W and E and near 6° N-8° N in
longitudes 140° W to 120° W with an average width of
65 about 3°—4° along its length. However, it appears to
expand and contract throughout the year in association
with pulsations of the adjacent Equatorial Currents.
At times the Equatorial Currents merge and eliminate
the surface Counter-current, a process which seems
70 most apparent during March and April in longitudes
103
7.36 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS
140° E to 160"W and from 115° W to 95° W. The
Counter-current is widest during September and
October when it spans up to about 6° of latitude for
much of its length. Average rates within it at this time
reach 1—1-J- knots but variations do occur, sometimes
with complete directional reversals. The Equatorial
Currents immediately to the N and S are generally
higher both in rate and constancy. Near the boundaries
eddies and minor upwellings cause local disturbances of
the sea surface with marked areas of rippling.
The phenomenon known as 'El Nino', see Admiralty
Sailing Directions, seems related to the large scale
pattern of currents in the equatorial Pacific Ocean and
its interaction with the cool N extensions from the Peru
Current both in the open ocean and off the coast.
Gulf of Panama
7.36
The situation in the general area at the E end of the
Equatorial Counter-current and Gulf of Panama is very
disturbed. Most major features are evident to some
degree throughout the year but the interaction between
them is constantly changing and each year may be
different, though basically similar.
Using data averaged over 2-month periods the
following broad sequential pattern emerges
commencing in March-April when the Equatorial
Counter-current is at a minimum.
March-April. A narrow current follows the coast of
Colombia and circuits Gulf of Panama in a counter-
clockwise fashion leaving to the S of Punta Mala from
whence it continues as a widening current to directions
between S and W. On its N flank it is joined by the
remnants of the recurving Equatorial Counter-current
and on its S flank by the S Equatorial flow just N of the
equator.
May-June. The S and W-going sets S off Punta Mala
recede N to about 6° N. The Equatorial Counter-
current widens and extends to about 2° N turning into
the narrow coastal current off Colombia which
continues round the Gulf accentuating the counter-
clockwise eddy.
July-August. The main eddy centre is just SE of
Punta Mala with the Equatorial Counter-current
extending close to the Colombian coast. The outflow
from Gulf of Panama turns W off Punta Mala and
continues NW along the Costa Rican coast.
September-October. The Equatorial Counter-
current broadens to the N but appears to split off the
Costa Rican coast in longitude 85° W. Part turns NW
along the coast and the remainder continues SE then E
into the S part of the Gulf eddy.
November-December. Similar to previous months
but the SW flow on the W side of the eddy extends
farther S to about 1°N at 81° W. The Equatorial
Counter-current has weakened to the W. The N-going
flow continues along the Colombian coast.
January-February. The E end of the Equatorial
Counter-current seems to be almost a detached
clockwise eddy SW of Costa Rica with a broad expanse
of S to W-going sets emerging from Gulf of Panama and
filling the area W of 80° W where they engage the N flank
of the South Equatorial Current just N of the equator.
ICE
General remarks
7.41
The following brief account of ice in the Pacific Ocean
should not be taken as complete or in any way all-
embracing. More detailed information than can be given
here will be found in the following publications, which
should be consulted, as appropriate, before undertaking
passages through areas in which ice is likely to be
5 encountered.
Admiralty Sailing Directions covering the
appropriate areas.
The Mariner's Handbook.
Washington, US Navy, Climatological and
10 Oceanographical Atlas for Mariners, Vol II, N
Pacific Ocean, 1961.
Washington, US Navy, Oceanographic Atlas of the
Polar Sea, HO 705.
Charts 5127(1) to 5127(12)—Monthly Routeing
15 Charts for the North Pacific Ocean.
Charts 5128(1) to 5128(12)—Monthly Routeing
Charts for the South Pacific Ocean.
Monthly Ice charts for the North Pacific Ocean.
Admiralty List of Radio Signals Vol 5 for ice reports
20 and forecasts transmitted by coast radio stations.
A factor always to be borne in mind where ice
conditions are concerned is their great variability from
year to year. For this reason, and on account of the
sparsity of observations in many areas, the charted
25 positions of the limits should be regarded as
approximate.
North Pacific Ocean
30 Pack ice
7.42
Diagrams (1.13a) and (1.13b) indicate the mean limits
of 4/8 pack ice in March and September respectively, in
which months it attains its greatest and least extent. The
35 Routeing Charts indicate the maximum limit of pack ice
in any particular month. An examination of these limits
reveals the marked influence of winds and currents; on
the W side of the ocean the N winds of winter and cold
Kamchatka Current bring the ice to relatively low
40 latitudes, while on the E side, except in the N part of the
Bering Sea, open water is maintained by the warm
North Pacific Current.
During an average winter, navigation off the E coasts
of Asia is impeded as far S as about 45° N. By mid-
45 November, coastwise navigation is interrupted as far S
as 60° N, and is closed N of 62° N; ice is also present in
all coastal waters of the N and W parts of the Sea of
Okhotsk, in the N part of the Gulf of Tartary and E of
Ostrov Sakhalin N of 50° N. In December, navigation is
SO closed to all ports N of 60° N, and ice may be found
anywhere in the Gulf of Tartary N of 47° N, as well as
along the E coast of Ostrov Sakhalin and along the coasts
of the Russian Maritime Province as far S as 43° N.
From January to March, the whole of the coastal
55 waters of the Russian Maritime Province, the greater
part of the Gulf of Tartary, and the coasts of N
Hokkaido and the SW islands of Kuril'skiye Ostrova are
encumbered with ice in varying degrees, as also is the
whole of the Sakhalin area and the greater part of the Sea
60 of Okhotsk, except the deep central portion. Ice is also
present in the vicinity of the NE islands of Kuril'skiye
Ostrova and along much of the E coast of Kamchatka
and the coast farther N.
In April the ice edge begins to retreat N, and by mid
65 May, after an average winter, there is little or no ice S of
about 52° N. By mid-June, ice is confined to the SW part
of the Sea of Okhotsk, the N part of Penzhinskiy Zaliv,
Proliv Litke, Zaliv Olyutorskiy, and from Anadyrskiy
Zaliv to the N. By late July, vessels can generally pass
70 through Bering Strait.
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS
The months during which ports are closed to
navigation vary not only with the severity of the season
and the prevailing winds, but also with the availability of
ice breakers; detailed information should be sought in
Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Ice may also be found in the shallow waters of Bo Hai
and Liaodong Wan between the middle of November
and the end of March; the port of Yingkou at the head of
the latter gulf is closed to navigation from December to
March.
Along the Alaskan coast in the average winter, ice
extends as far as 56° N from December to April; in very
severe winters the extreme NE Aleutian Islands may be
affected. The ice edge advances S during October and
November and retreats N during May and June, and ice
is not normally found from July to September except
near the Bering Strait.
During the ice season, the N half of the Bering Sea is
filled with pack ice, though it is not solidly frozen.
Icebergs
7.43
Icebergs are not a feature of the North Pacific Ocean,
because the relatively high sea temperatures of the Gulf
of Alaska rapidly melt any bergs which reach the open
sea from the glaciers of SE Alaska or the inlets of British
Columbia, which are the only breeding grounds.
Occasional floebergs may be expected among the pack
ice, particularly in the W part of the Bering Sea.
South Pacific Ocean
Pack ice
7.44
Diagrams (1.13a) and (1.13b) indicate the mean limits
of 4/8 pack ice in February-March and September-
October in which months it attains its least and greatest
extent respectively. None of the normally inhabited
places in the South Pacific Ocean is affected, but great
circle sailing between Australian or New Zealand ports
and the more S ports of South America is prevented.
Icebergs
7.45
The icebergs that occur in the Southern Ocean are
not, in most cases, calved from glaciers, but consist of
portions that have broken away from the great ice
shelves which fringe parts of the Antarctic continent.
They are consequently flat-topped, and they may be of
immense size.
In November and December, when the mean limit
reaches its farthest N, it runs from about 100 miles S of
Cabo de Homos along the 57th parallel to 90° W,
whence it curves N to 52° S, 120° W. Between 120° W
and the 180th meridian it is situated between 50° S and
52° S, whence it continues in a SW direction to about
55° S in the longitude of Tasmania.
In May and June the mean limit of icebergs is
everywhere S of the 55th parallel. W of 150° W it lies
within a degree or two of 60° S.
With regard to the extreme limit of icebergs, although
information for the most part is too scanty for a
confident description, it appears to be reached during
the latter half of the year, running close to 45° S over
most of the region, but locally near 40° S just E of New
Zealand, and 50° S or so E of 110° E. Factors other than
climatic may be responsible for abnormal numbers or
abnormal movement of icebergs. Earthquakes, for
example, may increase the number calved. Accordingly,
7.49.2
it is probably best to regard the extreme limit of icebergs
as unrelated to the time of year.
Estimates of the extreme limit are indicated on
Diagrams (1.13a) and (1.13b) and on Routeing Charts
5128(1) to 5128(2).
NAVIGATIONAL NOTES
10 Soundings and dangers
7.46
Very little of the Pacific Ocean has been thoroughly
surveyed; certain areas are subject to earthquakes and
volcanic activity which could cause shoals to build up
15 even in those areas which have been well surveyed; and
live coral is continually growing. Many vigias exist, and
until disproved must continue to be regarded as
potentially dangerous. See 1.10 and The Mariner's
Handbook.
20 The routes laid down in this book are those
considered most likely to lead clear of dangers, but
owing to the reasons stated above, the only safeguards
are a good lookout and careful sounding.
In the interests of all vessels it cannot be stressed too
25 strongly that a sounding should be obtained over any
suspected danger.
Currents among the islands
7.47
30 Particular and constant attention must be paid to the
current when navigating amongst the island groups, for
these sometimes deflect and always accelerate it. Again,
most of the islands are so low that it is almost impossible
to see them at night, and ships may be driven on the
35 barrier or fringing reefs with no warning from sounding,
the reefs having, in general, very deep water close to.
Flotsam
7.48
40 In navigating the waters of the Eastern Archipelago
during the rainy season a sharp lookout must be kept for
flotsam. Trees of immense size will be frequently met
afloat. They have been found especially numerous on
the S coast of Luzon; in one case, near Marinduque
45 Island, a group of them was adrift, still upright and
resembling an island.
Areas to be Avoided—Cautions
7.49
50 Hawaiian Islands , vessels of more than 1000 grt
carrying cargoes of oil or hazardous materials are
cautioned to avoid areas of radius 50 miles centred on
certain islands and reefs in the W part of the island
chain. For details, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
55 7.49.1
Java Sea, particularly in its W part, considerable
exploitation of natural resources takes place. Charts,
Notices to Mariners and Admiralty Sailing Directions
should be consulted for the latest information available
60 on permanent and moveable structures (not all of which
are likely to be charted) and the pipelines between them,
together with regulations affecting their localities.
Mariners are advised to avoid the areas where this
exploration and exploitation is taking place.
65 7.49.2
Bass Strait, an Area to be Avoided encloses oil and
gas fields extending between 20 miles SE and 45 miles S
of Lakes Entrances on Ninety Mile Beach. Submarine
pipelines are laid between the fields and the shore. For
70 details, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
105
(7.65) ROUTES—East coast of Australia « > Auckland and South Pacific Islands.
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.52
PASSAGE BETWEEN TORRES STRAIT AND EAST COAST OF AUSTRALIA

Southern part
7.51
Diagram (7.57)
Coastwise passages off the S part of the coast of
Queensland and the Pacific coast of New South Wales
are affected by the East Australian Coast Current which
sets S at all times off most of this part of the coast.
Between 32° S and 34° S the strength and constancy of
the current are decreased by reason of the diversion of
water in a SE direction towards the open ocean. Between
34° S and Cape Howe currents may set in any direction,
sometimes with an onshore component; close inshore
there may be a predominantly N-going current at times.
Cape Pillar and Tasman. Island (close S of the cape)
may be rounded at a distance of 1 mile, but the rest of the
E coast of Tasmania should not be closed within 5 miles.
North-bound ships navigating off the mainland coast
E of Cape Otway should keep well inshore as far as Bass
5 Strait because of the current. Thence via the appropriate
Traffic Separation Lanes (1.28) through Bass Strait and
those passing SE of the area enclosing oil and gas fields
extending seaward from Ninety Mile Beach, should
then be followed. Thence, the coast may be closed again,
10 and passage may be made inside of Montagu Island. S-
bound ships should maintain an offing of about 15 miles
in depths of about 180 m, as far as Cape Howe.
Northern part
'5 7.52
Diagram (7.52)
Between Torres Strait and ports S of Brisbane, the N
part of the passage may be made by either, Outer Route
through the Coral Sea, E of Great Barrier Reefs, or
20 Inner Route inshore of the Reefs.

10° 10

Longitude 150° East from Greenwich.

(7.52) ROUTES—Brisbane < Torres Strait.
107
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS
7.52.1
Outer Route is not normally used as numerous large
reefs have to be given a wide berth, especially at night,
owing to the strong and variable sets which may often be
experienced. From off Sandy Cape the most satisfactory
track is:
Between Saumarez and Frederick Reefs (with lights
on both), thence:
E of Lihou Reef, thence:
E of Eastern Fields, thence:
N of Lagoon Reef, thence:
T h r o u g h Bligh E n t r a n c e to G r e a t N o r t h East
Channel by the r e c o m m e n d e d track s h o w n on the
charts.
7.52.2
I n n e r R o u t e is marked by adequate navigational aids
and saves considerable distance. It is described in
Admiralty Sailing Directions together with the places
where pilots may be e m b a r k e d or d i s e m b a r k e d . F o r the
purposes of this book it is assumed that C a p r i c o r n
Channel is used, t h o u g h C u r t i s C h a n n e l may be used to
embark or disembark pilots off N o r t h Point, G l a d s t o n e ,
adding little to the distance.
7.52.3
Passages through Great Barrier Reefs. From
ports lying behind G r e a t Barrier Reefs, ships can pass
through the reefs to cross the Coral Sea t h r o u g h the
following deep water passages:
Capricorn Channel passing S and E of the reefs;
H y d r o g r a p h e r s Passage;
Palm Passage;
Grafton Passage.
For details of these passages, see Admiralty Sailing
Directions.
From certain of these ports, for ships bound
Singapore, the N part of the Indian Ocean, or Europe
via the Suez Canal, but for which Torres Strait is not
suitable, a shorter route may be found, with weather and
current more favourable, through one of these passages,
and thence E and N of New Guinea and through Selat
Sagewin and the Eastern Archipelago, rather than the
alternative route via Bass Strait and the Great
7.57
Australian Bight. In addition, the N route allows
advantage to be taken of the position of the Tropical
Load Line from April to November.
5 Torres Strait
7.53
Diagram (7.52)
Great North East Channel and Prince of Wales
Channel are well surveyed, as is the area S of the latter
10 channel. The area W and N of those channels and that
off the S coast of New Guinea is unsurveyed.
Prince of Wales Channel, the principal route through
the strait is approached:
From the Coral Sea through Bligh Entrance and
75 Great North East Channel;
From Inner Route through Adolphus Channel;
From the Arafura Sea through Gannet Passage,
within Prince of Wales Channel, where the
controlling depth of about 12 m will be found.
20 For latest information on pilotage and limitations of
draught, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
7.53.1
Distances through Torres Strait channels are as
follows:
25 From 3\ miles W of Booby Island (ie 10° 36' S,
141° 51' E) to junction with Inner Route off Ince
Point: 30 miles.
From junction with Inner Route off Ince Point to
Bligh Entrance (9° 12' S, 144° 00' E): 130 miles.
30 From Z\ miles W of Booby Island to Bligh
Entrance: 165 miles.
In this book, distances given to or from Torres
Strait refer to position: 10° 36' S, 141° 51' E, (i\
miles W of Booby Island).
35
Distances
7.54
Between the ports on the E and S coasts of Australia
40 and Torres Strait, using Inner Route, distances in miles
are given in the table below: for distances W-about, see
6.128.

Torres Strait
1320 Caloundra Head for Brisb anet
1770 470 Sydney
2300 1000 540 Port Phillip 'or Melbourne:]
2730 1430 965 460 Adelaide
2390 1090 630 # 760 Hobart
* Via Bass Strait and E of Furneaux Group, 465 miles.
Via Banks Strait, 430 miles.
W-about, 455 miles.
t Caloundra Head to Brisbane: 35 miles.
% Port Phillip to Melbourne: 40 miles.

ROUTES BETWEEN AUSTRALIA, NEW ZEALAND, AND ISLANDS IN THE SOUTH PACIFIC
OCEAN

Hobart <-* Bluff From Hobart the route is by great circle from Cape
7.57 Pillar to Solander Islands, thence to Bluff.
Diagram (7.57) 70 Distance: 930 miles.
109
Hobart «-> Wellington 35 Melbourne <-> Wellington
7.58 7.61
Diagram (7.57) Diagram (7.57)
From Hobart the route is by great circle: From Port Phillip the route is:
7.58.1 Via the appropriate Traffic Separation Lanes (1.28)
Either from Cape Pillar to Cape Farewell in the W 40 through Bass Strait, thence:
approach to Cook Strait; Great circle to Cape Farewell, thence:
7.58.2 Through Cook Strait to Wellington.
Or to pass SE of South Island, thence to Wellington. Distance from Port Phillip 1450 miles.
Distances: Via Cook Strait 1290 miles; (Melbourne to Port Phillip 40 miles).
Via Foveaux Strait 1370 miles; 45
Passing S of Stewart Island 1390 Melbourne <-> Auckland
miles. 7.62
Diagram (7.57)
From Port Phillip the route is:
50 Via the appropriate Traffic Separation Lanes (1.28)
Hobart «-• A u c k l a n d through Bass Strait, thence:
7.59 Great circle to midway between Three Kings
Diagram (7.57) Islands and Cape Maria van Diemen, thence
From Hobart the route is by great circle from Cape Coastwise to Auckland.
Pillar to a position between Three Kings Islands and 55 Distance from Port Phillip 1600 miles.
Cape Reinga, thence coastwise to Auckland. (Melbourne to Port Phillip 40 miles)
Distance: 1510 miles.
Sydney *-* Bluff
7.63
60 Diagram (7.57)
Melbourne •*-» Bluff From Sydney the route is by great circle to Solander
7.60 Islands, thence as navigation permits to Bluff.
Diagram (7.57) Distance: 1100 miles.
From Port Phillip the route is:
Through Banks Strait, thence: 65 Sydney «-> Wellington
Great circle to a landfall on Solander Islands, 7.64
thence: Diagram (7.57)
As navigation permits to Bluff. From Sydney the route is by great circle to the W
Distance from Port Phillip 1170 miles. entrance to Cook Strait, thence to Wellington.
(Melbourne to Port Phillip 40 miles). 70 Distance: 1230 miles.
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.77

Sydney«-»Auckland B r i s b a n e <-• Bluff

7.65 7.71
Diagram (7.65) Diagram (7.57)
From Sydney the route is as direct as navigation From the approach to Brisbane the route is by great
permits, passing on either side of Three Kings Islands, circle to Solander Islands, thence as navigation permits
thence coastwise to Auckland. to Bluff.
Distance: 1270 miles. Distance from Caloundra Head 1420 miles.
(Brisbane to Caloundra Head 35 miles).

Sydney *-* Papeete w Brisbane <-> Wellington

7.66 7.72
Diagram (7.79) Diagram (7.57)
From Sydney the route is: From the approach to Brisbane the route is by rhumb
Great circle to 22° 30' S, 158° 00' W, passing close line to the W entrance to Cook Strait. The rhumb line
S Wanganella Bank, midway between Raoul 15 clears Lord Howe Island and Ball's Pyramid better than
Island and Macauley Island in the Kermadec the great circle.
Islands, and 25 miles SSE of both the Reef (Rep Distance from Caloundra Head 1400 miles.
1972) in 24°25'S, 163° 39'W, and Mangaia, (Brisbane to Caloundra Head 35 miles).
thence:
Great circle to Papeete. 20 Brisbane «-> Auckland
For caution on currents near Mangaia, see Admiralty 7.73
Sailing Directions. Diagram (7.65)
Distance: 3290 miles. From the approach to Brisbane the route is:
Rhumb line to 31° 30' S, 167° 00' E, passing N of
Sydney *-* N o u m e a 25 Middleton Reef, thence:
7.67 Rhumb line to North Cape, passing N of
Diagram (7.65) Wanganella Bank, thence:
From Sydney the route is by great circle, passing 40 Coastwise to Auckland.
miles NW of Middleton Reef, to Noumea. Distance from Caloundra Head 1300 miles.
Distance: 1060 miles. 30 (Brisbane to Caloundra Head 35 miles).

Sydney <-> Nuku'alofa Brisbane <-* Papeete

7.68 7.74
Diagram (7.65) Diagram (7.79)
From Sydney the route is: 35 From the approach to Brisbane the route is:
Great circle to 21° 0 0 ' S , 175° 24' W, in the W Great circle to 21° 0 0 ' S , 159°5O'W, 10 miles N of
approach to Ava Lahi, the approach channel to Rarotonga, thence:
Nuku'alofa, passing: 10 miles S of Mauke, thence:
Close S of Ball's Pyramid, To Papeete.
Close N of Norfolk Island, 40 Distance from Caloundra Head 3210 miles.
30 miles NW of Minerva Reefs. (Brisbane to Caloundra Head 35 miles).
For dangers and volcanic activity in the approaches to
Tonga Islands and NE of Norfolk Island, see Admiralty Brisbane <-> N o u m e a
Sailing Directions. 7.75
Distance: 1940 miles. 45 Diagram (7.65)
From the approach to Brisbane the route is by rhumb
Sydney *-* Suva line, passing midway between Capel Bank and Kelso
7.69 Bank, to Noumea.
Diagram (7.65) Distance from Caloundra Head 790 miles.
From Sydney the route is: 50 (Brisbane to Caloundra Head 35 miles).
Great circle to Kadavu Passage, passing:
20 miles SE of Elizabeth Reef, Brisbane <-> Nuku'alofa
20 miles SE of Tie Hunter, 7.76
30 miles NW of Ceva-i-Ra, thence; Diagram (7.65)
Through Kadavu Passage to Suva. 55 From the approach to Brisbane the route is by great
Near Elizabeth Reef caution is necessary owing to the circle to the entrance to Ava Lahi, the approach channel
variability of the current, see Admiralty Sailing to Nuku'alofa.
Directions. For caution on dangers and volcanic activity in the
-Distance: 1730 miles. approaches to Tonga Islands, see Admiralty Sailing
60 Directions.
Sydney«-»Apia Distance from Caloundra Head 1770 miles.
7.70 (Brisbane to Caloundra Head 35 miles).
Diagram (7.65)
From Sydney the route is: Brisbane *-* Suva
Great circle to 19° 50' S, 180° 00', thence: 65 7.77
10 miles SE of Ogea Driki, thence: Diagram (7.65)
20 miles NW of Curacoa Reef, avoiding Nuku Soge From the approach to Brisbane the route is:
Reef, 3j miles ESE of Ogea Driki, thence: Through 25° 40' S, 160° 00' E, passing S of Capel
Through Apolima Strait to Apia. Bank, thence:
Distance: 2360 miles. 70 Through 23° 30' S, 170° 00' E, to clear the reported

111
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.87.1
banks and dangers SE of Nouvelle-Caledonie, Between Rotumah Shoals and lies de Home,
thence: thence:
Midway between lie Matthew and lie Hunter, Through Apolima Strait to Apia.
thence: Distance passing N of Banks Islands, 2800 miles; if
Through Kadavu Passage to Suva. 5 passing S of those islands, add 10 miles.
Distance from Caloundra Head 1510 miles.
(Brisbane to Caloundra Head 35 miles). Wellington <-» Auckland
7.84
Brisbane <-> Apia Diagram (7.79)
7.78 w Coastwise.
Diagram (7.65) Distance: 545 miles.
From the approach to Brisbane the route is:
Great circle to 20° 00' S, 178° 45' W, about 30 miles
WSW of Vatoa, thence: New Zealand *-> Papeete
20 miles NW of Curacoa Reef, thence: 75 7.85
Through Apolima Strait to Apia. Diagram (7.79)
Distance from Caloundra Head 2150 miles. From Auckland and ports on the SE coasts of New
(Brisbane to Caloundra Head 35 miles.) Zealand routes are by great circle, as far as navigation
permits, to Papeete.
Torres Strait <-> W e l l i n g t o n 20 7.85.1
7.79 From Wellington the route is by great circle which
Diagram (7.79) passes near Haymet Rocks, the existence of which has
From Torres Strait the route is: been confirmed though their position (27°11'S,
Via Inner Route to Capricorn Channel (7.52.2), 160° 13' W) is doubtful, and about 30 miles SE of lies
thence: 25 Maria.
Rhumb line to Cook Strait, passing N of Middleton Distances: Auckland 2210 miles; Wellington 2340
Reef, thence: miles.
To Wellington.
Distance: 2660 miles.
30 New Zealand <-> Nuku'alofa
7.86
Torres Strait <-> A u c k l a n d Diagram (7.65)
7.80 The bottom between Kermadec Islands and Fiji and
Diagram (7.79) Tonga Islands is very uneven and liable to volcanic
From Torres Strait the route is: 35 activity, and the whole region must be regarded with
Via Inner Route to Capricorn Channel (7.52.2), suspicion, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
thence: 7.86.1
Rhumb line to North Cape, thence: From Wellington and South Island ports routes are:
Coastwise to Auckland. E of North Island, thence:
Distance: 2540 miles. 40 Through 31°20' S, 179° 30' W, thence:
Through 22°50'S, 177° 00'W, passing W of
Torres Strait«-»Papeete Kermadec Islands, Pelorus Reef and other
7.81 charted dangers, thence:
Diagram (7.79) As navigation permits to Nuku'alofa.
From Torres Strait the route is: 45 7.86.2
Through Bligh Entrance (7.53), thence: From Auckland the route is direct to join the route
Round the N point of Espiritu Santo, Vanuatu, from Wellington W of Pelorus Reef in 22° 50' S,
thence: 177° 00'W.
N of Balmoral Reef and Fiji Islands to Papeete, . Distances: Wellington 1400 miles; Auckland 1100
passing N of Zephyr Bank, S of Niua Fo'ou and 50 miles.
Niuatoputapu, and N of Durham Shoal.
Distance: 4090 miles.
N e w Z e a l a n d «-> A p i a
T o r r e s Strait <-» S u v a 7.87
7.82 55 Diagram (7.65)
Diagram (7.79) From Wellington and South Island ports the route is
From Torres Strait the route is: E of North Island and through:
Through Bligh Entrance (7.53), thence: 31°20'S, 179° 30'W, thence:
As navigation permits to pass N of Espiritu Santo 22° 50' S, 177° 00' W, thence:
and Maewo Island, Vanuatu, thence: 60 18°30'S, 174° 45'W, thence:
Through Kadavu Passage to Suva. 15°17'S, 173° 55'W, thence:
Distance: 2290 miles. Through Apolima Strait to Apia.
The track passes W of Kermadec Islands, Pelorus
Torres Strait <-> Apia Reef, dangers reported W of Tonga Islands, and
7.83 65 Curacoa Reef.
Diagram (7.79) For remarks on the region S of Tonga Islands, see
From Torres Strait the route is: 7.86.
Through Bligh Entrance (7.53), thence: 7.87.1
As navigation permits N or S of Banks Islands, From Auckland the route is direct to 22° 50' S,
thence: 70 177° 00' W (as 7.86.2), thence as above.

113
7.88 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

Distances: Auckland 1580 miles; Wellington 1890 Suva <-> Apia

miles. 7.91
Diagram (7.65)
New Zealand <-» Noumea or Suva From Suva the route is direct via Nanuku Passage and
7.88 5 N of Zephyr Bank.
Diagram (7.65) Distance: 640 miles.
Routes are direct. From Wellington and ports in
South Island routes pass W of North Island. Nuku'alofa <-» Apia
The route from Auckland to Noumea passes E of the 7.92
submarine volcano reported in 27° 45' S, 169° 09' E. 10 Diagram (7.65)
Distances: From Nuku'alofa routes pass either E or W of Tonga
From Auckland: Noumea 980 miles; Suva 1140 Islands.
miles. Distances:
From Wellington: Noumea 1230 miles; Suva 1470 E of Tonga Islands: Through Apolima Strait 510
miles. 15 miles. E of Upola Island 525 miles.
W of Tonga Islands and through Apolima Strait
Suva«-»Nuku'alofa 520 miles.
7.89
Diagram (7.65) Nuku'alofa <-> Papeete
As direct as navigation permits. 20 7.93
Distance: 410 miles. Diagram (7.79)
From Nuku'alofa the route passes:
Suva <-> Papeete 20 miles S of Niue, thence:
7.90 N of Aitutaki, thence:
Diagram (7.79) 25 To Papeete.
As direct as navigation permits, either through Distance: 1470 miles.
Nanuku Passage or through Lakeba Passage.
Although the distance by Lakeba Passage is some 30 Apia *-* Papeete
miles shorter, this passage is only recommended for use, 7.94
other than by ships fitted with radar, in fine weather with 30 Diagram (7.79)
extreme visibility. As direct as navigation permits.
Distance via Nanuku Passage: 1880 miles. Distance: 1300 miles.

ROUTES THROUGH EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO, SOUTH CHINA SEA AND SOLOMON SEA

Straits and Passages in Eastern Archipelago Strait

7.110 40 or Passage Remarks
The following notes are for planning passages Berhala, Selat Between coast of Sumatera and
between the Indian Ocean and N Pacific Ocean. 0°50'S, 104° 15'E Singkep on the inner route
Admiralty Sailing Directions should also be consulted. between Singapore and Selat
Sunda. Lighted.
Strait 45 Boleng, Selat and Savu Sea to Banda Sea. Deep.
or Passage Remarks Selat Lamakera Somewhat exposed. Strong
Alas, Selat On route from the Indian 8°25'S, 123° 20'E tidal streams.
8°40'S, 116°40'E Ocean to Selat Makasar and Buton, Alur Deep, wide and clear. Lighted.
Selat Sapudi. No dangers. An Pelayaran
alternative to Selat Lombok if 50 5°20'S, 123° 15'E
anchorage is desired. Buton, Selat Coastal route, easy to navigate
Alor, Selat Savu Sea to Banda Sea. Deep. 4°56'S, 122° 47'E by day. Depth of 18 m in South
8°15'S, 123° 55'E Has been used by deep- Narrows. No routeing
draught vessels. advantage over Alur Pelayaran
Bali, Selat Seldom used except by local 55 Buton.
8°10'S, 114° 25'E traffic. Dampier, Selat Connects Pacific Ocean with
Bangka, Selat Between coast of Sumatera and 0°40'S, 130° 30'E Halmahera Sea and thence to
2°O5'S, 105° 05'E Bangka. The shortest route Ceram Sea NW of New
between Selat Sunda and Guinea.
Singapore. 60 Durian, Selat Entrance to Singapore Strait
Bangka, Selat Molucca Sea to Celebes Sea. 0°40'N, 103° 40'E from inner route from Selat
1°45'N, 125° 05'E Shortest route round NE end Sunda. Controlling depth
of Sulawesi, but not lighted. 15 m.
Bangka Passage Molucca Sea to Celebes Sea. Flores, Selat Savu Sea to Banda Sea. Deep
2°00'N, 125° 15'E Separates islands NE of 65 8°20'S, 123° 00' E and clear except for Narrows at
Sulawesi from Pulau-pulau N end. Strong tidal streams in
Sanihe. Deep and wide. parts, calling for good reserve
Basilan Strait Between Sulu Sea and Celebes of power.
6°55'N, 122° 05'E Sea, the shortest route SW of Gelasa, Selat Frequently in use between
Mindanao. 70 3°00'S, 107° 15'E Java Sea and South China Sea
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.112.1
Strait Strait
or Passage Remarks or Passage Remarks
as alternative to Selat Bangka. Sele, Selat Connects between Pacific
Hinatuan Passage Connects Pacific Ocean with l ° 0 0 ' S , 131° 0 0 ' E Ocean and Ceram Sea, NW of
9°40'N, 125° 4 5 ' E Surigao Strait, N of 5 New Guinea.
Mindanao. Singapore Strait Connects between Malacca
Jailolo, Selat Between Pacific Ocean and l ° 1 0 ' N , 103° 50'E Strait and South China Sea.
0° 00', 129° 00' E Halmahera Sea leading to Well lighted and buoyed.
Ceram Sea. Deep. Deep.
Karimata, Selat Wide passage connecting 10 Sumba, Selat Wide and deep passage.
3°00'S, 109° 0 0 ' E South China Sea with E part of 9 ° 0 0 ' S , 119° 30'E Connects Savu Sea and Indian
Java Sea. Ocean, N of Sumba.
Linapacan Strait Between Sulu Sea and South Sunda, Selat Principal connection between
11°37'N, 119° 57'E China Sea. Deep and clear, but 6 ° 1 5 ' S , 105° 00' E Indian Ocean and Java Sea,
dangers in E approaches. 75 but limited for deep-draught
Lombok, Selat Wide. Easy to navigate. The vessels by lack of water to NE.
8°3O'S, 115° 30'E most important passage Surigao Strait Connects between Pacific
between Java Sea or Selat 10°30'N, 125° 2 0 ' E Ocean and Bohol Sea to Sulu
Makasar and the Indian Sea. Safe and deep.
Ocean. 20 Wetar, Selat Connects between Banda Sea
Makasar, Selat About 400 miles in length, 8 ° 1 5 ' S , 126° 25'E and Timor Sea through Alur
2°00'S, 118°00'E connecting Celebes Sea with Pelayaran Wetar; used for
Java Sea and Flores Sea. main routes between
Malacca Strait About 250 miles long in its Singapore and Australia.
4°00'N, 100° 0 0 ' E narrower part connecting 25
Andaman Sea with Singapore
Strait and Selat Durian. Selat Sunda, Jakarta and Java Sea «-» South
Depths irregular and apt to China Sea
vary. See Admiralty Sailing 7.111
Directions. 30 Diagram (7.111)
Manipa, Selat Wide and deep passage From Selat Sunda and Jakarta routes are through
3°1S'S, 127° 20' E connecting Ceram Sea with Selat Gelasa and E of Pengiki Basar.
Banda Sea. For deep draught vessels, the route from Selat Sunda
Mindoro Strait Wide and deep strait to Selat Gelasa by way of Outer Channel, between
13°00'N, 120°00'E connecting South China Sea 35 Payung and Pulau-pulau Tidung, offers the best depths:
with Sulu Sea. In frequent use alternatively the deeper and longer route through Selat
between Manila and islands to Karimata may be preferred.
the S. Caution, for areas being exploited for natural
Obi, Selat Wide and deep. Connects resources, see 7.49.1.
l o 0 0 ' S , 127° 30'E Molucca Sea with Halmahera 40 7.111.1
Sea and Selat Jailolo. From East part of Java Sea the route is through
Ombai, Selat Wide and deep. Connects Savu Selat Karimata.
8°35'S, 125°OO'E Sea with Banda Sea, and E to 7.111.2
Arafura Sea through Selat Low-powered vessels, N-bound from October to
Wetar and Timor Sea. 45 March, generally use the route E of Borneo through
Pantar, Selat Connects between Banda Sea Selat Makasar (7.137.1, thence to join 7.137 in Sibutu
8°20'S, 124° 20' E and Selat Ombai. Used by local Passage).
traffic.
Riau, Selat Approach from S to Singapore North-South routes through South China
0° 55' N, 104° 20' E Strait. Well lighted and 50 Sea
buoyed. Controlling depth 7.112
about 18 m. Diagram (7.111)
Roti, Selat Connects between Savu Sea A large area of dangerous ground, incompletely
10°25'S, 123° 30'E and Timor Sea, SW of Timor. surveyed and encumbered with many coral reefs and
Deep. 55 shoals, lies in the SE part of South China Sea. It lies
Sagewin, Selat Connects Pacific Ocean with between the parallels of 7° 30'N and 12°00'N,
O°55'S, 130°40'E Ceram Sea, NW of New separated on its SE side from Palawan and adjacent
Guinea. islands by Palawan Passage, and separated on its NW
Salayar, Selat Deep. Regularly used on route side from the coast of Vietnam by a wider and less
5°45'S, 120° 30'E between Java Sea and Molukka 60 encumbered part of the sea.
Archipelago. Traeks indicated on charts should be followed
San Bernadino Wide and deep. Important whenever possible.
Strait passage on Pacific Ocean 7.112.1
13°00'N, 124° 30'E routes. Main Route is recommended for full-powered
Sape, Selat Connects between Selat 65 vessels, N-bound or S-bound at all seasons.
8°3O'S, 119° 20'E Sumba and Flores Sea. From Singapore the route is:
Sapudi, Selat Regularly used on route Midway between Pulau Aur and Pulau-pulau
7 ° 0 0 ' S , 114° 15'E between Java Sea and Selat Anambas, thence:
Lombok or Flores Sea. 10°00'N, 110° 05' E, passing 25 miles SE of
Lighted. 70 Charlotte Bank, thence:

115
 I I I I I I I l l

Longitude 140"East from Greenwich 150

(7.122) ROUTES—Guam and Yap « > Eastern Archipelago, Apia and Suva.
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS
Midway between Macclesfield Bank and Bombay
Reef, thence:
B use of the predominant S-flowing current of this
7.X Li..4.
Palawan Passage is useful for low-powered vessels,
N-bound during the North-east Monsoon,
The routes between Singapore and Palawan Passage
are given at 7.126.
For cautions on fixing, currents, and directions for
Palawan Passage, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
From the N end of Palawan Passage,the route
continues N to the W coast of Luzon, and thence to
Taiwan Strait.
Singapore <-> Bangkok or Ho Chi Minh City
7.113
Diagram (7.111)
Routes for full-powered vessels are as direct as
navigation permits.
Distances: Bangkok 825 miles; Ho Chi Minh City 600
miles.
7.113.1
For low-powered vessels, the following routes may be
found advantageous, in July during the strength of the
South-west Monsoon, or in December and January
during the North-east Monsoon.
From Singapore. For Bangkok in July, after passing
Pulau Redang, the route continues along the W shore of
Gulf of Thailand.
For Ho Chi Minh City in July, providing the ship's
position is certain, the route passes W of Con Son.
For Bangkok or Ho Chi Minh City in December and
January, the best routes are probably E of Pulau-pulau
Anambas if bound Bangkok, or E of Pulau-pulau
Natuna Besar if bound Ho Chi Minh City.
For Singapore. From Bangkok in July, the route is
along the W shore of Gulf of Thailand to Pulau Redang,
thence inside Pulau Tenggol, thence close inshore to
Singapore Strait. In December and January, the route is
along the E shore of Gulf of Thailand, inshore of Koh
Tang and Poulo Panjang, see Admiralty Sailing
Directions, thence to Singapore Strait.
From Ho Chi Minh City in July, the route is along the
coast of Vietnam, thence across the mouth of Gulf of
Thailand to the Malaysian coast, passing inshore of
Pulau Tioman and Pulau Sibu, thence close inshore to
Singapore. In December and January, the route is E of
Con Son, thence direct to Singapore.
Singapore —> Hong Kong
7.114
Diagram (7.111)
Main route (7.112.1) is the usual route at all seasons
"until midway between Macclesfield Bank and Bombay
Reef, thence the route to Hong Kong passes 15 miles W
of Helen Shoal.
Distance: 1460 miles.
7.114.1
During the strength of the South-west Monsoon,
smoother water will be found by keeping closer to the
coast of Vietnam and passing W of Paracel Islands; this
route is 20 miles shorter.
During the North-east Monsoon, low-powered
vessels may prefer the route through Palawan Passage.
Distance: Via Palawan Passage t#W miles.
7.117.1
Hong Kong -> Singapore
7.115
Diagram (7.111)
Routes are either by Main Route (7.114) in reverse
(1460 miles), or are seasonal from Hong Kong.
7.115.1
During the North-east Monsoon (Dec-Jan), to make-
monsoon, the route is:
10 30 miles W of Paracel Islands, thence:
15-20 miles E of Cap Varella, thence:
E of lies Catwick, thence:
To Singapore Strait.
7.115.2
15 During the South-west Monsoon (July), the route is
30 miles W of Paracel Islands, thence:
If the Monsoon is strong, to a landfall off Cu Lao
Re, or if the Monsoon is light, off Cap Varella,
thence in either case:
20 Coastwise to Mui Dinh, keeping 10 miles offshore,
thence:
To Pulau Aur, keeping E of ties Catwick unless the
weather is clear or the ship's position certain,
thence:
25 To Singapore Strait.
Hong Kong <-» Shanghai and northern ports
7.116
Diagram (7.195)
30 Routes between Hong Kong and Shanghai keep about
5-10 miles E of the outer islands: for details of routes,
see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
When navigating along this part of the coast, care is
necessary at all times, as the tidal streams are very strong
35 in places.
From time to time vessels have stranded on outlying
islands off the coast of China between Hong Kong and
the entrance to Chang Jiang. In most cases the stranding
would not have occurred if attention had been paid to
40 the necessity for constantly sounding in thick or misty
weather. Many lighthouses on the islands are of
considerable elevation, and often the upper parts of the
islands, and the lights are obscured by fog, so, as a
general rule, if a light is not seen when a vessel is within
45 its range of visibility, sounding should commence at
once, even if the weather is apparently clear, and course
should be altered to keep in a safe depth, continuing
sounding until the position is ascertained.
Large fleets of fishing junks may be met off the coast of
50 China; they often carry no lights.
Low-powered or small vessels proceeding along the
coast during the North-east Monsoon, or during the
typhoon season, are advised, if possible, to take
advantage of the inshore passages described in
55 Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Distances: Shanghai 825 miles.
Nakhodka 1630 miles.
Singapore -> Shanghai
60 7.117
Diagrams (7.111), (7.195)
Route is via Main Route (7.112.1) as far as Taiwan
Strait, thence as in Admiralty Sailing Directions to
Shanghai.
65 Distance (through Xiaoban Men): 2200 miles.
7.117.1
In a strong North-east Monsoon, an alternative route
is:
W of Pulau-pulau Anambas, thence:
70 W of Prince Consort Bank, thence:
117
7.118 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

E of Macclesfield Bank, thence: Direct Balintang Channel (as at 7.197.1), thence:

Through P'eng-hu Kang-tao, thence: NW of Prince Consort Bank, thence:
N along the W coast of T'ai-wan, thence: W of Pulau-pulau Anambas, thence:
Through Xiaoban Men, as in Admiralty Sailing As navigation permits to Singapore.
Directions, to Shanghai. 5 Distance: 2890 miles,
•tn addition to getting omooth water and a favourable
current, a great advantage in uoingP'cng hu Kang taois Singapore <-> Manila or Verde Island
the abacnee of big flceto of fiohing junko, which are Passage
m i / u n t u i d along the China ooaot and which, on a dark 7.121
night are a aouree of great anxiety. Tin iliaiun.1 is mill 10 Diagram (7.111)
lighted. From Singapore the route is:
Siotanooi 2330 miloo. W of Pulau-pulau Anambas, thence:
NW of Prince Consort Bank, thence:
Shanghai -> Singapore 30 miles NW of North Danger Reef, thence:
7.118 15 Direct to Manila or Verde Island Passage.
Diagrams (7.111), (7.195) 7.121.1
From Shanghai, the usual route is through Xiaoban During the North-east Monsoon, an alternative route
Men to Taiwan Strait, as described in Admiralty Sailing is through Palawan Passage (7.126).
Directions, thence by Main Route (7.112.1) through 7.121.2
South China Sea to Singapore. 20 Distances in miles
Distance: 2200 miles. Verde Island
7.118.1 Manila Passage
From May to August, if the South-west Monsoon is W of Pulau-pulau
very strong, an alternative route after passing through Anambas 1340 1320
Taiwan Strait is: 25 Via Palawan Passage 1370 1330
NW of Vereker Banks, Helen Shoal and Paracel
Islands, to make a landfall on Cu Lao Re, thence: Manila and Verde Island Passage <-» Guam
Via the South-west Monsoon Route from Hong 7.122
Kong (7.115.2) to Singapore. Diagram (7.122)
Distance: 2240 miles. 30 The routes from Manila and Verde Island Passage to
San Bernadino Strait are described in Admiralty Sailing
Singapore <-> Nagasaki Directions. From San Bernadino Strait they continue
7.119 direct to Guam.
Diagrams (7.111), (7.195) Distances: Manila 1510 miles;
North-bound routes from Singapore are: 35 Verde Island Passage 1430 miles.
Either, W of Pulau-pulau Anambas, thence:
NW of Prince Consort Bank, thence: Singapore «-» San Bernadino Strait, Surigao
S of T'ai-wan, thence: Strait and Guam
N along the E coast of T'ai-wan, in the main stream 7.123
of the Japan Current, thence: 40 Diagrams (7.111), (7.122)
As navigation permits to Nagasaki. From Singapore the route is as at 7.121 as far as Verde
Distance: 2430 miles. Island Passage, thence as in Admiralty Sailing
7.119.1 Directions to San Bernadino Strait, thence direct to
Or, via Main Route (7.112.1) through South China Guam.
Sea to Taiwan Strait, thence: 45 Distances: San Bernadino Strait 1530 miles;
As navigation permits to Nagasaki. Guam 2750 miles.
Distance: 2430 miles. 7.123.1
7.119.2 Alternatively, particularly E-bound during the
South-bound routes from Nagasaki are through North-east Monsoon, the following route from
Taiwan Strait, and there join those from Shanghai to 50 Singapore may be taken.
Singapore (7.112.1 or 7.118.1). The Japan Current flows As at 7.126.1 or 7.126.2 to the S entrance to Palawan
NE-ward along the E coast of T'ai-wan throughout the Passage, thence through Balabac Strait to Surigao Strait
year; in East China Sea and Taiwan Strait, currents (7.124.1), thence direct to Guam,
change direction according to the monsoon. Distance: Guam 2640 miles.
Distances: 55
Via Main Route 2430 miles. Singapore <-> Yap
Passing W of Paracel Islands 2480 miles. 7.124
Diagram (7.131)
Singapore <-> Yokohama There are three principal routes which, from
7.120 60 Singapore, are:
Diagrams (7.111), (7.195) 7.124.1
North-bound the route is: To the S entrance to Palawan Passage (7.126.1)
W of Pulau-pulau Anambas, thence: thence:
NW of Prince Consort Bank, thence: Through Balabac Strait, thence:
Through Bashi Channel, thence: 65 Through Sulu Sea to Surigao Strait (7.123.1),
As at 7.197 to Yokohama. thence:
Distance: 2970 miles. Direct to Yap.
7.120.1 Surigao Strait is safe and deep throughout its length,
South-bound, or alternatively N-bound though less and the islands bordering it are steep-to. It is the only
favourable as regards current, the route is: 70 passage for large vessels from the Pacific Ocean to the
11O
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.129.3
interior waters of the Philippine Islands, with the 7.127.1
exception of San Bernadino Strait: it is of particular use Or, through one of the slightly shorter and better
for ships bound for S Philippine Islands or the Sulu Sea. sheltered routes leading through Selat Bangka.
In the North-east Monsoon, Hinatuan Passage, The route through Selat Gelasa has better depths in
between the NE end of Mindanao and the off-lying general.
islands may afford some protection against the weather, 7.127.2
but it is not recommended for large or low-powered Caution. Areas in the N approach to Selat Sunda are
vessels without a pilot due to the strong tidal streams. being exploited for natural resources, see 7.49.1.
For details, see Admiralty Sailing Directions. For routes for deep draught vessels between Selat
Distance: 2230 miles. 10 Gelasa and Selat Sunda, see 7.111.
7.124.2 7.127.3
The second route is through Selat Karimata and Java Distances from Singapore:
Sea to Selat Makasar (7.137.1), thence across the Selat Sunda:
Celebes Sea to pass E of Mindanao, thence direct to Yap. E of Kepulauan Lingga and through Selat Gelasa 570
Distance: 2520 miles. 15 miles;
7.124.3 Through Selat Durian and Selat Bangka 540 miles.
The third route is by the route from Singapore to Jakarta:
Guam (7.123) as far as San Bernadino Strait, thence E of Kepulauan Lingga and through Selat Gelasa 550
direct to Yap. miles;
Distance: 2410 miles. 20 Through Selat Durian and Selat Bangka 530 miles.
Singapore «-> Sulu Sea and Basilan Strait Singapore <-> Selat Lombok
7.125 7.128
Diagram (7.111) Diagram (7.128)
From Singapore the route is: 25 From Singapore the route is through Selat Karimata.
To S entrance to Palawan Passage (7.126), thence: The track from the E entrance to Singapore Strait passes
Through Balabac Strait (for details of channels and about 10 miles SW of the islet reported 28 miles SSW of
cautions on dangers and currents, see Admiralty Pejantan.
Sailing Directions), thence: From Selat Karimata the route continues:
As navigation permits to destination. 30 N or S of Bawean, thence:
Either through Selat Sapudi, or (by day) S of
Distances: Iloilo 1290 miles. Pulau-pulau Kangean, thence:
Cebu 1380 miles. To Selat Lombok.
Basilan Strait 1210 miles. Distance by either route 980 miles.
S point of Mindanao for Central Pacific 35
Route (7.300.1) 1480 miles.
Sandakan via Banggi South Channel Singapore <-» Selat Wetar
1040 miles. 7.129
Diagram (7.128)
Singapore«-+ Palawan passage 40 From Singapore the route is through Selat Karimata.
7.126 The track from the E entrance to Singapore Strait passes
Diagram (7.111) about 10 miles SW of the islet reported 28 miles SSW of
From Singapore the routes are: Pejantan.
7.126.1 From Selat Karimata the route continues by one of
Either, 5 miles N of Subi Kecil, thence: 45 the following:
Through 4° 00' N, 112° 32' E, thence: 7.129.1
As navigation permits to Palawan Passage. Either N or S of Bawean, thence:
7.126.2 Through Selat Sapudi, thence:
Or, S of Muri, passing S of Kayuara, thence: Joining the parallel of 8° S, S of Gosong Sakunci,
Through Alur Pelayaran Api, thence: 50 thence:
Through 4° 00' N, 112° 32' E, thence: Along that parallel to Alur Pelayaran Wetar,
As navigation permits to Palawan Passage. thence:
The narrowest and most dangerous part of Palawan Into Selat Wetar.
Passage, where it is only 29 miles wide between dangers, Distance to Alur Pelayaran Wetar 1510 miles.
lies abreast Royal Captain Shoal off the S part of 55 7.129.2
Palawan. Or, by day, N of Bawean, thence:
For cautions on shoals near the track in 3° 55' N, S of Pulau-pulau Kangean, thence:
112° 15' E, fixing, currents, and directions for Palawan Joining the parallel of 8° S, S of Gosong Sakunci,
Passage, see Admiralty Sailing Directions. thence:
ttammrLnmiudnri—trmirn nVinu.rn nn thr rhnrtr r h ^ 1 1 ^ ^^ 60 Along that parallel to Alur Pelayaran Wetar,
thence:
Distances by either route are almost the same. Into Selat Wetar.
Distance to Alur Pelayaran Wetar 1490 miles.
7.129.3
Singapore <-> Selat Sunda or Jakarta 65 Or, N of Pulau Masalembo Kecil, thence:
7.127 Between Gosong Taka Rewataya and Pulau-pulau
Diagram (7.111) Sabalana, thence:
From Singapore routes are: S of Kalao, thence:
Either, E of all the islands S of Singapore Strait, and Joining the parallel of 8° S, S of Pasir Layaran,
thence through Selat Gelasa. 70 thence:

119
 Along that parallel to Alur Pelayaran Wetar, Thence, in either case:
thence: Through Selat Sumba, thence:
Into Selat Wetar. Through either Selat Lombok or Selat Alas, thence
Distance to Alur Pelayaran Wetar 1470 miles. Through Java Sea and Selat Karimata to Singapore
7.129.4 35 (7.128).
Or, N of Pulau Masalembo Kecil, thence: The route N of Timor avoids most of the dangerous
S of Gosong Taka Rewataya, thence: areas in Timor Sea and makes use of the bold shores of
Through Selat Salayar, thence: the straits as aids to navigation.
Through Alur Pelayaran Wetar into Selat Wetar. Distances via Selat Lombok:
Distance to Alur Pelayaran Wetar 1480 miles. 40 N of Timor 2560 miles;
7.129.5 S of Timor 2570 miles.
In choosing a route it should be noted that an E-going 7.130.3
current is more often experienced on the S than on the N East-bound or West-bound at any time of year,
sides of Java and Flores Seas. An alternative route is, from Singapore, through Selat
45 Sunda (7.127), thence through l l ° 3 0 ' S , 118° 00'E,
Singapore «-» Torres Strait passing S of all the islands E of Selat Sunda, to Torres
7.130 Strait.
Diagram (7.130) The distance is greater and the only advantage is ease
On the routes given below, currents are of navigation over much of the route,
predominantly W-going, except in Java and Flores Seas, 50 Distance: 2880 miles.
where the current is E-going during the North-west For distances from Singapore to Australian ports, see
Monsoon (Nov-March). 7.174.
7.130.1
East-bound—April to October or West-bound— Selat Sunda and Jakarta <-> Selat Lombok
55
November to March. 7.131
Routes from Singapore are through Selat Karimata to Diagram (7.131)
Selat Wetar (7.129), thence to Torres Strait. The route is coastwise along the N coast of Jawa and
Distances: Singapore to Alur Pelayaran Wetar, Madura, thence through Selat Sapudi to Selat Lombok.
depending on route used at 7.129. Distances: Selat Sunda 670 miles; Jakarta 615 miles.
60
Alur Pelayaran Wetar to Torres Strait
990 miles.
7.130.2 Selat Sunda and Jakarta «-> Selat Wetar
West-bound—April to October or East-bound— 7.132
November to March. Diagram (7.131)
65
Routes from Torres Strait are: The route is coastwise along the N coast of Jawa and
Either S of Timor, keeping in the deep-water trench S Madura, thence as at 7.129.1 or 7.129.2 to Selat Wetar.
of Timor and Pulau-pulau Tanimbar (6.122.3) to avoid Distances via Selat Sapudi to Alur Pelayaran Wetar,
the shoal area in Timor Sea, thence through Selat Roti; in the NW approach to Selat Wetar:
Or, if W-bound, N of Timor, thence through Selat Selat Sunda 1200 miles.
70
Ombai. Jakarta 1140 miles.
191
7.133 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

(7.130) ROUTES—Torres Strait <- Singapore, Balik Papan and Tarakan.

Singapore <-> Ambon From Singapore the route is through Selat Karimata.
7.133 The track from the E entrance to Singapore Strait passes
Diagram (7.131) about 10 miles SW of the islet reported 28 miles SSW of
From Singapore the route is through Selat Karimata. 35 Pejantan.
The track from the E entrance to Singapore Strait passes From Selat Karimata the route continues direct to
about 10 miles SW of the islet reported 28 miles SSW of Surabaya.
Pejantan. Distance: 770 miles.
From Selat Karimata the route continues:
S of Bawean, thence: 40 Singapore *-* Balik Papan
S of Gosong Taka Retwataya, thence: 7.136
Through Selat Salayar, thence: Diagram (7.111)
Through Selat Buton, thence: From Singapore the route is:
To Ambon. Through Selat Karimata (see 7.135), thence:
This is probably a better route to Molucca Sea, in 45 S and E of Pulau Laut, thence:
either monsoon, than passage N of Borneo. W of Pulau-pulau Balabalangan, thence:
Distance: 1690 miles. To Balik Papan.
Distance: 1080 miles.
Singapore <-> Ujung Pandang
7.134 50
Diagram (7.131) Singapore <-> Tarakan
From Singapore the route is through Selat Karimata. 7.137
The track from the E entrance to Singapore Strait passes Diagram (7.111)
about 10 miles SW of the islet reported 28 miles SSW of From Singapore the routes are:
Pejantan. 55 Either, N of Borneo and through Sulu Sea (7.125),
From Selat Karimata the route continues: thence through Sibutu Passage (for directions, see
7.134.1 Admiralty Sailing Directions), thence to Tarakan.
Either, S of Pulau Laut, thence N of Batu Butunga, 1.137.1
thence through the swept channel leading to Ujung Or, S of Borneo and through Selat Makasar (7.136),
Pandang. 60 thence to Tarakan.
7.134.2 Distances: N of Borneo 1290 miles.
Or, S of Pulau-pulau Laurot, thence through Pulau- S of Borneo 1440 miles.
pulau Lima (for directions, see Admiralty Sailing
Directions), thence through the swept channel leading
to Ujung Pandang. 65 Bangkok, Ho Chi Minh City and Hong
Distance: N of Batu Butunga 1110 miles. Kong <-* Manila, Verde Island Passage or
Cape Calavite (Mindoro Strait)
Singapore «-> Surabaya 7.138
7.135 Diagram (7.138)
Diagram (7.131) 70 Routes are as direct as safe navigation permits.
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.140

I_ongitude120° East from Greenwich 130

(7.131) ROUTES—Singapore and Selat Sunda * > Eastern Archipelago and Yap.

Distances in miles: proceeding from the S part of these routes as directly as

Verde Island safe navigation permits to the appropriate strait leading
Manila Passage C Calai 50 into Java Sea. For Areas to be Avoided, see 7.49.1.
Bangkok 1450 1430 1390
Ho Chi Minh Hong Kong <-> Selat Sunda, Jakarta or
City 880 865 820 Surabaya
Hong Kong 630 660 635 7.140
55 Diagram (7.138)
Bangkok and Ho Chi Minh City <-> Selat North-bound or South-bound the normal route
Sunda, Jakarta or Surabaya from Hong Kong is:
7.139 15 miles W of Helen Shoal, thence:
Diagram (7.138) Midway between Macclesfield Bank and Bombay
From Bangkok or Ho Chi Minh City routes are as 60 Reef, thence:
direct as safe navigation permits to Selat Gelasa for Selat 10°00'N, 110° 05' E, thence:
Sunda or Jakarta, or to Selat Karimata for Surabaya. W of Vanguard Bank, thence:
Distances in miles: E of Pengiki Besar, thence:
Bangkok Ho Chi Minh City Either through Selat Gelasa for Selat Sunda or
Selat Sunda 1280 1010 65 Jakarta, (see 7.49.1),
Jakarta 1260 990 Or through Selat Karimata for Surabaya and the E
Surabaya 1450 1160 part of Java Sea.
7.139.1 Distances: Selat Sunda 1800 miles.
For low-powered vessels it may be preferred to follow Jakarta 1780 miles.
the routes to the E entrance to Singapore Strait (7.113), 70 Surabaya 1940 miles.

123
7.140.1 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

7.140.1 Hong Kong <-> Verde Island Passage, Iloilo

South-bound there are alternative seasonal routes. or Cebu
7.140.2 7.144
North-east Monsoon. To take advantage of the Diagram (7.138)
predominant current of this monsoon, setting S in the W 5 From Hong Kong the route is through Verde Island
part of South China Sea, the route is: Passage, thence as in Admiralty Sailing Directions to
30 miles W of Paracel Islands, thence: destination.
15-20 miles E of Cap Varella, thence: Distances from Hong Kong:
E of lies Catwick, thence: Verde Island Passage 660 miles.
W of Vanguard Bank to join the normal route. 10 Iloilo (W of Panay or through Jintotlo Channel) 930
7.140.3 miles.
South-west Monsoon. For the most sheltered water in Cebu 960 miles.
this monsoon, the route is:
30 miles W of Paracel Islands, thence: H o n g K o n g •-+ G u a m or Yap
If the monsoon is strong, to a landfall off Cu Lao 15 7.145
Re, or if the monsoon is light, off Cap Varella, Diagrams (7.138), (7.122)
thence: From Hong Kong the route is:
Coastwise to Mui Dinh, keeping 10 miles offshore, As navigation permits to Balintang Channel, taking
thence: care to avoid the vicinity of Pratas Reef and
E of lies Catwick, thence: 20 Vereker Banks, see Admiralty Sailing
W of Vanguard Bank to join the normal route. Directions, thence:
Great circle to Guam or Yap.
Hong Kong <-> Sandakan Distances: Guam 1820 miles; Yap 1600 miles.
7.141
Diagram (7.138) 25 Manila and Verde Island Passage <-> Selat
From Hong Kong the route is through Palawan Sunda or Jakarta
Passage and North Balabac Strait. 7.146
For cautions on dangers and currents in Palawan Diagram (7.146)
Passage and North Balabac Strait, see Admiralty Sailing From Manila or Verde Island Passage the route is:
Directions. 30 Through Palawan Passage, thence:
Distance via N Balabac Strait: 1100 miles. Through Alur Pelayaran Api, thence:
E of Pengiki Besar, thence:
Through Selat Gelasa to Selat Sunda or Jakarta.
H o n g K o n g *-* T a r a k a n , Balik P a p a n or For cautions on fixing and currents, and directions in
Ujung Pandang 35 Palawan Passage, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
7.142 Distances in miles:
Diagram (7.138) Manila Verde Island Passage
From Hong Kong routes are: Selat Sunda 1580 1550
Either, through Mindoro Strait and Apo East Pass or Jakarta 1560 1530
through Verde Island Passage, to Cuyo East Pass. 40
The route through Verde Island Passage offers shelter
from the strength of either monsoon, but is 20 miles Manila, Verde Island Passage and Cape
longer. Calavite (Mindoro Strait) <-> Tarakan, Balik
From Cuyo East Pass, the route continues across Sulu Papan, Ujung Pandang or Surabaya
Sea to Sibutu Passage (for directions, see Admiralty 45 7.147
Sailing Directions), thence through Sibutu Passage into Diagram (7.146)
Celebes Sea and Selat Makasar. From Manila, routes from Hong Kong (7.142) should
7.142.1 be joined in Mindoro Strait, or Verde Island Passage
Or, through Palawan Passage and North Balabac which is slightly shorter.
Strait (7.141) into Sulu Sea, thence across Sulu Sea to 50 For Surabaya, the route continues through Selat
join the above route in Sibutu Passage. Makasar and across Java Sea.
7.142.2 Distances in miles:
Distances via Mindoro Strait, if via North Balabac Verde Island
Strait, subtract 20 miles: *Manila Passage C Calavite
Tarakan 1350 miles. 55 Tarakan 810 170 720
Balik Papan 1650 miles. Balik Papan 1100 1010 1010
Ujung Pandang 1830 miles. Ujung
Pandang 1290 1190 1200
Surabaya 1570 1470 1480
H o n g K o n g <-> A m b o n 60 * Via Mindoro Strait.
7.143
Diagrams (7.138), (7.131) Manila, Verde Island Passage and Cape
From Hong Kong the route is either through Calavite (Mindoro Strait) <-> Sandakan
Mindoro Strait and Apo East Pass or through Verde 7.148
Island Passage, to Cuyo East Pass (see 7.142), thence: 65 Diagram (7.146)
Through Basilan Strait, thence: From Manila routes are either through Mindoro
Either between Biaro and Talisei, or through Selat Strait and Apo East Pass to Cuyo East Pass, or through
Bangka, off the NE end of Sulawesi, thence: Verde Island Passage which is sheltered from the
Through Selat Manipa to Ambon. strength of the monsoons and slightly shorter, thence
Distance via Mindoro Strait 1830 miles. 70 across Sulu Sea to Sandakan.
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.149

Longitude 110°East from Greenwich

(7.146) ROUTES-Manila Java Sea.

Distances to Sandakan via Cuyo East Pass: Distances in miles:

Manila: Via Mindoro Strait 645 miles; Via Verde Verde
Island Passage 635 miles; Island
Verde Island Passage: 550 miles; 60 Manila Passage C Calavite
Cape Calavite: 555 miles. Iloilo:
Via Jintotlo Channel *360 275 —
Manila, Verde Island Passage and Cape Passing W of Panay *35O 265 —
Calavite (Mindoro Strait) *-> Iloilo or Cebu Via Mindoro Strait and
7.149 65 W of Panay — — 270
Diagram (7.138) Cebu:
From Manila the route is through Verde Island Via Jintotlo Channel *390 310 *355
Passage, and from Cape Calavite the route is through Via Mindoro Strait and
Mindoro Strait, thence the routes are those described in Jintotlo Channel — — 360
Admiralty Sailing Directions. 70 * Via Verde Island Passage.

125
7.150 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

Longitude 120° East from Greenwich 130

(7.163) NORTH-SOUTH ROUTES through the Eastern Archipelago.

Torres Strait <-> Balik Papan

7.150
Diagrams (7.130), (7.128)
The route from Torres Strait is through Selat Wetar
and Alur Pelayaran Wetar into Banda Sea, thence:
Either, along the N coast of Flores to 8° 00' S,
121° 00'E, thence:
E of Pulau-pulau Sabalana, thence:
E of Gosong Taka Rewataya, thence:
65 Into Selat Makasar and to Balik Papan.
Or, through Selat Salayar, thence:
Round the SW end of Sulawesi, thence:
Into Selat Makasar and to Balik Papan.
Distances: Via N coast of Flores 1750 miles.
70 Via Selat Salayar 1720 miles.
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.166
Torres Strait «-> Tarakan
7.151 Either through Arafura and Banda Seas (7.173) to join
Diagrams (7.130), (7.128) the Eastern Route (7.166) at Selat Manipa;
The route from Torres Strait is as at 7.150 as far as Or by the alternative route N of Seram (7.173.2) to
Tanjung Rangas, thence as navigation permits to join the Eastern Route between Pulau-pulau Obi and
Tarakan. Pulau-pulau Sula.
Distance: 1980 miles. Thence, in either case, by the Eastern Route until
7.151.1 through Selat Bangka or Bangka Passage, thence:
North-bound during the South-east Monsoon Direct to Tarakan.
(May-Sept), one of the following routes from Torres 10 Distance:
Strait may be preferred. Via Selat Manipa or N of Seram 1780 miles.

ROUTES THROUGH SEAS OF THE WESTERN PACIFIC OCEAN

General information Central Route

7.161 7.164
The complicated pattern of N-S routes on the W side 20 Diagram (7.163)
of the Pacific Ocean gives a variety of choice when From Selat Lombok the route is:
planning a passage. In selecting the most direct route, Through Selat Makasar, thence:
the circumnavigation of Australia, the comparative Through Sibutu Passage, thence:
merits of the various routes through the Eastern Through Cuyo East Pass, thence:
Archipelago or Solomon Sea, and the depths required to 25 Through Mindoro Strait to South China Sea.
suit the vessel's draught, may be important factors. 7.164.1
The seasonal variations of winds, currents, and The route from Cuyo East Pass through Tablas Strait
weather in an area extending 45° or more, N and S of the and Verde Island Passage, and between Lubang Islands
equator, must also play a large part in determining a and the W coast of Luzon, offers an alternative to the
route agreeable to the characteristics of the vessel and 30 passage through Mindoro Strait affording shelter from
the object of the voyage. the full strength of either monsoon. The route is clear,
For descriptions of seasonal winds and currents, see though care must be taken near Baco Islets, SE of Verde
7.2-7.6, 7.15-7.17 and 7.33. Island.
Distances from Selat Lombok:
35 Sibutu Passage 860 miles;
Cape Calavite (Mindoro Strait) 1420 miles;
Routes through Eastern Archipelago Verde Island Passage 1420 miles;
Manila 1500 miles.
Principal routes
7.162 40 Central Branch Routes
Diagram (7.163) 7.165
There are three principal N-S routes, and their Diagram (7.163)
branches, through Eastern Archipelago. South China Sea may also be reached from Selat
Western route (7.163) Lombok:
Central route (7.164) and (7.165) 45 Either through Selat Karimata (7.128), to pass W of
Eastern route (7-166) and (7.167) Borneo,
They are used for both N-bound and S-bound Or by following the Central Route to Sibutu
passages between Australia or New Zealand, and South Passage, thence through Balabac Strait, passing
China Sea or the NW Pacific Ocean. E and N of Borneo.
For deep-draught vessels, the most direct routes 50 7.165.1
between Australia and South China Sea, East China Philippine Sea may be reached, to enable a course to
Sea, Japan or ports farther N, are through the Central the N to be set passing E of Philippine Islands by:
route, or its Branch Routes to Selat Karimata, Balabac Leaving the Central Route after passing through
Strait or the Pacific Ocean. Selat Makasar, thence:
Notes on straits and passages in the Eastern 55 Passing S of Mindanao into Philippine Sea.
Archipelago are given at 7.110. Distances from Selat Lombok:
Selat Karimata 635 miles;
Balabac Strait 1110 miles;
Western route Cape Calavite (Mindoro Strait):
7.163 60 Via Selat Karimata 1840 miles;
Diagram (7.163) Via Balabac Strait 1450 miles;
From Selat Sunda the route is through Selat Gelasa Manila:
(7.111). Via Selat Karimata 1930 miles;
There is a least charted depth of 20 m in the NE Via Balabac Strait 1540 miles;
approach to Selat Sunda. 65 Cape San Agustin 1150 miles.
Distances from Selat Sunda:
Selat Gelasa 220 miles; Eastern Route
Cape Calavite (Mindoro Strait) via Palawan 7.166
Passage 1510 miles; Diagram (7.163)
Manila via Palawan Passage 1590 miles. 70 From Selat Manipa the route is:
127
7.167 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

Between Obimayor and Pulau-pulau Sula, thence: West coast of Australia

Round the NE end of Sulawesi, through either 7.170
Bangka Passage or Selat Bangka, see Admiralty Diagram (7.163)
Sailing Directions, thence: From the W coast of Australia routes are as navigation
Through Basilan Strait, thence: permits (see Admiralty Sailing Directions for
Through Cuyo East Pass, thence: recommended routes) to:
Through Mindoro Strait, or through Verde Island Either Selat Sunda for the Western Route (if from
Passage, to South China Sea. Cape Leeuwin, see 7.168.1)
Distances from Selat Manipa: Or Selat Lombok for the Central Route.
Basilan Strait 690 miles. 10
Cape Calavite (Mindoro Strait) 1120 miles.
Manila 1210 miles. Port Hedland
Verde Island Passage 1120 miles. 7.171
Diagram (7.163)
Eastern Branch Route 15 From Port Hedland routes are:
7.167 Either to Selat Lombok for the Central Route,
Diagram (7.163) Or W of Timor, thence:
The North Pacific Ocean may be reached by a route Through Selat Ombai, thence:
from Selat Manipa to Selat Jailolo, to enable a course to To Selat Manipa for the Eastern Route.
the N to be set passing E of Philippine Islands. 20
Distance Selat Manipa to Selat Jailolo 235 miles. Darwin
7.172
Diagram (7.163)
From Darwin the route (see Admiralty Sailing
Routes connecting Australia with Prinicpal 25 Directions) is to Sermata, thence:
Routes of Eastern Archipelago Between Sermata and Barbar, thence:
E of Damar, thence:
East coast of Australia E of Pulau-pulau Penyu, thence:
7.168 To Selat Manipa for the Eastern Route.
Diagrams (7.52), (7.163) 30
From E coast of Australia routes are: Torres Strait
Either N-about by the Inner Route (7.52.2) to Torres 7.173
Strait (7.53), thence: Diagram (7.163)
By routes at 7.173-7.173.2 to join the Eastern From Torres Strait the Main Route for all seasons is:
Route, or to the Pacific Ocean through Selat 35 S of Le Cher Bank and the unexamined shoals W of
Jailolo. it, thence:
The controlling depth by these routes is in Torres Between Pulau-pulau Tanimbar and Pulau-pulau
Strait; see Admiralty Sailing Directions. Kai, giving the S end of Pulau-pulau Aru a wide
7.168.1 berth, thence:
Diagrams (7.57), (6.157), (6.140), (7.163) 40 SW of Pulau-pulau Banda, thence:
Or S-about to Cape Otway (7.51), thence: To join the Eastern Route at Selat Manipa.
Direct to Cape Leeuwin (6.126), thence: For further details of this route, see Admiralty Sailing
Either, 20 miles E of Christmas Island, thence: Directions.
To Selat Sunda to join the Western Route, 7.173.1
Or as navigation permits to Selat Lombok to join 45 Another route is by the recommended tracks leading
the Central Route. from Torres Strait to Cape Wessel and thence to
7.168.2 9° 00' S, 133° 05' E, whence course can be set to join the
If proceeding S-about, the advantage of the S-going Main Route between Pulau-pulau Tanimbar and Pulau-
East Australian Current must be weighed against the pulau Kai. This route passes well clear of Duddell Shoal
frequency of W and NW gales S of Australia. 50 and the dangers W of Le Cher Bank, but is 50 miles
Distances from Sydney to Singapore are roughly the longer.
same via either Torres Strait or Cape Leeuwin. 7.173.2
Alternative route, which provides some protection
from the seas in Banda Sea during the North-east
South coast of Australia 55 Monsoon (December-March) and the South-east
7.169 Monsoon (May-September), is less regularly used. It is
Diagrams (6.157), (7.57) slightly longer to its junction with the Eastern Route W
From the S coast of Australia routes are: of Obimayor.
Either E-about through Bass Strait (6.126 or 6.127), The route passes:
thence coastwise (7.51) to join N-abbut routes (7.168) 60 W of Ujung Salah, giving that cape a wide berth,
from the E coast. thence:
7.169.1 N of Pulau-pulau Aru, thence:
Diagrams (6.157), (6.140), (7.163) N of Seram, thence:
Or W-about to Cape Leeuwin to join the S-about Either to join the Eastern Route, passing between
routes (7.168.1) from the E coast. 65 Obimayor and Pulau-pulau Sula or through
From ports E of Adelaide the shortest distance to the Selat Obi;
W end of Torres Strait is E-about. Or to the Pacific Ocean through Selat Jailolo.
From Melbourne, distances to Hong Kong are This route to Selat Jailolo is 140 miles shorter than
roughly the same via either Torres Strait or Cape that via Selat Manipa. For further details of this route,
Leeuwin. 70 see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.174
Australia < ' South and East China Seas and the Pacific Ocean
7.174

Distances through Eastern Archipelago

1Vest-about East-about

Cape Leeu•win
c 1

Torres Str ait

••& is

Port Philh
for Melboi

for Brisbai

for Melboi
Port Phill

Port Hedl

Caloundra
Fremantle
Adelaide

Darwin

Sydney
Route Note To Principal Routes
Selat Sunda Western 3280 2980 1800 1690
Selat Lombok Central 3030 2740 1560 1440 710
Selat Manipa Eastern 1160 610 995 2310 2760 3300
Through Eastern Archipelago
C Calavite Western A 4815 4485 3305 3185
(Mindoro St) Central B 4460 4170 2990 2870 2140
Eastern C 2290 1730 2120 3430 3880 4410
Verde I Passage Central B 4460 4170 2990 2870 2140
Eastern C 2290 1730 2120 3430 3880 4410
Manila Western A 4900 4570 3390 3270
Central B 4550 4260 3080 2960 2230
Eastern C 2380 1820 2210 3520 3970 4500
Hong Kong Western — 5110 4780 3600 3490
Central D 5100 4810 3630 3500 2770
Eastern C 2920 2370 2750 4070 4520 5050
Shanghai Western F 5810 5520 4340 4230
Central G 5610 5330 4140 4020 3290
Eastern H 3440 2890 3270 4590 5040 5570
Nagasaki Western J 5740 4560 4450
Central K 5490 4310 4190 3460
Eastern P 3360 2810 3190 4510 4960 5490
Yokohama Western L 6220 5040 4920
Central M 5940 4760 4640 3910
Eastern P 5770 4590 4460 3600 3050 3430 4750 5200 5730
Tsugaru Kaikyo Western N 6490 5310 5200
Central O 6250 5070 4940 4210
Eastern E 6190 5010 4880 4020 3490 3850 5170 5620 6150
Guam Central Q 3870 3740 3010
Eastern P 2610 2060 2440 3760 4210 4740
Yap Central Q 3430 3310 2580
Eastern P 2170 1620 2000 3320 3780 4300

Singapore 3850 3550 2370 2260 1690R 1930 2560S 3880 433OT 4860
via Selat Sunda, iselat Gelasa and Singapore: Strait Selat Lombok Torres Strait

* Port Phillip to Melbourne: 40 miles. t Caloundra Head to Brisbane: 35 miles.

Distances are in miles and, except where indicated in
the notes below, are by the Principal Routes shown in
the second column of this table.
Distances from Torres Strait by the Eastern Route are
by Main Route (7.173), and those E-about round
Australia are by Inner Route (7.52.2).
Notes
A Via Palawan Passage
B If through Selat Karimata and Palawan Passage,
add 400 miles.
C If from Torres Strait by Alternative Route, add 20
miles.
D If through Selat Karimata and South China Sea,
add 80 miles.
E Through Selat Manipa and Selat Jailolo, and S of
55 Honshu. If from Torres Strait by Alternative
Route, subtract 140 miles.
Via South China Sea Main Route (7.112.1) and
through Taiwan Strait and Xiaoban Men.
E or W of T'ai-wan and through Xiaoban Men
60 (7.195 or 7.196). If through Selat Makasar, S of
Mindanao and E of Philippine Islands and T'ai-
wan, add 150 miles. If through Selat Karimata and
W of T'ai-wan, add 300 miles.
H E or W of T'ai-wan and through Xiaoban Men
65 (7.195 or 7.196). If from Torres Strait by
Alternative Route to Selat Jailolo, thence E of
Philippine Islands and T'ai-wan subtract 200
miles. If from Port Hedland (7.171) or Darwin
(7.172), through Selat Manipa and Selat Jailolo,
70 thence as at 7.167, subtract 60 miles.

129
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

150° Adjoining Diagram (7.176) 160° 170

I I I I I I I I I I i i i i I I I I I

v
, Nouvel*NX 8
Calrfdor

Kelso Bk. ii

Capel Bk.•:';

i — i — i — i i—i i—i | i i i i i i—i

Longitude 160° East from Greenwich 170°

(7.175) ROUTES—East coast of Australia and New Zealand < > Solomon Sea.
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS
J E or W of T'ai-wan.
K Either Central Route and E of T'ai-wan, or through
Selat Makasar and S of Mindanao.
L Through Palawan Passage and Balintang Channel.
M Through Balintang Channel. If through Selat
Makasar and S of Mindanao, subtract ISO miles.
N Through Taiwan Strait and Korea Strait.
O E of T'ai-wan and through Korea Strait. If through
Selat Makasar and S of Mindanao and Honshu,
subtract 30 miles.
P Through Selat Manipa and Selat Jailolo. If from
Torres Strait by Alternative Route to Selat Jailolo,
subtract 140 miles.
Q Through Selat Makasar and S of Mindanao.
R If through Selat Sunda and Selat Gelasa, 1750
miles.
S Through Selat Wetar, Selat Ombai, Selat Sumba,
Selat Lombok, Java Sea (7.130.2) and Selat
Karimata. If through Selat Roti, Selat Sumba,
Selat Lombok, Java Sea (7.130.2) and Selat
Karimata, add 10 miles. If through Selat Wetar,
Flores Sea, Java Sea (7.130.1) and Selat Karimata,
subtract 80 miles. If S of Jawa and the islands E of
it, and through Selat Sunda and Selat Gelasa, add
320 miles.
T If W-about and through Selat Sunda, 4330 miles.
Australia <-> Philippine Islands, South and
East China Seas and North-west part of the
Pacific Ocean: Ocean Routes
7.175
Diagrams (7.175), (7.176), (7.180)
From the E coast of Australia, Ocean Routes to the
NW Pacific Ocean pass from Coral Sea, through
Solomon Sea, and continue NW and N through
Caroline Islands.
For distances, see 7.188.
Melbourne, Sydney and Brisbane <-> Yap
7.176
Diagrams (7.175), (7.176)
The routes from N of Brisbane are:
20 miles E of Frederick Reef, thence:
Either midway between Rossel Spit and Pocklington
Reef, thence:
Between New Ireland and Bougainville Island,
thence:
To Yap.
Or through Jomard Entrance (see 7.183), thence:
By the routes described in Admiralty Sailing
Directions to Bomatu Point, thence:
Between New Ireland and Bougainville Island,
thence:
To Yap.
7.176.1
Alternative routes from Bomatu Point through Saint
George's Channel or Vitiaz and Isumrud Straits, or
from Rossel Spit passing N of Laughlan Islands and
thence through that channel or those straits, have been
used; they offer a considerable reduction in distance to
Yap and other destinations.
Melbourne, Sydney and Brisbane <-> San
Bernadino Strait, Verde Island Passage or
Manila
7.177
Diagrams (7.175), (7.176)
Routes from N of Brisbane are as at 7.176 as far as the
strait between New Ireland and Bougainville Island, or
if using the alternative routes (7.176.1), as far as Saint
7.180.1
George's Channel or Isumrud Strait. Thence routes
continue to San Bernadino Strait, passing S of Palau
Islands.
From San Bernadino Strait routes continue to Verde
5 Island Passage and Manila as described in Admiralty
Sailing Directions.
Melbourne, Sydney and
Brisbane <-» Balintang Channel or Hong
10 Kong
7.178
Diagrams (7.175), (7.176), (7.138)
Routes from N of Brisbane are as at 7.176 as.far as the
strait between New Ireland and Bougainville Island, or
15 if using the alternative routes (7.176.1), as far as Saint
George's Channel or Isumrud Strait, thence:
From the strait between New Ireland and
Bougainville Island or Saint George's
Channel to Balintang Channel, passing close S
20 of Yap.
From Isumrud Strait to Balintang Channel,
passing S of Palau Islands.
From Balintang Channel routes continue as at 7.145
to Hong Kong.
25
Melbourne, Sydney and Brisbane «-> Guam
7.179
Diagrams (7.175), (7.176)
Routes from N of Brisbane are:
30 Either as at 7.176 as far as the strait between New
Ireland and Bougainville Island, or if using the
alternative route (7.176.1), as far as Saint George's
Channel.
From the strait between New Ireland and
35 Bougainville Island the route continues W of Lyra
Reef, thence:
Either W of Satawal Island and West Fayu Island,
or 20 miles W of Ulul Island to Guam.
From Saint George's Channel the route continues
40 W of Satawal Island and West Fayu Island to Guam.
7.179.1
Or 20 miles E of Frederick Reef, thence:
30 miles E of Pocklington Reef, taking care to avoid
Mellish Reef, thence:
45 Through Bougainville Strait, thence:
Either W of Satawal Island and West Fayu Island,
or 20 miles W of Ulul Island, to Guam.
50 Melbourne, Sydney and
Brisbane <-> Shanghai
7.180
Diagrams (7.175), (7.176), (7.180), (7.195)
Routes from N of Brisbane areasat7.179or7.179.las
55 far as the strait between New Ireland and Bougainville
Island or Bougainville Strait.
From the strait between New Ireland and
Bougainville Island routes continue:
As at 7.176 to pass close S of Yap, thence:
60 Through 25° 30'N, 126° 30'E, to pass through
Nansei Shoto between Okinawa Gunto and
Sakishima Gunto, thence:
Through Xiaoban Men, see Admiralty Sailing
Directions, to Shanghai.
65 7.180.1
Or as at 7.179 to pass W of Satawal Island and West
Fayu Island, thence:
Joining the route which passes S of Yap in
25°3O'N, 126° 30'E, passing N of Gaferut
70 Island.
131
7.180.2 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

l [—i i i i—i i i
Longitude 140° East from Greenwich 150°

(7.176) ROUTES through Solomon Sea and Caroline Islands.

7.180.2 For caution on volcanic activity NW of Mariana

Or as at 7.179 to pass 20 miles W of Ulul Island,
thence:
Joining the route which passes S of Yap in
25° 30'N, 126° 30'E. 45
7.180.3
From Bougainville Strait routes join those from the
strait between New Ireland and Bougainville Island
(7.180.1) or (7.180.2) W of either Satawal or Ulul
Islands. 50
7.180.4
If using the Alternative Route (7.176.1) through
Saint George's Channel or Vitiaz Strait, routes join that
from the strait between New Ireland and Bougainville
Island (7.180) close S of Yap. 55
Melbourne, Sydney and Brisbane <-» Ports
North of Shanghai in the East China Sea,
and Japan
7.181 60
Diagrams (7.175), (7.176), (7.180)
Routes from N of Brisbane are:
As at 7.179 or 7.179.1 either through the strait
between New Ireland and Bougainville Island or
through Bougainville Strait as far as West Fayu 65
Island or Ulul Island, thence:
As navigation permits to destination.
For Yokohama and ports farther E routes pass at
least 20 miles E of Mariana Islands and
Ogasawara Gunto, to destination. 70
Islands, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Melbourne, Sydney and Brisbane <-> Ports
North-east of Japan
7.182
Diagrams (7.175), (7.176), (7.180)
Routes from N of Brisbane are as at 7.179 or 7.179.1 as
far as the strait between New Ireland and Bougainville
Island or Bougainville Strait, thence:
W of Ngatik Islands, thence:
Between Senyavin Islands and Oroluk Lagoon,
thence:
To destination.
Torres Strait <-> Solomon Sea
7.183
Diagram (7.175)
From Torres Strait the following routes are
commonly used to enter and cross Solomon Sea from
Bligh Entrance.
East of Rossel Spit. No navigational hazards.
Jomard Entrance. Three miles wide with strong
tidal streams.
China Strait. Although shortest, streams are strong
and navigation intricate.
In this volume, distances for routes via the strait
between New Ireland and Bougainville Island or
 7.183.4

Bougainville Strait are given for the routes passing E of 7.183.4

Rossel Spit. Distances from Torres Strait through Solomon Sea in
7.183.1 miles.
East of Rossel Spit. The route from Bligh Entrance is 40
along the S coast of New Guinea from Port Moresby to Via
its E end, thence: China Jomard E of
Parallel to the S side of Louisiade Archipelago until Strait Entrance Rossel
Rossel Spit can be rounded, thence: Spit
To Saint George's Channel, or the strait between 45
New Ireland and Bougainville Island, or Vitiaz Strait*
Bougainville Strait. (5° 51' S, 147° 30' E) 1020 1130 1400
7.183.2
Jomard Entrance. The route follows that to pass E St George's Channel**
of Rossel Spit until S of Jomard Entrance, thence: 50 (4° 20'S, 152° 32'E) 1010 1120 1270
Through Jomard Entrance, see Admiralty Sailing
Directions, thence: Strait between New Ireland
Close N of Bomatu Point, thence: and Bougainville Island
Through the strait between New Ireland and (Pioneer Channel)t
Bougainville Island, or if using the alternative 55 (4° 4 0 ' S , 153° 45'E) 1020 1140 1230
routes (7.176.1), to Saint George's Channel or
Vitiaz Strait. Bougainville Straitf
Alternatively, the route may be left when N of (6° 30' S, 156° 12' E) 1020 1110 1130
Bonvouloir Islands to pass E of Laughlan Islands to
Bougainville Strait. 60 To connect to Admiralty Distance Tables—Pacific
7.183.3 Ocean:
China Strait. The route from Bligh Entrance is along * To places W of Vitiaz Strait:
the S coast of New Guinea from Port Moresby to the S Subtract 135 miles from distances in the Distance
entrance of China Strait, thence: Tables from Lae to obtain distances from Vitiaz
As in Admiralty Sailing Directions to a position SE $5 Strait.
of Normanby Island, thence: ** To places W of Saint George's Channel:
Joining the routes at 7.183.2, either off Bomatu Add 10 miles to distances in the Distance Tables
Point for the strait between New Ireland and from Rabaul to obtain distances from Saint George's
Bougainville Island or Vitiaz Strait, or SE of Channel.
Laughlan Islands for Bougainville Strait. 70 t Stations of Admiralty Distance Tables.

133
7.184 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

Torres Strait <-> Yap, San Bernadino Strait,
Verde Island Passage, Manila, Balintang
Channel or Hong Kong
7.184
Diagrams (7.176), (7.138)
Routes from Torres Strait join those from Australian
ports as at 7.176-7.178, E of Rossel Spit or in Jomard
Entrance, or if through China Strait (as at 7.183.3) off
Bomatu Point for the strait between New Ireland and
Bougainville Island or the alternative routes (7.176.1)
through Saint George's Channel or Vitiaz and Isumrud
Straits.
T o r r e s Strait <-> G u a m
7.185
Diagram (7.176)
Routes from Torres Strait join those from Australian
ports as at 7.179 or 7.179.1 in the strait between New
Ireland and Bougainville Island, Bougainville Strait or
Saint George's Channel.
T o r r e s Strait <-> S h a n g h a i
7.186
Diagrams (7.176), (7.180)
Routes from Torres Strait join those from Australian
ports as at 7.180, E of Rossel Spit, in Jomard Entrance or
in Bougainville Strait; or if through China Strait
(7.183.3), off Bomatu Point for the strait between New
Ireland and Bougainville Island or the alternative routes
(7.176.1) through Saint George's Channel or Vitiaz and
Isumrud Straits.
10 Torres Strait <-> Ports North of Shanghai in
East China Sea, in Japan or North-east of
Japan
7.187
Diagrams (7.176), (7.180)
15 Routes from Torres Strait join those from Australian
ports as at 7.181 or 7.182 in the strait between New
Ireland and Bougainville Island or in Bougainville Strait
by the routes described at 7.183.
20
Australia <-> Philippine Islands, South and
East China Seas and North West part of the
Pacific Ocean—Distances by Ocean Routes
7.188

Torres Strait Caloundra Head Sydney Port iPhillip

for Brisbane* for Melbourne^

Vitiaz St Between Bougain- St Between St Between St Between

Strait George's New ville George's New George's New George's New
Channel Ireland Strait Channel Ireland Channel Ireland Channel Ireland
and and and and
Bougain- Bougain- Bougain- Bougain-
ville ville ville ville
Island Island Island Island

San Berna'dino Strait

E of Rossel Spit 3210 3260 3330 338On 3440 3820n 3890 435On 4420
Jomard Entrance 2940a 3120a 3240a 341 Oo 3850o 4380o
Verde Island Passage
E of Rossel Spit 3420 3470 3540 359On 3650 4030n 4100 4560n 4630
Jomard Entrance 3150a 3330a 3450a 3620o 4060o 4590o
Manila
E of Rossel Spit 3500 3550 3620 367On 3740 4120n 4180 4650n 4710
Jomard Entrance 3240a 3410a 3530a 3700o 4140o 4670o
Yap
E of Rossel Spit 2480 2460 2510 258Op 2620 3O3Op 3060 3560p 3590
Jomard Entrance 2210a 2320a 2410a 2610q 3O5Oq 3580q
Balintang Channel
E of Rossel Spit 3550 3570 3630 3690r 3750 4140r 4190 4670r 4720
Jomard Entrance 3290a 3430a 3530a 3720s 4160s 4690s
Hong Kong
E of Rossel Spit 4030 4050 4110 4170r 4230 4620r 4670 5150r 5200
Jomard Entrance 3760a 3910a 4000a 4200s 4640s 5170s
Guam
E of Rossel Spit 2740 2460 2550c 2590 257Ot 3030 3O2Ot 3560 355Ot
Jomard Entrance 2320a 2370b 2520d 2610 3060 3590
Shanghai
E of Rossel Spit 4120 4100 4130e 4220p 4240u 4660p 4690u 5190p 5220u
Jomard Entrance 3850a 3960a 4040f 4250q 4690q 522Oq
Nagasaki
E of Rossel Spit 3900 3890g 4020 4000v 4470 4450v 5000 4980v
Jomard Entrance 3760a 38OOh 4050 4090g 4490 4530g 5020 5060g
Yokohama
E of Rossel Spit 3770i 3830k 389Ow 4330w 4860w
Jomard Entrance 368OJ 38101 WOi 4410i 4940i
Tsugaru Kaikyo
E of Rossel Spit 4130 4180 4240k 4680x 5210x
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.192

Torres Strait Caloundra Head Sydney Port Phillip

for Brisbane* for Melbourne^
Vitiaz St Between Bougain- St Between St Between St Between
Strait George's New ville George's New George's New George's New
Channel Ireland Strait Channel Ireland Channel Ireland Channel Ireland
and and and and
Bougain- Bougain- Bougain- Bougain-
ville ville ville ville
Island Island Island Island
Jomard Entrance 4030a 4160m 4320 4760 5300
Petropavlovsk
E of Rossel Spit 4690 4700 4810y 52SOy 5780y
Jomard Entrance 4600a 4680m 4890 5330 5860
* Caloundra Head to Brisbane: 35 miles.
f Port Phillip to Melbourne: 40 miles.

The table gives distances in miles.
Notes
a If via China Strait, subtract 110 miles,
b Passing W of Satawal Island and West Fayu Island; 25
if passing W of Ulul Island, add 30 miles. If via
China Strait and W of Satawal Island and West
Fayu Island, subtract 110 miles,
c Passing W of either Satawal Island and West Fayu
Island or Ulul Island. 30
d Passing W of either Satawal Island and West Fayu
Island or Ulul Island. If via China Strait, subtract
90 miles,
e Passing W of Satawal Island and West Fayu Island;
if passing W of Ulul Island, add 30 miles; if passing 35
S of Yap, add 15 miles.
f Passing W of Satawal Island and West Fayu Island;
if passing W of Ulul Island, add 30 miles; if passing
S of Yap, add 15 miles. If via China Strait, subtract
115 miles. 40
g Passing W of Satawal Island and West Fayu Island;
if passing W of Ulul Island, add 30 miles.
h Passing W of Satawal Island and West Fayu Island;
if passing W of Ulul Island, add 30 miles. If via
China Strait, subtract 110 miles. 45
i Passing W of Ulul Island; if passing W of Satawal
Island and West Fayu Island, add 50 miles.
j Passing W of Ulul Island; if passing W of Satawal
Island and West Fayu Island, add 50 miles. If via
China Strait, subtract 110 miles. 50
k Passing W of Ulul Island; if passing W of Satawal
Island and West Fayu Island, add 80 miles.
1 Passing W of Ulul Island; if passing W of Satawal
Island and West Fayu Island, add 80 miles. If via
China Strait, subtract 90 miles. 55
m If via China Strait, subtract 90 miles.
n If via Vitiaz Strait, subtract 50 miles.
o If via Vitiaz Strait, subtract 170 miles.
p If via Vitiaz Strait, add 20 miles.
q If via Vitiaz Strait, subtract 100 miles. SO
r If via Vitiaz Strait, subtract 20 miles.
s If via Vitiaz Strait, subtract 140 miles.
t Passing W of Satawal Island and West Fayu Island;
if passing W of Ulul Island, add 25 miles. If via
Bougainville Strait and W of either Satawal Island 65
and West Fayu Island or Ulul Island, add 80 miles.
u Passing W of Satawal Island and West Fayu Island,
if passing W of Ulul Island, add 60 miles; if passing
S of Yap, add 15 miles. If via Bougainville Strait
and passing W of Satawal Island and West Fayu 70
Island, add 80 miles; if passing W of Ulul Island,
add 100 miles.
v Passing W of Satawal Island and West Fayu Island;
if passing W of Ulul Island, add 30 miles. If via
Bougainville Strait and W of either Satawal Island
and West Fayu Island or Ulul Island, add 70 miles.
w Passing W of Ulul Island; if passing W of Satawal
Island and West Fayu Island, add 50 miles. If via
Bougainville Strait and W of Ulul Island, add 50
miles; if passing W of Satawal Island and West
Fayu Island, add 120 miles.
x If via Bougainville Strait, add 40 miles.
y If via Bougainville Strait, subtract 10 miles.
New Zealand <-> Philippine Islands, South
and East China Seas and North-west part of
the Pacific Ocean
General information
7.190
From New Zealand routes are either through Torres
Strait and Eastern Archipelago, or by the Ocean Routes
through Coral and Solomon Seas and Caroline Islands.
For general considerations affecting such passages,
see 7.161.
For distances by these routes, see 7.193.
Routes through Eastern Archipelago
7.191
Diagrams (7.79), (7.163)
From New Zealand routes are:
Through Inner Route (7.79 or 7.80) to Torres
Strait, thence:
Through Eastern Archipelago by the Eastern
Route (7.173-7.173.2 and 7.166 or 7.167),
thence:
To destination as navigation permits.
For Shanghai, as at 7.199.
For Nagasaki, E of T'ai-wan, thence as at 7.119.
For Yokohama, as at 7.197.
For Singapore from Torres Strait, as at 7.130.
By Ocean Routes
7.192
Diagrams (7.175), (7.176), (7.180)
Routes from New Zealand are:
Through 21°00'S, 157° 30'E, avoiding Kelso
Bank and Bellona Reefs, thence:
Joining the routes from Australian ports
(7.175-7.182) midway between Rossel Spit and

135
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS
Pocklington Reef, or in Jomard Entrance, taking
care to avoid Mellish Reef, or 30 miles E of
Pocklington Reef for Bougainville Strait.
7.192.1
For ports E of Japan, shorter routes are through the
passage W of Guadalcanal Island and through
Indispensable Strait, or through the passage E of both
Auckland via
7.193
Guadalcanal and Malaita Islands: these passages appear
deep and safe.
New Zealand <-» Philippine Islands, South
and East China Seas and North-west part of
the Pacific Ocean—Distances through
Eastern Archipelago and by Ocean Routes
7.193
Wellington via

Solomon Sea Eastern Solomon Sea Eastern

Archipelago Archipelago

St George's Between New St George's Between New

Channel Ireland and Channel Ireland and
Bougainville Bougainville
Island Island

San Bernadino Strait

E of Rossel Spit 4360a 4430 4550a 4610
Jomard Entrance 4430b 4610b
Verde Island Passage
E of Rossel Spit 4570a 4640 4660n 4760a 4820 4780n
Jomard Entrance 4630b 4820b
Manila
E of Rossel Spit 4660a 4720 4750n 4840a 4910 4870n
Jomard Entrance 4720b 4910b
Yap
E of Rossel Spit 3560c 3610 3750c 3790
Jomard Entrance 363Od 381Od
Balintang Channel
E of Rossel Spit 4860e 4730 4860e 4920
Jomard Entrance 4740f 4930f
Hong Kong
E of Rossel Spit 5160e 5210 5290n 534Oe 5400 541 On
Jomard Entrance 5220f 5410f
Guam
E of Rossel Spit 3570 356Og 3760 3740g
Jomard Entrance 3630 3820
Shanghai
E of Rossel Spit 5200c 523Oh 5810o 5390c 5420h 5930o
Jomard Entrance 5270d 5450d
Nagasaki
E of Rossel Spit 5010 4990i 5190 5170i
Jomard Entrance 5070 5110j 5250 5290j
Yokohama
E of Rossel Spit 4870k 5060k
Jomard Entrance 49901 51701
Tsugaru Kaikyo
E of Rossel Spit 5220m 5410m
Jomard Entrance 5300 5490

The table gives distances in miles.
Distances through Eastern Archipelago are by:
Inner Route (7.79 or 7.80) to Torres Strait, thence:
Main Route (7.173) to Selat Manipa, thence:
Eastern Route (7.166) to South China Sea.
Distances through Solomon Sea are by appropriate
routes passing E of Rossel Spit or through Jomard
Entrance, thence through the strait between New
Ireland and Bougainville Island or the alternative routes
(7.176.1) through Saint George's Channel or Vitiaz and
Isumrud Straits. Distances are also given by routes
through Bougainville Strait, where applicable.
Notes
a If via Vitiaz Strait, subtract 50 miles.
b If via Vitiaz Strait, subtract 170 miles.
c If via Vitiaz Strait, add 20 miles.
55 d If via Vitiaz Strait, subtract 100 miles.
e If via Vitiaz Strait, subtract 20 miles.
f If via Vitiaz Strait, subtract 140 miles.
g Passing W of Satawal Island and West Fayu Island;
if passing W of Ulul Island, add 25 miles. If via
SO Bougainville Strait and W of either Satawal Island
and West Fayu Island or Ulul Island, add 60 miles.
h Passing W of Satawal Island and West Fayu Island;
if passing W of Ulul Island, add 30 miles; if passing
S of Yap, add 15 miles. If via Bougainville Strait
65 and passing W of Satawal Island and West Fayu
Island, add 70 miles; if passing W of Ulul Island,
add 90 miles.
Passing W of Satawal Island and West Fayu Island;
if passing W of Ulul Island, add 30 miles. If via
70 Bougainville Strait and W of either Satawal Island

137
7.195 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

and West Fayu Island or Ulul Island, add 50 miles.
Passing W of Satawal Island and West Fayu Island;
if passing W of Ulul Island, add 30 miles.
Passing W of Ulul Island; if passing W of Satawal
Island and West Fayu Island, add SO miles. If via
Bougainville Strait and W of Ulul Island, add 30
miles; if passing W of Satawal Island and West
Fayu Island, add 100 miles.
Passing W of Ulul Island; if passing W of Satawal
Island and West Fayu Island, add 50 miles.
m If via Bougainville Strait, add 20 miles.
n If via Alternative Route (7.173.1) from Torres
Strait, add 20 miles.
o Continuing from South China Sea, E or W of T'ai-
5 wan, through Xiaoban Men to Shanghai. If
through Verde Island Passage and W of T'ai-wan,
add 25 miles. If by Alternative Route (7.173.1)
from Torres Strait to Selat Jailolo, thence E of
Philippine Islands and T'ai-wan (7.199.1), subtract
10 180 miles.

ROUTES ON WESTERN SIDE OF PACIFIC OCEAN

Manila, Verde Island Passage and Cape from Hong Kong they keep as close as prudent, see
Calavite (Mindoro Strait) «-» Shanghai Admiralty Sailing Directions, to the coast of China
7.195 during the North-east Monsoon until abreast Dongyin
Diagram (7.195) 20 Dao.
Routes are seasonal, and from Manila, Verde Island Thence:
Passage and Cape Calavite are as follows: For Nagasaki the route is direct.
South-west Monsoon (May-Sept). E of T'ai-wan, 7.198.1
thence: For Yokohama the route is either through Osumi
15-20 miles E of P'eng-chia Yii, thence: 25 Kaikyo or between Amami Gunto and Tokara
Through Xiaoban Men, see Admiralty Sailing Gunt5 in about 29° 20' N, Distances differ little
Directions, to Shanghai. by either route, and the Japan Current sets
The influence of the NE-going Japan Current will be strongly NE-ward on both.
felt during the greater part of this passage. S-bound from Yokohama the route keeps as close to
7.196 30 the S coast of Japan as safety permits to avoid the
North-east Monsoon (Dec-March). W of T'ai-wan, strength of the Japan Current, and thence
either through P'eng-hu Kang-tao or W of P'eng-hu through Osumi Kaikyo and Taiwan Strait.
Ch'un-tao, thence: With E winds there is often a strong indraught into
Through Xiaoban Men to Shanghai. the deep bays, especially between 0 Shima and
For caution on approaching Taiwan Banks, see 35 Mikomoto Shima. During typhoon months, the
Admiralty Sailing Directions. currents in this locality are at times very
Distances from Shanghai in miles. irregular.
7.198.2
Verde Island For Tsugaru Kaikyd the route is through Korea
Manila Passage C Calavite 40 Strait, either side of Tsushima.
E of T'ai-wan 1130 1170 1150 Distances from Hong Kong:
W of T'ai-wan 1140 1170 1160 Nagasaki 1070 miles;
Yokohama 1590 miles;
Manila, Verde Island Passage and Cape Tsugaru Kaikyo 1820 miles.
Calavite (Mindoro Strait) «-> Yokohama 45
7.197 S h a n g h a i <-> T o r r e s Strait
Diagram (7.195) 7.199
North-bound. From Manila, Verde Island Passage Diagrams (7.195), (7.163)
and Cape Calavite, the routes taking full advantage of South-bound. From Shanghai the route is:
the Japan Current are: 50 Through Taiwan Strait as at 7.196,.thence:
E of T'ai-wan to 26° 00' N, 123° 00' E, thence: Through Mindoro Strait to join the Eastern Route
Through Nansei Shoto, passing between Amami (7.166), thence:
Gunto and Tokara Gunt5, thence: Either to Selat Manipa, thence as at 7.173 or
To Yokohama approaches. 7.173.1, or to Obimayor, thence as at 7.173.2, to
7.197.1 55 Torres Strait.
South-bound, or alternatively N-bound though less This route avoids the full strength of the Japan
favourable as regards current, the route is by rhumb line Current.
from Yokohama approaches to Balintang Channel, 7.199.1
thence coastwise to destination. North-bound. From Torres Strait the route is:
Distances to Yokohama in miles. 60 Either as at 7.173 or 7.173.1 to Selat Manipa and
thence to Selat Jailolo,
Verde Island Or direct to Selat Jailolo, as at 7.173.2, thence:
Manila Passage C Calavite As navigation permits to Shanghai.
N-bound 1830 1860 1850 Distances: S-bound 3270 miles;
S-boun 1760 1790 1780 65 N-bound 3070 miles.

H o n g K o n g <-> J a p a n S h a n g h a i «-+ Y o k o h a m a
7.198 7.200
Diagram (7.195) Diagram (7.195)
Routes are through Taiwan Strait. When N-bound 70 Routes are through Osumi Kaikyo or Seto Naikai.
 7.205

Distances: Through Osumi Kaikyo 1030 miles. 20 miles SW of Sorol Atoll, thence:
Through Seto Naikai: via Bungo Suido To Yap.
1080 miles; via Kii Suido 1120 miles. 7.203.3
For Verde Island Passage or Manila, the route
Yokohama and Tsugaru 40 from close S of Yap is to San Bernadino Strait (7.124.3),
Kaikyo *-* Petropavlovsk thence as described in Admiralty Sailing Directions to
7.201 Verde Island Passage, and thence to Manila.
Diagram (7.180) 7.203.4
Routes are as direct as navigation permits. For Hong Kong the route from close S of Yap is
Pack ice may be found off the SE coast of Hokkaido 45 through Balintang Channel (7.145), thence to Hong
during February, March and April. Kong.
The effect of the SW-going Kamchatka Current may Distances in miles:
possibly be reduced by keeping 60 miles or more off Apia Suva
Kuril'skiye Ostrova. Yap 3320 2970
Distances: Yokohama 1420 miles. 50 Verde Island Passage 4390 4040
Tsugaru Kaikyo 1060 miles. Manila 4480 4130
Hong Kong 4920 4570
Apia and Suva <-» Yap, Verde Island
Passage, Manila or Hong Kong Yokohama <-> Guam or Yap
7.203 55 7.204
Diagrams (7.203), (7.122), (7.138) Diagram (7.195)
All routes pass close S of Yap. The routes are by rhumb line between Yokohama
7.203.1 approaches and Guam and Yap.
From Apia the route is: The route for Guam passes through Nanpo Shoto
Through 10° 00'S, 180° 00'E, thence: 60 between Ogasawara Gunt5 and Kazan Retto. For
Across the equator in 154° 00' E, thence: caution on volcanic activity in Nanpo Shoto and NW of
20 miles SW of Sorol Atoll, thence: Mariana Islands, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
To Yap. Distances: Guam 1350 miles; Yap 1570 miles.
7.203.2
From Suva the route is: 65 Apia«-+ Yokohama
Through Kadavu Passage, thence: 7.205
S of Vanikolo, thence: Diagram (7.205)
Between Santa Cruz Islands and Solomon Islands, The great circle track between the two ports passes
thence: through Marshall Islands and Gilbert Islands. This part
N of Tasman Islands, thence: 70 of it, though navigable, is normally best avoided owing
139
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.222

to incompleteness of the surveys and uncertainty of the
currents.
From Yokohama approaches, the preferable route
therefore is:
Great circle to 10° 3 0 ' N , 161° 30'E, between
Enewetok and Ujelang Atolls, thence:
Rhumb line to the equator in 172° E, passing W of
Marshall Islands and Gilbert Group, thence:
Rhumb line to Apia, passing between Gilbert
Group and Tuvalu.
Distances: Direct great circle 4050 miles.
Preferable route 4080 miles.
Through 3° 0 0 ' S , 175° 00'E, between Gilbert
Group and Tuvalu, thence:
N of Kusaie Island and the other Caroline Islands
to Guam.
5 7.207.1
Diagram (7.195)
For Shanghai, the route continues from Guam:
Through 25° 30' N, 126° 30' E, to pass through
Nansei Shoto between Okinawa Gunto and
10 Sakishima Gunto, thence:
Through Xiaoban Men, see Admiralty Sailing
Directions, thence to Shanghai.
Distances: Guam 3090 miles; Shanghai 4830 miles.

15 Suva *-* Guam or Shanghai

Suva <-> Yokohama 7.208
7.206 Diagrams (7.203), (7.122)
Diagram (7.205) The route from Suva is:
The route is by direct great circle between Kadavu Through Kadavu Passage, thence:
Passage and Yokohama approaches, passing between 20 S of Vanikolo, thence:
Kusaie Island and Pingelap Atoll. Between Santa Cruz Islands and Solomon Islands,
Distance: 39S0 miles. thence:
20 miles W of Ulul Island, thence:
To Guam.
Apia «-> Guam or Shanghai 25 Diagram (7.195)
7.207 For Shanghai, the route continues from Guam as at
Diagrams (7.203), (7.122) 7.207.1.
The route from Apia is: Distances: Guam 2820 miles; Shanghai 4560 miles.

ROUTES ON EASTERN SIDE OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN

Passages along Pacific coasts of North and Current and the coast N of Point Conception, or
Central America sometimes farther S.
7.220 For distances see 7.226.
On many passages N of Juan de Fuca Strait the choice
may be made between an ocean route and a passage 40 Dutch Harbour <-> North and Central
inshore of the islands fringing the coast. The inshore America
passages are described in Admiralty Sailing Directions. 7.221
They afford smooth water, suitable anchorages at Diagrams (7.221), (7.222)
moderate distances apart, and protection against the From Dutch Harbour routes are as follows.
oceanic weather. Navigation is, however,' intricate in 45 For San Diego and destinations farther North, as
many parts and it should be borne in mind continually direct by great circle as navigation permits.
that many of the minor passages may have only been For destinations South of San Diego, by great
partially examined. circle to join the US Coastal Route (7.220.1) in
Navigation along the Pacific coast of the United States 28°00'N, 116°00'W.
requires due caution: courses between salient points are, 50 Distances: Dixon Entrance 1210 miles;
in general, long, and must be traversed during frequent Juan de Fuca Strait 1600 miles;
periods of thick weather, with the vessel subject to the San Francisco 2060 miles;
action of currents, the rate and direction of which are San Diego 2470 miles;
uncertain. Panama 5270 miles.
From a study of investigations into the causes of 55
strandings on this coast, it was found that many of the
strandings were due to lack of ordinary precautions San Francisco and San Diego <-> Callao or
essential to safe navigation, eg sounding, knowledge of Iquique
the errors of the compass, etc. 7.222
7.220.1 60 Diagrams (7.221), (7.222)
Diagrams (7.221), (7.222) From San Francisco and San Diego routes are:
The United States Coastal Route, the US 'Coastal Route (7.220.1) to 28° 0 0 ' N ,
recommended track from Juan de Fuca Strait to 116° 00'W, thence:
Panama, is described in Admiralty Sailing Directions. Rhumb line to 26° 40' N, 115° 00' W, thence:
This inshore route is as direct as possible and enables 65 Rhumb line to Callao, passing E of Archipielago de
best use to be made of navigational aids and soundings, Colon.
and avoids the heavy seas in the offing. For Iquique, the route follows that for Callao as far
Offshore, the California Current flows SE, but from as the equator, and thence as navigation permits
November to January or February the Davidson to Iquique.
Current flows N, close inshore between the California 70 For distances, see 7.226.

141
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

(7.221) ROUTES—Dutch Harbour « > North America, and routes off the coast of North America.
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS
San Francisco and San Diego «-»Valparaiso
7.223
Diagrams (7.221), (7.222)
From San Francisco and San Diego routes are:
US Coastal Route (7.220.1) to 28° 00'N,
116° 00'W, thence:
Rhumb line to 26° 40' N, 115° 00' W, thence:
Rhumb line to 7° 00' S, 90° 00' W, thence:
Great circle to Valparaiso.
For distances see 7 226.
San Francisco <->• Estrecho de Magallanes
7.224
Diagrams (7 221), (7.222)
From San Francisco the route is:
20 miles W of Isla de Guadalupe, thence:
7.225
55 Great circle to the equator in 106° 30' W, thence:
Great circle to Estrecho de Magallanes (5 miles
NNW of Cabo Pilar).
The track passes through Islas Revilla Gigedo
between Roca Partida and Isla Clarion: it also passes 70
60 miles W of lie Clipperton, and about 45 miles W of
Germaine Bank.
For distances, see 7.226.
Panama *-> Pacific coast of South America
65 7.225
Diagram (7.222)
* n a ^ c a s e s routes are as direct as navigation permits.
Off this coast, the Peru Current flows predominantly
N, particularly near the land.
70 Fog is most frequent off the coast of Peru, and least
143
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.234

frequent in the parts N of 6° S, and except in April and Distances along Eastern shore of the
May, between 15° S and 30° S. The highest and lowest Pacific Ocean
frequencies of fog, over the region as a whole, occur in 7.226
April and October respectively. Distances in miles.
For distances, see 7.226.

Juan de
Fuca Strait

680 San Francisco

1110 435 San Diego

3920 3230 2840 Panama
4650 3970 3570 1340 Callao
5280 4600 4210 . 1980 650 Iquique
5800 5120 4720 2600 1800 780 Valparaiso
Estrecho de
6640 5970 5590 3730 2460 2000 124
Magallanes*
* 5 miles NNW of Cabo Pilar.

ROUTES TO AND FROM HONOLULU

Honolulu <-> Sydney or Brisbane N of Ulawa Island, thence:

7.231 Between Gilbert Group and Tuvalu, thence:
Diagrams (7.203), (7.231) As at 7.231 to Honolulu.
From Sydney the route is: Distance: 4270 miles.
Coastwise to Sugarloaf Point, thence: 35 7.232.3
30 miles E of Cato Island, thence: Or, S of Indispensable Reefs, thence:
30 miles NW of Bampton Reefs, thence: S of Vanikolo, thence:
Through 10°00'S, 170° 0 0 ' E , passing midway Between Gilbert Group and Tuvalu, thence:
between Torres Island and Vanikolo thence: As at 7.231 to Honolulu.
Across the equator in 178° 50' W, passing between 40 Distance: 4430 miles.
Gilbert Group and Tuvalu, thence:
Great circle to Honolulu.
Distance: 4490 miles. Honolulu <-> New Zealand
7.231.1 7.233
From Brisbane the route is: 45 Diagrams (7.203), (7.231)
Through 21° 30'S, 156°O5'E, passing between From Auckland the route is:
Cato Island and Wreck Reefs, thence: Through 18° 30' S, 174° 45' W, thence:
Joining the above route 30 miles NW of Bampton 20 miles W of Curacoa Reef, thence:
Reefs. 40 miles NW of Savai'i, thence:
Distance: Caloundra Head 4090 miles. 50 Rhumb line to 10° 3 0 ' S , 171° 00'W, between
(Brisbane to Caloundra Head 35 miles). Tokelau and Swains Island, thence:
To Honolulu.
Honolulu <-> Torres Strait Distance: 3800 miles.
7.232 7.233.1
Diagrams (7.203), (7.231) 55 From Wellington and South Island ports routes are:
From Torres Strait routes are: E of North Island, thence:
7.232.1 Through 31° 20' S, 179° 30' W, thence:
East of Rossel Spit, or through Jomard Entrance or Joining the route from Auckland in 22° 50' S,
China Strait (7.183), and through Solomon Sea to 177° 00' W, passing W of Kermadec Islands,
Bougainville Strait, thence: 60 Pelorus Reef and other charted dangers.
NW of Tasman Islands, thence: For dangers between New Zealand and Tonga
Between Marshall Islands and Gilbert Group, Islands, see 7.86.
thence: Distance: 4120 miles.
To Honolulu.
Distance: 4310 miles (E of Rossel Spit; if via Jomard 65
Entrance or China Strait, see 7.183.4). Honolulu <~> Apia
7.232.2 7.234
Or, passing 35 miles S of Rossel Spit, thence: Diagrams (7.203), (7.231)
Between Guadalcanal and San Cristobal Islands, The route is by great circle.
thence: 70 Distance: 2250 miles.

145
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.243

Honolulu <-> Suva By route recommended in Admiralty Sailing

7.235 Directions to San Bernadino Strait, thence:
Diagrams (7.203), (7.231) Great circle to Honolulu.
From Suva the route is through Nanuku Passage, Distances: 6000 miles;
thence: 5 6050 miles if calling Guam.
Either by great circle to Honolulu, which entails 7.239.3
passage through the islands and dangers NE of Fiji Or, via Palawan Passage (7.126.1 or 7.126.2) to
Islands, and through Phoenix Group which are all low Balabac Strait, thence through Sulu Sea to Surigao
and not easily sighted. Strait (7.123.1), thence great circle to Honolulu.
7.235.1 10 Distance: 5910 miles.
Or, passing 40 miles NW of Savai'i, thence as at 7.233,
passing clear E of the above dangers. Honolulu <— Verde Island Passage or
Distances: Great circle 2760 miles; NW of Savai'i Manila
2840 miles. 7.240
15 Diagrams (7.111), (7.237)
Honolulu <-» Nuku'alofa From Manila the route is through Verde Island
7.236 Passage to San Bernadino Strait by the route
Diagrams (7.203), (7.231) recommended in Admiralty Sailing Directions, thence
From Nuku'alofa the route is as navigation permits to by great circle to Honolulu as at 7.239.2.
pass 20 miles W of Curacoa Reef thence as at 7.233. 20 Distances: Verde Island Passage 4690;
Distance: 2730 miles. Manila 4780 miles.

Honolulu «-> G u a m or Yap Honolulu <-> H o n g Kong

7.237 7.241
Diagram (7.237) 25 Diagrams (7.138), (7.237)
In each case the route is by great circle. In either direction, the route from Hong Kong is:
For Guam the track passes about 30 miles S of Wake Through 21°25'N, 121°00'E, in Bashi Channel,
Islet which, although only 6 m high, is a good radar thence:
target. Great circle to 26° 00' N, 180° 00' , thence:
For Yap, the great circle track requires a diversion to 30 Rhumb line to Honolulu, keeping S of Hawaiian
avoid Ulithi Atoll. Islands.
Distances: Guam 3320 miles; Yap 3750 miles. For areas to be avoided near Hawaiian Islands, see
7.49.
Honolulu <-> Papeete Distance: 4880 miles.
7.238 35 7.241.1
Diagrams (7.231), (7.203) East-bound, an alternative route from Hong Kong is:
The direct route passes between Caroline Island and Through Taiwan Strait, thence:
Vostok Island, and close to the position of the breakers Round the N end of T'ai-wan, thence:
reported in 1926 in 5° 48' S, 152° 16' W, and about 30 Rhumb line to 25° 50' N, 127° 40' E, thence:
miles SW of Filippo Reef. 40 Through 28° 00' N, 142° 00' E, N of Mukoshima
Distance: 2370 miles. Retto, thence:
Great circle to Honolulu, passing N of the area of
volcanic activity in 28° 14'N, 161° 44' E (see
Honolulu <-* Singapore Admiralty Sailing Directions), and S of
7.239 45 Hawaiian Islands.
Diagrams (7.111), (7.237) Distance: 4870 miles.
From Singapore the route is:
W of Pulau-pulau Anambas, thence: Honolulu <->• Shanghai
NW of Prince Consort Bank, thence: 7.242
Through Babuyan Channel, thence: 50 Diagram (7.237)
Great circle to Honolulu. From Shanghai the route is:
Distance: 6010 miles. As navigation permits, see Admiralty Sailing
7.239.1 Directions, to pass through Osumi Kaikyo,
From Honolulu the route is: thence:
Rhumb line to 26° 00' N, 180° 00' , thence: 55 To 30° 10' N, 140° 00' E, between Tori Shima and
Great circle to either Babuyan Channel or Sofu Gan, thence:
Balintang Channel, thence: Great circle to Midway Islands, thence:
As at 7.239, in reverse, to Singapore. As navigation permits to Honolulu, passing N of
The rhumb line passes close N of the breakers Haiwaiian Islands.
reported in 25° 17' N, 178° 03' W, and the great circle 60 For areas to be avoided near Hawaiian Islands, see
passes close N of a shoal reported in 26° 34' N, 7.49.
162° 19'E. Distance: 4350 miles.
Distance: 6010 miles via Babuyan Channel.
7.239.2 Honolulu <-» Yokohama
In either direction, routes from Singapore are 65 7.243
through South China Sea as at 7.121, passing W of Diagram (7.237)
Pulau-pulau Anambas, thence: Good weather is usually experienced on the rhumb
NW of Prince Consort Bank, thence: line route which passes 20 miles S of Hawaiian Islands,
30 miles NW of North Danger Reef, thence: but for areas to be avoided near Hawaiian Islands, see
Through Verde Island Passage, thence: 70 7.49.

147
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.253

7.243.1 Distances: Juan de Fuca Strait 2290 miles;

The great circle route between Kauai Channel and the San Francisco 2080 miles;
landfall off Nojima Saki passes 50 miles N of Midway San Diego 2270 miles.
Islands, but close to reported dangers in approximately
32° 15'N, 172° 20'E. 5 Honolulu «-» Panama
Distances: Rhumb line 3440 miles; 7.248
Great circle 3400 miles. Diagram (7.231)
In either direction, the route is by great circle between
Honolulu <-> Tsugaru Kaikyo Kaiwi Channel and landfall off Isla Coiba, avoiding
7.244 10 Guardian Bank.
Diagram (7.237) 7.248.1
The route is by great circle between Kauai Channel E-bound, an alternative route is as navigation permits
and the E approach to Tsugaru Kaikyo, but for areas to to join the Central Route (7.300.1) in 6° 0 5 ' N ,
be avoided near Hawaiian Islands, see 7.49. 134° 00' W, thence to Panama.
Distance: 3300 miles. 15 Distances: Great circle 4690 miles;
Central Route 5030 miles.
Honolulu «-> Dutch Harbor
7.245 Honolulu <-» South America
Diagram (7.237) 7.249
The route is by great circle between Kauai Channel 20 Diagram (7.231)
and Unimak Pass, thence as navigation permits. Routes are by great circle, departure being taken from
Distance: 2100 miles. the NE side of Hawaiian Islands for destinations N of
about 35° S.
Honolulu <-> Prince Rupert The great circle track for a vessel intending to round
7.246 25 Cabo de Homos runs to 55° 00' S, 80° 00' W, passing
Diagram (7.237) about 40 miles E of lies Marquises and Henderson
The route is by great circle between Kaiwi Channel Island, thence by rhumb line to round Cabo de Hornos.
and Dixon Entrance, thence as navigation permits to A diversion must be made from the great circle track
Prince Rupert. to Iquique to avoid the position (6° 40' S, 99° 40' W) in
Distance: 2400 miles. 30 which breakers were reported in 1906.
Distances:
Honolulu <-> Juan de Fuca Strait, San Callao 5160 miles;
Francisco or San Diego Iquique 5720 miles;
7.247 Valparaiso 5920 miles;
Diagram (7.237) 35 Estrecho de Magallanes (5' NNW of Cabo Pilar)
Routes are by great circle between Kaiwi Channel and 6170 miles;
destination. Cabo de Hornos (5 miles S of) 6470 miles.

ROUTES TO AND FROM PAPEETE

Papeete <-> Guam 20 miles SW of Sorol Atoll, thence to Yap;

7.250 45 Or, close S of Yap, thence:
Diagrams (7.250), (7.251) Either through San Bernadino Strait, thence as in
From Papeete the route is: Admiralty Sailing Directions to either Verde
S of the W islands of lies de la Societe and Island Passage or Manila.
Suwarrow thence: Or, through Balintang Channel (7.145) for Hong
Between Tokelau and Swains Island, thence: 50 Kong.
S of Tamana Island and Arorae Island of the Distances in miles:
Gilbert Group, thence: Papeete Yap
Across the equator in 171° 30' E, thence: Yap 4580 —
N of Kusaie and the other Caroline Islands, thence Verde Island Passage 5640 1060
to Guam. 55 Manila 5730 1150
Landfall should not be attempted on Manuae at night Hong Kong 6180 1600
or in thick weather.
Distance: 4360 miles. Papeete <-> Shanghai
7.252
Papeete «-> Yap, Verde Island Passage, 60 Diagrams (7.250), (7.251), (7.195)
Manila or Hong Kong From Papeete the route is as at 7.250 to Guam, thence
7.251 as at 7.207.1 to Shanghai.
Diagrams (7.250), (7.251) Distance: 6100 miles.
From Papeete the routes are:
S of the W islands of Ties de la Societe, thence: 65 Papeete <-> Yokohama
Rhumb line to 10°00'S, 180° 0 0 ' , which passes 7.253
close N of Robbie Bank, thence: Diagrams (7.250), (7.251)
Rhumb line to the equator in 154° 00' E, passing From Yokohama the route is by great circle which
between Nukulaelae Atoll and Kosciusko Bank, passes 30 miles NE of Wake Islet, close to a number of
thence: 70 reefs reported to lie about 300 miles NW of that islet,

149
7.254 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

i i i i i i i i i i f i i M I i i i i i i i i i i i i i ITJ i i i i i i i i i | M i i i n i i | i i i i i i i i i j i i i i t i i 11 | i i i i i i i i | i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i
120° ' ' 140° ' Longitude East from Greenwich 180° Longitude West from Greenwich 1 140° ' '

(7.251) ROUTES—Papeete North Pacific Ocean.

and between Tongareva and Rakahanga, at a distance of 35 Papeete <-> Callao

about 80 miles from the former. 7.256
Distance: 5130 miles. Diagrams (7.250), (7.255)
From Papeete routes are:
Papeete *-* Canada, United States and 7.256.1
Mexico between Prince Rupert and Gulf of 40 Either W and N of Archipel des Tuamotu to a position
California N of lies du Desappointement, thence great circle to
7.254 Callao.
Diagrams (7.250), (7.251), (7.255) 7.256.2
From Papeete routes are by great circle from Or, through Archipel des Tuamotu to a position S of
14° 45' S, 148° 55' W, NW of Mataiva, passing NW of 45 Ahunui, thence great circle to Callao.
lies Marquises. Distances:
Prince Rupert can be approached through either N and W of Archipel des Tuamotu 4370 miles;
Dixon Entrance or Hecate Strait. Through Archipel des Tuamotu 4210 miles.
Distances:
Prince Rupert via Dixon Entrance 4500 miles 50
Juan de Fuca Strait 4170 miles; Papeete«-+ Iquique
San Francisco 3650 miles; 7.257
San Diego 3500 miles. From Papeete routes are:
7.257.1
Papeete«-»Panama 55 Either S of Archipel des Tuamotu to Pitcairn Island,
7.255 thence great circle passing close N of Isla Sala y Gomez
Diagrams (7.250), (7.255) to Iquique.
From Papeete the route is W and N of Archipel des 7.257.2
Tuamotu, thence by great circle to Gulf of Panama. Or, great circle through Archipel des Tuamotu, S of
7.255.1 «0 Ahunui and N of Tureia and Marutea Sud, to Iquique.
An alternative route is from Papeete through Passe de Distances: S of archipelago 4510 miles;
Fakarava, thence by great circle to Gulf of Panama. But Through archipelago 4480 miles.
the pass is not lighted and good radar is essential: see
Admiralty Sailing Directions.
West-bound from Gulf of Panama the route is by 65 Papeete <-> Valparaiso
great circle to a landfall on Tepoto, one of lies du 7.258
Desappointement, before approaching the pass. Diagrams (7.250), (7.255)
Distances: From Papeete the route is:
N and W of Archipel des Tuamotu 4610 miles; S of Hereheretue Atoll and Groupe d'lles du Due
Via Passe de Fakarava 4500 miles. 70 de Gloucester, thence:
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.260

Great circle to Valparaiso, passing close S of

Archipielago de Juan Fernandez. Papeete <-» Cabo de Hornos
Distance: 4260 miles. 7.260
Diagrams (7.250), (7.255)
Papeete «-> Estrecho de Magallanes 65 From Papeete the route is by great circle to 55° 00' S,
7.259 80" 00' W on the Southern Route (7.270), passing close
Diagrams (7.250), (7.255) N of the submarine volcano (29° 00'S, 140° 15'W)
The route is by great circle. reported in 1981, thence rhumb line to Cabo de
Distance: 4040 miles. (Papeete to 5 miles NNW of Hornos.
Cabo Pilar) 70 Distances: 4300 miles.
•i r i
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.273
SOUTH PACIFIC TRANS-OCEAN ROUTES

Southern Routes across Pacific Ocean From Join in

7.270 Hobart or Snares Islands 48° 30' S, 165° 00' W
Diagram (7.270) Cook Strait 49°30'S, 150-00'W
East-bound. The most S route usually adopted, Auckland 50°00'S, 140° 0 0 ' W
referred to as the Southern Route, passes through the
following positions: For Leave in
48°30'S, 165°00'W 10 Callao 48°30'S, 165°00'W
50° 00' S, 140° 00' W Iquique 49°30'S, 150°00'W
51°3O'S, 120° 0 0 ' W Valparaiso 50°00'S, 140° 00'W
52°45'S, 100° 0 0 ' W Estrecho de Magallanes 52°45'S, 100° 00'W
55°OO'S, 80°00'W Cabo de Homos 55°OO'S, 80°00'W
15
When the great circle between the terminal positions From Sydney or Brisbane for Callao and destinations
passes S of this route, it is best to steer, by great circle if farther S, the route is through Cook Strait. Alternatively
possible, to join the route at a convenient position. from Sydney for Valparaiso and ports farther S, the
Similarly, it is best to leave the route at a position route S of New Zealand is practicable and only slightly
enabling the destination to be made, by great circle if 20 longer. i
possible, without passing S of the above route. 7.270.1
Icebergs may be encountered on the Southern Route Diagram (7.275)
in all seasons, see 7.45. West-bound. Routes across the South Pacific Ocean
Passages for which the Southern Route or part of it, lie far N of the Southern Route, following the parallel of
are appropriate can best be seen from Chart 5098, the 25 30° S for various distances between the meridians of
gnomonic chart for the South Pacific and Southern 120° W a n d 150° W.
Oceans. 7.270.2
The following are the best joining and leaving East-bound. Distances in miles by the above routes
positions: (except where indicated by notes):

Callao Iquique Valparaiso Estrecho de Cabo de

Magallanes% Hornos

Hobart 6780 6700 6120 5430 5670

Port Phillip (a) 7040 6960 6370 5680 5930
Sydney** 6940* 6880 6290 5600 5850
Sydney*** — — 6330 5640 5880
Caloundra Head (ft) 7110 7050 6460 5770 6020
Wellington 5720* 5660 5070 4380 4630
Auckland 5840f 582Of 5250 4560 4810

t Direct. ***Via Snares Islands.

% 5 miles NNW of Cabo Pilar. (a) Melbourne to Port Phillip: 40 miles.
* Direct after passing N of Chatham Islands. (b) Brisbane to Caloundra Head: 35 miles. Routes via Cook Strait.
** Via Cook Strait.

Torres Strait -> South America 7.271.4

7.271 Distances: Cabo de Hornos 7360 miles;
Diagrams (7.271), (7.270) fEstrecho de Magallanes 7110 miles;
Routes are through Bligh Entrance, thence through Valparaiso 7800 miles;
28° 30' S, 170° 00' E, passing S of Bellona Reefs and the 55 Iquique 8340 miles;
submarine volcano (27° 4 5 ' S , 169° 09'E), thence as Callao 8300 miles.
follows. t5 miles NNW of Cabo Pilar.
7.271.1
Cabo de Hornos or Estrecho de Magallanes. H o b a r t -> P a n a m a
Great circle to join the Southern Route (7.270) in $0 7.272
50° 00' S, 140° 00' W. Diagrams (7.271), (7.270)
7.271.2 The route is by great circle to 47° 50' S, 167° 50' E,
Valparaiso or Iquique. Great circle to destination: ENE of Snares Islands, thence great circle to Gulf of
that to Iquique passing close S of Isla San Ambrosio. Panama.
7.271.3. 65 Distance: 7640 miles.
Callao. Great circle to 38° 00' S, 150° 00' W, thence
great circle to Callao. Wellington -» Panama
Maria Theresa Reef (36° 5 0 ' S , 136° 39'W), the 7.273
existence of which is doubtful, lies close N of the Diagrams (7.271), (7.270)
track. 70 Routes are by great circle to:

155
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.Z78.J

7.273.1 Wellington
Either Gulf of Panama, passing S of Archipielago de or Auckland Sydney
Colon. Cabo de Homos 5670 6870
Distance: 6490 miles. JEstrecho de Magallanes 5410 6610
7.273.2 5 Valparaiso 5740 6940
Or, the equator in 83° 00' W, thence as navigation Iquique 6090 7290
permits to Panama, passing E of Isla Malpelo. Callao 5950 7150
Distance: 6540 miles. JS miles NNW of Cabo Pilar
Though this route is slightly longer than 7.273.1,
more favourable winds and currents may be expected on 10
the former than the latter when approaching the coast of Apia «-» South America
S America. 7.277
Diagrams (7.271), (7.275)
Callao. From Apia the route is by great circle to
Auckland -+ Panama '5 19° 46' S, 140° 26' W, Sof Ahunui, thence great circle to
7.274 Callao.
Diagrams (7.271), (7.270) Distance: 5500 miles.
The. route is by great circle to join the southern of the Iquique. The route is by great circle. It passes close to
two routes from Wellington (7.273.2) in 40° SO'S, Pitcairn Island and Isla Sala y Gomez.
1S4°OO'W. 20 Distance: 5760 miles.
Distance: 6610 miles.

P a n a m a -> N e w Z e a l a n d Valparaiso.
7.275 25 East-bound. The route is by great circle. It passes
Diagrams (7.275), (7.271) close to Rarotonga, the dangers SE of lies Australes, and
The route is: lie Rapa and Marotiri Islands.
As navigation permits to 2° 10' S, 90° 00' W, 50 West-bound. The route is by great circle to 30° 00' S,
miles S of Archipielago de Colon, thence: 120° 00' W as at 7.276, passing close S of Archipielago
Great circle to 25° 40' S, 130° 00' W, 30 miles S of 30 de Juan Fernandez, thence along the parallel of 30° S to
Pitcairn Island, passing 25 miles S of Henderson 139° W, thence great circle.
Island, thence: Distances: E-bound 5460;
Great circle to 36° 3 0 ' S , 160°00'W, with due W-bound 5510 miles.
regard to the breakers reported (1963) in
33° 22' S, 149° 38' Wand the reef reported (1957) 35
in 34° 00' S, 151° 08' W (see Admiralty Sailing Suva <-> South America
Directions), thence: 7.278
Great circle to destination. Diagrams (7.271), (7.275)
Distances: Auckland or Wellington 6530 miles. Callao. From Suva the route is:
40 Through Nanuku Passage, thence:
Rhumb line to 18° 44' S, 159° 47' W, N of Aitutaki,
Chile and Peru -» East coast of Australia thence:
and New Zealand Rhumb line to 19° 46' S, 140° 26' W, SE of Ahunui,
7.276 thence:
Diagrams (7.275), (7.271) 45 Great circle to Callao (as at 7.277).
The parallel of 30° S forms part of all routes from Distance: 6060 miles.
these coasts. It is reached by great circle from the 7.278.1
departure position, and joined in the following Iquique. From Suva the route is:
longitudes. Through Nanuku Passage, thence:
140° W from: 50 Rhumb line to 18° 44' S, 159° 47' W, thence:
Cabo de Homos: Rhumb line to 24° 55' S, 130° 10' W, N of Pitcairn
Estrecho de Magallanes. Island, passing close S of Morane, thence:
120°W from: Great circle to Iquique.
Valparaiso (passing close S of Archipielago de Juan Distance: 6300 miles.
Fernandez); 55 7.278.2
Iquique (passing N of the rock, reported (1869) in Valparaiso
25° 40' S, 85° 00' W, the existence of which is East-bound the route is:
doubtful); Through Nanuku Passage, thence:
Callao. Rhumb line to 17° 30' S, 173° 00' W, thence:
7.276.1 60 By great circle.
For N e w Zealand, routes continue from 30° 00' S, 7.278.3
140° 00' W by great circle to join the route from Panama West-bound the route is:
(7.275) in 36° 30' S, 160° 00' W, with due regard to the Great circle to 30° 00' S, 120° 00' W, passing close
dangers reported between those positions. S of Archipielago de Juan Fernandez, thence:
7.276.2 65 Along the parallel of 30° S to 139° W, thence:
For Australian ports, routes continue, either Great circle to 17° 30' S, 173° 00' W, which passes
through Cook Strait, as above, or along the parallel of close to Beveridge Reef and Niue, thence:
30° S to 150° W and N of New Zealand, to destination. Through Nanuku Passage to Suva.
7.276.3 Distances: E-bound 5920 miles;
Distances in miles: 70 W-bound 5990 miles.

159
7.300 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

MID-PACIFIC TRANS-OCEAN ROUTES

Central Route 7.301.4
7.300 Or, through Nanuku Passage, thence NW of Savai'i to
Diagrams (7.308), (7.302) 5 join the Central Route (7.300.1) in either 5° 48'N,
The constant W flow of water in the equatorial part of 150°00'W or 5°59'N, 140° 00'W thence via the
the Pacific Ocean between roughly the latitude of Central Route to Panama.
Hawaii in the N and lies de la Societe in the S, together Distance: 6660 miles.
with the North-east Trade and South-east Trade Winds 7.301.5
which blow on either side of the Intertropical 10 From Apia. The route is by great circle to join the
Convergence Zone, tend to lengthen voyage times and to route from Suva (7.301.4) in either 5° 48' N, 150° 00' W
increase fuel and maintenance costs on ships E-bound or 5°59'N, 140° 00'W.
through these waters. The great circle from Apia to 5° 48' N, 150° 00' W
Passages from ports between Hong Kong and Sydney passes close to the position of the breakers reported in
to the coasts of Central America and equatorial South 15 5°12'S, 162° 18'W.
America may merit diversion to take advantage of the Distance: 6040 miles.
Equatorial Counter-current. For much of the year, this 7.301.6
current flows from W to E in a narrow belt a few degrees If joining the Central Route in 5° 59' N, 140° 00' W
N of the equator, between the North and South rather than in 5° 48' N, 150° 00' W, the distance over
Equatorial Currents setting in the opposite direction. 20 which the chance of a favourable Equatorial Counter-
Furthermore, the central and E part of the ocean is current may be expected will be reduced by about 600
favoured by the light weather of the Intertropical miles, while only reducing the total distance by 110
Convergence Zone. miles.
For details of currents, see 7.32-7.35 and Admiralty
Sailing Directions. 25 Melbourne —• Panama
7.300.1 7.302
Central Route, used in this book, is an average Diagrams (7.301), (7.302)
Equatorial Countercurrent route from Celebes Sea to The route is through the appropriate Traffic
Gulf of Panama. Separation Lanes (1.28) through Bass Strait, thence:
From 5° 00' N, 125° 30' E (S of Mindanao) it runs: 30 Great circle across Tasman Sea to pass N of New
Along the parallel of 5° N, passing between Zealand, N or S of Three Kings Islands with due
Sonsorol Islands and Pulo Anna, to 5° 00' N, regard to tidal streams in that locality, see
163° 00' E (S of Kusaie Island), thence: Admiralty Sailing Directions, thence:
Rhumb line (on a course of 089°) to 7° 00' N, Great circle to 30° 00' S, 150° 00' W, thence:
80° 00' W. 35 Rhumb line to 25° 40' S, 130° 00' W, S of Pitcairn
The overall length of the route is 9250 miles. Island, thence:
Positions for joining and leaving the route depend on Great circle to 2° 10' S, 90° 00'W, S of
local as well as climatic considerations. With this in Archipielago de Colon, thence:
view, Panama-bound ships from Hong Kong might join Great circle to Punta Mala, thence:
in 168° E, between the Marshall and Caroline Islands, at 40 As navigation permits to Panama.
a cost of 820 miles over the shortest navigable distance of Distance from Port Phillip, 8050 miles.
9270 miles. Ships from Sydney, joining in 150° W, (Melbourne to Port Phillip 40 miles).
would accept an extra distance of about 700 miles
compared with the 7700 miles of the route via Cook Sydney -» Panama
Strait (7.64 and 7.273.1). Several joining routes are 45 7.303
described in the routes for Panama in the following Diagrams (7.301), (7.302)
sections. There is a choice of the following routes.
7.303.1
Great circle across Tasman Sea to Pass N of New
50 Zealand, thence as at 7.302 to Panama.
Suva and Apia «-» Panama Distance: 7700 miles.
7.301 7.303.2
Diagrams (7.301), (7.302) Via Papeete (7.66 and 7.255) to Panama.
In either direction routes are: Distance: 7900 miles.
7.301.1 55 7.303.3
From Suva. Through Nanuku Passage, thence great Via Suva and through Nanuku Passage (7.69 and
circle to 10° 45'S, 136° 35'W, thence great circle to 7.301.1 or 7.301.4) to Panama.
Panama, passing S of Isla del Coco. Distance: 8080 miles.
Distance: 6350 miles. 7.303.4
7.301.2 60 Via Suva (7.69) and through Lakeba Passage, but see
From Apia. Great circle to 10°45'S, 136° 35'W, 7.90, thence as at 7.301.3 to Panama.
which passes close to Suwarrow, thence great circle to Distance: 8060 miles.
Panama, passing S of Isla del Coco. 7.303.5
Distance: 5740 miles. Great circle to 19° 50' S, 180° 00' W, thence:
7.301.3 65 10 miles S of Ogea Driki, thence:
East-bound alternative routes are as follows: NW of Savai'i, thence:
From Suva. Either through Lakeba Passage (but see Joining the Central Route (7.300.1) as at 7.301.4,
7.90) to join the route from Papeete to Panama (7.255) in thence:
6°30'S, 120° 00'W. By the Central Route to Panama.
Distance: 6330 miles. 70 Distance: 8390 miles.
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.311
Panama -» Sydney S of Otong Java Group, thence:
7.304 N of Abaiang Atoll, thence:
Diagrams (7.302), (7.301) Joining the Central Route in 5° 18'N, 180° 00'
The route is that at 7.302 in reverse to a position 5 thence:
miles N of Three Kings Islands, thence by great circle to 5 By the Central Route to Panama.
Sydney. This route (using Jomard Entrance), though 90 miles
Distance: 7700 miles. longer than that at 7.307.2, will allow favourable
weather and current to be carried for an additional 1200
Brisbane -» P a n a m a miles.
7.305 10 Distances: Via China Strait 8620 miles;
Diagrams (7.301), (7.302) Via Jomard Entrance 8710 miles.
There is a choice of the following routes.
7.305.1
Via Papeete (7.74 and 7.255) to Panama. Yap -> Panama
7.305.2 15 7.308
Via Suva and through Nanuku Passage (7.77 and Diagrams (7.308), (7.302)
7.301.1 or 7.301.4) to Panama. Routes are:
7.305.3 Either as navigation permits to Guam, thence as at
Via Suva (7.77) and through Lakeba Passage, but see 7.309 to Panama.
7.90, thence as at 7.301.3 to Panama. 20 Distance: 8450 miles.
7.305.4 7.308.1
Great circle to 22° 05' S, 175° 00' E, 30 miles SE of Or, rhumb line to join the Central Route (7.300.1) in
Ceva-i-Ra, thence rhumb line to 19°50'S, 180° 00', 5° 00' N, 150° 00' E, passing S of Woleai Islands, thence
thence as at 7.303.5 by the Central Route (7.300.1) to to Panama.
Panama. 25 Distance: 8670 miles.
7.305.5
Distances from Caloundra Head:
7.305.1: 7820 miles; 7.305.3: 7840 miles; Guam -> Panama
7.305.2: 7860 miles; 7.305.4: 8180 miles. 7.309
(Brisbane to Caloundra Head: 35 miles). 30 Diagram (7.302)
Routes are:
Panama -> Brisbane Either great circle to Gulf of Panama passing: through
7.306 Hawaiian Islands between Gardner Pinnacles and
Diagrams (7.302), (7.301) Brooks Banks; between Islas Revilla Gigedo, and
The route is that for Melbourne to Panama (7.302) in 35 avoiding Guardian Bank to Panama. See 7.49 for areas
reverse as far as 30° 00' S, 150° 00' W, thence by rhumb to be avoided near Hawaiian Islands.
line to Brisbane, passing N of Kermadec Islands. Distance: 8000 miles.
Distance to Caloundra Head 7740 miles. 7.309.1
(Caloundra Head to Brisbane 35 miles). Or, after rounding S point of Guam, rhumb line to
40 join the Central Route (7.300.1) in 5° 05' N, 168° 00' E,
passing between Namorik Atoll and Ebon Atoll.
Torres Strait <-> P a n a m a Distance: 8300 miles.
7.307
Diagrams (7.301), (7.302)
The great circle track between 13° 10' S, 160° 00' E, S 45 Panama -> Guam
of Indispensable Reefs, and Gulf of Panama is 7.310
encumbered with dangers between Indispensable Reefs Diagram (7.302)
and lies Marquises. The distance by this route, After clearing Punta Mala, the route is by a great
neglecting navigational diversions, is 8520 miles. circle to 13° 30' N, 170° 00' E, thence to Guam, passing
7.307.1 50 between Bikar Atoll and Taongi Atoll, paying due
In either direction, the recommended route is via attention to the shoal reported midway between them.
Apia (7.83 and 7.301.2 or 7.301.5). This route is On this route the North Equatorial Current can be
comparatively free of navigational hazards. carried for most of the ocean crossing.
Distance: 8540 miles. Distance: 8090 miles.
7.307.2 55 7.310.1
E-bound routes are: Alternatively, or if fuel is needed, the crossing may be
As navigation permits to 35 miles S of Rossel Spit, made via Honolulu (7.248 and 7.237). This route is
thence: shorter, but slightly less favourable conditions may be
Between Guadalcanal and San Cristobal Islands, expected on it.
thence: 60 Distance: 8040 miles.
Across the equator in 175° 00' W, passing between
Gilbert Group and Tuvalu, thence:
Rhumb line to join the Central Route (7.300.1) in Basilan Strait -»• P a n a m a
5° 38' N, 160° 00' W, thence: 7.311
By the Central Route to Panama. 65 Diagrams (7.308), (7.302)
Distance: 8620 miles. Routes are across the Celebes Sea to a position S of
7.307.3 Mindanao, thence following the Central Route (7.300.1)
Or, through China Strait or Jomard Entrance from 5° 00' N, 125° 30' E to Panama.
(7.183), thence: Through Bougainville Strait, Distances: From Basilan Strait 9580 miles.
thence: 70 From S of Mindanao 9360 miles.

161
7.312 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

San Bernadino Strait -» Panama 7.314.1

7.312 To Yokohama (7.120) 2970 miles, thence to Panama
Diagrams (7.308), (7.302) (7.359) 7700 miles.
Routes are: Total distance 10 670 miles.
5
Either great circle to join the US Coastal Route 7.314.2
(7.220.1) off Manzanillo in 20° 00'N, 107° 45' W, To Yokohama (7.120) 2970 miles, thence to Honolulu
thence to Panama. (7.243) 3440 miles, thence to Panama (7.248) 4690
Distance: 9090 miles. miles.
7.312.1 Total distance 11 100 miles.
Or, rhumb line to pass S of Palau Islands, thence 10 7.314.3
rhumb line to join the Central Route (7.300.1) in To Balintang Channel (7.120.1 in reverse), thence to
5° 00' N, 150' 00' E, thence to Panama. Panama (7.313).
Distance: 9530 miles. Total distance 10 510 miles.
7.312.2 7.314.4
Or, rhumb line to Guam, thence as at 7.309 to '5 Through South China Sea, Verde Island Passage and
Panama. San Bernadino Strait to Guam (7.123) 2750 miles,
Distance: 9200 miles. thence to Panama (7.309) 8000 miles.
Total distance 10 750 miles.
Balintang Channel «-» P a n a m a 7.314.5
7.313 20 To San Bernadino Strait as at 7.123, thence great
Diagrams (7.308), (7.302) circle to join the US Coastal Route to Panama (7.312).
Routes from 20° 00'N, 122° 20'E, in Balintang Total distance 10 630 miles.
Channel are: 7.314.6
Either great circle to join the US Coastal Route Through Balabac Strait and Basilan Strait (7.125),
(7.220.1) off Manzanillo in 20° 00'N, 107° 45'W, 25 thence to Panama (7.311).
passing NE of Rocas Alijos, thence to Panama. Total distance (via Central Route) 10 790 miles.
Distance: 8960 miles. 7.314.7
7.313.1 Through Eastern Archipelago to Torres Strait
Or, rhumb line to join the Central Route (7.300.1) in (7.130), thence to Panama (7.307.1).
5°00'N, 168° 00'E, passing close S of Guam, and 30 Total distance via Selat Wetar, S of Rossel Spit and
between Namorik Atoll and Ebon Atoll, thence to via Central Route: 11 170 miles.
Panama.
Distance: 9620 miles. Panama —<• Verde Island Passage and
Manila
Singapore -* P a n a m a 55 7.31S
7.314 Diagram (7.314)
Diagram (7.314) From Panama, the reverse of the route at 7.313 to
There is a choice between several routes, each with Balintang Channel offers the shortest distance to both
different characteristics of depths, navigational hazards, Manila (9380 miles) and Singapore (10 150 miles), but
shelter, weather, currents and bunkering facilities. 40 that part of the route which follows a great circle from
The principal routes are as follows (distances between the US Coastal Route off Manzanillo to Balintang
ports include fuelling stops at the ports mentioned). Channel reaches the parallel of 40° N in about 170° W.

120° Longitude East from Greenwich 180"Longitude West from Greenwich

(7.314) ROUTES—Singapore and Manila Panama
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.326
Adverse winds and currents can be expected along most islands and dangers NE of Fiji Islands, and through
of this part of the route throughout the year. Phoenix Group or Tokelau, which are all low and not
However, a route farther S, but keeping N of the E- easily sighted.
bound Central Route (7.300.1), will enable the North 7.321.1
Equatorial Current to be carried, probably with Diagrams (7.319), (7.318A), (7.318B)
favourable weather, for most of the ocean crossing. If An alternative route, leading E of these islands is:
fuel is needed it can be obtained at Guam. Through Nanuku Passage, thence:
A shorter route, but one on which slightly less 40 miles NW of Savai'i, thence:
favourable conditions may be expected, is one calling at Through 10° 30'S, 171° 00'W, between Tokelau
Honolulu (7.248 and 7.240). 10 and Swains Island, thence:
The recommended route therefore from Punta Mala Great circle through Kaiwi Channel to Dixon
is as at 7.310 to pass close S of Guam, thence through Entrance, thence:
San Bernadino Strait to Verde Island Passage (7.122), As navigation permits to Prince Rupert.
and thence as navigation permits to Manila. Distances: Great circle 5140 miles.
Distances in miles: 15 Alternative route 5230 miles.

Verde Island Passage Manila

Recommended Suva <-> Juan de Fuca Strait
Route 9490 9580 7.322
Via Honolulu 9400 9490 20 Diagrams (7.319), (7.318A), (7.318B)
From Suva routes are:
Panama -» Singapore Either by great circle from Nanuku Passage, but see
7.316 7.321,
Diagram (7.314) Or as at 7.321.1 as far as 10° 30' S, 171° 00'W,
Routes are: 25 thence great circle passing 30 miles SE of
Either as at 7.315 for Manila as far as Verde Island Palmyra Atoll to Juan de Fuca Strait.
Passage, continuing thence through South China Sea Distances: Great circle 5030 miles.
(7.123) to Singapore. Alternative route 5080 miles.
Distance: 10 820 miles.
7.316.1 30
Or, via Honolulu (7.248 and 7.239.1). Suva <-> San Francisco
Distance: 10 720 miles. 7.323
Diagrams (7.319), (7.318A), (7.318B)
From Suva routes are:
Apia <-» Prince Rupert 35 Either by great circle from Nanuku Passage, but see
7.317 7.321,
Diagrams (7.318A), (7.318B) Or, as at 7.321.1 as far as 10° 30' S, 17r00'W,
The route from Apia is by great circle which passes thence great circle, passing 10 miles S of Teraina,
through Kaiwi Channel to Dixon Entrance, thence as to San Francisco.
navigation permits to Prince Rupert. 40 Distances: Great circle 4730 miles.
Distance: 4640 miles. Alternative route 4750 miles.

Apia <-+ Juan de Fuca Strait Suva <-+ San Diego

7.318 45 7.324
Diagrams (7.318A), (7.318B) Diagrams (7.319), (7.318A), (7.318B)
The route is by great circle which passes between From Suva the route is through Nanuku Passage,
Palmyra Atoll and Tabuaeran. thence as navigation permits to pass 40 miles S of Swains
Distance: 4490 miles. Island, thence great circle to San Diego.
50 Distance: 4800 miles.

Apia <-> San Francisco

7.319 Auckland «-> Prince Rupert
Diagrams (7.318A), (7.318B) 7.325
The route is by great circle which passes about 30 55 Diagrams (7.319), (7.318A), (7.318B)
miles NW of Jarvis Island. From Auckland the route is as for Honolulu (7.233) as
Distance: 4140 miles. far as 10° 30' S, 171° 00'W, thence as from Suva
(7.321.1) to Prince Rupert.
Distance: 6190 miles.
Apia <-> San Diego 60
7.320
Diagrams (7.318A), (7.318B) Auckland <-> Juan de Fuca Strait
The route is by great circle. 7.326
Distance: 4180 miles. Diagrams (7.319), (7.318A), (7.318B)
65 From Auckland routes are:
Suva <-> Prince Rupert Either great circle to 4°00' N, 158° 30' W, passing 30
7.321 miles W of Raoul Island, between Manua Islands and
From Suva there are routes to all North American Rose Island, and 30 miles SE of Teraina, thence great
ports through Nanuku Passage, thence by great circle to circle to Juan de Fuca Strait.
destination. These routes however, pass through the 70 Distance: 6040 miles.
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.334

7.326.1 From Wellington the route is as for Prince Rupert

Or, as for Honolulu (7.233) as far as 10° 30'S, (7.329.2) as far as the equator in 157° W, thence great
171° 00' W, thence as at 7.322 to Juan de Fuca Strait. circle to Juan de Fuca Strait.
Distance: 6050 miles. Distance: 6300 miles.
5
Auckland <-> San Francisco Wellington <-> San Francisco
7.327 7.331
Diagrams (7.319), (7.318A), (7.318B) Diagrams (7.319), (7.318A), (7.318B)
From Auckland the route is: The route is by great circle, passing E of North Island.
Great circle to 31° 30' S, 177° 45' W (60 miles ESE 10 The track passes about 40 miles E of Tongareva,
of L'Esperance Rock), thence: Starbuck Island and Maiden Island; for caution on
Great circle to a position 80 miles SE of Niue, currents near these islands, see Admiralty Sailing
thence: Directions.
Great circle to San Francisco. Distance: 5870 miles.
Distance: 5660 miles. 15
Wellington <-> San Diego
7.332
Auckland <-> San Diego Diagrams (7.319), (7.318A), (7.318B)
7.328 The route is by great circle passing E of North Island.
Diagrams (7.319), (7.318A), (7.318B) 20 The track passes:
From Auckland the route is by great circle to San Within 10 miles of the reef reported in 24° 25' S,
Diego, taking care to avoid Palmerston Island which lies 163° 39'W,
within about 10 miles of the track. Between Aitutaki and Hervey Islands,
Distance: 5650 miles. 20 miles SE of Vostok Island.
25 Distance: 5830 miles.
Wellington <-> Prince Rupert
7.329 Sydney and Brisbane *-* San Diego and San
Diagrams (7.319), (7.318A), (7.318B) Francisco
From Wellington routes pass E of North Island, and 30 7.333
are: Diagrams (7.319), (7.334)
7.329.1 From the Australian ports, routes are:
Either as for Honolulu (7.233.1) as far as 10° 30' S, 7.333.1
17rOO"W, thence as from Suva (7.321.1) to Prince Either via Suva (7.69 from Sydney or 7.77 from
Rupert. 35 Brisbane, with 7.324 or 7.323 from Suva to San Diego or
7.329.2 San Francisco.
Or, coastwise till off Mahia Peninsula, thence: 7.333.2
Rhumb line to the equator in 157° W, passing about Or, as at 7.231 from Sydney or 7.231.1 from Brisbane
30 miles SE of Antiope Reef, thence: as far as the equator in 178° 50' W, thence great circle to
Great circle to Dixon Entrance, passing 40 miles E 40 destination.
of Christmas Island, thence: For San Francisco, a diversion from the great circle
As navigation permits to Prince Rupert. must be made to pass through Alenhuihaha Channel,
Distance by either route: 6520 miles. between Hawaii and Maui.
7.333.3
45 Or, via Honolulu (7.231 from Sydney or 7.231.1 from
Wellington <-> Juan de Fuca Strait Brisbane with 7.247 from Honolulu).
7.330 7.333.4
Diagrams (7.319), (7.318A), (7.318B) Distances in miles:

San Francisco San Diego

7.333.1 7.333.2 7.333.3 7.333.1 7.333.2 7.333.3

Sydney 6460 6550 6570 6520 6700 6760

Caloundra Head for Brisbane 6240 6150 6170 6300 6300 6360

(Brisbane to Caloundra Head : 35 miles.)

Sydney and Brisbane <-» Juan de Fuca Strait
or Prince Rupert
7.334
Diagrams (7.319), (7.334)
From the Australian ports routes are as for Honolulu
(7.231 from Sydney or 7.231.1 from Brisbane) as far as
the equator in 178° 50' W, and thence by great circle to
destination. For areas to be avoided near Hawaiian
Islands, see 7.49.
For Juan de Fuca Strait, the great circle passes close
60 SE of the reported position of Wilder Shoal, and
through Hawaiian Islands E of Nihoa.
For Hecate Strait, the great circle passes E of Necker
Island.
For Dixon Entrance, the great circle passes E of
65 French Frigate Shoals.
If fuelling calls are required, they can be made at
Honolulu (7.231 or 7.231.1 with 7.247 for Juan de Fuca
Strait or 7.246 for Prince Rupert), or at Suva (7.69 from
Sydney or 7.77 from Brisbane, with 7.322 for Juan de
70 Fuca Strait or 7.321 or 7.321.1 for Prince Rupert).
 120° 140° l,
IJJ UiU,
: - umm Pomom
i• A 4**4p"N, 1S3"4Q'f
60' 60°

>
z
o
>

>
o
m
z

Central Route

-0°
I I I l ! I I I I 1 I 1 1 | I I I i II1iiiIiiiiii u | i I I I I I M M i I I TTTTTTTTTTTTTT
L o n g i t u d e East f r o m G r e e n w i c h 1 8 0 ° L o n g i t u d e W e s t f r o m G r e e n w i c h 140° 120°

(7.352)ROUTES—North Pacific Ocean-East-bound I.

 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.350

7.334.1
Distances in miles:

Juan de Fuca Strait Prince Rupert

(via Dixon Entrance)
Direct Via Honolulu Via Suva Direct Via Honolulu Via Suva

Sydney 6740 6780 6810 6780 6890 6960

Caloundra Head for Brisbane 6340 6380 6590 6380 6490 6740

(Brisbane to Caloundra Head: 35 miles.)

Torres Strait <-+ San D i e g o or San F r a n c i s c o For Juan de Fuca Strait, by Great circle for Dixon
7.335 15 Entrance as far as 30° 00'N, 179° 35' E, thence great
Diagrams (7.319), (7.334) circle.
From Bougainville Strait, a direct great circle to San 7.336.2
Diego passes close S of Honolulu; it is clear of all charted Alternatively, passage can be made through the
dangers. Great circles from Bougainville Strait to ports channel between New Ireland and Bougainville Island,
N of San Diego pass through Marshall Islands and 20 thence joining the route from Bougainville Strait in
Hawaiian Islands. 12° 00' N, 165° 00' E, by great circle which passes about
Routes via Honolulu (7.232.1-7.232.3 and 7.247) are 20 miles SE of Pingelap Atoll.
therefore usually preferred being clear of dangers and 7.336.3
inappreciably longer than direct great circles. Distances in miles from Torres Strait (7.53.1) by
7.335.1 25 routes passing E of Rossel Spit to the channel between
Distances in miles from Torres Strait (7.53.1) by New Ireland and Bougainville Island or Bougainville
routes passing E of Rossel Spit and through Strait, and via Bougainville Strait and Honolulu. For
Bougainville Strait. distances by other routes through Solomon Sea, see
7.183.4.
Via Honolulu Direct 30 Juan de Fuca
San Diego 6580 6575 Strait Prince Rupert
San Francisco 6390 6360 Via Honolulu 6580 6710
For distances by other routes to Bougainville Strait or Via Bougainville
Honolulu, see 7.183.4 or 7.232.1-7.232.3. Strait 6460 6320
35 Via New
Ireland/Bougainville
Torres Strait«-+ Juan de Fuca Strait or Island Channel 6530 6390
Prince Rupert
7.336 G u a m a n d Yap <-> North A m e r i c a
Diagrams (7.319), (7.334) 40 7.337
From Bougainville Strait, direct great circles to Juan Diagram (7.334)
de Fuca Strait and ports farther N on the coast of Routes pass through Mariana Islands keeping as near
Canada pass through Marshall Islands and Hawaiian as practicable to great circle tracks.
Islands. Distances in miles:
Routes from Bougainville Strait by the great circle to 45 Guam Yap
Honolulu (7.232.1), which passes clear of charted San Diego 5380 5830
dangers, and thence by great circle to destination, are San Francisco 5050 5500
often used, particularly when W-bound. Juan de Fuca Strait 4830 5260
7.336.1 Prince Rupert 4600 5010
Alternative routes passing NW of Marshall Islands 50 7.337.1
and Hawaiian Islands, are shorter than the routes via For low-powered vessels west-bound in winter, the
Honolulu and for an E-bound passage may encounter following routes may be preferred to avoid the worst of
more favourable conditions. the weather and adverse current:
From Bougainville Strait these routes are by rhumb From Juan de Fuca Strait, rhumb line to 32° N,
line to 20 miles E of Mortlock Islands, thence great 55 145° W, thence along the parallel of 32° N to 180°,
circle to 12° 00' N, 165° 00' E, 20 miles NW of Bikini thence great circle to Guam or Yap.
Atoll, thence: From Prince Rupert, through Hecate Strait, thence
For Prince Rupert, by great circle to Dixon rhumb line to join the route from Juan de Fuca Strait in
Entrance, thence as navigation permits. 32° N, 145° W.

NORTH PACIFIC TRANS-OCEAN ROUTES

General information Strait and a position on the coast of British Columbia

7.350 will pass through the Sea of Japan and Bering Sea, while
Broadly speaking, the trend of the coastline bordering a great circle between Luzon Strait and the coast of
the N Pacific basin follows the arc of a great circle. In California will pass close to Yokohama and not far S of
fact, a great circle drawn between a position in Luzon 70 the Aleutian Islands.
 I i I I 1 I 1 1 I I I I I I i II I j
Longitude East from Greenwich 180° Longitude West from Greenwich
(7.356) ROUTES—North Pacific Ocean - East-bound II.
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.354

A high-latitude route for the trans-ocean voyage is 7.350.6

therefore attractive on the score of distance, but it may Channels separating the Aleutian Islands should be
have disadvantages in weather and currents. treated with caution, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Weather in the N Pacific Ocean is dominated by the 7.350.7
high pressure system over the ocean and the low 5 A USSR Regulated area lies between 50° 55' N,
pressure system which moves along the Aleutian chain 164° 00'E and 47° 35'N, 167° 35'E. A number of
of islands. recommended routes cross it: for details, see Admiralty
In summer, calm and clear conditions prevail over the Sailing Directions.
E part of the N Pacific Ocean N of 40° N. Depressions,
however, less frequent than in winter, move across the N 10 Singapore -» North America
part of the ocean bringing extensive fog for much of the 7.351
time along the W part of the northern routes. Diagrams (7.357), (7.352)
In winter, the Aleutian low pressure system Yokohama, reached as at 7.120, is at a distance of 2970
intensifies and moves W from the vicinity of Bristol Bay miles from Singapore. It is near the great circle joining
to the W part of the Aleutian Islands near the Date Line. 15 Singapore with positions on the North American coast,
Violent storms sweep from China and Japanese waters and is a convenient fuelling point.
towards the centre of the depression, and then into the If calling at Yokohama, onward routes are as follows:
Gulf of Alaska, and storms from the central Pacific move Route Distances from Singapore
NE towards Gulf of Alaska. The storms bring rain, in miles
sleet, snow and violent winds to much of the northern 20 Dutch Harbor 7.362 5740 Via Unimak Pass
routes. 5530 N of Aleutian
In spring, the E coast of Japan is fully exposed to the Islands
strong E gales then prevalent. Prince Rupert 7.361 6860
For general notes on winds, weather, currents and ice, Juan de Fuca Strait 7.361 7170
see 7.3-7.9, 7.32-7.33, 7.41-7.43. 25 San Francisco 7.360 7500
For areas where rough seas or heavy swell can be San Diego 7.360 7900
expected, see Diagrams (1.17a-d).
E-bound, choice of a route depends mainly on Manila —• P a n a m a
currents likely to be met and the navigational 7.352
requirements. 30 Diagrams (7.314)
W-bound, it may be preferable to take a route N of the Routes are:
Aleutian Islands, or alternatively one well S of the 7.352.1
northern routes, based on the parallel of 35° N, or even Either W of Luzon to Balintang Channel, thence as at
farther S, compromising between extra distance and the 7.313 or 7.313.1 to Panama.
reduced speed due to the effect of adverse winds and 35 Distance: 9380 miles.
currents. 7.352.2
By the southern route, calls can be made if necessary Or, as in Admiralty Sailing Directions to San
at Honolulu or Guam for fuelling, adding little to the Bernadino Strait, thence via Central Route(7.312.1) to
distance. Panama.
7.350.1 40 Distance: 9820 miles.
Routes North of the Aleutian Islands are affected 7.352.3
by the following conditions. Or, via Yokohama (7.197 and 7.359).
Bering Sea is N of the usual track of the storms that Distance: 9530 miles.
sweep across the N Pacific Ocean. A W-bound vessel N 7.352.4
of the islands will therefore be in the favourable semi- 45 Or, via Guam and Honolulu (7.122, 7.237 and 7.248).
circle of most of such storms and so experience a Distance: 9520 miles.
following wind and sea.
Local storms are frequent, particularly in autumn, Manila San Diego or San Francisco
but the weather is characterised by persistently overcast 7.353
skies, rapid change and instability, rather than by the 50 Diagram (7.352)
violence of the winds. Routes are:
7.350.2 7.353.1
Fog is prevalent in spring, summer and early autumn, Either W of Luzon to Balintang Channel, thence great
particularly off Kuril'skiye Ostrova. Close to the circle to destination.
Aleutian Islands, conditions are generally more 55 Distances: San Diego 6620 miles; San Francisco 6240
favourable on their N side than on their S side. miles.
7.350.3 7.353.2
Currents are weak N of the Aleutian Islands, being Or, via Yokohama (7.197 and 7.360).
strongest in summer, when they are E-going. Along the Distances: San Diego 6760 miles; San Francisco 6360
S side of the islands, the Alaska Current flows to the W 60 miles.
throughout the year. Off the E side of Poluostrov 7.353.3
Kamchatskiy and Kuril'skiye Ostrova, the Kamchatka Or, via Guam and Honolulu (7.122, 7.237 and 7.247).
Current sets to the SW throughout the year. Distances: San Diego 7100 miles; San Francisco 6910
7.350.4 miles.
Ice is not normally encountered in the vicinity of the 65
Aleutian Islands. Manila -> Juan de Fuca Strait or Prince
7.350.5 Rupert
Distances across the N Pacific Oc.ean are only 7.354
appreciably shorter through the Bering Sea if between Diagram (7.352)
places on the coast of N America and places N of Japan. 70 Routes are:

171
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.362
7.354.1 Distances in miles:
Either W of Luzon to Balintang Channel, thence:
Great circle to 41° N, 157° E, thence: Juan de Fuca
Rhumb line to 49° N, 180° E, thence: Strait Prince Rupert
Rhumb line (as at 7.361) to destination. Via Tsugaru Kaikyo 5720 5410
7.354.2 Via 34°40'N, 140° 0 0 ' E 5730 5420
Or, via Yokohama (7.197 and 7.361).
7.354.3
Or, via Guam and Honolulu (7.122, 7.237 and 7.247 Shanghai -> North America
or 7.246). 10 7.358
7.354.4 Diagrams (7.302), (7.356), (7.357)
Distances in miles: The shortest route is through Korea Strait to Tsugaru
Kaikyo, thence by one of the following routes:
Juan de Fuca Prince Panama: 7.363.
Strait Rupert 15 Distance: 8590 miles.
Via Balintang Channel 5910 5600 San Diego or San Francisco: 7.364.1 or 7.364.2
Via Yokohama 6040 5730 Distances: San Diego 5810 miles;
Via Guam and Honolulu 7120 7230 San Francisco 5400 miles.
Juan de Fuca Strait or Prince Rupert: 7.365.
20 Distances: Juan de Fuca Strait 5080 miles;
Hong Kong Panama Prince Rupert 4770 miles.
7.355
Diagrams (7.195), (7.352), (7.302) Yokohama <-> Panama
Routes are: 7.359
Either as at 7.198.1 to 34° 40' N, 140° 00' E (off T5kyo 25 Diagrams (7.352), (7.302)
Wan), thence as at 7.359 to Panama. From the approach to Yokohama routes are:
Distance: 9210 miles. Either great circle to join the US Coastal Route
7.355.1 (7.220.1) in 20° 00' N, 107° 45' W, thence to Panama.
Or, as at 7.145 to 20° 00' N, 122° 20' E, in Balintang Distance: 7700 miles.
Channel, thence via Central Route (7.313.1) to Panama. 30 7.359.1
Distance: 10 090 miles. Or, via Honolulu (7.243 and 7.248), particularly if W-
bound. This avoids the generally E-going current which
can be expected on the great circle route, carries the
Hong Kong —> San Diego or San Francisco probability of better weather, and affords the
7.356 35 opportunity of fuelling midway.
Diagrams (7.195), (7.356) Distance: 8090 miles.
Routes are:
Either through Taiwan Strait and Korea Strait to Yokohama ->• San Diego or San Francisco
Tsugaru Kaikyo (7.198.2), thence as at 7.364.1 or 7.360
7.364.2 to destination. 40 Diagram (7.356)
7.356.1 Direct routes are by great circle, with a highest
Or, as at 7.198.1 to 34° 40' N, 140° 00' E (off Tokyo latitude on the route to San Francisco of 47° 30' N, in
Wan), thence as at 7.360 to destination. 170° 00'W.
A favourable current may be expected over most parts Distances: San Diego 4930 miles;
of the above routes, but the vessel will be exposed to the 45 San Francisco 4530 miles.
weather of the N Pacific Ocean. Better weather, but less 7.360.1
favourable currents, are likely to be experienced on the Alternatively, to avoid bad weather, the reverse of the
longer routes via Honolulu (7.241 and 7.247) or via routes farther S (7.373.2) are suitable.
Guam and Honolulu (7.145, 7.237 and 7.247). Distances: San Diego 5160 miles;
7.356.2 50 San Francisco 4850 miles.
Distances in miles:
Yokohama -» Juan de Fuca Strait or Prince
San Diego San Francisco Rupert
Via Tsugaru Kaikyo 6450 6050 7.361
Via 34° 4 0 ' N , 140" 0 0 ' E 6460 6060 55 Diagram (7.357)
Via Honolulu 7140 6950 Routes are by great circle to 44° 40' N, 163° 40' E,
Via Guam and Honolulu 7430 7240 thence rhumb line to 49° 00' N, 180° 00', thence rhumb
line to destination.
Distances: Juan de Fuca Strait 4200 miles;
Hong Kong -> Juan de Fuca Strait or Prince 60 Prince Rupert 3890 miles.
Rupert
7.357 Yokohama -> Dutch Harbor
Diagrams (7.195), (7.357) 7.362
Routes are: Diagram (7.357)
Either through Taiwan Strait and Korea Strait to 65 Routes are S or N of the Aleutian Islands, see 7.350.
Tsugaru Kaikyo (7.198.2), thence as at 7.365 to From Yokohama approaches routes are:
destination. South of the Aleutian Islands
7.357.1 Great circle to 44° 40' N, 163° 40' E, thence:
Or, as at 7.198.1 to 34° 40' N, 140° 00' E (off Tokyo Rhumb line to 49° 00' N, 180° 00', thence:
Wan), thence as at 7.361 to destination. 70 Through Unimak Pass, or if conditions are suitable

173
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.367.4

(see Admiralty Sailing Directions), through 7.366.2

Akutan Pass to Dutch Harbor. Or, to hold a favourable current as long as possible:
Distance via Unimak Pass: 2770 miles. Rhumb line to 49° 00' N, 180° 00' , thence:
7.362.1 Through Unimak Pass, or through Akutan Pass if
North of the Aleutian Islands 5 conditions are suitable, see Admiralty Sailing
Great circle to 52° 25' N, 175° 00' E, between Near Directions, to Dutch Harbor.
Islands and Rat Islands, thence great circle to Dutch Distance via Unimak Pass: 2480 miles.
Harbor. This route crosses the Regulated Area of 7.366.3
7.350.7. North of Aleutian Islands
Distance: 2560 miles. 10 Great circle to 52° 25' N, 175° 00' E, between Near
Islands and Rat Islands, thence great circle N of the
Tsugaru Kaikyo -* Panama islands (as at 7.362.1) to Dutch Harbor.
7.363 Distance: 2220 miles.
Diagrams (7.357), (7.302) 7.366.4
After clearing Erimo Misaki, the route is by great '5 All these routes cross, or pass close S of, the Regulated
circle to 28° 40' N, 118° 20' W, S of Isla de Guadalupe, Area of 7.350.7.
thence rhumb line to join the US Coastal Route
(7.220.1) in 20° 00' N, 107° 45' W, thence to Panama.
Distances: 7420 miles. Nakhodka -> Dutch Harbor and North
20 America
Tsugaru Kaikyo -> San Diego or San 7.367
Francisco Diagram (7.356)
7.364 Routes are either through La Perouse Strait and then
Diagram (7.356) N or S of the Aleutian Islands, or through Tsugaru
Passages may be made either by direct great circle 25 Kaikyo. For general considerations on routes N of
tracks, or by tracks farther S on which a favourable Aleutian Islands, see 7.350.
current is more likely. 7.367.1
7.364.1 North of the Aleutian Islands
Direct routes. For San Diego, the route is by great Routes are:
circle from Erimo Misaki to the entrance to Santa 30 As navigation permits to the Traffic Separation
Barbara Channel, passing about 70 miles S of the Schemes (1.28) through La Perouse Strait and off
Aleutian Islands. Mys Aniva, thence:
For San Francisco, the route by great circle from Through the Traffic Separation Scheme through
Erimo Misaki passes about 30 miles S of the Aleutian Chetvertyy Kuril'skiye Proliv, thence:
Islands. 35 Either, great circle passing N of Attu Island to
These routes cross the Regulated Area of 7.350.7. Dutch Harbor.
Distances: San Diego 4640 miles; Or, if bound ports on the W coast of America,
San Francisco 4230 miles. Great circle to 54° 25' N, 165° 30' W, thence:
7.364.2 Through Unimak Pass to 54° 10' N, 162°45'W,
Routes farther South. From Erimo Misaki routes 40 thence:
are by either great circle or rhumb line to join the direct Great circle to destination.
great circle routes from Yokohama (7.360) on the 7.367.2
meridian of 180° ; for San Diego in 46° 15' N, and for South of the Aleutian Islands
San Francisco in 47° 00' N. Routes are:
Distances: San Diego 4660 miles; 45 As navigation permits to the Traffic Separation
San Francisco 4250 miles. Schemes (1.28) through La Perouse Strait and off
Mys Aniva, thence:
Tsugaru Kaikyo -» Juan de Fuca Strait or Great circle to Proliv Golovnina, thence:
Prince Rupert Great circle to 50° N, 173° E, thence:
7.365 50 Along the parallel of 50° N to 170° W, thence:
Diagram (7.357) Either as navigation permits to Dutch Harbor,
The route in each case is by rhumb line from Erimo Or great circle to destination.
Misaki to 49° 00' N, 180° 00', thence by rhumb line to This route crosses the Regulated Area of 7.350.7.
destination. 7.367.3
The routes cross the Regulated Area of 7.350.7. 55 Through Tsugaru Kaikyo. Ships bound San
Distances: Juan de Fuca Strait 3910 miles; Francisco or ports farther S usually proceed as
Prince Rupert 3600 miles. navigation permits to Tsugaru Kaikyo, thence as at
7.364.1 for San Diego and San Francisco.
7.367.4
Tsugaru Kaikyo ->• Dutch Harbor so Distances in miles:
7.366
Diagram (7.357) Nof Sof Through
Routes are as direct as navigation permits to Erimo Aleutian. Aleutian Tsugaru
Misaki, thence S or N of the Aleutian Islands, see 7.350. Islands Islands Kaikyo
From Erimo Misaki routes are: 65 Dutch Harbor 2520 — —
7.366.1 Prince Rupert 3780 3850 —
South of the Aleutian Islands Juan de Fuca
Either as direct as navigation permits to Dutch Strait 4090 4120 —
Harbor. San Francisco 4550 4510 4610
Distance: 2440 miles. 70 San Diego 4960 4910 5020

175
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.372.1
Panama -* Hong Kong or Shanghai 7.370.6
7.368 Routes at 7.370.3-7.370.5 offer favourable currents
Diagrams (7.376), (7.302) and protection from the North-east Monsoon
The passage recommended is via Guam, either as at (December-March).
7.310 (via 13° 30' N, 170° 00' E), or via Honolulu (7.248 Distances in miles:
and 7.237) to Guam, thence:
For Hong Kong, through Balintang Channel San Diego San Francisco
(7.145). 7.370.1 7770 7380
For Shanghai, through Nansei Shoto (7.207.1). 7.370.3 8120 7920
Distances (via 7.310 to Guam): 10 7.370.4 8160 7960
Hong Kong 9910 miles; 7.370.5 8050 7850
Shanghai 9830 miles.
San Diego and San Francisco —• Ports on
San Diego and San Francisco -> Manila the coast of China South of Fuzhou
7.369 15 7.371
Diagram (7.369) Diagrams (7.369), (7.138)
If not calling at an intermediate port, the following The shortest routes are either through Tsugaru
routes are recommended. Kaikyo and the Sea of Japan (7.375 and 7.198.2), or
7.369.1 through Osumi Kaikyo (7.373.1 and 7.198.1).
June-September (Summer), great circle to 31° N, 20 If not calling at an intermediate port the following
140° E, thence: routes are recommended to avoid the unfavourable
Rhumb line to Babuyan Channel, thence: conditions of weather and sea which can often be
Along W coast of Luzon to Manila. expected on the N routes (7.350).
This route, keeping S of the direct great circle route to 7.371.1
Luzon Strait, reduces the effect of the Japan Current, 25 June-September (Summer), great circle to 31° N,
and takes advantage of the clear passage through Nanpo 140° E (as at 7.369.1), thence:
Shoto in 31° N, 140° E. See caution in Admiralty Sailing Rhumb line to Balintang Channel or Bashi
Directions on the volcanic area in Nanpo Shoto. Channel, thence:
Distances: San Diego 6650 miles; As navigation permits to destination.
San Francisco 6250 miles. 30 This route, keeping S of the direct great circle route to
7.369.2 Luzon Strait, reduces the effect of the Japan Current,
October-May (Winter), rhumb line to 30° N, and takes advantage of the clear passage through Nanpo
140° W, thence: Shot5in 31° N, 140° E. See caution in Admiralty Sailing
Either, rhumb line to Babuyan Channel, thence: Directions on the volcanic area in Nanpo Shoto.
Along W coast of Luzon to Manila; 35 7.371.2
Or, rhumb line to San Bernadino Strait, thence: October-May (Winter), rhumb line to 30° N, 140° W,
As in Admiralty Sailing Directions to Manila. thence:
Distances in miles: Rhumb line to Balintang Channel or Bashi
Channel, thence:
San Diego San Francisco 40 As navigation permits to destination.
Via Babuyan Channel 7000 6800 For areas to be avoided near Hawaiian Islands, see
Via San Bernadino Strait 6910 6710 7.49.
7.371.3
Distances to Hong Kong in miles:
San Diego and San Francisco -» Singapore 45 San San
7.370 Diego Francisco
If not calling at an intermediate port the following Via Tsugaru Kaikyo 6450 6040
routes are recommended. Via Osumi Kaiky5 6440 6050
7.370.1 June-Sept—Balintang Channel 6660 6820
Diagrams (7.369), (7.111) 50 Oct-May—Balintang Channel 7020 6820
June-September (Summer), as at 7.369.1 to Babuyan
Channel, thence: San Diego and San Francisco -* Fuzhou
NW of Prince Consort Bank to join the route from and ports on the coast of China farther
Yokohama to Singapore (7.120.1). North
7.370.2 55 7.372
October-May (Winter), rhumb line to 30° N, 140° W, Diagrams (7.369), (7.195)
thence by one of the following routes, but see 7.49 for The shortest routes are through Tsugaru Kaikyo
areas to be avoided near Hawaiian Islands. (7.375) and the Sea of Japan.
7.370.3 Distances to Shanghai: San Diego 5810 miles; San
Diagrams (7.369), (7.111) 60 Francisco 5400 miles.
Rhumb line to Babuyan Channel, thence as at 7.370.1 If not calling at an intermediate port the following
above. routes are recommended to avoid the unfavourable
7.370.4 conditions of weather and sea which can often be
Diagrams (7.369), (7.122), (7.111) expected on the N routes (7.350).
Rhumb line to San Bernadino Strait, thence as at 65 7.372.1
7.123 to Singapore. June-September (Summer), great circle to 31° N,
7.370.5 140° E, (as at 7.369.1), thence S of Okinawa Gunto,
Diagrams (7.369), (7.122), (7.111) thence as navigation permits to destination.
Rhumb line to Surigao Strait, thence through Distances to Shanghai: San Diego 5980 miles;
Balabac Strait as at 7.123.1 to Singapore. 70 San Francisco 5590 miles.
177
7.372.2 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

7.372.2 Passage N of the Aleutian Islands (7.350) may avoid

Alternatively, as at 7.373.1 to the approaches to heavy seas and head winds which can be expected,
Yokohama thence through Osumi Kaikyo or Seto particularly in winter S of the islands.
Naikai, thence as navigation permits to destination (for 7.375.2
Shanghai as at 7.200). 5 Distances in miles:
Distances to Shanghai: San Diego S900 miles;
San Francisco SSOO miles. San San
7.372.3 Diego Francisco
October-May (Winter), rhumb line to 30° N, 140° W, 7.375 (either seasonal route) 4650 4240
thence: 10 7.375.1 4670 4260
Rhumb line for Bashi Channel (as at 7.371.2), as far Calling Dutch Harbor and thence
as 150° E, thence: N of the Aleutian Islands 4690 4280
S of Kazan Rett5, thence:
S of Okinawa Gunto, thence: Juan de Fuca Strait -> Manila or Singapore
As navigation permits to destination. '5 7.376
Distances to Shanghai: San Diego 6630 miles; Diagrams (7.376), (7.111)
San Francisco 6440 miles. A number of routes, described below, merit
consideration depending on the season and the
S a n D i e g o a n d S a n F r a n c i s c o -> Y o k o h a m a prevailing weather.
7.373 20 7.376.1
Diagram (7.369) Either the route for Yokohama (7.378 and 7.378.1),
Routes are seasonal and as follows: passing S of the Aleutian Islands, as far as 44° N on the
7.373.1 appropriate seasonal route, thence:
June—August (Summer), great circle to Yokohama. Rhumb line to 31° N, 140° E, thence:
A contrary current is likely throughout the voyage. 25 Rhumb line to Babuyan Channel, thence:
Distances: San Diego 4930 miles; Either as navigation permits to Manila,
San Francisco 4530 miles. Or NW of Prince Consort Bank to join the route
7.373.2 from Yokohama to Singapore (7.120.1).
September-May (Winter), from San Diego rhumb This route through 31° N, 140° E, passes well clear of
line to 35° N, 140° W, thence to Yokohama. 30 the SE part of Honshu to reduce the effect of the Japan
From San Francisco, rhumb line to 37° N, 130°W, Current, and to take advantage of the clear passage
thence to 35° N, 140° W, thence to Yokohama. through Nanpo Shoto. For caution on volcanic activity
Bad weather is unlikely on these routes, and the in the vicinity of Nanpo Shoto, see Admiralty Sailing
strength of the contrary current should not be felt until Directions.
approaching Japan. 35 7.376.2
Distances: San Diego 5160 miles; Or, one of the routes to Tsugaru Kaikyo (7.379.1 or
San Francisco 4850 miles. 7.379.2), either N or S of the Aleutian Islands, thence:
Through Sea of Japan to Korea Strait, thence:
Either E of T'ai-wan and along the W coast of
San Diego and San Francisco -* Ports in the 40 Luzon to Manila,
East China Sea and Bo Hai Or through Taiwan Strait and South China Sea to
7.374 Singapore (7.112.1).
Diagram (7.369) 7.376.3
Routes are: Or, to avoid the worst of the adverse currents and
As at 7.375 to Tsugaru Kaikyo, thence: 45 winter weather of high latitudes, a route farther S is to
Through Korea Strait and as navigation permits to Guam (7.337), thence through San Bernadino Strait to
destination. Manila (7.122) or Singapore (7.123).
Distances to Dagu Lanjiangsha from: From Guam a favourable current can be expected,
San Diego 6010 miles; San Francisco 5600 miles. except from June to August when it will be adverse in
50 South China Sea.
7.376.4
San Diego and San Francisco -* Tsugaru For low-powered vessels in winter, spring and
Kaikyo autumn, one of the following alternatives to the
7.375 northern great circle routes may be preferred.
Diagram (7.369) 55 April-May and October rhumb line to 3 5° N, 160° W,
Routes are: thence:
Either, great circle to 50° 30' N, 180° 00' , thence: Along the parallel of 35° N to 170° W, thence:
By the appropriate seasonal route at 7.378.1 to Great circle to San Bernadino Strait, thence:
44° N, thence: As in Admiralty Sailing Directions to Manila,
As navigation permits to Tsugaru Kaikyo. 60 Or as at 7.123 to Singapore.
7.375.1 7.376.5
Or, great circle to 44° 4 0 ' N , 163° 40'E, with a November-March rhumb line to 32° N, 145° W,
highest latitude on the route of 47° 30' N in thence:
170° 00'W, thence: Along the parallel of 32° N to 175° W, thence:
Rhumb line to Tsugaru Kaikyo. 65 Great circle to San Bernadino Strait, thence:
On these routes a contrary current may be expected As in Admiralty Sailing Directions to Manila,
throughout the voyage. Or as at 7.123 to Singapore.
A call at Dutch Harbor (7.221 and 7.386) entails a If weather conditions are unfavourable on the parallel
slightly longer passage, but with a favourable current in of 32° N, course can be held to reach the parallel of
parts. 70 30° N, and the ocean crossing made on that parallel.
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

7.376.6 Juan de Fuca Strait -> Yokohama

Distances in miles: 7.378
Diagram (7.376)
From Juan de Fuca Strait Manila Singapore To the 180° meridian, the route is by rhumb lines
7.376.1 (Babuyan Channel) 5 through the following positions:
Winter " 5950 7080 49° 30' N, 130° 00' W 50° 50' N, 160° 00' W
Summer 5920 7050 50° 10' N, 135° 00' W 50° 40' N, 165° 00' W
7.376.2 (Taiwan Strait) 50° 35' N, 140° 00' W 50° 30' N, 170° 00' W
N of Aleutian Islands 5910 6960 50° 45' N, 145° 00' W 50° 30' N, 175° 00' W
S of Aleutian Islands 5960 7010 10 50° 50' N, 150° 00' W 50° 30' N, 180° 00'
7.376.3 6340 7580 7.378.1
From the 180° meridian, the routes are seasonal by
rhumb lines through the following positions:
Juan de Fuca Strait -* Ports on the coast of November-March April-October
China is 50° 30' N, 175° 00' E 50° 00' N, 175° 00' E
7.377 50° 10' N, 170° 00' E 49° 15' N, 170° 00' E
Diagrams (7.376), (7.138) 49° 30' N, 165° 00' E 48° 20' N, 165° 00' E
The shortest route in every case is through Tsugaru 48° 20' N, 160° 00' E 47° 10' N, 160° 00' E
Kaikyo and Sea of Japan (7.379.1 or 7.379.2). 46° 30' N, 155° 00' E 45° 20' N, 155° 00' E
Distances in miles (all seasons): 20 44° 00' N, 150° 00' E 44° 00' N, 152° 00' E
Then in each case rhumb line to make a landfall on
Hong Dagu Inubo Saki or Kinkasan To, thence as navigation
Shanghai Kong Lanjiangsha permits.
N of Aleutian Is 4960 5610 5160 These routes, leading close S of the Aleutian Islands,
S of Aleutian Is 5010 5600 5210 25 are usually N of the W winds, and favoured by the W-
7.377.1 going current throughout. They cross the Regulated
To avoid the worst of the adverse current and winter Area of 7.350.7.
weather of high latitudes, routes are as follows. Distances: November-March 4180 miles;
7.377.2 April-October 4160 miles.
Great circle to 30° N, 180° , thence through Nanpo 30
Shoto between Tori Shima and Sofu Gan, thence: Juan de Fuca Strait -> Tsugaru Kaikyo
For Shanghai or ports farther North. Through 7.379
Osumi Kaikyo, thence as navigation permits to Diagram (7.376)
destination. Routes are either N or S of the Aleutian Islands, see
Distance to Shanghai: 5780 miles. 35 7.350.
For ports South of Shanghai. Through Nansei 7.379.1
Shoto between Tokara Gunto and Amami Gunto, North of the Aleutian Islands. The route is:
thence as navigation permits to destination. Great circle to 54° 10' N, 162° 45' W, thence:
Distance to Hong Kong: 6320 miles. Through Unimak Pass to 54° 25'N, 165°30'W,
The Japan Current sets NE on the W part of these 40 thence:
routes. Great circle to 52° 25' N, 175" 00' E, thence:
7.377.3 Great circle to 43° 40' N, 147° 00' E, thence:
For Hong Kong and ports farther South. An As navigation permits.
alternative route is as at 7.337 to Guam, thence as at 7.379.2
7.145 to destination. 45 South of the Aleutian Islands. The route is as for
From Guam a favourable current can be expected, Yokohama (7.378 and 7.378.1), by the appropriate
except from June to August when it will be adverse in seasonal route, as far as 44° N, thence as navigation
South China Sea. permits to Tsugaru Kaikyo.
Distance to Hong Kong; 6650 miles. 7.379.2
7.377.4 50 These routes cross the Regulated Area of 7.350.7.
For low-powered vessels in winter, spring and Distances: N of Aleutian Islands 3800 miles;
autumn, alternatives to the northern great circle routes S of Aleutian Islands 3850 miles.
may be preferred.
April-May and October, rhumb line to 35° N, Juan de F u c a Strait —>• N a k h o d k a
160° W, thence along the parallel of 35° N as follows. 55 7.380
For Shanghai. To the vicinity of Nojima Saki, Diagram (7.376)
thence through Osumi Kaikyo, thence as navigation Routes are either N or S of the Aleutian Islands, see
permits. 7.350.
For Hong Kong, to 165° E, thence great circle to 7.380.1
Bashi Channel, thence as navigation permits. SO North of the Aleutian Islands. The route is:
7.377.5 Great circle to 54° 10' N, 162° 45' W, thence:
November-March, rhumb line to 32° N, 145° W, Through Unimak Pass to 54° 25'N, 165° 30'W,
thence along the parallel of 32° N as follows. thence:
For Shanghai. To 150° E, thence through Osumi Great Circle, passing N of Attu Island, to
Kaikyo, thence as navigation permits. 65 49°45'N, 155°OO'E, thence:
For Hong Kong. To 165° E, thence great circle to Through Kuril'skiye Ostrova by the Traffic
Bashi Channel, thence as navigation permits. Separation Scheme (1.28) through Chetvertyy
If weather conditions are unfavourable on the parallel Kuril'skiye Proliv, thence:
of 32° N, course can be held to reach the parallel of Great circle to the Traffic Separation Scheme off
30° N, and the ocean crossing made on that parallel. 70 Mys Aniva, thence:
179
7.380.2 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS

To the Traffic Separation Scheme through La Prince Rupert -* Ports on the coast of China
Perouse Strait, thence: 7.382
As navigation permits Diagrams (7.376), (7.195), (7.111)
7.380.2 The shortest route in every case is through Tsugaru
South of the Aleutian Islands. The route is at Kaikyo and the Sea of Japan (7.384 and 7.198.2 for
7.379.2 to Tsugaru Kaikyo, thence as navigation Hong Kong).
permits. Distances in miles (all seasons):
7.380.3
Distances: Dagu
N of the Aleutian Islands 4050 miles; 10 Hong Lanji-
S of the Aleutian Islands (all seasons) 4230 miles. Shanghai Kong angsha
N of Aleutian Islands 4650 5300 4850
S of Aleutian Islands 4700 5340 4900
Prince Rupert —> Manila or Singapore 7.382.1
7.381 15 To avoid the worst of the adverse current and winter
Diagrams (7.376), (7.111) weather of high latitudes, routes are from Dixon
A number of routes, described below, merit Entrance, great circle to 30° N, 180°, thence as at
consideration depending on the season and the 7.377.2 to destination.
prevailing weather. Distances: Shanghai 5610 miles; Hong Kong 6150
The first four routes cross the Regulated Area of 20 miles.
7.350.7. 7.382.2
7.381.1 For Hong Kong and ports farther South. An
The route for Yokohama (7.383.2), passing S of the alternative route is to Guam as at 7.337, thence as at
Aleutian Islands, as far as 44° N, by the appropriate 7.145 to destination.
seasonal route, thence as at 7.376.1. 25 From Guam a favourable current can be expected,
Distances in miles: Manila Singapore except from June to August when it will be adverse in
Winter: 5630 6770 South China Sea.
Summer: 5600 6740 Distance to Hong Kong: 6420 miles.
7.381.2 7.382.3
The route for Yokohama (7.383.1) passing N of the 30 For low-powered vessels in winter, spring and
Aleutian Islands, as far as 52° 25' N, 175° 00' E, thence autumn, one of the following alternatives to the
great circle to jon the route at 7.376.1 in 31° N, 140° E. northern route may be preferred.
Distances: Manila 5570 miles; Singapore 6700 miles. April-May and October, from Dixon Entrance,
7.381.3 rhumb line to 35°N, 160° W, thence along the parallel of
One of the routes to Tsugaru Kaikyo (7.384), either N 35 35° N as follows.
or S of the Aleutian Islands,thence as at 7.376.2. For Shanghai. To the vicinity of Nojima Saki,
thence through Osumi Kaikyo, thence as navigation
Distances in miles permits.
(via Taiwan Strait): Manila Singapore For Hong Kong. To 165° E, thence great circle to
N of Aleutian Islands: 5600 6650 40 Bashi Channel, thence as navigation permits.
S of Aleutian Islands: 5640 6690 7.382.4
7.381.4 November-March, through Hecate Strait to Queen
To avoid the worst of the adverse currents and winter Charlotte Sound, thence rhumb line to 32° N, 145° W,
weather of high latitudes, alternative routes farther S are thence along the parallel of 32° N as follows.
to Guam (7.337), thence to Manila (7.122), or to 45 For Shanghai. To 150° E, thence through Osumi
Singapore (7.123). Kaikyo, thence as navigation permits.
From Guam a favourable current can be expected, For Hong Kong. To 165° E, thence great circle to
except from June to August when it will be adverse in Bashi Channel, thence as navigation permits.
South China Sea. If weather conditions are unfavourable on the parallel
Distances: Manila 6070 miles; Singapore 7310 miles. 50 of 32° N, course can be held to reach the parallel of
7.381.5 30° N, and the ocean crossing made on that parallel.
For low-powered vessels in winter, spring and
autumn, one of the following alternatives to the
northern great circle routes may be preferred. Prince Rupert -> Yokohama
April-May and October, from Dixon Entrance, 55 7.383
rhumb line to 35° N, 160° W, thence: Diagram (7.376)
Along the parallel of 35° N to 170° W, thence: Routes are either N or S of the Aleutian Islands. For
Great circle to San Bernadino Strait, thence: general considerations, see 7.350.
As in Admiralty Sailing Directions to Manila, or All routes cross the Regulated Area of 7.350.7.
As at 7.123 to Singapore. 60 7.383.1
7.381.6 North of the Aleutian Islands. From Dixon
November-March, from Hecate Strait, rhumb line to Entrance, the route is:
32° N, 145° W, thence: Great circle to 54° 10' N, 162° 45' W, thence:
Along the parallel of 32° N to 175° W, thence: Through Unimak Pass to 54° 25' N, 165° 30'W,
Great circle to San Bernadino Strait, thence: 65 thence:
As in Admiralty Sailing Directions to Manila, or Great circle to 52° 25' N, 175° 00' E, thence:
As at 7.123 to Singapore. Great circle to 34° 49' N, 140° 00' E, SE of Nojima
If weather conditions are unfavourable on the parallel Saki, thence:
of 32° N, course can be held to reach the parallel of As navigation permits.
30° N, and the ocean crossing made on that parallel. 70 Distance: 3820 miles.

18fl
 PACIFIC OCEAN AND ADJACENT SEAS 7.387
7.383.2 7.385.2
South of the Aleutian Islands. From Dixon South of the Aleutian Islands. The route is as at
Entrance to the 180° meridian, the route is by rhumb 7.384.2 to Tsugaru Kaikyo, thence as navigation
lines through the following positions: permits.
54 o 40'N, 135°OO'W 53° 4 0 ' N , 160° 0 0 ' W 5 Distance (all seasons): 3910 miles.
54o 50' N, 140° 00' W 53 o 00' N, 165o 00' W
54 o 50'N ) 145° 0 0 ' W 52o 1 5 ' N , 1 7 0 o 0 0 ' W Dutch Harbor • Yokohama or Tsugaru
o o
54 30'N, 150 00'W 51 o 3 0 ' N , 175° 0 0 ' W Kaikyo
54°1O'N, 155 o OO'W 50o 3 0 ' N , 180o 00' 7.386
This part of the route passes about 30 miles S of the 70 Diagram (7.376)
Aleutian Islands, and has the benefit of the W-going Routes are N or S of the Aleutian Islands. For general
Alaska Current. considerations, see 7.350.
At the 180o meridian, the route joins the seasonal North of the Aleutian Islands. The routes are by
routes from Juan de Fuca Strait to Yokohama (7.378.1). great circle to 52° 25' N, 175° 00' E, thence:
7.383.3 75 As at 7.383.1 to Yokohama, or
Distances November-March 3860 miles, As at 7.379.1 to Tsugaru Kaikyo.
April-October 3850 miles. Distances: Yokohama 2560 miles; Tsugaru Kaikyo
2220 miles.
Prince Rupert • Tsugaru Kaikyo South of the Aleutian Islands. The routes are as
7.384 20 navigation permits to 50° 30' N, 180° 00' , thence by the
Diagram (7.376) appropriate seasonal route at 7.387.1 to 44° N, thence:
Routes are either N or S of the Aleutian Islands. For Continuing as at 7.378.1 to Yokohama, or
general considerations, see 7.350. As navigation permits to Tsugaru Kaikyo.
7.384.1 Distances:
North of the Aleutian Islands. The route is as for 25 Yokohama: Winter 2770 miles; Summer 2760;
Yokohama (7.383.1) as far as 52° 25'N, 175° 00'E, Tsugaru Kaikyo (Winter or Summer) 2440 miles.
thence great circle to 43° 40' N, 147° 00' E, thence as
navigation permits (as at 7.379.1).
Distance: 3490 miles. Dutch Harbor <—• Australian ports and
7.384.2 30 Torres Strait
South of the Aleutian Islands. The route is as for 7.387
Yokohama (7.383.2 and 7.378.1) as far as 44° N on the Diagrams (7.376), (7.176), (7.175)
appropriate seasonal route, thence as navigation Routes are through Unimak Pass, thence:
permits. Great circle to pass between Senyavin Islands and
Distance (all seasons): 3530 miles. 35 Oroluk Lagoon, thence:
W of Ngatik Islands, thence:
Prince Rupert • Nakhodka Through the strait between New Ireland and
7.385 Bougainville Island or through Bougainville
Diagram (7.376) Strait into Solomon Sea, thence:
Routes are either N or S of the Aleutian Islands. For 40 As at 7.176, 7.179.1 or 7.184 to destination.
general considerations, see 7.350. Distances:
7.385.1 Torres Strait 5370 miles;
North of the Aleutian Islands. The route is as for *Caloundra Head for Brisbane 5530 miles;
Yokohama (7.383.1) as far as 54' 25' N, 165° 30'W, Sydney 5970 miles;
thence following the route from Juan de Fuca Strait to 45 fPort Phillip for Melbourne 6540 miles.
Nakhodka (7.380.1). *Caloundra Head to Brisbane 35 miles.
Distance: 3740 miles. |Port Phillip to Melbourne 40 miles.

181
 CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTORY REMARKS AND ATLANTIC OCEAN AND

MEDITERRANEAN SEA SAILING ROUTES

INTRODUCTORY REMARKS

8.1.1 Number
Although it may be argued that a standard work on 75 of days
Ocean Passages ought to be confined to the needs of English Channel to Rangoon 100-120
contemporary seamen and that therefore directions for English Channel to Selat Sunda 90-100
sailing ships are out of place, a shortened version of the English Channel to Hong Kong (South-west
information and advice given on the subject in previous Monsoon) 100-120
editions of this book is given here, for the benefit of 20 English Channel to Adelaide 80-90
towing masters and of craft specially susceptible to the English Channel to Melbourne 80-90
main wind and current circulation of the oceans, and, of English Channel to Sydney (or Newcastle) 85-100
course, for ocean-going sailing vessels able to stand up New York to English Channel 25-30
to, and take advantage of, the heavy weather to be New York to Cape Town 65-70
expected on many of the passages. 25 New York to Rio de La Plata 60-65
A selection of the routes described are shown on New York to Melbourne 100-120
Diagram (10.132). Chart 5309— Tracks followed by New York to Selat Sunda 100-110
sailing and low-powered steam vessels—shows many Cape Town to Melbourne 35—40
routes additional to those contained in this volume. Cape Town to Wellington 40-45
8.1.2 30 Cape Town to Rio de La Plata (across the
The routes described have not been modified to take Atlantic) 45
account of the many Traffic Separation Schemes or Cape Town to Rio de La Plata (around Cabo
Areas to be Avoided (1.28-1.29) in force in different de Homos) 110
parts of the world, details of which will be found in Cape Town to Calcutta 40-50
Admiralty Notices to Mariners, on charts or in 35 Cape Town to Shanghai (via Selat Sunda,
Admiralty Sailing Directions. South-west Monsoon) 60
8.1.3 Calcutta to Sydney 60
As regards distances traversed, it has been considered Calcutta to Cape Town 45
more useful to express them as the average number of Calcutta to English Channel 90-100
days taken in ordinary weather by a well-found sailing 40 Hong Kong to English Channel (North-east
vessel of about 2000 tons, which in good conditions Monsoon) 110-120
could log speeds of 10-12 knots but generally averaged Hong Kong to San Francisco 40
100-150 miles a day. The following list, supplied by Hong Kong to Sydney 50-60
Messrs Hardie and Company, of Glasgow, gives the Melbourne to Valparaiso 40-50
duration of a number of voyages. 45 Melbourne to San Francisco 60-70
Melbourne to Rio de La Plata (around Cabo de
Number Homos) 70-80
of days Melbourne to English Channel (around Cabo
English Channel to New York, winter 35-40 de Homos) 80-100
English Channel to New York, summer 40-50 50 Melbourne to Hampton Roads 80-95
English Channel to New Orleans 45-55 Wellington to San Francisco 60-70
English Channel to Rio de Janeiro or Porto de Wellington to Valparaiso 30-35
Santos 45-60 Wellington to Rio de La Plata 55-60
English Channel to Rio de La Plata 55-65 Wellington to English Channel 80-100
English Channel to Valparaiso (around Cabo 55 Valparaiso to English Channel (around Cabo
de Homos) 90-100 de Homos) 80-90
English Channel to Callao (around Cabo de Valparaiso to New York (around Cabo de
Homos) 95-120 Homos) 75-85
English Channel to San Francisco (around Valparaiso to Cape Town 65
Cabo de Homos) 125-150 60 Rio de La Plata to English Channel 70-80
English Channel to Cape Town 50-60 Rio de La Plata to New York 60-70
English Channel to Durban 60-65 Rio de La Plata to Cape Town 20
English Channel to Bombay 100-110 Rio de La Plata to Melbourne 50-55
English Channel to Calcutta 100-120 New Orleans to English Channel 45-50
 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS AND ATLANTIC OCEAN AND MEDITERRANEAN SEA SAILING ROUTES
ROUTES FROM PORTS ON EASTERN SIDE OF ATLANTIC OCEAN
From N o r w e g i a n and Baltic ports
8.2.1
For Canadian and eastern United States ports,
there are two main routes, Northern and Southern, and
a Direct Route.
8.2.2
On the Northern Route, which should only be taken
in autumn, when it is clear of ice, vessels should pass N
of Orkney Islands, or of Shetland Isles if the weather so
dictates. Thence, they should stand W to cross 30° W in
about 55° N, and continue by the Northern Route from
the English Channel (8.5.2).
8.2.3
On the Southern Route, vessels should pass N of
Orkney Islands, or Shetland Isles if necessary, and stand
W far enough to ensure weathering the British Isles.
When clear, they should stand S to join the Southern
Route from the English Channel (8.5.4).
8.2.4
The Direct Route is seldom taken, since it is almost
directly against the prevailing winds and the North
Atlantic Current. To follow it, round the Orkney
Islands or Shetland Isles as above, make W to at least
10° W, and thence SW to join the Direct Route from the
English Channel (8.5.7) in 47° N, 40° W.
8.2.5
For other Atlantic ports, Cape of Good Hope or
Cabo de Hornos, use the Southern Route (8.2.3) and
join the appropriate route from the English Channel
(8.6.1-8.8.8 and 8.10.1-8.13.2) in about 40° N.
From North Sea ports
8.3.1
For Canada and the United States, there are three
routes as in 8.2.1.
On the Northern Route with W winds in summer a
vessel will probably do better by going N-about round
the British Isles than by beating down the English
Channel. On the Southern and Direct Routes the latter
is preferable.
8.3.2
For other Atlantic ports, Cape of Good Hope or
Cabo de Hornos, proceed via the English Channel and
the appropriate route from 8.6.1-8.8.8 and
8.10.1-8.13.2.
From Irish Sea and River Clyde
8.4
For Atlantic Ocean ports. If taking the Northern or
Direct Routes (8.2.2 or 8.2.4) to Newfoundland, Canada
or the United States when bound from Liverpool or
River Clyde, it is generally better to pass N of Ireland
with W winds in summer.
On the Southern Route, and on the routes to other
ports, the weather at the time of sailing will determine
the most advantageous course to join the routes from the
English Channel described below.
English Channel to Canada and United
States
8.5.1
There are two principal routes, a Northern and a
Southern, and also a Direct Route. The Northern Route
should, as a rule, only be taken in autumn, when it is free
from ice.
8.5.4
5 8.5.2
On the Northern Route, although heavy weather is
frequently experienced, the winds are generally more
favourable, and the currents from the Arctic assist in the
latter part of the voyage.
10 When clear of the British Isles stand W and cross the
meridian of 30° W in about 55° N; then steer, according
to destination, for the Strait of Belle Isle, for-St John's
Harbour, Newfoundland, for other Canadian or for
United States ports.
15 For Cabot Strait or Halifax, either try to make Cape
Race by passing N of Virgin Rocks, or, in order to avoid
the ice, cross the banks on the parallel of 44" N, and haul
up on the proper course on reaching 55° W, heavy ice
being seldom met with W of that meridian. Make Cape
20 Race if the weather is clear, and thence steer for a
position S of Saint-Pierre. While on the Grand Banks
during fog, or when there is uncertainty regarding the
position, soundings should be obtained frequently, and
an indraught towards the S coast of Newfoundland must
25 be guarded against.
Caution. For hazards on the Grand Banks of
Newfoundland, see 2.37.
8.5.3
The S coast of Newfoundland, E of Cape Ray, is
30 broken, rocky and dangerous, and the tidal streams are
influenced by the winds. Winds from SE and often also
SW, bring a thick fog, which is most dense near the lee
shore. This coast therefore should not be approached,
except with a decidedly N wind and clear weather.
35 Sable Island should be given a wide berth, as it is a
very dangerous locality owing to the prevalent fog and
variable currents near it. Sounding should never be
neglected in crossing the banks, and should be
continuous whether bound for a Nova Scotia or a United
40 States port. In thick weather, the thermometer is also a
useful guide in approaching the banks off
Newfoundland, as the temperature of the water falls on
nearing them.
With SW winds, while foggy E of the meridian of
45 Flint Island, Cape Breton Island, it is frequently clear
for some miles off the land W of it.
Between Saint-Pierre and Cape Breton Island, when
feeling the way by sounding in foggy weather, the edges
of the deep water channel running through the banks
50 into Cabot Strait are especially good guides. Cape Pine
should not be approached within depths of 70 m nor
Cape St Mary's within depths of 90 m in fog. There is
deep water, of 180 m to 260 m in the approach to
Placentia Bay.
55 8.5.4
The Southern Route is the best route to be followed
during the whole of the year except autumn, on account
of the better weather likely to be experienced, the
certainty of the wind, and the avoidance of both fog and
60 ice off the Newfoundland banks, during the spring and
early part of the summer.
By this route, leaving the English Channel with a fair
wind, steer a direct course as long as it lasts, and at least
ensure sufficient westing to avoid the danger of being set
65 into the Bay of Biscay. When the fair wind fails, take the
Madeira Route (8.8.1), and if the wind permits pass
midway between that island and Arquipelagos dos
Acores into the North-east Trade Wind, but if the wind
does not favour, the Trade Wind will usually be gained
70 sooner by passing nearer to Madeira. In that
183
8.5.5 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS AND ATLANTIC OCEAN AND MEDITERRANEAN SEA SAILING ROUTES
neighbourhood, it is usually found in the summer season
between 32° N and 31° N; in winter, a degree or so
farther S.
8.5.5
For Halifax or Canadian ports, when well within
the Trade Wind limits, run W until in about 48° W, and
thence edge off to the N W passing about 200 miles E of
Bermuda, and direct for Halifax, allowing for the Gulf
Stream setting ENE across the track.
8.5.6
For New York or other United States ports, when
well into the Trade Wind limits, run W, keeping S of
25° N until in about 65° W; then steer NW for any
United States port, hauling out rather earlier for ports
on the N part of this coast. The Gulf Stream will have to
be crossed in the latter part of this route.
8.5.7
The Direct Route across the Atlantic Ocean, from
the English Channel to New York, which is about 1000
miles shorter than the Southern Route, can seldom be
taken on account of the prevailing W winds, and of the
North Atlantic Current and Gulf Stream combined,
running contrary to the desired track. It is, however,
recommended by some navigators, making as directly as
possible from the English Channel, to cross 50° W at
45° N, and thence to the desired port.
English Channel to Bermuda
8.6.1
There are two routes, the Direct and the Southern.
By the Direct Route, proceeed generally as directed in
8.5.7.
By the Southern Route, proceed as directed in 8.8.1 as
far as Madeira, and thence steer SW until within the N
limit of the North-east Trade Wind (which will be
entered when the sun is in the N tropic between the
parallels of 31° N and 32° N, and when it is near the S
tropic between those of 30° N and 31° N), when the
course should be altered gradually towards W keeping
within the limit of the Trade Wind. Cross 40° W in
25° N, which parallel should be preserved until the
meridian of 60° W is reached, when a course for
Bermuda may be steered.
8.6.2
Caution. When approaching the islands every
opportunity should be taken to verify the vessel's
position, and should it be at all doubtful and the weather
unfavourable for seeing the lights, the parallel of the
islands should not be crossed during the night, for the
180 m contour line is too close to the reefs for soundings
to give warning.*
English Channel to West Indies, Gulf of
Mexico and North coast of South America
8.7.1
First proceed as directed as 8.8.1 as far as Madeira.
After passing Madeira try to cross the parallel of 25° N
between 25° W and 30° W, the object being to reach the
North-east Trade Wind as soon as possible. The season
must be taken into consideration, as to how far S it will
be necessary to go to ensure holding the Trade Wind.
8.7.2
For Cuba, if bound for Habana or Matanzas pass
through North-West Providence Channel close along
the W edge of Great Bahama Bank, round North Elbow
Cay of Double-headed Shot Cays on Cay Sal Bank, and
across towards Punta Guanos, on the W side of
*See 2.38 for Area to be Avoided.
Matanzas, out of the stream. Old Bahama Channel may
also be used or, if approaching from W, Cabo San
Antonio may be rounded.
Bound to any port on the S side of Cuba, it is better to
5 pass N of Puerto Rico and Hispaniola during the period
of S winds, which is the rainy season, and S of these
islands when N winds are prevalent.
8.7.3
For the Leeward Islands, Jamaica, Belize or
10 Gulf of Mexico, cross 40° W in about 18° N, and thence
steer direct to pass between Antigua and Guadeloupe;
thence pass close S of Hispaniola and Jamaica, and
thence continue nearly direct.
8.7.4
15 Notes. The channel between Antigua and
Guadeloupe is 30 miles wide, and there is generally
much less current here than farther N or S. It will be
better, however, in using this channel to keep close to the
Antigua shore, and to sight the island on the parallel of
20 17° N. Vessels sometimes pass between Antigua and
Barbuda; this may be done without much risk by day,
but by no means at night, for the soundings are so
irregular that in running down it would be difficult to
tell whether to haul N or S.
25 To ports in Gulf of Mexico, North-West Providence
Channel is used by a great number of vessels, keeping on
the edges of the banks, to avoid the strength of the
current. Old Bahama Channel is also used, but less
commonly.
30 8.7.5
For Venezuelan, Colombian and Caribbean
ports, as far W as San Juan del Norte, cross the meridian
of 40° W in about 13° N; thence steer direct to the NE
extremity of Trinidad and thence W to the desired port,
35 keeping in the strength of the prevailing W-going
current.
8.7.6
For the islands North of Trinidad, the season must
be considered as to how far S it will be necessary to go to
40 ensure holding the Trade Wind. In making for any of
the Windward Islands get in the parallel of the island
about 100 miles E of it.
8.7.7
For Cayenne, cross the meridian of 40° W in 9° N;
45 thence steering to make the parallel of the port from 100
to 200 miles to windward to allow for the strong W-
going current which prevails at all seasons, thence
gradually closing the shore in depths of from 13 m to
18m.
50 8.7.8
For Paramaraibo and Georgetown, cross the
meridian of 40° W between the parallels of 11° N and
12° N, and thence steer to make the land to windward as
for Cayenne.
55
English Channel to South America
English Channel to Arquipelago de Cabo
60 Verde
8.8.1
On leaving the English Channel at once make westing,
as the prevailing winds are from that direction. With a
fair wind from Lizard Point, steer a course to the WSW
65 to gain an offing in 10° W or 12° W.
If the wind should be from W keep on the tack which
enables most westing to be made to get a good offing, and
keep clear of the Bay of Biscay, even standing NW until
well able to weather Cabo Finisterre on the starboard
70 tack. By making a long board to the W nothing is lost, as
 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS AND ATLANTIC OCEAN AND MEDITERRANEAN SEA SAILING ROUTES
the wind will generally be found to veer, so that a change
of wind will be favourable, and even permit a vessel to
pursue a course with a free wind; whilst if embayed in
the Bay of Biscay, any change of wind would necessitate
beating to windward against the current.
It must be borne in mind that the prevailing winds
and currents have a tendency to set towards lie
d'Ouessant, and into the Bay of Biscay when S of it. To
get well to the W is therefore of the greatest importance,
lie d'Ouessant should, in no case, be sighted.
From 10° W or 12° W, shape course to pass Madeira at
any convenient distance, giving a wide berth to Cabo
Finisterre, in passing it, as the current from the Atlantic
Ocean usually sets right onshore there. In winter it is
preferable to pass W of Madeira, for the strong W gales
which occur in November, December and January
produce eddy winds and heavy squalls E of the island.
From Madeira the best track is to pass W of, but just
in sight of Arquipelago de Cabo Verde as the winds are
stronger and steadier W of than E of them.
Arquipelago de Cabo Verde to North Coast
of Brazil
8.8.2
No particular crossings of the equator are necessary
(see 8.8.3), as the E coast of South American has not to
be weathered. From abreast Arquipelago de Cabo Verde
steer a direct course, taking care to make the coast E of
the destination, and thence steering along the coast in
depths of from 18 m to 27 m.
Arquipelago de Cabo Verde to the equator
8.8.3
In considering where to cross the equator it is
necessary to bear in mind that if a vessel crosses far to the
W there will be a less interval of doldrum to cross, but it
may be requisite to tack to weather the coast of South
America, and these crossings vary during the year, as the
direction of the South-east Trade Wind is more S when
the sun is N of the equator than when S of it.
After passing Arquipelago de Cabo Verde, stand S
between the meridians of 26° W and 29° W, being nearer
26° W from May to October, and nearer 29° W from
November to April. The equator should be crossed at
points varying according to the season, as follows:
Between January and April, when the North-east
Trade Wind is well to the S, continue on a S course, and
cross the parallel of 5° N between 25° W and 28° W, and
the equator between 28° W and 31° W.
In May and June the S winds will be met with
between 5° N and 10° N. On meeting them, stand on the
starboard tack so as to cross the parallel of 5° N between
18° W and 20° W. Between 4° N and 5° N, go round on
the port tack, and cross the equator between 23° W and
25° W.
In July, August and September, the S winds will be
met between 10° N and 12° N. On meeting them steer on
the starboard tack so as to cross 5° N between 17° W and
19° W. Go round then on the port tack, and cross the
equator, as in May and June, between 23° W and 25° W.
In October, November and December, the S winds
will be met between the parallels of 6° N and 8° N. On
meeting them, steer so as to cross 5° N between 20° W
and 23° W, then take the tack which gives most southing,
and cross the equator between 24° W and 29° W.
8.8.4
Caution. The South Equatorial Current is not so
strong in the winter of the N hemisphere as in summer
and autumn; but the Mariner must remember that the
8.9.2
strength of the current increases as it advances towards
the American coast.
From the equator southward
5 8.8.5
Having crossed the equator as recommended, stand
across the South-east Trade Wind on the port tack, even
should the vessel fall off to about 260°, for the wind will
draw more to the E as the vessel advances, and finally to
10 due E at the S limit of the Trade Wind. When in the
vicinity of Penedos de Sao Pedro e Sao Paolo, frequent
astronomical observations should be made, the current
should be watched and allowed for, and a good lookout
should be kept, as these rocks are steep-to, and can only
15 be seen on a clear day from a distance of about 8 miles.
The same precautions are necessary, if passing W of Ilha
de Fernando de Noronha, when approaching the
dangerous Atol das Rocas.
On approaching the Brazilian coast between March
20 and September, when the wind is from SE and the
current near the coast sets N, it will be better to keep
from 120 to 150 miles off the land until well S, and steer
so as to be to windward of the port of destination; but
from October to January, when the NE winds prevail
25 and the current sets SW, the coast may be approached
with prudence, and a vessel may steer according to
circumstances for her intended port.
8.8.6
For Rio de Janeiro, from October to March make
30 Cabo Frio and give the coast a prudent berth, as a
constant and sometimes heavy swell sets in. The islands
at the entrance to the harbour should not be approached
until the sea breeze is well set in, as a vessel may run into
a calm and be exposed to the swell and current.
35 8.8.7
For Montevideo or Rio de La Plata, stand direct
through the South-east Trade Wind, passing about 200
miles E of Rio de Janeiro.
8.8.8
40 For Bahia Blanca or ports southward. Bound to
Bahia Blanca, or if, having called at Montevideo, and S-
bound after leaving, or passing Rio de La Plata, keep
well in with the coast. This can be done with safety, as
the winds are almost always from W, and an E gale never
45 comes on without ample warning. Pass Cabo Corrientes
at a distance of 40 to 50 miles, and make the land S of
Cabo Blanco and afterwards keep it topping on the
horizon until the entrance to Estrecho de Magallanes has
been passed.
50 This W route cannot be too much insisted on, and a
vessel would do well to make a tack inshore, even though
with apparent loss of ground, to maintain it. As long as
the wind does not back to the E of S the water will be
smooth, and more sail can be carried than if farther out;
55 and should the wind come from SE (unless when just off
Cabo Blanco), the land recedes so much as to afford
plenty of sea room.
Atlantic Ocean to Pacific Ocean
60 8.9.1
Estrecho de Magallanes is not advised as a sailing
route. The passages of the old navigators, some of whom
were more than 80 days between Puerto del Hambre and
Cabo Pilar, the violence of the squalls, and the lack of
65 searoom, sufficiently attest this.
8.9.2
Rounding Cabo de Hornos W-bound, the usual
track is to take as direct a course as possible from a
position 200 miles E of Rio de Janeiro to about 45° S,
70 60° W, and from thence so as to pass 30 or 40 miles E of
185
8.10.1 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS AND ATLANTIC OCEAN AND MEDITERRANEAN SEA SAILING ROUTES
Isla de los Estados. This track lies between 120 and 200
miles E of the Patagonian coast, and is the most direct
route for a large and well-found ship. The old
navigators, however, recommended that sailing ships
should keep within 100 miles of the coast, in order to
avoid the heavy sea that is raised by the W gales and to
profit by the variableness of the inshore winds when
from a W direction.
Near the coast from April to September, when the sun
has N declination, the winds prevail more from WNW
to NNW than from any other quarter. Gales from the E
are of very rare occurrence, and even when they do blow,
the direction being oblique upon the coast, it is not
hazardous to keep the land aboard.
From October to March, when the sun has a S
declination, though the winds shift to the S of W, and
frequently blow hard, yet as it is a weather shore, the sea
goes down immediately after a gale. The winds at this
time are certainly against making quick progress, yet as
they seldom remain fixed in one point, and frequently
back or veer 6 or 8 points in as many hours, advantage
may be taken of the changes so as to keep close in with
the coast.
When passing Isla de los Estados the usual course is E
of the island, but there is, off its E extremity, a heavy
tide-rip which extends for a distance of 5 or 6 miles, or
even more, to seaward. When the wind is strong and
opposed to the tidal stream, the overfalls are
overwhelming, and very dangerous, even to a large and
well-found vessel. Seamen must use every precaution to
avoid this perilous area.
Estrecho de Le Maire provides the shortest route
round Cabo de Homos with a valuable saving, when the
difficulty of making westing is considered, of some 60
miles. Furthermore, a vessel is to some extent protected
from W gales and heavy seas when between Estrecho
de Le Maire and Cabo de Hornos, and she will avoid
the NE-going current which is encountered between
the E extremity of Isla de los Estados and Cabo de
Hornos.
On the other hand, the conditions must be suitable.
Passage of Estrecho de Le Maire is best attempted
during daylight, with a fair wind and tide; the best time
for beginning the passage through being at one hour
after high water. A vessel should, if necessary, heave-to
off the entrance to the strait until that moment. Under
these conditions, even should the wind fail, or come
adverse, a vessel would probably drive through rapidly,
for the tidal streams are strong. With a S wind, it would
not be advisable to attempt the strait, for, with a
weather-going tide, the sea is very turbulent, and might
severely endanger the safety of a small vessel, and do
much damage to a large one. In calm weather it would be
still more imprudent, unless the W side of the strait can
be reached, where a vessel might anchor, on account of
the tidal steams which set towards Isla de los Estados
where, if it becomes necessary to anchor, it would be
very deep water, and close to the land.
Should the wind fail, and the tidal stream not be
sufficiently strong to carry a vessel through, there is a
convenient anchorage in Bahia Buen Suceso.
Winds from N and NE are often accompanied by
thick, misty weather; vessels approaching the strait are
thus often compelled to lie-to for a time.
June and July are the best months for making a W-
bound passage around Cabo de Hornos, as the wind is
then often in the E quarter. The days are short, however,
and the weather is cold. August and September are bad
months, heavy gales with snow and ice occurring at
about the time of the equinox. From October to March,
in summer, the winds are almost invariably W.
In April and May, the winds are slightly more
favourable. The passage from E to W around Cabo de
Hornos should usually be made in about 57° S, or at
5 about 100 miles S of the cape, but if, after passing Isla de
los Estados, the wind be W, the vessel should be kept
upon the starboard tack, unless it veers to S of SSW,
until in 60° S, and then on the tack upon which most
westing may be made. On this parallel the wind is
10 thought by some persons to prevail more from the E
than any other quarter.
It would usually be necessary to stand S in this
manner from August to March; but from April fair
passages have been made by keeping nearer the land and
75 sighting Islas Diego Ramirez. There is no advantage to
be gained by attempting, even with a fair wind, to go
close to Cabo de Hornos; for the E-going Southern
Ocean Current sets close past the cape, and appears to
flow with greater velocity under the land than farther
20 seaward on the route from Cabo San Juan.
Southbound from English Channel
8.10.1
General directions.* For all destinations, at once
25 make westing, as the prevailing winds are from that
direction. With a fair wind, from Lizard Point, steer to
the WSW to gain an offing in 10° W or 12° W.
8.10.2
For Western French ports, the above WSW course
30 should be modified, according to weather, in order to
reach the destination more directly; but it must be borne
in mind that the prevailing winds and currents have a
tendency to set a vessel toward lie d'Ouessant, and the
many surrounding dangers. If circumstances require it,
35 shelter may be obtained in one of the French anchorages
until the weather improves, but Pointe de Penmarc'h
should never be made.
8.10.3
For Lisboa, having gained an offing in 10° W or
40 12° W, and with the wind from the W, haul to the wind
on the tack which will best enable the approach to the
proper course to be made without being drawn into the
Bay of Biscay, which is especially to be avoided. During
and after SW gales the indraft of the Bay is strongest,
45 and is most to be guarded against.
Should S and SE gales have been experienced the
vessel will have been driven W, and in this case the aim
should be to make progress S. On the other hand, if W
gales have prevailed, and the vessel has become
50 embayed, it may be found difficult to weather Cabo
Finisterre or even Cabo Ortegal; in these circumstances
refuge may be found in El Ferrol, La Coruna, Ria del
Barquero, or Ria de Vivero; and, in extreme cases, in the
ports and roadsteads of France from La Gironde to
55 Brest.
Rather than run any risk of becoming embayed in this
manner, it will be better to make a long board to the W
(as described above), and since W winds generally veer,
if a good offing has been made, the course can afterwards
60 be pursued a point or two free, making allowance for a
SE-going set.
Proceeding S of Cabo Finisterre, shape course to clear
Os Farilhoes and Ilha Berlenga, which should be given a
wide berth in thick weather; with SW winds it is better
65 to keep off the land, to avoid the N-going current that
sets along the coast with those winds, as well as to be in a
* Traffic Separation Schemes have been established in
the W approaches to the English Channel and off the W
70 coasts of Spain and Portugal, see 8.1.2.
 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS AND ATLANTIC OCEAN AND MEDITERRANEAN SEA SAILING ROUTES
position to profit by any change of wind to the W and
NW. In short, it is better to run to the S at some distance
from the coast of Portugal, as W winds make it a lee
shore, and in winter these gales are frequent, blowing
with great strength, and continuing for several days
together.
Bound to Lisboa, when abreast Ilha Berlenga, steer
for a position off Cabo da Roca.*
8.10.4
For Strait of Gibraltar, take the Lisboa route as
directed in 8.10.3 to clear Os Farilhoes and Ilha
Berlenga, and then continue down the coast as far as
Cabo de Sao Vicente; thence shape a course for the Strait
of Gibraltar.
Cabo de Sao Vicente should be sighted, and then,
after rounding it, as the vessel proceeds SE, the state of
the wind and weather, and the indraft and current of the
Strait of Gibraltar, must be considered and allowed for.
With the wind from NW, through N, to NE, make Cabo
Trafalgar; with it from W, through S, to E, make Cabo
Espartel.
In thick weather the safety of the vessel may be
assured by making the bank which extends about 20
miles from the coast abreast Cabo Trafalgar, but care
must be taken, on nearing Isla de Tarifa, to avoid Los
Cabezos.*
Cabo Espartel is safe to approach and can be seen from
a long distance. To the S of Cabo Espartel, the land falls,
and has been mistaken for the mouth of the strait; so that
at night, when the light is not seen, caution is necessary.
If an E wind be met, and it is too strong to beat against,
shelter will be found under Cabo Espartel, the vessel
either keeping under way, or anchoring off Playa de
Jeremias, about 3 miles S of the cape.
When working through the Strait of Gibraltar against
an E wind, keep in mid-channel to have the advantage of
the current whilst the W-going tidal stream is running,
but with the E-going stream either shore may be
approached, with a chance of meeting favourable slants
of wind. When Isla de Tarifa is passed, the force of the
wind lessens.
When the E wind inclines to the N, it is advisable to
keep on the Spanish coast, avoiding La Perla, but when
it inclines to the S, the African coast is preferable.
English Channel to Cape of Good Hope
8.11.1
Follow the directions given in 8.8.1 and 8.8.3 to cross
the equator between 23° W and 31° W, according to
season, passing W of Arquipelago de Cabo Verde.
Having crossed the equator, stand across the South-east
Trade Wind on the port tack, even if the vessel cannot
make a better course than WSW, for the wind will draw
more to the E as the vessel advances, and finally to E at
the S limit of the Trade Wind. When in the vicinity of
Penedos de Sao Pedro e Sao Paolo and Ilha de Fernando
de Noronha precautions should be taken as in 8.8.5.
During the greater part of the year the South-east Trade
Wind fails on a line drawn from Cape of Good Hope to
Ilha da Trinidade and Ilhas Martin Vaz. This limit
varies according to season.
When S of the South-east Trade Wind, fresh winds
variable in direction will be met. Those from NE,
through N to NW, if accompanied by cloudy weather,
often shift suddenly to SW or S, but sometimes the wind
* Traffic Separation Schemes have been established off
the W coasts of Spain and Portugal, and in Strait of
Gibraltar, see 8.1.2.
8.12.2
steadies between W and WSW. From Ilha da Trinidade
shape course to the SE to cross the parallel of 30° S in
about 22° W, and the meridian of Greenwich in about
35° S to 37° S, whence to Cape of Good Hope winds
5 from Wand S usually prevail. If E-bound round Cape of
Good Hope, cross the meridian of Greenwich in about
40° S.
After passing the meridian of Greenwich, a strong In-
going current will frequently be experienced; and on
10 nearing the land, when bound to Table Bay, great
caution is required, as there it will be found almost
constantly running strongly to the N and, if it is
disregarded, a vessel may have difficulty and lose time in
reaching the bay. If bound to Simons Bay during the S
75 summer, it will be better to make the land about Cape
Hangklip, as a strong current sets at that period across
the entrance to False Bay towards Cape Point.
If near the coast at night, and the land is not visible,
keep to the SW until the position is ascertained. In any
20 circumstances, at night, there is great difficulty in
judging the distance of lights situated under high land.
Therefore, the prudent course for a stranger to pursue
when making Table Bay is to keep off and on until
daylight, far enough W of Green Point to prevent being
25 becalmed near the land and set in upon the coast by the
heave of the sea.
For continuation to the Indian Ocean, see 8.70.
8.11.2
Note. As the wind seldom, if ever, blows from E or
30 NE (ie directly off the peninsula), sailing vessels bound
either for Table Bay or round Cape of Good Hope
should ensure a weatherly position to the • N or S,
according to the season. Those for Simons Bay have
been detained many days by south-easters off Lion's
35 Head and Hout Bay, in consequence of their making the
land too far to the N during the summer season. The
same winds would have been fair for them had they been
30 miles farther S. On the other hand, a vessel bound for
Table Bay in the winter season will find it difficult to
40 make her port from a position off Cape Point, during the
continuance of N and NW winds, notwithstanding the
general prevalence of a NNW-going current.
45 English Channel to West African ports
8.12.1
For Banjul or Freetown, follow the directions given
in 8.8.1, as far as Madeira. Thence steer so as to pass 60
to 100 miles W of Islas Canarias and from abreast these
50 islands take one of the following routes, according to
season.
From November to April, steer due S to about 20° N,
and then edge over to the African coast, and steer as
directly as possible to destination.
55 From May to October, keep more to the W, so as to
sight Arquipelago de Cabo Verde; and, after picking up
the South-east Trade Wind in about 10° N, stand on the
starboard tack direct to destination.
Note. Some navigators recommend standing to the W
60 of Arquipelago de Cabo Verde, from abreast Islas
Canarias; the North-east Trade Wind being sometimes
held longer by doing so, and turning E after passing
them.
8.12.2
65 For Lagos or Calabar River, follow 8.12.1, as far as
Islas Canarias, and then take the following seasonal
routes.
From November to April, after edging towards the
coast as in 8.12.1, keep it at about 60 miles distance until
70 abreast the port of destination.
187
8.13.1 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS AND ATLANTIC OCEAN AND MEDITERRANEAN SEA SAILING ROUTES

From May to October, keep about 200 miles off the
African coast during the South-west Monsoon. Turn to
the E in about 6° N or 7° N, 15° W and, closing the land
to keep in the Guinea Current, steer to destination.
English Channel to Saint Helena
8.13.1
The usual route is as for Cape of Good Hope (8.11.1)
to beyond the South-east Trade Wind, then making
enough easting to be able to enter the Trade Wind again
and weather Saint Helena, which should be approached
from SE. As a rule, avoid going on the starboard tack, or
decreasing latitude, until Saint Helena bears about
035°
8.13.2
Northern Route. From January to April another
route, known as the Northern Route, is, by some
authorities, deemed preferable; that is, pass E of
Arquipelago de Cabo Verde and along the African coast
until past Cape Palmas, and thence, keeping in the
Guinea Current, pass close to Sao Tome. In March, try
to reach about 7° S or 8° S, 4" E or 5° E, from whence
Saint Helena will generally be fetched on the port tack;
but in June and early July it will probably be sufficient to
get as far as 4° S or 5° S in the same longitude, as the
wind is then generally more E.
Bay of Biscay and West coasts of Spain and
Portugal to Atlantic Ocean and English
Channel
8.14
On the usual route, whether N-bound or S-bound,
the importance of making to the W as quickly as
possible, to join the routes to or from the Channel,
cannot be too strongly stressed. From the Bay of Biscay,
it may even be advisable to postpone sailing until a
favourable wind enables a vessel to avoid all risk of being
embayed. The indraft of the Bay is strongest after SW
gales.
See 8.5.1-8.8.8 and 8.10.1-8.13.2 from English
Channel, and 8.15.1 from Gibraltar.
coast, as by crossing to the African coast, where the wind
will probably be less, a vessel will be set to leeward.
Should the wind shift to WNW or NW, the Spanish
coast should still be kept.*
5 If unable to fetch Tangier by following these
directions cross to the African coast and work up that
coast with the favouring stream, anchoring when
necessary, until Tangier Bay is reached. But Isla de
Tarifa should be fetched before standing across,
10 otherwise there will be no certainty of weathering Punta
Cires, and, should a vessel fall to leeward of it, it will be
difficult even to regain Gibraltar Bay.
Having weathered Punta Cires, work within the
counter-current and near the shore to take advantage of
w any slant of wind that may occur, and then doubling
Punta Malabata, gain Tangier Bay, whence it will be
easy to regain the Spanish coast. When the meridian of
Tangier is passed, there is less current and a more
manageable wind than in the narrows.
20 8.15.2
Note. With W winds, if a small vessel makes
Peninsula de la Almina, Ceuta, instead of Europa Point,
she may work up on the African coast within the limits of
the tidal streams, anchoring during the E-going stream.
25 From S of Ceuta to Gibraltar work up as far as Punta
Cires, then take advantage of the W-going stream, cross
the strait, sailing a point free. If the wind is SW this is
more easily done, with the favourable slants of wind met
with on the African coast.
30 In light winds, preserve a good offing when in the
vicinity of Cabo de Sao Vicente, as the currents
generally set strongly along the land, and have a
tendency towards the cape. Ripples are occasionally
seen about 3 miles SW of and off the cape. After passing
35 Cabo de Sao Vicente stand out to the NW on the
prevailing N winds until a favourable wind is met. Get
an offing of at least 100 or 150 miles to avoid the S and
SE-going current near the coast of Portugal.*
If S winds should be met with, stand to the N keeping
40 sufficiently to the W to be able to weather lie d'Ouessant
easily and do not steer to the E until N of the parallel of
that island.

Gibraltar to English Channel

45
General directions
8.15.1
The W-bound passage through Strait of Gibraltar
against the general E-going current is, even with a fair
wind (especially during neap tides), somewhat difficult 50
for sailing vessels, but with W winds, which increase the
strength of the current, it is, for a large ship, almost
impossible.
From Europa Point work along the coast of Spain
during the W-going tidal stream until reaching Isla de 55
Tarifa, and, if necessary, anchor there to await the next
favourable stream. If from Algeciras, get under way at
half ebb and so reach Punta del Acebuche by the
commencement of the W-going stream.
If successful in doubling Isla de Tarifa by keeping to 60
the Spanish coast, continue working up Playa de los
Lances while the tidal stream remains favourable. After
gaining Punta de la Pena tower (if it be preferred not to
work inshore of Los Cabezos) cross to the African coast
and work up under that as directed below. If the wind be 65
from SW with moderate weather keep to the Spanish
Gibraltar to Halifax or New York
General directions
8.16
Having cleared Strait of Gibraltar as described in
8.15.1, stand to the SW into the North-east Trade
Wind. Thence continue as directed in 8.5.4-8.5.6.
Gibraltar to West Indies, South America,
Cabo de Hornos or Cape of Good Hope
General directions
8.17
Having cleared the Strait as described in 8.15.1, stand
SW and join the appropriate route (8.7.1-8.8.8 and
8.10.1-8.11.2).
* Traffic Separation Schemes have been established in
Strait of Gibraltar and off the W coasts of Spain and
Portugal. See 8.1.2.
 INTRODUCTORY RFMARKS AND ATLANTIC OCEAN AND MEDITERRANEAN SEA SAILING ROUTES
ROUTES IN MEDITERRANEAN SEA
Gibraltar to Gulf of Lions and Genova
8.19.1
After leaving Gibraltar, keep in mid-channel
whether the wind be from E or W; thence follow the
summer or the winter route described below.*
8.19.2
Summer route. Pass between Islas Baleares and
Spain. A vessel bound to Marseille should sight Cabo de
San Sebastian or Cabo Creus before crossing the Gulf of
Lions; but if bound to Gulf of Genoa she should make
the land about lies d'Hyeres. In most cases, when bound
to Genova or Livorno, the sooner the coast of Provence
is made, the more secure the voyage, unless the wind
should be settled from SE to SW.
8.19.3
Winter route. Keep along the coast of Spain up to
Cabo Creus, where shelter may be obtained in Bahia de
Rosas in case of a N gale or bad weather, and thence, if
bound to Marseille, stand across the Gulf of Lions and
pass well W of lie de Planier, but in case of a SE wind try
to make easting as quickly as possible as far as 5° E. If
bound to Gulf of Genoa make lies d'Hyeres.
8.19.4
Cautions. Sailing vessels rounding Cap Corse, the N
end of Corse, in winter, should give it a berth of 6 or 8
miles, as within that distance dangerous whirlwinds and
squalls come off from the cape.
When approaching the N shore of the Gulf of Lions,
with S winds, the greatest caution is necessary, as the
currents with these winds set strongly N and NW, and
many vessels have been wrecked.
Gibraltar to Sardegna, Sicilia, or Napoli
8.20.1
Summer route. With a fair wind, pass between Isla
de Alboran and the coast of Spain and midway between
Islas Baleares and the coast of Africa, along the S coast of
Sardegna, and N or S of Sicilia according to the port to
which bound.
With an E wind, work to windward in mid-channel,
and then between Islas Baleares and the coast of Africa,
keeping nearer the coast of Africa with the wind to the S
of E, but nearer the islands with the wind to the N of E.
8.20.2
Winter route. Keep along the coast of Spain as far as
Cabo de Palos, and thence make for the S end of
Sardegna, and pass N or S of Sicilia.
Gibraltar to Malta
8.21.1
Summer route. From May to September, steer
midway between Spain and Africa until abreast Cabo de
Gata, and thence keep to the African coast as far as Cap
Bon to profit by the E-going current, passing N of lies de
la Galite. Thence proceed direct for Malta, passing N or
S of Isola di Pantelleria and the Maltese islands
according to circumstances.*
8.21.2
Winter route. From October to April, W winds (SW
to NW) principally prevail, making it desirable to keep
along the coast of Spain as far as Cabo de Palos, and then
to steer for the S coast of Sardegna. In all circumstances
8.24
s the African coast should be avoided in the winter, as the
N gales make it a dangerous lee shore. From S of
Sardegna make for Cap Bon, and pass N of Isola di
Pantelleria and GRawdex. With a strong SW wind,
however, the African coast may be kept as far as Cap
10 Bon.*
8.21.3
Note. If leaving Gibraltar with an E wind, work to
windward in mid-channel as far as Cabo de Palos, and
thence to the S end of Sardegna. Thence make for Cap
15 Bon, and pass N or S of Isola di Pantelleria and the
Maltese islands according to circumstances.
Malta to Gibraltar
20 8.22.1
Usual route.* With a fair wind, after passing lies
Cani, keep well off the African coast to avoid the E-going
current, and make the Spanish coast about Cabo de
Palos, afterwards keeping along it to Gibraltar.
25 Great care is needed in making Strait of Gibraltar in
the thick weather which usually accompanies E winds,
as vessels mistaking the Rock of Gibraltar for Sidi Musa
and supposing they were passing through the strait and
vice versa, have been wrecked in Bahia Mala and
30 Ensenada de Tetuan, where the land is low.
With NW winds work along the coast of Sicilia to
Isola Marettimo and then work across to the S coast of
Sardegna and the S coast of Spain. The difficulty of
getting to windward with W wind increases as the Strait
35 of Gibraltar is approached, vessels being frequently
obliged to remain some days at anchor off the coast.
Short tacks should be made along the Spanish coast to
avoid the E-going current in mid-channel.
If a NW gale be encountered between Malta and Isola
40 di Pantelleria, it is better to put back to Malta rather than
risk straining the ship in the heavy sea then met in that
channel.
8.22.2
An alternative route, recommended as a better one,
45 is, on leaving Malta, to stand on the starboard tack
towards the coast of Africa, and work along it up to Cap
Bon, subsequently keeping well off the coast of Africa.
50 Napoli, Sicilia, or Sardegna to Gibraltar
8.23
At all times of the year pass along the S coasts of
Sardegna and Islas Baleares, and keep along the coast of
Spain from Cabo de Palos, noting the remarks in 8.22.1.
55
Genova and Gulf of Lions to Gibraltar
8.24
60 At all times of the year make for Cabo de San Antonio,
and then keep along the coast of Spain, noting the
remarks in 8.22.1.
65 *Traffic Separation Schemes have been established off
Cap Bon and ties Cani. See 8.1.2.
189
8-25 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS AND ATLANTIC OCEAN AND MEDITERRANEAN SEA SAILING ROUTES
ROUTES FROM PORTS ON WEST COAST OF AFRICA AND FROM ATLANTIC ISLANDS
Freetown or Arquipelago de Cabo Verde to
English Channel
8.25
Stand to the NW into the North-east Trade Wind.
Run through the Trade Wind, passing W of
Arquipelago de Cabo Verde, and then follow the route
recommended for sailing vessels from Cape Town to
England in 8.40.1.
Freetown to Ascension Island
8.26
When clear of Saint Ann Shoals run along the coast,
within 50 miles of the land, until past Cape Palmas,
when an endeavour should be made to cross the equator
between the meridians of 3° W and 8° W, and then,
without making a tack, Ascension Island will be fetched.
During November long-continued calms and a strong
NW-going current are experienced in the vicinity of
Saint Ann Shoals.
Ghana, Nigeria or Bight of Biafra to
Freetown or intermediate ports
8.27.1
For Freetown, stand S from the N part of the Bight
of Biafra and, if possible, pass W of Bioko and cross the
equator as soon as possible, unless the vessel can point as
high as WNW. When S of the equator stand W in the
South Equatorial Current, and as westing is made the
wind will be found to shift gradually round to the SE.
When in about 10° W recross the equator and shape
course for Freetown.
From any place in the Gulf of Guinea E of Cape
Palmas, stand S into the South Equatorial Current and
then proceed as above.
8.27.2
For intermediate ports, in working to windward in
the Bight of Benin, it is advisable to stand off on the
starboard tack during the day, and inshore on the port
tack by night, tacking if the wind should veer. If going
some distance along the Guinea coast it is advisable to
stand across the equator and make westing in the South
Equatorial Current.
In the Harmattan season (November to February) the
Guinea Current near the land in this bight is checked,
and inshore a W-going set is felt.
Ghana, Nigeria or Bight of Biafra to
English Channel.
8.28
Stand S of the equator into the South Equatorial
Current, and then make westing, as from the Bight of
Biafra to Freetown (8.27.1). Recross the equator in
about 20° W, and then, as from Cape of Good Hope
(8.40.1) run through the North-east Trade Wind, and
shape a course for the English Channel.
Ghana, Nigeria or Bight of Biafra to South
America
Via Saint Helena
8.29.1
Keep in the Guinea Current until in the Bight of
Biafra, and then work along the coast as far as 6° S,
whence there will be little difficulty in reaching Saint
Helena by keeping on the port tack. From Cape Palmas a
vessel on the starboard tack will generally reach Cap
Lopez and often S of Pagalu.
From Saint Helena, keep in the South-east Trade
5 Wind, at about 20° S, until leaving Ilha da Trinidade,
when edge off for Rio de Janeiro, or directly thence to
the required destination.
Via Ascension Island
10 8.29.2
Stand S on the starboard tack, generally weathering
Sao Tome, as far as the equator; then stand W, taking
care to keep in the South Equatorial Current. Progress
will be slow at first, but as westing is made, the South-
15 east Trade Wind will be felt.
From Cape Coast Castle stand across the equator on
the starboard tack, and then as above.
For vessels from the coast S of the equator the winds
are always favourable, gradually backing from SW to SE
20 as the island is approached.
From Ascension Island, stand through the South-east
Trade Wind, to pick up the route from the English
Channel to South America (8.8.1-8.8.8) and by it
proceed direct to the required destination.
25
Ghana and Bight of Biafra to Cape Town
and Cape of Good Hope
30
For Cape Town
8.30.1
Along the whole shore of the Bight of Biafra work to
windward with the land and sea breezes, anchoring
35 when necessary to prevent being set N by the current,
especially during April and May, the season of calms
and tornadoes.
8.30.2
From Cap Lopez to River Congo maintain a good
40 offing, only approaching the shore to take advantage of
the land breezes, which begin to blow at, or a few hours
before, sunrise. In February, and sometimes in October,
the sea breeze extends so well to the W as to enable
vessels to head along the coast on either tack, but during
45 May the wind blows steadily along the coast from S and
S by E, night and day, with a N-going current of 1 knot.
To cross the stream from River Congo (see Admiralty
Sailing Directions) either keep 200 miles off the coast or
keep in anchoring ground; the latter is preferable. The
50 usual course is to beat alongshore as far as Ponta
Vermelha, keeping on the bank of soundings in order to
anchor if the wind falls light, crossing the stream when
the sea breeze has well set in.
8.30.3
From River Congo to Luanda, anchor every night
55 when the sea breeze falls light; weigh with the first of the
land breeze and continue on the port tack until about
1300; then tack, and by the time the sea breeze fails good
progress will have been made to the S.
60 8.30.4
From Luanda to Baia Namibe. In the
neighbourhood of Ponta das Palmeirinhas, the currents
sets to the N with considerable force, and a good tack off
the land for 50 or 60 miles will enable the vessel to
65 weather the point; it seldom answers to work
alongshore. Do not get away from the land more than 50
or 60 miles, as beyond these limits the sea breeze
declines in force and draws more to the S, which would
necessarily cause a loss of ground on the inshore tack,
70 besides which the advantage of the alternate land and sea
190
 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS AND ATLANTIC OCEAN AND MEDITERRANEAN SEA SAILING ROUTES
breezes, which are almost invariably experienced closer
inshore, would be lost.
8.30.5
To the S of Cabo Negro there is no difficulty in
working S if advantage is taken of the variations of the
wind, and the tacks are arranged accordingly. As rollers
are frequent, the shore must be given a good berth. To
the S of Cape Frio, N winds may be expected from May
to August.
8.30.6
For Cape of Good Hope. Stand off and run through
the Trade Wind, and approach the Cape as when bound
from England. See 8.11.1.
Ascension Island to English Channel
8.31
Ascension Island lies on the direct route from Cape
Town to the English Channel. Follow the relevant part
of the directions in 8.40.1.
Ascension Island to South America
8.32
General directions are given in 8.29.2 and 8.8.5-8.8.8.
Ascension Island to Saint Helena
8.33
Proceed S on the port tack, and when beyond the limit
of the Trade Wind make easting and re-enter the Trade
Wind far enough to windward to ensure weathering
Saint Helena. Avoid going on the starboard tack, or
decreasing the latitude, until Saint Helena bears about
010°.
Ascension Island to Cape Town or Cape of
Good Hope
8.34
Run to the S on the port tack through, and then out of,
the South-east Trade Wind. Then stand SE with the
object of crossing the Greenwich meridian between
35° S and 37° S. The parallel of 30° S will be crossed
probably not W of about 14° W.
Continue between the parallels of 35° Sand37° S, and
make destination from SW.
If bound to the Indian Ocean without calling at an
intermediate port, proceed as directed in 8.70.
Ascension Island to equatorial and South-
west coasts of Africa
8.35
Notes and precautions. Leaving Ascension Island
on the starboard tack, a vessel will fetch the coast of
Africa, according to the season at some point between
Cap Lopez and Luanda or even farther S. In May,
however, the wind tends to be more E and a vessel may
not weather Pagalu; on the other hand, a good vessel,
sailing well, may make a landfall S of River Congo. Two
precautions are, however, necessary, the first is not to
get N of the parallel of 3° N or 4° N, and the second, not
to bring the port of destination to bear more than 160° ;
an occasional short tack, as the wind shifts a little, may
therefore be necessary, but the whole passage may
sometimes be made with a free wind.
Saint Helena to South America
8.36
Proceed as directed in 8.29.1, and if bound to
Montevideo pass about 100 miles S of Ilha da Trinidade;
steer thence as directly as possible to destination.
8.40.2
Saint Helena to Ascension Island and
English Channel
8.37
Since both Saint Helena and Ascension Island lie on,
or very close to the route from Cape Town to the English
Channel, follow the relevant directions in 8.40.1.
10 Saint Helena to West coast of Africa
8.38
Vessels will generally fetch as far S as Benguela,
except in May, when the South-east Trade Wind has
more easting in it and the lee current is strong. To all
15 places N of Benguela, therefore, the winds are
favourable. They veer from SE to S and SW as the coast
is approached.
20 Saint H e l e n a to Cape Town or Cape of
Good Hope
8.39
Run S on the port tack through and out of the Trade
Wind, and then stand SE, crossing the meridian of
25 Greenwich between 35° S and 37° S (probably not
getting W of 10° W to 14° W). Then keep between these
parallels, as in the passage from England to Cape Town
(8.11.1) and make Cape Town or Cape of Good Hope
from SW.
30 If bound to the Indian Ocean without calling at an
intermediate port, follow the directions in 8.70.
35 Cape Town or Cape of Good Hope to Saint
Helena, Ascension Island, English Channel,
or Bordeaux
8.40.1
For the English Channel, first obtain a good offing
40 to the NW as squalls from NW and WNW are not
infrequent near the coast, and have been experienced in
both seasons. Then shape course for Saint Helena.
From Saint Helena steer a direct course for Ascension
Island, passing it on either side, and crossing the equator
45 between 25° W and 30° W (in July between 20° W and
25° W, to ensure better winds). Then make a course to
the N to reach the North-east Trade Wind as soon as
possible (in July and August crossing the parallel of
10° N to the W of 30° W), and run through it. The
50 North-east Trade Wind will probably be lost in about
26° N to 28° N, and 38° W to 40° W, when W winds may
be expected, and on reaching these shape course for the
English Channel.
It is seldom advisable to pass E of Arquipelago dos
55 Acores but should the wind draw to the NW when near
them the most convenient channel through them may be
taken. If E winds are experienced after passing
Arquipelago dos Acores the vessel should still be kept on
the starboard tack, as W winds will probably be sooner
60 found.
From November to February, a vessel should pass
about 50 miles W of Flores and Corvo; but from June to
August, at about 250 miles W of these islands. At other
times of the year, at intermediate positions.
65 8.40.2
For Bordeaux, proceed as for the English Channel
but begin to make easting on reaching the parallel of
30° N, passing between Terceira and Sao Miguel and
rounding the NW point of Spain at from 60 to 80 miles
70 distance.
191
8.41.1 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS AND ATLANTIC OCEAN AND MEDITERRANEAN SEA SAILING ROUTES
Cape Town or Cape of Good Hope to North
and Central America and West Indies
8.41.1
To cross the equator, follow the route to the English
Channel (8.40.1) as far as 5° E and then steer with a fair
Trade Wind towards Ilha de Fernando de Noronha. On
reaching 10° S, at about 30° W, stand more to the N, so
as to cross the equator between 31° W and 34° W, and as
soon as the North-east Trade Wind has been picked up,
steer through it, and thence as follows.
8.41.2
For New York, try to reach 30° N, 70° W, and thence
steer as directly as possible to New York.
8.41.3
For North coast of South America, Trinidad,
Guyana, Surinam and Guyane Francaise, proceed
towards New York as in 8.41.2; leave that route when
clear of the Equatorial Counter-current and proceed to
destination as described in 8.7.6-8.7.8.
8.41.4
For Leeward Islands, Jamaica, Belize, or ports
in the Gulf of Mexico. Proceed as in 8.41.3, making W
as described in 8.7.3.
ROUTES FROM PORTS ON WESTERN SIDE OF ATLANTIC OCEAN
From Canada and East coast of United
States
8.44.1
For the English Channel, owing to the prevailing
fair winds and favourable currents, great circle or
rhumb line courses may be steered as desired, provided
that care is taken to avoid ice.
8.44.2
For Cape Town or Cape of Good Hope, make for
35° N, 45° W. It is better to be about 60 miles N of this
position in midsummer and the same amount S in
midwinter. From this position there are two main routes
according to the time of year, offering the quickest
passage through the Doldrums.
From May to September, steer from about 36° N,
45° W to 25° N, 30° W, and thence through the North-
east Trade Wind until meeting the South-east Trade
Wind between the parallels of 1°N and 5° N. Then
proceed on the starboard tack, crossing the parallel of
5° N between 17° W and 20° W, the more E longitude in
July and August. Then put the vessel about, so as to
cross the equator between 23° W and 25° W. Thence
stand S through the South-east Trade Wind, and begin
to make easting from 25° S, 30° W, running due E along
the parallel of 35° S as soon as it is reached, direct to
destination.
From October to April, from about 34° N, 45° W, take
a direct track through the North-east Trade Wind, so as
to cross the parallel of 5° N between 20° W and 23° W.
The S winds will be met with in about 7° N; and on
doing so, put the ship on whichever tack gives the most
southing, and cross the equator between 20° W and
24° W.
Directions for crossing the equator are also given in
8.8.3. After crossing it, stand through the South-east
Trade Wind and when it is lost, steer SE, so as to cross
the parallel of 30° S in about 30° W, and thence so as to
cross the meridian of Greenwich in 40° S. From this
point, steer direct for Cape Town, taking care not to be
set N by the Southern Ocean and Benguela Currents,
which make NE somewhat across the track.
8.41.5
For Cuba, proceed as above, but make W as directed
in 8.7.2.
5 Cape Town to South American ports
8.42
Follow the directions in 8.41.1 as far as 20° S; then run
along this parallel with a fair South-east Trade Wind as
far as 30° W, whence steer direct for Rio de Janeiro, or if
70 for ports to the S, pick up, at 35° W, the outward route
from the English Channel (8.8.6-8.8.8) to the required
destination.
Cape Town to West coast of Africa
15 8.43
First obtain a good offing to the NW, as squalls from
NW or WNW are not infrequent near the coast, and
have been experienced in all seasons. Steer to the N in
the South-east Trade Wind, taking advantage of the
20 Benguela Current.
Bound to ports on the coast E of Cape Palmas, proceed
as directly as navigation permits after first obtaining the
offing described above.
30 For general directions for rounding Cape of Good
Hope when bound to the Indian Ocean or to Australia,
see 8.70.
8.44.3
For South American ports, proceed as for Cape
35 Town (8.44.2) as far as 5° S, and then follow the
directions given in 8.8.5-8.8.8, as required by the
destination.
8.44.4
For Rio Amazonas, stand E to about 33° N, 50° W.
40 Then turn S, and make as directly as possible to
destination, but nothing to the W of 43° W until
reaching 5° N, on account of the strong W-going North
Equatorial Current.
In July and August it will be advisable to make for
45 20° N, 37° W, and then to stand S until the South-east
Trade Wind is picked up, between 5° N and 10° N, thus
approaching Rio Amazonas from well to the E.
8.44.5
For Caribbean Sea and Gulf of Mexico. Bound for
50 Barbados or Trinidad, make good easting, passing either
side of Bermuda*, but steering so as to cross the
meridian of 60° W or even 56° W, according to the
season, before entering the tropics and steering to the S,
always allowing for the current to leeward.
55 If bound for Antigua or Leeward Islands it will not be
necessary to go so far E as 60° W. For Mona Passage,
66° W will give enough easting.
If bound for Jamaica or Colon make a good easting as
for Barbados, and then take Turks Island Passage and
60 Windward Passage, which is the shortest route.
If bound for Puerto La Guaira or ports to the E,
making good easting as for Trinidad, and use Mona
Passage if required. A vessel making the South
American coast W of her port will have considerable
65 difficult and lose much time working to windward to
gain it.
*See caution on dangers in the vicinity of Bermuda at
70 2.38.
192
 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS AND ATLANTIC OCEAN AND MEDITERRANEAN SEA SAILING ROUTES
If bound for Gulf of Mexico, proceed as above by
Turks Island Passage and Windward Passage to pass S
of Cuba and through Yucatan Channel.
8.44.6
Further to the directions for approaching Mississippi
River, given in Admiralty Sailing Directions, it may be
said that the currents near the mouth of the river are
uncertain, and fog and haze prevalent, especially in
summer and autumn. The mud banks are low, and the
wind is generally from the E; soundings should
therefore be obtained well to windward. If approaching
from S or SW great attention should be paid to checking
the latitude, for the bank is steep-to.
8.44.7
If bound for the S shores of Gulf of Mexico, a vessel
should strike the E edge of Banco de Campeche between
the parallels of 22° N and 22^° N, and a knowledge of the
exact point made is of great importance to check the
longitude, especially during the rainy season, March to
September, when observations can seldom be obtained.
Sounding therefore must be used early and constantly.
In this season it is best to take the inshore track across
the bank as regular land and sea breezes then prevail; but
if bound to Vera Cruz in the 'Norther' season (2.3) it is
best to pursue the outer track, which runs between
Arrecife Sisal and the outer cays, and into the open
between Triangulo Oeste and Bajo Nuevo.
New Orleans to East coast of North
America or English Channel
8.45
Pass through Straits of Florida, taking full advantage
of the Gulf Stream, proceeding in it up the coast of the
United States, if N-bound; but if for the English
Channel standing NE for 40° N, 60° W, and thence
continue as directly as possible, with a favourable
current and with prevailing W winds, to destination.
New Orleans to Colon or ports to Cabo
Gracias a Dias
8.46.1
For Colon, pass between 5 and 10 miles off Cabo San
Antonio, to a position 25 miles ENE of Farrall Rocks,
and thence pass between 5 and 10 miles W of Isla de
Providencia, and direct to Colon.
8.46.2
For ports to Cabo Gracias a Dias, after passing
Cabo San Antonio steer to pass W of Islas Santanilla and
Cayos Vivorillo and thence through Miskito Channel.
South-west part of Gulf of Mexico to
Atlantic Ocean
8.47
From the SW ports in the Gulf of Mexico take the
passage inshore along the coast of Yucatan, where the
adverse current is weak. Bound E, pass over Banco de
Campeche within the shoals, but the passage between
Arrecife Sisal and the coast should only be taken by
daylight. In passing through Straits of Florida from any
part of the Gulf, and in proceeding N off the Atlantic
coast of the United States, take all possible advantage of
the Gulf Stream.
For the English Channel, stand NE for 40° N, 60° W,
and then proceed direct, see 8.45.
Belize to English Channel or coast of North
America
8.48.1
For the English Channel, proceed via Yucatan
Channel, thence through Straits of Florida with the
8.51
Gulf Stream to a position midway between Bermuda
and Halifax; thence after crossing the meridian of 40° W
in about 45° N, continue direct to destination.
8.48.2
5 For East coast of North America, proceed as
directed in 8.45.
8.48.3
For North shore of Gulf of Mexico, pass 35 miles E
of Isla Mujeres, and thence continue as directly as
10 possible to destination.
Colon or Colombian ports to English
Channel, New York or New Orleans
8.49.1
15 For the English Channel, steer to pass through
Windward Passage, between Haiti and Cuba, and
thence make northing on the starboard tack. When in
the westerlies, steer to cross the meridian of 40° W in
about 44° N in summer, and about 40° N in winter.
20 Thence continue as directly as possible.
8.49.2
For East coast of United States, pass through
Windward Passage as in 8.49.1 and, having cleared
Turks Islands, stand NW in the Antilles Current, until
25 picking up the Gulf Stream N of the Bahamas, and
thence proceed as directly as possible along the Atlantic
coast of the United States.
8.49.3
For North shore of Gulf of Mexico, take the reverse
30 of the New Orleans to Colon route (8.46.1) as far as the
position off Farrall Rocks, after which a course can be
shaped to pass 30 to 40 miles W of Cabo San Antonio.
35 From the South shores of the Caribbean
Sea northward
8.50
From any of the ports along the Venezuelan coast and
along the S shores of the Caribbean Sea, work E
40 coastwise in the eddies or counter-current, until able to
fetch the desired port on the starboard tack. At times,
however, off Venezuela, the W-going current is so far
inshore, that vessels have to cross it and work up to the N
of it, as mentioned for Curacao in 8.52. In winter, when
45 the wind is well NE, it is necessry to make more easting
than in summer, when the wind is in places E of S.
From any of the Venezuelan ports, Mona Passage
gives the best route for sailing vessels bound to any
United States Atlantic port, or to the English Channel.
50
Jamaica to New York, Halifax or English
Channel
8.51
55 From April to September, run to leeward round the
W end of Cuba, and then through Straits of Florida,
thus getting full benefit of the Gulf Stream. Thence
proceed as described in 8.45.
From October to March, N winds prevail in Straits of
60 Florida, and Windward Passage should be preferred,
although ships are frequently opposed there by contrary
winds and currents. These may to some extent be
overcome by keeping nearer the coast of Haiti, as there a
windward current is frequently found.
65 When through Windward Passage, use either
Crooked Island, Mayaguana, or Caicos Passages
according as the wind may favour, and from thence
proceed direct to New York or Halifax. If bound to the
English Channel, see 8.49.1 onward from Windward
70 Passage.
193
8.52 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS AND ATLANTIC OCEAN AND MEDITERRANEAN SEA SAILING ROUTES
Jamaica to Curacao and Southern shores of
Caribbean Sea
8.52
Work to windward along the S coast of Haiti, where at
full and change of the moon, and also near the time of the
autumnal equinox, there is often a counter or E-going
set, until on, or to windward of the meridian of Curacao;
then stand across for that port when certain of fetching
well to windward to allow for the prevailing W-going
current. In summer more easting is necessary than in
winter, as the wind has more southing in it and the
current in the summer is stronger.
A vessel which makes a landfall to leeward of her port
will usually find a counter or E-going set near the shore
in which she can work up; failing to do this, if E of the
meridian of 70° W, she may possibly have again to cross
the prevailing W-going set, and work up to the N of
14° N or 15° N.
West Indies to United States ports,
Canadian ports or English Channel
8.53.1
The great object for sailing vessels is to get N into the
W winds as speedily as possible, and Bermuda lies in the
track (or near the best track) for this purpose, though a
course E or W of it may be taken according to the
direction of the wind met with and the season. A more N
route is followed in summer than in winter.*
From Barbados, fetch to windward of all the islands,
but from the other Windward Islands pass close to
leeward of Antigua, taking care not to come within a
depth of 20 m.
Having cleared the other islands, and when steering
directly for Bermuda, vessels sometimes fall to the E of
the course, and find it very difficult to make the latter
island when W winds prevail; in this case take advantage
of the Trade Wind to reach the meridians of 68° W or
70° W before going N of the parallel of 25° N.
8.53.2
When bound to the English Channel, or to Western
Europe, it is seldom advisable to pass E of Arquipelago
dos Acores but a passage between Corvo and Flores and
the other islands of the archipelago is recommended by
some navigators. If E winds are met with after passing
Arquipelagos dos Acores, still keep on the starboard
tack, as by so doing W winds will probably be sooner
found.
Barbados to North-east coast of South
America
8.54
Work SE until abreast the destination before
attempting to cross the prevailing W-going current,
particularly during and near the months of August and
September when the current is strong and the wind well
to the S of E. It has been recommended at this season
that sailing vessels should not come S of 8° N until they
are certain of fetching their destination on the port tack.
Rio Amazonas to Recife
8.55.1
The normal route is close inshore out of the
influence of the W-going current, and by taking
advantage of the current, tidal stream, and every slant of
wind, a sailing vessel will generally perform the voyage
from Rio Amazonas to Recife in about 30 days. During
*See caution on dangers in the vicinity of Bermuda at
2.38.
the prevalence of ENE and NE winds a current sets ESE
along and near the coast; this fact is well known to the
masters of the coasting craft and is taken advantage of by
them.
5 When the weather will permit, a vessel may anchor off
any part of the coast without danger. In working along
shore, the dry season (July to December) is considered
preferable, as the winds are then fresh and steady. Stand
off during the day, and in towards the land at night, so as
10 to be near the coast in the morning to take advantage of
the land breeze, by which a good sailing vessel will make
from 40 to 50 miles a day.
In the rainy season (January to June), working to
windward is more tedious, as calms, light variable
15 winds, squalls and rain prevail. In this case stand on the
tack that is most favourable, and, as a general rule, do not
go outside a depth of 55 m. If the wind is steady, tack as
in the dry season, but do not lose sight of the coast.
8.55.2
20 Alternative route. Stand directly N across the
equator into about 10° N, and then tack. This will save
wear of sails and rigging, and will probably take no
longer than working along the inshore route.
25 Rio Amazonas to N e w York or English
Channel
8.56
After getting a good offing, stand N, so as to pick up
the main Atlantic routes to the N; that to New York
30 (8.41.2) in about 10° N to 15° N, and that to the English
Channel (8.40.1) between 25° N and 30° N, passing W of
Arquipelago dos Acores as directed in that article.
35 Recife and North-east coast of South
America to English Channel or N e w York
8.57.1
For the English Channel, after obtaining a good
offing, stand N, and after crossing the Doldrums, stand
40 through the North-east Trade Wind into the Westerlies,
passing W of Arquipelago dos Acores as directed in
8.40.1.
8.57.2
For New York and ports to the North, proceed as in
45 8.57.1, and when the Doldrums are crossed, and the
North-east Ttade Wind is reached, stand direct for the
required destination by the main route from Cape of
Good Hope (8.41.2) from about 10° N.
50 Porto de Salvador to Europe or North
America
8.58
In leaving the ports immediately S of Recife for
Europe, the NE winds sometimes compel sailing vessels
55 to keep on the port tack for 10 or 15 days, and to stand
SSE or even SE to the parallels of 28° S or 32° S; and as
far E as the meridian of Ilha da Trinidade. Then on the
starboard tack it should be possible to weather the E part
of the coast, and also Arquipelago de Fernando de
60 Noronha. As northing is made the wind will veer from E
to SE, and the equator should be crossed in 27° W to
29° W.
Rio de Janeiro to Porto de Salvador or
65 Recife
8.59
N-bound along the E coast of Brazil, it is preferable
first to make a stretch to the SE. Working along the
coast, bordered by reefs, subject to currents, and light
70 winds at night, is not recommended.
194
 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS AND ATLANTIC OCEAN AND MEDITERRANEAN SEA SAILING ROUTES
The effects of seasonal heating of the S American
continent can produce very variable and sometimes
strong adverse wind conditions along the Brazil coast,
particularly from September to March. These effects
decrease with distance from the coast and are of minor
significance when more than 120 to 150 miles out at sea.
Beyond this limit the Trade Wind is found, generally
blowing from between SE and E.
From November to February, while fresh NE winds
and a S-going current of 1 or 1J knots extend along the
coast, especially in the vicinity of Cabo de Sao Tome,
the wind being also more N than in the offing, it is
necessary to stand for 450 to 600 miles to the ESE before
tacking. This season, particularly December and
January, is the most unfavourable time of year for the N-
bound passage. In October and March, do not stand
farther E than actually necessary for weathering
Arquipelago dos Abrolhos, as N of their latitude the
winds will be about E or E by S.
From March to September, close the coast as near as
possible, taking advantage of the land and sea breezes,
and making short tacks to the E on meeting the fresh NE
winds which are common off Cabo Frio and Cabo de Sao
Tome. Then continue along the coast at distances of
from 30 to 90 miles. A route more to the E is generally
used, but if bound for Porto de Salvador it does not
appear advantageous to stand too far off the land.
Rio de Janeiro to Europe or North America
8.60
Make first a stretch to the SE to about 35° W, and then
stand N, in the South-east Trade Wind, crossing the
equator between 27° W and 32° W; and after passing
through the Doldrums, steer direct for American ports,
or to the NW and W of Arquipelago dos Acores, as
directed in 8.40.1, if bound for European ports.
Rio de Janeiro to Cape of Good Hope
8.61
Stand to the SE to about 32° S, 30° W; thence through
354° S, 20° W, 37° S, 10° W; 37J° S, 0°; and 37° S, 10° E;
making Cape of Good Hope from SW.
If bound to the Indian Ocean, without calling at Cape
Town, cross the meridian of Greenwich in about 40° S,
and run E on that parallel, or, from November to March,
on 45° S, see 8.70.
Rio de La Plata to Europe or North
America
8.62
From May to September proceed direct to Cabo Frio,
and thence across the equator in 27° W to 29° W, thence
as from Rio de Janeiro (8.60).
From October to April Stand E to beyond 30° W, and
thence N into and through the South-east Trade Wind,
as from Rio de Janeiro (8.60).
Rio de La Plata to Cape of Good Hope
8.63
Pick up the parallel of 40° S in 30° W. Thence, keep
along that parallel as far as the meridian of Greenwich,
whence steer directly for Cape Town, or, if bound to the
Indian Ocean without calling at that port, continue E
along, or, in summer, a few degrees S of, the parallel of
40° S. See 8.70.
8.66.5
Rio de La Plata to Falkland Islands
8.64
Keep well W of the direct run until nearing the
islands.
5
Rio de La Plata to round Cabo de Hornos
8.65
Two routes are recommended, either to steer SE and
pick up the route from Rio de Janeiro (8.9.2) or to sail
10 coastwise (8.8.8). In either case Estrecho de Le Maire
offers the alternative to passage E of Isla de los Estados
(8.9.2).
15 Cabo de Hornos to English Channel
8.66.1
Rounding Cabo de Hornos from W to E is a
comparatively easy matter, for the prevailing winds are
favourable and the current near Cabo de Hornos sets
20 strongly E. The passage is usually made between 56° S
and Sl\° S, to the N of the W-b'ound route. December
and January are the most favourable months; June and
July, when E winds are not unusual, are the least
favourable. Heavy W gales, with snow and hail, may be
25 expected in August and September; in winter, a track
about 80 miles S of Cabo de Hornos is recommended.
8.66.2
The best landfall after rounding Cabo de Hornos is W
of Estrecho de Le Maire, where the coast is free of
30 outlying dangers. The islands make a lee during SW
and W winds. Keep in mid channel in Estrecho de Le
Maire, avoiding the overfalls off Cabo San Diego.
A vessel in trouble should run boldly through
Estrecho de Le Maire and round up under the land if
35 necessary.
8.66.3
Cabo de Hornos to the equator. The usual route is
about 80 miles S of the Falkland Islands and to a position
in about 35° S, 30° W; making W of that position
40 between April and August, and E of it from September
to March. Continue, according to season, from April to
August standing N as far as 10° S, 25° W, keeping as
much as possible to the W of 25° W throughout, and
cross the equator between 25° W and 28° W. It might
45 even be possible to pass W of Ilha de Trinidade at this
time of year. From September to March, stand NNE
from 35° S, 30° W to about 25° S, 20° W, and then run N
with the South-east Trade Wind, to cross the equator
between 22° W and 25° W.
50 8.66.4
Alternative routes to the equator. If ice is
prevalent, particularly between October and February,
steer so as to cross 50° S in about 51° W and 40° S in
about 45° W. Then make northing until the South-east
55 Trade Wind is met, joining the route from Rio de La
Plata (8.62) in about 35° S.
Alternatively, some navigators recommend passage
W of Falkland Islands from October to February on
account of the greater freedom from ice in that region,
60 after which a course to the NE should be steered to join
the other alternative N-bound route in about 35° S,
41° W. If unable to pass W of Falkland Islands, pass as
close E as the wind will allow.
Caution. If meeting with a foul wind whilst S of
65 40° S, it would be better to stand NW than to the E, as
ice is likely not far E of Falkland Islands.
8.66.5
From the equator to the English Channel, join the
route from Cape Town (8.40.1) on meeting the North-
70 east Trade Wind.
195
8.67 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS AND ATLANTIC OCEAN AND MEDITERRANEAN SEA SAILING ROUTES
Cabo de Homos to East coast of North
America
8.67
From April to August, follow the directions in 8.66.3
to 10° S, 25° W, where the track from Cape of Good
Hope to North America (8.41.1) crosses that from Cabo
de Homos; follow it to destination.
From September to March, follow the directions in
8.66.3 for these months to 15° S, 20° W, where the route
meets the track from Cape of Good Hope to North
America (8.41.1); follow this route to destination.
Cabo de Hornos to East coast of South
America
General directions
8.68
At all times of the year, after rounding Cabo de
Hornos, stand N with the Falkland Current between
Falkland Islands and Tierra del Fuego, and carry it up
the coast, with the prevailing W winds, to Bahia Blanca
or Rio de La Plata.
From Rio de La Plata onwards to Cabo Frio or Rio de
Janeiro, see 8.62, and from Rio de Janeiro to Porto de
Salvador, or Recife, see 8.59.
Cabo de Hornos to Cape Town
General directions
8.69
5 Follow the directions given in 8.66.3 and 8.66.4 taking
particular notice of the remarks as to ice, as far as about
50° S, 45° W, and from this position, at all seasons steer a
direct course with the prevailing W wind, and a
favourable current to 40° S, on the meridian of
10 Greenwich; thence steer in a NE direction for Cape
Town. See the relevant part of 8.11.1 on the route from
the English Channel; the portions dealing with the
voyage after passing the meridian of Greenwich are
equally applicable to the route from Cabo de Hornos, as
75 regards winds, currents, and the making of Cape Town
itself.
Cabo de Hornos eastward to Indian Ocean
and Australian ports
20 8.70
Follow the directions given in 8.69 as far as 40° S on
the meridian of Greenwich, and from this position
continue due E along that parallel, but from November
to March a quicker passage will probably be made in
25 about 45° S, though better weather will be found in
40" S.
For continuation onward through the Indian Ocean,
see appropriate routes from Cape Town (9.1.2 to 9.8).
196
 CHAPTER 9
INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING
ROUTES
ROUTES FROM CAPE TOWN OR CAPE OF GOOD HOPE
Cape Town or Cape of Good Hope to
Australia and New Zealand
9.1.1
Icebergs are most numerous SE of the Cape of Good
Hope and midway between lies Kerguelen and the
meridian of Cape Leeuwin. The periods of frequency
vary greatly. It may happen that while ships are passing
ice in lower latitudes, others, in higher latitudes, find the
ocean free of it. See 6.43.
Rounding Cape of Good Hope
9.1.2
From Cape Town, vessels are recommended to pick
up the E-bound track from Cabo de Hornos (8.70) at the
point where it is met by the track from the North
Atlantic (8.11.1) bound to the Indian Ocean, namely in
about 40° S, 20° E. There is but little difficulty in
passing Cape of Good Hope E-bound at any time,
though a greater proportion of gales will be met with
from April to September, the winter season.
From October to April, E winds prevail as far S as the
tail of Agulhas Bank (about 37° S), with variable but
chiefly W winds beyond it. In May and September, at
the tail of the bank, E and W winds are in equal
proportion, but between these months W winds prevail,
extending sometimes close in to the coast. Should a SE
wind be blowing on leaving Table Bay or Simons Bay,
stand boldly to the SW until the W winds are reached or
the wind changes to a more favourable direction. In all
cases when making for the 40th parallel S of Cape of
Good Hope, steer nothing E of S, so as to avoid the area
SE of the tail of Agulhas Bank, where gales are frequent,
and heavy and dangerous breaking cross seas prevail.
Crossing the Indian Ocean
9.1.3
Having crossed to the S of the (W-going) Agulhas
current, and picked up the W winds, the best latitude in
which to cross the ocean must to some extent depend on
circumstances.
Vessels bound to Australian ports would make the
passage at about the parallel of 39° or 40° S, but those
bound to Tasmania or New Zealand, would do so at
between 42° or 43° S, especially from October to March.
Between 39° S and 43° S the winds generally blow from
a W direction, and seldom with more strength than will
admit of carrying sail. In a higher latitude the weather is
frequently more boisterous and stormy; sudden changes
of wind with squally wet weather are almost constantly
to be expected, especially in winter. lie Amsterdam may
be seen from a distance of 60 miles in clear weather.
In summer, many vessels take a route farther S, some
going as far S as 52° S, but the steadiness and
comparatively moderate strength of the winds, with the
smoother seas and more genial climate north of 40° S,
compensate by comfort and security for the time
presumed to be saved by taking a shorter route.
Tempestuous gales, sudden violent and fitful shifts of
'5 wind, accompanied by hail or snow, and terrific and
irregular seas are often encountered in the higher
latitudes; moreover the islands in the higher latitudes
are so frequently shrouded in fog that often the first sign
of their vicinity is the sound of the surf beating against
20 them.
9.1.4
Approaching Bass Strait, passage N of King Island
is recommended. In this approach, when making the
land at Moonlight Head or Cape Otway, the currents
25 must be carefully watched, particularly during SW or W
winds; vessels have been wrecked on King Island by not
steering for Cape Otway. In normal weather, it is
desirable to round Cape Otway at a distance of not less
than 3 or 4 miles. When approaching Bass Strait in thick
30 weather, or when uncertain of the vessel's position, do
not reduce the soundings to less than 70 m. Soundings
of 110 m to 130 m will be found 25 to 30 miles W of King
Island. Outside this limit the soundings deepen rapidly
to over 180 m.
35 Caution. In approaching King Island from the W,
especially during thick or hazy weather, caution is
required on account of the variable strength of the
current, which sets SE at a rate which varies from ^ knot
to 2\ knots, according to the strength and duration of the
40 W winds, and sounding is recommended.
The entrance to Bass Strait between King Island and
Hunter Group is not recommended on account of Bell
Reef and Reid Rocks which lie in it. If, from necessity or
choice, entering Bass Strait by this passage, keep S of
45 Reid Rocks and Bell Reef, the latter being passed at a
distance of 2\ miles S of it by steering for Black Pyramid
on a bearing of 098°. With a commanding breeze the
passage between King Island and Reid Rocks may be
taken without danger by paying attention to the tidal
50 streams, which set somewhat across the channel at
times. From Black Pyramid pass about 1 mile N of
Albatross Islet, whence, if bound to Port Dalrymple,
round the sunken danger Mermaid Rock, off Three
Hummock Island, and then make a direct course.
55
Passage to Fremantle
9.1.5
Leave the trans-ocean route (9.1.3) in about 90° E,
and thence make direct for destination. Some
60 navigators, however, recommend continuing eastward
as far as 100° E before turning NE.
During summer, from October to March, to avoid
being set to the N of Rottnest Island, it is advisable to
make the land about Cape Naturaliste, see 6.123.
65
Passage to Adelaide
9.1.6
Leave the trans-ocean route (9.1.3) on the meridian of
Cape Leeuwin, or about 115° E. Thence proceed direct
70 for Cape Borda.
197
9.1.7 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
Passage to Melbourne
9.1.7
Leave the trans-ocean route (9.1.3) in 135° E and
proceed direct for Bass Strait (9.1.4). If Cape Otway is
rounded early in the evening with a fresh S wind, beware
of over running the distance, as a strong current after a
prevalence of S gales, often sets NE along the land;
bearings of Split Point Light give a good check. When
abreast of Split Point, if there is not enough daylight to
get into pilotage waters, stand off and on shore till
daylight, keeping in more than 35 m of water. Do not
heave to.
Passage to Sydney
9.1.8
In summer, leave the trans-ocean route (9.1.3) in
about 120° E, and steer to pass S of Tasmania.
After rounding South East (South) Cape, give a berth
of 20 or 30 miles to Cape Pillar and the E coast of
Tasmania, to escape the baffling winds and calms which
frequently perplex vessels inshore, while a steady breeze
is blowing in the offing. This is more desirable from
December to March, when E winds prevail, and a
current is said to be experienced off the SE coast at 20 to
60 miles from the shore, running N at the rate of J knot,
while inshore it is running in the opposite direction,
with nearly double that rate. From a position about 30
miles E of Cape Pillar, proceed on a course of about 012°
for about 350 miles to a position 15 miles E of Cape
Howe, whence continue as directly as possible to make
Sydney, but keeping at first at a distance from the coast,
in order to lessen the strength of the S-going East
Australian Current, not closing the land till N of South
Head, Port Jackson.
Some navigators prefer to stand E as i'ar as 155° E
before turning N for Port Jackson, and thus escape
almost altogether the S-going set.
In winter follow the route for Melbourne (9.1.7) as far
as Cape Orway and then steer to pass through Bass Strait
about 2 miles S of Anser Group, 3 miles N of Rodondo
Island and 2 miles S of South East Point, Wilson
Promontory.* Then steer to pass about 5 miles SE of
Rame Head and Gabo Island. Occasionally, and
especially during and after E gales, the current sets
strongly towards the land; in thick weather sounding
must not be neglected. See Navigational Notes on Bass
Strait in 9.1.4 and 9.160.
From Rame Head stand on to the E to about 154° E,
before turning to the N in order to escape from the S-
going current along the coast of New South Wales, and
approach Port Jackson from a point slightly to the N.
During E gales (June to August), an offing may be
maintained by watching the shifts of wind, and keeping
on the starboard track as long as prudent, thus bringing
the prevailing S-going current oh the lee bow.
Passage to Hobart
9.1.9
Leave the trans-ocean route (9.1.3) in about 120° E;
then steer for a position 10 miles S of South West Cape,
Tasmania; or in any case far enough to the S to ensure
avoiding the rocky W coast at night through any error in
the reckoning, or being caught on a lee shore by a SW
gale. In fine weather, from 10 miles S of South West
Cape, pass between Maatsuyker Island and Mewstone,
•Traffic Separation Schemes have been established in
Bass Strait and SE of the Area to the Avoided (7.49.2)
SE of Ninety Mile Beach. See 8.1.2.
then steer to pass 3 miles S of South East (South) Cape.
When blowing heavily from SW or S, especially if
unable to obtain observations before making the land, it
is desirable to keep more to the S, passing S of
5 Mewstone and on either side of Pedra Blanca and
Eddystone, taking care to avoid Sidmouth Rock.
Proceed to Hobart through Storm Bay.
Passage West of Tasmania and to New
10 Zealand ports
9.1.10
It is often necessary, and in heavy W weather
desirable, to make the passage down the W coast of
Tasmania at from 120 to 250 miles from the coast, and
is often at the same distance round the S end of the island.
From the Indian Ocean, for New Zealand ports, it is
normal in summer to leave the trans-ocean route (9.1.3)
in about 110° E and to proceed S of Tasmania in 45° S to
47° S, whence the main route is also taken across the
20 Pacific Ocean (10.2.3 or 10.2.4). In winter, take the
winter route for Sydney (9.1.8) through Bass Strait.
Both in summer and winter, if bound to Auckland
proceed round the N point of New Zealand; if for
Wellington, through Cook Strait, and if for Otago or
25 Lyttleton, S of New Zealand through Foveaux Strait or
S of Stewart Island.
See also 10.3.4 and 10.3.5 for routes to S and N
America.
30 Cape Town or Cape of Good Hope to
Singapore or South China Sea
9.2.1
Although this voyage takes a vessel out of Indian
Ocean waters, properly so termed, into the Eastern
35 Archipelago and South China Sea, it is treated more
conveniently as a continuous voyage, and will so be
considered. As the voyage is complicated not only by
different routes due to monsoons, but also by several
alternative channels and straits among the islands of the
40 Eastern Archipelago the following procedure has been
adopted.
The routes below give, in detail, the passage from
Cape of Good Hope as far as the S entrance to the
Eastern Archipelago, and thence a summary of the
45 various straits and passages to be navigated on the
continuation of the voyage to Singapore or the South
China Sea. Directions for passages through the Eastern
Archipelago are given in articles 9.30 to 9.47.6.
The monsoon periods, on which these routes depend
50 are from May to September, when a South-east or East
Monsoon prevails in the Eastern Archipelago, and a SW
Monsoon (usually not strong) in the South China Sea;
and from October to March, when a North-west or West
Monsoon prevails in the Eastern Archipelago, and a
55 North-east Monsoon (the latter usually strong) in the
South China Sea.
The object of a vessel bound to the South China Sea
being to get as far to windward as possible in the Indian
Ocean before arriving in the monsoon area, she would
60 make for the W end of the island chain during the South-
west Monsoon period of the South China Sea (May to
September); and for the more E passages of the chain
during the North-east Monsoon period of the South
China Sea (October to March). An alternative route to
65 the South China Sea, suitable only in October and
November, passes through the central part of the island
chain.
The following variations to the above are not
infrequently taken though they do not appear to possess
70 any particular advantage.
198
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
Though the October to March route to the South
China Sea is usually made by the passages farther E
through the islands, it is possible to make it by passing
through Selat Sunda; and then proceeding N through
the South China Sea along the N coast of Borneo by
Palawan Passage (10.33.1 or 10.33.2); or else, after
passing Selat Sunda, to stand E through the Java Sea to
the E passages.
Vessels bound only to Singapore use Selat Sunda at all
times.
Vessels bound to ports on the E coast of Borneo, or in
Selat Makasar, etc, use Selat Sunda, Selat Bali, Selat
Lombok or Selat Alas. These straits could also be used,
during the local North-west Monsoon period, instead of
the passage through the islands farther E; and then
standing E to pick up the regular Eastern route.
9.2.2
For Singapore, from May to September take route
across the Indian Ocean described in 9.1.3, along the
parallel of 39° S or 40° S, as far as about 75° E. Thence
edge away to the NE crossing 30° S in about 100° E and
20° S in 105° E, passing close W of Christmas Island,
and up to Tanjung Gedeh (the E entrance point of Selat
Sunda from the Indian Ocean). Care must be taken to
keep well to the E, especially in June, July, and August,
when the South-east Monsoon and the W-going current
are at their strongest, or the vessel may fall to leeward of
Tanjung Gedeh and find great difficulty in recovering it
against wind and current.
From October to March, take the trans-ocean route,
as above, as far as about 75° E; thence steer to pass
through 25° S, 98° E and thence directly N for Selat
Sunda passing midway between Christmas Island and
Cocos or Keeling Islands, and steering for Balimbing
Pamancasa on the W side of Selat Sunda, as in this
season the E-going current is strong, and W winds blow
at times with considerable strength. If contrary winds
are met with after passing lie Saint-Paul, stand N,
through the South-east Trade Wind, into the North-
west Monsoon, and thence direct to Selat Sunda.
During the changes of monsoon, March-April and
September-October, it is advisable to make easting until
due S of the entrance to Selat Sunda, and then steer
directly for it.
In continuation of the route for Singapore there are
three alternatives from Selat Sunda, as summarised
below.
The usual route is through Selat Bangka and Selat
Riau (9.34-9.37.2).
The first alternative route is through Selat Gelasa and
then either by Selat Riau to Singapore; or else from Selat
Gelasa continue N to the E of Bintan and through
Singapore Strait, from the E entrance to Singapore
road. See 9.39.2 and 9.40.1-9.42.3.
The second alternative route, known as the Inner
Route, should be taken between October and March
only, when the North-east Monsoon is blowing strong
in the South China Sea, when, having passed either
through Selat Bangka or Selat Gelasa a vessel is
confronted by a head wind, a heavy sea, and an adverse
current in attempting to make the southern entrance to
Selat Riau. This route is described in sections
9.34-9.35.4 and 9.38.1.-9.38.4
9.2.3
For South China Sea, from May to September,
proceed to Selat Sunda as directed in 9.2.2 for that
season, and thence by one of the three alternative routes
which follow.
The most direct route from Selat Sunda is to pass
through Selat Bangka or Selat Gelasa and thence
9.2.5
between Pulau-pulau Anambas and Pulau-pulau
Natuna into the South China Sea; thence between
Paracel Islands and Macclesfield Bank to Hong Kong.
Selat Gelasa offers a more direct route than Selat
5 Bangka, but in thick weather Selat Bangka can be
navigated without risk, and should be taken rather than
Selat Gelasa, which cannot then be approached with
safety.
The first alternative, by Palawan Passage, should be
10 taken when the North-east Monsoon is likely to begin
before reaching Hong Kong. The route passes through
Selat Gelasa and Palawan Passage; thence along the
coast of Luzon as far as Cape Bolinao; thence to Hong
Kong.
'5 The second alternative route passes through Selat
Karimata into the South China Sea direct.
Although much broader than Selat Bangka or Selat
Gelasa, Selat Karimata is not much frequented except
by sailing vessels returning from China, or by vessels
20 making E through the Java Sea, as from the effects of
wind or currents, it is difficult to get through it to the W.
The great breadth of Selat Karimata in comparison with
the others is of advantage to vessels working to
windward; but this is partly counterbalanced by the
25 several shoals which lie in or near the fairway and out of
sight of land, as well as irregular currents, necessitating a
dependence being placed on the reckoning.
If having passed through Selat Sunda into the Java
Sea, the North-east Monsoon in the South China Sea
30 has already begun to blow, do not attempt to make
farther to the N, but at once turn E and pass through the
Java Sea S of Borneo to Selat Salayar (between the S
point of Sulawesi and Pulau Salayar); and thence by the
passage between Buton, off the SE point of Sulawesi and
35 the islands S of it, into the Banda Sea; and thence
through the Ceram Sea into the open Pacific Ocean
either by Selat Jailolo or Selat Dampier (between
Halmahera and the W extreme of New Guinea).
When in the Pacific Ocean pass E of Palau Islands and
40 into the South China Sea through one of the channels
between Luzon and T'ai-wan.
9.2.4
For South China Sea, leaving Cape of Good Hope in
September, proceed as directed for Sydney in 9.1.8 and
45 pass S and E of Australia or Tasmania, W of Nouvelle-
Caledonie, through Pioneer Channel, across the equator
in about 156° E, and thence direct. This is known as the
'Great Eastern Route'.
9.2.5
50 For South China Sea, from October to March, the
route is taken via Selat Ombai and the Second Eastern
Passage, as directed below.
Cross the Indian Ocean as directed in 9.1.3 as far as
75° E and then steer for 20° S, 100" E. (Some navigators
55 recommend making easting to the 90th meridian instead
of the 75th before turning N to make for the above
position). From 20° S course may be directed to Selat
Ombai.
The usual and the best recommended passage
60 through the islands, after crossing the Indian Ocean, is
through Selat Ombai, between the NW point of Timor
and Pulau-pulau Alor; thence either W of Buru into the
Ceram Sea or (more usually) through Selat Manipa,
between Buru and Manipa (passing near Ambon) and
65 into the Ceram Sea. Thence through Selat Jailolo or
Selat Dampier into the open Pacific Ocean. This route is
known as the Second Eastern Passage (9.46.1). When in
the Pacific Ocean, make easting between 1° 30' N and
3° 00' N, till able to pass E of Palau Islands; but after
70 February pass W of this group.
199
9.3.1 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
Having passed Palau Islands make to the NW to pass
through Surigao Strait (N of Mindanao, in the
Philippine Islands) into the Sulu Sea, and having passed
through those waters, W into the South China Sea by
Mindoro Strait, or Verde Island Passage (S of Luzon
Island), and on to Manila or to Hong Kong.
A more usual route, however, after passing Palau
Islands, is to proceed NN W, keeping E of the Philippine
Islands, and then pass N of Luzon, through Balintang
Channel to Hong Kong or, if bound to Shanghai to
continue N to pass between Okinawa G u n t o and
Sakishima G u n t o towards the mouth of the Chang
Jiang; or to proceed N N E in the full strength of the N E -
going Japan Current to Yokohama and Japan.
For directions, see 9.46.3-9.46.6.
In October and November (only) the passage from the
Indian Ocean to the South China Seas may be made via
the central passages of the Eastern Archipelago by a
route known as the First Eastern Passage (9.47.1), as
follows.
F r o m 20° S, 110° E make Selat Bali, Selat Lombok, or
Selat Alas. Thence pass through Selat Makasar into the
Celebes Sea and through Basilan Strait into the Sulu Sea
at its SE end. Pass then along the W coasts of Mindanao,
Negros, and Panay Islands in the Philippine Islands,
and enter the South China Sea by Mindoro Strait, or
Verde Island Passage. Thence, work along the coast of
Luzon to Cape Bojeador, before crossing the South
China Sea to Hong Kong.
T h i s route to China, though often used in former
days, has little to recommend it, on account of the
adverse current, setting to the S through Selat Makasar,
often strongly, at all seasons. T h e winds are boisterous
and uncertain at the S end of Selat Makasar, and light
and variable at the N end, while the navigation is anxious
throughout almost the whole voyage to the open South
China Sea.
T h e First Eastern Passage, described in detail in
article (9.47.1.) is more suitable for S-bound traffic, but
in the case of vessels from Cape of Good Hope wishing
to reach ports on either side of Selat Makasar, it is
mentioned here.
Cape Town or Cape of Good Hope to Bay of
Bengal
9.3.1
There are three principal routes, two of which are
appropriate to the South-west Monsoon and one to the
North-east Monsoon.
The choice of route rests, not so much on the month in
which departure is made from Cape of Good Hope, as on
the month in which a vessel may be expected to arrive in
the region affected by monsoons, (6.2-6.5), comprising
the Arabian Sea, the Bay of Bengal, and the Indian
Ocean N of the equator. The month references given
below for the varying routes refer, therefore, to the
months of a vessel's arrival in Indian waters.
Inner Route
9.3.2
From May to September this route via Mozambique
Channel is the most direct for vessels to any port of India
during the South-west Monsoon, but it must not be
taken unless there is a certainty of reaching the port
before the close of the monsoon.
On leaving Cape of Good Hope, if with SE winds,
stand S and run down the easting in 39° to 40° S to about
30° E; if withW winds run along the coast, guarding
against any indraught, keeping S of 35° S until in 37° E;
then steer for Mozambique Channel, passing E of lie
Europa and on either side of lie Juan de Nova; pass
through Comoros, cross the equator in about 54° E,
thence steer direct for Eight Degree Channel, and pass S
of Sri Lanka into the Bay of Bengal, see 9.5.2 and 9.3.5.
5
First Outer Route
9.3.3
From May to September this route is more usually
10 preferred to the Inner Route on account of ease of
navigation, but it must only be used if certain of reaching
port before the end of the South-west Monsoon.
From Cape of Good Hope cross the Indian Ocean as
directed in 9.1.3, between the parallels of 39° and 40° S,
75 as far as about 60° E. From this position proceed NE to
cross 30° S in about 80° E, and then stand N as directly
as possible for destination, as summarised below.
Bound for Madras, or adjacent ports, cross the
equator in 82° E.
20 Bound for Calcutta, cross the equator in 88° E.
Bound for Rangoon, cross the equator as for Calcutta,
but leave that route at 10° N, and steer for Rangoon N of
Andaman Islands in about 15° N. See 9.3.5.
Note. On the voyage N from 30° S, it is advisable to
25 gain easting to counteract the W-going current, and to
be prepared for the wind shifting to the N, for in the
South-east Trade Wind it often happens, particularly in
April and May, that the wind is more from E and ENE
than from SE. The South-east Trade Wind at this
30 season extends to the equator; and from 1° N to 2° N the
South-west Monsoon, between May and September, is
a fair wind to Calcutta or any part of the Bay of Bengal.
35
Second Outer Route
9.3.4
From October to March this route is taken when it is
likely that the Bay of Bengal will not be reached before
40 the South-west Monsoon is over (September) or when
expecting to arrive in the Bay of Bengal in November,
when the North-east Monsoon has set it.
From Cape of Good Hope, cross the Indian Ocean as
directed in 9.1.3, between the parallels of 39° and 40° S,
45 as far as about 70° E. From this position, steer ENE, so
as to cross 35° S in about 82° E, and thence proceed
NNE through the Trade Winds, to cross the equator in
92° E.
From this position, steer to pass 150 miles W of the
50 NW extreme of Sumatera, and about 60 miles W of
Nicobar Islands and Andaman Islands, and thence as
directed below.
If the wind is W, give the island a good berth, but if
NW, steer up the Bay close-hauled. In about 16° N to
55 17° N the wind often shifts to the N, when favourable
tracks may be made to the E.
If bound to Calcutta do not approach either shore,
but work to windward in the middle of the Bay of
Bengal, where there is smooth water and moderate
60 wind; from close W of Nicobar Islands, the entrance to
Hugli River has often been reached without tacking. If
the equator is crossed late in February or in March, keep
well to the W side of the Bay of Bengal.
If bound to Madras, shape direct course from the
$5 position off Nicobar Islands.
If bound to Rangoon, leave the route at about 3° N,
and steer to the NE, passing between Pulau We and
Nicobar Islands as directly as possible to destination,
keeping midway between the coast of the Malaysian
JQ Peninsula and Andaman Islands.
200
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
General directions for vessels north-bound
or south-bound in Bay of Bengal
9.3.5
From 15th January to 31 st May, N-bound keep to the
W side of the bay; S-bound keep to the E side. In June,
July and August N-bound keep in the middle of the bay;
S-bound keep in the middle, or E of Andaman Islands.
In September, October and November, N-bound and
S-bound take the E side and the W side respectively.
From 1st December to 14th January, all ships keep in
the middle of the bay.
General remarks as to storms in Bay of
Bengal
9.3.6
When in the Bay of Bengal with a strong SW wind,
occasional squalls and rain, and a slowly-falling
barometer, bad weather prevails somewhere to the N.
Between early June and the middle of September the
storm centre is probably N of 16° N, and in July or
August still farther to the N, and a sailing vessel should
steer to the E to take advantage of the S and SE winds on
the E side of the storm as it moves NW. But should the
weather get rapidly bad, and the barometer continue to
fall, then heave-to, and determine the position with
regard to the movement of the storm before proceeding.
In May, October, or November the storm travels in
some direction from W, through N, to NE; and its
course should be definitely ascertained before any
attempt is made to round its E side, as if it is moving NE
such a proceeding would be attended with danger.
See also 6.15 and 9.90.
Cape Town or Cape of Good Hope to
Colombo
Inner Route
9.4.1
From May to September, proceed as directed for the
Bay of Bengal in 9.3.2, and after passing through Eight
Degree Channel steer as directly as possible for
Colombo. Notes on Mozambique Channel are given in
9.5.2.
East of Madagascar
9.4.2
From May to September, follow the directions given
for passage to Bombay in 9.5.3 until across the equator
in about 62° E, after which steer direct for Colombo.
In April and October only, take the route for Bombay
given in 9.5.4 until the equator is crossed, and steer
thence direct to Colombo.
9.4.3
From November to March, proceed as far as the
equator as directed for the Bombay route in 9.5.5, thence
steering direct.
Alternatively take the Second Outer Route for the Bay
of Bengal (9.3.4) as far as 20° S; after that parallel is
crossed steer direct for Colombo.
Cape Town or Cape of Good Hope to
Bombay
9.5.1
There are six routes; three are available during the
South-west Monsoon, two of them during the North-
east Monsoon and one in the periods between the
9.5.3
Monsoons. The month references given below for the
different periods refer to the expected time of arrival in
Indian waters, and not necessarily to the months in
which Cape of Good Hope is left.
5 9.5.2
From May to September, the Inner Route through
Mozambique Channel is the most direct route for
vessels bound to any part of India but it must not be
taken unless there is certainty of reaching India before
10 the close of the Monsoon (September).
On leaving Cape of Good Hope, if a SE wind prevail,
stand S and run down the easting in 39° to 40° S to about
30° E; if a W wind prevail, run along the coast, guarding
against any indraught, and keep S of about 35° S until
15 37° E; when, in either case, a course may be shaped for
Mozambique Channel, passing E of lie Europa and on
either side of lie Juan de Nova. From thence pass
through Comoros, cross the equator in 53° or 54° E, and
steer direct for Bombay. In the height of the South-west
20 Monsoon (June, July and August), when the weather is
thick and heavy, and observations very uncertain,
vessels should sound frequently when making the land.
By using this track through Mozambique Channel,
vessels will avoid the strongest part of the SW-going
25 current, and will be nearly sure of a fair wind until about
half-way through the Channel, when adverse winds may
be expected; should such occur, it is better to make
easting on the port tack rather than westing; thus
avoiding the African coast with its prevailing S-going
30 current. The passage on the E side of lie Europa is
recommended, but vessels should not approach that
island nor Bassas da India at night, the currents in their
vicinity being very strong and uncertain.
The winds in Mozambique Channel do not blow with
35 the same regularity that is found farther N, and are
generally stronger in the middle of the Channel. The
North-east Monsoon sets in between mid-September
and mid-October, and the change is usually
accompanied by squally weather. When near the
40 Madagascar coast, advantage may be taken of the
alternating land and sea breezes.
9.5.3
From May to September, passage E of Madagascar is
often preferred to the Mozambique Channel route, as it
45 is less dangerous and the winds are more steady,
particularly in August and September, when light
variable winds are found in Mozambique Channel. This
passage also must only be used when there is a certainty
of reaching port before the South-west Monsoon is over
50 (September).
On leaving Cape of Good Hope, make easting in 39° S
to 40°S until in about 45° E, and thence stand to the NE,
crossing 30° S in about 53° E. From thence run through
the South-east Trade Wind, passing W of lie de la
55 Reunion, Farquhar Group, and Amirante Isles; then
cross the equator in 53° E or 54° E, and steer direct for
Bombay.
If arrival at Bombay before the start of the North-east
Monsoon is uncertain, make easting, as before directed,
60 in 39° S to 40° S but stand NE on reaching 40° E. Cross
30° S in about 59° E, and then run N, passing between
Mauritius and lie de la Reunion. After passing these
islands, there are two courses; one being to join with the
route from Mozambique Channel, described above, at
65 about 15° S and to continue on it to destination; the
other is to stand on directly N, through the Trade Wind,
passing W of Saya de Malha Bank. Cross the equator in
about 62° E and steer direct for Bombay.
In case the North-east Monsoon has started, keep
70 towards the coast of India after passing Maldives.
201
9.5.4 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
9.5.4
In April and October, a W wind is often experienced
on leaving Cape of Good Hope. If this happens, during
these months, run along the coast as directed for a W
wind in 9.5.2, but stand on to the ENE past Madagascar
into the Indian Ocean, making directly for a position in
about 15° S, 70° E, passing either between the islands of
Mauritius and Rodriguez, or E of the latter. From this
point, steer to cross the equator in 75° E, passing E of
Chagos Archipelago, and thence N to the E of Maldives
and Lakshadweep, parallel with the coast of India, to
Bombay, working the land and sea breezes.
9.5.5
From November to March, two routes from Cape
Town to Bombay are available, both making use of the
W portion of the route for Australia described in 9.1.3,
and making easting between the parallels of 39° S and
40° S. The more W of the two routes leaves that latitude
in 60° E, and a vessel using it should stand NE to 35° S,
70° E, and then stand due N through the South-east
Trade Winds to 10° S. She should then make N NE so as
to cross the equator in 80° E, and making northing into
the North-east Monsoon, standing for Cape Comorin
and finally working the land and sea breezes along the
Malabar coast.
Alternatively, for the more E route, proceed as above
to 35° S, 70° E, after which some authorities consider it
more prudent to make further easting, so as to be well to
windward on reaching the North-east Monsoon, and
make first for a position in about 25° S, 80° E. From this
point turn N, run through the Trade Wind and the
North-west Monsoon, cross the equator in 82° E to
85° E and the track onward is as above, making northing
into the North-east Monsoon. Then stand for Cape
Comorin, and work up the Malabar coast with the land
and sea breezes.
Cape Town or Cape of Good Hope to
Mauritius
9.6.
At all times of the year, make easting in 39° S, to 40° S,
as far as 40° E. Then stand NE, crossing 30° S, in about
59° E, as far as 25° S, and then steer direct for destination
in the South-east Trade Wind.
Note. Vessels from this direction bound for Port
Louis should pass E of Mauritius and round its N end, in
ROUTES FROM EAST COAST OF AFRICA A N D MAURITIUS
Durban to Australia, N e w Zealand, India,
Singapore, and South China Sea
Durban to Australia, and N e w Zealand
9.9.1
Stand SE, and pick up the main route across the
Indian Ocean (9.1.2) in 50° E, and from that position
follow the directions in 9.1.3 to 9.1.10.
Durban to India, Singapore and South
China S e a
9.9.2
Stand SE, and make easting in about 35° S until
picking up the route to pass through the Eastern
Archipelago, to the Bay of Bengal, or to Bombay,
according to the season, as directed in 9.2.1 to 9.5.5.
order to avoid the calms caused by the high land near the
SW extreme of the island.
It may sometimes be possible to follow the route given
in 9.5.4, leaving it when abreast Mauritius, which it
5 passes at about 100 miles to the S.
Cape Town or Cape of Good Hope to Aden
9.7.1
There are three routes available from April to
10 September, and one from November to March. In
October either route may be taken.
9.7.2
From April to September or October, take the Inner
route for Bombay, as directed in 9.5.2, as far as the
15 equator, crossing it in 53° E; and thence continue to
destination, passing between Raas Caseyr and Suqujra.
Work along the African coast as far as Jasiired Maydh
before standing across the Gulf of Aden.
Alternatively, pass E of Madagascar as directed in
20 9.5.3, standing direct for Raas Caseyr after passing
Amirante Isles and Seychelles Group. Round Raas
Caseyr closely and then proceed as directly as possible.
Alternatively, pass between Mauritius and lie de la
Reunio% to join this route in about 15° S.
25 9.7.3
From October or November to March, follow the
directions given in 9.1.2 and 9.1.3 from Cape of Good
Hope, continuing the route, between the parallels of
39° S and 40° S as far as 60° E. From this position, stand
30 N to pass about 200 miles E of Rodriguez Island, and to
cross the equator in 68° E. At this point, turn to the NW,
steering so as to cross the meridian of 60° E in 10° N and
thence, N of Suqufra, which should be given a berth of
from 40 to 60 miles, to destination.
35
Cape Town or Cape of Good Hope to
Mombasa and adjacent ports
9.8
40 The shortest route is through Mozambique Channel,
as directed in 9.5.2 but passing W of Comoros, and
steering thence as directly as possible. The preferable
route, for all seasons, is E of Madagascar. Follow the
directions given in 9.5.3 as far as the N end of
45 Madagascar, from which point both wind and current
are favourable for Mombasa and adjacent ports.
Durban to Mauritius, East Africa and Aden
55
Durban to Mauritius
9.10.1
Stand SE, and make easting in about 35° S. From
about 50° E, keep gradually more to the N, crossing the
60 parallel of 30° S in 58° E or 59° E, and then steer direct
through the Trade Winds to Mauritius.
Durban to Mombasa and adjacent ports
9.10.2
65 The shortest route is by Mozambique Channel,
steering first to the SE across the Mozambique Current
until picking up the route from Cape Town to Bombay
(9.5.2), and passing W of Comoros; but the preferable
route is to proceed as directed in 9.10.1 to Mauritius,
70 and taking the route either W or E of lie de la Reunion,
202
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
around the N end of Madagascar to destination, with a
favourable wind and current.
Durban to Aden
9.10.3
The routes are the same as from Cape Town (9.7.1)
according to season, making easting to pick up those
routes that pass E of Madagascar on about the parallel of
35° S.
Durban to Cape Town
9.11
Proceed as directly as possible, at 20 miles or more
from the coast. A favourable current will be carried
throughout the passage. See note under 9.17.2 and
relevant part of 9.74.*
Mauritius to Australia and New Zealand
Mauritius to Fremantle, southern
Australia, and New Zealand
9.12.1
Make southing to pick up the main track across the
Indian Ocean (9.1.3). Follow the appropriate part of that
route to destination.
Mauritius to northern Australia
9.12.2
From April to October, during the South-east
Monsoon on the N coast of Australia, stand S, as in
9.12.1, and proceed to Bass Strait, and to destination via
the E coast of Australia and Torres Strait. See directions
from Sydney to Torres Strait (10.9.1). From November
to April, during the North-west Monsoon, stand N into
that Monsoon and then proceed as directly as possible.
Mauritius to Singapore or South China Sea
9.13
Stand SE or E to pick up the route from Cape Town
(9.2.1) according to destination and season.
Mauritius to Indian ports
9.14
From April to October, the route given in 9.5.3 passes
Mauritius closely, and may be followed to Bombay. For
the Bay of Bengal, leave that route in 5° N and pass
through Eight Degree Channel and round the S end of
Sri Lanka. For Colombo, steer direct from Eight Degree
Channel. From November to March, stand E or SE to
pick up the routes given in 9.3.4 for Bay of Bengal, 9.4.3
for Colombo, or 9.5.5 for Bombay.
Mauritius to Aden
9.15
From April to October, join the route from Cape
Town (9.7.2) in about 15° S, which passes E of
Madagascar.
From November to March, run N through the South-
east Trade Wind and the North-west Monsoon, to pick
up the route described in 9.7.3, crossing the equator in
about 68° E.
Mauritius to Mombasa and adjacent ports
9.16
Proceed as directly as possible, passing N of
Madagascar.
9.20.1
Mauritius to Durban or Cape Town
Mauritius to Durban
9.17.1
Proceed as directly as possible, passing about 10 miles
S of Madagascar, and making the African coast well N of
Durban.
Mauritius to Cape Town
10 9.17.2
Pass about 200 miles S of Madagascar and make the
African coast about 200 miles SW of Durban,
afterwards keeping in the strength of the Agulhas
Current until abreast Mossel Bay; thence, steer direct to
15 round Cape Agulhas at a prudent distance.
Note. When nearing Cape of Good Hope with strong
W winds, keep on Agulhas Bank, not more than 40 or 50
miles from the coast, where will be found smoother
water than elsewhere. See 9.74.*
20
Mombasa and adjacent ports to Aden
9.18.1
From April to October, keep coastwise in the strength
of the current and pick up the route from Cape Town or
25 Cape of Good Hope to Aden, as described in 9.7.2, in
about 10° N.
9.18.2
From November to March, work to the E into the
North-west Monsoon keeping as far N as the wind will
30 permit until that Monsoon is reached; then run E,
edging to the N at the latter part, as far as about 68° E,
when stand N into the North-east Monsoon, and from
thence direct for the Gulf of Aden. The same route may
be taken from Seychelles Group.
35 Suqujra should be weathered if possible. If efforts are
only made to pass S of it, and the monsoon happens to be
fresh, there is a great chance of being swept to leeward of
Raas Caseyr. If leaving Mombasa in March, do not go E
of Seychelles Group before standing N, as S winds
40 might be expected before reaching Raas Caseyr.
Mombasa and adjacent ports to Bombay
9.19.1
From April to October, keep coastwise in the strength
45 of the current to about 5° N and then steer directly as
possible to Bombay, making the landfall on the parallel
of Khanderi Island if the weather is thick.
9.19.2
From November to March, work E into the North-
50 west Monsoon, then run E on about the parallel of 5° S
until 82° E or 84° E, when stand N across the equator
into the North-east Monsoon, and make the S end of Sri
Lanka, and then Cape Comorin; thence work up the
Malabar coast with the land and sea breezes.
55 In March it would perhaps be better to go direct when
the North-west Monsoon is met with as NW winds are
prevalent in the Arabian Sea at the end of the North-east
Monsoon.
60 Mombasa and adjacent ports to Colombo or
Calcutta
9.20.1
From May to September, stand E on the starboard
tack, and make for Eight Degree Channel if bound to
65 Colombo, or pass through the more direct route offered
by Kaashidoo Channel but not at night, unless the
entrance has been made before dark, or the latitude of
70 *For caution on Abnormal Waves, see 1.18.
203
9.20.2 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES

the vessel is accurately known. If bound to Calcutta,
pass S of Sri Lanka and pick up the Bay of Bengal route
from Cape of Good Hope (9.3.3). See also 9.3.5.
9.20.2
From October to April, the route passes close S of
Seychelles Group. On leaving Mombasa, keep N of the
direct route to Seychelles Group, while working to the E
until the North-west Monsoon is picked up, which may
be expected after passing the meridian of 45° E,
although this is very uncertain. Light winds and calms
render this generally a tedious passage.
After passing Seychelles Group, and if bound to
Colombo, run E in about 5° S, cross the equator in from
82° E to 84° E, and stand N into the North-east
Monsoon, then making for the SW end of Sri Lanka;
then work up the coast, taking advantage of the land and
sea breezes. If bound to Calcutta, continue to make
easting until the route from Cape of Good Hope to
Calcutta (9.3.4) is picked up in about 92° E, and follow it
to destination.
Mombasa and adjacent ports to Mauritius
and Australia
9.21.1
In all seasons the route to Australia is taken via, or
passing close to, Mauritius.
For Mauritius
9.21.2
From April to October, stand E, regardless of
crossing the equator in so doing, until E of Chagos
Archipelago, when southing should be made into the
Trade Wind, and then a direct course should be steered
for Mauritius.
9.21.3
From November to March, the recommended route is
5 to make easting with the North-east and North-west
Monsoons and cross 10° S in about 70° E, and thence
steer direct through the Trade Wind for Mauritius.
Vessels should keep N of a line drawn from Zanzibar to
Seychelles Group until in the North-west Monsoon.
10 The alternative route from November to March is to
stand down through Mozambique Channel, taking
advantage of the current on the African coast. Then,
from the S end of the channel, stand SE into the W
winds and make easting S of the 35th parallel. Recross
15 30° S in about 58° or 59° E, and then make direct for
Mauritius through the Trade Wind.
Caution. The cyclone season is from November to
March, and the first route is therefore the safer as the
path of these cyclones is then more easily avoided.
20
For Australia
9.21.4
Follow the directions given in 9.12.1 or 9.12.2 after
calling at, or passing close to Mauritius as described in
25 9.21.3.
Mombasa and adjacent ports to Durban or
Cape Town
9.22.1
30 At all seasons proceed as directly as possible, keeping
in the strength of the Mozambique and Agulhas
Currents. See 9.74.

ROUTES NORTH-BOUND AND SOUTH-BOUND THROUGH EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO

General notes on presentation Directions Directions

9.30 40 Name N-bound S-bound
This section (9.30-9.51.4) contains directions for the Jailolo, Selat 9.46.3 9.50.3
routes through the Eastern Archipelago, which Karimata, Selat 9.44.3, 9.44.4 9.49.7
constitute an important linking system between the Leplia, Selat 9.40.2 9.49.5
Indian Ocean and the Pacific Ocean. Limende, Selat 9.40.4 9.49.6
Since each particular route passes through a number 45 Lombok, Selat 9.47.3 9.50.4
of straits or channels, a list of the seas and straits of the Makasar, Selat 9.47.5 9.51.4
Archipelago is given in 9.31, where the directions are Manipa, Selat 9.46.2 9.50.4
indexed. The routes themselves are outlined in Mindoro Strait 9.51.2 9.51.2
9.32.1-9.32.9, and references are given to the Molucca Sea 9.46.3 9.50.3
paragraphs which contain the relevant directions. 50 Ombai, Selat 9.46.2 9.50.4
Pengelap, Selat 9.36.3 —
Alphabetical list of seas and straits Riau, Selat 9.37 9.49.2
9.31 San Bernardino Strait 9.46.5 —
Sapudi, Selat — 9.51.4
Directions Directions 55 Sibutu Passage — 9.51.3
Name N-bound S-bound Singapore Strait 9.39.1 9.39.1
Abang, Selat 9.36.3 — Sunda, Selat 9.33.1 9.49.9
Alas, Selat 9.47.4 9.50.4 Sulu Sea 9.47.6 9.51.3
Bali, Selat 9.47.2 9.50.4 Surigao Strait 9.46.4 —
Balintang Channel 9.46.6 9.50.2 60 Verde Island Passage 9.46.5 —
Bangka, Selat
(Java Sea) 9.35.4 9.49.3
Bashi Channel 9.46.6 9.50.2
Basilan Strait 9.47.6 9.47.6 Routes through Eastern Archipelago
Baur, Selat 9.40.3 9.49.6 65
Berhala, Selat 9.36,3, 9.38.2 9.49.1 General remarks
Ceram Sea 9.46.3 — 9.32.1
Dampier, Selat 9.46.3 9.50.3 The following paragraphs are intended as a guide to
Durian, Selat 9.38.4 9.49.1 the selection of the best route through the Eastern
Gelasa, Selat 9.40.1, 9.41.1 9.49.4 70 Archipelago and the season for which it is

204
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
recommended. Articles in 9.2.1, 9.30, and 9.48 are also
relevant.
Selat Sunda to Singapore
9.32.2
There are six possible routes. The usual route, though
principally for the period May to September, is via Selat
Bangka and Selat Riau. References for this passage are
9.33.1-9.37.2, 9.39.1.
From October to March, a route known as the Inner
Route, via Selat Bangka, Selat Berhala and Selat
Durian, may be used. References are 9.33.1—9.35.4,
9.38.1-9.39.1.
In December, January and February, a route via Selat
Bangka, Selat Berhala, Selat Pengelap or Selat Abang,
and Selat Riau, is recommended. References are
9.33.1-9.37.2, 9.39.1.
As an alternative, from May to September, proceed
via Selat Bangka and E of Bintan. References are
9.33.1-9.35.4, 9.39.1-9.42.2.
A second alternative from May to September is via
Selat Gelasa and Selat Riau. A vessel which, having
chosen this route, finds that the North-east Monsoon is
blowing strongly in the South China Sea, should steer
for Selat Berhala and continue through Selat Durian.
References are 9.33.1-9.33.7, 9.37.2, 9.40.1, 9.41.1.
A third alternative from May to September is via Selat
Gelasa and E of Bintan. References are 9.33.1-9.33.7,
9.40.1, 9.42.3.
Selat Sunda to South China Sea
9.32.3
From May to September, proceed either via Selat
Bangka (9.33.1-9.34, 9.43.2); or via Selat Gelasa
(9.33.1-9.33.7, 9.40.1, 90.43.3); or via Selat Karimata
(9.33.1-9.33.7, 9.44.2).
From November to February, or, if on entering the
Java Sea it is found that the North-west Monsoon of the
Java Sea or the North-east Monsoon in the South China
Sea have begun, proceed E through the Java Sea and join
the Second Eastern Passage (9.33.1-9.33.7, 9.45.1,
9.46.1).
Alternatively, join the First Eastern Passage
(9.33.1-9.33,7, 9.45.1, 9.47.1) in Selat Makasar.
Selat Ombai to South China Sea
9.32.4
This route, known as the Second Eastern Passage, is
for use from October to March. Main references for the
route are in 9.46.1.
The Second Eastern Passage passes through Selat
Ombai, Banda Sea, and Selat Manipa (9.46.2), Ceram
Sea, Selat Jailolo, Selat Dampier or the Molucca Sea to
the Pacific Ocean (9.46.3), and to the South China Sea
via Surigao Strait (9.46.4) or by San Bernardino Strait
and Verde Island Passage (9.46.5) or E of the Philippine
Islands and through Balintang Channel or Bashi
Channel (9.46.6) to the South China Sea.
Selat Bali, Selat Lombok or Selat Alas to
South China Sea
9.32.5
This route, known as the the First Eastern Passage, is
for use in October and November only. From the
approach strait (9.47.2) it passes through the Java Sea,
and Selat Makasar to the Celebes Sea (9.47.5). It
continues through Basilan Strait, the Sulu Sea, and
Mindoro Strait (9.47.6) to the South China Sea.
9.33.2
North Australia to Singapore
9.32.6
Either N of Timor and through the Java Sea or S of all
the islands and through Selat Sunda see 9.135.
Singapore to Selat Sunda
9.32.7
From November to April, proceed via Selat Riau and
Selat Bangka (9.49.2, 9.49.3, 9.49.8, 9.49.9), or, from
10 October to April, Selat Gelasa (9.49.4) may be used
instead of Selat Bangka.
Also from October to April, passage may be made
through Selat Durian, Selat Berhala and Selat Bangka.
This is known as the Inner Route (9.39.3, 9.38.4, 9.38.3,
15 9.38.2, reversed, and 9.49.3, 9.49.8, 9.49.9).
From May to September a route known as the Outer
Route should be taken, passing E of Bintan and through
either Selat Karimata or Selat Gelasa (9.39.2 reversed,
9.49.7 or 9.49.4, 9.49.8, 9.49.9).
20
South China Sea to Selat Sunda
9.32.8
This route between the South China Sea and the
Indian Ocean is known as the Western Route (10.42.2).
25 From October to April, ships having used the North-
east Monsoon route through the South China Sea,
which passes between Pulau-pulau Anambas and Pulau-
pulau Natuna should use Selat Gelasa (9.49.4) or, from
November to April, Selat Bangka (9.49.3).
30 From May to September, Palawan Passage and the
coastwise route off Borneo are used in the South China
Sea, and either Selat Gelasa or Selat Karimata should be
taken in continuing for Selat Sunda. See 9.49.1.
35 South China Sea to Indian Ocean
9.32.9
From mid-May till the end of July the Indian Ocean
should be approached through Selat Ombai, or by either
Selat Alas, Selat Lombok or Selat Bali. The Eastern
40 Route from the South China Sea is used, passing
through either Balintang Channel or Bashi Channel into
the Pacific Ocean and thence through the Archipelago
via Selat Jailolo, Selat Dampier, or the Molukka Sea to
the Ceram Sea, and thence through Selat Manipa and
45 the chosen entrance channel to the Indian Ocean. See
9.50.1
In May only the Central Route from the South China
Sea may be used: it enters the Sulu Sea via Mindoro
Strait or Verde Island Passage, and leads thence through
50 either Basilan Strait or Sibutu Passage to the Celebes
Sea and Selat Makasar. Either Selat Alas, Selat Lombok
or Selat Bali are then used in the approach to the Indian
Ocean, or a route through the Java Sea and Selat Sunda
may be taken. See 9.51.1.
55
ROUTES NORTH-BOUND THROUGH
EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO
60 Approaches to, and north-bound passage
through Selat Sunda
9.33.1
Selat Sunda and its approaches are described in
Admiralty Sailing Directions, which should be read in
65 conjunction with the following remarks.
Landfall
9.33.2
Coming from the S in the South-east Monsoon, keep
70 well to the E, especially in June, July and August, when
205
9.33.3 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
the Monsoon and the W-going current are at their
strongest or the vessel may fall to leeward of Tanjung
Gedeh and find great difficulty in recovering it against
wind and current.
In December, January and February, considerable
swell rolls into the strait, and the sea is heaviest when the
tidal stream, combining with the prevailing SW-going
current, runs contrary to the wind. The sea is said to be
calmest in March, July and November.
Having made a landfall, shape course to pass between
Rakata and the Jawa shore, or between Sebesiand and
Sebuku; the former is recommended except for those
with local knowledge, and then only in daylight.
Selat Panaitan
9.33.3
Selat Panaitan, between the NW side of Ujung Kulon
and Panaitan, possesses the great advantage of affording
anchorage to sailing vessels becalmed, which the
channel N of that island does not; light baffling winds
and calms are experienced about the entrance to Selat
Sunda, occurring even in the strength of the East
Monsoon, and sailing vessels when unable to anchor are
liable to be set back by adverse currents.
Selat Panaitan is entirely clear, but the Panaitan side
must not be approached within one mile on account of
Karang Jajar and the coastal reef which extends from the
S side of Legon Semadang; these dangers are always
marked by surf.
Working through the passage, keep nearer to the Jawa
coast than to Panaitan, especially in the South-west
Monsoon.
Channel North of Panaitan
9.33.4
This channel, sometimes known as 'Great Channel',
although the widest into Selat Sunda, and much
frequented, being considered free from dangers, has the
disadvantage of being too deep for anchoring if
becalmed; in which case a vessel may drift out of the
strait with the W-going stream.
Entering Selat Sunda by this channel, keep nearer
Panaitan, and when farther in, keep towards the same, or
Jawa side.
The channel is recommended for the later part of the
West Monsoon period, and for the transition period.
Passage through Selat Sunda
9.33.5
In this note it is presumed that a sailing-vessel will
make her way through Selat Sunda along the Jawa side,
whether she has approached from the Indian Ocean to
make Tanjung Gedeh, or Balimbing Pamancasa, or half
way between the two; in the two latter cases a vessel is
presumed to have passed S of Rakata.
Passage with favourable wind
9.33.6
There is not much difficulty in proceeding through
the strait in the North-west Monsoon period; the Jawa
side of the strait and the channel S of Sangian being
recommended. Pass about 2 miles off Tanjung
Cikoneng and between Tempurung and Merak Besar.
Facilities for anchoring, if becalmed, are available on
this route, while the channel N of Sangian is not
favourable for this purpose, due to the deeper water; the
two dangers, Terumbu Koliot and Terumbu Gosal, also
lie in or near the most N, or W channel.
Passage during the South-east Monsoon
9.33.7
During the South-east Monsoon the winds may be E
and variable, and sometimes strong from the NE
5 towards midday. This, combined with the adverse
current, possibly from 2 to 3 knots in mid-stream,
renders the passage more tedious, and it may become
necessary to anchor to avoid losing ground; and
therefore the coast of Jawa should be kept, where
10 anchorage may be had in many places, and where the
current is much weaker, and at times nil, when the S-
going tidal stream is at its strongest.
A vessel having to work up may stand into Teluk
Miskam, when N of Pasir Gundul, to a depth of about
is 15 m but when near Popole into not less than 18 m to
avoid Gosong Panjang, and not into less than 27 m or 2
miles off Caringin to avoid Karang Kebua. To the N of it
the shore may be approached closer, by sounding.
Approaching Pasang Tenang, stand into not less than
20 22 m, or one mile from the shore. Tanjung Cikoneng
and the coast E is fringed by reef to the distance of 1 to 2
cables, but is steep-to. There is good anchorage S of
Tanjung Cikoneng in about l l m , and also off Anjer
Lor, to the E of the point, but it is not so good off
25 Tanjung Cikoneng itself.
Passing between Sangian and Jawa it is advisable to
keep outside a depth of 36 m unless seeking anchorage.
30 Selat Sunda to Selat Bangka
Directions
9.34
From a position to the N of Tempurung and with a
35 favourable wind, steer direct for Segama, keeping the S
islet bearing less than 010° to lead E of Layang Layang;
the islets can be passed on either side, during daylight,
W of Karang Basa and Gosong Serdang. Gosong
Syahbandar must not be approached into depths of less
40 than 13 m.
Working to the N, it will be prudent to keep on the
Sumatera side and when N of Terumbu Sybrandi and
standing towards the shore, to tack when in a depth of
between l l m and 15 m; the directions for clearing
45 Layang Layang, described in the proceeding paragraph
must be noted.
After passing Segama, a safe guide is to keep in depths
of about 18 m; approaching the coast when the depths
increase to between 22 m and 24 m, and holding out
50 when they decrease to 17 m. Vessels working up must
give the Sumatera coast a wide berth when N of
Segama.*
While power vessels can pass E of Five Fathom
Banks, some authorities consider that a sailing vessel,
55 working up the coast, may pass between those banks and
Beting Menjangan and, after passing the latter, may
stand on the inshore tack to a depth of 9 m. It should be
noted, however, that the 5 m line is some 14 to 15 miles
from the coast in places. If making for Alur Pelayaran
60 Stanton a vessel should always pass E of Five Fathom
Banks.
Note. The trees between Tanjung Bungin and
Tanjung Serdan and the groups of trees NW of Tanjung
Menjangan are the highest landmarks on this coast, but
65 they should not be sighted from the deck as abreast both
points the banks extend about 14 miles offshore. The
*Caution. For areas being exploited for natural
70 resources, see 7.49.1. See also 8.1.2.
206
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
trees afford some guide from aloft during the North-
west Monsoon, which is the clear season, but would not
be visible during the South-east Monsoon, except on
rare occasions; if this land is sighted from on deck it is a
definite warning that a vessel is too far W of her safe
course.
Approaches to, and north-bound passage
through Selat Bangka
Winds
9.35.1
The winds in Selat Bangka follow the direction of the
coast, though with slight variations from the influence of
the land and sea breezes; the fresh breezes may always be
expected when working against the Monsoon. During
the later part of the South-east Monsoon, it frequently
blows hard from SW. Land breezes occur at night.
Tidal streams
9.35.2
A full description is given in Admiralty Sailing
Directions, but it can be noted here that, due to the
variations in the predominant streams in the two
monsoonal seasons, it is preferable to work N on the
Bangka side of the strait during the North-west
Monsoon, and on the Sumatera side during the South-
east Monsoon.
Directions for Alur Pelayaran Lucipara and
Alur Pelayaran Stanton
9.35.3
The navigation of Alur Pelayaran Stanton is difficult
for sailing vessels working N at night; there are not
enough marks for fixing the vessel's position, sounding
is not a trustworthy guide, and the usually strong tidal
streams make the position uncertain. Alur Pelayaran
Lucipara should never be attempted at night, except in
clear weather and with local knowledge, and it is not
possible with adverse winds; if Maspari is not visible at a
distance of 4 miles it is advisable to anchor.
Sailing vessels working N through Alur Pelayaran
Lucipara by day can safely approach the bank extending
from the Sumatera coast by sounding, but they must not
stand into a depth of less than l l m when 5 miles
southward of Tanjung Jati, and must keep in depths of
18 m or more when off that point.
Maspari can be approached to within 3 | miles on the S
side, about 4 miles on the SE side, and to within 1 mile
on the W side. Sounding generally gives enough
warning when standing towards the banks on the E side
of that channel.
In Alur Pelayaran Stanton, sailing vessels with a fair
wind can follow the directions given for power vessels in
Admiralty Sailing Directions. Working N through Alur
Pelayaran Stanton by day, they can approach Dapur
within about | mile. The summit of Pegunungan
Permisan bearing about 323° and open NE of Besar
light-structure leads NE of Gosong Melvill. As soon as
Tanjung Labu bears more than 035°, vessels will remain
clear of the banks on either side of the channel by
keeping in depths of not less than 20 m.
Directions North-bound in Selat Bangka
9.35.4
After round Tanjung Lelari, work up under the
Bangka side of the strait; the landmarks here are more
conspicuous, and vessels can derive more advantage
from the land winds, which are somewhat stronger and
9.36.2
more regular under the Bangka shore than in the middle
of the strait.
Some sailing vessels, and even power vessels, make
use of the narrow channel between Karang Tembaga
5 and the Bangka coast, when this is feasible, as the tidal
streams are more favourable there. Farther N, the
coastal bank extending from Bangka is fairly steep-to,
and nearing Kepulauan Nangka vessels must keep in
depths of not less than 13 m in order to clear the bank
10 which surrounds these islands.
Standing over to the Sumatera side, the bights in the
coast may be approached by sounding, but the points
must never be approached in depths of less than 20 m, as
within this the depths decrease very suddenly. From
15 about 5 miles E to 6 miles W of Tanjung Katimabongko,
the coastal bank is steep-to and it is very hard W of this
point. Farther W, the depths decrease regularly towards
the shore, and vessels can approach it into depths of 9 m.
The passage between the Sumatera coast and Karang
20 Ular can be easily negotiated by sounding; the coast
there can be approached into depths of 8 m, but vessels
should tack away from the E side of the passage
immediately the depths increase to more than 16 m. If
taking the channel E of Karang Ular, vessels must not
25 stand over too far towards the Bangka shore, on account
of the reefs lying as much as 2\ miles offshore between
Tanjung Kelian and Tanjung Ular.
30 Selat Bangka to Selat Riau
9.36.1
There are two routes, one direct and the other via
Selat Berhala and Selat Pengelap or Selat Abang. The
35 latter is recommended for the months of December,
January and February; see also 9.38, Selat Bangka to
Singapore Strait via Selat Berhala and Selat Durian.
The route from Selat Bangka to Singapore, E of
Kepulauan Lingga and through Selat Riau, is the one
40
commonly adopted by vessels proceeding either way
between Selat Sunda and Singapore, as being safe,
sheltered, and easily navigable; whereas the route E of
Bintan is exposed in both monsoons, and the fairway is
encumbered with many dangers, which render it
•#> necessary for vessels to keep at a considerable distance
from the land. Selat Riau is suitable for all classes of
vessels, both by day and by night. The swept channels
and their depths are detailed in Admiralty Sailing
Directions.
50 9.36.2
The direct route, ordinarily used by sailing vessels
N-bound from Selat Bangka, is between Pulau-pulau
Tuju and Saya; they may, however, pass on either side of
Saya, which, being high and bold, is very convenient to
55 make in thick weather or at night.
At night, or in thick weather, sounding may be very
useful in detecting the drift caused by cross currents
between Pulau-pulau Tuju and the coast of Sumatera,
for the depth decreases generally towards Sumatera, and
SO increases towards those islands, but care should be taken
in approaching them, as the remarkable irregularities of
the currents have brought many vessels into danger.
Near Sumatera a mud bottom, mixed with sand,
prevails, and near the islands mud only.
65 From Saya keep NE to a position some 12 or 13 miles
NE of Tanjung Jang, the SE extreme of Pulau Lingga,
and from thence as follows:
By day, with a fair wind, steer directly for the fairway
into Selat Riau, taking particular note of the tidal
70 stream, especially when setting strongly to the SE.
207
9.36.3 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
At night, steer a little more to the N to give more
clearance to the shoals, and haul in for Selat Riau when
the bank extending NE from Mesanak has been crossed.
When working northward, it is seldom necessary to
work along near the islands from Mesanak to
Korekrapat; it is generally found advantageous to stand
to the N, in case of meeting with a NW wind. But it may
occasionally happen that advantage will be derived by
standing towards them; in which case, when standing
towards the N side of Mesanak, keep the summit of
Benan bearing less than 275°, which will lead N of the
extensive shoal with a least depth of 4-6 m, NE of the E
point of Mesanak. To clear Karang Leman, E of Benan,
keep the E extreme of Mesanak bearing more than 133°,
and the N extreme of Katanglingga less than 285°.
If working in towards Selat Dempo, do not get S of
lines joining the N point of Katanglingga and Pulau-
pulau Selanga, and the latter and Udiep.
When standing to the westward towards Galang-
baru , tack before Karas Kecil is shut in by
Korekrapat; or farther N, to clear the shoal water
between Tanjung Cakang and Korekrapat, when
reaching a depth of 18 m; Dempo bearing 214° is a safe
turning mark. Between Korekrapat and Karas Kecil it is
possible to stand into depths of 15 m before tacking, but
care must be taken to give Karang Seguci a good berth.
Karas Kecil and Karas Besar should be given a berth of \
mile.
From this point continue as directed at 9.37.2.
When standing to the eastward towards Telang Kecil,
at the S entrance to Selat Riau, be careful to give the SE
side of that island a berth of 2 miles, and to keep the
prominent hill on Tanjung Punggung, the SW
extremity of Mantang, well open of Telang Kecil,
bearing 304°, to avoid Karang Sendara. Tanjung
Punngung and Ranggas may be approached to a prudent
distance.
For continuation through Selat Riau, see 9.37.2.
For passage to Singapore Strait from Selat Bangka
passing E of Bintan, see 9.42.2.
For passage from Selat Bangka to South China Sea,
see 9.42.3.
9.36.3
The alternative route, via Selat Berhala and Selat
Pengelap or Selat Abang, is in fact an alternative to the
'Inner route' from Selat Bangka to Singapore Strait, via
Selat Berhala and Selat Durian, described in article
9.38, but it is described briefly here as it is also an
alternative route to Selat Riau. The passage through
Selat Berhala which is given in article 9.38, is usually
taken in December, January and February, when strong
N winds prevail; there is then smooth water, good
anchorage, and but little tidal stream.
To either Selat Pengelap or Selat Abang follow the
directions given in 9.38.3 towards Selat Durian, as far as
necessary.
Selat Pengelap is the wider of the two straits
mentioned above. Owing to the uneven nature of the
bottom the tidal streams, near spring tides, cause whirls
and overfalls which are somewhat alarming to strangers;
the strait is, however, clear except for the sand patch and
rock on the W side of the fairway, and is easy to navigate.
Approaching the strait, steer to pass about 1 mile or less
from Pulau-pulau Alor passing preferably N of Batu
Belayar. Batu Belayar bearing 224°, and well open SE of
Pulau-pulau Alor, leads through Selat Pengelap.
Selat Abang, between Dedap and Pengelap on the SE
side, and Abang Kecil on the NW side, is reduced to a
breadth of about J mile by the reefs on either side, but is
clear and deep in the fairway.
Having passed through either of the above straits, the
directions for approaching Selat Riau are the same as
those given in the relative part of 9.36.2.
5 Passage through Selat Riau to Singapore
Strait
9.37.1
With a fair wind, Selat Riau offers no difficulties, and
no directions are necessary other than to keep in the
10 main fairway.
9.37.2
When working through Selat Riau from southward,
continue the directions given in 9.36.2 for standing to
the W towards Galangbaru, when between Karas Besar
15 and Mubutlaut, stand in to a depth of 15 m; Karas Kecil
well open of Karas Besar is a good turning point to avoid
the bank off the latter; Lobam Kecil to the N, open E of
Mubutlaut, leads E of the bank extending S of the latter
island.
20 The main channel passes E of a 7 m patch lying 2\
miles E of Tanjung Sembulang, and when working N
keep the E extreme of Mubutlaut bearing more than
163°, in order that the bank which extends NW from the
island may be cleared; if intending to pass W of the 7 m
25 patch do not cross this W limit until Tanjung
Sembulang bears 287°.
When N of Tanjung Sembulang, stand farther W, but
keep the W extreme of Mubutlaut well open of Tanjung
Sembulang, to clear Gosong Cemara. Give Tunjuk a
30 berth of about \ mile, and, when to the N, keep Tanjung
Sembulang well open of it, to avoid the bank E of
Pelanduk Subang Mas, and the reef E of Pencaras.
To avoid the reef about | mile E of the S extremity of
Nginang, keep Tanjungsau light-structure well open of
35 Nginang; and to clear the reef fringing that island, keep
the E point of Sau well open of the point under the light-
structure. After passing Sau, in standing to the W, keep
Tanjungsau light-structure open of Sau; this will clear
Tubu and shoals, as well as the 7 m patch about \ mile
40 SE of Karang Passo.
Vessels are recommended to pass out of Selat Riau
into Singapore Strait E of Karang Galang. If, however,
it is decided to pass W of this reef, keep Karang Passo
bearing more than 180° until able to pass between
45 Terumbu Betata and Karang Galang.
Continuing the directions given in 9.36.2 for standing
to the E towards Telang Kecil, when nearing Pulau-
pulau Tapai, the hill on Tanjung Punggung kept open of
the S point of Ranggas, bearing 098°, leads S of them in a
50 depth of about 8 m and of Karang Kata in about 7 m; the
SW extreme of Pangkil kept bearing more than 325°
leads W of Karang Kata and other shoals SE of Pangkil.
To clear the 7 m bank extending 2\ miles S of Pulau-
pulau Tapai keep the prominent hill on Pulau Siulung
55 open of the hill on Tanjung Punggung bearing less than
077°, until the summit of Lobam is open W of Pangkil,
bearing 327°, or more.
The SW end of Pangkil should not be approached
nearer than \ mile, as its reef is steep-to; the W side may
60 be approached to a depth of 13 m, but off its N end keep
Karas Kecil light-structure open of Pangkil bearing
167°, or less, to avoid the fringing reefs.
Between Pangkil and Gosong Tula, stand to the E into
depths of 15 m, or until Tarkulai light-structure bears
65 000°, but do not bring the NE extreme of Pangkil to bear
more than 158°, or Tarkulai light-structure less than
355°, to avoid Soreh. Tarkulai light-structure bearing
097° leads S of Gosong Tula, and the light-structure on
the E point of Tanjungsau in line with the W side of
70 Lobam Kecil bearing 329°, leads W of it; the SE extreme
208
 INDIAN OCEAN. RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
of the Lobam group, bearing less than 090° until
Tanjungsau light-structure bears more than 338°, leads
W of Karang Lolo. When N of Karang Lolo do not bring
the W extreme of Lobam Kecil to bear more than 160°
until Tanjung Taloh bears 090°, which will avoid the
dangers near Karang Plasit. Tanjung Taloh is steep-to,
and both it and Buau may be approached to about 3
cables, except near the extremes of that island. Tanjung
Uban is bold, but do not approach the shore N of it, to
Malang Jarum, nearer than J mile. The rocks above
water on the edge of the shore reef are useful guides.
To the N of Malang Jarum there are depths of 7 m
close to the edge of the shallow bank which fronts this
part of the coast to the distance of nearly 1 mile. This
bank, as well as Netscher Shoal and Crocodile Shoal,
and the shoal between them, will be avoided by keeping
Tanjungsau light-structure bearing less than 205°. If the
weather is hazy and Tanjungsau light-structure cannot
be made out at this distance, Malang Jaram, which will
be seen well clear of the extreme of the land as Netscher
Shoal is neared, must be kept bearing less than 200°
until Karang Galang light-structure bears 248° or
Tanjung Tondang N extreme bears 095°; a vessel will
then be N of those dangers and in Singapore Strait.
Inner Route from Selat Bangka to
Singapore Strait
9.38.1
The Inner Route is suitable between October and
March.
Selat Berhala forms the S part of the Inner Route to
Singapore, and Selat Durian the N part; the
intermediate part, between the W side of Kepulauan
Lingga and the E side of Sumatera, has no specific
denomination. The total distance from Berhala to
Singpore is about 120 miles.
The Inner Route is lighted and buoyed, and is
suitable for all classes of vessels. The least depth in the
fairway, from 10 m to 11 m is in the S part, SW of Muci.
Sailing vessels, bound from Selat Bangka to
Singapore during the strength of the North-east
Monsoon, frequently adopt this inner route. During the
prevalence of strong N winds in December, January and
February, they will save much time doing so, for these
straits have smooth water, good anchorage, and but little
tidal stream, whereas on the E side of Kepulauan
Lingga, at this season, there is generally a heavy sea and
a S-going current sometimes running at the rate of 3
knots. In Selat Berhala, sailing vessels will also be
greatly assisted by the squalls from the Sumatera coast.
In order to avoid the difficulty and delay sometimes
experienced in getting from the N part of Selat Durian
to Singapore Strait, many sailing vessels have preferred
the alternative of passing from the Inner Route by Selat
Abang or Selat Pengelap into Selat Riau. It seems
probable that the best passages might be made in this
way, for the great depth of water in the W part of
Singapore Strait is often embarrassing in light winds, as
there is no anchorage ground on which to bring up in
case of the wind failing. See 9.36.3.
Selat Bangka to Selat Berhala
9.38.2
Having passed Karang Ular (9.35.4), shape course for
the light-structure on Berhala, distant about 74 miles,
avoiding the shoal area extending SE from Tanjung
Jabung. The bank along the Sumatera coast being
shelving, sounding will be the best guide, and the rule is
to keep in depths of from 10 m to 13 m. In working, the
coast may be approached with care to a depth of 9 m,
9.38.4
observing that the bank with less than 9 m extends
nearly 13 miles SE of Tanjung Jabung.
Pass through Selat Berhala, using the passage S of
Berhala; the channel between Berhala and Pulau-pulau
5 Singeplaut is not safe as there are several rocks in it, and
uncharted dangers may exist. In Selat Berhala keep in
depths of from 18 m to 22 m, to be well clear of the bank
projecting from the shore W of Tanjung Jabung; thence,
in working along the coast to the W the bank is steep-to,
10 and may only be approached occasionally, with care, to a
least depth of 13 m.
Selat Berhala to Selat Durian
9.38.3
75 From abreast Berhala with a favourable wind, shape
course to pass 2 to 3 miles W of Muci Islet light-
structure. With a working breeze, the Sumatera coast
may be approached to depths of from 11 m to 13 m, but
the vessel's position must be fixed frequently, as the
20 tidal streams are very irregular off Sungai Jambi. The
mud bank W of Tanjung Jabung for a distance of 14 to
15 miles, is nearly dry at low water, spring tides, and
extends 4 to 5 miles seaward.
There is no difficulty in standing E in the vicinity of
25 Karang Speke and Muci, both of which are lighted, but,
when nearing Muci, tack when it bears 000°, to avoid
Karang Atkin; it is best, however, to pass Muci at a
distance of about 2 miles, as mentioned above.
With a fair wind, having passed Muci steer for Padri
30 Selatan, passing either side of it, but preferably to the E,
which is the main channel; Jora, the summit of Durian
Besar, which is visible from a considerable distance,
bearing 344°, is a good mark for making towards Padri
Selatan.
35 In working, be careful not to stand nearer to Tanjung
Bakau or Tanjung Dato, the entrance points of Teluk
Kualacenaku, than 2 miles; and when between them, off
that bay, remember that the bank, which extends
beyond a line joining these points, is steep-to, and
40 sounding will give no warning. Excepting abreast the S
part of Kateman, at about 12 miles N of Tanjung Dato,
the depths decrease more reguarly towards the bank,
which may from thence be approached by sounding into
depths of 13 m towards Durai and the other nearby
45 islands. In standing to the E, when abreast Tanjung
Dato, do not deepen above 35 m, for the ground on that
side is foul and unsuitable for anchorage.
Batu Kameleon is out of the fairway track, but if
standing so far to the E, the summit of Petong bearing
50 350° or more leads well W of it.
Selat Durian and to Singapore Strait
9.38.4
55 The initial part of this passage may be taken either E
or W of Pulau-pulau Rukan. If taking the E side, having
passed E of Rukan Tengah, and standing towards
Gosong Timur, tack while Jora, the summit of Durian
Besar, still bears more than 308°, to avoid the banks.
60 Having passed Rukan Utara, steer to pass between
Perasi Besar and Pelangkat; in working, by keeping
Perasi Kecil open W of Durian Kecil, bearing more than
318°, Karang Genting, 1 mile S of Durian Besar, will be
avoided.
65 If taking the route W of Pulau-pulau Rukan, pass
about 1 \ miles W of these islandsin depths of from 18m
to 25 m, but do not enter Selat Durian until Perasi Kecil
is well open E of Perasi Besar, bearing 322°, to avoid
Karang Richardson. When in the strait, steer to pass
70 between Perasi Besar and Pelangkat, as above.
209
 9.39.1 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
Continuing N, the peak of Sanglar Besar, astern, in
line with the apex of Perasi Kecil, bearing 159°, leads
between Karang Melvill and Karang Tengah. Thence
steer to pass through Phillip Channel if bound to
Singapore, or to the N and NW if bound into Malacca
Strait.
If the channel W of Karang Tengah is taken, the water
will be found to shoal gradually towards the W shore
over a bottom of soft mud, suitable for anchorage. The E
point of Degong bearing 180° leads E of the dangers
extending off Buru and the islands N of it. Karimun
Kecil bearing less than 325° also leads E of the dangers
which project 3 miles from Pulau Karimun Besar.
When working to the N after passing Perasi Kecil, and
standing E, keep W of the alignment of Manilang, the
summit of Sanglar Besar, with the NW extremity of
Durian Kecil bearing about 168°; this will avoid the reef
about \\ miles W of the S extremity of Belukar.
Singapore Strait*
9.39.1
Heavy rain squalls, during which visibility is
moderate or poor, are frequently experienced in
Singapore Strait; the colours and topmarks of the
various beacons are then useful guides.
In the following directions, the Strait is considered in
two parts, the E part for vessels coming from, or going
to, the South China Sea or the Eastern Archipelago via
Selat Riau or E of Bintan; the W part for vessels coming
from, or going to, Malacca Strait or Selat Durian.
Of the three channels into which the E entrance to
Singapore Strait is divided, Middle Channel is
recommended. North Channel has no advantage except
perhaps to vessels bound N along the coast; it should be
used only by those possessing local knowledge. South
Channel is not recommended for vessels of deep
draught; the bottom is generally rocky and uneven, and
the channel is encumbered with shoals.
Passage westward through the eastern part
of Singapore Strait*
9.39.2
If approaching from E of Bintan, South Channel may
be used, but, in view of the remarks in 9.39.1, vessels are
recommended to stand on and pass through Middle
Channel.
There is no difficulty in identifying Singapore Strait
when coming from the E, in clear weather; both Gunung
Bintan Besar and Bukit Pelali are good marks and
Horsburgh Light marks the S side of Middle Channel.
Sailing vessels will experience no difficulty in working
either direction through Middle Channel and the E part
of the strait. The best plan is to keep towards the N
shore, in case of having to anchor, as the depths are more
convenient on that side. The shore may be approached
to depths of 20 m; Pulau Mungging, kept open of
Tanjung Ayam, bearing 075°, leads S of Johor Shoal
and, when standing towards this danger, if these objects
cannot be seen, preserve the depths mentioned, for the
shoal is steep-to.
When E of Tanjung Ayam keep Tanjung Setapa in
line with, or open of Tanjung Ayam, bearing 274°, until
Pulau Mungging bears less than 360°; and, when
standing towards Falloden Hall Shoal, keep Tanjung
Ayam bearing more than 266°, and when standing
towards Congalton Skar and the shoals N of it, keep
Tanjung Punggai bearing less than 337°. A vessel may
stand towards Remunia Shoals until the extremity of
Pulau Mungging bears 256°.
There are no dangers on the S side of the strait,
excepting those fronting the coast of Bintan and
Crocodile Shoal, Terumbu Betata, and Karang Galang,
in the entrance to Selat Riau. But do not stand so far over
5 as to get near these dangers, for no advantage will be
gained by doing so, and the depths there are
inconveniently great for anchorage.
Small vessels bound to Singapore Road from the E
will have no difficulty, as they have merely to proceed to
to a convenient anchorage.
Passage eastward through Main Strait*
9.39.3
Owing to the strong tidal streams in the W part of
15 Singapore Strait, sailing vessels are frequently obliged
to anchor, for which purpose the N side of the channel is
to be preferred. Between Sultan Shoal and Raffles
Lighthouse on that side, there is convenient anchorage
in depths from 11 m to 22 m, while to the S the water is
20 deep, and the bottom rocky; the S side of this part of the
strait is, therefore, unsuitable for anchorage, especially
as violent squalls are common.
Abreast the S end of Saint John Islands, vessels ought
not to anchor if it can be avoided, for the water is deep,
25 and the tidal streams and eddies run with greater
strength than in any other part of the strait.
There is fair anchorage between Buffalo Rock and
Helen Mar Reef, as well as about 1 mile to the N and W
of the latter dangers; also from 1 mile to 2 miles E of
30 Buffalo Rock, in depths of from 22 m to 27 m, or
between it and Pulau Subar Laut. Vessels may stand
closer inshore and anchor near the edge of the charted
10 fm (18 m 3) line, SW and NE of Pulau Subar Laut; it
is inadvisable to go closer in, on account of the strong
35 tidal streams, sometimes rendering it difficult to get
underway again, especially in the light winds which
prevail here.
When working to the E between Saint John Islands
and Raffles Lighthouse, it is usual to keep on the N side
40 of the channel, making short tacks if necessary, as that
part of the strait affords tolerably convenient anchorage
along the greater portion of it, and vessels are liable to
meet with light baffling airs which would render it
necessary to anchor. It is important to remember this
45 when E of Buffalo Rock, for on that part of the S side of
the strait the water is deep, and the bottom rocky and
unsafe anchoring, the danger being much increased by
rapid tidal streams with eddies and overfalls. There is
also much power vessel traffic in both directions,
50 including many long vessels of very deep draught.
Continuing E towards the South China Sea, follow
generally the directions in 9.39.2, in reverse.
Selat Sunda to, and through Selat Gelasa
55 9.40.1
Of the three principal passages through Selat Gelasa,
namely from W to E, Selat Leplia, Selat Limende, and
Selat Baur, the latter is preferable for sailing vessels N-
bound with a fair wind, being the broadest and having
60 no dangers in the fairway. Sailing vessels working
through, and vessels of low power, should use Selat
Leplia during the North-west Monsoon (but see 9.40.2),
and Selat Baur during the South-east Monsoon, the
currents thus being less unfavourable. Selat Limende is
55 seldom used.
*Traffic Separation Schemes and numerous Prohibited
Anchorage Areas have been established in Singapore
70 Strait, see 8.1.2.
210
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
Selat Sunda to, and through, Selat Leplia
9.40.2
After leaving Selat Sunda, pass between Layang
Layang and Batu Karang Pematan.* Then, with a fair
wind, steer to sight and pass Jaga Utara and then make
for a position about 4 miles W of Karang Suji; then steer
to make good 005°, passing W of Karang Kait and
Karang Medang, when land will soon be sighted;
Simedang should on no account be sighted by day.
When past Karang Medang, steer to pass midway
between Karang-karang Baginda and the 4 m shoal 11
miles farther W, taking care to avoid the shoals lying
about 6 miles S of the latter, and thence N between
Batu-batu Discovery and Celaka, giving the latter a
berth of about 2 miles; care must be taken to avoid the
88 m patch lying 2| miles E of Tanjung Labu, and the
other dangers in this vicinity. When the N extremity of
Liat bears 090° steer to pass E of Gelasa, or E of Tanjung
Berikat, according to destination.
Note: In thick weather it is advisable to anchor on the
bank, round Karang Suji, in depths of from 12 m to
18 m, and await more favourable conditions. Vessels
coming from the Java Sea, and uncertain of their
position, can approach the coast of Sumatera to a depth
of 17 m.
Vessels proceeding through Selat Leplia at night
should take care that they sight Tanjung Murung during
daylight, if coming from the S; if approaching from
the N, Tanjung Berikat should be sighted during
daylight.
Working through Selat Leplia from the southward.
During the strength of the North-west Monsoon it is
almost impossible to work through Selat Gelasa; even in
the latter part of the monsoon, about March, when the
winds are light, sailing vessels often are obliged to
anchor on account of the strength of the S-going
current. In the South-east Monsoon also, vessels will
often meet with light variable winds, rendering it
impossible for them to preserve a direct course.
The approach to Selat Leplia does not afford
convenient clearing marks, but the following directions
are given as being, so far as can be judged, the best for
that purpose. As, however, some of the objects are at a
considerable distance from the dangers, navigators are
cautioned not to depend too implicitly upon being able
to recognise such distant objects. Particular attention
should be paid to the set of the tidal streams and
currents, and to sounding.
Coming from Selat Sunda a sailing vessel is advised to
work up the coast of Sumatera, see 9.34. Approaching
Selat Leplia proceed as follows.
If standing E, to the N of Karang Suji, stand towards
Karang Pasir, which dries, until it is but 4 miles distant,
or within half a mile of Karang Haaien, giving Karang
Medang and Karang Kait a wide berth. Simedang
bearing 028° leads 1 mile W of Karang Ombak. This
island should not be approached nearer than 3 miles, on
account of the dangers lying W of it.
Tanjung Murung kept bearing more than 318° leads
SW of Karang-karang Baginda, and Kalangbahu
summit, bearing 054°, leads NW of the S and central
portions of those reefs; Keladi, on Liat, which is not
easily recognised, kept bearing more than 005°, leads W
of the most W shoal, which is awash at low water, and the
N end of Aur open N of Bakau, bearing 064°, leads N of
the reefs.
*Caution. For areas being exploited for natural
resources. See 7.49.1. See also 8.1.2.
9.40.3
When N of Karang-karang Baginda, keep Bakau
bearing less than 108°, and Selemar more than 000°, to
avoid the shoals between them; and to clear the reef
extending 3 miles S of Liat, keep Kueel bearing less than
5 108° if Keladi bears less than 349°.
To clear the reefs and shoals lying SW and W of Liat,
Bakau must be kept bearing less than 134° until Celaka
bears 090°; and to clear Batu-batu Discovery, keep
Tanjung Labu bearing more than 220° until Celaka
10 bears 090°, which bearing also clears the rocks to the N.
To clear the reefs extending off the NW side of Liat,
keep Tanjung Labu bearing less than 215° until the S
extreme of Kelapan bears 247°.
When standing to the W, to clear the banks between
15 Karang Medang and Tanjung Murung keep Bakung, a
hill 2 miles W of Tanjung Labu, open E of Tanjung
Murung, bearing 344° until Baginda, a hill 167 m high,
about one mile NW of Tanjung Baginda (Besar), bears
276°, after which it is possible to stand W until Tanjung
20 Murung bears 017°.
To clear the shoals off the E side of Pulau Lepar,
Tanjung Murung must be kept bearing more than 219°
until the NE extreme of Kelapan bears 308°. To clear
Batu-batu Discovery, see above.
25 To avoid Gosong Raya, Bakung must be kept bearing
more than 186°, or Tanjung Labu more than 180°, until
Tanjung Berikat bears less than 322°.
North-bound through Selat Baur
30 9.40.3
For sailing vessel with a fair wind, Selat Baur is
preferable to the others, and should present no
difficulties; the land is, in the fine weather of the North-
west Monsoon, visible from the outer dangers. The
35 greater breadth of Selat Baur enables sailing vessels to
make longer boards, and as most of the islands can be
seen at night the vessel's position is more easily fixed.
The shoals that lie within the strait appear to form the
only drawback to the adoption of this channel, and in
40 clear weather even this drawback would almost
disappear, for good hill peaks, by which to fix the ship's
position, are visible on all sides, distant from 20 to 35
miles.
With a fair wind, making for Selat Baur from the S,
45 once clear of the areas subject to restrictions in the
vicinity of Segama and Jaga Utara, shape course for
Karang Larabe during the North-west Monsoon, and
for Karang Genting in the South-east Monsoon. In
clear weather the mountains in the SW part of Belitung
50 will be sighted some distance S of these dangers; Ludai,
3 J miles E of Beluru, which may be visible from about 12
miles S of Karang Genting, first comes into sight, and
shortly afterwards Beluru will be sighted. When near
Karang Larabe other mountains on Belitung as well as
55 Simedang should be sighted, so that in clear weather
there is no difficulty in making the strait. If a vessel is far
to the E of the track, Kebatu, about 25 miles SE of
Karang Genting, will be a useful mark for fixing the
position.
60 When the landfall has been made, steer a N course,
passing about 6 miles E of Simedang, midway between
Pulau Kasenga and Geresik and not less than 2 miles W
of Tanjung Ayerlancur.
With bad visibility or in thick weather, sounding must
65 be depended upon entirely; in such cases it is advisable
to make the S edge of the bank, with depths of from
13 m, to 18 m, clay with sand, which extends about 25
miles S from Simedang, by sounding, and then
immediately steer E until in depths of more than 18 m;
70 then steer N, taking care to keep in depths of more than
211
9.40.4 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
18 m, and when passing E of Simedang, keeping in
depths of not less than 29 m. If however, depths of over
36 m have been obtained when making for the S
entrance, it may be presumed that the vessel is well over
on the E side of the channel, and a N W course may then
be steered, taking care to keep in these depths. In
unfavourable conditions, or if any doubt as to which side
of the strait the vessel may be, it is advisable to anchor;
bad visibility does not usually last for any length of time.
At night, Selat Baur can be approached from S
without danger in clear weather, as the light on
Simedang is visible up to 3 miles S of Karang Hancock,
the S danger on the W side of the approach. When this
light is sighted steer to pass about 2 miles E of
Simedang, and thence proceed N until in the arc of
visibility of the light on Tanjung Ayerlancur, which
must be kept between the bearings of 003° and 022°.
When Geresik is sighted, the position can be fixed by
bearings of this island and Tanjung Ayerlancur light,
and course may be shaped to pass either E or W of Beting
Akbar, according to destination; vessels passing E of this
shoal have the advantage of being able to fix their
position by bearings of Langkuas light in addition to
Tanjung Ayerlancur light; passing W, vessels make for
Gelasa.
Working through Selat Baur, and standing E towards
Karang Genting, keep Beluru, a mountain 361 m high,
6^ miles NE of Tanjung Genting, bearing more than
011°; and to clear Karang Naga, Gosong Awal, and
Karang Cooper, keep Marang Bolo, a hillock on the S
point of Seliu, bearing more than 350°. To avoid the
dangers N of Karang Cooper Reef, keep farther W,
Marang Bolo bearing more than 010°.
Pass Baut Malang at a distance of at least 1 mile, the
approach from S being on a bearing of more than 001°,
but to the N it should not bear more than 112°, until the
N point of Seliu bears 073°, to clear Karang Tiga; after
passing which, Batu Malang must not bear more than
146°, or Marang Bolo more than 124°, until Karang
Nyera and the l l m patch NW of it are cleared.
After passing these dangers, Marang Bolo bearing less
than 132° will lead S and SW, and Tanjung Ayerlancur
bearing more than 003° to the W, of all dangers until N
of Pulau-pulau Lima. After Geresik bears 270° stand a
little farther to the E but keeping Tanjung Ayerlancur
bearing more than 355° until within about 2 miles.
Give the lighthouse on Tanjung Ayerlancur a berth of
about 1 j miles, and keep it bearing less than 158° until
Langir bears 046° to clear the reef round Kembung; to
the N, the latter in line with the lighthouse bearing about
180° leads a full mile W of Malang Wankang and will
clear all the reefs between Kembung and Langir.
Give the coast between Mendanau and Langkuas a
berth of 6 to 7 miles keeping Langir bearing less than
214° and Langkuas bearing more than 046°.
When standing to the westward, Simedang, if not
brought to bear more than 000°, will lead E of all the
shoals S of it, and sounding will also give good warning
when standing towards them, as they lie some 4 or 5
miles within the charted 10 fm (18 m 3) line. Simedang
and Simedang Kecil must be approached with caution,
as sounding does not give much warning when nearing
their outlying reefs; they should on no account be
approached within a distance of 1\ miles. Simedang
Kecil bearing 183°, astern, leads E of Karang Blis,
between which and Aur a vessel may stand to the W until
the summit of that island bears 023°, which will lead E of
Karang-karang Baginda. Kalangbahu bearing 265°
leads S of the dangers extending from Aur and Geresik.
The E side of Geresik may be approached to a distance
of 1 mile; but the E side of Pulau Kelemar has a rock
lying 1 mile off, which will be avoided if Geresik is not
brought to bear less than 160°. The summit of Aur, in
line with the E extreme of Kelemar, bearing 180°, leads
5 1J miles E of Karang Pandan.
Having passed Karang Pandan, stand farther W
towards Liat, but the SE extreme of that island must
bear more than 200° to clear the reefs off its NE side.
When N of all the reefs off the N side of Liat (at night the
10 light on Tanjung Ayerlancur or, by day, the rounded
summit of Sagoweel, about 2 miles SE, bearing more
than 111°) stand W towards Bangka.
9.40.4
Selat Limende, E of Liat, is narrower and more
15 encumbered with dangers than either Selat Leplia or
Selat Baur, between which it lies, but it is easily
navigable by sailing vessels with a fair wind, during
daylight. No vessel would from choice attempt to work
through Selat Limende, as Selat Leplia and Selat Baur
20 are much better adapted for that purpose; but it is
possible that a vessel, embarrassed by light baffling
winds, may find it convenient to proceed through some
part of it. The numerous islets afford every facility for
fixing the position of the vessel from time to time.
25
Selat Gelasa to Selat Riau
9.41.1
Most vessels, N-bound from Selat Gelasa, prefer
passing E of Gelasa, which is the safer route; but some,
30 especially when bound to Singapore by Selat Riau,
prefer the less safe, but more direct, route between the
shoals W of that island, or as an alternative to pass
between Tanjung Berikat and Pulau Berikat. The routes
W of Berikat are not recommended as reefs and dangers
35 extend more than 30 miles off the NE coast of Bangka,
and the area has not been thoroughly surveyed. During
the strength of the North-west Monsoon, N winds will
be met along the coast of Bangka and the adverse current
off and W of Tanjung Berikat will make it difficult to
40 beat up.
Passage east of Pulau Gelasa
9.41.2
With a fair wind, pass about 3 miles E of Gelasa.
45 Continue N, keeping Gelasa bearing more than 180° to
clear Karang Belvedere, Karang Magdalena and Karang
Lanrick. As the summit of Gelasa is visible from a
distance of 30 miles in clear weather, a vessel should be
nearly abreast of Karang Lanrick before losing it.
50 After clearing Karang Lanrick pass E of Karang
Severn and between that reef and the group of reefs
about 27 miles to the NNE.Soundings give no warning of
the approach to any of the above, as they are steep-to,
but in the vicinity of Karang Severn, in fine weather, the
55 highest hill on Tanjung Tuing and Raja, a hill close W of
Tanjung Raja, are visible.
If the wind should prevent a direct course from being
steered from abreast Liat, Gelasa should be kept bearing
more than 338° until the vessel is N of Beting Akbar.
60 After passing about 3 miles E of Gelasa proceed as
above.
Having passed Karang Severn steer E of Toty and
continue N W t o join the route described in 9.36.2 NEof
Tanjung Jang.
65
Selat Bangka or Selat Gelasa to Singapore
Strait, passing eastward of Bintan
9.42.1
These routes are alternative to those described in
70 9.36.1-9.41.2. They are not recommended for use
212
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
during the season of N and NW winds, from November
to March.
Selat Bangka to Singapore Strait
9.42.2
Having passed E of Saya as described in 9.36, a vessel
should steer to the N so as to pass E of Karang
Heluputan, crossing the equator in depths of about
37 m. At night it is advisable to keep in depths of not less
than 43 m when between the parallels of 0° 30' N and
0° 50'N; Merapas bearing 315° or less leads NE of
Karang Helupatan and Gosong Ara. Having rounded
the NE point of Bintan, proceed as directed in 9.39.2,
preferably using Middle Channel.
Selat Gelasa to Singapore Strait
9.42.3
First proceed as directed in paragraph 9.41.2 as far as
Karang Lanrick. Then continue on a course 000° until
Pejantan is sighted. Thence shape course for Singapore
Strait. See 9.39.2.
Selat Bangka or Selat Gelasa to South
China Sea, May to September
9.43.1
In either case the route N into the South China Sea is
as direct as possible. When the North-east Monsoon is
likely to develop before Hong Kong is reached, pass
through Alur Pelayaran Api and Palawan Passage. See
10.33.1 and 10.33.2.
9.43.2
From Selat Bangka (9.36.1), after clearing Saya,
steer to pass between Pulau-pulau Anambas and Pulau-
pulau Natuna but see 10.32.1-10.33.2, 10.38.
9.43.3
From Selat Gelasa, either proceed N as directed in
9.42.3 to sight Pejantan, and thence E of Pulau-pulau
Tambelan and between those islands and the coast of
Borneo; or steer directly to pass W of Pengibu. In either
case continue N between Pulau-pulau Anambas and
Pulau-pulau Natuna (9.43.2).
Selat Sunda to Karimata Strait and South
China Sea
9.44.1
Selat Karimata is the passage between Belitung and
Pulau-pulau Monparang on the W side, and Pulau-
pulau Karimata and the Borneo coast on the E side. It is
the customary route taken by vessels bound for
Singapore or China from the E part of the Java Sea.
Such vessels pass well outside all the dangers lying off
the E side of Belitung, and hardly ever sight either
Belitung or the Borneo coast; the direct route to
Pontianak from the Java Sea is E of Pulau-pulau
Karimata.
The main route lies E of Gosong Mampango and
Terumbu Manggar. The lines joining Gosong
Mampango, a position 20 miles E of Terumbu
Manggar, Karang Tenang and Karang Ontario must be
considered as the W limit of safe navigation for large
vessels passing through Selat Karimata.
Besides the main channel, there are several other
channels between the numerous islands lying E and NE
of Pulau-pulau Karimata, and between it and the
Borneo coast.
The E of these passes between Penebangan and
Tanjung Pasir, the SW extremity of Maya (Inner
Channel) with another passing between Pulau-pulau
Pelapis and Penebangan (Greig Channel). Both have a
regular tide, and convenient depths for anchoring, and
9.44.4
are therefore much frequented by vessels working
through the strait; it being quite impossible to work
through the main channel against a strong monsoon, and
a continuous current setting to leeward.
5
Selat Sunda to Selat Karimata
9.44.2
Pass E of Layang Layang and W of Batu Karang
Pematan. Thence having passed within sight of Jaga
10 Utara, shape course to pass E of Gosong Mampango.*
Passage north-bound through Selat
Karimata
9.44.3
15 With a fair wind, having passed E of Gosong
Mampango, steer N, approximately on or slightly to the
E of its meridian until past Pulau-pulau Momparang,
taking care to avoid the dangers stretching E from
Terumbu Manggar; then alter course to the NW so as to
20 pass between Karang Onario and Serutu, steering so as
to pass the light-structure near the W end of Serutu at a
distance of about 5 miles. Proceeding N to the South
China Sea, after passing between Karang Ontario and
Serutu, keep approximately on the meridian of 108° E,
25 taking care to avoid the 5 m reef, lying about 28 miles
NW of Karang Greig, and then pass E of Pengiki Besar.
A vessel may pass through the E channels as an
alternative to the main strait, see 9.44.4.
If making for Selat Karimata from the E part of Jawa
30 make for the E side of the S entrance to the strait, passing
W of Gosong Aling, Gosong Aruba and Gosong Jelai,
and then steer N W so as to pass between Karang Ontario
and Serutu.
35 Working through the eastern channels
9.44.4
Vessels working through Selat Karimata find it easier
to take the E channels (9.44.1), the E of which is suitable
for small vessels only. In these channels the sea is
40 smoother and the current not so strong, it being wholly
or in part overcome by the tidal stream and the
indraught into the rivers on the W coast of Borneo;
vessels also have the advantage of the change of wind at
night and in the morning caused by the land breeze, and
45 which often brings it several points more to the E in both
monsoons.
These channels have a convenient depth for
anchoring, with a bottom of soft mud, but working
through them is slow and tedious. Sounding gives good
50 warning when approaching the Borneo side; vessels can
pass fairly close to Pulau-pulau Karimata.
Less water than charted has been reported between
Aur and the SE coast of Panebangan.
Coming from SW, note the W limit of safe navigation
55 described in 9.44.1. When N of the dangers off Mangkut
and off Tanjung Pagarantimun, the Borneo coast may be
approached to a depth of 15 m, and to 11 m in Teluk
Sukadana. The S group of Pulau-pulau Layah should
not be approached nearer than 1 mile. Pass on either side
60 of the N group of Pulau-pulau Layah, observing that the
depth quickly shoals to 9 m at 3 miles NE of Meledang,
the most E of this group, and at less than 2 miles N of
Bulat, the most NE.
Between Krawang and the N group of Pulau-pulau
65 Layah the depths are from 22 m to 27 m, decreasing
fairly regularly towards the Borneo coast. The channel
*Caution. For areas being exploited for natural
70 resources, see 7.49.1. See also 8.1.2.
213
9.44.5 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA. AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
between Pulau-pulau Pelapis and Penebangan is deep
and bold towards either side.
Passage north-bound from Selat Karimata
9.44.5
Between Penebangan and Masatiga the Borneo coast
may be approached to a depth of 11 m, but when about 8
miles NW of Masatiga do not bring it to bear more than
135°, or stand into depths of less than 15 m, until off
Sungai Padangtikar, N of which the coast may be
approached to within 4 miles. Masatiga can usually be
seen from a distance of 20 miles.
A vessel may stand off to, or W of, Pulau-pulau
Leman, observing that those islands (in sight from aloft)
kept bearing more than 140° lead E of Karang Twilight,
Karang Cina and Karang Greig.
Having cleared dangers as above, make good a course
towards Datu or Pengiki Besar.
Selat Sunda east-ward to Banda Sea and
Second Eastern Passage
9.45.1
From November to February, vessels which have
passed through Selat Sunda into the Java Sea, and find
that the North-west Monsoon in those waters, and the
North-east Monsoon in the South China Sea, have
already set in, are advised to make E at once, and to pick
up the Second Eastern Passage in the Ceram Sea N of
the South Molukka Group.
Alternatively, a vessel can join the First Eastern
Passage off the entrance to Selat Makasar in November,
but there is no advantage in so doing.
Directions
9.45.2
To join the Second Eastern Passage, the better
recommended and more usual route is to stand NE from
Selat Sunda and, having passed through the Java Sea, to
pass through Selat Salayar and Alur Pelayaran Buton
into the Banda Sea. With W winds, when coming from
Selat Salayar, close Tanjung Batutoro, the SE point of
Buton, to about 3 miles, and keep along the coast as far as
Tanjung Kasolanatumbi to prevent being set over
towards Pulau-pulau Wakatoni in the light airs and S-
going current which frequently prevail in the offing.
Alternatively, passage may be made N of Jawa,
through Selat Sapudi, N of Bali, Lombok, and
Sumbawa, and through the Flores Sea and Banda Sea to
the Ceram Sea.
Directions for Ceram Sea, Selat Manipa, Selat
Jailolo, and Selat Dampier are given in 9.46.2, 9.46.3.
Second Eastern Passage
9.46.1
See 9.32.4. The passage from the South Indian Ocean
to the South China Sea through Selat Ombai is usually
made during the season October to March. When
proceeding to Singapore, the routes via Selat Sunda,
previously described, should be taken.
An alternative route in October and November is to
pass through one of the central passages, Selat Bali,
Selat Lombok or Selat Alas, joining the route from Selat
Ombai in the Ceram Sea. See 9.47.1.
December to April is the season of the tropical storms.
They may occur occasionally in November. See 6.15.
From Selat Ombai, the route is either W of Buru or
more usually, through Selat Manipa between Buru and
Manipa into the Ceram Sea. Thence pass through Selat
Jailolo or Selat Dampier into the open Pacific Ocean.
When in the Pacific Ocean, make easting between the
parallels of 1° 30' N and 3° 00' N until able to pass E of
Palau Islands; but between March and September pass
W of these islands.
Having passed Palau Islands, a variety of routes is
5 available, either through Surigao Strait and to the South
China Sea via Mindoro Strait or Verde Island Passage,
or through San Bernardino Strait and Verde Island
Passage, or, perhaps more usually, to keep E of the
Philippine Islands and to Hong Kong via Balintang
10 Channel or Bashi Channel; to Shanghai between
Sakishima Gunto and Okinawa Gunto and to Japan by a
route farther N in the full strength of the Japan current.
For the sake of convenience in directions, the Second
Eastern Passage may be divided into three parts; firstly
15 from Selat Ombai to the Ceram Sea (9.46.2); secondly
from the Ceram Sea through Selat Jailolo or Selat
Dampier (9.46.3); and, thirdly, the continuation to the
South China Sea (9.46.4, 9.46.5 or 9.46.6).
20 Selat Ombai and to Ceram Sea
9.46.2
Selat Ombai is the broad deep passage separating the
NW coast of Timor from Pulau-pulau Alor; from
October to March it was frequently used by sailing
25 vessels proceeding from Europe to China and Japan, and
it was also used by sailing vessels bound for the E part of
Jawa from the South China Sea from the middle of May
to the end of June.
In the partially enclosed region N of Pulau-pulau
30 Sawu and Timor, known as the Savu Sea, especially in
the E portion, where it is continued E by Selat Ombai,
the percentage of bright sky is greater than in any other
part of the archipelago, and the haziness is equally great
whenever E winds blow; the rainfall is heaviest in
35 December and January, but showers may fall with all W
winds.
The South-east Monsoon blows steadily between the
middle of April and the end of September, from ESE to
SE, the land breezes from Timor increasing the force of
40 the wind at night, and the sea breezes diminishing it by
day, similarly in the other season the wind will be most
steady by day and unreliable at night.
In October and November the winds are from SE to
SSW, and in December from the SW quarter,
45 accompanied by thunderstorms, but the North-west
Monsoon does not reach its full development, from W to
WNW, until January, and begins to abate in February.
Variable winds will then blow until April.
Proceeding NE through Selat Ombai, make the E
50 point of Sumba and pass between it and Pulau-pulau
Sawu or between Pulau-pulau Sawu and Roti, if falling
to leeward with NW wind. Under the exceptional
conditions of a strong NW wind and lee current, it may
be desirable to pass W of Sumba and S of Flores.
55 Passage from Selat Ombai to the Ceram Sea may be
made either W of Buru or through Selat Manipa, which
is the more usual route. If attempting to weather the W
side of Buru, and falling to leeward, it is better to
abandon the attempt and pass through Selat Manipa.
60 Selat Manipa is a good and safe channel, conveniently
situated for a call at Ambon.
During the North-west Monsoon vessels making N
should do so along the E coast of Buru, where the
adverse tidal stream is not so strong, and the favourable
65 tidal stream runs strongly. In the strength of the
monsoons, there may be a high sea running in Selat
Manipa; if so, consideration must be given to the use of
Selat Kelang, between Manipa and Kelang, but an
adverse current prevails here during the North-west
70 Monsoon season.
214
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
Through Ceram Sea to, and through Selat
Jailolo or Selat Dampier, or through
Molucca Sea to Pacific Ocean
9.46.3
Having entered the Ceram Sea as in 9.46.2, steer as
directly as possible to pass through one of the channels
between the chain of islands between Obimayor and
Kofiau into the Halmahera Sea. The channel between
Tobalai and Kekek is recommended in the North-west
Monsoon so as to keep well to windward.
Continue N through the Halmahera Sea and pass into
the Pacific Ocean through Selat Jailolo or Selat
Dampier. Selat Sagewin, between Batanta and Salawati,
should not be taken by sailing vessels, as there are
frequent calms on account of the high land on either
side, and the rapid tidal streams with strong eddies are
liable to make the vessel unmanageable. The only
difficulty in Selat Jailolo arises from the strong tidal
streams which cause whirlpools and tide-rips. The
general directions for the passage of a sailing vessel
through Selat Dampier are the same as those for a power
vessel, see Admiralty Sailing Directions. If the wind is
from the N, a sailing vessel, having passed through the
narrows, should keep over towards Waigeo rather than
Irian Jaya, to avoid being driven onto the Irian Jaya
coast by the swell from the N. Great attention must be
paid to the set of the currents.
Although the Molucca Sea is the principal passage for
power vessels proceeding between the Celebes, Ceram,
Banda and Arafura Seas, it is not recommended for a
sailing vessel working through to the N during the
North-west Monsoon season, the period dealt with in
this article, as the current sets with the wind at a rate of
16 to 24 miles a day. If obliged to pass through it, a
sailing vessel would find it best to enter through Selat
Peleng, keeping along the Sulawesi coast.
Pacific Ocean to South China Sea by
Surigao Strait
9.46.4
Surigao Strait is less frequented by sailing vessels
than is San Bernardino Strait, which is more to
windward in the North-east Monsoon. It is, however,
more direct and safer than San Bernadino Strait, but it
obliges sailing vessels that take it, if they are making for
Manila, to work up the W coast of Negros and Panay and
the E coast of Mindoro. It is of advantage to vessels
going to the more S parts of the Philippine Islands or to
the Sulu Sea. Surigao Strait is safe and deep throughout
its length, and the shores of the islands that border it are
steep-to.
At the entrance to Surigao Strait the North-east
Monsoon sets in towards the end of September, and
blows throughout October and November; in
December NE winds alternate with N gales. In January,
winds blow from NE to ENE accompanied by heavy
rain. In February and March, E winds prevail. In April,
May and June, the prevailing wind is SE, with
occasional gales called 'collas' from the S. In July,
August and September, collas from SW are frequent.
The NE winds, though strong, cease during the night;
but winds from SE, S, and SW will continue to blow. It
generally rains with N N E and ENE winds; the rain
ceases and the weather clears with E winds, and more so
with SE winds. With SW winds it remains clear unless a
gale arises, which sometimes brings rain.
In general there is no very bad weather in this part of
the archipelago, except when a typhoon occurs. The
season when a typhoon might occur is from the end of
October to the beginning of January. They begin to
9.47.1
blow from the NW, and finish from the SE, having
passed through either NE or SW; when they shift
through NE they blow the stronger, and more rain falls.
5 Pacific Ocean to South China Sea by San
Bernardino Strait and Verde Island Passage
9.46.5
When entering San Bernardino Strait from the E in
the South-west Monsoon, work to windward with the
10 flood stream, and when this loses its strength, make for
the banks NW or W of Biri Island, where anchorage can
be had on a sandy bottom until the tide makes again.
On weighing, work according to the direction of the
stream, so as to pass through Capul Pass, between Capul
15 and Dalupiri or through Dalupiri Pass, between
Dalupiri and Samar. The latter is probably the safer,
especially coming from the S. If the tide should turn
before a vessel has entered these passages, make for the
open bay off Kinaguitman, S of Lipata point, in Samar
20 Island. Anchorage can also be had, if necessary, in the
channel on either side of Dalupiri Island, on a sandy
bottom strewn with big stones.
The only danger to guard against at this part is
Diamante Rock; this once passed, take either the passage
25 between Naranjo Islands and Capul or between Naranjo
Islands and Destacado. This latter route is the better;
shaping the course then to pass round the N end of
Ticao.
For information respecting winds, currents, and
30 passages with a fair wind through the strait (which is the
same as for power vessels), see Admiralty Sailing
Directions.
Verde Island Passage lies between the SW part of
Luzon and the N coast of Mindoro. Verde Island divides
35 the channel into N and S passages. Both are safe, but the
more N, North Pass, is preferred, as the more S, or
South Pass, is interfered with by Baco Islands. It is a
favourite route during the North-east Monsoon for
vessels coming from the S. Get to the N under the lee of
40 Negros and Panay and from the NW point of Panay
proceed between Mindoro and Tablas Island to Dumali
Point, and then on through Verde Island Passage and up
the W coast of Luzon, thus escaping the strong monsoon
that is generally felt on clearing Lubang Islands.
45
Pacific Ocean to South China Sea, passing
north of Philippine Islands
9.46.6
Referring to 9.46.1, a vessel on passage from Selat
50 Jailolo or Selat Dampier will have benefited by the
gradually increasing effect of the Japan Current as far as
Balintang Channel or Bashi Channel, one of which must
be used. These channels are described in Admiralty
Sailing Directions.
55
First Eastern Passage
9.47.1
As outlined in 9.32.5, the First Eastern Passage
should be taken N-bound in October and November
60 only. It is more suitable for S-bound vessels, but then
only in May and from the South China Sea. It has little
to recommend it on account of the adverse current
setting to the S through Selat Makasar, often strongly, at
all seasons. The winds are boisterous and uncertain at
65 the S end of Selat Makasar, and light and variable at the
N end, while the navigation is difficult throughout
almost the whole voyage to the open South China Sea.
The route runs from either Selat Bali, Selat Lombok
or Selat Alas across the Java Sea into, then through Selat
70 Makasar into the Celebes Sea, and thence to the Sulu
215
9.47.2 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
Sea through Basilan Strait. It then passes up the W coast
of Mindano, Negros and Panay, and enters the South
China Sea through Mindoro Strait or Verde Island
Passage.
Notes on Selat Bali, Selat Lombok and
Selat Alas
9.47.2
Of these three straits, Selat Bali is the narrowest and
most difficult for sailing vessels. It was formerly
preferred by them, due to the anchoring facilities it
offered. Selat Lombok is the widest, but Selat Alas is
probably preferable as there are no dangers and
anchorage can be obtained if necessary during the calms
to which all these straits are more or less subject.
In Selat Bali, which is only one mile wide at its N end,
the chief difficulty lies in the currents, and sailing vessels
should only navigate the strait by day.
During the South-east Monsoon, N of the area of the
Trade Winds, the wind is mostly SSW and SSE to SE,
with a W-going stream; from July to September the
wind can be very strong. In the North-west Monsoon, a
vessel N of the Trade Wind area may be set strongly to
the E, both by wind and stream.
Selat Lombok is the most important passage between
the Indian Ocean and Selat Makasar, mainly on account
of its width and the ease with which it can be navigated.
During the North-west Monsoon sailing vessels average
one day to make the N-bound passage; during the
South-east Monsoon the time taken on the passage
usually varies from one to three days. Making the S-
bound passage during the North-west Monsoon takes at
least one day, but usually more; in the South-east
Monsoon this passage is quick, averaging 16 or 17 hours,
but in April and October sailing vessels have
experienced great difficulty in getting through the strait
S-bound. February and March are the best months for
navigating the strait.
In Selat Lombok, during the South-east Monsoon,
calms are frequent from sunrise to noon, when a fresh S
wind arises, turning to SE on the Bali side, and to SSW
on the Lombok side, blowing strong during the night. In
the North-west Monsoon the winds are generally from
NW, sometimes with violent squalls, and a high sea in
the N approach.
Directions for Selat Lombok
9.47.3
During the South-east Monsoon the South-east
Trade Wind continues through the strait. When nearing
the strait, keep E of the entrance and sight Lombok,
taking into consideration that the vessel may be set W by
the monsoon drift. Sail into the entrance close along the
SW point of Lombok, and then hold the Lombok side.
At this season Nusapenida must never be approached, as
in the event of calms, especially with a S-going stream,
there is danger of being set on to it.
In the transition months (March, and the end of
October and beginning of November), if W winds
predominate hold the Bali side, passing through Selat
Badung; if E winds predominate hold the Lombok side.
Selat Badung is always preferable, as anchorage may be
obtained there.
During the North-west Monsoon, make for Bukit
Badung and proceed through Selat Badung under the
Bali shore.
Directions for Selat Alas
9.47.4
In the South-east Monsoon the wind blows strongly
from S during the greater part of the day, but subsides
towards evening, when the land breeze from Lombok
begins. In the North-west Monsoon variable and
baffling S winds are often experienced in Selat Alas.
Approaching from the S, Selat Alas may be identified
by the high, rugged land of the SW part of Sumbawa,
w and the plateau forming the SE part of Lombok. From
the N, Gunung Rinjani and the high NW part of
Sumbawa are conspicuous, and the islands lying under
the coasts of Lombok and Sumbawa will also be visible.
As all the straits E of Jawa are more or less subject to
75 calms, sailing vessels proceeding through Selat Alas may
find it necessary to anchor; it is therefore advisable to
hold the Lombok side of the strait, where conditions for
anchoring are more favourable.
20
Notes on passage through Java Sea and
Selat Makasar to Celebes Sea
9.47.5
25 Having passed through Selat Bali, Selat Alas or Selat
Lombok as directed, steer to pass between Pulau-pulau
Kangean and Pulau-pulau Tengah, and thence to enter
Selat Makasar by one of the three channels into which
the S entrance is divided. The middle one of these three
30 channels is to be preferred for entering the strait, though
the most E channel is also frequently used, especially by
vessels bound for Ujung Pandang. In the latter case
Kepulauan Pabbiring and its associated bank rises so
steeply from depths greater than 180 m that sounding
35 will give no indication of a vessel's approach. The most
W of these three channels is seldom used, partly owing
to the fact that no land is visible, which makes it difficult
for a vessel to determine its position, and partly because
no saving of distance is effected.
40 Some ISO miles to the N of the above channels the
strait is again divided into two channels by Pulau-pulau
Balabaiagan. The width of the W channel is 20 miles,
and of that on the E side of the islands 45 miles. There
are some dangers in the W channel, but it is nevertheless
45 much frequented, and for some reasons preferred to the
E, on account of the more moderate depths off the coast
of Borneo, which permit anchoring in case of necessity,
while the Sulawesi coast is steep-to in many places, and
destitute of anchorage.
50 Having passed N of Pulau-pulau Balabaiagan there is
no difficulty in navigating through the remainder of
Selat Makasar into the Celebes Sea.
55
Celebes Sea to South China Sea
9.47.6
This section of the First Eastern Passage passes from
the Celebes Sea, through Basilan Strait into the Sulu
60 Sea, and thence by Mindoro Strait or Verde Island
Passage to the South China Sea. Verde Island Passage,
see 9.46.5, is a favourite N-bound route during the
North-east Monsoon.
In Basilan Strait, the channel N of Santa Cruz
65 Islands, although narrower than that on the S side of
them, is generaly preferred by sailing vessels for its
better anchorage facilities.
The Sulu Sea is of great depth and offers no particular
problems. For winds and currents in this sea area and its
70 vicinity, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
216
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA. AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
ROUTES SOUTH-BOUND THROUGH
EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO
General Information
9.48
There are three principal routes for vessels S-bound
from the South China Sea through the Eastern
Archipelago.
The Western route (9.49.1) passes through the South
China Sea, W of the Philippine Islands and Borneo to
Selat Sunda, either direct or via Singapore.
The Eastern route (9.50.1) passes through the South
China Sea, E of the Philippine Islands to Selat Jailolo,
and thence to Selat Ombai or to one of the central
passages (Selat Alas, Selat Lombok or Selat Bali).
The Central route (9.51.1) passes W of the Philippine
Islands and E of Borneo, through Selat Makasar to one
of the central passages.
Of these three routes the Western and Central are
those used by vessels from ports in S China; the Central
Route is also used from Manila and ports in the S parts
of the Philippine Islands or on the E side of Borneo; the
Eastern Route is used by vessels from ports in N China
or from Japan. In the strength of the South-west
Monsoon vessels from ports in S China sometimes use
the Eastern Route.
Western Route South-bound from South
China Sea
9.49.1
Passage may be taken either direct or via Singapore,
the latter being best made during the North-west
Monsoon period (October to April), and there are then
two principal passages one by Selat Riau and Selat
Bangka or Selat Gelasa, but in October by Selat Gelasa
only, because light and baffling winds prevail in that
month between Selat Riau and Selat Bangka; and the
other, known as the Inner Route, by Selat Durian, Selat
Berhala, and Selat Bangka. Selat Riau and Selat Berhala
are particularly convenient for sailing vessels leaving
Singapore for Europe in the North-west Monsoon
(North-east Monsoon of the South China Sea). By using
these routes, the difficulties of beating E out of
Singapore Strait into the North-east Monsoon of the
South China Sea are avoided.
During the South-east Monsoon, the ordinary route
would be to beat out through Singapore Strait to the E,
and work S by Selat Karimata or Selat Gelasa to Selat
Sunda. At the same time, vessels are frequently able to
proceed much more quickly to the S by the Inner Routes
than by the outer one. Convenient anchorage is always
available in the straits for sailing vessels held up by
wind, or tidal streams.
To make the passage from the South China Sea to
Selat Sunda during the North-east Monsoon of the
South China Sea, a vessel having passed either E or W of
Pulau-pulau Anambas would proceed S through Selat
Bangka or Selat Gelasa; but during October the former
should not be attempted, owing to the calms and baffling
winds which occur during that month in its N
approaches.
During the South-west Monsoon, a vessel from
Palawan Passage or one that has crossed to the Borneo
coast from Mui Dinh should proceed by Selat Karimata
or Selat Gelasa.
Directions for vessels S-bound through Selat Durian
and Selat Berhala are the reverse of those given for the
N-bound passage by the Inner Route in paragraphs
9.49.4
9.38.4 and 9.38.2. Directions for the other straits and
channels follow.
Passage southward through Selat Riau
5 9.49.2
Vessels having a fair wind leaving Singapore at high
water, or about the first quarter of the ebb or E-going
stream, and taking about 4 hours to reach the entrance to
Selat Riau, will probably carry a fair tidal stream
10 through both straits, but no dependence can be placed
on it. See Admiralty Sailing Directions.
The directions given in paragraph 9.37.2 for coming
N through Selat Riau, if reversed, will suffice for
proceeding S. Vessels of deep draught should pass E of
15 Karang Galang.
At night, steer to pass | mile E of the light on Karang
Galang, from which position Tunjuk leading lights will
be in line bearing 180°. When Tarkulai light is open S of
Lobam bearing 100°, and the vessel is S of Karang Lolo,
20 shape course about 135°, allowing for tide, until the light
on Karas Kecil bears 154°, when it may be steered for on
that bearing. Pass about half a mile or more E of it, and
then keep it astern, bearing about 320° or less, as long as
it is in sight, to lead in the fairway S of the strait.
25
Approach to, and passage southward
through Selat Bangka
9.49.3
30 With a fair wind, when coming from the N, and
having passed Pulau-pulau Tuju and steering to the S to
pass through Selat Bangka, there will be no difficulty in
clear weather in determining a position; in such
circumstances enter the strait E of Karang Ular. In thick
35 weather it often happens that no land can be seen until
the vessel has arrived very near to the entrance to the
strait, and at such times it is important to get hold of the
bank extending from the Sumatera coast, and then
proceed along its edge in low water depths of from 15m
40 to l l m , carefully attending to sounding. Sometimes
Menumbing will be seen, but no other land, and in such
case it will be prudent to proceed as before, keeping
along the edge of the bank.
When working through Selat Bangka from the N, the
45 passage W of Karang Ular is much to be preferred when
the land is obscured and reliable bearings cannot be
obtained; at other times the E channel is preferable. By
reversing the directions given in 9.35.3 and 9.35.4 for
working through from the southward, no difficulty will
50 be experienced in having Selat Bangka.
Approach to, and passage southward
through Selat Gelasa
55 9.49.4
Although the navigation of this strait is complicated
by the many dangers in it, yet, as, the course by it is more
direct, the prevailing winds more favourable, and the
distance less than by perhaps the safer route through
60 Selat Bangka, many seamen prefer it, especially when S-
bound from China late in the North-east Monsoon.
In consequence of the N entrance to Selat Gelasa
being so near the equator, the winds, even in the
strength of the monsoons, are very uncertain, producing
65 a corresponding uncertainty in the direction and force of
the tidal streams and currents. A sailing vessel
approaching the strait from N will, therefore, have to be
principally guided by the winds and currents which may
have been encountered rather than by relying upon
70 those which are mentioned to have been experienced at
217
9.49.5 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
certain seasons and described- in Admiralty Sailing
Directions.
In thick weather the greatest caution is necessary
when approaching Selat Gelasa, for unless good
observations can be obtained there is no means of
ascertaining an exact position, and, in such
circumstances, it is advisable to steer for Selat Bangka,
where the soundings, on the edge of the bank extending
from the Sumatera coast, may be a useful guide,
although the land may not be distinguished. See 9.49.3.
When approaching the NE coast of Bangka use every
precaution not to get entangled among the outlying
dangers when running S for Selat Gelasa in thick
weather. Some of these dangers are over 40 miles from
the shore, between Tanjung Pengail and Tanjung
Berikat, which are about 75 miles apart.
Early in the North-east Monsoon, when the wind is
generally from N or NW, and intending to go through
Selat Gelasa, pass between Toty and Dokan, which lie
off the N coast of Bangka; a little later in the monsoon the 20
wind is more E, and it is then better to pass from 10 to 20
miles E of Toty.
Cross bearings of the mountains on Bangka, in clear
weather, will enable a vessel to clear Karang Iwan and
Karang Severn, which lie in the track to Selat Gelasa.
Having passed N of Karang Severn, steer so as to get on
the meridian of Gelasa before reaching the parallel of
1 ° 50' S. Gelasa is visible in clear weather at a distance of
over 30 miles, but it is not visible from Karang Lanrick,
the most N danger, for which a careful lookout is
necessary. When Gelasa comes in sight, bring it to bear
180° which leads clear of all dangers lying to the W.
Then pass E of Gelasa and shape course for Selat Leplia,
which is the passage usually taken.
The above directions apply only to sailing vessels
coming from China early in the North-east Monsoon.
Late in the monsoon, SE and E winds are often met with
between Bangka and Belitung, and it will be better to
pass from 10 to 12 miles W of Pejantan, and try as soon
as possible to get on the meridian of Gelasa. When that
island is seen, bring it to bear 180°, and proceed as above.
Late in the North-east Monsoon also, SSW winds are
often met in the S part of the South China Sea, obliging
vessels to keep farther E towards the islands off Borneo.
If this should happen in May or June, it would be
tedious work getting to Selat Leplia, and therefore steer
for Langkuas off the NW point of Belitung, and pass
through Selat Baur.
Selat Gelasa can only be approached from the N at
night by passing E of all the dangers lying N of it.
Having passed well to the W of Karang Florence
Adelaide, shape course for the light on Langkuas, and
when it comes in sight, alter course to pass about 4 miles
W of Langir.
Passage southward through Selat Leplia
9.49.5
In the early part of the North-east Monsoon, N and
N W winds prevail about the N entrance to Selat Gelasa,
and strong SE-going currents will generally be
experienced between Gelasa and Liat, especially near
the N extremity of Liat. Neglect to guard against the
effect of this current has been a frequent cause of
accidents.
Vessels intending to proceed S-bound through Selat
Leplia by night should take care to sight Tanjung
Berikat during daylight.
Having passed from 1 mile to 2 miles E of Pulau
Gelasa, stear to the SW until that island bears 014°, and
then keep it on that bearing, astern, until the SE extreme
218
of Kelapan bears 236° and the N point of Liat bears 125°.
From this position keep in the fairway of the channel,
steering about 185° to pass between the dangers off
Celaka and Batu-batu Discovery, carefully guarding
5
against the effects of tidal streams or currents by
frequently fixing the position.
9.49.6
For passage southward through Selat Baur and
Selat Limende, the directions given in 9.40.3 and
'° 9.40.4 should be applied in reverse.
Selat Baur is the best channel to use for working
through against the South-east Monsoon, since the
currents in it are weaker than elsewhere.
'5 Approach to, and passage southward
through, Selat Karimata
9.49.7
If using the Main Channel during the North-west
Monsoon, take the channel E of Karang Ontario.
Approach Serutu with its summit bearing less than 152°,
and thence pass 4 or 5 miles W of the lighthouse. Thence
the directions given in 9.44.3 should be followed in
reverse.
If using the E channels, the directions given in 9.44.4
25 are generally applicable. When the South-east Monsoon
is strong, smoother water, with less current, will be
found in these channels than in the main part of the
strait.
30 General directions for passages from Selat
Bangka, Selat Gelasa, or Selat Karimata to
Selat Sunda
9.49.8
Dangerous shoals extend for about 35 miles to the S of
35 Selat Gelasa rendering great caution necessary when
leaving it and making for Selat Sunda.
Having cleared the shoals S of Selat Gelasa and Selat
Karimata, the route to Selat Sunda is the same as that
from Selat Bangka, described below.
40 With a fair wind, after passing E of Five Fathom
Banks, in depths of from 18 m to 22 m, steer to pass a
prudent distance W of Karang Basa and Gosong
Serdang; from thence reverse the directions given in
9.34 for proceeding N.
45 When working S from a position W of Five Fathom
Banks, reverse the directions for working N as given at
9.34, and observe the caution for anchoring at night
when the position is at all doubtful. Gosong Sekopong,
with a least depth of 5 m, E of Tanjung Sekopong, will
50 be avoided by keeping Segama bearing more than 180°,
and when S of them, the islands bearing less than 000°
will lead E of Layang Layang, which has a depth of 8 m
over it.
In the South-east Monsoon, when the atmosphere is
55 hazy and the coast is rarely visible, great care is
necessary in passing Segama, which from N appears as
one.
Caution. See 7.49.1 for warning of areas subject to
restrictions due to exploitation of natural resources.
60
Passage southward through Selat Sunda
9.49.9
The general description of Selat Sunda, together with
the winds, sea and tidal streams to be expected therein, is
65 .given in Admiralty Sailing Directions.
During the South-east Monsoon, from April to
September, keep in the main fairway when the wind is
favourable; but if proceeding through Selat Panaitan
keep closer to the Jawa coast than to Panaitan. This
70 route may be taken also at the beginning of the North-
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
west Monsoon, up to about the end of December if
conditions are favourable.
The monsoon is generally supposed to shift at about
the beginning of October, but often is delayed for a
month; the interval being filled with calms, light S
winds, and frequent heavy Sumatra squalls, or south-
westers. These squalls at this season generally take place
at night, accompanied by heavy rain, thunder and
lightning, and are of short duration.
During the North-west Monsoon, from October to
April, the alternative is offered between routes on the N
and S sides of Selat Sunda.
By the Northern Route, during the strength of the
North-west Monsoon in January and February, the W
channel, between Sangian and Pulau-pulau Sumur is
recommended, giving the latter a berth of \\ miles and
thence working NW when winds are from W.
If it is late in the day when Pulau-pulau Sumur are
sighted, with strong SW winds and an adverse stream, a
vessel will do well to seek anchorage off the Sumatera
coast or Tanjung Sumurbatu at the N end of the islands,
or off Sindu, inshore of Kandangbalak, the SW island of
Pulau-pulau Sumur. The vessel should be got aweigh
immediately the stream turns, to take advantage of the
morning land breeze.
Working through the passage between Sebuku and
Sumatera, pass on whichever side of Pulau-pulau Tiga
the strong currents and hard squalls will allow, and
thence N of Serdang, and between it and Siuncal; or,
alternatively, pass N of Legundi and out through Selat
Legundi avoiding a coral reef (Medusa) 2 miles NE of
Seserot, passing on either side of that island in mid-
channel. In this manner a quick passage may be made
through the strait if the wind be not too variable, besides
having the advantage of anchorage being available on the 35
E side of Sekuku or on the W side of Teluk Lampung if
the current or wind prove too strong.
Note. Selat Legundi, between the Sumatera coast
and Legundi, is 2 miles wide, and is recommended to
sailing vessels working out of Teluk Lampung in the
North-west Monsoon. The passages on either side of
Seserot are equally good, and, with contrary winds or
current, there is anchorage on the E side of the island in
depths of from 18m to 22 m, sand. Vessels drifting
through the strait in a calm will be carried past the island 45
by the off-set of the current. To the W of Selat Legundi
is Teluk Kiluan, where safe anchorage may be found, if
required, by vessels with local knowledge only. Sailing
vessels may run out with the land wind, which blows
here from the N, but it is recommended to have a boat in
attendance to tow, lest they should get becalmed under
the high land; it is advisable to pass close W of Tanjung
Tuntungkalik, but clear of the islet off it.
The Southern Route through Selat Sunda takes a
vessel to the Indian Ocean along the Jawa coast and
through Selat Panaitan. There are on record many
instances of vessels having worked out of the strait
during the North-west Monsoon by taking this course,
with more ease and celerity than could have been
effected by stretching into Teluk Lampung, in
consequence of the SW-going current from the Java sea
having then developed its chief strength along the E side
of the strait. This is, however, a lee shore and therefore
dangerous, at this season.
In spite of this, cases are on record in which vessels
have worked through Selat Panaitan in a remarkably
short time during a W gale, by carrying a heavy press of
sail and tacking between the squalls, when it was
impossible for any vessel in Great Channel to beat
against the current and heavy sea. In this monsoon,
219
9.50.3
particularly when working out, it is advisable to keep
nearer the island shore, to obtain the help of a current
sometimes running to the W, and to avoid being set
upon the rocks about Tanjung Gedeh by the heavy
5 swell. Near the Java shore, when outside anchorage
depths in a calm, vessels would be in considerable
danger.
Eastern Route South-bound from South
10 China Sea
9.50.1
The Eastern Route passes from the South China Sea
to Selat Ombai, or to Selat Alas, Selat Lombok or Selat
Bali. It is useful from the middle of May to the end of
15 July.
During the strength of the South-west Monsoon, the
best route from Hong Kong and adjacent coast ports is
to pass N of the Philippine Islands, through Bashi
Channel or Balintang Channel, and then steer, either
20 along the E side of the Philippines, or to the SE towards
Palau Islands.
When the South-east Monsoon is encountered, shape
course to pass E of Halmahera, through Selat Jailolo or
Selat Dampier to the Halmahera Sea and thence to the
25 Ceram Sea; alternatively a vessel may pass to the Ceram
Sea from the Pacific Ocean through the Molucca Sea.
From the Ceram Sea pass to the Banda Sea either
through Selat Manipa, E of Buru, or by passing W of
Buru; then continue through the Banda Sea to Selat
30 Ombai, or through the Flores Sea to Selat Alas, Selat
Lombok, or Selat Bali; if bound to Selat Bali, the usual
route is via Selat Sapudi.
South China Sea to Pacific Ocean via
Balintang Channel or Bashi Channel
9.50.2
Balintang Channel is reputed to be free of danger, and
is frequently used by sailing vessels S-bound from ports
in China. Bashi Channel is also used. See Admiralty
40 Sailing Directions.
Pacific Ocean to Ceram Sea
9.50.3
As mentioned in 9.50.1, this part of the Eastern Route
can be taken via Selat Jailolo, or Selat Dampier, or
through the Molucca Sea.
In Selat Jailolo, the deep channel lying between Muor
and Gebe presents no difficulty except from the strong
tidal streams, often accompanied by whirlpools and
50 tide-rips, particularly off the NW extremity of Gebe.
Having passed through Selat Jailolo steer through the
Halmahera Sea to enter the Ceram Sea through one of
the channels between the chain of islands about 70 miles
S of Selat Jailolo. The channel between Pisang and
55 Pulau-pulau Boo is recommended for sailing vessels
during the South-east Monsoon.
When approaching Selat Dampier from the E,
Tanjung Momfafa should be made out, a good berth
being given to the shoals, which extend about 7 miles
60 ENE, and which may be avoided by keeping Wayam
bearing more than 245°; then proceed, reversing the
directions given in 9.46.3 and in Admiralty Sailing
Directions.
Having passed through Selat Dampier proceed direct
65 to the Ceram Sea.
As for N-bound vessels (9.46.3), the Molucca Sea
cannot be strongly recommended S-bound between the
Pacific Ocean and the Ceram Sea. It is sometimes used
by sailing vessels S-bound from China, and, after
70 September, with advantage: but it is a tedious passage to
9.50.4 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
beat through, as the currents set with the wind at the rate
of from 16 to 24 miles a day. When it is difficult to get to
the S by the channel between Pulau-pulau Sula and
Dbimayor, sailing vessels might try to do so, by keeping
near the W coast of Halmahera and passing through
5elat Patinti, between Halmahera and Bacan, and
thence through Selat Obi and Selat Tobalai to the
Ceram Sea.
Ceram Sea to Indian Ocean via Selat
Ombai, Selat Alas, Selat Lombok, or Selat
Bali
9.50.4
The recommended route is to pass through Selat
Manipa into the Banda Sea and thence proceed as
directly as possible to Selat Ombai or to Selat Alas, Selat
Lombok or Selat Bali.
In passing through Selat Manipa, S-bound in the
South-east Monsoon, keep towards the W side of
Manipa, where the N-going current will not be so
strongly felt. See 9.46.2 and Admiralty Sailing
Directions.
Approaching Selat Alas from the N, Rinjani and the
high NW part of Sumbawa are conspicuous. The 180 m
depth contour line from the S terminates about a mile
from Tanjung Ringgit; from the N it penetrates as far as
a line running W from Belang. T h e soundings between
are deep but irregular. Selat Alas, as are all straits E of
Jawa, is more or less subject to calms; it is therefore
advisable in a sailing vessel to keep within soundings on
the Lombok side, the more so as the currents are not so
strong there as in the middle and on the E side.
When S-bound, it is advisable to get under weigh very
early in the morning, in order to clear the strait, if
possible, before the sea breeze sets in.
In Selat Lombok, S-bound during the South-east
Monsoon, with predominating SE winds, it is advisable
to work up under the Bali shore with a N-going stream
until the summit of Agung bears 270°; under these
conditions, working to the S under the NW coast of
Lombok is difficult, and the same applies to the Bali
shore S of the parallel of Agung.
During the North-west Monsoon and in the
transition months, Selat Lombok from the N affords no
particular difficulties; the remarks on the tidal streams in
Admiralty Sailing Directions should be studied.
Selat Bali (9.47.2) offers a safe passage to S-bound
vessels during the North-west Monsoon, and with the
exception of Selat Alas, E of Lombok, is to be preferred
to all the passages E of Jawa, as there is anchorage on
both sides of the narrows in case they should not be
passed through in a single tide. For vessels coming from
the N, the chief difficulty to contend with is the great
strength of the currents. Sailing vessel should only
navigate this strait by day. During the North-west
Monsoon, the water in the strait is smooth, and the
passage easy.
It is well to have boats ready for towing the vessel,
when near the shore, in calms.
Central Route South-bound from South
China Sea
9.51.1
The Central Route runs from the South China Sea,
through Selat Makasar, to Selat Alas, Selat Lombok, or
Selat Bali. It is, in fact, the reverse of the First Eastern
Passage (9.47.1). It is intended for vessels leaving China
at the end of April or the beginning of May.
Summarising the route, a vessel should steer from the
vicinity of Macclesfield Bank, to pass through Mindoro
Strait, and thence across the Sulu Sea to the Celebes Sea
via Basilan Strait or Sibutu Passage; Basilan Strait is
5 recommended for sailing vessels, though Sibutu Passage
is sometimes used. The voyage now continues through
the Celebes Sea and Selat Makasar into the Java Sea,
through which either of two routes may be taken,
namely to Selat Sunda or to one of the central passages,
10 Selat Alas, Selat Lombok, or Selat Bali. Vessels bound
to the last named usually pass through Selat Sapudi.
If an alternative to Selat Makasar is desired, a vessel
may pass from the Celebes Sea to the Banda Sea via the
Molucca Sea, Ceram Sea and Selat Manipa.
75
Passage through Mindoro Strait into Sulu
Sea
20 9.51.2
The wide Mindoro Strait, separating the Calamian
Group from Mindoro Island, is one of the most
frequented channels for sailing vessels which leave
Manila for the Indian Ocean towards the end of April,
25 and throughout the South-west Monsoon period; and
by other vessels at all times of the year from the ports of
China to Australia. Land and sea breezes are felt on the
coasts of the larger islands in Mindoro Strait, mostly
during the South-west Monsoon and in the periods
30 between the monsoons; they are not so regular during
the North-east Monsoon.
Passage through Sulu Sea to Selat Makasar
35 9.51.3
Making to the S through the Sulu Sea, it is best to
keep on the E side along the coast of Panay, and through
Basilan Strait. The more direct route from Mindoro
Strait S through Sibutu Passage is not recommended
40 and no special directions are available for it. For the
Sulu Sea and Basilan Strait, see 9.47.6.
The passage from Basilan Strait or Sibutu Passage,
across the Celebes Sea to Selat Makasar, is as direct as
possible.
45
Passage south-bound through Selat
Makasar and Java Sea
9.51.4
50 In Selat Makasar, the Borneo side provides anchorage
in case of need; the coast of Sulawesi is steep-to.
Although there are some dangers in the channel W of
Pulau-pulau Balabalagan , it is nevertheless much
frequented for the same reason.
55 On leaving Selat Makasar, and entering the Java Sea,
course must be shaped for Selat Sunda or for the N
entrance to one of the three passages between the islands
immediately E of Jawa, namely Selat Alas, Selat
Lombok, and Selat Bali. See 9.47.2.
60 If bound for Selat Alas or Selat Lombok, steer to pass
about 20 miles E of the dangers on that side of Kangean.
If bound for Selat Bali the usual route is through Selat
Sapudi, which is a good and safe channel with no
dangers other than Karang-karang Tembaga, which
65 dry, and Jacoba Elizabeth, a rock, with a depth of
11 -9 m, lying on the W side; it is preferable to both the
channel W of Giliyangana and Selat Raas, E of Sapudi.
In Selat Sapudi and the passages farther E, including
Pulau-pulau Kangean, the South-east Monsoon
70 prevails from April to October, and the North-west
220
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
Monsoon from November to March. In April and May
all winds are southerly, in June the monsoon becomes
dominant from SSE to SE, and blows with greatest
strength during July, August and September. In
November winds are N, alternating with rain squalls
ROUTES THROUGH RED SEA
General note
9.55
Sailing vessels, whether N-bound or S-bound, at
times experience great difficulties when working against
the strong winds, which, in the winter season, blowing
from either end of the Red Sea towards its centre,
produce a short hollow sea, and, combined with the
strong current that often runs with the wind, render the
progress of such vessels very slow. In working to
windward in the central channel, a vessel cannot do
wrong by keeping towards the Arabian shore, but
should not stand close in with a light wind or heavy
swell. After dark she ought only to stand towards the
shore half the distance she stands out, and should never
come nearer than 10 miles to the reefs at night, to guard
against the possibility of mischance from the
unexpected existence of a cross current.
South-bound
9.56
For sailing vessels, the most favourable part of the
year for the S-bound passage is from June to September,
or the period of the South-west Monsoon in the Arabian
Sea, as N winds of variable strength then prevail
throughout the whole length of the Red Sea. Particular
attention should be paid to the description of the
currents in the Red Sea; this is especially necessary for
the narrower portions of the passage, and the approaches
thereto. See Admiralty Sailing Directions.
ROUTES'FROM ADEN
Aden to Bombay
9.60
During the South-west Monsoon from April to
September, take as direct a route as possible. Keep in the
centre, or rather towards the Arabian shore of the Gulf
of Aden, to avoid the W-going current on the African
coast. During the strength of the South-west Monsoon,
in June, July and August, when the weather is thick and
heavy, and observations very uncertain, steer direct for
Khanderi Island, and watch the soundings carefully.
When steering for Bombay Harbour, from the middle
of May till August, steady gales and clear weather will be
experienced at times, until within 70 or 90 miles of the
coast, but cloudy weather with rain and squalls may be
expected as the land is approached.
If not certain of the latitude it will be prudent to keep
between the parallels of 18° 15' N and 18° 25' N, and
endeavour to get soundings on Direction Bank, after
passing over The Fifty Fathoms Flat.
During the early part and strength of the South-west
Monsoon, great care must be observed not to get N of
the entrance to the harbour, for then the N-going tidal
9.60
from all points; in December N and NW winds last
longer and squalls come from NW or WNW; January
and February are marked by very squally weather from
NW to N, and in March it often continues to blow stiffly
from W to WNW.
On approaching the Straits of Bab el Mandeb, choice
must be made between using Large Strait, or Small
Strait. For ease of navigation the former is
75 recommended, numerous accidents having occurred in
the latter; at the same time consideration must be given
to the fact that anchorage, in case of need, is possible in
any part of Small Strait. The circumstances prevailing
at the time must determine the course to be followed.
20
North-bound
9.57
25 For the N-bound voyage by the same route as the S-
bound (9.56), December, January and February are the
best months, as the S winds often carry a vessel as far as
the parallel of Jiddah, and sometimes as far as that of
Quseir, or even, at times, to Suez itself. After losing the
30 S wind, a vessel will have the N wind to beat against.
If as far N as Quseir, and bound for Suez, and a strong
N wind is encountered, a vessel in the central channel of
the Red Sea, or even on the W shore, ought to stand over
to the Arabian coast, where she will probably fetch Al
35 Muwaylih. Having worked up 30 miles N of that place,
she may stand over to Ras Muhammad, leaving the
Arabian coast at night. As she proceeds, the N winds will
veer to NNE out of the Gulf of 'Aqaba; by sailing as
close as possible, these will enable her to fetch RSs
40 Muhammad.
stream, as well as the heave of the S swell, frequently sets
50 vessels along the bank towards the Gulf of Khambhat,
and late in May, June and July it would be found
difficult at times to work round Prongs Reef. Therefore,
in these months a vessel should steer direct for Khanderi
Island, allowing for a N-going set of the tidal stream—
55 though the prevailing current outside the depth of 55 m
off the harbour, after the burst of the monsoon, is S-
going—and endeavour should be made to make the
island bearing between 090° and 135°, altering course as
circumstances require between those bearings, to carry a
60 fair wind in entering the harbour.
If the wind is inclined to blow in squalls from W to
WNW, a vessel should not run too close inshore S of
Khanderi Island, not even approaching that island very
close, as there might be difficulty in weathering it with
65 these winds, which are sometimes experienced in June
and July, but are more frequent in August.
During the interval between the land and sea breezes
in the forenoon, a heavy smoky haze frequently hangs
over the land, obscuring everything from view, so that
70 great care should be exercised when approaching the
221
9.61 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
land shortly after daylight between May and August.
Occasionally this also occurs during the calm hours of
the evening.
During the North-east Monsoon, from October to
March, the passage from the Red Sea to India or the
Persian Gulf is very tedious for sailing vessels, and is
seldom attempted. In former times, the passage between
Aden and Bombay, when unavoidably taken at this
season, frequently occupied from 60 to 90 days.
If it is necessary to make the passage, work along the
coast of Arabia, taking advantage of every shift of wind.
Should the W-going current be strong inshore, stand
out 60 or 80 miles from the land; if the wind be light, take
advantage of the tides and land winds inshore, anchoring
when requisite. When off Kuria Muria Islands, stretch
over for Bombay, and as easting is made, the wind will
draw to N or even W of N.
Aden to Sri Lanka and Bay of Bengal
9.61
From April to October, during the South-west
Monsoon, invariably pass N of Suqutra to avoid the
heavy cross seas S of that island. It is at all times
desirable to avoid passing S of Suqujra if this means
making 'Abd al KurT at night, as the currents often set
strongly N.
For Sri Lanka, proceed direct and thence to the Bay of
Bengal, see 9.3.5-9.3.6, where directions for the Bay of
Bengal will be found.
From October to March, keep along the coast of
Arabia to about 52° E; pass through Eight Degree
Channel or Nine Degree Channel; then steer to round
Sri Lanka, and having cleared that island, make easting
on the parallel of 5° N as far as the middle of the Bay of
Bengal, and then work N. From the meridian of 87° E, a
vessel will probably fetch Madras. After mid-February,
round Sri Lanka at a distance of about 50 miles and then
proceed direct.
The currents off the coast of Sri Lanka are strong and
variable, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Aden to Malacca Strait
9.62
From April to October, pass N of Suqufra, and thence
direct round the S end of Sri Lanka and across the Bay of
Bengal, entering Malacca Strait S of Great Nicobar
Island.
From October to March, work along the Arabian
coast as far as Ra's Fartak, or just beyond it, and thence
stand across the Arabian Sea, passing S of Minicoy, and
round the S end of Sri Lanka, and across the Bay of
Bengal. Pass close S of Great Nicobar Island, if the wind
permit, and thence keep on the Malaysian side of
Malacca Strait, see 9.83.
9.63
Eight Degree Channel and Nine Degree Channel are
separated by the island of Minicoy. In Nine Degree
Channel, the practice of steering to pass a few miles N of
Minicoy, especially by night, is a dangerous one,
because the island is over 4 miles long in a N and S
direction, the light is on the SW side, and the current at
times sets strongly to the S. On the other hand, in Eight
Degree Channel, a vessel should keep in the N part of
the channel, nearer to Minicoy than to Maldives.
Aden to Fremantle, Cape Leeuwin, and
southern Australia or New Zealand
9.64
During the South-west Monsoon, from April to
October, when W winds prevail in the Gulf of Aden,
proceed to the S of Sri Lanka, as directed in 9.62. After
rounding the S extreme of Sri Lanka steer to the SE to
cross the equator in about 95° E; thence continue S
across the South-east Trade Wind into the W winds and
5 round Cape Leeuwin if, not bound to Fremantle.
From November to March, proceed towards Sri
Lanka, as directed for that season in 9.62; and thence,
with the North-east Monsoon, cross the equator in
about 90° E into the North-west Monsoon. Then make
'0 easting in that monsoon as far as the E end of Jawa;
thence stand S across the South-east Trade Wind into
the westerlies, and thence continue to Cape Leeuwin
and Freemantle.
At all seasons, if bound to ports on the S or SE side of
'5 Australia, to Tasmania, or to New Zealand, continue S
and SE in the westerlies to join the appropriate part of
the route from the Cape of Good Hope, see 9.1.3.
20 Aden to Mauritius
9.65
During the South-west Monsoon, from April to
October, pass N of Suqujra, run through the South-
west Monsoon; cross the equator in about 72° E or even
25 run through One and Half Degree Channel, and make
southing into the South-east Trade Wind, passing E of
Chagos Archipelago. Thence proceed direct to
Mauritius.
From November to March, work along the Arabian
30 coast until able to weather Raas Caseyr, run through the
North-east and North-west Monsoons, crossing the
equator in about 64° E, and the parallel of 10° S in about
70° E; when in the South-east Trade Wind steer direct
for Mauritius.
35
Aden to Cape of Good Hope
9.66
40 From April to October, pass N of Suqujra, run
through the South-west Monsoon, cross the equator in
about 72° E, or even run through One and Half Degree
Channel and then cross the equator; thence making
southing into the South-east Trade Wind, passing E of
45 Chagos Archipelago. Run through the South-east
Trade Wind, passing S of Mauritius and about 100 miles
S of Madagascar, and make the African coast about 200
miles S of Durban.* Thence keep in the strength of the
Agulhas Current until abreast of Mossel Bay, and thence
50 proceed direct round Cape Agulhas. With W winds after
passing Algoa Bay, keep within 40 or 50 miles of the
shore. See 9.74.
From November to March, work along the Arabian
coast until able to weather Raas Caseyr, then run down
55 the coast of Africa and through Mozambique Channel,
taking advantage of the full strength of the Mozambique
and Agulhas Currents as before.
See 9.5.2 and 9.74.
60
Aden to Mombasa or Seychelles Group
9.67
From April to October the route is via Seychelles
Group. Having passed N of Suqujra, stand away to the
65 SE on the starboard tack and cross the equator in about
70° E, or as far W as the monsoon permits.
70 *For caution on Abnormal Waves, see 1.18
222
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
The South-east Trade Wind will be met with, after
crossing the doldrums, in from 2° S to 4° S, and having
picked it up, steer direct for Seychelles Group, if calling
there, or towards Mombasa; but allowance must be
made for the probability of the wind heading, and for the
ROUTES FROM WEST COAST OF INDIA AND SRI LANKA
Karachi to Bombay
9.70
Proceed direct, but in June, July and August first get
an offing into depths of from 27 m to 36 m before
standing S; Bombay should be made on the parallel of
Khanderi Island, and the soundings should be carefully
attended to. There is considerable indraught into the
Gulf of Kachchh from March to September.
Bombay to Karachi
9.71
In May and early in June, on leaving Bombay, make
westing so as to be able to weather Diu Head by 100
miles if bound into Gulf of Kachchh, or by 200 miles if
for Karachi. During June, July and August when bound
for Karachi be careful not to make the coasts of Sind and
Kachchh before sighting Manora Point Lighthouse, as
there is a SE-going set, and the wind is liable to lull
occasionally inshore, leaving the vessel with a heavy
swell and lee current.
In the first part of the South-west Monsoon (May and
June), the stream during the flood, setting into the Gulf
of Kachchh, is greatly accelerated.
In September and October, also in March and April,
when NW winds are general, work direct for Diu Head,
and thence along the coast. In November, December,
January and February work along the coast with the land
and sea breezes, making due allowance for the tides,
sighting Highland of Saint John, or reaching the parallel
of 20° N, before crossing to Diu Head, as the wind hangs
much to N and NNE across the Gulf of Khambat.
November is a calm month along the S coast of the
peninsula separating the Gulfs of Khambat and
Kachchh, and it is frequently necessary to anchor on the
flood to avoid being swept into Gulf of Khambat.
From November to January, when fresh NE winds
blow outside the Gulf of Kachchh, and when working
into it, anchor during the ebb off Dwarka or
Kachchigadh, and start with the flood across the mouth
of the gulf to make the Kachchh coast, where the water is
smoother and a vessel can work to the E.
Bombay, or Cochin, Calicut and Malabar
Coast to Aden
9.72
From May to September, during the South-west
Monsoon, this passage is seldom taken; but in case of
necessity it is given as follows, by what is known as the
'Southern Passage'.
After gaining an offing from the Indian coast into
depths between 27 m and 36 m (or even to 75 m in the
first part of the South-west Monsoon, as the wind then
hangs much in a S quarter) steer down the coast, keeping
in soundings from 73 m to 91 m; this is advisable to keep
clear of Lakshadweep in the thick overcast rainy weather
that may be expected, when observations may not be
obtainable for days together. After passing these islands
9.72
strong N-going current which will be entered on nearing
the African coast.
From November to March, proceed as directed in
9.66 for that season, but heading for the desired port
when it can be reached in the South-east Trade Wind.
make as little easting as possible. The wind will be from
SW to WSW with hard W squalls; a SE-going current of
75 20 to 30 miles a day will be experienced.
Cross the equator, and when fairly in the South-east
Trade Wind run to the W, passing S of Chagos
Archipelago and NE of Seychelles Group; recross the
equator in 53° E or 54° E. Run through the South-west
20 Monsoon, and make the African coast between Raas
Xaafuun and Raas Caseyr, due consideration being
given to the strong NE-going current which will be
experienced on nearing the land. Pass close round Raas
Caseyr, and keep along the African coast up to Jasiired
25 Maydh, and then stand across the Gulf of Aden. The
utmost caution is necessary when rounding Raas Caseyr
from S or SE during the South-west Monsoon, see 9.73.
From October to April, during the North-east
Monsoon, proceed direct, but towards the end of the
30 North-east Monsoon, in March and April, the winds are
less constant in the Arabian Sea than in the four
preceding months, and there are calms at times. In these
months, steer to pass S of Suqujra; for, early in April,
the North-east Monsoon is nearly expended about this
35 island and on the coast of Arabia, and is succeeded by
light breezes from SW and W, with frequent calms. The
current also begins to set strongly to the N about
Suqujra, and between it and the coast, of Africa. About
and from the latter end of March, therefore, it is
40 advisable to pass about 50 miles S of that island, in order
to fetch Raas Caseyr with the S W winds which may then
be expected.
Leaving Bombay late in April, shape a course to pass
well S of Suqufra, in order to make the coast of Africa S
45 of Raas Caseyr with the SW wind, which will probably
be met with long before that shore is approached. The
land may then be made anywhere between Raas
Xaafuun and Raas Caseyr, and the remainder of the
passage may be made as directed above for the South-
50 west Monsoon.
In November, December, January or February,
sailing vessels bound to the Red Sea from Cochin,
Calicut, or other ports on the S part of the Malabar
coast, may steer directly W through the most convenient
55 channel through Lakshadweep. Those from Cochin
should pass through Nine Degree Channel, but vessels
from Mangalore or Cannanore should pass N of all the
islands. In March and April, the prevailing winds
between the Malabar coast and the African coast being
60 from N to NW, it is better to keep near the Malabar coast
until N of Mount Dilli and to pass N of the islands; or if
Nine Degree Channel is adopted, vessels should pass
near Kalpeni and Suheli Par as the current sets S
towards Maldives in these months.
65 • When W of Lakshadweep in November, December,
January or February, a course may be shaped to pass N
of'Suqufra; but late in March or early in April, it is
prudent to keep farther S, in 9° N or 10° N as the wind
may admit; and, in May, when the South-west Monsoon
70 may be expected, it is advisable to keep well to the S.
223
9.73 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
Caution when approaching Raas Caseyr
9.73
As many vessels have been wrecked on the coast to the
S of Raas Caseyr, the utmost caution is necessary when
rounding this headland from the S or SE, during the
South-west Monsoon, when the weather is stormy,
accompanied by a heavy sea and strong current, and the
land is generally obscured by a thick haze. By day there
is usually a gradual change in the colour of the water
from blue to dark green as the land is approached; the sea
decreases and the swell alters its direction to the E of S
when N and W of Raas Xaafuun. When the land cannot
be clearly seen and recognised, extreme caution is
necessary.
After rounding Raas Caseyr keep towards the African
shore until Jasiired Maydh is reached, then steer for
Aden. Beating along the African shore against strong W
and WSW winds is sometimes tedious, but perseverance
is more likely to succeed here than in the middle of the
gulf or on the Arabian shore.
Good sails and rigging are essential, for the wind
frequently blows in severe gusts along the African coast.
Bombay to Cape of Good Hope
9.74
From May to September, stand down the coast of
India (see 9.75, 9.76) and across the equator into the
South-east Trade Wind; then steer to pass S of
Mauritius and about 100 miles S of Madagascar, and
make the African coast about 200 miles SW of Durban.*
Thence, keep in the strength of the Agulhas Current
until abreast of Mossel Bay, and then proceed direct
round Cape Agulhas.
In the early part of the monsoon (June and July) when
the wind is more S than later on, get an offing from
Bombay into about 90 m of water before standing down
the coast, and then keep in a depth of between 73 m and
90 m to ensure being well inshore of Lakshadweep.
In April and October the route is similar but somwhat
to the W, and in April a considerable shortening can
usually be effected by making a direct course from 15° S,
70° E to 30° S, 40° E, where the former route is again
picked up.
From November to March, there are two routes for
the first part of this passage, one leading E, and one W, of
Comoros; the two routes rejoin in about 20° S and
thence continue to Cape of Good hope.
To follow the route E of Comoros, proceed direct
from Bombay, W of Seychelles Group and Amirante
Isles, and between Madagascar and Comoros, on a
rhumb line towards the African coast at Durban.
Thence keep in the strength of the Mozambique
Current and Agulhas Current. In rounding Cape of
Good Hope if W winds prevail, keep over Agulhas Bank
not more than 40 or 50 miles from the coast; here the sea
will be smoother than elsewhere.
A route passing W of Comoros is recommended by
some navigators on account of the rather better current
on the African side of Mozambique Channel. A vessel
using this route would sail direct from Bombay as above
and, keeping on the African side of the channel, proceed
S as directed above.
When approaching Mozambique Channel from N,
keep well off the land until up to Cabo Delgado, as the
wind sometimes hangs to the E and even S of E; thence,
stand down the coast, inside Saint Lazarus Bank,
keeping in the strength of the Mozambique Current and
*For caution on Abnormal Waves, see 1.18.
the Agulhas Current and making Cape Agulhas. A
vessel will probably have to work to windward in the S
part of Mozambique Channel, the prevailing winds
there being S.
5 June, July and August are the worst months, and
January and February the best months for sailing vessels
proceeding W-bound round Cape of Good Hope, and it
should be borne in mind that there is much less sea over
Agulhas Bank in depths from 110 m to 130 m, or less,
10 during heavy gales, than there is near its edge and S of it.
If it is found necessary to heave-to, the port tack should
be chosen, as, with the exception of SE gales beginning
with SE winds, any shift of wind is almost invariably
against the hands of a watch, and the vessel will come up
15 to the sea.
From October to April, E winds prevail as far S as the
tail of Agulhas Bank, in about 37° S, with variable, but
chiefly W winds beyond.
Mariners should remember that off all parts of the S
20 coast of Africa, and especially off salient points, sunken
wrecks or uncharted dangers may lie close inshore; and
that it is not advisable to approach this surf-beaten coast,
even in full-powered steam-vessels, within a distance of
3 or 4 miles; sailing vessels should give Cape Agulhas a
25 berth of 7 or 8 miles.
Bombay to Colombo
30 9.75
At the onset of the South-west Monsoon, when the
wind hangs to the SW, first get a good offing into depths
of 70 m to 90 m off Bombay, and keep on the edge of the
bank in those depths to keep clear of Lakshadweep. On
35 proceeding S the wind will generally become more
favourable, veering to W and WNW. Between Cochin
and Cape Comorin S-going currents and WNW winds
prevail from mid-July to mid-October.
October to May is the period of the North-east
40 Monsoon and of the land and sea breezes along the W
coast of India. A summary of the weather that may be
expected, and advice to sailing vessels desirous of
making full use of the land and sea breezes is given in
9.76.
45
Land and sea breezes off west coast of
India
9.76
50 Except during the South-west Monsoon, land and sea
breeze effects are usually well developed near the coast,
but the strength and duration of the land winds may be
modified by the mountainous nature of the hinterland.
Off the Konkan coast, the South-west Monsoon fails
55 after the middle of September, and is followed by light
variable breezes, frequent calms, cloudy weather, and
occasional showers. This unsettled weather lasts for 6 or
8 weeks, with prevailing winds from the NW; but
occasionally from SW and S. On the Malabar coast there
60 are occasional off-shore squalls.
Late in October, or early in November, a breaking-up
storm may take place, with a high wind suddenly coming
up from the S and blowing hard for several hours,
accompanied by thunder and lightning. After this, the
65 North-east Monsoon sets in, with fine weather; and land
and sea breezes are experienced within 10 or 20 miles of
the coast, which continue until March or April.
The sea breezes of the Malabar coast are fairly
established throughout October, while as yet the land
70 winds are only occasional, light and uncertain; the
224
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
former seldom fail, till they are merged in the South-
west Monsoon. Thus the navigator may calculate on sea
breezes for eight months of the year, but on regular land
winds for only half that period.
When the land and sea breezes are regular, the sea
breeze fails in the evening about sunset, and is generally
followed by a calm which continues until the land wind
comes off at between 2000 and 2200; at first, it comes in
fluctuating gentle breezes, but it soon steadies from
between NE and ESE, continuing so till 0900 or 1000; it
then begins to fail, decreasing to a calm about mid-day.
About this time, or soon after, the sea breeze sets in from
WSW, W or NW, and generally veers towards N in the
evening, decreasing in strength.
In March and April, off the coast of Maharashtra, the
land breezes are very light and uncertain, seldom
coming off till morning, and continuing so short a time
that little advantage is gained by them; it is therefore
necessary to keep an offing, to be ready for the sea
breeze, which may at this time, between Bombay and
Cape Comorin, be termed NW winds; they usually set in
about noon at WNW veering gradually to NW and
NNW, in the evening, from which direction they
continue during the first part of the night, declining
afterwards to a calm about midnight, or early in the
morning. A faint land breeze sometimes follows; but
more frequently light airs from N or calms may be
expected, nearly from midnight until the NW wind sets
in about noon on the following day.
In April the weather is mostly hazy, and at times
cloudy over the mountains in the evenings, with light
showers.
In May the prevailing winds along the coast S of
Bombay are from NW and W, but often variable and
uncertain, with cloudy threatening weather and light
showers at times, accompanied by lightning from SE. A
gale from SW or S is liable to occur in this month, and
several ships have speedily run along the coast to
Bombay; but it is prudent to keep well out from the land,
and to be prepared for bad weather, in order to avoid
being driven on a lee shore if a storm should set in from
W. When NW winds prevail, the weather is settled and
clear of clouds, though a little hazy; but it is cloudy and
threatening when they blow between SE and SW. It
sometimes happens that heavy clouds collect over the
land in the evenings, producing a hard squall with rain
about midnight; this has frequently been experienced
between Mangalore and Shirali in May and early in
June, when these land squalls blow in sudden gusts
through the gaps between the mountains.
The land and sea breezes described above require
attention for sailing vessels to benefit by them to the full
extent. During the night, with the land breeze, it is
prudent to keep well inshore, if the wind admit, without
tacking, for there it is strong and steadier than farther
out; but in the morning it is advisable to edge more out,
to get an offing of 15 or 20 miles, or soundings of from
50 m to 55 m, before noon, ready for the sea breeze. In
the evening it is desirable to be near the shore, before the
land breeze comes off; the coast may be approached to a
depth of 18 m in most places from Bombay to Quilon,
and if close inshore before the land breeze starts, short
tacks should be made near the shore until it comes off;
when calm, its approach is frequently indicated by the
noise of the surf on the beach, which is heard at a
considerable distance.
During the period of change, before the South-west
Monsoon has set in, the small coasting vessels run into
the nearest river or place of shelter S of Bombay in the
afternoon, but large vessels should have sea-room.
9.78
Bombay to Bay of Bengal
9.77
Proceed first as for Colombo (9.75), but so as to round
5 the S side of Sri Lanka. From June to mid-January,
make easting to the middle of the Bay of Bengal, but
during the other half of the year keep on the W side, to
destination. See 9.3.5, 9.3.6.
10
Colombo to Bombay and 'west coast of
India
9.78
75 During the height of the South-west Monsoon, do not
attempt to work N along this coast. At other times
between May and September, opportunities may
present themselves, see 9.76 and Admiralty Sailing
Directions.
20 In September and October, the N-bound passage is
very tedious; on the S part of the coast a strong current
sets constantly to the S, and the wind is NW and
variable, with frequent light airs; vessels often anchor to
avoid being drifted back. The weather is threatening at
25 times, with heavy showers. The land winds begin to
blow about the beginning of October, S of Calicut, but
do not extend far offshore until November.
In December, January and February regular land and
sea breezes render the navigation N-bound near the
30 coast easy, as the sea is remarkably smooth and the sea
breeze is at its strongest.
Where there are gaps in the mountain chain, as at
Palghat, on the parallel of 10° 45' N, the land winds in
December and January continue sometimes to blow for
35 more than a day without any intervening sea breeze.
This occurs, also, but in a rather less degree, off Karwar
Head, where the valley of Sadashivgarh River assumes a
straight funnel shape in an E-W direction. In these
months a sailing passage may sometimes be made from
40 Cape Comorin to Bombay in six to eight days, and the
return voyage in four or five days. In November and
early in December the sea breezes are weak, but become
stronger afterwards. As February advances, the land
breezes decrease in strength and duration, and are not
45 always regular.
In March and April, the land breezes will generally
fail in strength and duration N of Mount Dilli; make
certain, therefore, particularly in April, of being well to
seaward, in depths from 65 m to 75 m, about noon, so
50 that a long stretch to the NNE or NE with the NW
winds may be made. If near the shore early in the
evening, with the wind at NW, make short tacks, until
the breeze veers to the N, which may be expected early
in the night; then stretch off to the NW or WNW to be
55 ready for the sea breeze of the following day.
When a strong NW wind sets in, it is liable to continue
for two or three days, or longer, rendering it
impracticable to gain any ground when working near the
coast. At such times keep about 60 miles or more from
60 the land, where the winds are generally moderate and
the sea smooth.
Late in April, or during May, keep a good offing
towards Lakshadweep, and when to the N of those
islands keep a greater offing still, in case of a gale coming
65 on.
On the S part of the coast, S of Mount Dilli and
meeting with NW winds in this month, stretch off to the
W of the islands, passing between Suheli Par and
Minicoy or between any of the Lakshadweep, to benefit
70 by the approaching W winds.
225
9.79 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
Colombo to Aden
9.79
The passage is hardly ever undertaken against the
South-west Monsoon, from April to September. In case
of necessity, however, the directions are to stand at once
across the equator into the South-east Trade Wind,
thence run W passing S of the Chagos Archipelago, and
NE of Seychelles Group; recross the equator in about
53° E or 54° E, and shape course to make the African
coast at Raas Xaafuun; round Raas Caseyr and work
along the African coast as far as Jasiired Maydh, before
standing across the Gulf of Aden. Caution is necessary
when making the African coast, see 9.73.
From October to March, pass through Nine Degree
Channel, and then proceed direct for Aden. After the
middle of March, pass S of Suqutra, as light SW and W
breezes may then be expected near this island. See
6.58.2.
Colombo to Cape of Good Hope
9.80
Pick up the route from Bombay described in 9.74,
according to time of year, at the nearest available point,
passing through Nine Degree Channel from November
to March (North-east Monsoon), but directly to meet
the May-September route at about the equator, during
the South-west Monsoon.
Colombo to F r e m a n t l e a n d south and
south-east Australia, or to N e w Zealand
9.81
From April to October, having rounded the S extreme
of Sri Lanka steer to the SE to cross the equator in about
95° E; thence proceed S across the South-east Trade
Wind into the W winds for a direct passage to Fremantle
ROUTES FROM PORTS IN BAY OF BENGAL
(except from Rangoon southward)
Notes on navigation under sail in Bay of
Bengal
9.90
There is no difficulty in proceeding from S to N or
from W to E in the Bay of Bengal during the South-west
Monsoon, nor from N to S or from E to W during the
North-east Monsoon. See 9.3.5.
When the monsoon is contrary, a sailing vessel must
work as necessary for the passage. At the change of the
monsoon, voyages are usually tedious, for the light and
variable winds, then prevalent, are as often adverse as
favourable, every slant should be taken advantage of,
and the NE part of the bay avoided, unless bound to, or
from, one of the ports on that side of the bay.
Cyclones, as stated in 6.15, occur from May to
November, with May, June, October and November as
the months of greatest frequency. They occur very
occasionally in March, April, and December, and are
almost unknown in January and entirely so in February.
See The Mariner's Handbook and Admiralty Sailing
Directions.
If warning of a storm in the N part of the bay is given
by E winds and a falling barometer between June and
September, or by a squally E or NE wind driving low,
long-drawn masses of cloud before it, or a strong W-
going current at the head of the bay, in May, October, or
November, a vessel in Hugh River or a port at the head
or round Cape Leeuwin. To the E of Cape Leeuwin,
proceed as directed in 9.64.
From November to March, make as much easting as
possible in the North-west Monsoon, and then proceed
5 S across the Trade Wind as above.
Colombo to Malacca Strait
9.82
In the South-west Monsoon proceed direct to pass S
10 of Great Nicobar Island.
In the North-east Monsoon, stand S as far as about
3° N, and then work NE towards the NW end of
Sumatera, entering Malacca Strait S of Great Nicobar
Island.
15
Malacca Strait
9.83
Directions are as given in Admiralty Sailing
Directions. From April to October, after passing the
20 NW end of Sumatera the South-west Monsoon will
probably fail and it is advisable then to keep to the
Malaysian side of the channel for better breeze and tidal
streams. Sometimes a brisk W wind will be carried as far
as Pulau Pinang, and, once the islands off the Malaysian
25 coast are sighted, there will be no difficulty in making to
theS.
The winds on the E side of the Strait tend to be more
favourable for a S-bound passage from October to
March.
30 From October to March, during the North-east
Monsoon, a sailing vessel N-bound should, after passing
Pulau Pangkur, keep near the edge of the mud flat that
fronts the coast in order to avoid the strong wind and
short sea likely in the offing near Pulau Pinang.
35 Directions for making Singapore are given in 9.39.3.
of the bay should remain in harbour till the weather
45 moderates.
If at sea in the right-hand semicircle, the vessel should
be hove-to on the starboard tack until the storm has
passed, and if undoubtedly in the left-hand semicircle
she should heave-to on the port tack if the wind is E of N,
50 or run to the S, keeping the wind on the starboard
quarter, when the wind is N, or W of N.
Vessels lying in the roadsteads of the Coromandel
coast on the approach of a cyclonic storm usually run in a
S direction round the SW quadrant, and this is probably
55 the only course open to sailing vessels.
Madras to Calcutta
60 9.91
From April to August, proceed as directly as possible,
making the land about Bavanapadu.
In September and October, stretch over to North
Andaman Island or Cape Negrais; when 100 miles W of
65 either tack, to the NW.
From November to January, make easting across the
bay, and then northing on the E side or in the middle.
In February and March, steer direct, if possible;
otherwise stand to the E across the bay as from
70 November to January.
226
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
Madras to Rangoon, Moulmein or Mergui
9.92
During the South-west Monsoon, sight Landfall
Island of the Andaman Islands if with S wind, or Great
Coco Island with W wind. Pass through Coco Channel,
and thence to the E, sighting Narcondam Island; then as
directed by Admiralty Sailing Directions for Rangoon
or Moulmein. If bound for Mergui, pass S of Little
Andaman Island, and thence steer for Tenasserim
Island.
During the North-east Monsoon, make northing in
the middle of the Bay, pass through Preparis North
Channel or Preparis South Channel, and then as
directed by Admiralty Sailing Directions for Rangoon
or Moulmein, sounding continuously and allowing for
tidal streams. If bound for Mergui, pass N of Andaman
Islands, and thence work to the E and pass Tavoy Island
on either side. See 9.3.5, 9.3.6.
Bay of Bengal to Bombay
9.93
This passage is seldom undertaken in the South-west
Monsoon. A vessel should first stand S across the
equator into the South-east Trade Wind and then run W
between 8° S and 9° S, passing S of Chagos Archipelago.
From 70° E, steer to re-cross the equator in 62° E or
63° E, and sail thence direct.
During the North-east Monsoon, steer as directed in
9.3.5 and round Sri Lanka at a convenient distance.
After passing Cape Comorin keep the W coast of India
in sight, so as to profit from the sea breezes (9.76).
Bay of Bengal to Aden
9.94
This passage is seldom undertaken during the South-
west Monsoon. A vessel should run S across the equator
into the South-east Trade Wind. Then run W, passing S
of Chagos Archipelago and NE of Seychelles Group;
cross the equator in about 53° E or 54° E, and make the
African coast at Raas Xaafuun; great caution is necessary
in making the land. Round Raas Caseyr and work along
the African coast as far as Jasiired Maydh before
standing across for Aden.
In the North-east Monsoon, pass round Sri Lanka
and through Nine Degree Channel; thence steer to pass
N of Suqufra. After the middle of March keep S of
Suqu^ra.
For crossing the Arabian Sea and landfall, see 9.72,
9.73.
Bay of Bengal of Cape to G o o d H o p e
9.95
From May to September, vessels from The
Sandheads should make for the Orissa coast, sighting
the land south of False Point and working to the SW
along the shore; make short tacks during the day and
long boards offshore during the night, bringing
Kalingapatam abeam before leaving the coast and
standing down the bay. A comparatively smooth sea and
a favourable current will be found near the shore, the
advantage may be taken of a veering wind in the squalls
off the land.
When standing down the Bay of Bengal in the South-
west Monsoon, keep well W of the Andaman Islands, in
order not to be on a lee shore should a strong W gale set
in; or, which is better, pass through Preparis North
Channel or Preparis South Channel, and then work S in
9.97
the comparatively smooth water E (or to leeward) of
Andaman Islands and Nicobar Islands.
Note. Fast sailing vessels from Calcutta, in the
South-west Monsoon, do beat down the Bay of Bengal,
5 reaching 100 miles W of Andaman Islands; but the wear
and tear is great and the saving in time slight.
From Madras or the Coromandel coast, stand at once
across the equator into the South-east Trade Wind.
In either of the above cases, and from all parts of the
10 Bay, stand S so as to cross the equator in about 95° E,
keeping on the tack which makes most southing into the
South-east Trade Wind.
Cross the meridian of 90° E in 10° S, and from this
position, steer a direct course for Cape Agulhas, passing
15 about 200 miles S of Rodriguez Island, and the same
distance S of Madagascar. Make the African coast in
about 33° S, and keep in the strength of the Agulhas
Current to abreast Mossel Bay, and then round Cape
Agulhas. See 9.74.
20 From November to March, run strait down the Bay of
Bengal, cross the equator in 86° E to 87° E, and pick up
the May to September route at about 15° S, and run
thence direct to Cape Agulhas, as described above.
During October and April, run down the bay on a line
25 just E of the 90th meridian; cross the equator at 90° E,
and pick up the May to September route at 15° S,
continuing to destination thence, as described above.
30 Bay of Bengal to F r e m a n t l e , Cape L e e u w i n
a n d south-east Australia, a n d t o N e w
Zealand
9.96
35 From March to October, having worked along the W
shore of the Bay of Bengal, see 9.95, far enough to
weather Nicobar Islands and the islands fronting the
SW coast of Sumatera, stand out of the Bay on the
starboard tack, cross the South-east Monsoon and
40 South-east Trade Wind; and having got into the
prevailing W winds S of the Trade Wind, proceed E for
Fremantle or Cape Leeuwin. The doldrum belt will be
found to extend to about 4° S.
From November to April, stand down the middle of
45 the Bay of Bengal, and across the equator into the
North-west Monsoon. Thence make easting in the
North-west Monsoon as far as Christmas Island; then
stand S across the South-east Trade Wind into the
westerlies, and so to Fremantle or Cape Leeuwin.
50 To the E of Cape Leeuwin, proceed as directed in
9.64.
Calcutta to Madras or Sri Lanka
55
9.97
During the South-west Monsoon, make southing
without closing the E side of the Bay, as directed in 9.95.
Steer for port when 60 miles S of it.
60 If unable to work S, pass E of Andaman Islands and
Nicobar Islands and through Selat Benggala. Thence
work across the Bay of Bengal; but in June, July and
August, stand across the equator into the South-east
Trade Wind, make westing, and recross the equator in
65 about 83° E, if bound for Madras; then proceed direct.
Bound for Colombo, recross the equator in about 77° E.
During the North-east Monsoon, steer direct. In
September, with light S winds, work SW, keeping in
soundings, or stand out to sea. Give the coast a berth in
70 February and March as the current then runs to the N.
227
 9.98 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
Calcutta to Rangoon, Moulmein, or Mergui
9.98
During the South-west Monsoon, steer to pass
through Preparis South Channel, and thence as directed
in Admiralty Sailing Directions, for Rangoon or
Moulmein. If bound for Mergui, pass on either side of
Coco Islands.
During the North-east Monsoon, steer to pass round
Alguada Reef and then work E, sounding frequently and
making full allowance for tidal streams.
ROUTES FROM PORTS IN BURMA
Rangoon or Moulmein to Calcutta
9.105
During the South-west Monsoon, pass through one of
the Preparis Channels, and then proceed as directly as
possible.
During the North-east Monsoon, pass S of Alguada
Reef, and thence proceed N, about 30 miles off the
Burma coast before stretching across; but after January,
from Alguada Reef stand first into the middle of the Bay 25
of Bengal before working N.
Vessels intending to leave Rangoon or Moulmein in
periods of strong NE winds, with a falling barometer,
denoting the existence of a cyclonic storm E of Andaman
Islands, should wait until the storm has passed. This is 30
indicated by a rising barometer, and the wind shifting to
E or S of E. See 9.90.
Rangoon or M o u l m e i n to Madras
9.106
During the South-west Monsoon, keep well out to sea
if the wind becomes W and endeavour to sight
Narcondam Island.
In working S, keep W of and at a moderate distance
from the Mergui Archipelago. Pass S of Great Nicobar
Island and thence work W to destination.
During the North-east Monsoon, pass through
Preparis North Channel and thence proceed as directly
as possible. After January, however, make the land S of
destination on account of the N-going sets which occur
off this coast after that month.
Rangoon or Moulmein to Malacca Strait
and Singapore
9.107
In the South-west Monsoon, proceed as directed in
ROUTES SOUTH-BOUND OR WEST-BOUND FROM SINGAPORE OR EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO
Singapore to Madras
9.115
During the South-west Monsoon, keep along the N
coast of Sumatera, pass through Selat Benggala, and
work across the Bay of Bengal; but in the height of the
South-west Monsoon (in June, July and August), from
off the NW end of Sumatera cross the equator, and make
westing in the South-east Trade Wind, recrossing the
equator in about 83° E.
During the North-east Monsoon, keep on the
Malaysian coast until Ko Phuket is reached; thence pass
through either Ten Degrees Channel or Sombrero
Channel. In December and January make the land N of
Calcutta to Singapore
9.99
During the South-west Monsoon, proceed direct
through Preparis South Channel and Malacca
Strait.
During the North-east Monsoon, proceed through
one of the Preparis Channels, and thence direct through
Malacca Strait (9.83).
10 See 9.39.2 for directions for Singapore Strait.
9.106, passing the S point of Ko Phuket; thence proceed
direct through Malacca Strait.
In the North-east Monsoon, keep outside Mergui
20 Archipelago, sight the S point of Ko Phuket and proceed
thence direct through Malacca Strait (9.83).
Directions for passage through Singapore Strait to
Singapore will be found in 9.39.2.
Rangoon or Moulmein to Cape of Good
Hope
9.108
In both monsoons, stand S, to the E of Andaman
Islands and Nicobar Islands, and pick up the May to
September route from the Bay of Bengal given in 9.95 at
15° S, continuing to destination as described in that
article.
Mergui to Calcutta
35 9.109
During the South-west Monsoon, work to the W and
pass through Coco Channel or one of the Preparis
Channels.
During the North-east Monsoon, pass through any
40 channel N of Andaman Islands and then proceed direct.
Mergui to Madras
9.110
During the South-west Monsoon, after clearing the
45 islands, work S to the N end of Sumatera; pass through
Selat Benggala or S of Great Nicobar Island and proceed
thence direct.
During the North-east Monsoon, until the end of
January, pass through any channel N of Andaman
50 Islands; after that date, steer to pass S of Little Andaman
Island.
destination on account of the S-going set on the
Coromandel and Sri Lanka coasts.
60
Singapore to Colombo
9.116
During the South-west Monsoon, keep along the N
coast of Sumatera and pass through Selat Benggala,
65 thence cross the equator and make westing in the South-
east Trade Wind. Recross the equator in 77° E, and
proceed as directly as possible to Colombo.
During the North-east Monsoon, pass on either side
of Pulau Perak and between Rondo and Great Nicobar
70 Island; thence proceed direct, but if W winds are
228
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AiMD EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
experienced near the N end of Sumatera, which is
probable in October and November, keep to the N
before altering course.
Singapore to Calcutta
9.117
During the South-west Monsoon, pass to the S of
Nicobar Islands, and thence steer direct for the Orissa
coast.
During the North-east Monsoon, up to mid-January
pass E of Andaman Islands. After mid-January pass S of
those islands, or through Duncan Passage, and work to
the N in the middle of the Bay of Bengal, as NW and W
winds are then found N of Andaman Islands.
Singapore to Rangoon or Moulmein
9.118
During the South-west Monsoon, sight Narcondam
Island. During the North-east Monsoon, sight Great
Western Torres Islands, and thence proceed as directed
by Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Singapore to Darwin
9.119
From April to October, in the South-west Monsoon
in the South China Sea, and the E monsoon on the N
coast of Australia, when bound from Singapore to
Darwin, proceed through Balabac Strait across Sulu
Sea, through Basilan Strait and Selat Bangka (as at
10.31.3), and thence through Selat Manipa for Darwin
(as at 10.45.1).
From November to April, during the North-east
Monsoon of the South China Sea, proceed through Selat
Sunda (as at 9.32.7) and thence for Darwin with the
North-west Monsoon. Alternatively, go through Selat
Karimata and Selat Sapudi, and into the Indian Ocean
by Selat Lombok or Selat Alas (see 9.47.3, 9.47.4).
Singapore to Torres Strait
9.120
From April to October, follow the route given above
for that season for Darwin, as far as the Ceram Sea, to
join the route from Hong Kong to Torres Strait
described in 10.44.1, or its alternative.
From November to April, proceed via Selat Karimata
and thence to the Arafura Sea either via Selat Lombok or
Selat Alas (see 9.47.3, 9.47.4), or through the Java Sea
and Flores Sea to join the April-October route,
described above.
Singapore to Fremantle or southern
Australia
9.121
From April to October, proceed S through Selat
Bangka and Selat Sunda (9.32.7), and thence across the
South-east Trade Wind until in the region of W winds,
whence a course may be shaped for Fremantle or Cape
Leeuwin. See also 10.30.2.
From November to April, if bound to one of the W or
S ports of Australia proceed through Selat Bangka
(9.32.7), N of Jawa, and through Selat Bali or Selat
Lombok, and thence steer to the S into the South-west
Trade Wind. Keep the ship close hauled on the port tack
in the Trade Wind, and on losing the Trade Wind steer
to the S and SE into the W winds, whence proceed as
directed in paragraphs 9.1.3-9.1.7 (Cape of Good Hope
to Australia).
9.124
Singapore to Selat Sunda and Cape of Good
Hope
9.122
First proceed to the Indian Ocean via Selat Sunda by
5 one of the routes in 9.49.1.
From April to September, having cleared Selat
Sunda, steer directly for a position 200 miles S of
Rodriguez Island, in about 23° S, 63° E; thence pass 200
miles S of Madgascar and as directed in 9.17.2.
10 From October to April, after clearing Selat Sunda,
stand S into the South-east Trade Wind, passing
through 16° S, 90° E; steer thence for a position 200
miles S of Rodriguez Island and as above. This period is
the cyclone season of the South Indian Ocean.
15
Singapore or Selat Sunda to Aden
9.123
The route from Singapore may be taken either via
20 Malacca Strait (9.83) or via Selat Sunda (9.32.7).
Having passed through Malacca Strait and taken
departure as directed in 9.116, from April to September
follow the route into the South-east Trade Wind and
then make westing to pass S of Chagos Archipelago,
25 there to join the Colombo-Aden route (9.79).
From October to March proceed S of Sri Lanka and
through Nine Degree Channel (9.79).
If the route is taken via Selat Sunda a similar
procedure should be adopted, namely to join the
30 Colombo-Aden route S of Chagos Archipelago or in
Nine Degree Channel, according to season.
Selat Sunda n o r t h w a r d a l o n g w e s t coast of
35 Sumatera
9.124
The three routes, Outer, Middle, and Inner, are
described in detail in Admiralty Sailing Directions.
For a sailing vessel, the voyage in either direction and
40 at all seasons is long and wearisome on account of
frequent calms, but it is generally more difficult to work
N than S, owing to the prevalence of SE-going currents,
which continue to set even with and after a S wind.
January and February are the best months for going N,
45 while in September, October and November vessels will
often be compelled to keep far out to sea in order to make
even a little northing; working inshore during these
months is almost impracticable.
The Outer Route, to the W of all the islands, is the
50 best of the three, more especially for sailing vessels. SW
and S winds often prevail here, when NW squalls,
variable baffling winds, calms and S-going currents,
may be experienced close to the land.
The Middle Route, between the chain of large islands,
55 in the offing, and those small islands adjacent to, and
interspersed along the coast, should not be followed by a
sailing vessel when N-bound, nor at any time, if it can be
avoided without inconvenience. Although it is wide, and
may be adopted by night or day in vessels of light
SO draught when the weather is clear and favourable,
vessels are more at the mercy of the currents when the
winds are light and baffling, and there is no anchorage; in
some parts there are dangerous coral shoals, of the
approach to which sounding will give no warning.
65 The Inner Route, close along the coast, and between
some of the islands and dangers off it, like the Middle
Route, should seldom be chosen by N-bound sailing
vessels in either monsoon; but as there are in many
places, moderate depths for anchoring, it is preferable in
70 that respect to Middle Route.
229
9.125 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
Selat Bali, Selat Lombok, Selat Alas, or
Selat Ombai to Cape of Good Hope
9.125
From Selat Bali, Selat Lombok, or Selat Alas, stand to
the SW, during the South-east Monsoon, or direct to
the S during the North-west Monsoon, to pick up the
South-east Trade Wind at the nearest point, then make
NORTHERN AUSTRALIA TO SYDNEY, INDIAN OCEAN AND SOUTH CHINA SEA
Northern Australia to Sydney
9.130
From April to October, in the South-east Monsoon,
stand W to make North West Cape and beat S to round
Cape Leeuwin and proceed by Bass Strait to Sydney.
See 9.1.4, 9.1.8.
From November to April, in the North-west
Monsoon, proceed through Torres Strait and stand into
the Pacific Ocean until enough easting has been made to
enable the port to be reached with the South-east Trade
Wind. See 10.29 (Torres Strait to Sydney).
Northern Australia to Fremantle
9.131
From November to April, in the North-west
Monsoon period, short boards along the coast S of
North-west Cape will enable advantage to be taken of
the land breezes. Only during the strength of the North-
west Monsoon should a sailing vessel proceed E-about
via Torres Strait, Bass Strait, and Cape Leeuwin.
Northern Australia to Cape of Good Hope
9.132
From April to October, during the South-east
Monsoon, shape course through the Arafura Sea to join
the route from the S part of the Eastern Archipelago
(9.125).
During the strength of the North-west Monsoon
proceed via Torres Strait and Bass Strait. See 10.29,
(Torres Strait to Sydney) and 9.164 (Sydney to Cape of
Good Hope).
Northern Australia to Colombo
9.133
From April to October, proceed W with the
Monsoon, crossing the equator in about 75° E, and
thence steer as directly as possible to Colombo in the
South-west Monsoon'.
From November to April, make to the N through
Banda Sea and Molucca Sea, see 9.46.3, and round the N
of Sulawesi, through Basilan Strait into the Sulu Sea;
cross it and pass into the South China Sea through
Balabac Strait, and thence to Singapore. Thence
proceed through Malacca Strait, and S of Great Nicobar
Island to destination, in the North-east Monsoon, see
9.116.
to cross the meridian of 90° E, at 22° S to 23° S. From
this position stand W along the parallel to join the route
from Singapore to Cape of Good Hope (9.122) in about
23° S, 63° E.
From Selat Ombai, pass through Savu Sea and into
the Indian Ocean between Timor and Sumba. Thence
steer to join the above route at the most convenient
point, having regard to the prevailing wind at the time.
w For passages through the Eastern Archipelago and the
approach to Singapore, see 9.30.
Northern Australia to Calcutta
9.134
20 From April to October, during the South-east
Monsoon on the N coast of Australia and South-west
Monsoon in the Bay of Bengal, proceed as in 9.133 for
Colombo, but crossing the equator in about 82° E;
thence steer E of Sri Lanka for the mouth of Hugli
25 River.
Enough westing should be made in the South-east
Monsoon before proceeding N to enter the limits of the
South-west Monsoon of the Indian seas.
From November to April, during the North-west
30 Monsoon, follow the directions in 9.133 as far as
Singapore, then 9.117 to Calcutta.
North Australia to Singapore
9.135
35 From April to October, two routes are recommended,
the usual route passing N of Timor, through Selat
Wetar and Alur Pelayaran Wetar into the Flores Sea,
continuing W along the N side of all the islands and
through Selat Sapudi to Selat Bangka or Selat Gelasa
40 (9.35.1-9.42.3).
An alternative route passes either N or S of Timor and
along the S side of all the islands, entering the Java Sea
through Selat Sunda (9.33.1-9.33.7); thence as directed
in 9.32.2.
45 From November to April take the Colombo route for
that season, see 9.133.
Northern Australia to Hong Kong
9.136
50 From April to October, proceed as directed for
Singapore for that season, see 9.135, but pass through
Selat Gelasa or Selat Karimata and thence between
Pulau-pulau Anambas and Pulau-pulau Natuna and
into the South China Sea; thence steer between Paracel
55 Group and Macclesfield Bank to Hong Kong. In thick
weather proceed through Selat Bangka in preference to
Selat Karimata or Selat Gelasa.
From November to April, the route is either by
Bougainville Strait or by the Second Eastern Passage
60 (9.46). For the Bougainville Strait route, proceed E
through Torres Strait, thence E of Treasury Islands,
through Bougainville Strait and N of Philippine Islands.
230
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
ROUTES FROM SOUTH-WEST AND SOUTH AUSTRALIA
Fremantle to Mauritius
9.140
In all seasons, steer NW from Fremantle into the
strength of the South-east Trade Wind, which is
generally found between the parallels of 15° and 20° S,
and where the Equatorial Current sets to the W. Having
reached the parallel of 20° S, and the meridian of 90° E,
in summer, and two or three degrees nearer the equator
in the winter of the S hemisphere, continue W for
Mauritius, passing about 50 miles S of Rodriguez
Island; though from November until April it is
advisable to keep at a greater distance, as cyclones
sometimes occur at this season, not only in this locality,
but also in the space between these islands and the NW
coast of Australia. After passing Rodrigeuz Island steer
as directly as possible for Mauritius.
Fremantle to Cape of Good Hope
9.141
There are two routes to Cape of Good Hope,
Northern and Southern; of which the Northern is
available all the year round, and the Southern only
during the summer, from December to March; the
Southern Route is rather more direct.
For the Northern Route, proceed as for Mauritius
(9.140), but pass 100 to 200 miles S of Rodriguez Island,
and thence about the same distance S of Madagascar, to
make the African coast about 200 miles S of Durban.*
Thence, keep in the strength of the Agulhas Current
until abreast Mossel Bay, and then proceed direct round
Cape Agulhas. See 9.74.
For the Southern Route, steer for 30° S, 100° E, and
thenceforward make a nearly W course across the ocean
to the meridian of 40° E, keeping between the parallels of
27° S and 29° S; being farthest to the S in December, and
to the N in March. From the meridian of 40° E, steer
towards the African coast to join the Northern Route E
of Algoa Bay. See notes on rounding Cape of Good
Hope at 9.74.
Fremantle to Aden
9.142
From April to October, proceed direct to pass S of
Chagos Archipelago to join the route from the Indian
coast as directed in 9.72 and 9.73.
From November to April, follow a great circle track to
4° 00' S, 73° 30' E; thence proceed by rhumb line to
round Raas Caseyr.
Fremantle to Colombo
9.143
From April to October, with the South-east Trade
Wind in the South Indian Ocean and the South-west
Monsoon N of the equator, cross the equator in 80° E,
and thence proceed to Colombo.
From November to April, with the North-west
Monsoon in the South Indian Ocean and the North-east
Monsoon in the Bay of Bengal, steer across the South-
east Trade Wind to enter the North-west Monsoon in
about 10° S, 90° E. Thence continue N with the North-
west Monsoon across the equator in about 87° E, and
with the North-east Monsoon to Colombo.
*For caution on Abnormal Waves, see 1.18.
9.148
Fremantle to Calcutta
5 9.144
From April to October, with the South-east Trade
Wind in the South Indian Ocean, and the South-west
Monsoon in the Bay of Bengal, proceed direct for the E-
coast of Sri Lanka, and thence for Hugh river. See 9.3.5
10 and 9.90.
From November to April, during the North-west
Monsoon in the South Indian Ocean, proceed direct to
the equator, crossing it in about 93° E; and thence to
make the land about the NW point of Sumatera. From
'5 the NW point of Sumatera steer to pass to the W of
Nicobar Islands, and thence to the N, close hauled, and
W of all the islands.
If the equator is crossed as late as March, keep well to
the W in the Bay of Bengal, as the current at that time
20 runs N along the E coast of India, and the winds will be
found between SW and SE. In the middle of the Bay
they are light and variable from NW to NE.
Fremantle to Singapore
25 9.145
From April to October, steer on a direct course for
Selat Sunda, taking care to make the land to the E of the
strait as the W-going current is often strong near the S
coast of Jawa. Continue from Selat Sunda as indicated in
30 9.32.2.
From November to April, steer for 12° S, 102° E, and
then pass midway between Christmas Island and Cocos
or Keeling Islands, there joining the route from Cape
Town to Singapore via Selat Sunda (9.2.2).
35 Alternatively, cross 20° S in about 110°E and then
follow the Second Eastern Passage (9.46.1) as far as Selat
Manipa. From this point pass through Molucca Sea,
Bangka Strait, Celebes Sea, Basilan Strait, Sulu Sea and
Balabac Strait into the South China Sea. Thence
40 proceed to Singapore in the North-east Monsoon. This
alternative route, though longer, will probably give a
better passage.
Fremantle to Hong Kong
45 9.146
From April to October, proceed to Selat Sunda as
directed in 9.145 and continue to the South China Sea as
indicated in 9.32.3.
From November to April a vessel may either follow
50 the seasonal directions in 9.145 and pick up the Second
Eastern Passage, or proceed to Singapore via Selat
Sunda as directed in that article and thence through
Palawan Passage and along the coast of Luzon until able
to stand across to Hong Kong.
55 A vessel which, having passed through Selat Sunda,
finds that the North-west Monsoon in the Java Sea and
the North-east Monsoon in the South China Sea have
already begun, is advised to make to the E to pick up the
second Eastern Passage, a route which is available only
60 from November to February, see 9.45.1.
Fremantle to south-east Australia, or to
New Zealand
9.147
65 Stand S, and act as directed in 9.1.6-9.1.10 for the
voyage from Cape of Good Hope.
South-east Australia to Cape of Good Hope
9.148
70 There are two routes according to season.
231
9.149 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
The Northern Route is available from April to
October, at the time of year when the South-east
Monsoon of the Arafura Sea connects with the South-
east Trade Wind of the Pacific Ocean, and with the
South-east Trade Wind of the Indian Ocean. Vessels
using it should proceed first to the N, along the E coast of
Australia, and through Torres Strait (9.164), and thence
through the Arafura Sea into the Indian Ocean and to
Cape of Good Hope as directed in 9.132.
Note. Directions for the passage through Bass Strait
are given in 9.160.
T h e S o u t h e r n R o u t e should b e used from D e c e m b e r
to April, w h e n E winds are prevalent off the S coast of
Australia. First proceed as directly as possible to r o u n d
Cape L e e u w i n at a safe distance, having regard to the
weather prevailing at t h e time and the danger of being
caught on a lee shore. F r o m Cape L e e u w i n stand to the
N W into the South-east T r a d e W i n d and join the route
from F r e m a n t l e as directed in 9.141.
N o t e . It is reported that masters of vessels b o u n d for
E u r o p e a n p o r t s from Adelaide would often defer
decision whether to make t h e passage E - a b o u t or W-
about until they had ascertained the wind direction in
the Australian Bight. T h u s , with a W wind, they would
sail E-about (10.3.1) for C a b o de H o m o s , and with the E
wind they would take t h e S o u t h e r n R o u t e , as above, for
Cape of G o o d H o p e .
South-east Australia to Aden
9.149
From April to October, proceed as directed for the
Northern Route (9.148) to Torres Strait, and thence
through the Arafura Sea, see 9.132. Having cleared all
dangers in the Arafura Sea, steer to pass S of Chagos
Archipelago and as directed in 9.72.
From November to April, pass round Cape Leeuwin
as directed for the Southern Route in (9.148) and thence
steer NW to join the route from Fremantle to Aden
(9.142).
South-east Australia to Colombo
9.150
From April to November, take the Northern Route as
for Cape of Good Hope (9.148) to Torres Strait and the
Arafura Sea, whence departure should be taken for
Colombo (9.133).
ROUTES FROM SYDNEY TO PORTS IN INDIAN OCEAN
9.160
From Sydney to and through Bass Strait, there are
two main routes, direct, and through Banks Strait. By
the direct route, in order to take advantage of the current
as far as Cape Howe, which appears to run the strongest
from November to March, keep along the outer edge of
the charted 200 m depth contour or at a distance of 15 to
18 miles from the coast, where the current runs stronger
and with more regularity than elsewhere.
From about 15 miles E of Cape Howe, if the wind is S,
do not steer a more W course than 212° until in 39° 30' S
on account of the danger to be apprehended from SE or
S gales upon Ninety Mile Beach between Cape Howe
and Corner Inlet. On reaching the parallel of 39° 30' S,
steer to pass about 3 miles N of Wright Rock, and the
same distance S of the S point of Deal Island, the SE of
From December to April, when E winds are prevalent
off the S coast of Australia, the Southern Route, round
Cape Leeuwin, is taken. When round Cape Leeuwin
stand to the NW into the South-east Trade Wind and
5 enter the North-west Monsoon in about 10° S, 90° E.
Thence steer N with the North-west Monsoon across
the equator in about 87° E, and with the North-east
Monsoon to Colombo, remembering that this is the
cyclone season in the South Indian Ocean.
10
South-east Australia to Bay of Bengal
9.151
From April to November, proceed through Torres
75 Strait as directed in 9.148 and thence through the
Arafura Sea. Keep in the South-east Trade Wind until
the meridian of 85° E is reached, and thence stand NW
to cross the equator in about 80° E. From this point
proceed direct allowing for the strong E-going current.
20 From December to April, pass round Cape Leeuwin,
and steer NW through the South-east Trade Wind so as
to enter the North-west Monsoon in about 85° E; then
shape course towards the NW end of Sumatera, and
proceed W of Nicobar and Andaman Islands to
25 destination.
South-east Australia to Singapore
9.152
From April to November, three routes are available;
30 N-about through Torres Strait, thence N of Timor and
through the Java Sea; or S of the islands and through
Selat Sunda (9.135); or S-about round Cape Leeuwin.
The N-about routes are probably the best.
From December to April, in spite of the prevailing E
35 winds to the S of Australia, a route S-about round Cape
Leeuwin is not recommended for Singapore on account
of the N winds and S-going currents prevalent between
November and March in Selat Sunda, Selat Bangka,
Selat Gelasa, and Selat Karimata. A vessel has been
40 known to take 30 days from Selat Sunda to Singapore, at
this time of year, a distance of 500 miles. It is therefore
advisable to proceed by the Outer Route (10.9.3), to the
E of Australia and through Torres Strait, and as directed
in 9.135, or to take the route E of Papua New Guinea
45 through Bougainville Strait, and through Surigao Strait
into the South China Sea.
55 Kent Group. Having passed Kent Group, steer to pass 2
or 3 miles S of Sugarloaf Rock, and S of Judgement
Rocks.
From Sugarloaf Rock steer 15 or 20 miles to the N of
King Island, if the wind permits; but should the wind
60 hang to the W of N, a course may be safely directed for
the N extreme of Three Hummock Island, taking care to
avoid Mermaid Rock and Taniwha Rock, passing
afterwards N or S of King Island, as may be most
favourable; the former is preferable.
65 Navigational Notes. Local experience has shown
that with W and SW winds smoother water is found
inshore off Ninety Mile Beach; and as SW winds are the
prevailing ones mariners bound to the W may often take
advantage of the smoother water and an absence of
70 danger to approach the beach, instead of avoiding it. A
232
 INDIAN OCEAN, RED SEA, AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO SAILING ROUTES
vessel inshore when an easterly gale is threatened should
at once get an offing; these gales give signs of warning,*
Between December and March, as W gales veer to the
S, it is advisable to stand toward the Tasmanian coast,
and so be ready to take advantage of the shift of wind. 5 which to start a passage from Sydney to the W, either by
Between April and November, and more particularly
in September, October and November, the same course
cannot be recommended, as in these months the wind
tends to back to WNW.
The alternative route is via Banks Strait, which lies 10
between Cape Barren Island and the N coast of
Tasmania, and offers an alternative entrance to Bass
Strait. The chief dangers to be avoided on the S shore
are the reef and rocks off Swan Island, and the foul
ground and rocks N of Foster Islets. 15
When working through to the W in the summer, when
W gales are of short duration, it is advisable to stand
towards the Tasmanian coast, to take advantage of the
shift of wind.
9.161 20
Sydney to Melbourne. Proceed as directed in 9.160
as far as Sugarloaf Rock, and then to Port Phillip as
directly as circumstances permit.
9.162
From Bass Strait to Adelaide, in fine weather, from 25
off Cape Otway steer to pass about 5 miles S of Cape
Nelson, 10 miles SW of Cape Northumberland and
Cape Banks, thence make a direct course to Cape
Willoughby. Care must at all times be taken to guard
against a set towards the land, but with S and W winds 30
the coast should be given a much greater berth, as a
current of 1 knot sometimes sets towards it between
Cape Otway and Cape Willoughby.
In entering the Gulf of Saint Vincent by Backstairs
Passage. Young Rocks must be given a wide berth at 35
night, but, since they are above-water, they are not
dangerous by day in clear weather. At times the sea
breaks heavily in the offing S of Cape Willoughby, see
Admiralty Sailing Directions.
9.163 40
From Bass Strait to Spencer Gulf, proceed as
directed in 9.162 to Cape Northumberland.
Thence to Spencer Gulf, give a good berth to South-
west Young Rock, which is only 1 -5 m high; and except
with strong SE winds, make allowance for the E-going 45
set which usually prevails. From December to March,
with SE winds, a current runs at about 1 knot to the NW.
In the event of threatening weather from the S and W,
care must be taken to secure a good offing.
50
*An Area to be Avoided (7.49.2) extends seaward off
Ninety Mile Beach. See 8.1.2.
233
9.164
Sydney to Cape of Good Hope and to all
ports in Indian Ocean
9.164
October and November are unsuitable months in
Torres Strait or to the S of Australia.
From March to September, a route to the N of
Australia should be taken, since the prevalence of strong
W gales renders the S-about route very difficult, indeed,
generally impracticable, for sailing vessels during the
whole period from April to November. The worst
months for making this W-bound passage N of Australia
are September, October and November, for W gales are
then of frequent occurrence, the wind sometimes being
from WSW to WNW for more than a week at a time, and
blowing very strong. From December to August, N
winds are very common.
In these circumstances, the best W-bound route is via
Torres Strait and the Arafura Sea, taking (by
preference) the Outer Route (10.9.3) from Sydney
through the Coral Sea to Torres Strait.
From Torres Strait, directions are given as follows:
To Calcutta 9.134
To Cape of Good Hope 9.132
To Colombo 9.133
To Fremantle 9.131
To Hong Kong 9.136
To Singapore 9.135
From December to March, a route S of Australia may
be taken. During these months, proceed through Bass
Strait, or round Tasmania; E winds prevail in the strait
and along the S coast of Australia at that season, and
good passages have been made by keeping N of 40° S,
and passing round Cape Leeuwin into the South-east
Trade Wind, which then extends well to the S. A vessel
from Bass Strait bound round Cape Leeuwin is
recommended, with a favourable wind, to shape a course
which will lead about 150 miles S of that cape.
In adopting this route advantage must be taken of
every favourable change of wind, in order to make
westing; and it is advisable not to approach too near the
land, as it would become with SW gales, which are often
experienced, even from December to March, a most
dangerous lee shore, and the contrary currents run
strongest near the land.
After rounding Cape Leeuwin, stand to the NW into
the South-east Trade Wind, and follow the directions
given
To Aden 9.142
To Calcutta 9.144
To Cape of Good Hope 9.141
To Colombo 9.143
To Mauritius 9.140
 CHAPTER 10
PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
NAVIGATIONAL NOTES FOR PACIFIC OCEAN
Soundings and dangers
10.1.1
Very large areas of the Pacific Ocean are imperfectly
surveyed and many dangers are steep-to from the ocean
bed. See 7.46, the notes on navigation in coral waters in
The Mariner's Handbook, and on winds, weather,
currents and ice in Chapter 7. Admiralty Sailing
Directions should also be consulted.
Currents
10.1.2
Particular attention to currents is required when
SOUTH AFRICA AND SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA TO PACIFIC OCEAN PORTS
South Africa to Cabo de Hornos
10.2.1
In the Indian Ocean, the route (9.1.10) passes S of
Tasmania between the parallels of 45° S and 47° S.
10.2.2
Icebergs are most numerous near this route midway
between New Zealand and Cabo de Hornos, but the
periods of frequency vary greatly, and it may happen
that while ships are meeting ice in lower latitudes,
higher latitudes will be free of it. See 7.45.
10.2.3
In the Pacific Ocean the usual route, all the year
round, passes S of New Zealand in about 48° 30' S, or
about 30 miles S of Snares Islands. From this position a
vessel should steer to the E between Bounty Islands and
Antipodes Islands, whence, inclining slightly to the S,
the route assumes, as a mean track the parallel of 51° S
from the meridian of 150° W, across the ocean to
120° W; keeping at about 60 miles N of this parallel from
December to February (so as to be more clear of ice), and
at 60 miles S of it from June to August; but in this case,
also, dependent on ice conditions. From the meridian of
115° W, incline gradually to the S, to round Islas Diego
Ramirez and Cabo de Hornos, see 8.66.1.
10.2.4
The alternative route, which is only recommended
from December to February runs on a track farther S
from the position S of Tasmania (10.2.1) to pass
between Auckland Islands and Campbell Island in
about 52° S, and to cross the Pacific Ocean between
54° S and 55° S.
T h i s course would, if clear of ice, and with favourable
weather, doubtless ensure the quickest passage, as being
the shorter distance, but experience has proved that at
nearly all times of year so much time is lost at night and
in thick weather, and even serious danger is incured on
account of the great quantities of ice normally met with
in these higher latitudes, that a parallel even as far N as
47° has been adopted with advantage.
It is believed that a passage made between 47° S and
50° S will provide steadier winds, smoother water, and
navigating amongst the islands. See 7.47.
Navigation between the islands
15 10.1.3
Within the region of the Trade Winds, there is no
difficulty in travelling from E to W, the winds being fair.
From W to E for short distances, a vessel may beat,
but for long distances, as for instance from Fiji to Tahiti,
20 or from Tahiti to Pitcairn Island, a vessel should stand S
through the Trade Winds into the W winds; then run
down her easting and re-enter the Trade Winds in about
the meridian of her destination.
30 less ice; and that a quicker passage may be expected in
better weather, and with more security than in a higher
latitude.
35 South-east Australia to Pacific Ocean
Adelaide to Cabo de Hornos
10.3.1
Steer SE to join the main route (10.2.1) in about 46° S,
40 146° E.
Melbourne to Cabo de Hornos
10.3.2
In summer (December to February) shape course to
45 pass about 60 miles W of King Island and thence W of
Tasmania to join the main route (10.2.1) in about 46° S,
146° E. It is often necessary, and in heavy weather
desirable, to make this passage at a considerable distance
from the coast of Tasmania; namely at from 120 to 250
50 miles from the W coast, and round the S end of the
island.
For the rest of the year, and as alternative to the
summer route, pass through Bass Strait and steer to join
the main route S of Snares Islands (10.2.3).
55
Hobart to Cabo de Hornos
10.3.3
Either join the main route S of Snares Island (10.2.3)
or the alternative route (10.2.4) between Auckland
SO Islands and Campbell Island.
Adelaide, Melbourne or Hobart to Chilean
ports
10.3.4
65 Proceed to 48° 30' S, 166° 30' E, S of Snares Islands,
as directed in 10.2.3,10.3.1,10.3.2 or 10.3.3, and thence
make easting across the Pacific Ocean between the
parallels of 46° S and 48° S, being towards the more S of
these latitudes in March, and towards the more N in
70 August, as far as 112° W; from which position steer as
234
 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
directly as possible for destination, bearing in mind the
N-going current running up the whole W coast of South
America.
Adelaide, Melbourne or Hobart to San
Francisco or British Columbia
10.3.5
Proceed to 48° 30' S, 166° 30' E, S of Snares Island
(10.3.4) and thence make for 41° S 138° W, keeping
about 60 miles N of the direct line to this position in
September, and 60 miles S of it in March. From 41° S,
138° W, proceed to 30° S, 124° W, and from this position
make nearly N through the South-east Trade Wind,
crossing the equator in 116° W.
After picking up the North-east Trade Wind in about
10° N, steer for 30° N, 131° W, in November and
December, and in June and July for 30° N, 136° W. At
other times, cross 30° N between these positions.
From the parallel of 30° N, proceed as direct to
destination as the prevailing W winds and the SE-going
current, which crosses the track at a rate of 20 to 30 miles
a day, will allow. See also 10.129, which joins this route
soon after crossing the equator.
Melbourne to N e w Zealand
10.3.6
If the wind is W on departure, steer to pass Rodondo
Island and then N of Kent Group.* Then, for ports on
the E side of South Island, steeer S of Snares Islands and
thence to destination.
For Wellington, steer, direct for Cook Strait.
For Auckland, steer for Three Kings Islands, and
thence round the N point of New Zealand to Auckland.
If, on leaving Port Philip, the wind should blow from
the E it may be desirable to run to the S, passing W of
King Island, and then proceed along the W coast of
ROUTES FROM SYDNEY
Sydney to southern Australia and New
Zealand
Sydney to Melbourne or Adelaide
10.4.1
When proceeding S from Sydney, keep at between 20
and 60 miles from the coast, so as to derive the full
benefit of the S-going current.
To make the passage via Bass Strait, follow the
directions in 9.160, if the wind permits.
To make the passage S of Tasmania, reverse the
directions for that route given in 10.3.7.
Sydney to Hobart
10.4.2
On entering Storm Bay from the E, stand over
towards Cape Queen Elizabeth, and steer thence along 60
the E coast of North Bruny Island for the entrance to
River Derwent. In working against a NW wind work up
along the same coast, to avoid the strong outset from
Frederick Henry Bay.
If, when off Betsey Island, the wind should blow from 65
the NW so as to prevent a vessel from working into River
Derwent, good anchorage may be obtained either in
Adventure Bay or Frederick Henry Bay. In calms or
light winds vessels may, if necessary, anchor with a
stream or kedge in Storm Bay until they get a breeze. 70
10.4.5
Tasmania, being prepared for the prevailing W or SW
winds, when this coast becomes a dangerous lee shore,
see 10.3.2. Having rounded the outlying dangers off the
S coast of Tasmania, proceed to destination as above.
5
Adelaide or Melbourne to Sydney
10.3.7
If the wind is favourable for Bass Strait, first steer for
10 Rodondo Island, passing about 20 miles S of Cape
Otway if bound from Adelaide.
Having passed Rodondo Island and Kent Group,
steer for a position about 20 miles SE of Rame Head and
make Gabo Island or the land in the vicinity of Cape
15 Howe; but if it is blowing hard from the S, a more E
course should be steered to avoid Ninety Mile Beach,
extending from Corner Inlet for 150 miles, or nearly to
Cape Howe, which would then be a dangerous lee
shore.* From a position E of Cape Howe, steer to the N
20 along the E coast for Sydney at such distance from the
land as the wind and weather would suggest, bearing in
mind that the current generally sets to the S at a distance
of 20 to 60 miles from the land.
If on leaving Adelaide or Melbourne, there should be
25 an E wind, it might be desirable to run to the S, instead
of taking Bass Strait; if from Melbourne, passing
between Cape Otway and King Island. Thence proceed
down the W coast of Tasmania, giving it a good berth,
see 10.3.2. Having rounded the outlying dangers S of
30 Tasmania, steer to the N, following the directions given
above.
•Traffic Separation Schemes have been established in
35 Bass Strait and SE of the Area to be Avoided (7.49.2) SE
of Ninety Mile Beach. See 8.1.2.
Sydney to Auckland
45 10.4.3
There are two routes, according to time of year,
though it is sometimes possible to make a direct course
to sight and to pass 10 miles N of Three Kings Islands,
and thence around North Cape. Sailing ships not having
50 a commanding breeze, should not attempt to pass S of
Three Kings Islands.
From September to April proceed to 30° S, 170° E
and thence to Auckland.
From May to August, take a more S route, through
55 35° S, 170° E.
Sydney to Wellington
10.4.4
Take as direct a route as possible to Cook Strait,
noting that the best time of year for this passage is
October to February.
Sydney to Port Chalmers or adjacent ports
10.4.5
Steer S of Snares Islands, as described in 10.5.1, and
then proceed as directly as possible to destination.
The passage round the SW end of South Island and
through Foveaux Strait is also possible, but it is not
recommended.
235
10.5.1 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
Sydney to Cabo de Hornos
10.5.1
At all seasons and from whatever quarter the wind
may blow, it is advisable on leaving Sydney to proceed to
the S rather than to the N of New Zealand. Advantage
therefore should be taken of the most favourable winds
for either passing S of Snares Islands and Auckland
Islands, to join the route described in 10.2.3 or, if baffled
by S winds and favoured by fine weather, the passage
through Cook Strait may be taken with advantage,
especially from October to February, joining the route
(10.14) from Wellington off that port.
See also 10.2.4 for an alternative route if passing S of
New Zealand.
Sydney to ports on west coast of South
America
10.5.2
Follow the directions in 10.4.3 according to season as
far as the meridian of 170° E, and thence proceed to
destination.
Sydney to ports between Talcahuano and
Iquique
10.5.3
After crossing 170° E (10.5.2), steer to cross the 180th
meridian in about 35° S, and the meridian of 150°W
between the parallels of 39° S and 43° S, being to the N
in November and December, and to the S in April and
May. Keep between these two parallels as far as 106" W,
and from that position curve the track gradually N for
the port of destination, making due allowance for the N-
going current along the coast of South America. The
winds will be usually from some S direction.
Sydney to ports between Iquique and
Panama
10.5.4
After crossing 170° E (10.5.2), steer to cross the 180th
meridian between the parallels of 33° S and 34° S, and
cross the ocean on a nearly E course, not going S of
36° S. On reacing the meridian of 100° W, begin to make
to the NE through the South-east Trade Wind to
destination, making allowance for the N-going set along
the coast as far as the equator.
Sydney to San Francisco or British
Columbia
10.5.5
There are two routes, via Tahiti and via Fiji. To make
the passage via Tahiti, pass either N or S of New
Zealand, or through Cook Strait, according to the
direction of the wind on leaving; but preferably through
Cook Strait. Thence make to the NE so as to cross 30° S
in about 160° W, and then N through the South-east
Trade Wind, passing closely W of lies de la Societe.
In June, July and August, cross the equator in
148° W, but from October to February in 151° W,
steering through the doldrums to 10° N, 143° W, where
the North-east Trade Wind should be picked up. Stand
through the Trade Wind towards 30° N, 152° W, and
from this position, where the W winds should begin to
be felt, make as directly as possible for destination.
From November to February, the turn to the E can
usually be made in about 33° N, but in August stand N
to 40° N before turning towards the land. Allowance
must be made for a current setting SE and S more and
more strongly as the United States coast is approached.
It is also felt off the coast of British Columbia, but is
there complicated by tidal streams. See 10.64.2.
To make the passage via Fiji, take the Auckland route
(10.4.3) as far as the meridian of 170° E; thence continue
E (nothing to the N) as far as 176° E, when course may be
altered towards Fiji Islands.
5 If not calling at Fiji, pass E of the group and thence
steer due N to cross the equator and the parallel of 18° N
on the 180th meridian; thence stand more to the E, to
30° N, 172° W, and then proceed as directly as possible
to destination.
10
Sydney to, and among, South Pacific
islands
75 Sydney to Tahiti
10.6.1
Follow the directions for the Tahiti route in 10.5.5.
Sydney to Fiji
20 10.6.2
Follow the directions for the Fiji route in 10.5.5.
Sydney to other Pacific islands, and
amongst them
25 10.6.3
When bound from the coasts of Australia to islands in
the South Pacific Ocean, precise directions cannot be
given on account of the irregularity of wind; but, as a
general rule, easting must be made S of the Trade Wind
30 limits, ie, in about 32° S. This is, however, liable to
interruption, especially between January and April.
When on the meridian of the island to which bound, the
Trade Wind may be entered, and the ship sailed well
free, as the current will be found setting to windward
35 until near the islands.
For all practical purposes of navigation between the
various groups of islands, it is important to draw
attention to the fact that they lie within the limits of the
South-east Trade Wind and of the Equatorial Current.
40 For sailing vessels this means a favourable wind and
current when proceeding from E to W, excepting with
regard to currents when within the limits of the
Equatorial Counter-current; and a beat to windward
against the current and a choppy sea, when bound in the
45 opposite direction.
Sydney to Noumea
10.6.4
Pass between Lord Howe Island and Elizabeth Reef
50 and thence direct. The passage in a sailing vessel varies
from 5 to 28 days, and it is seldom made without
encountering a gale.
55 Sydney to Yokohama
10.7.1
The route changes seasonally with the monsoons both
N and S of the equator, S of the equator, see 10.7.2 and
10.7.3 and N of the equator 10.7.4.
60 Alternative routes known as the Eastern, Middle, and
Western Routes may be taken, see 10.7.5. They do not
differ greatly from the other routes.
10.7.2
South of the equator, during the North-west
65 Monsoon, from November to March, pass between
Lord Howe Island and Elizabeth Reef and thence to the
N between Recifs d'Entrecasteaux on the E, and Bellona
Reefs and Bampton Reefs on the W; thence between
Solomon Islands and Santa Cruz Islands, crossing the
70 equator in about 166° E at about 60 miles W of Nauru.
236
 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
10.7.3
During the South-east Monsoon, from April to
October, on leaving Sydney, steer directly to the NE, as
far as 157° E; then to the N, between Kenn Reef and
Bellona Reefs, E of Pocklington Reef, and either
through Bougainville Strait or through Pioneer
Channel, between Solomon Islands and New Ireland,
crossing the equator in about 155° E.
10.7.4
North of the equator, from January to June steer
direct for Yokohama, passing E of Caroline Islands. In
July and August, take a more E track, passing about 100
miles W of Marshall Islands, and crossing the meridian
of 160° E in 18° N, and steering thence direct to
destination. From September to December, a track
midway between these two is recommended.
10.7.5
Alternative routes. The Eastern Route is to Norfolk
Island, thence to Tie Matthew, and N along the meridian
of 171° E to the parallel of 11° S, across the equator in
166° E and through the E part of Caroline Islands.
The Middle Route is midway between Lord Howe
Island and Elizabeth Reef, W of Novelle-Caledonie,
between Solomon Islands and Santa Cruz Islands,
across the equator in 159° E, and through the middle of
Caroline Islands.
The Western Route is along the meridian of 157° E, as
far as 11° S; thence through Bougainville Strait, and
across the equator in 153° E, when a direct course may
be steered for Yokohama.
Sydney to Hong Kong
10.8.1
There are three routes, appropriate to the monsoon
periods.
10.8.2
During the North-west Monsoon, from October to
March, steer midway between Lord Howe Island and
Elizabeth Reef. From this position pass N between
Bellona Reefs and Nouvelle-Caledonie, and thence
between Solomon Islands and Santa Cruz Islands, to the
equator in 159° E. Thence steer through the middle of
Caroline Islands and pass N of Philippine Islands.
The passage may be expected to be made in from 40 to
44 days.
10.8.3
During the first part of the South-east Monsoon,
from April to June, steer NE as far as the meridian of
157° E and then due N as far as the parallel of 11° S;
thence continue through Pioneer Channel, between
New Ireland and Bougainville Island, or through
Bougainville Strait, crossing the equator in about
153° E. From this position steer to pass through the
most W Caroline Islands, and through Balintang
Channel to the South China Sea.
10.8.4
The Torres Strait Route, appropriate to the second
part of the South-east Monsoon, and to the South-west
Monsoon of the South China Sea, may be taken
provided the vessel is through Torres Strait before the
end of September; if not follow the directions in 10.8.2
or 10.8.3. The Torres Strait Route may be expected to
occupy 40 days, and although not free from danger, may
be navigated in safety by those with experience amongst
coral reefs.
The passage from Sydney to Torres Strait is
described in 10.9. Directions for the straits and routes in
the Eastern Archipelago are given in Chapter 9. In this
area, there are several alternative routes between Torres
Strait and Hong Kong, the first being to pass through
10.10
Selat Wetar and into the Flores Sea, and thence along
the N side of the islands and through Selat Sapudi.
From Selat Sapudi stand N to pass through Selat
Karimata and thence to Hong Kong.
5 The second alternative is to pass round the N end of
Timor, through Selat Ombai, Savu Sea and Selat
Sumba to Selat Alas; thence steer N to pass through
Selat Karimata and to the South China Sea. Otherwise a
vessel may pass S of Timor and Sumba to Selat Alas, but
10 this route leads through a part of the Arafura Sea in
which there are many known, and probably many
undiscovered, dangers.
The third alternative is to steer between Pulau-pulau
Aru and Pulau-pulau Tanimbar to Selat Manipa.
15 Thence pass round the N end of Sulawesi and across the
Celebes Sea, through Basilan Strait into the Sulu Sea.
Pass through Mindoro Strait into the South China Sea
and Hong Kong.
20
Sydney to Torres Strait
10.9.1
There are two routes; the Inner Route, which passes
inshore of Great Barrier Reefs, and the Outer Route, to
25 seaward of the reefs and through the Coral Sea. The
proper time for making either passage under sail is from
March to September, during the South-east Monsoon.
Large sailing vessels seldom take the inner route, but
small vessels can do so without difficulty.
30 It is not desirable to reach the entrance to Torres
Strait before the beginning of April, in order to avoid the
chance of an equinoctial gale, as well as to make sure that
the South-east Monsoon has begun in the Arafura Sea.
Vessels have left Sydney as late as October, and made
35 their passages; yet, generally speaking, it is much too
late; for althought the North-west Monsoon does not
blow until November, and sometimes later, the calms
and light variable winds that precede it protract the
passage very much.
40
Inner Route
10.9.2
Proceed as directly as possible N along the coast to
Sandy Cape.
45 The prevailing wind off the coast to Sandy Cape being
NE from October to April, and W from May to
September, the seaman will use his own discretion in
getting to the N against the strong S-going current
generally running along the coast. The strength of this
50 current is found on the edge of the charted 200 m depth
contour from 10 to 30 miles from the coast, and will be
avoided by keeping well outside this line.
Curtis Channel and Capricorn Channel are the only
entrances to the Inner Route from SE; the latter is
55 recommended. For details of these channels and of the
Inner Route, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Outer Route
10.9.3
60 On leaving Sydney, avoid the S-going current by
keeping within about 2 miles of the land until a direct
course can reasonably be made to 24° S, 157° E. Thence,
passing clear E of Cato Bank and Wreck Reefs, proceed
to 21° 10' S, 156° 35'E and continue on a NW course, to
65 pass NE of Eastern Fields and Portlock Reefs to Bligh
Entrance.
Sydney to Singapore
10.10
70 From March to September, the South-east Monsoon
237
10.11 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
period, Torres Strait is used, see 10.9.1. After passing
through the strait, proceed by one of the two routes
given in 10.8.4 to Selat Karimata, and thence through
Selat Riau to Singapore. This passage may also be made
through Selat Gelasa or Selat Bangka instead of Selat
Karimata.
A third route for March to September, from Torres
Strait, is by the third alternative mentioned in 10.8.4, to
ROUTES FROM NEW ZEALAND
New Zealand to Australia
10.11
In all cases steer to pass through Cook Strait or round
the N end of North Island. These passages are always
.more favourable than round the S end of South Island
where W winds prevail.
New Zealand to Sydney and ports
northward
10.12
Having cleared Cook Strait or the N end of North
Island, proceed as directly as possible if bound for
Sydney or Brisbane; if bound for Torres Strait join the
Outer Route (10.9.3) in 24° S, 157° E. To ports N of
Brisbane join the Inner Route (10.9.2) in Capricorn
Channel.
New Zealand to southern Australia
10.13
Pass through Bass Strait if wind permits; otherwise S
of Tasmania. Then join the routes from Sydney
(9.160-9.163, 10.4.1).
New Zealand to Cabo de Hornos
10.14
From Auckland, join the trans-ocean route (10.2.3) in
about 51° S, 148° W. From Cook Strait, join it in
170° W; from South Island ports, join at the 180th
meridian.
New Zealand to South America
10.15
From Auckland, see 10.5.3 and 10.5.4; from other
ROUTES FROM ISLAND GROUPS BETWEEN NOUVELLE-CALEDONIE A N D ILES DE LA
SOCH6TE
Islands (as above) to Sydney or southern
Australia
10.19
Proceed W on about the parallel of the islands, taking
full advantage of the Trade Wind and the favourable
current; pass about 150 miles S of Nouvelle-Caledonie
and then proceed as directly as possible to port, or to
Bass Strait if bound to South Australia. For passage
through Bass Strait and to Melbourne and Adelaide, see
9.160-9.163; and for passage from Bass Strait to Cape
Leeuwin, see 9.164. For route from Tahiti, see 10.28.
Islands (as above) to New Zealand
10.20
From islands E of the meridian of 170° W steer W in
the Trade Wind until that meridian is reached, and
Basilan Strait and the Sulu Sea; thence through Balabac
Strait to the South China Sea and Singapore.
From November to February, during the North-west
Monsoon, steer to the N to pass E of Papua New Guinea,
and after meeting NE winds in about 5° N, pass S of
Mindanao, through Basilan Strait, Sulu Sea, and
Balabac Strait to the South China Sea and Singapore.
For routes in the Eastern Archipelago, see Chapter 9.
'5 departures see 10.3.4. These trans-ocean routes should
be joined at the nearest position.
New Zealand to San Francisco or British
Columbia
20 10.16
Steer N so as to get through the Intertropical
Convergence Zone (7.2 and 7.15) as quickly as possible;
this particularly applies in July, August, and
September. At all times join the appropriate route from
25 Sydney (10.5.5) as soon as possible.
New Zealand to South Pacific islands
10.17
30 Make easting S of 40° S to about 165° W if bound for
Rarotonga, or to 155° W if bound for Tahiti; haul
gradually N into the South-east Trade Wind, and then
proceed direct.
The South-east Trade Wind is tolerably regular
35 among the Samoan, Tonga, Fiji and Nouvelle-
Caledonie Islands, from April to October, but from
December to March it is very light and uncertain, and
NW winds are frequent.
Cyclones sometimes pass over these localities from
40 January to March, inclusive.
New Zealand to South China Sea or Japan
10.18
Steer N to pick up, on the parallel of 30° S, the
45 appropriate route from Sydney. References are for
Yokohama, 10.7.1; for Hong Kong 10.8.1; for Torres
Strait 10.9.1; for Singapore 10.10.
55 thence proceed as directly as possible to destination,
bearing in mind that approaching New Zealand a sailing
vessel should, especially in winter, keep W, rather than
E, of the direct route; W winds are likely to be
experienced S of the Trade Wind.
60
Islands (as above) to Cabo de Hornos or
Estrecho de Magallanes
65 10.21
From any of the Pacific islands stand through the
Trade Winds to the S and then into the W winds of the S
hemisphere; thence, proceed by great circle to Estrecho
de Magallanes or to round Cabo de Hornos, but do not
70 get to the S of the route from South Africa (10.2).
238
 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
Islands (as above) to ports between
Talcahuano and Panama
10.22
Stand through the Trade Winds into the westerlies to
pick up the routes from Australia to the required
destination in 160° W, or W of that meridian, according
to starting point. See 10.3.4,10.5.3,10.5.4. From July to
October, however, a direct passage S of Archipel des
Tuamotu can usually be made, passing Pitcairn Island.
Islands (as above) to San Francisco and
British Columbia
10.23
Stand S (except from Tahiti) and pick up the route
from Sydney via Tahiti (10.5.5).
Fiji to Honolulu
10.24
Stand N through both Trade Winds and into the W
winds N of the North-east Trade Wind, thence making
easting to about 155° W, thence proceeding direct.
Fiji to Tahiti
10.25
Stand through the South-east Trade Wind into the
westerlies, then run down the easting, re-entering the
Trade Wind in 150°W.
Samoa eastward
10.26
When sailing to the E it will be found an advantage to
keep on the S side of the group, where there is not only a
favourable current, but the winds will be found more
regular and calms less frequent.
Tahiti to Honolulu
10.27
Steer to the N to cross the equator in about 147° W,
and thence to make the Hawaiian Islands from E, to
ensure the breeze.
The channel between Moorea and Tahiti should
never be used by sailing ships except with steady winds
from NE or SW, as these are the only winds that blow
through the channel. When there is a fresh breeze from
the E to the N of Tahiti it is generally calm in this
channel, and vessels have remained becalmed here for
days, whilst a fresh breeze prevailed to seaward.
ROUTES FROM SINGAPORE AND EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO
Singapore to Sydney
10.30.1
From Singapore, near and during the period of
change from the South-east Monsoon to the North-west
Monsoon (about October), sailing vessels may be five or
six weeks in making the passage from Singapore to Selat
Bangka.
Directions
10.30.2
From November to February the route is taken
through Torres Strait. Leaving Singapore in the North-
west Monsoon, between mid-November and mid-
February, proceed through Selat Bangka or Selat
Karimata, and enter the Indian Ocean by Selat Lambok
10.31.1
Tahiti to Australia and New Zealand
10.28
For Sydney, run with the Trade Wind, steering to
pass about 150 miles S of Nouvelle-Caledonie; thence
5 proceed as directly as possible to destination. See 10.19.
For Wellington, run with the Trade Wind to about
170° W, and thence proceed as directly as possible to
destination. See 10.20.
10 Torres Strait to Sydney
10.29
The ocean passage appears not to have been made
very often, and like that from Torres Strait to Sydney by
the Inner Route, was formerly considered only
15 practicable in the North-west Monsoon—from
November to February or March. The first object after
clearing Torres Strait, in the North-west Monsoon, will
be to take advantage of W winds for making easting,
looking upon immediate progress to the S as of
20 secondary importance.
In the North-west Monsoon, leave Torres Strait by
Great North East Channel, and having cleared Eastern
Fields, take every advantage of W breezes and try to
reach a position in about 15° S, 156° E, keeping an
25 especial look-out when proceeding E of the route, into
the unexplored area N of Mellish Reef.
Having attained the meridian of 156° E, and thus
probably far enough to the E to take advantage of the
South-east Trade Wind, haul on a wind on the port tack
30 and try to fetch Mellish Reef; great caution is necessary
when in the neighbourhood of this reef, and there is
generally a strong W-going set to guard against. Pass, if
the wind permit, between Kenn Reef and Wreck Reefs
on the E side, and Frederick Reef and Saumarez Reefs
35 on the W side.
If there is too much southing in the prevailing South-
east Trade Wind to weather Frederick Reef, pass W of
it, and between Saumarez Reefs and Swain Reefs, when
a S-going current will probably enable a vessel to
40 weather Sandy Cape, care being taken to avoid Breaksea
Spit and the shoal nears its E edge.
As a rule a vessel should be so sailed as to close the
intermediate passage reefs in the day-time, to take a
fresh departure, as the current between Saumarez Reefs
45 and Swain Reefs may otherwise seriously affect the
vessel's reckoning.
From Sandy Cape proceed for Sydney by keeping the
mainland in sight, to take advantage of the S-going
current.
or Selat Alas, after passing through Selat Sapudi.
Having reached the Indian Ocean, steer to pass N or S of
Timor and thence to Torres Strait. See also 9.120.
Continue as directed in 10.29.
60 From April to October, follow the directions in 9.121
through Selat Sunda into the W winds, and then pass S
of Australia and through Bass Strait to Sydney. See
9.1.4, 9.1.8, 10.3.7.
65
Singapore to Molukka Archipelago
10.31.1
The passage should be made S of Borneo in the
North-east Monsoon and N of Borneo in the South-
70 west Monsoon. -
239
10.31.2 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
10.31.2
From October to May, when the North-east
Monsoon blows N of the equator, and the North-west
Monsoon S of it, proceed through Selat Karimata
passing E of Karang Ontario. On leaving the strait, steer
to pass 10 to 15 miles S of Gosong Gia and about 10
miles S of Masalembo Besar, thence proceed to Selat
Salayar as directly as possible.
After clearing Selat Salayar, Ambon is easily reached
by passing S of Batuata and Binongko; if bound to the
Ceram Sea, first round the S point of Buton and then,
after skirting the shore of that island, and having passed
Wangi-Wangi, steer N as far as Wowoni. Thence run for
the S point of Sanana and thence into the Ceram Sea.
The currents in this locality set to the S and are very
strong. If a vessel has been set to leeward of the N point
of Buru, it is best to pass to the S of that island, and then
through Selat Manipa to the Ceram Sea.
10.31.3
From May to September, when the South-west
Monsoon blows N of the equator, and the South-east
Monsoon S of it, run S of Pulau-pulau Anambas and
then between Royal Charlotte Reef and Louisa Reef,
taking care to avoid the dangerous shoals bordering the
Borneo coast, and also of being set to leeward of Pulau
Balambangan by the N-going current which prevails in
the South-west Monsoon. Having made Pulau
Balambangan, haul round its N point, and steer through
Balabac Strait into the Sulu Sea, then through Sibutu
Passage or one of the passages of the Sulu Archipelago,
cross the Celebes Sea for the N point of Sulawesi, and
then work S through the Molucca Sea.
For an alternative route as far as Balabac Strait during
the South-west Monsoon, see 10.32.3.
Directions for the straits and channels in the Eastern
Archipelago are given in Chapter 9. See Admiralty
Sailing Directions for currents in Palawan Passage.
Singapore to Sulu Sea
10.32.1
In Singapore Strait, E-bound, follow in reverse the
directions given in 9.39.2. The main route is via Balabac
Strait, to which the passage is varied according to
season; the passage may also be made by proceeding S
through Selat Karimata or Selat Gelasa, through the
Java Sea, and to the N through Selat Makasar, but this is
not recommended except in October and November.
10.32.2
From October to May, during the North-east
Monsoon, the route is via Balabac Strait. In December,
January, and February, do not leave Singapore Strait in
strong NE winds, but anchor on the N shore, under
Pulau Che Kamat. In those months gales often occur
with thick weather, the rain lasting two or three days and
the SSE-going current outside attains a rate of 2-j or 3
knots. A vessel leaving the strait then, instead of fetching
Pejantan, would fall bodily to leeward, and have to work
up the W coast of Borneo. Fine weather follows, with the
wind backing round to N and NW; and the current in
the offing decreases in strength to about \\ knots.
Having obtained the fine weather, the first object
should be to pass through the channel between Pulau-
pulau Natuna Besar and Pulau-pulau Subi Besar or, if
this proves impossible or difficult, to use one of the
passages to the S.
To pass through the channel between Pulau-pulau
Natuna Besar and Pulau-pulau Subi Besar a vessel
should leave the anchorage off Pulau Che Kamat with
the first of the ebb, and keep clean full. She should then
steer to the NE to go through the channel between, Subi
Kecil, which is lighted, and Natuna Besar, passing S of
Midai, a passage that may be made in these months
without much difficulty, especially at full and change,
5 when, it is stated, the wind, after a few hours calm,
frequently shifts to the W with squalls and rain, and then
hauls round to SW and S, blowing moderately for 24
hours. By taking advantage of these changes Pulau-
pulau Subi Besar may be easily weathered.
10 If after arriving in the vicinity of Midai, nearly in the
fairway SW of Natuna Besar, the wind continues E,
steer to the N on the starboard tack, passing W of Midai,
and keeping not less than 3 miles from its SW side to
avoid the shoal water extending 2\ miles from it. Pass
'5 about 5 miles W of Timau, as the coral reefs about that
island extend fully 3 miles from its SW side, with least
known depths of 7 m. Vessels are not recommended to
pass between Timau and Midai, on account of Karang-
karang Diana, which extend some 14 miles N of Midai.
20 There would be no danger, however if the wind permits
of a vessel laying through, and passing 4 or 5 miles S of
Timau and Karang Sedimin, thus giving a wide berth to
Karang-karang Diana, provided those objects are
available for cross bearings. The channel S of Midai is
25 preferable if a vessel can lay through.
If bearing up, after passing Timau there will be no
difficulty in working towards the S point of Natuna
Besar as that island, when approached from the SW,
shelters against the strong SW-going current of the
30 Monsoon. Off its S coast at night, in fine weather, the
wind is off the land, but the S and SE coasts should not
be approached nearer than 6 or 7 miles, on account of the
off-lying dangers.
If fetching to leeward of Pulau-pulau Subi Besar with
35 a N wind take Alur Pelayaran Koti, between Lentok
Panjan and Serasan and its surrounding islands. Alur
Pelayaran Koti is clear apart from Karang Haynes, the
6 m patch in the middle of its W entrance. The sides of
the fairway of Alur Pelayaran Serasan are clear, but the
40 middle is encumbered by reefs. The current among
these islands is more regular than in Alur Pelayaran Api,
where it sets in various directions, and with considerable
velocity to the SW from 16 to 19 hours at a time; for large
vessels any of the other passages are preferable to this, as
45 great caution and perseverance are requisite in working
through. When using it, keep the Borneo coast aboard,
in depths from 18 m to 20 m to avoid the current and to
profit by the land winds. See directions for Alur
Pelayaran Api, below.
50 In taking Alur Pelayaran Koti give Lentok Panjang a
good berth to avoid the reef which surrounds it, and
extends off its SW end. The winds amongst these islands
and as far E as the meridian of Tanjung Sirik are
generally from N to NNW. The passage cleared,
55 proceed to the NE; endeavouring, if not certain of the
longitude, to make Royal Charlotte Reef or Louisa Reef,
whichever is the weathermost, by running on its parallel
of latitude; and as the currents appear to be influenced
by the prevailing winds, a set in the direction in which it
60 is blowing should be anticipated, the velocity of the
current being proportionate to the force of the wind.
Having made either Royal Charlotte Reef or Louisa
Reef, or passing in mid-channel between them, steer to
the E for about 100 miles towards Balabac Strait, and
65 through it to the Sulu Sea. See Admiralty Sailing
Directions for the W approaches to, and passage
through Balabac Strait.
Sailing vessels forced to the S working up the Borneo
coast towards Alur Pelayaran Api may find favourable
70 tidal streams near the shore when a strong adverse
240
 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
current is running in the offing especially during the NE
Monsoon.
Pulua-pulu Burung may be boldly approached from
the W; large sailing vessels had better pass outside them,
but small craft may often, with advantage, pass between
them. For directions, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
In October and November, only, an alternative route
via Selat Makasar may be taken. A vessel should proceed
S to pass through Selat Gelasa or Selat Karimata, and
thence E through the Java Sea to Selat Makasar, there
joining the First Eastern Passage (9.47.1) and following
it to the Sulu Sea.
10.32.3
From May to September, during the South-west
Monsoon, first proceed to Alur Pelayaran Api as
described below and thence, with a fair wind, parallel
with the Borneo coast, as far as Balabac Strait, and
thence into the Sulu Sea.
Directions from Singapore to Tanjung Api are as
follows.
As far as the E entrance to Singapore Strait, the tidal
streams are tolerably regular, but some miles offshore a
current will be found setting about NNW in the South-
west Monsoon; its greatest strength will be experienced
between Pulau Tioman and Pulau-pulau Anambas. In
order to obviate the effect of this set or current, it is
considered prudent to make good the course for
Mendarik from Singapore Strait, by which, should light
airs prevail, the option will be afforded of steering either
between Pengibu and Kayuara, or S of Kayuara, thus
avoiding Batu Acasta. On leaving Kayuara, shape
course, allowing for a N-going set, to pass well S of Muri
and then keep Muri Light, whilst in sight, bearing 255°,
which will lead about 2 miles S of Pulau Merundung.
Banggi South Channel and Malawali Channel
between Pulau Banggi and Borneo are sometimes used
by vessels navigating to the ports of the NE coast of
Borneo; they are somewhat intricate and demand careful
navigation, being for the greater part bounded by
dangers. Balabac Main Channel is recommended in
preference to either of these channels, being considered
much safer. See Admiralty Sailing Directions for a
description and directions for these channels.
Singapore to Manila
10.33.1
From October to May, during the North-east
Monsoon, follow the directions given in 10.32.2 as far as
the entrance to Balabac Strait, and continue thence to
the N by Palawan Passage, between the charted 200 m
depth contour W of Palawan and that of the off-lying
foul ground; a channel about 40 miles in width, except
towards the S end, where, between Royal Captain Shoal
and the edge of Paragua Ridge, it is 28 miles wide. This
is the most dangerous part of the channel. From the N
end of Palawan Passage, in about 11 ° N, work to the N of
Manila, hugging the coast by short boards when
possible. See Admiralty Sailing Directions for currents
in Palawan passage.
10.33.2
From June to October, during the South-west
Monsoon, follow the directions given in 10.32.3 to
Tanjung Api, and then proceed directly along the coast
and through Palawan Passage with a fair wind to
destination. Or as an alternative route, pass S of Pulau-
pulau Anambas and Natuna Besar and between Royal
Charlotte Reef and Louisa Reef, to pick up the Palawan
route off Balabac Strait.
When working through Palawan Passage and having
conformed with the directions given for making the SW
10.34.2
end of Palawan, in fine weather try to make inshore
boards in the afternoon, for the sun then being astern of
the vessel, the patches lying near the edge of the bank
will generally be distinguished from the masthead in
5 ample time to tack. In squally weather, also during the
heavy rains, these patches have been observed imparting
a very distinct yellowish hue to the surface of the water.
It is most desirable to get soundings before dark in order
that a good departure may be made for the night. On
10 making the inshore board, be prepared to tack
immediately on getting the first indication of the shore
bank, on which a vessel is likely to come suddenly into
soundings. See Admiralty Sailing Directions for
currents in Palawan Passage.
IS When approaching the islands in the vicinity of
Balabac Island and Palawan, if the wind be well to the S
and the weather thick, Balabac Island may be
approached near enough to obtain a good observation of
the land; but caution is necessary not to go within 12
20 miles of it, as soundings of 48 m and 37 m extend that
distance off, in a W direction from the peak, having shoal
patches immediately inside them. If the wind be to the
W, with thick cloudy weather, Balabac Island should not
be approached nearer than 30 miles, as winds usually
25 force a strong E-going current through the passage.
Off the SW end of Palawan, it is not unusual,
particularly in squalls, for the wind to veer to WNW,
and sometimes NW, blowing with violence, and placing
the vessel on a lee shore with respect to the shoals inside
30 the edge of the bank. This weather generally prevails off
Palawan about September and October, rendering it
uncertain and difficult to make the narrowest part of the
channel, owing to the land being obscured.
35 Singapore to Hong Kong
10.34.1
During the North-east Monsoon, a route similar to
the Main Route for powered vessels (7.112.1), except
that it passes initially between Pulau-pulau Anambas
40 and Natuna Besar, may be used, although it is not
strongly recommended.
During the strength of the North-east Monsoon, use
Palawan passage (10.33.1) as far as the N end of
Palawan; then work up the coast of Luzon as far as Cape
45 Bolinao or Cape Bojeador. Among the island groups N
of Luzon no continuous strong breezes will be
experienced at all comparable, either in force or
consequent high seas, with those which prevail between
Cape Bolinao and Hong Kong. But see notes on Pratas
50 Reefs (10.47.3) and Taiwan Strait (10.50.1).
A route through Selat Gelasa or Selat Karimata, the
Java Sea, Selat Salayar, and the Banda Sea, to join the
Second Eastern Passage (9.46), affords a leading or fair
wind and favourable currents nearly throughout.
55 10.34.2
Between the monsoons, a route on the W side of the
South China Sea is recommended, passing along the
Malaysian coast to Pulau Redang; thence along the coast
of Vietnam to 16° N; coastwise off the E side of Hainan
60 Dao and inshore of Qizhou Liedao to make the mainland
coast about Dafangi Dao.
Approaching Hong Kong, try to make Dawanshan
Dao, bearing about 000°, then steer between it and
Wenwei Zhou, the W island of Jiapeng Liedao; thence
55 between Wailingding Dao and Dangan Liedao and
through Lema Channel into the West Lamma Channel.
After the middle of August, when E winds are liable to
prevail for several days together (as also at other times of
the year), it will be necessary to make the NE end of
70 Dangan Liedao and proceed in by Lema Channel to
241
 10.34.3 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
West Lama Channel. East Lamma Channel is also safe
in both monsoons.*
Note that NE and W gales blowing out of the Gulf of
Tonkin, with dark weather and rain, have been
experienced on this route, causing danger of being
driven among the Paracel Islands, but such gales are not
frequent and the land should be kept in sight, for
•smoother seas and the availability of anchorage.
10.34.3
During the South-west Monsoon (May to
September) the Main Route for powered vessels
(7.112.1) is appropriate except that the vessel should be
taken between Pulau-pulau Anambas and Natuna Besar
if the monsoon has not settled in.
The route on the W side of the South China Sea
(10.34.2) may also be used during the earlier part of the
South-west Monsoon.
During the latter part of the South-west Monsoon, a
route through Palawan Passage is recommended,
observing that at this time of year, a N-bound route in
the W part of South China Sea is hampered by strong S-
going currents in the vicinity of lies Catwick, with light
N winds, variable airs, or calms.
Steer N of Pengibu and between Natuna Besar and
Pulau-pulau Subi Besar, and thence as directed for
Palawan Passage in 10.33.2.
Singapore to ports north of Hong Kong
10.35.1
During the North-east Monsoon, proceed by the
Palawan Passage Route (10.34.1) as far as Cap Bolinao;
then continue to work up the coast of Luzon and
through Balintang Channel. Proceed thence off the E
coast of T'ai-wan and to destination.
The alternative route during the North-east Monsoon
is via Selat Karimata and the Second Eastern Passage, as
directed in 10.34.1.
10.35.2
Near the change of Monsoon, the inner route
(10.34.2) may be taken as far as Hong Kong, except
during the latter part of the South-west Monsoon; and
thence along the coast of China to destination.
10.35.3
During the South-west Monsoon (except the latter
part) take one of the routes advised in 10.34.3 as far as
Hong Kong, and thence continue along the China coast
to destination. In the latter part of this Monsoon, use the
Palawan Passage route.
Singapore to Ho Chi Minh City (Sai Gon)
10.36.1
During the South-west Monsoon, the winds in
Singapore Strait are between SE and W, and sailing
vessels will have no difficulty in getting through to the E.
Having cleared the strait, steer to pass W of Con Son,
and thence along the edge of the bank fronting the
mouths of Mekong River extending to the mouth of
Song Sai Gon.
Strong freshets run out of these rivers during the
South-west Monsoon, and join the NE-going current,
whereby vessels are obliged to keep the edge of the bank
aboard to prevent being set to leeward of Mui Vung
•Chinese waters N and W of Jiapeng Liedao and
Dangan Liedao are prohibited except to ships using the
routes designated in Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Tau. Keep sounding continuously while steering along
the edge of the bank, so as to remain in depths of not less
than 18 m. If the water begins to shoal, haul off to the E,
when it will soon deepen, as the depths are fairly regular.
5 Continue along the edge of the bank in these depths until
Mui Vung Tau bear less than 030°, when course may be
steered as requisite for the Song Sai Gon pilot.
10.36.2
During the North-east Monsoon, steer as directed in
10 10.32.2 until clear of Pulau-pulau Natuna Besar and
then steer NE until reaching the meridian of 112° E:
after which stand across the South China Sea to make
Mui Vung Tau, or preferably the land to windward of
that cape, to avoid being set to leeward by the prevailing
75 current.
From 7° N until 70 miles E of the mouths of Mekong
River, a strong current will be found setting to the SW
governed considerably by the prevailing winds, for
when strong gales blow in the early part of this monsoon,
20 the SW-going current is stronger, and often runs at a
rate of 3 knots. The tidal streams are regular, and set
strong near the Vietnamese coast during both
monsoons.
In the latter part of March and April an E wind is
25 often found E of Pulau-pulau Anambas that will take a
vessel to Con Son; thence work to Mui Vung Tau, W of
that island, keeping towards the Vietnamese coast,
which is very low, and can seldom be seen at night.
From abreast the mouths of Mekong River, the ebb
30 stream will be found setting to windward, greatly
assisting vessels standing inshore; but they should not
stand near these mouths during the flood stream, and on
no account shoal the water to less than 22 m in the night.
Sounding should never be neglected when standing
35 towards this low land, which may be seen from a
distance of about 10 miles in clear weather.
The North-east Monsoon often blows very strong on
the parallel of lies Catwick, and between them and the
Vietnamese coast, in December, January, February and
40 sometimes in March, continuing for two or three days
with a heavy sea and strong current, the sky being
generally thick and hazy throughout. A gradual rise in
the barometer is a sure indication of an increase in the
strength of the monsoon. If the monsoon proves too
45 strong to contend with bear up for Con Son, where good
shelter will be found, and anchor.
At about 90 miles from the coast, the wind in settled
weather usually hauls to ENE and E at about 1600,
continuing all night fresh and puffy. This is the time to
50 stand inshore, and although as far to leeward as the
meridian of Mui Vung Tau, with the ebb tide under the
lee, the vessel will be to windward of Mui Ky Van in the
morning.
55
Singapore to Bangkok
10.37.1
60 During the South-west Monsoon, winds between SE
and W prevail in Singapore Strait, and therefore sailing
vessels will have no difficulty in making to the E.
Having cleared the strait, shape course for Pulau
Redang, and thence keep close to the W shore of the
65 Gulf of Thailand, passing inside Ko Losin and Ko
Krah.
10.37.2
During the North-east Monsoon, following the
directions given in 10.32.2 until clear of Pulau-pulau
70 Natuna Besar and then proceed NE to the meridian of
242
 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
111 ° E or 112° E. This can be done easily, as the wind is
invariably from N to N N W as far as the meridian of
Tanjung Sirik, when it generally veers to the NE. Then
stand across the South China Sea to Hon Khoai. Little
or no current will be experienced until the parallel of
6° N or 7° N is gained; then it will be found setting
strongly to the SW, governed to a large extent by the
prevailing winds.
In April and May the best passages to the Gulf of
Thailand are made by keeping close to the Malaysian
coast but expect squalls, calms and rain; a weak current
begins to set to the NE about this period.
ROUTES FROM BANGKOK OR HO CHI MINH CITY
Bangkok or Ho Chi Minh City (Sai Gon) to
Hong Kong and northward
10.39.1
During the North-east Monsoon (November to
April), to attempt to work N, especially in the full
strength of the monsoon, is so certain to be tedious that
vessels are advised to stand S to Pulau-pulau Natuna
Besar to join the Palawan Passage route (10.35.1); or,
near the change of monsoon, to take the coastwise route
(10.34.2) if bound to Hong Kong; if bound to ports N of
Hong Kong either of these routes is possible but
consideration should be given to a route embodying the
Second Eastern Passage, see 10.34.1.
10.39.2
During the South-west Monsoon, if from Bangkok,
follow generally the directions given in 10.34.3 or
10.35.3.
Bangkok to Singapore
10.40.1
During the North-east Monsoon (November to
April), the passage from Bangkok S through the Gulf of
Thailand will often be shortened by sighting Kaoh
Kusrovia and passing inshore of Koh Tang. Thence
keep well E of Poulo Panjang, and if bound to Singapore
steer well out to sea for a quick passage. Pass about 20
miles E of Pulau Tenggol and E of Pulau Aur; see also
10.43.1.
10.40.2
During the South-west Monsoon (May to
September). Keep close to the W shore of the Gulf of
Thailand, passing inside Pulau-pulau Perhentian and
Pulau Redang, Pulau Kapas and Pulau Tenggol. S of
Pulau Kapas, keep inshore to avoid the current, passing
inside Pulau Tioman, Pulau Sri Buat, and Pulau Sibu;
thence proceed to Singapore Strait, taking advantage of
the tidal streams and the land and sea breezes which
prevail during settled weather in this monsoon.
The inshore channel extending from Pulau Sibu to
Pulau Sri Buat, and formed by a chain of islands and
rocks parallel with the mainland, is a good and safe one,
having but few hidden dangers, and good anchorage all
the way through.
Ho Chi Minh City (Sai Gon) to Singapore
10.41.1
During the North-east Monsoon, from a position off
Mui Vung Tau, shape a course to pass E of Con Son, and
thence direct to make Pulau Aur. From Pulau Aur to
10.41.2
Eastern Archipelago to China
10.38
Generally, the various routes, according to season, are
described in articles 9.30-9.51.4.
Passing N, through the straits to the W of Borneo,
usually from May to September, take the Main Route,
or the route on the W side of the South China Sea
(10.34.2).
Between November and April, the Second Eastern
10 Passage (9.46.1) is recommended. The First Eastern
Passage (9.47.1) can be considered but the
disadvantages outweigh the advantages.
Singapore proceed according to directions as from Hong
Kong (10.43.1).
10.41.2
During the South-west Monsoon (May to
25 September), either the direct route or a route E of Pulau-
pulau Natuna Besar may be taken. The latter is probably
the better.
On the direct route, many good passages have been
made by keeping close to the Vietnamese coast as far as
30 Hong Trung Nho, W of Con Son, or Hon Khoai, and
then crossing the Gulf of Thailand with a strong NW
wind until the Malaysian coast is reached. From Pulau
Kapas follow the directions given in 10.40.2, Bangkok to
Singapore, in this monsoon.
35 Alternatively, the passage E of Natuna Besar is
considered, generally speaking, to be better, especially
for large vessels.
After making departure from Mui Vung Tau, steer to
the SW until the South-west Monsoon forces the vessel
40 off to a more SE course. This may be accomplished by
taking every advantage of the N and NE winds, which
frequently blow at night, and in some parts of the day,
within a short distance of the coast. These local winds
often carry vessels 40 or 50 miles SW of Con Son
45 without any interruption.
While standing to the SE the full strength of the NE-
going current will be met with in the neighbourhood of
Charlotte Bank; it gradually decreases and becomes
slightly favourable when NE of Natuna Besar. In this
50 locality SE and E winds will generally be met with, and
fast sailing vessels frequently pass through the Channel
between Pulau-pulau Subi Besar and Midai, and into
Singapore Strait. There is a light on Subi Kecil, on the S
side of the channel between Pulau-pulau Subi Besar and
55 Natuna Besar; this channel is safe for all classes of vessel.
Strong W winds, with rain, frequently blow during
the early part of this monsoon, and may force vessels E
to about 111 ° 30' E. When this is the case, make for Alur
Pelayaran Api (10.32.2) keeping close to the NW coast of
60 Borneo from Tanjung Api to the S until Pulau-pulau
Burung are reached. This will be accomplished without
difficulty, for strong land and sea breezes prevail, and
the current is weaker near the coast. (Many vessels,
through leaving the coast of Borneo too soon, have
65 fetched no higher than Pulau Aur or Pulau Tioman).
Leaving Pulau-pulau Burung pass either N or S of
Pulau-pulau Tambelan. If the wind is scant from the
SW after leaving these islands, try to make Mapor, off
the E side of Bintan.
70 The current in the offing runs strongly to the N and
243
10.42.1 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
through Alur Pelayaran Api. Vessels coming through
this passage should keep to the N side, when possible,
towards Merundung, and should keep in depths of more
than 24 m on the S side between Tanjung Datu and
Tanjung Api; the latter point has shoals steep-to at \\
ROUTES FROM PORTS IN CHINA
China or Japan to Indian Ocean
Summary
10.42.1
Directions for the principal passages most frequently
used by sailing vessels are given elsewhere in this book.
References are as follows:
Main routes; 9.49.1, 9.S0.1, 9.51.1.
Eastern Archipelago to Indian Ocean, 9.115-9.125.
Hong Kong to Singapore, 10.43.1-10.43.2.
Shanghai to Indian Ocean, 10.54.1-10.54.2
Hong Kong to Manila, 10.47.1-10.47.3
Manila to Indian Ocean and Australia,
10.63.1-10.63.2.
10.42.2
The Western Route (9.49.1) passes through the
South China Sea to the W of Philippine Islands and of
Borneo to Selat Sunda through the Eastern Archipelago
either direct, or via Singapore; the selection of which
alternative to follow depends to a great degree on the
final destination to be reached.
10.42.3
The Eastern Route (9.50.1) passes E of the
Philippine Islands, and then via Selat Jailolo, or the
Molucca Sea into the Ceram Sea and the Banda Sea.
Thence it continues to Selat Ombai, or to one of the
central passages (Selat Alas, Selat Lombok, or Selat
Bali). If bound to Torres Strait the passage from the
Banda Sea would be as described in 10.44.1 Hong Kong
to Torres Strait, and 10.45.1 Hong Kong to Darwin.
10.42.4
The Central Route (9.51.1) passes W of the
Philippine Islands through Sulu Sea and Basilan Strait,
E of Borneo through Selat Makasar, and thence to one of
the central passages (Selat Alas, Selat Lombok, or Selat
Bali). Alternatively a vessel, after leaving Selat Makasar,
may stand W through the Java sea to enter the Indian
Ocean through Selat Sunda.
Choice of route
10.42.5
Of the three principal routes, Western, Eastern, and
Central, the Western and Central are used by vessels
from ports on the S coast of China; the Central Route
also for vessels S-bound from Manila and the S part of
the Philippine Islands, or the E part of Borneo. The
Eastern Route is used by vessels from ports in the N part
of China, or from Japan, also from ports in the S part of
China during the South-west Monsoon.
Seasonal variation of routes from ports in
southern China
10.42.6
From September to February, during the North-east
Monsoon, pass between Macclesfield Bank and Paracel
Islands, then about 60 miles E of lies Catwick (keeping
to'the E where the winds are more favourable), and
between Pulau-pulau Anambas and Pulau-pulau
miles off, but beyond that distance there is not less than
9 m between it and Tanjung Datu. Vessels should be
ready to anchor in the passage or off any other part of the
coast, as the tidal streams are greatly influenced by the
current, which often changes without warning.
Natuna to Selat Bangka or Selat Gelasa; thence continue
to Selat Sunda.
'5 In March, April and early May, after leaving the coast
of China, stand over to the coast of Luzon and proceed
through Palawan Passage, along the coast of Borneo,
through Alur Pelayaran Api, past Pengiki Besar and
through Selat Karimata; thence close round Jaga Utara
20 and direct to Selat Sunda. On this route E winds,
without calms, but with fine weather and a smooth sea
are likely to be experienced.
Alternatively, at the end of April or the beginning of
May, stand towards Macclesfield Bank and then follow
25 the Central Route (10.42.4) by standing SE to join it at
Verde Island Passage or Mindoro Strait.
From the middle of May till the end of July, cross the
South China Sea and pass through Balintang Channel to
join the Eastern Route (10.42.3).
30 In August, stand towards Hainan Dao, cross the Gulf
of Tongkin, and work down the coast of Vietnam with
the land and sea breezes, as far as Cap Varella or Mui
Dinh. Then cross to the coast of Borneo, tacking as
necessary to clear any reefs, and work along that coast
35 and through Selat Karimata or Selata Gelasa to Selat
Sunda.
Hong Kong to Singapore
10.43.1
40 In the North-east Monsoon, from October to March,
steer to pass between Macclesfield Bank and Paracel
Islands, and thence to pass E or W of Dao Phu Qui and
lies Catwick. Thence, passing W of Charlotte Bank and
Pulau-pulau Anambas steer to make Pulau Aur.
45 Departing from Pulau Aur, bring it to bear about
000°, and steer S until Horsburgh Light is sighted.
When making the entrance to Singapore Strait, steer
for Horsburgh Light, making allowance for the set of the
stream, so as to pass from 1 to 2 miles N of it.*
50 In slightly hazy weather, with Pulau Aur disappearing
astern, bearing 000° or less, steer a course between 192°
and 204° which may be requisite if the NE-going stream
is setting out of Singapore Strait. The depths will
decrease regularly in steering to the S, and the low land
55 will probably be seen to the W when in depths of from
33 m to 37 m; if so, coast along it at a distance of about 13
miles, until Bukit Tautau is sighted. If in any doubt
about the position, or if a depth of from 18 m to 22 m is
obtained, either haul off the land or anchor.
60 Having made the entrance to Singapore Strait,
proceed as directed to 9.39.2 (in reverse).
In March, during the latter part of this monsoon, the
winds are steady from the E, the weather is settled and
the current is weak. In April, the prevailing winds are
65 also from the E, but are much lighter and accompanied
by calms and squally weather: from the latter end of this
•Traffic Separation Schemes have been established in
70 Singapore Strait, see 8.1.2.
244
 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
month to about the middle of May the monsoon
gradually breaks up.
Caution is necessary if the weather is thick, with a
fresh breeze, when near Pulau Aur. In these
circumstances, round to under its lee, and wait a
convenient time to bear up for the strait. The current
between this island and the E point of Bintan sets about
SSE, by which it often happens that vessels leaving
Pulau Aur steer too much to the S, and are swept with
the current and the E-going stream coming out of
Singapore Strait so far to the leeward of Bintan that they
have been obliged to proceed round it, and come up
through Selat Riau. See 9.37.
10.43.2
In the South-west Monsoon, on leaving the S ports of
China, or Manila, in March, April and May, make for
the passage between Palawan Island and the off-lying
reefs, at a point in about ll°30'N, 118° 30'E, and
thence make SW through Palawan Passage, and then on
a mean course roughly parallel with the coast of Borneo.
Pass through one of the passages through Pulau-pulau
Subi Besar and stand across to the entrance to Singapore
Strait. Thence proceed as directed in 9.39.2 (in reverse).
When approaching Singapore Strait make sure of the
landfall. Keep well to the S before closing Bintan so as to
allow for the current which sometimes runs to the N at
the rate of 2 knots.
During the early part of the South-west Monsoon, if
the wind is in the SW on leaving Hong Kong, a good
passage may occasionally be made by standing to the SE
as far as 15°00'N, 115° 30'E. Thence pass SW of
Macclesfield Bank, to lies Catwick or Mui Dinh, and
cross the Gulf of Thailand to Pulau Aur and thence to
Singapore, as above.
From August to October, after leaving Hong Kong
stand toward Hainan Dao, which will be often fetched
without tacking, as the wind frequently blows for days
together from SE or E in that part of the South China
Sea; from thence cross the Gulf of Tongkin to the
Vietnamese coast. Land and sea breezes and smooth
water generally prevail close to that coast, for which
reason work down as close to the shore as possible,
taking advantage of every slant of wind, but being
careful not to get too far off the land. It is sometimes
possible to get as far to the S as Mui Dinh, in this way,
but generally after passing Cap Varella the monsoon is
found blowing very fresh, with frequent hard squalls out
of the Gulf of Thailand rendering it impossible to work
much to windward. From Cap Varella, or from Mui
Dinh if a vessel has been able to fetch it, stretch away to
the S, making a tack if necessary, to weather West Reef
of London Reefs or other shoals, till the coast of Borneo
is reached; work along this coast and proceed W through
Pulau-pulau Subi Besar and to Singapore as directed for
March, April and May.
Hong Kong to Torres Strait
10.44.1
The usual route passes across the South China Sea
to make Lubang Island or Cape Calavite, and enters the
Sulu Sea through Mindoro Strait (10.42.4 and 9.51.2)
or, by passing E of Lubang Islands, through Verde
Island Passage (9.46.5) and Tablas Strait.
In either case, having passed through Cuyo East Pass,
E of Sombrero Rocks, proceed S through the Sulu Sea
to and through Basilan Strait into the Celebes Sea
(9.47.6). Cross the Celebes Sea to Selat Bangka off the
NE point of Sulawesi, passing through it into the
Molucca Sea, and continue S, to enter the Ceram Sea
between Pulau-pulau Sula and Obimayor.
10.46.1
Cross the Ceram Sea and pass through Selat Manipa
(9.50.4), into the Banda Sea. Having cleared Selat
Manipa, steer SE to pass between Pulau-pulau Kai and
Pulau-pulau Tanimbar, leaving Manuk to N or S as
5 convenient.
Having passed Pulau-pulau Tanimbar, the direct
route to Torres Strait passes S of Pulau-pulau Aru and
past Ujung Salah, but this is not recommended owing to
the dangers SW and S of Pulau-pulau Aru, and to the
10 chain of known and unexamined dangers lying W from
Ujung Salah almost as far as 134° E. Instead a vessel is
recommended to keep to the SE from Pulau-pulau
Tanimbar to cross the meridian of 134° E in about 9° S,
and proceed thence to Torres Strait.
15 In July and August, the alternative route for power
vessels given in 7.173.2 may prove useful to sailing
ships, after passing Obimayor.
10.44.2
An alternative route for the whole passage, which
20 can be used from April to October, is given in 10.45.2.
Hong Kong to Darwin
10.45.1
From November to April, follow the directions given
25 in 10.44.1 as far as Selat Manipa and then steer to the
SSE to pass E of Pulau-pulau Penyu and between
Damar and Teun; thence pass between Sermata and
Babar into the Arafura Sea. Proceed across the Arafura
Sea to make Cape. Fourcroy, the SW extremity of
30 Bathurst Island, avoiding Flinders and other shoals near
the route; thence proceed to Darwin. See Admiralty
Sailing Directions for a description of the dangers in the
approaches.
10.45.2
35 From April to October, steer across the South China
Sea and pass through Balintang Channel into the Pacific
Ocean. Thence proceed SE to pass either side of Palau
Islands, and make easting to the Equatorial Counter-
current between 4° N and 8° N, until able to fetch
40 through Solomon Islands with the South-east Trade
Wind, crossing the equator in about 158° E. After
passing through Solomon Islands, steer to the W to
Torres Strait via Great North-east Channel (10.9.3) and
thence to Darwin.
45 From Palau Islands some navigators take Saint
George's Channel, between New Ireland and New
Britain, see Admiralty Sailing Directions, instead of
passing through Solomon Islands, or again, Pioneer
Channel, between New Ireland and Solomon Islands,
50 may be used.
Hong Kong to Sydney
10.46.1
In the South-west Monsoon, from April to
55 September, four routes are available. Two pass into the
Pacific Ocean and run E of Australia; the other two lead
through the Eastern Archipelago and W and S of
Australia.
Directions for the route which passes into the Pacific
60 Ocean N of the Philippine Islands are given in 10.45.2 as
far as the Coral Sea. Thence, steer S to join the route
from Torres Strait (10.29) in about 15° S, 156° E.
For the Pacific Ocean route which passes S of the
Philippine Islands, follow the directions given in
65 10.44.1 as far as the Celebes Sea, and thence enter the
Pacific Ocean S of Mindanao, between Sarangani
Islands and Kepulauan Kawio. Thence make easting in
the Equatorial Counter-current as directed in 10.45.2,
and join the route, described above, S of Solomon
70 Islands or through Saint George's Channel.
245
10.46.2 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
For the routes passing W and S of Australia, pass
through the Eastern Archipelago either by the Eastern
Route (9.50.1) or by the Central Route (9.51.1). On
reaching the Indian Ocean proceed as directed in 9.121
to round Cape Leeuwin, and then as directed in
9.1.6-9.1.8.
10.46.2
In the North-east Monsoon, from October to
February, proceed either via Torres Strait (10.44.1) or
via Selat Sunda and a passage W and S of Australia
(10.42.6 and 9.121).
Hong Kong to Manila
10.47.1
In the North-east Monsoon (October to April), make
for the coast of Luzon at about Piedra Point, Cape
Bolinao. The current sets strongly to leeward, but
decreases near Luzon. From the latitude of Piedra
Point, steer S for Manila Bay, giving the coast dangers a
wide berth.
10.47.2
In the South-west Monsoon (May to September),
take every advantage of the wind shifting to make
southing towards Macclesfield Bank; then steer direct
for Manila Bay.
10.47.3
Pratas Reef, lying in the route between Manila and
Hong Kong, is a serious danger, especially in the North-
east Monsoon, when strong gales and thick clouds are
sometimes prevalent for weeks together; and as, in this
monsoon, vessels generally approach the reef from SE,
the greater number of wrecks have occured on this side.
See Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Hong Kong to Yokohama
10.48.1
During the North-east Monsoon (October to April)
work up the coast of China as far as Shibeishan Jiao,
taking advantage of the fact that the wind hauls to the N
at night and to the E during the day. From Shibeishan
Jiao, stand across for the S end of T'ai-wan and
work up on the E side of that island; a S-going set will be
felt until reaching O-luan Pi, after passing which the
Japan Current will be experienced setting N. Continue
N, to the W of Nansei Shoto as described below.
Towards the end of the North-east Monsoon, stand
across the South China Sea until near the coast of
Luzon, where the wind will be more E or even SE, when
tack and stand NNE along the E coast of T'ai-wan, and
W of all the groups of Nansei Shoto, with generally a
favourable current. Thence pass through one of the
channels S of Osumi Kaikyo, and from 50 to 80 miles off
the S coast of Japan in the strength of the Japan Current,
making the land about Omae Saki, to enter Uraga Suido.
10.48.2
During the South-west Monsoon, run up the China
coast as far as Dongyin Dao, thence steer to pass through
Tokara Gunto S of Akuseki Shima (in preference to
Osumi Kaikyo, where dense fogs will probably be
found, whilst farther seaward in the warm waters of the
Japan Current the atmosphere is bright and clear). The
course along the S coast of Japan is the same as in the
North-east Monsoon.
Hong Kong to Nagasaki
10.49.1
During the North-east Monsoon, follow the
directions for the Yokohama route (10.48.1) until N of
T'ai-wan, after which continue as direct as navigation
permits.
10.49.2
During the South-west Monsoon, follow the
directions in 10.48.2 as far as Dongyin Dao and thence
take a direct course to Nagasaki.
5
Hong Kong northward, to ports on the
coast of China
10.50.1
10 Except in crossing Taiwan Strait, there is no difficulty
in making this passage in the South-west Monsoon, but in
the North-east Monsoon a sailing vessel should be in
good condition for meeting rough weather and for
carrying sail.
15 The crossing of Taiwan Strait is attended with
considerable trouble at all times of the year, on account
of the strong, variable, and sometimes opposite currents
setting across the track. This is particularly noticable at
the change of monsoons. In the S and W parts of the
20 strait, a strong drift current setting to leeward (in both
monsoons) must be allowed for. See Admiralty Sailing
Directions.
10.50.2
During the North-east Monsoon, make the passage
25 either E of T'ai-wan so as to benefit from the Japan
Current and the diminished strength of the monsoon,
and to avoid the heavy short sea of Taiwan Strait; or
work up the coast of China taking advantage of every
favourable change of wind and tidal stream, and anchor
30 whenever possible, if conditions are unfavourable.
For the route E of T'ai-wan, work along the China
coast as far as Shibeishan Jiao to maintain as long as
practicable the advantage of the land wind at night, of
smoother water, and of the E-going tidal stream out of
35 the deep bays, which will generally be under the lee
when on the starboard tack. There are numerous
convenient anchorages should the wind blow too hard to
make way. Keep within 10 miles of the land, to avoid
being carried S by the monsoon drift current whilst
40 standing offshore; but as this cannot be done at night
without risk, anchor, if possible, in the evening, and
weigh between midnight and 0400, when the wind,
generally being more off the land, allows a good board on
the offshore tack. From Shibeishan Jiao stand across to
45 the S end of T'ai-wan, as by passing E of that island the
heavy short sea of Taiwan Strait is avoided, as well as the
constant S-going current.
After rounding the S end of T'ai-wan, off which there
is generally a troublesome sea, make short tacks if
50 requisite, and keep within the influence of the Japan
Current.
The North-east Monsoon does not blow with its full
strength on the E coast of T'ai-wan, but strong gales are
often experienced 20 miles to the E. If the wind declines
55 in strength, with less sea on the W board (particularly
between 0900 and 1500 or up to sunset), it is
advantageous to hug the coast as close as prudent; but
caution is requisite, for the coast is mountainous and
steep-to, and sudden loss of wind accompanied by swell
60 might be attended, if followed by calm, with imminent
danger, as there are no harbours. Stronger winds, with
much rain, are met as advance is made to the E during
the North-east Monsoon. If an offshore course is
maintained whilst E of T'ai-wan a constant succession
65 of bad weather may be expected, with strong winds and a
heavy sea.
Towards the close of the North-east Monsoon, and
still later, it is preferable to cross over towards Luzon
than to beat up to Shibeishan Jiao against fresh NE
70 breezes; therefore stand off on the port tack, clean full to
246
 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
the SE and pass through the SW-going current quickly,
and on nearing Luzon, as the wind becomes more E
(sometimes even from SE), tack NNE with a strong
favourable current and arrive E of T'ai-wan in less time
than it would have taken to fetch Shibeishan Jiao by 5 The eddy tidal streams generally carry vessels clear of
keeping along the coast of China.
Having weathered the N end of T'ai-wan, it is still
advisable to keep well to the E, and not approach the
coast of China until the parallel of 30° 30' N, is gained.
In case of being driven to the W, take cautious advantage 10
of the tidal streams through the S part of Zhoushan
Qundao.
Bound for Shantou, Xiamen, or the ports between
that place and Minjiang Kou, there is generally
difficulty in getting round Shibeishan Jiao, for the tidal 15
stream there is of no assistance. Advantage must
therefore be taken of the wind, which will probably draw
off the land after midnight, when, by being inshore, a
good board can be made, and possibly Biao Jiao reached.
For Haimen Wan and Qiwang Wan anchorages, see 20
Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Having reached Biao Jiao, the NE going stream assists
a vessel to round it, and the ebb out of Han Jiang is a
weather tide; if not going inside Nan'ao Dao try to get
along the S side of the island, and anchor in the bay W of 25
Nan Jiao, should the weather be too bad to proceed.
Both streams are strong off the bluff at the SE end of
Nan'ao Dao, and also off Shi Yu, in rounding which take
the first of the NE-going stream and the port tack.
Farther N, about Lishi Liedao, the NE-going stream 30
with strong winds causes a very uneasy sea. Jiangjun Ao
and Dingtai Wan are good stopping places for small
vessels; the latter should be preferred, though at the loss
of 2 or 3 miles, to anchorage in an exposed position in
Xiamen harbour entrance, as when NE winds freshen 35
there during the rising tide they are generally
accompanied by a mist, which obscures the entrance, and
the tidal stream makes it difficult to get to sea.
Weitou Wan, N of Xiamen, affords good shelter;
Shenhu Wan is not so good. The current in the monsoon 40
overcomes the tidal streams; and advantage must be
taken of every slant of wind, bearing in mind that it is
likely to draw off the land after midnight, and in the
event of anchoring for shelter this is the time to start,
should the wind moderate; by waiting for daylight 45
vessels lose their offing, and have to make an offshore
board at a loss. The fog is at times thick and soundings
must be taken, the bottom generally changing from sand
to mud as the shore is approached. There is fair
anchorage under Dazuo Yan, but not so good as that 50
under Yang Yu, and if the vessel is heading N or
anything E of it, the ebb from Meizhou Wan is of
assistance.
The most difficult part of the passage to Minjiang
Kou is from Nanri Dao (15 miles SW of Haitan Dao) to 55
Baiquan Liedao; sailing vessels should keep outside
Haitan Dao, and stretch over to the NW coast of
T'aiwan, where they have the advantage of a weather
tidal stream.
Off the coast of China N of Minjiang Kou, the 60
indraught during the rising tide must be considered.
There is good anchorage in a cove in the W island of
Dongyin Dao, but N of this sailing vessels (unless under
3-7 m draught) must keep off the coast in deep water.
The tidal streams afford but little assistance until 65
Zhoushan Qundao is reached; the NE-going stream
causes an uneasy sea in the shallow water, while the SW-
going stream has too much southing, unless the wind is
well from E. Nanjishan Liedao, and Beijishan Liedao,
about 10 miles to the NE, afford good shelter. 70
247
10.52.2
The route through the S channels of Zhoushan
Qundao is not usually taken by sailings ships. In
working through the N part of this archipelago,
advantage can be taken of the tidal streams.
the large islands, but caution is required to prevent
being set in amongst detached rocks.
10.50.3
During the South-west Monsoon, there is no
difficulty in making the N-bound coastwise passage
from Hong Kong, but the currents may be variable, see
Admiralty Sailing Directions.
Hong Kong or Manila to North America
and Panama
10.51
In all cases follow the Yokohama route
(10.48.1-10.48.2) and then take the routes given from
Yokohama onwards. References are 10.64.1 for
Columbia River, Vancouver, or Prince Rupert,
10.65.1-10.65.2 for San Francisco, and, for Panama,
10.65.1 as far as 150° W; thence direct.
Hong Kong or Manila to west coast of
South America
10.52.1
During the South-west Monsoon, (May to
September), the passage may be made either through
Bashi Channel or San Bernardino Strait.
If proceeding via Bashi Channel, continue as directed
in 10.48.1 past Yokohama and make easting thence
before standing S, joining a suitable route from Sydney
(10.5.2) as convenient.
The Pacific Ocean may also be reached in the South-
west Monsoon by San Bernardino Strait as described
below. When clear of the strait, make easting to join the
route from Bashi Channel as convenient; or steer to the
NE until in the westerlies and then make easting as
above.
A vessel intending the passage of San Bernardino
Strait should approach it through Verde Island Passage
and thence proceed to a position S of Marinduque
Island. From this position steer to make the NW point
of Masbate Island, to avoid being embayed with a SW
wind in Nabasgan Bay on the W coast of Burias Island.
A mid-channel course should be steered between Burias
Island and Masbate Island and when the SE point of
Burias Island is passed steer a NE course to pass N of
Ticao Island, giving San Miguel Island, off the N point
of Ticao Island a good berth on account of the strength
of the tidal stream near it.
If the wind is settled, steer for Naranjo Islands, and
thence pass midway between Capul Island and the
islands off the SE point of Luzon, proceeding out of the
strait by the channel S of San Bernardino Islets.
If the SW wind is not settled, it is well to wait at
anchor at San Jacinto, on the E side of Ticao Island, lest
calms or light winds should leave the vessel at the mercy
of the tides in the strait. The best time for leaving the
port is half-flood, for then a vessel is likely to get the first
of the ebb when she is near Naranjo Islands.
If in danger of being carried near Calantas Rock, it
would be well to make for the coast of Luzon, where
anchorage may be had, or to anchor on the bank in good
time. The navigation of the strait requires great care,
and an anchor should always be ready to let go.
10.52.2
During the North-east Monsoon (October to April),
proceed as directed in 10.44.1 as far as the Celebes Sea,
10.53.1 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
and then either take a route direct to the Pacific Ocean or
to the Coral Sea by Torres- Strait.
For the Pacific Ocean Route, cross the Celebes Sea to
enter the Pacific Ocean S of Mindanao, and then steer or
pass N of New Guinea and continue E between the
parallels of 2° N and 4° N as far as Gilbert Group.
Thence steer SE into the westerlies to join a route from
Sydney, see 10.5.1.
For the Torres Strait route, continue from the
Celebes Sea as directed in 10.44.1, Hong Kong to
Torres Strait. After clearing Torres Strait continue
along the S coast of New Guinea and Louisade
Archipelago until far enough E to cross the Trade Winds
into the westerlies to join a route from Sydney, see
10.5.1.
Shanghai coastwise to the southward
10.53.1
During the North-east Monsoon (October to April)
after passing Maan Liedao and Dongfushan (the E
island of Zhoushan Qundao), steer a good offshore
course, passing outside the outer islands, giving them a
good berth at night, and closing the land for a fix by day,
if necessary; for thick, hazy or rainy weather may always
be expected.
10.53.2
During the South-west Monsoon, (May to
September), although the constant adverse current
makes this a tedious passage, a vessel of moderate sailing
qualities can do it, as this monsoon is not steady in its
direction, and land and sea breezes prevail.
Fog is frequent in the early part of the season, and
renders caution necessary; it sometimes lifts near the
land.
S h a n g h a i to I n d i a n O c e a n
10.54.1
During the North-east Monsoon, take the coastwise
route towards Hong Kong (10.53.1) and pick up a route
to the Indian Ocean (10.42.1) proceeding either via
Singapore or direct through the Eastern Archipelago.
10.54.2
During the South-west Monsoon, steer direct for a
position in 15° N, 132° E, to the E of the Philippine
Islands, to pick up the route described in 10.68.2,
Yokohama to the Indian Ocean.
ROUTES FROM MANILA
10.58
For routes from Manila to ports in North or South
America, see 10.51, 10.52.1-10.52.2.
M a n i l a to S i n g a p o r e
10.58.1
In all seasons, steer to pass N of the central dangers of
the South China Sea for lies Catwick, thence proceed
direct to Pulau Aur and to Singapore. See directions for
Hong Kong to Singapore, in 10.43.1.
Shanghai to Nagasaki
10.55.1
Caution is necessary in the vicinity of Socotra Rock,
which lies on the route. See Admiralty Sailing
5 Directions.
10.55.2
During the North-east Monsoon (October to March),
with the wind E of N, make northing at once, taking
advantage of tidal streams. As advance is made to the N,
10 the wind usually draws round through N to NW. Make
allowance for the current, which then sets to the SE or E.
10.55.3
In the South-west Monsoon (March to September),
during the E and SE winds which prevail from March to
15 June, make easting or southing, even when a fair wind
occurs, for it is sure to be of short duration; and the
tendency of the prevailing wind being to keep a vessel on
the starboard tack, there is always a probability, during
these months, when the current sets to the NE, of being
20 set towards the islands fringing the SW coast of Korea.
If uncertain of the position when near Me Shima, in
Danjo Gunto, Tori Shima, or Goto Retto, make these
islands in daylight.
After June, with a steady South-west Monsoon and a
25 fair wind, steer from the estuary of Chang Jiang a course
to pass between Danjo Gunto and Tori Shima.
The direct course from Jigu Jiao leads midway
between Tori Shima and Goto Retto; but it should not
be taken, as the branch of the Japan Current, which sets
30 through Korea Strait, has to be crossed, and vessels have
been carried by it even N of the S end of Goto Retto.
Shanghai to Yokohama
10.56.1
35 During the North-east Monsoon (October to March),
if the wind on departure is to the E of N, as it frequently
is in the monsoon, make northing; and when the wind
draws round to the NW, steer as directly as possible
round the S end of Japan; and thence in the strength of
40 the Japan Current.
10.56.2
In the South-west Monsoon (May to September),
make easting or southing as directed in 10.55.3, and then
proceed direct round the S end of Japan and in the
45 strength of the Japan Current.
Shanghai to ports in North America
10.57
Proceed as directed in 10.56 to Yokohama, and then as
50 directed in 10.64.1 to Columbia River, Vancouver, or
Prince Rupert; or 10.65.1-10.65.2 to San Francisco.
Manila to Ho Chi Minh City (Sai Gon)
10.59.1
In the North-east Monsoon (October to March) take a
direct passage across the South China Sea, allowing for
65 the current which sets with the wind.
10.59.2
In the South-west Monsoon (April to September),
sailing vessels will find the voyage long and trying
whichever route they adopt.
70 The following route has been recommended.
248
 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
On leaving Manila Bay take Verde Island Passage,
pass down the E side of Mindoro Island and the W coast
of Panay Island, cross the Sulu Sea passing out by
Balabac Strait, and work down the NW coast of Borneo
to make westing; then cross the South China Sea passing
E of Pulau-pulau Natuna.
Manila to Hong Kong or Xiamen
10.60.1
In the North-east Monsoon, there is a choice between
two routes, W or E of T'ai-wan, if bound for Xiamen;
for Hong Kong, work up the coast of Luzon then
proceed as directed in 10.34.1.
For the passage W of T'ai-wan, keep near the coast to
Cape Bojeador, and then work N to O-luan Pi, and
thence along the S W and W coasts of T'ai-wan until able
to stand across Taiwan Strait to Xiamen.
For the passage E of T'ai-wan, if the monsoon is well
set in, it might be advisable to stand to the E, N of
Luzon, and work to the N with the benefit of the Japan
Current, passing E of, and round the N, of T'ai-wan.
Thence, allowing for current, steer to make the China
coast N of the destination.
10.60.2
In the South-west Monsoon, proceed direct, making
allowance for a lee current.
Manila to Iloilo
10.61.1
In the North-east Monsoon (October to March), pass
through Verde Island Passage and Tablas Strait, and
continue S along the W coast and round the S end of
Panay Island to Iloilo.
10.61.2
In the South-west Monsoon (April to September),
proceed as above as far as Dumali Point, and then steer
to pass S of Simara Island and between Tablas Island
and Romblon Island. Thence pass through Jintotolo
Channel between Jintotolo Island and Zapoto Islands,
and then, turning S, proceed along the E coast of Panay
to Iloilo.
ROUTES FROM JAPAN
Yokohama to Columbia River, Vancouver,
or Prince Rupert
10.64.1
Cross 167° E in about 42° N, being about 30 miles N
of that position in August and the same distance S of it in
January. From this position, steer almost due E, with a
fair wind and favourable current, so as to cross the
meridian of 150° W in about 44° N, keeping a little to the
N throughout the voyage during the summer, and to the
S in the winter. From 150° W proceed direct to
destination, still with a fair wind.
10.64.2
The tidal streams, on the approach to the coast of
Vancouver Island, cause a general set towards the land,
and indraught on the flood into all sounds. Sailing
vessels, therefore, when making Juan de Fuca Strait
during the winter especially during November and
December, and experiencing E and SE winds, which
then prevail, should try to hold a position SW of
Tatoosh Island, and on no account to open up the
entrance to the strait until opportunity occurs of getting
well inside. See Admiralty Sailing Directions.
10.66
Manila to Cebu
Route
10.62
In both monsoons, take the South-west Monsoon
route for Iloilo (10.61.2) as far as Jintotolo Island, and
then proceed to Malapascua Island and thence S to
Cebu.
10 Manila to Indian Ocean and Australia
10.63.1
In the North-east Monsoon (October to March),
follow the directions in 10.58.1 to Singapore, and then
take the appropriate route onward, see Chapter 9.
75 If not calling at Singapore and bound to the S through
the Eastern Archipelago, proceed, after passing lies
Catwick as in 10.58.1, between Pulau-pulau Anambas
and Pulau-pulau Natuna, and thence as directed in
Chapter 9, joining the route from Singapore for the
20 passage onward through the Indian Ocean.
10.63.2
In the South-west Monsoon (April to September),
proceed as directed in 10.44.1 as far as the Celebes Sea,
and thence either continue on the Central route from the
25 South China Sea to the Indian Ocean, see 10.42.4, or
cross the Celebes Sea to pass through Selat Bangka, off
the NE end of Sulawesi, into the Molucca Sea. Thence
continue S to the Ceram Sea, Selat Manipa and Banda
Sea, to Selat Ombai and the Indian Ocean.
30 In both cases join the route described in 9.125 if
bound to the Cape of Good Hope; or if bound to other
ports join, or steer to join as directly as possible, the
appropriate route from Singapore.
To Torres Strait follow the directions given in 10.44.1
35 from Verde Island Passage onwards.
An alternative route to the E coast of Australia is to
pass into the Pacific Ocean through San Bernardino
Strait (10.52.1). Thence proceed SE, making easting
until able to cross the equator in about 158° E, and pass
40 through Solomon Islands; thence continue onward to
the S to join the route from Torres Strait to Sydney
(10.29) in about 15° S, 156° E.
Yokohama to San Francisco
so 10.65.1
From April to September, follow the directions in
10.64.1 as far as 44° N, 150° W, and thence proceed as
directly as possible to San Francisco.
10.65.2
55 From October to March, winter conditions demand a
route more to the S though rather longer. First steer to
cross the meridian of 165° E in 40° N, and thence along
that parallel as far as 140° W or 135° W; thence proceed
direct to San Francisco.
60
Yokohama to Honolulu
10.66
65 Steer to cross the meridians of 160° E in 41° 30' N, of
180° in 43° 30' N, and of 160° W in 40° N; thence keep to
the SE to a position in 35° N, 153° W, and thence
proceed direct to Honolulu, making allowance, on
approaching the land, for a W-going current running at
70 the rate of about 1 knot.
249
10.67.1 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
Yokohama to Singapore
10.67.1
From October to April, proceed first to pass S of
Tanega Shima and through Tokara Kaikyo, between the
N end of Tokara Gunto and the S end of Osumi Gunto;
thence steer to the SW to join the coastwise route from
Shanghai to the S (10.53.1), in about 28° N.
10.67.2
From May to September, two routes are appropriate,
W and E of the Philippine Islands. For the former, pass
E of all the groups of Nansei Shoto, and thence through
Bashi Channel. From Bashi Channel make for lies
Catwick and thence to Pulau Aur.
The passage from Pulau Aur to Singapore is
described in 10.43.1, Hong Kong to Singapore.
For the passage E of the Philippine Islands, first steer
to the S passing to the E of Nanpo Shoto, the chain of
islands lying S of the SE point of Honshu. Thence make
to the SSW for Selat Jailolo, passing about 300 miles E
of the Philippine Islands. Thence pass S through the
Ceram Sea and Selata Manipa into the Banda Sea;
thence W through the Flores Sea and the Java Sea; and
finally N through one of the straits between Sumatera
and Borneo to Singapore.
Directions for the straits and seas of the Eastern
Archipelago are given in Chapter 9.
Yokohama to Indian Ocean
10.68.1
From October to April, follow the directions in
10.67.1 to Singapore; then proceed to the Indian Ocean
through either Malacca Strait or Selat Sunda.
If not calling at Singapore, proceed as above, but after
passing lies Catwick, pass between Pulau-pulau
Anambas and Pulau-pulau Natuna to Selat Gelasa or
Selat Karimata and thence to Selat Sunda. See Chapter
9.
10.68.2
From May to September, either take the route W of
the Philippine Islands described in 10.67.1, calling at
Singapore or otherwise, as for October to April; or
follow the route E of the Philippine Islands (10.67.2),
leaving as necessary to enter the Indian Ocean through
one of the straits between Selat Ombai and Selat Sunda.
See Chapter 9.
Yokohama to Sydney
Direct routes
10.69.1
In the North-east Monsoon, steer to cross 160° E in
20° N, and thence to cross the equator in 168° E. Thence
steer to pass E of Vanuatu and Nouvelle-Caledonie, and
thence direct to Sydney, passing N of Middleton Reef.
Alternatively, after crossing the equator, pass
between the Solomon Islands and Santa Cruz Islands,
and then W of Bampton Reefs; and thence proceed to
Sydney, making the Australian coast S of Sandy Cape
and thence continue S along the coast.
10.69.2
In the South-west Monsoon, first make easting N of
35° N until in about 170° E; thence stand S through the
North-east Trade Wind to cross the equator in 173° E.
Thence pass E of Vanuatu and of Nouvelle-Caledonie,
and thence to Sydney as in 10.69.1.
Routes via Guam
10.69.3
If intending to call at Guam, steer to the S, passing E
of Nanp5 Shoto, and E or W of the Marianas, according
5 to conditions prevailing at the time.
From Guam proceed as follows according to
Monsoon.
In the North-east Monsoon, make southing with the
North-east Trade Wind, and pass through Bougainville
JO Strait, or between Solomon Island and Santa Cruz
Islands.
From Bougainville Strait proceed to a position in
about 15° S, 156° E to join the route from Torres Strait
to Sydney described in 10.29. From the position E of
15 Solomon Islands, proceed as in the alternative route in
10.69.1.
In the South-east Monsoon, pass Solomon Islands as
above and make enough easting to ensure a long board
across the Coral Sea; make, and keep along the
20 Australian coast S of Sandy Cape, where the prevailing
wind will be found to be W at this time of the year.
Yokohama to Hong Kong, Xiamen, etc
25 10.70.1
During the North-east Monsoon (October to March),
stand to the SW across the Japan Current as far as 28° N,
135° E, thence N of Tukuno Shima, one of Amami
Gunto, and after passing 15 Tori Shima steer for
30 Dongyin Dao and down the coast of China (10.53.1).
10.70.2
During the South-west Monsoon (April to
September), steer SE from Uraga Suido to cross the
parallel of 30° N, in about 145° E. Thence passing E of
35 Ogasawara Gunto and E and S of Kazan Retto, cross the
meridian of 140° E in 21° N. Thence shape a direct
course to pass N of Luzon and straight to Hong Kong,
making allowance for the NE-going set in the South
China Sea.
40
Yokohama to Shanghai
10.71
It was formerly recommended that the best sailing
route was through Seto Naikai, avoiding the strength of
45 the Japan Current by keeping near the coast between
Yokohama and Kii Suido, and sailing as direct as
possible after passing through Kanmon Kaiyko and
Korea Strait.
Owing to traffic and other factors, the route through
50 Naikai Seto is probably no longer feasible without
detailed local knowledge. Either a coastwise route S of
Japan and through Osumi Kaikyo, taking advantage of
local counter-currents, see Admiralty Sailing
Directions, or an ocean route S of the strongest part of
55 the Japan Current, seem preferable.
Yokohama to Hakodate
60 Winter route
10.72.1
In winter (November to March) make the passage as
close inshore as safety will allow, as the wind is usually
off the land and there is smooth water near the coast. In
65 the event of encountering a NE gale, the best course is to
make for the nearest sheltered anchorage, if any such is
available. The frequent snowstorms often obscuring the
land, and the irregularity of the currents, render it
necessary to use every precaution when navigating this
70 part of the coast.
250
 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
Summer route
10.72.2
In summer (May to September) keep offshore and
take advantage of the Japan Current. Fogs will usually
be met with when as far N as Kinkasan To. Close the
land to the S of Shiriya Saki and round that promontory
at a distance of not less than 2 miles to avoid 0 Ne.
In thick weather, when the land about Shiriya Saki
has not been seen, a rise in the temperature of the water,
the presence of floating debris such as plants, trees and
driftwood in the sea, or heavy tide-rips, may assist in
determining that the vessel is to the N of Shiriya Saki
and in the influence of the E-going current through
Tsugaru KaikyS.
If proceeding direct for Hakodate from the E entrance
to Tsugaru Kaikyo, a vessel may, after passing not less
than 2 miles off Shiriya Saki steer for Esan Misaki, so as
to take advantage of the cold W-going stream along the S
coast of Hokkaido, remembering that the NE-going
current is sometimes found close inshore near Shiokobi
Misaki.
D i r e c t i o n s for T s u g a r u K a i k y o
10.72.3
Approaching Tsugaru Kaikyo from E, the adverse
current will be avoided by keeping near the shore, giving
0 Ne and the dangers off Oma Saki a berth.
Make Shiriya Saki bearing about 310°, and pass it at a
distance of not less than 2 miles; when N of it, keep
towards the S shore to avoid the current and to be in a
position to anchor if becalmed. By keeping towards this
shore, a vessel may possibly be drifted for a considerable
distance by the W-going stream, while the NE-going
current is running strongly in the middle of the strait.
Wait at anchor SE of Oma Saki for a favourable
opportunity to cross the strait, and as the winds during
summer are generally light from the SW for a
considerable period, freshening a little when the W-
going stream makes, this is the proper time to weigh.
ROUTES FROM ISLANDS IN NORTH PACIFIC OCEAN
General notes and cautions
10.74
In this sub-section only the routes from Honolulu are
given in detail. From other islands of the North Pacific
Ocean, the most favourable route to be taken can be
ascertained by consulting Diagrams (1.13a) and (1.13b)
(World Climatic Charts), Diagram 10.132 (Sailing Ship
Routes), and the Routeing Charts (5127-5128).*
North Pacific Islands (except Hawaii), to
Asia or North and South America
10.75
Diagram (10.132) shows that little difficulty will be
experienced in deciding on the most profitable route for
a vessel W-bound to any port in Asia, the Eastern
Archipelago, the Indian Ocean, or Japan; a number of
routes from North or South America and from Australia
pass near the islands and can be joined at a convenient
position.
For a vessel bound to the E, the general principle is to
stand N, or S, through the Trade Winds to reach the belt
*For cautions on Areas to be Avoided, see 7.49.
10.76
Proceeding from Hakodate to the W, against SW
winds, keep near the shore when N of Yagoshi Misaki,
and if unable to round it, anchor with a kedge about 2
miles NE of it, weighing again when the next W-going
5 stream makes.
With a light wind a sailing vessel might not clear the
strait in one tide, in which case it would be better to wait
at anchor, E of Shirakami Misaki, and take the whole of
the following tide to get sufficiently to the W rather than
10 run any risk of being swept back through the strait by the
current.
Approaching Tsugaru KaikyS from SW during foggy
weather, guard against being carried by the current to
the N past the entrance; if the weather is clear when
15 nearing Nyudo Saki, it might be as well to sight it.
If the weather thickens when nearing Nyudo Saki,
good though open anchorage over a sandy bottom will
be found to the S of it; but to the N the bottom is rocky
though anchorage is still possible.
20 For currents, tidal streams, and ice, see Admiralty
Sailing Directions.
Sailing vessels, passing through Tsugaru Kaikyo,
particularly to the W, should have a kedge anchor and
300 metres of hawser ready for immediate use, and keep
25 the shore close aboard.
Nagasaki to China coast
10.73
For Shanghai, steer as direct a course as
30 circumstances will allow, keeping rather to windward of
the course as, except near the coast of Japan, the drift of
the current is usually to leeward. Give Socotra Rock
(10.55.1) a good berth.
For Hong Kong, Shantou, Xiamen and ports in the
35 vicinity, in the North-east Monsoon (October to April),
steer to make the coast of China a little S of Zhoushan
Qundao, and thence sail coastwise (10.53.1). In the
South-west Monsoon (May to September), first stand
across to the coast of China and thence make to the S,
40 coastwise.
of W winds as quickly as possible; a favourable current
may be experienced in the area of W winds. E-bound
passages across the Pacific Ocean that may conveniently
50 be joined are given in 10.64.1 and 10.65.1-10.65.2 from
Yokohama, and 10.5 from Sydney; or by making to the
S across the routes from Sydney, to join the route across
the South Pacific described in 10.2.3.
55 North Pacific islands (except Hawaii) to
other North Pacific islands
10.76
W-bound, no difficulty should be experienced as a fair
wind should be carried and except in the Equatorial
60 Counter-current (4° N to 8° N), favourable current
should assist the passage.
Proceeding E-bound to Honolulu, stand N through
the Trade Winds as far as about 40° N or until the W
winds are met. Cross the 180th meridian in about 43° N,
65 and 160° W in 40° N; thence keep SE to a position in
about 35° N, 153° W, and thence proceed direct to
Honolulu. See the directions from Yokohama given in
10.66.
To the other North Pacific islands the direct mean
70 course can be steered over short distances, but this
251
10.77 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
usually means working E against the North Equatorial
Current.
In most cases, it is probably best to stand S or SE into
the Equatorial Counter-current, and thence work E
until able to fetch the destination, making allowance for
a W-going set as the vessel makes to the N.
North Pacific islands to South Pacific
islands or to Sydney
10.77
The longitude of most of the principal island groups
of the South Pacific Ocean is E, or little or nothing to the
W, of that of similar groups of the North Pacific Ocean
(except the Hawaiian Islands). Therefore the first
objective, in all passages, must be to make easting while
still N of the equator which is usually crossed between
168° E and 173° E. Probably the most advantageous
passage to reach this objective is to stand S, or as much to
the SE as can be made on the port tack, until the region
of the Equatorial Counter-current is reached (between
4° N, and 8° N); then work E until able to stand across
the equator as stated above. From the equator proceed S
as follows:
Bound to Solomon Islands, Vanuatu or Nouvelle-
Caledonie, proceed direct.
Bound to Sydney, follow the relevant directions in
10.69.1-10.69.3 from Yokohama.
Bound to Fiji, pass down the W side of Tuvalu and
then direct.
Bound to Samoa, stand S as far as the latitude of the
Fijian Islands if necessary, weathering them if
possible until able to make Samoa on the
starboard tack.
Bound to islands E of Samoa, it is best to stand S
through the Trade Winds into the westerlies;
then run down easting until the meridian of the
island to which bound is reached. Then re-enter
the Trade Winds and proceed to destination.
North Pacific islands to Torres Strait
10.78
At all times of the year the route through the Solomon
Islands may be taken, following generally the directions
in 10.45.2 modified as necessary, as far as the equator, in
accordance with the position of the island of departure,
eg from the E or W groups of islands.
In the North-east Monsoon season (October to April)
as good, or even a better passage may be made by
steering direct to pass through Selat Jailolo and joining
the route from Hong Kong (10.44.1) in the Ceram Sea.
General remarks on winds, currents and
sailing passages around Hawaiian Islands
10.79
With regard to winds, the North-east Trade Wind
seems to divide at Cape Kumukahi, part following the
coast to the NW around Upolu Point, where it loses its
force, the other part following the SE coast around Ka
Lae, where it also loses its force.
On the W coast of Hawaii the sea breeze sets in about
0900 and continues until after sunset, when the land
breeze springs up.
Sailing vessels coming from the W, bound to ports on
the windward or SE side of Hawaii, should pass close to
Upolu Point and keep near the coast, as the wind is
generally much lighter than offshore. Those from the
W, bound to ports on the E side of Hawaii should keep
well to the N until clear of Alenuihaha Channel.
On account of the current, which nearly always sets to
the N along the W coast of Hawaii, it is advisable for
sailing vessels to make the land S of their port, as during
calms and light airs a vessel is liable to drift to the N.
With regard to navigation, Alenuihaha Channel,
between Hawaii and Maui and Kahoolawe Islands, is 26
5 miles wide and clear of dangers. The North-east Trade
Wind, which predominates throughout the year,
frequently blows through the channel with great
strength, and there is also a strong current setting W;
but, during calms, there is at times an E-going set of
10 about 1 knot which during 'kona' winds (reversals of the
Trade Wind) may increase to 2 or 3 knots.
Vessels from any of the W ports of Hawaii are
therefore recommended to keep close in under the lee of
the island until reaching Upolu Point, when they will be
15 enabled to fetch across to Alalakeiki Channel on the W
side of Maui. Those from the N, bound to Hilo, will
probably find it impossible to weather Upolu Point from
the W side of Maui, but on getting under the lee of
Hawaii the Trade Wind fails until reaching the S point
20 of the island, when they will have to beat against wind
and current along the SE coast.
Honolulu to Tahiti
10.80
25 Stand first to the N of the Hawaiian Islands, and then
make easting in the North-east Trade Wind, cross the
equator well to the E, and then proceed SW in the
South-east Trade Wind to Tahiti.
30 Honolulu to Fiji, Australia, and New
Zealand
10.81
For Fiji, proceed as directly as navigation permits,
with a fair Trade Wind.
35 For Australia and New Zealand, take the above route
to Fiji, and then follow the directions in 10.19 and 10.20
to Australia or New Zealand, but leave the route to Fiji
in about 170° W to 175° W, and proceed direct in the
latter case.
40 Except when bound to Auckland, owing to the
prevalence of W winds off the New Zealand coast, it is
best to pass down the W coast of New Zealand, and
through Cook Strait for ports in North Island (if
conditions are favourable) or round South Island and N
45 along the E coast.
Honolulu to China, Japan, or Philippine
Islands
10.82
50 The routes described in articles 10.92 to 10.95, from
San Francisco to these destinations, pass close S of
Hawaii, and should be picked up at any convenient
position between 160° W and 170° W.
55 Honolulu to San Francisco
10.83
Throughout the year, first steer due N before turning
E on reaching the steady W winds. The turning point
varies in latitude, being farthest N in August and
60 farthest S in November and December. The ensuing
routes are roughly as follows.
In August, turn E in approximately 40° N, and steer
along that parallel to 150° W. Thence proceed direct to
destination.
65 In June and July, turn to the NE in 35° N to 36° N,
and steer on a slightly curving course to cross 150° W in
approximately 39° N, and then proceed direct.
In May, September and October turn to the NE in
about 30° N, and steer on a curving course to cross
70 150° W in 37|° N to 38° N, and then proceed direct.
252
 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
In March and April, turn to the NE in 26° N to 27° N
and steer on a curving course to cross 150° W in about
36^° N, and then proceed direct.
In January and February, turn to the NE in 25° N to
26° N, and steer on a curving course to cross 150° W in
about 33" N, and then proceed direct.
In November and December, turn to the NE in about
24° N, and steer on a curving course to cross 150° W in
32° N to 32|° N, and then proceed direct.
Note. The curving course referred to above can best
be understood by referring to Diagram (10.132).
Honolulu to North and Central America
between San Francisco and Panama
10.84
Proceed N as directed in 10.83, but turn E instead of
NE. Make easting as directly as possible, gradually
ROUTES FROM PRINCE RUPERT, VANCOUVER OR COLUMBIA RIVER
Prince Rupert, Juan de Fuca Strait or
Columbia River to Honolulu and
Yokohama
10.86
From Prince Rupert, stand S through Hecate Strait,
and from Juan de Fuca Strait or Astoria, Columbia
River, stand seaward to make a safe offing, but keeping
as close inshore as prudence dictates, to avoid the heavy
seas experienced farther out. Proceed S until within
about 300 miles NW of San Francisco, and thence
proceed direct to Honolulu. W of Honolulu, the route is
seasonal.
From May to November, get on to the parallel of
20° N, and run W on it as far as the meridian of 180°.
Thence steer to cross the meridian of 160° E in 25° N,
and thence for Yokohama, allowing for the NE-going set
of the Japan Current.
During the winter, from December to April, a vessel
may have to keep farther S to get the strength of the
Trade Wind for the run to the W after leaving Honolulu.
The directions given in 10.92, from San Francisco,
should be followed, according to date, after running to
the W.
An alternative route for all seasons is to make SW
from Honolulu to join one of the seasonal routes from
San Francisco to Yokohama. See 10.92.
Prince Rupert, Juan de Fuca Strait or
Columbia River to Sydney
10.87
From Prince Rupert, stand S until reaching the
North-east Trade Wind, passing on either side of Queen
Charlotte Islands.
From Juan de Fuca Strait, or from Astoria, Columbia
River, stand SW at once to pick up the Trade Wind.
Then proceed as directly as possible, crossing the
equator in about 170° W, and passing W of the Fiji
Islands and SE of Nouvelle-Caledonie, from June to
August, but at other times of the year, crossing the
equator between 150° W and 155° W, and passing S of
the Tongan and Fijian island groups. Make the
Australian coast S of Sandy Cape. See 10.69.1.
10.88
altering course to ESE after reaching 150° W to 140° W,
depending on destination, the latter to the more S ports.
Join the route from San Francisco (10.98) at a
convenient position.
Honolulu to west coast of South America
or to Cabo de Hornos
10.85
10 The most important objective must be to make
easting as soon as possible so as to be able to stand SE to
join one of the routes from San Francisco to South
American ports (10.99 or 10.100) or the route from San
Francisco to Cabo de Hornos (10.101). In any case it
appears advisable to join these routes N of the equator,
where the Equatorial Counter-current is available if
getting too far W on the passage S.
Prince Rupert, Juan de Fuca Strait or
Columbia River to San Francisco and South
America
10.88
30 The following route differs in some degree from the
route recommended by the United States Naval
Oceanographic Office, which will be found in 10.99 to
10.101, routes from San Francisco to South American
ports.
35 For San Francisco, at all seasons keep as near the
shore as is prudent, in order to avoid the heavy sea felt
farther out.
If bound from Vancouver to Valparaiso in this season
stand down the coast, keeping at about 100 miles from it
40 until near the latitude of San Francisco, and from thence
pass W of, and in sight of Isla de Guadalupe, where in all
probability the North-east Trade Wind will be met
with; thence steer to sight lie Clipperton, passing W of
it; in about this latitude the North-east Trade Wind will
45 be lost.
The belt of variable wind and calms, which at this
season, on the meridian of 120° W, is 250 to 350 miles
wide, will here be entered, and it may not be possible to
cross the equator much to windward of 118° W. Every
50 effort should be made not to cross farther than that to the
W, as the result would be that the vessel would not
weather Henderson Island or Pitcairn Island, in the
vicinity of which light baffling winds from S to SE
would be experienced.
55 In all probability at this time of year the South-east
Trade Wind will be met between 5° N and 3° N; the
higher latitude during the early winter (November and
December), and the lower latitude towards March,
when the ship should be kept full, making, as nearly as
60 the wind will permit, a course of 180°.
In about 6° S the Trade Winds generally become
more E in direction, sometimes hauling N of E. Cross
the parallel of 20° S in 124° W, and the parallel of 35° S
on the meridian of 120° W; thence cross the meridians of
65 110° W in 39° S, 100° W in 40° S, 90° W in 39° S and
thence proceed direct, S of Isla Robinson Crusoe to
Valparaiso. From Valparaiso to Callao steer N along the
coast. Calms and variable winds will be experienced in
the vicinity of 30° S, settling into the NW quarter as the
70 vessel gets more to the S. See also 10.99.
253
10.89 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
For South American'ports from April to September, a
course farther W may be pursued, passing the latitude of
San Francisco in about 129° W. Thence keep farther
from the land to avoid the calms and light variable winds
experienced at this season along the coast of lower
California and in the Gulf of Panama. After meeting the
North-east Trade Wind in about 30° N, 127° W, stand
to the S on or near the meridian of 125° W, not only to
avoid the calms above mentioned, but also the
hurricanes which during August and September are
liable to be met with E of that meridian. Occasionally,
but rarely, these storms are met with W of 125° W.
The North-east Trade Wind will be lost at this season
in 11 ° N or 12° N, and the belt of doldrums will be found
ROUTES FROM SAN FRANCISCO
San Francisco to Prince Rupert, Juan de
Fuca Strait or Columbia River
10.89
From November to April, during the bad weather
season, the vessels should at once be taken well out to
sea. This will be easy, as the wind comes most often from
NW. When far enough off to have nothing to fear from
SW or NW winds, make as much northing as possible.
To the N of the parallel of Cape Mendocino, SW winds
prevail, enabling vessels to finish the voyage without
difficulty, but the land should be made 20 to 30 miles S
of the port.
From April to November, the fine weather season, the
wind almost invariably blows from between NW and
NE. After leaving San Francisco run about 200 miles
offshore, and then make to the N, profiting by every shift
of wind, and always standing on the most favourable
tack. It would be well not to approach the land until up
to the parallel of the port unless the vessel can fetch her
port, or nearly so without tacking. If bound to Prince
Rupert it would be well not to approach the land until
nearly abreast Langara Island, at the NW extreme of
Queen Charlotte Island. Hecate Strait, between Queen
Charlotte Island and the mainland, may also be taken.
San Francisco to Unimak pass, Aleutian
Islands, and reverse
10.90
From San Francisco to Unimak Pass, the tracks for
sailing vessels recommended by the United States Pilot
charts for May until October are as follows:
In May and June, make W from San Francisco to
145° W, and thence proceed direct to Unimak Pass.
In July, August and September, continue to 155° W
before turning to the N. Similarly, in October continue
to 158° W.
From Unimak Pass to San Francisco proceed as
directly as possible.
San Francisco to Honolulu
10.91
At all times of the year the route to China and Japan
passes closely S of the Hawaiian Islands, and is therefore
nearly directly for Honolulu. On leaving San Francisco
run to the SW for the North-east Trade Wind; from
June to December clear the coast as soon as possible,
steering about 266° to avoid the calms E of 128° W. Near
the Hawaiian Islands the Trade Wind may possibly veer
to E or even SE, particularly from October to May;
approach the land from ENE, when all local winds will
to be not so wide as during the winter. The South-east
Trade Wind will, at this season, be met with in about
8° N, and if, as is most likely to be the case at first, the
wind be well to the S, stand to the E in order to recover
some of the ground lost by keeping farther W in the
North-east Trade Wind. Try to cross the equator in
between 118° W and 120° W, and soon after crossing,
the wind will haul more to the E, when stand to the S
to weather Ducie Island and reach the parallel of
10 40° S before making easting, so as to fall in with the
NW winds, as calms and variable winds are met with
N of that parallel. After passing the meridian of
90° W haul up for Isla Robinson Crusoe and thence for
Valparaiso.
be fair. When making a landfall remember that the
currents often run at the rate of 20 miles per day, and
that calms and baffling winds are common to leeward of
the islands.
25 See General remarks on winds, currents and sailing
passages around the Hawaiian Islands in 10.79.
San Francisco to Yokohama
30 10.92
Proceed as directed in 10.91 but pass S of Hawaii.
Then stand to the W between the parallels of 15° N and
20° N, being to the N in the summer, and to the S in the
winter. On reaching the meridian of 160° E, proceed as
35 follows:
From January to April, stand on to the W on the
former course, until reaching the meridian of 150° E,
and thence curve gradually round to the WNW, NW
and finally N; pass about 60 miles to the W of Ogasawara
40 Gunto and W of the other islands of Nanp5 Shoto
steering N to destination.
In May and June, make to the WNW at once, so as to
cross the meridian of 150° E between 23° N and 24° N;
thence proceed direct to destination, passing about 200
45 miles E of Ogasawara Gunto.
From July to December, leave the track across the
Pacific Ocean in 163° E instead of 160° E, and set a
course as directly as possible to Yokohama.
Alternatively, some navigators recommend standing
50 for Yokohama on reaching the 180th meridian; but this
is not a very usual practice.
At all times of the year, allowance must be made for
the Japan Current, setting across the track during the
latter part of the voyage.
55
San Francisco to north part of China Sea
10.93
Follow the directions given in 10.92 as far as 160° E,
60 and thence stand slightly to the N to clear the most N of
the Mariana Islands, and then pass through Bashi
Channel to destination. For an alternative route in the
North-east Monsoon see 10.60.1. See also 10.95 for the
passage via Manila.
65
San Francisco to Shanghai or Nagasaki
10.94
Follow the directions given in 10.93 across the Pacific
Ocean, but on arriving in about 135° E, make as directly
70 as possible for either destination.
254
 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
San Francisco to South China Sea
10.95
From October to March, in the North-east Monsoon,
follow the directions given in 10.93 as far as Bashi
Channel, and then proceed S along the W coast of Luzon
if bound for Manila. For Ho Chi Minh City, proceed
direct across the South China Sea allowing for the
current which sets with the wind. For Singapore,
proceed as directed in 10.58.1.
From April to September, in the South-west
Monsoon, leave the W-bound track (10.92) across the
Pacific Ocean in 160° E, and steer to cross the meridian
of 150° E in 15° N. Thence, passing S of the Mariana
Islands, stand directly for San Bernardino Strait or for
Surigao Strait; and thence through the Philippine
Islands for Manila, Iloilo, etc.
From Mindoro Strait or Verde Island Passage
proceed as directed in 10.58.1 for Singapore,
10.59.1-10.59.2 for Ho Chi Minh City or
10.60.1-10.60.2 for Hong Kong or Xiamen.
San Francisco to Australian ports south of
Brisbane
10.96
The routes usually followed are seasonal, after taking
a direct course from San Francisco through the North-
east Trade Wind to about 10° N, 145° W. Thence, in
June, July and August, steer a direct course passing N of
Fiji Islands and S of Nouvelle-Caledonie to Brisbane or,
making the coast S of Sandy Cape, to Sydney. From
Sydney, continue S as directed in 9.160, 10.4.1, and
10.4.2.
From September to May, steer a direct course from
10° N, 145° W to cross the equator in 152° W in
December, January and February; in 150° W from
March to June; and in 152° W to 153° W in September,
October and November.
At whatever point the equator is crossed, cross the
parallel of 10° S near 155° W, and thence pass S of
Tonga Islands; cross the 180th meridian in 24° S to
25° S, and 160° E in 26° S to 27° S. Thence proceed to
destination, passing N of Middleton Reef, if bound to
Sydney making the coast S of Sandy Cape. See 10.69.1.
Alternative seasonal routes were recommended by
French authorities as follows:
From January to July, cross the parallel of 10° N in
143° W, and the equator in 148° W. In January,
February and March no calms will be found between the
North-east and South-east Trade Winds. In April, May
and June there will be only about 2 per cent of chances of
calms in this region. From the equator steer for a
position in 10° S, 155° W, and continue thence as
directed above for September to June.
In July, August and September, steer to 10° N,
148° W, and cross the equator between 150°W and
153° W. In this season, and if the precaution be taken not
to follow a more E route than that indicated, there will be
only from 2 to 3 per cent of calms between 10° N and the
equator. Thence proceed as directed above for January
to July.
From October to January, steer to 10° N, 138° W, and
cross the equator in 143° W. By following this route
there will be only from 2 to 3 per cent chances of calms
between the two Trade Wind regions. Farther to the W
at this season, more calms are likely. Thence proceed as
directed above for January to July.
10.98
San Francisco to Pacific Islands
10.97
For the North Pacific Islands, stand to the SW into
5 the Trade Wind and the North Equatorial Current, and
then run to the W in about 15 ° N, as far as about 170° W;
thence steer as directly as navigation permits to
destination.
For Tahiti, steer SW on nearly the direct course to
10 cross the equator in 140° W, or a little to the E, and then
direct, allowing for the set of the South Equatorial
Current.
For Samoa, Fiji, and islands to the W, steer from
10° N, 145° W as directed in 10.96 for the period
15 September to May until arriving on the parallel of the
islands to which bound, and then run W on this parallel.
San Francisco to Panama
20 10.98
Making this passage between December and May
inclusive, when the prevailing winds on the W coast of
Mexico are from the N and the current is favourable,
first obtain a good offing, and then stand down the coast
25 of California, keeping about 100 miles off, and at about
150 miles off the coast of Mexico, shaping a course to
make Isla Jicarita, the S of the islands S of Isla Coiba and
about 55 miles W of Punta Mariato, which is a good
landfall for vessels bound to Panama from the W.
30
Between June and November, inclusive, when calms,
variable winds and oftentimes hurricanes prevail on the
W coast of Mexico, stand well out to sea after leaving
San Francisco, and then shape a course to cross the
equator in about 104° W; thence stand on to the S, until
35 sure of reaching Panama on the other (starboard) tack.
Bound to Panama from the N, try to make Isla
Jicarita, and then try to keep under the land as far as
Punta Mala. If unable to do this, stand across for the
opposite coast of the continent, when the current will be
40 found favourable. On getting E of Punta Mala the best
plan is to shape a course for Isla Galera, and to use the
passage E of Archipielago de Las Perlas with caution.
See Admiralty Sailing Directions. At the same time, if
tempted up the gulf by a fair wind, try to get on the W
45 side of Archipielago de las Perlas, where anchorage and
less current will be found if the wind should fail.
Off the coast N of Punta Guascama, the winds become
more variable and rains more frequent, and the
following account by Dampier is perhaps as good as can
50 be given: 'It is a very wet coast, and rains abundantly all
the year. There are but few fair days, for there is little
difference in the seasons of the year between the wet and
dry; only in that season which should be dry the rains are
less frequent and more moderate than in the wet season,
55 for then it pours as out of a sieve.' This kind of weather is
found as far as Cabo Corrientes, the prevailing wind
being SW, but NE winds are not uncommon. Offshore
in this zone, between the parallels of 2° N and 5° N, the
winds are equally baffling, especially during March,
60 April and May.
Between Cabo Corrientes and Panama, the prevailing
winds are from the N and W, with frequent squalls and
wet weather from the SW between June and October.
Within 60 miles of the coast there is a constant current
65 to the N. After passing Punta Mala it meets the Mexico
Current from the WNW, and thus causes the numerous
ripplings and short uneasy sea so often met with at the
entrance of the Gulf of Panama. This troubled water will
be found more or less to the S, according to the strength
70 of the contending streams.
255
10.99 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
San Francisco to Callao or Iquique
10.99
Make an offing from San Francisco of about 300 miles
to the SW; and then work round gradually to the S so as
to cross 30° N in about 127° W. From this position make
a straight course to the SSE roughly parallel with the
coast, making for a position in 5° N, 110° W, about
where the South-east Trade Wind will be met. Stand
through the Trade Wind on the port tack to 20° S,
118"W.
From this position a course gradually approaching
the coast may be made, as the Trade Wind is lost and
the S winds are felt. The W positions reached will be
about 34° S, 110° W between September and Novem-
ber; about the parallel of 37° S from December to
May; and an intermediate latitude in June, July and
August.
As the coast is neared, S winds and a N-going current
will be obtained, by which the destination may be
reached. In any case make the port well to the S, in order
to allow for the N-going current which runs the whole
length of the South American coast.
ROUTES FROM CENTRAL AMERICA A N D PANAMA
Baja California northward to North
American ports
10.102
On account of the contrary S-going current, the only
way to make a passage from any port of this coast to the
N is to proceed W on the starboard tack until the
variable winds are reached, in about 130° W, and then
make northing, as directed in 10.89. From July to
January vessels may have to stand on as far as 140° W.
Lumber vessels bound to Juan de Fuca Strait have
found it advantageous to keep as near the land as
practicable, in order to take advantage of the SE storms,
which work round to the SW. Rapid passages have been
made in this manner.
Baja California to Pacific Ocean ports
10.103
For N-bound passages coastwise, see 10.102. For
Honolulu and North Pacific islands, proceed direct
when in the North-east Trade Wind; see 10.91 and
10.97. For Sydney, steer to join the route from San
Francisco (10.96) in 10° N, 145° W during June, July
and August; and at the equator at other times. For other
Pacific Ocean destinations, steer SW to join the
appropriate route from San Francisco in a convenient
position.
Notes on passage out of Gulf of Panama
10.104
Bound in any direction from Panama, the chief
difficulty is the passage out of the Gulf of Panama, for
light and baffling winds or calms are met with there at all
seasons.
Between October and April, the prevailing wind in
the gulf is from the N; for the remainder of the year the
wind hangs more to the W, and land and sea breezes are
felt, varied by calms and occasional squalls from the
SW. Nof 5° N, between 80° Wand 110° W, is a region of
calms and light winds, varied by squalls of wind and
rain; but S of 5° N, and W of the meridian of 80° W,
between the mainland and Archipielago de Colon, the
San Francisco to Coquimbo, Valparaiso and
Coronel
10.100
Proceed as directed in 10.99, but do not attempt to
5 make much easting after arriving in 20° S, 118° W until
well to the S of 35° S.
Make the coast well S of destination, in order, to allow
for the N-going current which runs the whole length of
this coast.
10
San Francisco to round Cabo de Hornos
10.101
Get a good offing of about 300 miles from San
Francisco, and then stand nearly due S so as to cross the
15 parallel of 5° N in about 126° W during December,
January and February; and between 120° W and 122° W
during the rest of the year, being farthest E in March.
When the South-east Trade Wind is met, stand to the
S so as to cross the parallel of 30° S in about 124° W; and
20 as soon as the Trade Wind is lost and the W winds
picked up, as they will be in about 35° S, make as direct a
course as possible to round Cabo de Hornos as directed
in 8.66.1.
30 wind is between S and W all the year round, and except
between February and June, it is fairly strong. Whether
bound N or S from Panama push to the S and gain the
South-east Trade Wind; by so doing the doldrums and
vexatious winds will not only be avoided but there will
35 be the additional advantage of salubrious weather.
Panama to Central America
10.105
The passage to ports along the coast of Central
40 America is slow and troublesome to sailing vessels;
advantage must be taken of every shift of wind to get to
the NW. The currents will be with the ship as far as
Golfo de Fonseca, but if bound for Acapulco or
Mazatlan, the passage may be better made by standing
45 off from the coast, after reaching Fonseca.
If a 'Norther' is blowing in Golfo de Tehuantepec,
and sail can be carried, it is advisable to ease the sheets
off and run well to the W, without seeking to make
northing; if obliged to heave-to, from two to four days'
50 heavy weather may be expected, with a high short sea, a
clear sky overhead, and a dense red haze near the
horizon.
It is said that if the summits of Sierra Chimalapa, N of
Laguna Inferior, are hidden about sunset by a slate-
55 coloured vapour, a Norther will blow the following day;
and if similar mists are seen on the ocean horizon at
sunset, a SSW wind will blow the next day.
Panama to San Francisco or Juan de Fuca
60 Strait
10.106
From June to January, having left the Gulf of Panama
(10.104), in order to gain the South-east Trade Wind,
steer to pass N of Archipielago de Colon keeping on
65 about the parallel of 2° N until the meridian of 105° W is
reached, then alter course to NW to pass W of lie
Clipperton, in the neighbourhood of which the North-
east Trade Wind will be met; then stand to the NW to
cross the parallel of 20° N in 120° W, and, if bound to
70 San Francisco, stand NW as far as 35° N, 135° W; but if
256
 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
for Juan de Fuca Strait, keep on to the NW as far as
40° N, 138° W, then haul in for the coast as the wind
allows, remembering always to make the land to
windward of the desired port.
From February to May, inclusive, cross the equator
between Archipielago de Colon and the mainland, and
run W until past 105° W; then alter course to NW to pass
W of lie Clipperton and as for June and January.
Panama to Australia or New Zealand
10.107
Cross the equator, and pass S of Archipielago de
Colon into the South-east Trade Wind as in 10.104 and
10.105. When in the South-east Trade Wind, run SW to
cross the meridian of 120° W in 11° S to 12° S and then '5
VV to pass S of lies Marquises and N of Archipel des
Tuamotu, and join the route from San Francisco (10.96)
in 14° S or 15° S on the meridian of 160° W. (See also
Diagram (10.132)).
If bound to New Zealand, leave the route to Sydney in 20
about 170° W and proceed direct, noting that it is
advisable, except when bound to Auckland, to pass
down the W coast, and round the S of New Zealand,
owing to the prevalence of W winds.
If conditions are favourable when off Cook Strait, 25
approach Wellington through it.
Passage from Panama to the southward
10.108
Such passages are all slow and difficult for a sailing
vessel, on account of the contrary coastal current, which
sets N throughout the year, and the equally contrary
light, but persistently S winds.
The general opinion appears to be that if bound for
ports along the coast S as far as Callao, it is better to beat
down the coast, but if bound to ports such as Matarani,
Iquique, Antofagasta, etc, it is better to make an offing
into the Trade Wind, reach the coast by the westerlies S
of 30° S, and then run N with a fair wind and current to
the desired destination.
Panama to Golfo de Guayaquil
10.109
From the Gulf of Panama, make the best way S until
between 5° N and the equator, and try, if possible, to
keep near the meridian of 80° W; then make a SW course
if the winds will allow. If the wind is SW, stand to the S,
but if SSW stand to the W, if a good working breeze; if
the wind be light and baffling, with rain, the vessel is in
the doldrums, and should get to the S as soon as possible,
taking advantage of every slant of wind to Golfo de
Guayaquil.
Panama to Callao
10.110
Follow the directions in 10.109 as far as Golfo de
Guayaquil; then work close inshore as far as Islas Lobos
de Afuera. Approach these islands with care, see
ROUTES FROM SOUTH AMERICAN PORTS
Callao to Panama, Central America and
Mexico
10.113
Stand N along the coast with a favourable current and
10.113
Admiralty Sailing Directions. Try always to be in with
the land soon after the sun has set, so that advantage may
be taken of the land breeze, which however light, usually
begins about this time; this will frequently enable a
5
vessel to make way nearly along shore throughout the
night, and be in a good situation for the first of the sea
breeze.
After having passed Islas Lobos de Afuera it would be
advisable to work S until the latitude of Callao is
'0 approached; then stand in, and if it be not fetched, work
S along shore, as above directed, remembering that the
wind hauls to the E on leaving the coast. Some
navigators attempt to make this passage by standing off
for several days, hoping to fetch in well on the other tack,
but this will generally be found a fruitless effort, owing
to the N-going current.
Panama to ports between Matarani and
Valparaiso
10.111
Follow the directions in 10.104 for leaving the Gulf of
Panama according to season, and then between June and
January, stand to the W after crossing the parallel of
2° N, and pass N of Archipielago de Colon, taking care
to keep S of 5° N. S and SSW winds will persist as far as
85° W, but after passing that meridian the wind will haul
round to the S, and vessels bound to the South Pacific
may be considered fairly in the Trade Wind.
30 From February to May, it is better to cross the
equator between Archipielago de Colon and the coast
before proceeding to the W. This may probably take a
week, which outlay of time, however, is far preferable to
encountering the vexatious weather met in that season N
35 of Archipielago de Colon. In this route it must be
remembered that S of 1 ° N the wind hauls to the E as the
vessel leaves the coast, and in the longitude of 83° W it is
frequently found E of S.
The seasonal routes from Panama, given above,
40 passing N and S of Archipielago de Colon, meet one
another in about 20° S, 100° W; on reaching this position
begin, if possible, to make southing and easting towards
the coast, crossing 30° S in about 95° W; and thence, as
the W winds and N-going current begin to be felt, and
45 eventually the SW and S coast winds, gradually head for
destination, always arranging to make the desired port to
the S, on account of the current.
Panama to Cabo de Hornos
50 10.112
Proceed as directed in 10.111 to 20° S, 100° W, and
then continue standing to the S, crossing 30° S between
102° W and 103° W; from this position or on reaching
the W winds, gradually curve round towards the SE,
55 crossing the meridian of 90° W at about 50° S, being to
the N from September to November and to the S from
June to August. Round Cabo de Hornos as directed in
8.66.1
a S wind. See notes on winds, weather, and currents in
10.98.
To ports on the coast of Central America, N of the
70 Gulf of Panama, follow the general directions in 10.105.
257
10.114 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
Callao to San Francisco or Juan de Fuca
Strait
10.114
Stand out from the coast to pick up the South-east
Trade Wind, and then steer NW to cross the equator
between the meridians of 112° W and 115° W, and the
parallels of 5° N and 7° N in 115° W to 118° W, to join
the route from Panama (10.106).
Callao to Australia or New Zealand
10.115
Steer W in the South-east Trade Wind to join the
route from Panama (10.107) in about 12° S, 122° W.
Callao to China, Philippine Islands, Japan
etc
10.116
Steer W in the South-east Trade Wind to join the
route from Valparaiso (10.123) in about 12° S, 122° W.
Callao to ports as far southward as 27° S
10.117
All of these ports lie within the area of the South-east
Trade Wind, and it is therefore recommended normally
to work along shore, from Bahia del Callao as far as Isla
San Gallan, when the coast trends more to the E, so that
a long leg and a short one may be made (with the land
just in sight) to Rada de Arica or to any of the ports
between it and Bahia Pisco.
When proceeding from Callao to Bahia Pisco it is
recommended to stand off the land at night, and towards
it during the day until S of 13° S, when it is advisable to
keep within 4 or 5 miles of the shore down to Bahia
Pisco. For currents, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
As an alternative, a very dull sailer might do better by
running through the Trade Wind belt and making
southing in the offing, so as to return to the N along the
coast, than by attempting to work to windward against a
Trade Wind which never varies more than a few points.
Care is necessary when approaching Punta Caldera in
the very light winds, as the current will tend to set the
vessel on the rocks N of Punta Francisco.
Callao to ports south of 30° S
10.118
Bound to ports S of 30° S, there is no doubt that by
standing offshore a quicker passage will be made than by
working along the coast. Therefore, on leaving Bahia del
Callao, stand well out to the SW through the South-east
Trade Wind and, from January to March, cross the
meridians of 90° W in 18° S, and 95° W in 30° S. From
this position, as soon as the W winds begin to be felt steer
E for destination; making the desired port to the S on
account of the current.
From April to December, a lesser offing from the
coast will suffice, and on leaving Bahia del Callao, steer
so as to cross the meridians of.85° W in 18° S and 90° W
in about 30° S, and thence as above described, making to
the E to destination.
Callao to Cabo de Hornos
10.119
Follow the directions in 10.118, according to season,
but on reaching the parallel of 30° S, continue to the S so
as to cross the parallel of 50° S between 85° W and
90° W, being to the E from September to November,
and to the W from June to August. Then steer to round
Cabo de Hornos as directed in 10.101.
Valparaiso northward to ports in South
America
10.120
Steer N along the coast. Calms and variable winds
may be experienced in the vicinity of the parallel of
30° S, but S winds, and a steady N-going current will be
experienced throughout the remainder of the voyage.
10 Valparaiso to Panama, Central America,
and Mexico
10.121
Stand to the NW, crossing the parallel of 30° S in
about 77° W, and then standing N till on the parallel of
15 Callao, from which position keep a distance of about 150
miles from the land until reaching the Gulf of Panama.
If bound to ports in Central America and Mexico N of
Panama proceed as directed in 10.105.
20
Valparaiso to San Francisco, Juan de Fuca
Strait or Prince Rupert
10.122
25 The best route to pursue when making this voyage is
the same at all times of the year. Leaving Valparaiso
stand to the NW, passing E of Isla San Felix and
crossing the parallel of 17° S in 90° W. With the South-
east Trade Wind, steer to cross the equator in about
30 118° W. Continue NW into the North-east Trade Wind
and cross the parallel of 20° N in 138° W, the parallel of
30° N in 142° W, and the parallel of 40° N in 140° W.
In May and June the North-east Trade Wind is often
very weak to the N of 20° N, and frequently a belt of
35 calm exists between 20° N and 30° N.
For San Francisco, after losing the North-east Trade
Wind, make to the E as soon as the W winds are met
with, which will be from about 33° N during the winter
to 40° N in the summer up to the end of August; making
40 allowance for the SE-going current.
Similarly, make for either Juan de Fuca Strait or
Prince Rupert on reaching the parallel of 40° N at all
times of the year; crossing the meridian of 130° W in
47° N before steering direct to destination. Prince
45 Rupert may be approached either by Hecate Strait, or W
of Queen Charlotte Islands. Allowance must be made
for a SE-going current, setting across the track, and
attention is called to the cautionary statements in
10.64.2.
50
Valparaiso to Philippine Islands, China or
Japan
10.123
55 The passage may be made by using either the North-
east or the South-east Trade Winds. These two routes
are described hereunder respectively as the Northerly
Route and the Southerly Route.
The Northerly Route, for departures between August
60 and February, passes through 12° S, 122° W, where
vessels from Callao should join it, and continues
through the South-east Trade Wind to cross the equator
in about 138° W, and the parallel of 10° N in about
143° W; the North-east Trade Wind will be found near
65 this parallel; thence continue as from North America,
passing close S of the Hawaiian Islands, and joining the
appropriate route from San Francisco to destination.
References are: for Philippine Islands, 10.95 Hong
Kong 10.93 or 10.95; Shanghai 10.94; Singapore 10.95;
70 Nagasaki 10.94; Yokohama 10.92.
258
 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
For the Southerly Route, which is recommended for
departures between March to July, on leaving
Valparaiso steer NW into the South-east Trade Wind.
Having found these, pass S of lies Marquises, S of
Gilbert Group and N of Caroline Islands, to a position
in about 13° N, 130° E. At this point, join the Second
Eastern Passage (9.46) from the Eastern Archipelago to
China and Japan in the North-east Monsoon (October
to March), E of the Philippines; and from April to
September pass through San Bernardino Strait for
Manila and the South China Sea. Bound to Yokohama
leave the route when S of Gilbert Group, cross the
equator in about 168° E, and join the appropriate route
from Sydney soon afterwards. See Diagram (10.132)
and 10.7.1.
See also routes from San Francisco in 10.93, 10.94
and 10.95.
If there is a N wind on leaving Valparaiso, stand W as
long as it lasts and then NW into the South-east Trade
Wind. In the latitude of Valparaiso, during June, July
and August N winds occasionally extend far across the
Pacific Ocean.
ROUTES FROM CABO DE HORNOS
10.126
For directions for rounding Cabo de Hornos
westbound, see 8.9.2.
Cabo de Hornos to Valparaiso
10.126.1
After passing the meridian of 70° W in about 57° S, as
described in 8.9.2, stand NW and then N, keeping at a
distance of about 150 miles from the land; begin to close
the land at about 40° S. W winds and a favourable
current will be found from about 48° S. Make the
landfall S of destination.
Some navigators prefer to stand farther to the NW to
about 50° S, 80° W, before turning N and steering for
destination.
Cabo de Hornos to ports in South America
northward of Valparaiso
10.127
After rounding Cabo de Hornos (8.9.2), and bound to
ports on the W coast of South America, and when W of
the meridian of Cabo Pilar (or about 75° W), take every
opportunity of making westing until the meridian of
82° W or 84° W be reached; thence steer direct, or as
nearly so as is consistent with making use of the steady
winds which prevail in the offing, for the intended port,
being careful not to get to leeward of it on approaching
the land.
Cabo de Hornos to Panama, Central
America, and Mexico
10.128
Proceed as directed in 10.127, until reaching the
meridian of 82° W or 84° W, and then steer N to close the
land until it is about 60 miles distance when off, or just N
of, Golfo de Guayaquil. After crossing the equator steer
for Isla Galera at the same time taking care, especially in
the dry season, to stand inshore with the first N winds.
By so doing, vessels will most probably have the current
in their favour along the coast, whereas by keeping in the
centre, or on the W side of the gulf, a strong S-going set
will be experienced.
10.129
Valparaiso to Australia or New Zealand
10.124
Steer to the NW to join the route from Panama des-
cribed in 10.107, between the meridians of 120° W and
5 130° W, and between the parallels of 10° S and 12° S.
See remark in 10.123 regarding leaving Valparaiso
with a N wind.
Valparaiso southward, and round Cabo de
w Hornos
10.125
The same rule prevails for rounding Cabo de Hornos
as that from Callao (10.119) or from any port on the W
coast of South America, namely, first to make an offing
15 of between 500 and 600 miles to the SW, until the W
winds are steady and certain, and the strength of the
NE-going current is lost.
From Valparaiso or Talcahuano the position to make
for is about 40° S, 84° W. Thence stand nearly S,
20 crossing 50° S in about 85° W. From this position, alter
course gradually to the SE and E to round Cabo de
Hornos, as directed in 8.66.1.
After making Isla Galera and clearing Banco San Jose,
30 navigation towards Panama between Archipielago de las
Perlas and the mainland is clear and easy, with the
advantage of being able to anchor during adverse
conditions of wind and tide. As a rule the passage E of
the islands should be taken, but with a strong S wind the
35 navigator is tempted to run up the gulf, in which case he
should keep towards the W side of Archipielago de las
Perlas, where anchorage and less current will be found if
the wind should fail, an event always to be expected in
these regions.
40 Bound to ports in Central America or Mexico, N of
the Gulf of Panama, proceed generally as directed in
10.105.
45 Cabo de Hornos to San Francisco and
northward
10.129
For San Francisco, having rounded Cabo de Hornos
as directed in 8.9.2, stand to the NW so as to cross the
50 parallel of 50° S between 80° W and 85° W, and then due
N to 30° S. Thence keep off to the NW, running through
the South-east Trade Wind to cross the equator between
112°W and 115°W, being to the E, throughout the
whole voyage from Cabo de Hornos, from September to
55 November; and to the W from June to August.
After crossing the equator, steer so as to cross the
meridian of 120° W in 13" N to 15° N, where the route
divides into two branches, according to season.
From March to October, make for 30° N, 137° W, and
6o turn towards the land when the W winds are reached at
about 35° N; again allowing for the SE-going current
across the track.
For November to February, make for 30° N, 132° W,
and from that position, when the W winds are met, curve
65 gradually round towards San Francisco, making it to the
N, and allowing for the current setting SE across the
track.
For Columbia River, Juan de Fuca Strait, or Prince
Rupert, follow the routes given above as far as 30° N;
70 then continue to the NW, curving to the E on reaching,
259
10.130 PACIFIC OCEAN SAILING ROUTES
or nearing the parallel of 45° N, to make destination,
allowing for the current as above.
Cabo de Homos to Honolulu
10.130
Follow the directions given in 10.129 as far as 30° S,
or, if necessary, a little farther N to enter the South-east
Trade Wind; then proceed as directly as possible,
crossing the equator between 120° W and 125° W.
Cabo de Hornos to Philippine Islands,
China, Japan, Australia or New Zealand
10.131
Follow the directions given in 10.129 as far as 30° S,
and then run in the South-east Trade Wind to about
12° S, 122° W, to join the route from Valparaiso (10.123)
for the Philippine Islands, China, or Japan; or the route
from Panama (10.107) for Australia or New Zealand.
Cabo de Hornos to Pacific Islands
10.132
For Tahiti, follow the directions given in 10.129 as far
as 30° S, 85° W, and then run WNW in the South-east
5 Trade Wind, either passing through Archipel des
Tuamotu by way of Passe de Fakarava, or if without
suitable modern navigational equipment, passing S of
Pitcairn Island. For directions for Archipel des
Tuamotu, see Admiralty Sailing Directions.
10 For islands in the W part of the North Pacific Ocean,
after crossing 30° S, run in the South-east Trade Wind
to about 12° S, 122° W, to join the most N route from
Valparaiso to the Philippine Islands, China, or Japan
(10.123). Leave this route in about 175° E if bound to
75 Marshal Islands, or in 160° E or 165° E if bound to
Caroline Islands or farther W; and proceed direct to
destination. The route to Honolulu is given in 10.130.
For islands in the W part of the South Pacific Ocean,
proceed either via Tahiti as above, and thence, after
20 reaching the parallel of destination, direct; or
alternatively by the route given in 10.107 as far as about
160° W, and then to destination.
260
 GAZETTEER

The approximate geographical positions of places mentioned in the text are listed in the Gazetteer.
Obsolete names are given in brackets after new names.
Asterisks (*) follow positions which are Arrival and Departure Positions (1.4).

Abaiang Atoll 1 58 N 172 50 E Amami Gunto 28 00 N 129 05 E

Abang Kecil (Pulau Abang- Amazonas, Rio 1 16N 49 30 W
ketjil) 0 33 N 104 14 E Ambon 3 41 S 128 10 E*
Abang, Selat 0 32 N 104 15E 15 Amchitka Pass 51 20 N 180 00
Abang-ketjil, Pulau; Amherst Rocks; see Jigu Jiao 31 ION 122 23 E
see Abang Kecil 0 33 N 104 14 E Amirante Isles 5 30 N 53 20 E
Abang-tengah, Pulau; Amoy; see Xiamen 24 27 N 118 04 E
see Rukan Tengah 0 35 N 103 46 E Ampat, Tanjung;
Abang-utara, Pulau; 20 see Tanjung Cikoneng 6 04 S 105 53 E
see Rukan Utara 0 37 N 103 45 E Amphitrite Baai;
'Abd a\ Kuri (Abd-al-Kuri) 12 10 N 52 15E see Teluk Kualacenaku 0 10S 103 45 E
Abrolhos, Canal dos 17 50 S 38 45 W Amsterdam, lie 37 50 S 77 35E
Abrolhos, Arquipelago dos 18 00 S 38 40 W Anadyrskiy Zaliv 64 00 N 178 00 W
Acapulco 16 50 N 99 55 W 25 Anambas, Pulau-pulau 3 00 N 106 00 E
Acasta, Batu 1 39 N 106 18E Andaman Islands 12 30 N 93 00 E
Acebuche, Punta del 36 02 N 5 27 W Aniva, Mys
Acores, Arquipelago dos 38 00 N 27 00 W (Naka Shiretoko Misaki) 46 02 N 143 25 E
Adelaide 34 48 N 138 23 E* Anjer Lor 6 03 S 105 55 E
Aden 12 45 N 44 57 E* 30 Anjouan, lie (Nzwami) 12 15S 44 30E
Admiral Stellingwerf Reef; Anna, Pulo 4 40 N 131 58 E
see Karang Heluputan 0 38 N 105 08 E Annobon; see Pagalu 1 26 S 5 37 E
Adolphus Channel 10 40 S 142 35 E Anser Group 39 18 S 146 30 E
Adventure Bay 43 18 S 147 22 E Antigua 17 05 N 61 45 W
Agalega Islands 10 26 s 56 39 E 35 Antiope Reef 18 14S 168 20 W
Agulhas Bank 35 30 s 21 00 E Antipodes Islands 49 35 S 178 50 E
Agulhas, Cape 34 50 s 20 01 E Antofagasta 23 38 S 70 26 W
Agulhas, Cape (15 miles S of) 35 05 20 00 E* Api, Alur Pelayaran 2 00 N 109 08 E
Agung, Gunung
s
8 20 s 115 30 E Api, Tanjung 1 57 N 109 20 E
Ahunui 19 40 140 25 W 40 Apia: Samoa 13 47 S 171 45 W*
Aitutaki
s
18 54 s 159 47 W Apo East Pass 12 40 N 120 45 E
Ajer Lantjur, Tandjung; Apolima Strait 13 48 S 172 10W
see Tanjung Ayerlancur 2 53 s 107 20 E Ara, Gosong 0 48 N 104 57 E
Akbar, Beting 2 39 107 15E Archipel, Arcipielago,
Akuseki Shima 29
s
27 N 129 37 E 45 Archipielago, Arquipelago or
Akutan Pass 54 05 N 166 00 W Arquipielago = Archipelago;
Al = The (definite article); see proper name
see proper name Arend, Gosong;
Alalakeiki Channel 20 35 N 156 30 W see Beting Menjangan 3 45 S 106 12 E
Alas, Selat 8 40 s 116 40 E 50 Arica, Rada de 18 30 S 70 20W
Albardao, Banco do 33 10 s 52 25 W Arorae Island 2 39 S 176 54 E
Albatross Islet 40 23 s 144 39 E Arrecife = Reef; see proper
Alboran, Isla de 35 56 N 3 02 W name
Aldabra Group 9 25 s 46 20 E Aru, Pulau-pulau 6 00 S 134 30 E
Alenhuihaha Channel 20 20 N 156 00 W 55 Aruba Island 12 26 N 69 56 W
Algeciras 36 08 N 5 27 W Aruba, Gosong 3 28 S 110 12E
Algiers 36 46 N 3 05 E* Arus, Tanjung 1 53 N 125 05 E
Algoa Bay 34 00 S 26 00 E Ascension Island 7 55 S 14 25W
Alguada Reef 15 42 N 94 10 E Asir, Ras; see Raas Caseyr 11 50 N 51 17E
Alijos, Rocas 24 57 N 115 45 W 60 Assumption Island 9 45 S 46 30E
Aling, Gosong (Fox Banks) 3 35 S 110 15E Astoria 46 12N 123 51 W
Almina, Peninsula de la 35 54 N 5 17W Astove Island 10 04 S 47 43E
Alor, Pulau-pulau: Atalia, Ponta da 0 35 S 47 21 W
Kepuluan Lingga 0 28 N 104 18E Atkin, Karang 0 33 S 104 02 E
Alor, Pulau-pulau: Selat Alor 8 15 S 124 30 E 65 Attu Island 52 55 N 173 00E
Alor, Selat 8 15 S 123 55 E Auckland Islands 50 40 S 166 00 E
Alta Vela 17 28 N 71 39 W Auckland 36 36 S 174 49 E*
Alula, Ras; see Raas Caluula 11 59 N 50 47 E Aur: Selat Gelasa 3 00 S 107 13 E
Alur Pelayaran = Passage; Aur: Selat Karimata 1 14 S 109 18 E
see proper name 70 Aur, Pulau 2 27 N 104 31 E
265
 GAZETTEER

Australes, ties 23 00 S 151 00 W Banteng, Karang (Buffalo Rock) 1 09 N 103 49 E

Ava = Passage; see proper name Baram, Tanjung 4 36 N 113 58 E
Avalon Peninsula 47 20 N 53 00 W Barbados
Awal, Gosong 3 24 S 107 36 E 5 Bridgetown 13 06 N 59 39 W*
Ayam, Tanjung 1 21 N 104 12E Barbuda 17 40 N 61 45 W
Ayerlancur (Ajer Lantjur), Barcelona 41 20 N 2 10 E*
Tanjung 2 53 S 107 20 E Barquero, Ria del 43 45 N 7 38 W
Barsas de Pedro 13 00 N 72 25 E
JO Basa (Lynn), Karang 5 12 S 106 12E
Bashi Channel 21 20 N 121 00 E
Bab el Mandeb, Straits of 12 40 N 43 30 E Basilan Strait 6 50 N 122 00 E*
Babar, Pulau 7 55 S 129 40 E Bass Strait 40 00 S 146 00 E
Babuyan Channel 18 40 N 122 00 E Bassas da India 21 28 S 39 46 E
Bacan 0 30 S 127 30 E 15 Basu, Tanjung;
Backstairs Passage 35 45 s 138 08 E see Tanjung Bakau 0 21 S 103, 47 E
Baco Islands 13 28 N 121 10E Batanme (Misool) 1 55 S 130 05 E
Badung, Bukit 8 50 S 115 10E Batanta 0 53 S 130 40 E
Badung, Selat 8 40 s 115 20 E Bathurst Island 11 40 S 130 20 E
Baffin Bay 73 00 N70 00 N 20 Bathurst; see Banjul 13 32 N 16 54 W*
3 04
Baginda
Baginda (Besar), Tanjung
s 106 43 E
3 05 s iO6 44 E
Batu = Rock; see proper name
Batuata 6 12S 122 42 E
Baginda, Karang-karang 3 07 s 107 05 E Batubelajar, Pulau;
Bahamas, The 25 00 N 75 00 W see Batu Belayar 0 25 N 104 16E
Bahia, Bahia = Bay; 25 Batumandi, Pulau;
see proper name see Tanjung Serdang 4 27 S 105 54 E
Bahia Blanca 39 10 s 61 45 W* Batutoro (Pemali), Tanjung 5 42 S 122 47 E
Baia = Bay; see proper name Baur, Selat 3 00 S 107 18E
Baiquan Liedao Bavanapadu 18 34 N 84 21 E
(Pai-ch'uan Lieh-tao) 25 58 N 119 57 E 30 Bawean 5 50 S 112 40 E
Baja California 28 00 N 113 30 E Beijishan Liedao
Bajo = Shoal; see proper name (Pei-chi Shan Lieh-tao) 27 38 N 121 12E
Bakau 3 02 S 107 09 E Beira 19 52 S 34 58 E
Bakau (Basu), Tanjung 0 21 s 103 47 E Beirut 33 55 N 35 31 E*
Bakung 2 57 s 106 53 E 35 Belang 8 33 S 116 47 E
Balabac Island 8 00 N 117 00 E Belayer, Batu (Pulau
Balabac Main Channel 7 26 N 117 14 E Batubelajar) 0 25 N 104 16E
Balabac Strait 7 34 N 116 55 E Belem 1 27 S 48 30 W
Balabalagan, Pulau-pulau Belimbing Pamancasa;
(Kepulauan Balangan) 40 see Balimbing Pamancasa 5 56 S 104 33 E
(Little Paternoster) 2 15 S 117 30 E Belitung 3 00 S 108 00 E
Balambangan, Pulau 7 18 N 116, 55 E Belize 17 20 N 88 01 W*
Balangan, Kepulauan; Bell Reef 40 23 S 144 05 E
see Pulau-pulau Balabalagan 2 15 S 117 30 E Belle Isle, Strait of 51 44 N 56 00 W*
Balboa 8 53 N 79 30 W 45 Bellona Reefs 21 30 S 158 50 E
Baleares, Islas 39 45 N 3 00 E Belukar 0 51 N 103 39 E
Bali, Selat 8 10 S 114 25 E Beluru 3 10 S 107 40 E
Balik Papan 1 21 s 116 56 E* Belvedere, Karang 2 12 S 107 02 E
Balimbing (Belimbing) Benan 0 28 N 104 27 E
Pamancasa (Pamantjasa) 5 56 s 104 33 E 50 Benggala, Selat 5 50 N 95 07 E
Balintang Channel 20 00 N 122 20 E* Benguela, Porto de 12 35 S 13 24 E
Ballard Bank 46 40 N 52 50 W Benin, Bight of 5 00 N 3 00 E
Ball's Pyramid 31 45 S 159 15E Bergen 60 24 N 5 18 E*
Balmoral Reef 15 40 S 175 50 E Berhala 0 52 S 104 24 E
Bampton Reefs 19 00 s 158 40 E 55 Berhala, Selat 0 50 S 104 15E
Banaba 0 50 s 169 35 E Berikat (Pulau Boompjes) 2 28 S 106 58 E
Banco = Bank; see proper name Berikat, Tanjung 2 34 S 106 51 E
Banda, Pulau-pulau 4 35 s 129 45 E Berlenga, Ilha 39 25 N 9 30 W
Banggi South Channel 7 04 N 117 06 E Bermuda 32 23 N 64 38 W*
Banggi, Pulau 7 15 N 117 10 E 60 Besar, Tanjung;
Bangka 2 00 s 106 00 E see Tanjung Baginda 3 05 S 106 44 E
Bangka Passage: Celebes Sea 2 00 N 125 15E Betata, Terumbu 1 11 N 104 09 E
Bangka Selat: Celebes Sea 1 45 N 125 05 E Beting = Reef, sandbank, shoal;
Bangka, Selat: Java Sea 2 06 S 105 03 E see proper name
Bangkok 65 Betsey Island 43 03 S 147 29 E
Bangkok Bar 13 23 N 100 35 E* Beveridge Reef 20 00 S 167 47 W
Banjul (Bathurst) 13 32 N 16 54 W* Biafra, Bight of 3 00 N 7 00 E
Banks Islands 14 00 S 167 30 E Biao Jiao (Hao Wong Chiao) 23 14 N 116 48 E
Banks Strait 40 39 S 148 05 E Biaro 2 06 N 125 23 E
Banks, Cape 37 54 s 140 28 E 70 Bijagos, Arquipelago dos 11 15N 16 00 W

266
 GAZETTEER

Bijagos, Arquipelago dos Buton (Butung), Selat 4 56 S 122 47 E

(75 miles SW of) 10 40 N 17 40 W* Butunga, Batu (Laurel Reef) 4 40 S 117 10E
Bikar Atoll 12 15N 170 06 E
Bikini Atoll 11 36 N 165 23 E 5
Bilbao 43 21 N 3 02 W
Binongko 5 57 S 124 01 E Cabezos, Los 36 01 N 5 43 W
Bintan 1 00 N 104 30 E Cabo Verde, Arquipelago de 17 00 N 24 00 W
Bintan Besar, Gunung Cabo = Cape; see proper name
(B}ntan Great Hill) 1 05 N 104 27 E to Cabot Strait 47 32 N 59 30 W*
Bioko (Macias Nguema Biyogo Cagliari 39 12N 9 06 E
or Fernando Poo) 3 30 N 8 45 E Caicos Passage 22 15N 72 20 W*
Biri Island 12 42 N 124 21 E Cakang (Tjakang), Tanjung 0 37 N 104 17 E
Bishop Rock (5 miles S of) 49 47 N 6 27 W* Calabar River 4 30 N 8 30 E
Black Pyramid 40 29 S 144 20 E 15 Calamian Group 12 00 N 120 00 E
Blanco, Cabo 47 12S 65 45 W Calantas Rock 12 31 N 124 05 E
Bligh Entrance 9 12S 144 00 E Calavite, Cape (5 miles W of) 13 27 N 120 13 E*
Blis (Bliss), Karang 3 16S 107 12E Calcanhar, Cabo 5 10S 35 29 W
Bluff 46 38 S 168 21 E* Calcanhar, Cabo
Bo Hai (Gulf of Pohai) 38 30 N 119 30 E 20 (60 miles ENE of) 4 40 S 34 35 W*
Boavista, Ilha da 16 05 N 22 55 W Calcutta 22 30 N 88 15E
Bojador, Cabo 26 07 N 14 30 W Calcutta Approach 21 00 N 88 13 E*
Bojeador, Cape 18 30 N 120 34 E Caldera, Punta 27 03 S 70 52 W
Boleng, Selat 8 25 S 123 20 E Calicut 11 15N 75 46 E
Bolinao, Cape 16 1 9 N 119 47 E 25 California 35 00 N 120 00 W
Bomatu Point 8 23 S 151 07 E Callao 12 02 S 77 11W*
Bombay 18 51 N 72 50 E* Caloundra Head 26 48 S 153 08 E
Bombay Reef 16 02 N 112 30 E Caluula, Raas (Ras Alula) 11 59 N 50 47 E
Bon, Cap 37 05 N 11 03 E Cambay, Gulf of;
Bonny River 4 13N 7 01 E* 30 see Gulf of Khambat 20 30 N 72 00 E
Boo, Pulau-pulau 1 10S 129 25 E Campbell Islands 52 53 S 169 10 E
Booby Island 10 36 S 141 55 E Campeche, Banco de 22 30 N 90 00 W
Boompjes, Pulau; see Berikat 2 28 S 106 58 E Canakkale Bogazi 40 09 N 26 24 E*
Borda, Cape 35 45 S 136 35 E Canarias, Islas 29 00 N 15 00 W
Bordeaux 44 50 N 0 30 W 35 Cani, lies 37 21 N 10 07 E
Boston 42 20 N 70 46 W* Cannanore 11 52 N 75 22 E
Bougainville Island 6 00 S 155 15E Cap, Capo = Cape;
Bougainville Strait 6 40 S 156 15 E* see proper name
Bounty Islands 47 41 S 179 03 E Cape Barren Island 40 23 S 148 15E
Brava, Ilha 14 50 N 24 42 W 40 Cape Breton Island 46 00 N 60 30 W
Breaker Point; Cape Coast Castle 5 06 N 1 14W
see Shibeishan Jiao 22 56 N 116 30 E Cape Point 34 21 S 18 30 E
Breaksea Spit 24 25 S 153 10 E Cape Town 33 53 S 18 26 E*
Brest 48 22 N 4 30 W Capel Bank 25 15S 159 40 E
Brett, Cape 35 10S 174 20 E 45 Capricorn Channel 22 45 S 152 00 E
Brindisi 40 40 N 17 59 E Capul Island 12 26 N 124 10 E
Brisbane: Capul Pass 12 25 N 124 12E
Caloundra Head 26 49 S 153 10 E* Cargados Carajos Shoals 16 35 S 59 40 E
Bristol Bay 57 30 N 160 30 W Caringin (Tjaringin) 6 21 S 105 49 E
Brooks Banks 24 ION 167 00 W 50 Caroline Island 9 57 S 150 13E
Brouwers, Beting; Caroline Islands 7 00 N 150 00 E
see Gosong Serdang 5 05 S 106 15E Carpentaria Shoals 10 45 S 141 03 E
Browse Islet 14 06 S 123 33 E Cartier Islet 12 32 S 123 33 E
Buau 1 03 N 104 13E Carvoiero, Cabo 39 21 N 9 24 W
Buen Suceso, Bahia 54 50 S 65 15 W 55 Casablanca 33 38 N 7 35 W*
Buffalo Rock; Caseyr, Raas (Ras Asir)
see Karang Banteng 1 09 N 103 49 E (Capo Guardafui) 11 50 N 51 17E
Bukit = Hill; see proper name Catherine Reef;
Bulat 1 28 S 109 24 E see Karang Tenang 2 31 S 108 55 E
Bungaran Besar, Pulau; 60 Cato Island 23 15S 155 32 E
see Natuna Besar 4 00 N 108 10E Catoche, Cabo 21 36 N 87 04 W
Bungin, Tanjung 4 32 S 105 54 E Catwick, lies 10 00 N 109 00 E
Bungo Suido 33 00 N 132 15E Cay Sal Bank 23 40 N80 00 N
Burias Island 12 50 N 123, 15E Cayenne 5 02 N 52 19W
Buru: Ceram Sea 3 30 S 126 30 E 65 Cayo or Cayos = Cay or Cays;
Buru: Selat Durian 0 52 N 103 30 E see proper name
Burung, Pulau-pulau 0 45 N 108 45 E Cebu 10 18N 123 55 E*
Buton (Pulau Butung) 5 00 S 122 55 E Celaka (Pulau Tjelaka) 2 52 S 107 01 E
Buton (Butung), Alur Cemara (Tjemara), Gosong 0 49 N 104 14E
Pelayaran 5 20 S 123 15E 70 Ceram; see Seram 3 00 S 129 00 E
267
 GAZETTEER

Ceva-i-Ra (Theva-i-Ra) Coronel 37 06 S 73 10W

(Conway Reef) 21 44 N 174 38 E Corrientes, Cabo: Argentina 38 01 S 57 32W
Chagos Archipelago 6 30 S 72 00 E Corrientes, Cabo: Colombia 5 29 N 77 33 W
Chang Jiang (Yangtze River) 31 03 N 122 20 E 5 Corse (Corsica) 42 00 N 9 00E
Charlotte Bank: NE of Vanuatu 11 47 S 173 13E Corse, Cap 43 01 N 9 22E
Charlotte Bank: Coruna, La 43 22 N 8 24W
South China Sea 7 08 N 107 35 E Corvo, Ilha do 39 40 N 31 05 W
Chatham Islands 44 00 S 176 30 W Cosmoledo Group 9 45 S 47 35 E
Chaussee = Bank, causeway; 10 Creus, Cabo 42 19N 3 19E
see proper name Crocodile Shoal 1 11 N 104 16 E
Che Kamat, Pulau 1 21 N 104 14 E Crooked Island Passage 23 15N 74 25 W*
Chenal = Channel; Cruz, Cabo 19 51 N 77 44W
see proper name Cu Lao Re 15 23 N 109 07 E
Chesapeake Bay 36 56 N 75 58 W* 15 Cuba 22 30 N 80 00W
Chesterfield Reefs 19 55 S 158 20 E Cumberland, Cape 14 37 S 166 37 E
Chetvertyy Kuril'skiy Proliv 50 00 N 155 00 E Cunene, Rio 17 15S 11 45 E
Chia-p'eng Ch'un-tao; Curacao: Willemstad 12 06 N 68 56 W*
see Jiapeng Liedao 21 53 N 114 03 E Curacoa Reef 15 29 S 173 37W
Chi-chou Lieh-tao; 20 Curtis Channel 24 20 S 152 55 E
see Qizhou Liedao 19 58 N 111 16E Cuyo East Pass 10 30 N 121 30 E
Chiloe, Isla 42 40 S 74 00 W
China Reef; see Karang Cina 0 57 S 108 32 E
China Strait 10 35 S 150 40 E
Chou Shan; 25 Dafangji Dao (Ta-fang-chi) 21 23 N 111 12E
see Zhoushan Dao 30 03 N 122 10E Dagu Lanjiangsha or
Christmas Island: Indian Ocean 10 24 S 105 43 E Taku Bar 38 56 N 117 59 E*
Christmas Island: Pacific Ocean 1 55 N 157 25 W Dakar 14 41 N 17 24 W*
Chusan: see Zhoushan Dao 30 03 N 122 10E Dakhla (Villa Cisneros) 23 42 N 15 56W
Chusan Archipelago; see 30 Dalupiri Island 12 25 N 124 15 E
Zhoushan Qundao 30 30 N 122 20 E Dalupiri Pass 12 25 N 124 18 E
Cikoneng (Ampat), Tanjung Damar 7 08 S 128 36 E
(Karang Tjikoneng) 6 04 S 105 53 E Dampier, Selat 0 40 S 130 30 E
Cina (China), Karang 0 57 S 108 32 E Dangan Liedao
Cirencester Shoal; 35 (Tan-Kan Lieh-tao)
see Terumbu Manggar 2 54 S 108 57 E (Li-ma Chun-tao) 22 02 N 114 13E
Cires, Punta 35 55 N 5 29 W Danjo Gunto 32 02 N 128 23 E
Clarence Strait 12 00 S 131 00 E Dao Phu Qui 10 32 N 108 57 E
Clarion, Isla 18 20 N 114 45 W Dapur, Kepulauan 3 08 S 106 31 E
Clemencia Bank; 40 Darwin 12 25 N 130 47 E*
see Gosong Jelai 3 24 S 110 09 E Dassen Island 33 25 S 18 05E
Cliff Island; see Shi Yu 23 35 N 117 27 E Dato (Datuk), Tanjung 0 00 103 48 E
Clifton, Beting; Datu 0 08 N 108 36 E
see Gosong Sekopong 4 S6S 106 03 E Datu, Tanjong 2 05 N 109 38 E
Clipperton, lie 10 18 N 109 13W 45 Datuk, Tanjung;
Clyde, River 55 45 N 4 58 W see Tanjung Dato 0 00 103 48 E
Cochin 9 58 N 76 14 E Davis Strait 60 00 N 56 00W
Coco Channel 13 50 N 93 10E Dawanshan Dao
Coco, Isla del 5 32 N 87 04 W (Ta-wan Shan) 21 57 N 113 44E
Cocos or Keeling Islands 12 05 S 96 52 E 50 Dazuo Yan 24 53 N 118 59E
Coiba, Isla 7 25 N 81 45 W De Bril Bank;
Colombia 7 00 N 75 00 W see Gosong Taka Rewataya 6 04 S 118 55 E
Colombo 6 58 N 79 58 E* Deal Island 39 29 S 147 20 E
Colon 9 23 N 79 55 W* Dedap 0 30 N 104 16 E
Colon, Archipielago de 0 00 90 00 W 55 Degong 0 47 N 103 32 E
Columbia River 46 1 5 N 124 05 W Delaware Bay 38 48 N 75 02 W*
Comodoro Rivadavia 45 51 S 67 26 W* Delgado, Cabo 10 41 S 40 38E
Comorin, Cape 8 05 N 77 33 E Dempo 0 36 N 104 18 E
Comoro Islands 12 00 S 44 30 E Dempo, Selat 0 36 N 104 15 E
Con Son 60 Denmark Strait 66 00 N 29 00W
(Archipel de Poulo Condore) 8 38 N 106 37 E D'Entrecasteaux, Recifs 18 20 S 163 00 E
Conception, Point 34 27 N 120 28 W Derwent, River 43 00 S 147 22 E
Congalton Skar 1 22 N 104 19E Disappointment, lies du 14 10S 141 20 W
Congo, River 6 00 S 12 30 E Destacado Island 11 16N 124 06 E
Conway Reef; see Ceva-i-Ra 21 44 S 174 38 E 65 Deux Freres, Les;
Cook Strait 41 00 S 174 30 E see Hong Trung Nho 8 35 N 106 05 E
Cooper, Karang 3 22 S 107 35 E Dhiorix Korinthou 37 57 N 22 57E
Coquimbo 29 57 S 71 21 W Diamante Rock 12 21 N 124 12 E
Corner Inlet 38 50 S 146 30 E Diamond Shoal Lighthouse 35 09 N 75 18 W
Coromandel coast 15 00 N 80 00 E 70 Diana, Karang-karang 3 03 N 107 46 E
268
 GAZETTEER

Diego Garcia 7 13 S 72 23 E Estrecho = Strait;

Diego Ramirez, Islas 56 30 S 68 44 W see proper name
Dilli, Mount 12 01 N 75 12E Eua Island 21 21 S 174 56 W
Dingtai Wan (Tingtai Bay) 24 1 5 N 118 05 E Europa Point 36 06 N 5 21 W
Dinh, Mui (Cap Padaran) 11 22 N 109 01 E Europa, lie 22 20 S 40 20E
Direction Bank 18 20 N 72 15 E Ewab or Kai, Pulau-pulau 5 40 S 132 50 E
Discovery East Bank;
see Gosong Mampango 3 35 S 109 11 E
Discovery, Batu-batu 2 53 S 106 56 E 10
Diu Head 20 41 N 70 50 E Fasroe Islands; see Faroyar 62 00 N 7 00W
Dixon Entrance 54 30 N 132 30 E* Fair Isle 59 30 N 1 40 W
Dokan 0 58 S 105 39 E Fakarava, Passe de 16 00 S 145 50 W
Dondra Head (10 miles S of) 5 45 N 80 36 E* Falkland Islands: Stanley 51 40 S 57 49 W*
Dongfushan (Tung-fu Shan) 30 08 N 122 46 E 15 Falloden Hall Shoal 1 21 N 104 19 E
Dongyin Dao False Bay 34 15S 18 40E
(Tung-yin Shan) 26 22 N 120 30 E False Cape or Ujung Salah 8 25 S 137 39 E
Douala 3 54 N 9 32 E* False Point: Orissa coast 20 20 N 86 44E
Double-headed Shot Cays 23 57 N 80 28 W Fanning Island; see Teraina 3 51 N 159 22 W
Drake Passage 60 00 S 67 00 W 20 Farewell, Cape: New Zealand 40 30 S 173 41 E
Dry Tortugas 24 04 N 82 55 W Farilhoes, Os 39 29 N 9 33W
N-bound from 24 25 N 83 00 W* Farquhar Group 10 10 S 51 10E
S-bound to 24 30 N 83 05 W* Farrall Rocks 15 50 N 82 19 W
Due de Gloucester, Fartak, Ra's 15 38 N 52 16 E
Groupe d'lles 20 38 S 143 1 7 W 25 Farvel, Kap 59 46 N 43 55 W
Ducie Island 24 40 S 124 48 W Farvel, Kap (75 miles S of) 58 30 N 44 00 W*
Duddell Shoal 9 57 S 136 00 E Fastnet Rock (5 miles S of) 51 18N 9 36W*
Dumali Point 13 07 N 121 33 E Fernando Poo; see Bioko 3 30 N 8 40E
Duncan Passage 11 05 N 92 45 E Fernando de Noronha,
Durai 0 32 N 103 36 E 30 Ilha de 3 50 S 32 37W
Durban 29 51 S 31 06 E* Ferrol, Ria de El 43 28 N 8 20 W
Durham Shoal 16 07 S 173 49 W Fifty Fathoms Flat, The 18 1 5 N 71 25 E
Durian Besar 0 43 N 103 43 E Fiji Islands 18 00 S 180 00
Durian Kecil Filippo Reef 5 31 S 151 40W
(Pulau Durian Ketjil) 0 44 N 103 40 E 35 Finisterre, Cabo 42 53 N 9 16 W
Durian, Selat 0 40 N 103 40 E Five Fathom Banks 3 48 S 106 29 E
Dutch Harbor 53 56 N 166 29 W* Fleurieu Group 40 30 S 144 45 E
Dwarka 22 1 5 N 68 58 E Flint Island 46 11 N 59 46W
Florence Adelaide, Karang 2 04 S 108 05 E
40 Flores: Eastern Archipelago 8 40 S 121 30 E
Flores, Ilha das:
Arquipelago dos Acores 39 25 N 31 15W
East Lamina Channel 22 1 3 N 114 10 E Flores, Selat 8 20 S 123 00 E
East London 33 02 S 27 57 E Florida Reefs 25 00 N 8O3OW
Eastern Banks; 45 Florida, Straits of 27 00 N 79 49 W*
see Gosong Timur 0 40 N 103 50 E Fogo, Ilha do 14 55 N 24 25 W
Eastern Fields 10 10 S 145 40 E Fokai Point; see Fu-chi Chiao 22 33 N 114 55 E
Eastern (Greig) Channel: Fonseca, Golfo de 13 ION 87 45W
Selat Karimata 1 15S 109 1 3 E Foochow; see Fuzhou 26 05 N 119 18E
Ebon Atoll 4 38 N 168 43 E 50 Foroyar (Faeroe Islands) 62 00 N 7 00W
Eddystone 43 52 S 146 59 E Fortaleza 3 43 S 38 31 W
Eight Degree Channel 7 24 N 73 00 E Foster Islets 40 44 S 147 58 E
El = The; see proper name Four, Chenal de 48 27 N 4 51 W
Elafonisou, Steno 36 25 N 22 57 E* Fourcroy, Cape 11 48 S 130 01 E
Elizabeth Reef 29 55 S 159 02 E 55 Foveaux Strait 46 35 S 168 00 E
Ellice Island Group; Fowey Rocks 25 35 N 80 06W
see Tuvalu 8 00 S 179 00 E Fox Banks;
Enewetak Atoll 11 30 N 162 15 E see Gosong Aling 3 35 S 110 15E
Engano, Cape 18 35 N 122 08 E Francisco, Punta 27 02 S 70 50W
Enggano, Pulau 5 30 S 102 20 E 60 Fratelli, Les 37 18 N 9 24E
Enghela, Ras 37 21 N 9 45 E Frederick Hendrick, Cape 42 52 S 147 59 E
English Channel 50 00 N 3 00 W Frederick Henry Bay 42 55 S 147 35 E
Ensenada=Bay; Frederick Reef 21 00 S 154 25 E
see proper name Frederik Hendrik Klippen;
Erimo Misaki 41 56 N 143 14E 65 see Karang Ular 1 58 S 104 57 E
Ernest Legouve Reef 35 12 S 150 40 W Freetown 8 30 N 13 19 W*
Esan Misaki 41 49 N 141 HE Fremantle 32 02 S 115 42 E*
Espartel, Cabo 35 47 N 5 56 W French Frigate Shoals 23 45 N 166 10W
Espiritu Santo Island 15 20 S 166 50 E Frio, Cabo: Brazil 23 01 S 42 00W
Estados, Isla de Los 54 50 S 64 10W 70 Frio, Cape: Namibia 18 26 S 12 00E

269
 GAZETTEER

Fu-chi Chiao (Fokai Point) 22 33 N 114 55 E Great Abaco Island 26 25 N 77 05 W

Fuerteventura, Isla de 28 2ON 14 00W Great Bahama Bank 23 30 N 78 00 W
Furneaux Group 4 00S 148 15 E Great Channel: Selat Sunda 6 30 S 105 15E
Fuzhou (Foochow) 26 05N 119 18 E Great Coco Island 14 07 N 93 23 E
Great Fish Point 33 32 S 27 07 E
Great Inagua Island 21 00 N 73 20 W
Great Nicobar Island 7 00 N 93 50 E
Gabo Island 37 34 S 149 55 E Great North East Channel 9 20 S 144 00 E
Gaferut Island 9 14N 145 36 E 10 Great Western Torres 11 48 N 97 30 E
Galangbaru Green Point 33 54 S 18 24 E
(Pulau Galang-baru) 0 40 N 104 15E Greig Channel;
Galang, Karang 1 09 N 104 11 E see Eastern Channel 1 15S 109 13E
Galera, Isla 8 12N 78 47 W Greig, Karang 0 52 S 108 33 E
Galite, lies de la 37 30 N 8 55 E 75 Greig Shoals 0 54 S 108 32 E
Galle, Point de 6 01 N 80 12E Grey town;
Galleons Passage 10 57 N 60 55 W* see San Juan del Norte 10 57 N 83 43 W
Gambia, The 13 30 N 16 00 W Gripholen 63 1 5 N 7 37 E
Gannet Passage 10 35 S 141 50 E Grupo = Group of islands;
Gardner Pinnacles 25 00 N 168 00 W 20 see proper name
Gaspar, Pulau; see Gelasa 2 20 S 107 04 E Guadalcanal 9 40 S 160 00 E
Gata, Cabo de 36 43 N 2 11 W Guadalupe, Isla de 29 00 N 118 17W
Gebe 0 06 S 129 26 E Guadeloupe 16 15N 61 30 W
Gedeh, Tanjung: Jawa 6 46 S 105 13 E Guaira, Puerto La 10 36 N 66 56 W
Gedeh, Tanjung: Sumatera 2 30 S 104 55 E 25 Guam 13 27 N 144 35 E*
Gelasa (Pulau Gaspar) 2 20 S 107 04 E Guanos, Punta 23 09 N 81 39 W
Gelasa, Batu 2 25 S 107 03 E Guardafui, Capo;
Gelasa, Selat 2 53 S 107 18 E* see Raas Caseyr 11 50 N 51 17E
Genova 44 23 N 8 53 E* Guardian Bank 9 30 N 87 30 W
Genting, Karang: 30 Guascama, Punta 2 37 N 78 25 W
Selat Durian 0 40 S 103 43 E Guinea, Gulf of 2 00 N 3 00 E
Genting, Karang: Gundal, Pasir 6 27 S 105 42 E
Selat Gelasa 3 34 S 107 41 E Gunong, Gunung = Mountain;
Genting, Tanjung 3 14 S 107 36 E see proper name
Geographe Reef 34 18 S 114 59 E 35 Gusung = Shoal, sandbank;
Georges Shoal 41 40 N 67 44 W see proper name
Georgetown: Guyana 6 50 N 58 10W Guyana 5 00 N 60 00 W
Geresik (Pulau Gersik) 3 00 S 107 16E Guyane Francaise 4 00 N 53 00 W
Germaine Bank 5 09 N 107 53 W Guyaquil, Golfo de 3 00 S 80 00 W
Gersik, Pulau; see Geresik 3 00 S 107 16 E 40
Geyser Reef 12 22 S 46 25 E
Ghana 7 00 N 1 00 W
GRawdex (Gozo) 36 03 N 14 15E
Gia, Gosong 5 13S 113 17 E Haaien Reef 3 29 S 107 07 E
Gibraltar, Strait of 45 Habana 23 ION 82 22 W*
(6 miles S of Europa Point) 36 00 N 5 21 W* Hadd, Ra's al 22 30 N 59 48 E
Gilbert Group: Kiribati 0 00 174 00 E Hafun, Ras;
Giliyang (Pulau Iyang) 7 00 S 114 11 E see Raas Xaafuun 10 26 N 51 25 E
Gironde, La 45 40 N 1 28 W* Haimen Wan 23 08 N 116 35 E
Gladstone 23 44 S 151 21 E 50 Hainan Dao 20 ION 110 20 E
Glorieuses, lies 11 35 S 47 20 E Haitan Dao (Hai-t'an Tao) 25 30 N 119 45 E
Golfo = Gulf; Haiti 19 00 N 72 30 W
see proper name Hakodate 41 46 N 140 41 E
Golovnina, Proliv 48 12 N 153 15E Halifax 44 31 N 63 30 W*
Good Hope, Cape of 34 21 S 18 30 E 55 Halmahera 0 30 N 128 00 E
Good Hope, Cape of Hambre, Puerto del 53 40 S 70 55 W
(145 miles S of) 36 45 S 19 00 E* Hampton Roads 42 54 N 70 49 W
Gosal, Terumbu 5 53 S 105 54 E Han Jiang 23 20 N 116 45 E
Gosong, gosung = Shoal, Hancock, Karang 3 34 S 107 05 E
sandbank; see proper name 60 Hangklip, Cape 34 28 S 18 50 E
Goto Retto 32 50 N 129 00 E Hao Wong Chiao;
Gough Island 40 20 S 9 55 W see Biao Jiao 23 14 N 116 48 E
Gozo; see GRawdex 36 03 N 14 15E Harans Reef 21 32 S 168 54 W
Gracias a Dias, Cabo 15 00 N 83 10W Hatteras, Cape 35 14 N 75 31 W
Graham Land 66 00 S 64 00 W 65 Hawaii 19 40 N 155 30 W
Gran Canaria, Isla de 28 00 N 15 30 W Haymet Rocks 27 11 S 160 13 W
Grand Banks of Haynes, Karang 2 34 N 108 51 E
Newfoundland 45 30 N 52 00 W Hecate Strait 53 00 N 131 00 W
Grand Cayman 19 20 N 81 15W Helen Mar Reef 1 07 N 103 46 E
Gravois, Pointe de 18 01 N 73 54 W 70 Helen Shoal 19 1 2 N 113 53 E

270
 GAZETTEER

Heluputan, Karang Iyang, Pulau;

(Admiral Stellingwerf Reef) 0 38 N 105 08 E see Giliyang 7 00S 114 11 E
Henderson Island 24 22 S 128 19W Izmir 28 25 N 27 00 E*
Hereheretue Atoll 19 52 S 145 00 W 5
Hervey Islands 19 15S 158 55 W
Highland of Saint John 20 04 N 72 50 E
Hilo 19 44 N 155 04 W Jabung, Tanjung 1 01 S 104 22 E
Hinatuan Passage 9 40 N 125 45 E Jaga Utara
Hippogriffe Reefs; 10 (Noordwachter) 5 12S 106 27 E
see Karang Suji 3 34 S 106 55 E Jailolo, Selat 0 06N 129 10 E*
Hispaniola 19 00 N 71 00 W Jajar, Karang 6 41 S 105 11 E
Ho Chi Minh City Jakarta 6O3S 106 53 E*
(Sai Gon) 10 18N 107 04 E* Jamaica 18 00N 77 30 W
Hobart 42 58 S 147 23 E* 15 Jambi, Sungai 1 00 S 104 00 E
Hog Island or Shirali 14 00 N 74 29 E James Shoal;
Hokkaido 43 00 N 143 00 E see Beting Serupai 3 58 N 112 16E
Hon = Island; Jan Mayen 71 00 N 8 30W
see proper name Jang, Tanjuns 0 18S 105 00 E
Hong Kong 22 17N 114 10 E* 20 Jankat Lajang;
Hong Trung Nho see Layang Layang 5 18 S 106 04 E
(Les Deux Freres) 8 35 N 106 05 E Jarum, Malang 1 06 N 104 13 E
Honolulu 21 17N 157 53 W* Jarvis Island 0 23S 160 01 W
Honshu 36 00 N 138 00 E Jasiired= Island;
Hope Bay; 25 see proper name
see Qiwang Wan 23 12N 116 43 E Jason Rock;
Hormuz, Strait of 26 27 N 56 32 E* see Batu Karang Pematan 5 24S 106 16 E
Home, lies de 14 20 S 178 05 W Jati, Tanjung 2 58 S 106 03 E
Homos, Cabo de Jawa 7 00S 110 00 E
(5 miles S of) 56 04 S 67 15 W* 30 Jelai, Gosong
Horsburgh Light 1 20 N 104 24 E (Clemencia Ban! ) 3 24 S 110 09 E
Horta 38 32 N 28 36 W Jeremias, Playa de 35 44 N 5 55W
Hout Bay 34 04 S 18 21 E Jiangjun Ao (Red Bay) 24 01 N 117 51 E
Houtman Abrolhas 28 35 S 113 45 E Jiapeng Liedao
Howe, Cape 37 30 S 149 59 E 35 (Chia-p'eng Ch'un-tao) 21 53 N114 03 E
Hsia-Men; see Xiamen 24 27 N 118 04 E Jicarita, Isla 7 13N 81 48 W
Hudson Bay 60 00 N 85 00 W Jiddah 21 29 N 39 11 E
Hugli River 22 00 N 88 00 E Jigu Jiao (Amherst Rocks) 31 ION 122 23 E
Hunter, lie 22 24 S 172 05 E Jintotlo Channel 11 48 N123 05 E
Hyeres, lies d' 43 00 N 6 20 E 40 Jintotlo Island 11 51 N123 07 E
Johor (Johore) Shoal 1 19 N104 04 E
Jomard Entrance 11 15S 152 06 E
Jora, Bukit 0 43N 103 43 E
Juan Fernandez,
lie = Island; 45 Archipielago de 33 40S 78 50 W
see proper name Juan de Fuca Strait 48 30 N 124 47 W*
Ilha= Island; Juan de Nova, lie 17 03S 42 42E
see proper name Judgement Rocks 39 31 S 147 08 E
Iloilo 10 42 N 122 36 E* Jupiter Inlet 26 57N 80 04W
Ince Point 10 30 S 142 19E 50
Indispensable Reefs 12 30 S 160 25 E
Indispensable Strait 9 00 S 160 30 E
Indreleia: Ka Lae 18 55 N 155 41 W
N end 71 ION 25 47 E Kaashidoo (Karuivaj
S end 58 58 N 5 45 E 55 Channel 5O5N 73 24 E
Inishtrahull (5 miles N of) 55 31 N 7 15 W* Kabia, Pulau;
Inland Sea, see Seto Naiki 34 ION 133 30 E see Pulau Salayar 6 30 S 120 29 E
Inubo Saki 35 42 N 140 52 E Kachchh (Kutch),
Investigator Strait 35 30 S 137 00 E Gulf of 22 40N 69 30 E
15 Tori (Tori) Shima: 60 Kachchigadh 22 20N 68 58E
Amami GuntS 27 52 N 128 14 E Kadavu (Kandavu) Passage 18 45S 178 00 E
Iquique 20 12 S 70 10W* Kahoolawe Island 2O33N 156 36 W
Irian Jaya 3 00 S 134 00 E Kai or Ewab,
Isabella Bank; Pulau-pulau 5 40 S 132 50 E
see Gosong Tula 0 53 N 104 15E 65 Kait; Karang 3 27 S 107 00 E
Isla, Isola= Island; Kaiwi Channel 21 12 N 157 40 W
see proper name Kaju Ara; see Kayuara 1 32 N 106 27 E
Istanbul 41 01 N 29 00 E Kalangbahu
Isumrud Strait 4 45 S 145 50 E (Pulau Kalangbau) 3O2S 107 10 E
Iwan, Karang 1 40 S 106 18E 70 Kalao 7 17 S 120 55 E
271
 GAZETTEER

Kalb, R'as al 14 02 N 48 41 E Khambat (Khambhat)

Kalihat, Terumbu; (Cambay), Gulf of 20 30 N 72 00 E
see Terumbu Koliot 5 55 S 105 49 E Khanderi Island 18 42 N 72 49 E
Kalingapatnam 18 1 9 N 84 08 E 5 Khawr al Amaya:
Kalpeni 10 06 N 73 39 E Pilot ground 29 25 N 49 06 E
Kameleon, Batu 0 31 N 104 07 E Khoai, Hon 8 26 N 104 49 E
Kandangbalak 5 53 S 105 45 E Kii Suido 34 00 N 134 50 E
Kandavu Passage; Kiluan, Teluk 5 47 S 105 06 E
see Kadavu Passage 18 45 S 178 00 E 10 Kinaguitman 12 31 N 124 17E
Kangean, Pulau-pulau 6 50 S 115 25 E King Island 39 50 S 144 00 E
Kanmon Kaikyo 33 58 N 130 52 E Kingston: Jamaica 17 54 N 76 44 W*
Kaoh Kusrovie 11 07 N 102 47 E Kinkasan To 38 18N 141 35 E
Kap = Cape; Kiribati:
see proper name 15 Gilbert Group 0 00 174 00 E
Kapas, Pulau 5 13N 103 16E Phoenix Group 4 00 S 173 00 W
Karachi 24 46 N 66 57 E* Ko = Island;
Karang Pematan, Batu see proper name
(Jason Rock) 5 24 S 106 16E Kofiau 1 10S 129 50 E
Karang = Coral, Reef; 20 Koh Tang 10 18N 103 08 E
see proper name Kolepon, Karang;
Karas Besar 0 45 N 104 20 E see Karang Ular 1 58 S 104 57 E
Karas Kecil Koliot (Kalihat),
(Pulau Karas-ketjil) 0 44 N 104 22 E Terumbu 5 55 S 105 49 E
Kardiva Channel; 25 Konkan Coast 17 00 N 73 00 E
see Kaashidoo Channel 5 05 N 73 24 E Korean Strait 34 30 N 129 30 E
Karimata, Pulau-pulau 1 43 S 108 54 E Korekrapat 0 41 N 104 20 E
Karimata, Selat 1 43 S 108 34 E* Kosciusko Bank 10 26 S 179 30 E
Karimun Besar Koti, Alur Pelayaran 2 40 N 109 00 E
(Pulau Karimun-besar) 1 05 N 103 20 E 30 Krah, Ko 10 15N 99 15E
Karimun Kecil Krakatau, Pulau;
(Pulau Karimun-ketjil) 1 09 N 102 23 E see Rakata 6 09 S 105 26 E
Karpathou, Steno 35 55 N 27 30 E Krawang, Pulau;
Karsogu, Pulau; see Pulau Kerawang 1 44 S 109 21 E
see Perasi Besar 0 43 N 103 39 E 35 Kualacenaku (Tembilahan),
Karwar Head 14 48 N 74 05 E Teluk (Amphitrite Baai) 0 10S 103 45 E
Kasenga, Pulau 3 03 S 107 21 E Kueel (Pulau Kuel) 2 59 S 107 08 E
Kassolanatumbi, Tanjung 5 16 N 123 14E Kulon, Ujung 6 45 S 105 20 E
Kata, Karang 0 46 N 104 25 E Kumuhaki, Cape 19 31 N 154 49 W
Katanglingga, Pulau 0 30 N 104 25 E 40 Kuria Muria Islands 17 30 N 56 05 E
Kateman 0 16N 103 40 E Kuril'skiye Ostrova 48 00 N 153 00 E
Katimabongo Kusaie Island 5 20 N 163 00 E
(Limaubungkok), Tanjung 2 20 S 105 14 E Kusu Ma Doro or
Kauai Channel 21 50 N 158 45 W Selat Patinti 0 25 S 127 40 E
Kawio, Kepulauan 4 40 S 125 25 E 45 Kutch, Gulf of;
Kayuara (Kaju Ara) 1 32 N 106 27 E see Gulf of Kachchh 22 40 N 69 30 E
Kazan Rett5 25 00 N 141 20 E Ky Van, Mui 10 23 N 107 16E
Kebatu 3 48 S 108 04 E Kyushu 33 00 N 131 00 E
Kebua, Karang 6 22 S 105 48 E
Keeling or Cocos Islands 12 05 S 96 52 E 50
Keith Reef 37 49 N 10 55 E
Kekek (Kekik) 1 30 S 128 30 E La Guaira, Puerto 10 36 N 66 56 W
Keladi 2 54 S 107 03 E La Perouse Strait
Kelang 3 13 S 127 44 E (Soya KaikyS) 45 45 N 142 00 E
Kelang, Selat 3 15S 127 37 E 55 La, Le, Les = The;
Kelapan 2 51 S 106 50 E see proper name
Kelemar 2 58 S 107 13E Labu, Tanjung: Selat Bangka 2 58 S 106 20 E
Kelian, Tanjung 2 OSS 105 08 E Labu, Tanjung: Selat Leplia 2 57 S 106 55 E
Kelso Bank 24 00 S 159 40 E Laccadive Islands;
Kembung 2 51 S 107 20 E 60 see Lakshadweep 12 00 N 72 30 E
Kenn Reef 21 15S 155 48 E Lada, Teluk;
Kent Group 39 30 S 147 20 E see Teluk Miskam 6 30 S 105 45 E
Kepulauan = Group of islands; Lae 6 45 S 147 00 E
see proper name Lagoon Reef 9 27 S 144 54 E
Kerawang (Krawang), Pulau 1 44 S 109 21 E 65 Lagos 6 23 N 3 24 E*
Kerguelen, lies 49 00 S 69 30 E Laguna Inferior 16 15N 94 45 W
Kermedec Islands 30 30 S 178 30 W Lahi, Ava 21 00 S 175 10W
Keuchenius Reef 2 02 S 106 37 E Lajah, Kepulauan;
Khalij al Maslrah or see Pulau-pulau Layah 1 35 S 109 20 E
Gulf of Maslrah 19 30 N 58 00 E 70 Lakeba (Lakemba) Passage 17 50 S 178 30 W

272
 GAZETTEER

Lakes Entrance 37 54 S 147 59 E Lisboa 38 36 N 9 24 W

Lakshadweep Lishi Liedao
(Laccadive Islands) 12 00N 72 30 E (Li-shih Lieh-tao) 23 47 N 117 43 E
Lamakera, Selat 8 25 S 123 20 E Litke, Proliv 59 00 N 163 30 E
Lampung, Teluk 5 40 S 105 20 E Little Andaman Island 10 40 N 92, 30 E
Lances, Playa de los 36 01 N 5 37 W Little Bahama Bank 27 00 N 78 30 W
Landfall Island 13 39N 93 01 E Little Paternoster;
Langara Island 54 15 N 133 03 W see Pulau-pulau Balabalagan 2 15 S 117 30 E
Langir, Kepulauan 2 48S 107 22 E 10 Liverpool 53 25 N 3 00 W
Langkuas 2 32S 107 37 E Livorno 43 33 N 10 19E
Lanrick, Karang 1 53 S 106 57 E Lizard Point 49 58 N 5 12W
Larabe, Karang 3 32 S 107 10E Lobam 0 59 N 104 15E
Las Palmas 28 07N 15 24 W* Lobam Kecil
Laughlan Islands 9 17 S 153 41 E 15 (Pulau Lobam-ketjil) 0 59 N 104 13E
Laurel Reef, Lobito 12 19 S 13 35 E*
see Batu Butunga 4 40S 117 10E Lobos de Afuera, Islas 6 57 S 80 42 W
Laurot (Laut Kecil), Loedai; see Ludai 3 09 s 107 44 E
Pulau-pulau 4 50 S 115 45 E Lolo, Karang 0 59 N 104 13E
Laut, Pulau: 20 Lombok 8 30 s 116 30 E
S end Selat Makasar 3 40 S 116 15E Lombok, Selat 8 47 s 115 44 E*
Layah (Lajah), London Reefs:
Pulau-pulau 1 35 S 109 20 E West Reef 8 51 N 112 13E
Layang Layang Long Island 40 50 N 73 00 W
(Jankat Lajang) 5 18 S 106 04 E 25 Lopez, Cap 0 37 S 8 43 E
Layaran, Pasir 7 47S 122 18E Lord Howe Island 31 32 s 159 05 E
Le Cher Bank 8 29 S 136 17E Losin, Ko 7 20 N 101 59 E
Le Maire, Estrecho de 54 50 S 65 00 W Louisa Reef 6 20 N 113 14 E
Leeuwin, Cape Louisiade Archipelago 11 00 S 153 00 E
(20 miles WSW of) 34 28S 114 45 E* 30 Luanda, Porto de 8 47 s 13 16E
Leeward Islands 16 00N 62 00 W Lubang Islands 13 45 N 120 10 E
Legon Semadang 6 38S 105 14 E Lucipara Island;
Legundi 5 50 S 105 16E see Maspari 3 13 S 106 13E
Legundi, Selat 5 49S 105 13E Lucipara, Alur Pelayaran
Leixoes 41 ION 8 42 W* 35 (Selat Maspari) 3 08 s 106 06 E
Lelari (Panggung), Ludai (Loedai) 3 09 s 107 44 E
Tanjung 2 49S 105 57 E Luzon 16 00 N 121 00 E
Lema Channel 22 07 N 114 15E Luzon Strait 20 00 N 121 00 E
Leman, Pulau-pulau 1 17S 108 54 E Lynn, Karang;
Leman, Karang 40 see Karang Basa 5 12 S 106 12E
(Rifleman Reef) 0 28N 104 28 E Lyra Reef 1 50 s 153 25 E
Lentok Panjang Lyttleton 43 36 s 172 49 E
(Pulau Pandjang) 2 45N 108 55 E
Lepar, Pulau 2 57 S 106 48 E
Leplia, Selat 2 53 S 106 58 E 45
L'Esperance Rock 31 21 S 178 50 W
Lesser Antilles 15 00 N 61 00 W Maan Liedao
Liaodong Wan (Ma-an Lien-tao) 30 47 N 122 42 E
(Gulf of Liao Tung) 40 00N 121 00 E Maatsuyker Islands 43 36 S 146 20 E
Liberia 6 00N 10 00 W 50 Macauley Island 30 14 s 178 26 W
Libreville O25N 9 17 E* Macclesfield Bank 15 50 N 114 30 E
Lihou Reef 17 20 S 152 00 E Macias Nguema Biyogo;
Li-ma Ch'un-tao; see Bioko 3 30 N 8 45 E
see Dangan Liedao 22 02N 114 13E Maddang, Pulau;
Lima, Pulau-pulau: 55 see Medang 8 09 S 117 23 E
Selat Gelasa 3O3S 107 24 E Madeira, Ilha de 32 40 N 17 00 W
Lima, Pulau-pulau Madras 13 07 N 80 20 E*
(Kepulaun Masalima) Madura 7 00 S 113 30 E
(Siri Islands): Maestro de Campo Island 12 56 N 121 43 E
Selat Makasar 5 05 S 117 04 E 60 Maewo Island 15 10 S 168 05 E
Limaubungkok, Tanjung; Magallanes, Estrecho de
see Tanjung Katimabongko 2 20 S 105 14 E E entrance
Limende (Limendo), Selat 3 00 S 107 12E (3 miles S of Dungeness) 52 27 S 68 26 W*
Linapacan Strait 11 37 N 119 57 E W entrance
Lindesnes (4 miles S of) 57 55 N 7 03 E* 65 (5 miles NNW of Cabo Pilar) 52 43 s 74 41 W*
Lingga, Kepulauan 0 00 104 30 E Magdalena, Karang 2 02 s 107 00 E
Lingga, Pulau 0 10S 104 35 E Maharashtra coast 17 30 N 73 10E
Lion's Head 33 56 S 18 23 E Mahe Island:
Lions, Gulf of 43 00 N 4 00 E Seychelles Group 4 35 s 55 30 E*
Lipata Point 12 32N 124 16E 70 Mahia Peninsula 39 10 s 177 55 E

273
 GAZETTEER

Mait Island; Maslrah,

see Jasiired Maydh 11 14 N 47 13E Gulf of or Khali) al 19 30 N 58 00 E
Maja, Pulau; see Maya 1 08 S 109 35 E Maspari (Lucipara Island) 3 13S 106 13E
Makasar, Selat 2 00 S 118 00 E 5 Maspari, Selat;
Makassar; see Ujung Pandang 5 08 S 119 22 E see Alur Pelayaran Lucipara 3 08 S 106 06 E
Makran coast 25 00 N 63 00 E Mataiva 12 50 S 148 45 W
Mala, Bahia 36 ION 5 20 W Matanzas, Puerto de 23 03 N 81 34 W
Mala, Punta (Cabo) 7 28 N 80 00 W Matarani 16 59 S 72 07 W
Malabar coast 11 00 N 76 00 E 10 Matthew, lie 22 21 S 171 21 E
Malabata, Punta 35 49 N 5 45 W Maui 20 45 N 156 20 W
Malacca Strait 4 00 N 100 00 E Mauke 20 08 S 157 23 W
Malaita 9 00 S 161 00 E Mauritania 20 00 N 16 00 W
Malang = Reef, shoal; Mauritius 20 10 S 57 30 E
see proper name 15 Maya (Pulau Maja) 1 08 S 109 35 E
Malang, Batu 3 15S 107 28 E Mayaguana Passage 22 30 N 73 20 W
Malapascua Island 11 20 N 124 07 E Maydh, Jasiired
Malawali Channel 7 00 N 117 21 E (Mait Island) 11 1 4 N 47 13E
Maiden Island 4 00 S 154 55 W Mayotte, lie 12 50 S 45 10 E
Maldives 4 00 N 73 00 E 20 Mazatlan 23 11 N 106 26 W
Malpelo, Isla 4 00 N 81 35 W Me Shima 32 00 N 128 21 E
Malta 35 55 N 14 33 E* Medang (Pulau Maddang) 8 09 S 117 23 E
Mampango, Gosong Medang, Karang 3 22 S 106 56 E
(Discovery East Bank) 3 35 S 109 H E Medusa 5 47 S 105 16E
Mangaia 21' 53 S 157 55 W 25 Meizhou (Mei-chou) Wan 25 00 N 119 05 E
Mangalore 12 50 N 74 50 E Mekong River 10 50 N 106 18E
Manggar, Terumbu Melbourne:
(Karang Batuan) Port of: 37 50 S 144 54 E
(Cirencester Bank) 2 54 S 108 57 E Port Phillip: 38 20 S 144 34 E*
Mangkut 3 04 S 110 12E 30 Meledang 1 29 S 109 23 E
Manila 14 32 N 120 56 E* Mellish Reef 17 25 S 155 51 E
Manilang (Manjilang) 0 37 N 103 43 E Melvill, Karang 0 52 N 103 37 E
Manipa 3 20 S 127 35 E Melville Island 11 30 S 131 00 E
Manipa, Selat 3 20 S 127 22 E* Mendanau 2 52 S 107 25 E
Manjilang; see Manilang 0 37 N 103 43 E 35 Mendarik 1 19N 107 02 E
Manoel Luis, Recife 0 50 S 44 15W Mendocino, Cape 40 26 N 124 25 W
Manora Point 24 47 N 66 59 E Menjangan, Tanjung 3 50 S 105 57 E
Mantang: Pulau 0 47 N 104 33 E Menjangan, Beting
Manua Islands 14 13S 169 35 E (Gosong Arend) 3 45 S 106 12E
Manuae or Scilly Island: 40 Mentawi, Pulau-pulau 1 35 S 99 15E
lies Sous-le-Vent 16 30 S 154 40 W Menumbing 2 07 S 105 10 E
Manuae: Merak Besar 5 56 S 105 59 E
Southern Cook Islands 19 15S 158 55 W Merapas 0 56 N 104 55 E
Manuk 5 33 S 130 18E Mergui 12 26 N 98 36 E
Manzanillo 19 05 N 104 20 W 45 Mermaid Rock 40 23 S 144 57 E
Mapor 1 00 N 104 50 E Merun, Tanjung;
Maputo, Baia de 26 00 S 32 50 E see Tanjung Murung 3 02 S 106 54 E
Marang Bolo 3 15S 107 31 E Merundung 2 0 4 N 109 06 E
Marettimo, Isola 37 58 N 12 03 E Mesanak 0 25 N 104 32 E
Maria Reigersbergen Banks; 50 Messina, Stretto di 38 12N 15 36 E*
see Gosong Sakunci 7 50 S 117 15E Mewstone 43 45 S 146 22 E
Maria Theresa Reef 36 50 S 136 39 W Midai 3 00 N 107 47 E
Maria Van Diemen, Cape 34 29 S 172 38 E Middle Channel:
Maria, lies 21 48 S 154 42 W Singapore Strait 1 22 N 104 24 E
Mariana Islands 17 00 N 146 00 E 55 Middleburg Reef;
Mariato, Punta 7 12N 80 53 W see Karang Tengah 0 51 N 103 34 E
Marinduque Island 13 20 N 122 00 E Middleton Reef 29 28 S 159 04 E
Marotiri Islands 27 55 S 143 30 E Midway Islands 28 13N 177 21 W
Marquises, lies 9 00 S 140 00 W Mikomoto Shima 34 35 N 138 57 E
Marseille 43 18 N 5 20 E* 60 Min Kiang estuary;
Marshall Islands 10 00 N 170 00 E see Minjiang Kou 26 05 N119 52 E
Martin Vaz, Ilhas 20 31 S 28 51 W Mindanao 8 00 N125 00 E
Marutea Sud 21 30 S 135 35 W Mindoro 13 00 N121 10E
Masalembo Besar 5 33 S 114 27 E Mindoro Strait 13 00 N120 00 E
Masalembo Kecil 5 25 S 114 25 E 65 Minerva Reefs 23 45 S179 00 W
Masalima, Kepulauan; Minicoy 8 18N 73 02 E
see Pulau-pulau Lima: Minjiang Kou
Selat Makasar 5 05 S 117 04 E (Min Kiang estuary) 26 05 N 119 52 E
Masatiga 0 56 S 109 15E Miskam (Lada), Teluk
Masbate Island 12 1 5 N 123 30 E 70 (Peper Baai) 6 30 S 105 45 E

274
 GAZETTEER

Miskito (Mosquito) Channel 14 20 N 83 1 0 W Nansei Shoto 27 00 N 129 00 E

Misool; see Batnme 1 55 S 130 05 E Nantucket Lanby 40 20 N 69 30 W
Mississippi River: Nanuku Passage 16 40 S 179 10W
Gulf Outlet Channel 29 25 N 88 58 W* 5 Nanumea Atoll 5 40 S 176 07 E
South Pass 28 59 N 89 07 W* Napoli 40 50 N 14 17 E*
Misteriosa Bank 19 00 N 83 43 W Naranjo Islands 12 21 N 124 02 E
Mocamedes, Baia de; Narcondam Island 13 25 N 94 15E
see Baia Namibe 15 10S 12 07 E Natuna Besar
Mombasa 4 05 S 39 43 E* 10 (Pulau Bunguran Besar) 4 00 N 108 10 E
Momfafa, Tanjung 0 18S 131 20 E Natuna Besar, Pulau-pulau 4 00 N 108 00 E
Momparang, Pulau-pulau 2 35 S 108 45 E Naturaliste, Cape 33 32 S 115 01 E
Mona Passage 18 20 N 67 50 W* Naturaliste, Reefs 33 13S 115 02 E
Monrovia 6 21 N 10 50 W* Nauru 0 31 S 166 56 E
Montagu Island 36 15S 150 14 E 15 Navassa Island 18 24 N 75 01 W
Montevideo, Puerto de 34 54 S 56 15W Near Islands 52 40 N 173 00 E
Montreal 45 30 N 73 40 W Necker Island 23 35 N 164 45 W
Moonlight Head 38 46 S 143 14 E Negrais, Cape 16 03 N 94 12E
Moorea 17 30 S 149 50 W Negro, Cabo 15 40 S 11 55 E
Morane 23 10S 137 08 W 20 Negros 10 30 N 123 00 E
Morant Cays 17 25 N 76 00 W Nelson, Cape 38 26 S 141 32 E
Mortlock Islands 5 25 S 154 20 E Netscher Shoal 1 09 N 104 15E
Mosquito Channel; New Britain 5 40 S 151 00 E
see Miskito Channel 14 20 N 83 10W New Caledonia;
Mossel Bay 34 11 S 22 09 E 25 see Nouvelle-Caledonie 21 15S 165 20 E
Moulmein 16 30 N 97 38 E New Hebrides;
Mozambique Channel 17 00 S 41 30 E see Vanuatu 17 00 S 168 00 E
Mozambique, Porto de 15 05 S 40 43 E New Ireland 3 20 S 152 00 E
Mubutlaut 0 49 N 104 18E New Orleans: 29 58 N 90 05 W
Muci (Pulau Mutji) 0 32 S 104 02 E 30 Mississippi River
Muhammad, Ras 27 44 N 34 15 E Gulf Outlet Channel 29 25 N 88 58 W*
Mui = Cape; South Pass 28 59 N 89 07 W»
see proper name New Shoal; see Bajo Nuevo 21 50 N 92 05 W
Mujeres, Isla 21 12N 86 43 W New York 40 28 N 73 50 W*
Mukoshima Retto 27 40 N 142 10E 35 Newchang; see Yingkou 40 41 N 122 14 E
Mungging, Pulau 1 22 N 104 18E Newport Rock Channel 29 52 N 32 33 E
Muor 0 11 N 128 57 E Ngatik Islands 5 50 N 157 HE
Muri (Saint Pierre Islets) 1 54 N 108 39 E Nginang (Pulau Ngenang) 1 01 N 104 10 E
Murung (Merun), Tanjung 3 02 S 106 54 E Nicholas Channel 23 15N 80 00 W
Muscat 28 37 N 58 35 E 40 Nicobar Islands 8 00 N 94 00 E
Mutji, Pulau; see Muci 0 32 S 104 02 E Nigeria 7 00 N 6 00 E
Muwaylih, Al 27 40 N 35 29 E Nihoa 23 00 N 162 00 W
Nine Degree Channel 9 00 N 72 30 E
Ninety Mile Beach 38 15S 147 23 E
45 Niua Fo'ou 15 36 S 175 38 W
Nabasgan Bay 12 51 N 123 12E Niuatoputapa Group 16 00 S 173 45 W
Naga, Karang 3 27 S 107 37 E Niue or Savage Island 19 03 S 169 51 E
Nagasaki 32 42 N 129 49 E* Njera, Karang;
Nakhodka 42 48 N 132 57 E* see Karang Nyera 3 12S 107 28 E
Naka Shiretoko Misaki; 50 Noordwachter;
see Mys Aniva 46 02 N 143 25 E see Jaga Utara 5 12S 106 27 E
Namibe, Baia Nordkapp (5 miles N of) 71 15N 25 40 E*
(Baia de Mocamedes) 15 10 S 12 07 E Norfolk Island 29 02 S 167 56 E
Namoa Island; Normanby Island 10 00 S 151 00 E
see Nan'ao Dao 23 26 N 117 04 E 55 North Andaman Island 13 15N 93 00 E
Namonuito Islands 8 45 N 150 00 E North Balabac Strait 8 15N 117 00 E
Namorik Atoll 5 35 N 168 08 E North Bruny Island 43 10S 147 23 E
Nan Jiao 23 24 N 117 06 E North Cape: New Zealand 34 25 S 173 03 E
Nan'ao Dao North Channel:
(Namoa Island) 23 26 N 117 04 E 60 Singapore Strait 1 25 N 104 22 E
Nan-chia-shan Lieh-tao; North Danger Reef 11 25 N 114 21 E
see Nanjishan Liedao 27 28 N 121 04 E North Elbow Cay 23 56 N 80 29 W
Nangka, Kepulauan 2 25 S 105 48 E North Greig Shoal 0 52 S 108 33 E
Nan-jih Tao; North Sahul Passage 10 10S 126 50 E
see Nanri Dao 25 1 3 N 119 29 E 65 North-East
Nanjishan Liedao Providence Channel 25 50 N 77 00 W*
(Nan-chia-shan Lieh-tao) 27 28 N 121 04 E North-West
Nanpeng Liedao 23 16N 117 17E Providence Channel 26 ION 78 35 W
Nanp5 Shoto 30 00 N 141 00 E Northumberland, Cape 38 04 S 140 40 E
Nanri Dao (Nan-jih Tao) 25 1 3 N 119 29 E 70 Noumea 22 18S 166 25 E*

275
 GAZETTEER

Nouvelle-Caledonie Pagarantimun, Tanjung 2 15S 110 04 E

(New Caledonia) 21 15 S 165 20 E Pai-ch'uan Lieh-tao;
Nova Scotia 45 00 N 64 00 W see Baiquan Liedao 25 58 N 119 57 E
Novoya Zemlaya 74 00 N 57 00 E 5 Pajung, Pulau;
Nuevo, Bajo (Cayo) see Payung 0 30 N 104 17E
(New Shoal) 21 50 N 92 05 W Palau Islands 7 30 N 134 30 E
Nuku Soge Palawan 10 00 N 118 40 E
(Nuku Songe) 19 13 S 178 20 W Palawan Bank;
Nuku'alofa 21 00 S 175 10W* 10 see Paragua Ridge 8 57 N 117 21 E
Nukulaelae Atoll 9 22 s 179 52 E Palawan Passage 10 20 N 118 00 E
Nusapenida 8 44 s 115 32 E Palermo 36 08 N 13 24 E
Nyera (Njera), Karang 3 12 s 107 28 E Palmas, Cape
Nyudo Saki 40 00 N 139 42 E (20 miles SSW of) 4 06 N 7 54 W*
Nzwami; see lie Anjouan 12 15 s 44 30 E 15 Palmeirnhas, Ponta das 9 06 S 13 00 E
Palmerston Island 18 05 S163 15 W
Palmyra Atoll 5 53 N162 05 W
Palos, Cabo de 37 38 N 0 41 W
0 Ne: Shiriya Saki 41 27 N 141 28 E Panaitan 6 35 S105 13 E
0 Shima: Sagami Nada 34 45 N 139 22 E 20 Panaitan, Selat 6 40 S105 15E
Obi Major; Panama Canal 9 ION 63 45 W
see Obimayor 1 25 S 127 25 E Panama:
Obi, Selat 1 00 s 127 30 E Balboa 8 53 N 79 30 W*
Obi; see Obimayor 1 25 s 127 25 E Panama, Gulf of 8 00 N 79 00 W
Obi, Pulau-pulau 1 30 s 127 40 E 25 Panay 11 00 N 122 30 E
Obimayor (Obimajor) Pandan, Karang 2 53 S 107 12E
(Obi) 1 25 s 127 25 E Pandang, Ujung
Ogasawara Gunto 27 00 N 142 00 E (Makassar) 5 08 S 119 22 E
Ogea Driki Pandjang, Pulau;
(Ongea Ndriki) 19 12 s 178 24 W 30 see Lentok Panjang 2 45 N 108 55 E
Okinawa Gunto 26 30 N 128 00 E Panggung, Tanjung;
Old Bahama Channel: see Tanjung Lelari 2 49 S 105 57 E
E entrance 21 30 N 75 45 W Pangkil 0 50 N 104 22 E
Olinda, Ponta de 8 01 S 34 50 W Pangkur (Pankor),
Olivelifuri 5 17 N 73 35 E 35 Pulau 4 15N 100 35 E
O-luan Pi 21 54 N 120 51 E Panjang, Gosong 6 25 S 105 47 E
Olyutorskiy Zaliv 60 00 N 169 00 E Panjang, Poulo;
Oma Saki 41 33 N 140 55 E see Hon Tho Chau 9 18N 103 28 E
Omae Saki 34 35 N 136 12E Pantar, Selat 8 20 S 124 20 E
Ombai: Selat 8 35 S 125 00 E 40 Pantelleria, Isola di 36 47 N 12 00 E
Ombak, Karang 3 25 S 107 10E Papeete: Tahiti 17 30 S 149 36 W*
One and Half Para, Rio 0 30 S 47 23 W*
Degree Channel 1 24 N 73 20 E Paracel Islands 16 30 N 112 00 E
Ongea Ndriki; Paradip 20 15N 86 42 E*
see Ogea Driki 19 12 S 178 24 W 45 Paragua Ridge
Ontario, Karang 2 00 S 108 39 E (Palawan Bank) 8 57 N 117 21 E
Ontong Java Group 5 30 s 159 30 E Paramaribo 5 50 N 55 10W
Orissa coast 20 00 N 86 00 E Parsons Shoal 3 53 N 112 16E
Orkney Islands 59 00 N 3 00 W Partida, Roca 19 00 N 122 04 W
Oroluk Lagoon 7 30 N 155 20 E 50 Pasang Tenang 6 09 S 105 51 E
Ortegal, Cabo 43 46 N 7 52 W Pasir, Karang 3 29 S 107 10 E
Os = The (Definite article); Pasir, Tanjung 1 15S 109 24 E
see proper name Pasir = Sand, sandy beach;
Osborn Passage 12 40 S 124 00 E see proper name
Osumi Kaikyo 30 50 N 129 00 E 55 Passe = Passage;
Otago 45 45 S 170 44 E see proper name
Otway, Cape 38 51 S 143 31 E Passo, Karang 1 08 N 104 10E
Ouesant, lie d' Paternoster Islands;
(10 miles W of) 48 28 N 5 23 W* see Pulau-pulau Tengah 7 20 S 117 35 E
Outer Channel: 60 Patinti (Patiente), Selat or
Jakarta Approach 5 50 S 106 33 E Kusu Ma Doro 0 25 S 127 40 E
Payung 5 49 S 106 33 E
Payung (Pulau Pajung) 0 30 N 104 17E
Pearl Bank 5 48 N 119 42 E
Pabbiring, Kepulauan 5 00 S 119 15E 65 Pedra Branca 43 52 S 146 58 E
Padangtikar, Sungai 0 40 s 109 15E Pegunungan (Gunong)
Padaran, Cap; Permisan 2 36 S 105 57 E
see Mui Dinh 11 22 N 109 01, E Pei-chi Shan Lieh-tao;
Padri Selatan 0 33 N 103 46 E see Beijishan Liedao 27 38 N 121 12E
Pagalu (Annobon) 1 26 S 5 37 E 70 Pejantan 0 07 N 107 12E

276
 GAZETTEER

Pelali, Bukit 1 25 N 104 12E Pontianak 0 01 S 109 20 E

Pelanduk Subang Mas Popole 6 24S 105 48 E
(Pulau Subangmas) 0 57 N 104 10 E Port Chalmers 4 50S 170 30 E
Pelangkat (Pulau Pelanget) 0 45 N 103 35 E 5 Port Curtis 23 55 S 151 30 E
Pelapis, Pulau-pulau 1 18 S 109 10E Port Dalrymple 41 05 S 146 45 E
Peleng, Selat 1 00 S 123 00 E Port Elizabeth 33 57 S 25 40 E
Pelorus Reef 22 51 s 176 26 W Port Hedland 20 12 S 118 32 E*
Pemali, Tanjung; Port Louis: Mauritius 20 08S 57 28 E*
see Tanjung Batutoro 5 42 s 122 47 E 10 Port Moresby 9 25 S 147 05 E
Peiia, Punta de la 36 03 N 5 40 W Port Phillip 38 2OS 144 34 E
Penang, Pulau; Port Said 31 21 N 32 33 E*
see Pulau Pinang 5 20 N 100 15E Port Stanley; see Stanley 51 40 S 57 49W
Penas, Golfo de 47 20 S 75 00 W Portlock Reefs 9 35S 144 50 E
Pencaras (Pulau Pentjaras) 0 58 N 104 10 E 15 Porto Grande:
Penebangan 1 13 S 109 15E Arquipelago de Cabo Verde 16 54 N 25 02 W*
Penedos de Sao Poulo Condore, Archipel de;
Pedro e Sao Paulo 0 55 N 29 21 W see Con Son 8 42N 106 36 E
Pengail, Tanjung; Poulo = Island;
see Tanjung Tuing 1 37 S 106 03 E 20 see proper name
P'eng-chia Yii 25 38 N 12 04 E Pratas Reef 20 40N 116 45 E
Pengelap, Selat 0 30 N 104 20 E Preparis North Channel 15 00N 93 40 E
P'eng-hu Ch'un-tao 23 30 N 119 30 E Preparis South Channel 14 33N 93 27 E
P'eng-hu Kang-tao 23 30 N 119 53 E Prince Consort Bank 7 53 N 110 00 E
Pengibu 1 35 N 106 19E 25 Prince Rupert 54 19 N 130 20 W*
Pengiki Besar 0 15 N 108 03 E Prince of Wales Bank 8 ION 110 30 E
Penguin Bank 11 28 S 175 30 E Prince of Wales Channel 10 30 S 142 15 E
Penmarc'h, Pointe de 47 48 N 4 23 W Proliv = Channel, strait;
Pentjaras, Pulau; see proper name
see Pencaras 0 58 N 104 10 E 30 Prongs Reef 18 53 N 72 48E
Penyu, Pulau-pulau Providencia, Isla de 13 23 N 81 22 W
(Schilpad Eilanden) 5 22, S 127 47 E Puerto Rico 18 15 N 66 30 W
Penzhinskiy Zaliv 61 00 N 158 00 E Pulau = Island;
Peper Baai; see proper name
see Teluk Miskam 6 30 S 105 45 E 35 Pulau-pulau = Islands;
Perak, Pulau 5 42 N 98 56 E see proper name
Perasi Besar 0 43 S 103 39 E Punggai (Punggal);
Perasi Kecil Tanjung 1 26 N 104 18 E
(Pulau Perasi) 0 46 N 103 38 E Punggung; Tanjung 0 45N 104 31 E
Perhentian Besar, Pulau 5 55 N 102 45 E 40 Punta = Point;
Perla, La 36 03 N 5 26 W Qiwang Wan (Hope Bay) 23 12 N 116 43 E
Perlas, Archipielago de Qizhou Liedao
la 8 20 N 79 00 W (Chi-chou Lieh-tao) 19 58N 111 16E
Permisan, Gunong; Queen Charlotte Island 53 ION 132 10W
see Pergunungan Permisan 2 36 S 105 57 E 45 Queen Elizabeth, Cape 43 15 S 147 26 E
Petong 0 37 N 104 05 E Quilon 8 53 N 76 35E
Petropavlovsk 53 00 N 158 38 E* Quseir 26 06 N 34 17 E
Phoenix Group: Kiribati 4 00 S 173 00 W
Phuket, Ko 7 55 N 98 20 E
Piedra Point 16 19 N 119 47 E 50
Pilar, Cabo 52 43 S 74 41 W Raas, Ras, R'as = Cape;
Pillar, Cape 43 14 s 148 02 E see proper name
Pinang (Penang), Pulau 5 20 N 100 15E Raas, Selat 7 10S 114 27E
Pine, Cape 46 37 N 53 32 W Race, Cape 46 39 N 53 04 W
Pingelap Atoll 6 10 N 160 55 E 55 Rada = Roadstead;
Pioneer Channel 4 40 S 153 45 E* see proper name
Piraievs 37 56 N 23 37 E* Radressa, Ras;
Pisang 1 23 S 128 55 E see Rhiy di-Insal 12 35 N 54 29E
Pisco, Bahia 13 42 s 76 15W Raffles Light 1 ION 103 44 E
Pitcairn Island 25 04 s 130 05 W 60 Raja 1 54 S 106 09 E
Placentia Bay 47 00 N 54 30 W Raja, .Gosong;
Planier, lie de 43 12 N 5 14 E see Gosong Raya 2 40S 106 53 E
Plasit, Karang 1 01 N 104 13 E Raja, Tanjung 1 54 S 106 11 E
Playa = Beach; Rakahanga 10 03S 161 06W
see proper name 65 Rakata (Pulau Krakatau) 6 09S 105 26 E
Pocklington Reef 10 50 S 155 45 E Rame Head 37 47S 149 30 E
Pohai, Gulf of; Rangas, Tanjung
see Bo Hai 38 30 N 119 30 E (Cape William) 2 37 S 11849E
Pointe Noire 4 46 S 11 49 E* Ranggas 0 45N 104 29 E
Ponta Delgada 37 44 N 25 39 W* 70 Rangoon (Port of) 16 46N 96 11 E
277
 GAZETTEER

Rangoon Sahul Banks 11 30 S 126 00 E

River entrance 16 09 N 96 17 E* Sai Gon;
Raoul Island 29 15S 177 54 W see Ho Chi Minh City 10 18 N 107 04 E*
Rapa, lie 27 37 S 144 17W 5 Sai Gon, Song 10 50 N 106 40 E
Rarotonga 21 10S 159 47 W Saint Ann Shoal 8 00 N 13 30 W
Rat Island 51 48 N 178 20 E Saint Francis, Cape 34 13S 24 50 E
Ray, Cape 47 37 N 59 18W Saint George's Channel 4 20 S 152 32 E*
Raya (Raja), Gosong 2 40 S 106 53 E Saint Helena 15 57 S 5 43 W
Raz = Race, violent tidal 10 Saint John Island 1 13N 103 51 E
stream; see proper name Saint Lawrence, Gulf of 48 00 N 61 00 W
Recife = Reef; Saint Lazarus Bank 12 08 S 41 22 E
see proper name Saint Lucia 14 02 N 61 01 W
Recife: Brazil 8 04 S 34 51 W* Saint Lucia/Saint
Recife, Landfall off 8 00 N 34 40 W* 15 Vincent Channel 13 30 N 61 00 W*
Recife, Cape: South Africa 34 02 S 25 42 E Saint Mary's Cape 46 49 N 54 12W
Red Bay; see Jiangjun Ao 24 01 N 117 51 E Saint-Paul, lie 38 43 S 77 32 E
Redang, Pulau 5 47 N 103 00 E Saint-Pierre, lie 46 47 N 56 10W
Reid Rocks 40 15S 144 10 E Saint Pierre Islets;
Reinga, Cape 34 25 S 172 40 E 20 see Muri 1 54 N 108 39 E
Remunia Shoals 1 27 N 103 39 E Saint Vincent 13 15N 61 15 W
Reunion, lie de la 20 55 S 55 1 5 E Saint Vincent, Gulf of 35 00 S 138 10E
Revilla Gigedos, Islas 19 25 N 110 30 E Sainte-Marie, Cap 25 35 S 45 08 E
Rhiy di-Irlsal (Ras Radressa) 12 35 N 54 29 E Saja, Pulau; see Saya 0 47 S 104 56 E
Riau, Selat 0 55 N 104 20 E 25 Sakhalin, Ostrov 50 00 N 143 00 E
Richardson, Karang 0 37 N 103 43 E Sakishima Gunto 24 40 N 24 45 E
Rifleman Reef; Sakunci, Gosong
see Karang Leman 0 28 N 104 28 E (Maria Reigersbergen Banks) 7 50 S 117 15E
Rindjani, Gunong; Sal, Ilha do 16 45 N 22 55 W
see Gunung Rinjani 8 25 S 116 27 E 30 Sala y Gomez, Isla 26 28 S 105 28 W
Ringgit, Tanjung 8 52 S 116 36 E Salah Ujung or
Rinjani (Rindjani), False Cape 8 25 S 137 39 E
Gunung 8 25 S 116 27 E Salawati 1 05 S 130 50 E
Rio de Janeiro 22 59 S 43 10W* Salayar (Kabia), Pulau 6 30 S 120 29 E
Rio de la Plata 35 10 S 56 15 W* 35 Salayar, Selat 8 30 S 119 20 E
Rio = River; Saldanha Bay 33 OSS 17 55 E
see proper name Salinopolis 0 37 S 47 22 W
Robbie Bank 11 03 S 176 57 W Salvador 13 00 S 38 32 W*
Robinson Crusoe, Isla 33 37 S 78 52 W Samar 12 00 N 125 00 E
Roca, Cabo da 38 46 N 9 30 W 40 Samoa 14 00 S 171 30 W
Roca = Rock; San Agustin,
see proper name Cape (18 miles E of) 6 15N 126 30 E*
Rocas, Atol das 3 52 S 33 49 W San Ambrosio, Isla 26 20 S 79 52 W
Rondondo Island 39 1 4 S 146 23 E San Antonio, Cabo: Cuba 21 52 N 84 57 W
Rodriguez Island 19 38 S 63 25 E 45 San Antonio, Cabo: Spain 38 48 N 0 12E
Romblon Island 12 30 N 122 15E San Bernadino Islands 12 46 N 124 17E
Romblon Pass 12 43 N 122 12E San Bernadino Strait 12 33 N 124 12 E*
Rondo 6 04 N 95 07 E San Cristobal 10 30 S 161 45 E
Rosas, Bahia de 42 15N 3 09 E San Diego 32 38 N 117 15 W*
Rose Island 14 33 S 168 09 W 50 San Diego, Cabo 54 39 S 65 07 W
Rossel Spit 11 27 S 154 24 E San Felix, Isla 26 19S 79 54 W
Roti 10 45 S 123 00 E San Francisco 37 45 N 122 40 W*
Roti, Selat 10 25 S 123 30 E San Gallan, Isla 13 51 N 76 28 W
Rottnest Islands 32 00 S 115 30 E San Jacinto 12 34 N 123 44 E
Rotumah Shoals 13 30 S 179 12W 55 San Jose, Banco 8 08 N 78 39 W
Royal Captain Shoal 9 03 N 116 41 E San Juan, Cabo 54 43 S 63 49 W
Royal Charlotte Reef 6 56 N 113 36 E San Juan del Norte
Rukan Tengah (Greytown) 10 57 N 83 43 W
(Pulau Abang-tengah) 0 35 N 103 46 E San Miguel Island 12 43 N 123 35 E
Rukan Utara 60 San Salvador Island 24 00 N 74 30 W
(Pulau Abang-utara) 0 37 N 103 45 E San Sebastian,
Rukan, Pulau-pulau 0 35 N 103 45 E Cabo de 41 53 N 3 12E
Sanana 2 15 S 125 55 E
Sand Key 24 27 N 81 53 W
65 Sandakan 5 49 N 118 07 E #
Sabalana, Pulau-pulau 7 00 S 118 30 E Sandheads, The 20 54 N 88 14E
Sabang 5 53 N 95 18 E Sandy Cape 24 42 S 153 16E
Sable Island 43 55 N 60 00 W Sangi Eilanden;
Sagewin, Selat 0 55 S 130 40 E see Pulau-pulau Sangihe 3 30 S 125 35 E
Sagoweel 2 54 S 107 22 E 70 Sangian 5 57 S 105 51 E

278
 GAZETTEER

• - • O 1

Sangihe, Pulau-pulau Sermata 8 12S 128 54 E

(Sangi Eilanden) 3 30 N 125 35 E Serrana Bank 14 17 N 80 24W
Sanglar Besar 0 37 N 103 41 E Serrat, Cap 37 14 N 9 13E
Santa Barbara Channel 34 15N 120 00 W 5 Serupai, Beting
Santa Cruz Islands: (James Shoal) 3 58 N 112 16E
Basilan Strait 6 52 N 122 04 E Serutu 1 43 S 108 43 E
Santa Cruz Islands: Seserot 5 48S 105 15 E
Solomon Islands 11 00 S 166 1 5 E Setapa (Stapa), Tanjung 1 20 N 104 08 E
Santanilla, Islas 10 Seto Naikai
(Swan Islands) 17 25 N 83 52 W (Inland Sea) 34 ION 133 30 E
Santiago, Ilha de 15 06 N 23 40 W Severn, Karang 1 37 S 106 31 E
Santo Antao, Ilha de 17 00 N 25 1 0 W Seychelles Bank 5 00S 56OOE
Sao Miguel, Ilha de 37 45 N 25 30 W Seychelles Group 4 30S 55 30 E
Sao Roque, Cabo de 5 29 S 35 16E IS Shandong Bandao
Sao Tome 0 12N 6 37 E (Shantung Peninsula) 37OON 122 00 E
Sao Tome, Cabo de 22 02 S 41 03 W Shanghai 31 03 N 122 20 E*
Sao Vicente, Cabo de 37 01 N 9 00 W Shannaqiif, Raas
Sao Vicente, Canal de: (Ras Scenaghef) 11 41 N 51 15 E
Arquipelago de Cabo Verde 16 56 N 25 06 W 20 Shantou (Swatow) 23 21 N 116 40 E
Sape, Selat 8 30 S 119 20 E Shantung Peninsula;
Sapudi, Pulau 7 07 S 114 20 E see Shandong Bandao 37 00N 122 00 E
Sapudi, Selat 7 00 S 114 15E Shenhu Wan 24 39 N 118 41 E
Sarangani Islands 5 27 N 125 27 E Shetland Isles 60 30 N 1 00 W
Sardegna 40 00 N 9 00 E 25 Shi Yu (Shih Hsu)
Sarmiento, Banco 52 40 S 68 00 W (Cliff Island) 23 35 N 117 27 E
Satawal Island 7 20 N 147 02 E Shibeishan Jiao
Sau 1 04 N 104 H E (Shih-pei-shan Chiao or
Saumarez Reefs 21 50 S 153 40 E Breaker Point) 22 56 N 116 30E
Savage Island or Niue 19 03 S 169 51 W 30 Shih Hsu; see Shi Yu 23 35 N 117 27 E
Savai'i 13 35 S 172 30 W Shih-pei-shan Chiao;
Sawvi, Pulau-pulau 10 30 S 121 50 E see Shibeishan Jiao 22 56 N 116 30E
Saya de Malha Bank 11 00 S 61 00 E Shiokubi Misaki 41 42 N 140 58 E
Saya (Pulau Saja) 0 47 S 104 56 E Shirakami Misaki 41 24 N 140 12 E
Scenaghef, Ras; 35 Shirali or Hog Island 14 00N 74 29E
see Raas Shannaqiif 11 41 N 51 15 E Shiriya Saki 41 26 N 141 28 E
Schilpad Eilanden; Siberut, Selat 0 45S 99 00E
see Pulau-pulau Penyu 5 22 S 127 47 E Sibu, Pulau 2 13 N 104 05 E
Scilly or Manuae Island 16 30 S 154 40 W Sibutu Passage 4 55N 119 37 E
Sebesi 5 57 S 105 29 E 40 Sicilia 37 30 N 14 00E
Sebong, Tanjung 1 07 N 104 14E Sidi Musa 35 54 N 5 25 W
Sebuku 5 53 S 105 31 E Sidmouth Rock 43 51 S 147 00 E
Sedimin, Karang 3 24 N 107 50 E Simara Island 12 49N 122 03 E
Segama 5 10 S 106 06 E Simedang 3 19S 107 12 E
Seguci (Seguti), 45 Simedang Kecil
Karang 0 43 N 104 22 E (Pulau Simedang Ketjil) 3 18 S 107 13 E
Sein, Chaussee de 48 00 N 5 00 W Simons Bay 34 11 S 18 26 E
Sein, Raz de 48 00 N 4 45 W Sind 23 30 N 69 00E
Sekopong, Tanjung 4 56 S 106 03 E Sindu 5 53 S 105 44 E
Sekopong, Gosong 50 Singapore 1 12N 103 51 E»
(Beting Clifton) 4 56 S 106 03 E Singkep 0 30S 104 40 E
Selanga, Pulau-pulau 0 30 N 104 21 E Singkeplaut, Pulau-pulau O23S 104 12 E
Sele, Selat 1 00 S 131 00 E Siri Islands;
Selemar 2 59 S 107 06 E see Pulau-pulau Lima 5O5S 117 04 E
Selfridge Bank 20 50 S 157 15E 55 Sirik, Tanjung 2 47N 111 19E
Seliu, Pulau 3 13S 107 32 E Sisal, Arrecife 21 20 N 90 10W
Sembulang, Tanjung 0 52 N 104 16E Siulung (Pulau Senjolong) 0 47N 104 36 E
Sendara, Karang 0 41 N 104 37 E Siuncal (Pulau Siuntjal) 5 48S 105 19 E
Senegal, Fleuve 16 00 N 16 30 W Sjahbandar, Beting;
Senjolong, Pulau; 60 see Gosong Syahbandar 5 11 S 105 56 E
see Siulung 0 47 N 104 36 E Skagerrak 57 30 N 8 30 E
Senyavin Islands 6 55 N 158 10E Snares Islands 48 01 S 166 36 E
Seram (Ceram) 3 00 S 129 00 E Snares Islands 47 50 S 167 50 E*
Serasan 2 31 N 109 04 E Societe, lies de la 16 00S 152 00 W
Serasan, Alur Pelayaran 2 24 N 109 00 E 65 Socotra; see Suqufra 12 3ON 54 00E
Serdang 5 49 S 105 23 E Socotra Rock 32 06N 125 H E
Serdang, Gosong Sofala, Banco de 2O3OS 35 30 E
(Beting Brouwers) 5 OSS 106 1 5 £ Sofu Gan: Nanpo
Serdang, Tanjung Shoto 29 47N 140 21 E
(Pulau Batumandi) 4 27 S 105 54 E 70 Solander Islands 46 34 S 166 50 E
279
 GAZETTEER

Solomon Islands 8 00 S 158 00 E Suqufra (Socotra) 12 30 N 54 00 E

Sombrero Channel 7 36 N 93 33 E Surabaya 7 12 S 112 44 E*
Sombrero Key 24 38 N 81 07 W Surigao Strait 9 53 N 125 21 E*
Sombrero Passage 18 25 N 63 45 W* 5 Suriname 4 00 N 56 00 W
Sombrero Rocks 10 43 N 121 33 E Suva 18 11 S 178 24 E*
Sonsorol Islands 5 20 N 132 13E Suwarrow
Soreh, Karang 0 53 N 104 22 E (Suvorov Islands) 13 15 S 163 05 W
Sorol Atoll 8 ION 140 25 E Swain Reefs 21 00 s 152 40 E
South Cape: Tasmania; 10 Swains Island 11 00 s 171 05 W
see South East Cape 43 39 S 146 50 E Swan Islands
South Channel: (Islas Santanilla) 17 25 N 83 54 W
Singapore Strait 1 16N 104 24 E Swan Island 40 44 s 148 06 E
South East Point: Swatow; see Shantou 23 21 N 116 40 E
Wilson Promontory 39 08 S 146 26 E 15 Syahbandar, Gosong
South East (South) Cape: (Beting Sjahbandar) 5 11 S 105 56 E
Tasmania 43 39 S 146 50 E Sybrandi, Terumbu 5 41 105 51 E
South Georgia 54 30 S 36 30 W Sydney
s
33 50 s 151 19 E*
South Head: Port Jackson 33 50 S 15 17E
South Luconia Shoal 5 00 N 112 35 E 20
South West Cape:
Tasmania 43 35 S 146 03 E Tablas Island 12 25 N 122 05 E
South Yit; see Yang Yu 25 09 N 119 30 E Tablas Strait 13 00 N 121 45 E
Southern Cook Islands 20 00 S 158 15 W Table Bay 33 50 S 18 30 E
Soya Kaikyo; 25 Tabuaeran
see La Perouse Strait 45 45 N 142 00 E (Washington Island) 4 43 N 160 25 W
Speke, Karang 0 37 S 104 06 E Ta-fang-chi;
Spencer Gulf 34 00 S 137 00 E see Dafangi Dao 21 23 N 111 12E
Spitsbergen 79 00 N 15 00 E Tagula Island 11 20 S 153 10E
17 35
Split Point 38 28 S
2 41 N
144 06 E
103 55 E
30 Tahiti
T'ai-chou Lieh-tao;
s 149 25 W
Sri Buat, Pulau
Sri Lanka 8 00 N 81 00 E see Taizhou Liedao 28 25 N 121 55 E
Stanley (Port Stanley) 51 40 S 57 49 W Tail of the Bank:
St John's Harbour: Grand Banks of
New Foundland 47 34 N 52 38 W* 35 Newfoundland 43 00 N 50 00 W
Stanton, Alur Pelayaran 3 00 S 106 15E T'ai-wan 24 00 N 121 00 E
Stapa Tanjong; Taiwan Banks 23 00 N 118 30 E
see Tanjung Setapa 1 20 N 104 08 E Taiwan Strait 24 00 N 119 00 E
Starbuck Island 5 37 S 155 55 W Taizhou Liedao
Steno = Strait; 40 (T'ai-chou Lieh-tao) 28 25 N 121 55 E
see proper name Taka Rewataya, Gosong
Stewart Island 47 00 S 167 45 E (De Bril Bank) 6 04 S 118 55 E
Stewart Islands 8 25 S 162 52 E Takoradi 4 53 N 1 44 W*
Storm Bay 43 15S 147 35 E Taku Bar or
Suar Besar 2 53 S 106 08 E 45 Dagu Lanjiangsha 38 56 N 117 59 E*
Subangmas, Pulau; Talcahuano 36 41 S 73 06 W
see Pelanduk Subang Mas 0 57 N 104 10E Talisei 1 50 N 125 00 E
Subar Laut, Pulau 1 1 3 N 103 50 E Taloh, Tanjung 1 01 N 104 14 E
Subi Besar, Pulau-pulau 2 50 N 108 50 E Tamana Island 2 30 S 176 00 E
Subi Kecil 50 Tambelan (Tembelan),
(Pulau Subi Ketjil) 3 03 N 108 51 E Pulau-pulau 1 00 N 107 34 E
Sugarloaf Point 32 27 S 152 32 E Tampico 22 17 N 97 44 W
Sugarloaf Rock 39 30 S 146 39 E Tampurang, Pulau;
Suheli Par 10 03 N 72 15E see Tempurung 5 54 S 105 56 E
Suji, Karang 55 Tanega Shima 30 35 N 131 00 E
(Hippogriffe Reefs) 3 34 S 106 55 E Tangier 35 47 N 5 47 W
Sukadana, Teluk 1 25 S 109 43 E Tanimbar, Pulau-pulau 7 30 S 131 30 E
Sula, Pulau-pulau 1 50 S 125 00 E Taniwha Rock 40 25 S 144 59 E
Sulawesi 1 00 S 120 00 E Tanjong, Tanjung = Cape;
Sultan Shoal 1 14N 103 39 E 60 see proper name
Sulu Archipelago 6 00 N 121 00 E Tanjungsau 1 03 N 104 11 E
Sumba 9 45 S 120 00 E Tan-kan Lieh-tao;
Sumba, Selat 9 00 S 119 30 E see Dangan Liedao 22 02 N 114 13 E
Sumbawa 8 30 S 118 00 E Taongi Atoll 14 38 N 168 59 E
Sumburgh Head 59 51 N 1 16W 65 Tapai, Pulau-pulau 0 05 N 104 29 E
Sumur, Pulau-pulau 5 52 S 105 46 E Tarabalus 32 56 N 13 12 E*
Sumurbatu, Tanjung 5 50 S 105 46 E •Tarakan 3 15 N 117 54 E*
Sunda, Selat 6 00 S 105 52 E* Tarifa, Isla de 36 00 N 5 37 W
Sungai = River; Tarkulai (Pulau Terkulai) Q 57 N 104 20 E
see proper name 70 Tasman Island 43 14 S 148 00 E

280
 GAZETTEER

Tasman Islands 4 35 S 159 25 E Tjukuh = Cape;

Tatoosh Island 48 24 N 124 44 W see proper name
Tautau, Bukit 1 30 N 104 15 E Tobago 11 15N 60 35 W
Tavoy Island 13 05 N 98 17 E 5 Tobago (15 miles
Ta-wan Shan; N of North Point) 11 35 N 60 35 W*
see Dawanshan Dao 21 57 N 113 44 E Tobalai, Selat 1 40 S 128 15 E
Tahuantepec, Golfo de 16 00 N 95 00 W Tokara Gunto 29 20N 129 30 E
Telang Kecil Tokara Kaikyo 30 12 N 130 15 E
(Pulau Telan-ketjil) 0 42 N 104 36 E 10 Tokelau 9 00S 172 00 W
Teluk = Bay; Tokuno Shima 22 47N 128 58 E
see proper name Tokyo Wan 35 20 N 139 45 E
Tembaga, Karang: Tondang, Tanjung 1 14N 104 19 E
Selat Bangka 2 41 S 105 53 E Tonga Islands 20 OS 174 30 W
Tembaga, Karang: 15 Tongareva 9 00S 158 03 W
Selat Sapudi 7 07 S 114 08 E Tongatapu 20 59 S 175 10W
Tembelan, Kepulauan; Tonkin, Gulf of 19 3ON 107 00 E
see Pulau-pulau Tambelan 1 00 N 107 34 E Tori Shima: Amami Gunto;
Tembilahan, Teluk; see 16 Tori Shima 27 52 N 128 14 E
see Teluk Kualacenaku 0 10S 103 45 E 20 Tori Shima:
Tempurung Nanpo Shoto 30 28 N 140 20 E
(Pulau Tempurang) 5 54 S 105 56 E Tori Shima:
Ten Degrees Channel 10 00 N 92 30 E S of Goto Retto 32 15 N 128 06 E
Tenang, Karang Torres Island 13 15S 166 35 E
(Catharine Reef) 2 31 S 108 55 E 25 Torres Strait (3£ miles
Tenasserim Island 12 35 N 97 51 E W of Booby Island) 10 36 S 141 51 E*
Tenerife, Isla de 28 20 N 16 35 W Toty O55S 105 46 E
Tengah, Karang Trafalgar, Cabo 36 11 N 6 02W
(Middleburg Reef) 0 51 N 103 34 E Treasury Islands 7 25 S 155 35 E
Tengah, Pulau-pulau 30 Triangulo Oeste 20 58 N 92 18 W
(Paternoster Islands) 7 20 S 117 35 E Trieste 45 39 N 13 44E*
Tenggol, Pulau 4 48 N 103 41 E Trinidad:
Tepoto 14 06 S 141 27 W Port of Spain 10 38N 61 34 W*
Teraina (Fanning Island) 3 51 N 159 22 W Trinidade, Ilha da 20 30 S 29 20W
Terceira, Ilha 38 48 N 27 15 W 35 Tristan da Cunha Group 37OOS 12 20 W
Terkulai, Pulau; Trondheim 63 27 N 10 23 E*
see Tarkulai 0 57 N 104 20 E Tsugaru Kaikyo 41 39 N 140 48 E*
Terumbu = Rock awash at Tsushima 34 25N 129 20 E
low water; see proper name Tuamotu, Archipel des 18 00S 141 00 W
Tetuan, Ensenada de 35 35 N 5 15 W 40 Tubu 1 05 N 104 10 E
Teun 6 59 S 129 08 E Tuing (Pengail),
Thessaloniki 40 37 N 22 56 E* Tanjung 1 37 S 106 03 E
Theva-i-Ra; see Ceva-i-ra 21 44 S 174 38 E Tuju, Pulau-pulau
Tho Chau, Hon (Kepulauan Tujuh) 1 15S 105 15 E
(Poulo Panjang) 9 18 N 103 28 E 45 Tula (Tulo),
Three Hummock Island 40 26 S 144 55 E Gosong (Isabella Bank) O53N 104 15 E
Three Kings Islands 32 05 S 172 00 E Tung-fu Shan;
Thunder Knoll 16 30 N 81 20 W see Dongfushan 30 08N 122 46 E
Ticao Island 12 30 N 123 42 E Tung-yin Shan;
Tidung, Pulau-pulau 5 49 S 106 17 E 50 see Dongyin Dao 26 22N 120 30 E
Tierra del Fuego 54 30 S 68 00W Tunjuk 0 57 N 104 12 E
Tiga, Karang 3 14S10727E Tuntungkalik, Tanjung 5 48 S 105 05 E
Tiga, Pulau-pulau 5 49 S 105 32 E Tureia 20 50S 138 35 W
Timau 3 18N 107 32 E Turks Island Passage 21 48 N 71 16 W*
Timor 9 00 S 125 00 E 55 Turks Islands 21 31 N 71 08 W
Timur, Gosong Turtle Island; see Vatoa 19 50S 178 13 W
(Eastern Banks) 0 40 S 103 50 E Tutuila Island 14 18 S 170 42 W
Tingtai Bay; Tuvalu
see Dingtai Wan 24 1 5 N 118 05 E (Ellice Island Group) 8 00S 179 00 E
Tioman, Pulau 2 50 N 104 10 E 60 Twilight, Karang 1 02 S 108 37 E
Tiung Reef 2 15S 107 00 E Twin Island 10 30 S 142 25 E
Tjakang, Tanjung;
see Tanjung Cakang 0 37 N 104 17 E
Tjaringin; see Caringin 6 21 S 105 49 E
Tjelaka, Pulau; 65
see Celaka 2 52 S 107 01 E Uban, Tanjung 1 03 N 114 14E
Tjemara, Gosong; Udiep (Pulau Udik) 0 32N 104 18 E
see Gosong Cemara 0 49 N 104 14 E Ujelang Atoll 9 50 N 160 54 E
Tjikoneng, Karang; Ujung Pandang
see Tanjung Cikoneng 6 04 S 105 53 E 70 (Makassar) 5 07 S 119 23 E*

281
 GAZETTEER

Ujung = Point; Wayam 0 24 S 131 15E

see proper name We, Pulau 5 50 N 95 20 E
Ular (Kolepon), Karang Weitou Wan (Wei-tou Ao) 24 30 N 118 30 E
(Frederik Hendrik Klippen) 1 58 S 104 57 E 5 Wellington 41 22 S 174 50 E*
Ular, Tanjung 1 57 S 105 08 E Wenwei Zhou
Ulawa Island 9 45 S 162 00 E (Wen-wei Chou) 21 49 N 113 56 E
Ulithi Atoll 10 00 N 139 40 E Wessel, Cape 11 00 S 136 45 E
Ulul Island 8 35 N 149 40 E West Cape Howe 35 OSS 117 35E
Unimak Pass 54 15N 164 30 W to West Fayu Island 8 04 N 146 42 E
Upolu Island 13 55 S 171 45 W West Lamma Channel 22 13N 114 05 E
Upolu Point 20 1 6 N 155 51 W West Reef: London Reefs 8 51 N 112 13E
Uraga Suido 35 ION 139 45 E Wetar, Alur Pelayaran
(Wetar Passage) 8 00 S 125 30 E
ts Wetar, Selat 8 16 S 127 12 E*
Wetar, Selat (Wetar Strait) 8 15S 126 25 E
Valdes, Peninsula 42 30 S 64 00 W Wilder Shoal 8 1 6 N 173 26 W
Valparaiso 33 02 S 71 37 W* William, Cape;
Van Diemen, Cape 11 10 S 130 23 E see Tanjung Rangas 2 37 S 118 49 E
Van Sittart Reef 2 12S 106 45 E 20 Willoughby, Cape 35 51 S 138 08 E
Vancouver 48 25 N 123 25 W Windward Islands 13 00 N 61 00 W
Vancouver Island 49 30 N 125 00 W Windward Passage 20 00 N 74 00 W
Vanguard Bank 7 28 N 109 37 E Wizard Reef 8 50 S 51 04 E
Vanikolo 11 40 S 166 50 E Woleai Islands 1 20 N 143 50 E
Vanuatu (New Hebrides) 17 00 S 168 00 E 25 Wowoni 4 05 S 123 05 E
Varella, Cap 12 54 N 109 28 E Wrath, Cape
Vatoa (Turtle Island) 19 50 S 178 13W (5 miles N of) 58 43 N 5 00 W*
Vema Seamount 31 48 S 8 20 E Wreck Reefs 22 10 S 155 20 E
Venezia 45 24 N 12 29 E* Wright Rock 39 36 S 147 32 E
Venezuela 10 00 N 67 00 W 30 Wu-ch'iu Hsu 25 00 N 119 27 E
Vera Cruz 19 12N 96 08 W
Verde Island 13 33 N 121 05 E
Verde Island Passage 13 36 N 121 00 E*
Vereker Banks 21 05 N 116 00 E Xaafuun, Raas
Vermelha, Ponta 5 40 S 12 10 E 35 (Ras Hafun) 10 26 N 51 25 E
Vert, Cap 14 43 N 17 30 W Xiamen (Amoy)
Vigo 42 13 N 8 50 W* (Hsia-men) 24 27 N 118 04 E
Villano, Cabo 43 ION 9 13W Xiaoban Men 30 12N 122 36 E
Virgenes, Cabo 52 20 S 68 21 W
Virgin Rocks 45 29 N 50 46 W 40
Vitiaz Strait 5 51 S 147 30 E*
Vivario Cays 15 51 N 83 18W Yagoshi Misaki 41 31 N 140 25 E
Vivero, Ria de 43 43 N 7 35 W Yampi Sound 16 10 S 123 30 E
Vladivostok 43 02 N 131 58 E Yang Yu (South Yit) 25 09 N 119 30 E
Volsella Shoal 9 54 S 136 14 E 45 Yangtze River;
Vostok Island 10 06 S 152 23 W see Chang liang 31 03 N 122 20 E
Vung Tau, Mui 10 1 9 N 107 05 E Yap 9 28 N 138 09 E*
Yingkou (Newchang) 40 41 N 122 14 E
Yokohama 35 26 N 139 43 E«
50 Young Rocks 36 23 S 137 15 E
Waigeo 0 12S 130 45 E Yucatan 21 00 N 88 00 W
Wailingding Dao Yucatan Passage 21 30 N 85 40 W
(Wai-ling-ting Tao) 22 06 N 114 02 E
Wakatoni, Pulau-pulau 6 35 S 124 00 E
Wake Islet 19 17 N 166 39 E 55
Walvis Bay 22 54 S 14 30 E Zanzibar Island 6 10S 39 18E
Wanganella Bank 32 31 S 167 24 E Zapoto (Zapato) Islands 11 45 N 123 01 E
Wangi-Wangi, Kepulauan 5 20 S 123 35 E Zephyr Bank 15 55 S 176 50 W
Wangkang: Malang 2 48 S 107 21 E Zhoushan Dao
Warren Hastings, Karang 2 21 S 106 56 E 60 (Chusan) (Chou Shan) 30 03 N 122 10E
Washington Island; Zhoushan Qundao
see Tabuaeran 4 43 N 160 25 W (Chusan Archipelago) 30 30 N 122 20 E

282
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES
Notes
1. References in italics are to Sailing Routes, Chapters 8, 9 and 10.
2. Geographical positions in the Index are Arrival and Departure Positions (1.4).
Geographical positions of other places are given in the Gazetteer.

Paras. Paras.
Abnormal waves 1.18 Aden—continued
Adelaide (34° 48'S, 138° 23'E) 10 Port Louis (Mauritius) 6.93, 9.65
Routes E from 6.127 Selat Sunda 6.164
Routes to: Singapore 6.166
Aden 6.171 Snares Islands 6.172
Brisbane 6.127, 7.51 Strait of Hormuz 6.63
British Columbia 10.3.5 15 Torres Strait 6.167
Cabo de Hornos 10.3.1 Wellington 6.172
Cape Agulhas 6.159 Admiralty
Cape Calavite 7.169 Chart Agents 1.10
Cape Leeuwin 6.126, 6.128 Distance Tables 1.12
Cape Town 6.159 20 List of Radio Signals 1.12
Chile 10.3.4 List of Lights 1.12
Darwin (WTabout) 6.120,6.128 Notices to Mariners 1.12
Durban 6.159 Sailing Directions 1.12
Fremantle 6.126, 6.128 Tide Tables 1.12
Guam 7.169, 7.174 25 Africa
Hobart 6.127, 6.128 East and South coasts
Hong Kong 7.169, 7.174 Routes to:
Manila 7.169 Karachi 6.60
Melbourne 6.127, 6.128 Persian Gulf 6.59
Nagasaki 7.169, 7.174 30 West Coast
Port Hedland 6.126, 6.128 Caution and notes 3.41
San Francisco 10.3.5 Agulhas, Cape (15 miles S of)
Selat Lombok 7.169 (35° 05' S, 20° 00' E)
Selat Manipa 7.169 Routes to:
Selat Sunda 7.169 35 Adelaide 6.157
Shanghai 7.169, 7.174 Aden 6.55, 6.58
Singapore 7.169, 7.174 Arquipelago dos Bijagos 3.42
Sydney 6.127, 7.51, 10.3.7 Bombay 6.65
Torres Strait: Bonny River 3.42
E-about 7.51-7.54 40 Cabo de Hornos 3.56
W-about 6.126, 6.128 Cabot Strait 3.61
Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.169, 7.174 Calcutta 6.67
Verde Island Passage 7.169 Cape Palmas 3.42
Yap 7.169, 7.174 Casablanca 2.99.2
Yokohama 7.169 45 Colombo 6.67
Aden (12° 45'N, 44° 57'E) Colon 3.59
Routes to: Dakar 2.99.2
Adelaide 6.170 Darwin 6.154
Australia, S coast 6.170, 9.64 Douala 3.42
Bay of Bengal 9.61 50 Estrecho de Magallanes 3.56
Bombay 6.76, 9.60 Falkland Islands 3.56
Brisbane 6.175 Freetown 3.42
Cape Agulhas 6.56, 6.58 Fremantle 6.157
Cape Leeuwin 6.170, 9.64 Galleons Passage 3.59
Cape of Good Hope 9.66 55 Gibraltar 2.99.1
Cape Town 6.56, 6.58 Halifax 3.61
Colombo (Sri Lanka) 6.78, 9.61 Hobart 6.157
Darwin 6.167 lie d'Ouessant 2.97
Dondra Head 6.78 Karachi 6.60
Durban 6.56, 6.58 60 Lagos 3.42
Fremantle 6.170, 9.64 Las Palmas 2.97
Karachi 6.64 Libreville 3.42
Mahe I (Seychelles Group) 6.108, 9.67 Lobito 3.42
Malacca Strait 9.62 Madras 6.67
Melbourne 6.170 65 Melbourne 6.157
Mombasa 6.58, 9.67 Mombasa 6.55, 6.58
Mozambique Channel 6.58 New York 3.61
New Zealand 6.172, 9.64 Paradip 6.67
Pacific Ocean 6.172 Pointe Noire 3.42
Persian Gulf 6.63 70 Port Hedland 6.154

283
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Agulhas, Cape—continued Apia: Samoa—continued

Port Louis 6.90 Wellington 7.87
Rangoon 6.67 Yap 7.203
Recife 3.46 Yokohama 7.205
Rio de Janeiro 3.50 Arabian Sea
Rio de la Plata 3.52 Swell 6.21
Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent Arafura Sea
Channel 3.60 Approach from Indian
Salvador 3.46 Ocean 6.122
Selat Sunda 6.150 to Areas to be Avoided 1.29
Singapore 6.152 Ascension Island
Snares Islands 6.160 Routes to:
Strait of Hormuz 6.59 Cape Town 8.34
Takoradi 3.42 Cape of Good Hope 8.34
Torres Strait 6.154 15 English Channel 8.31
Wellington 6.160 Equatorial Africa 8.35
Agulhas Current 6.36 Saint Helena 8.33
Alas, Selat 7.110 South America 8.32
Directions 9.47.4 South-west Africa 8.35
Routes to: 20 Atlantic Ocean
Cape of Good Hope 9.125 South-west Monsoon 2.2
South China Sea 9.32.5 Swell 2.11-2.12
Alaska Current 7.33 Variables (Winds) 2.4
Aleutian Current 7.33 Westerlies 2.6
Aleutian Islands 25 Auckland (36° 36' S, 174° 49' E)
Weather and sea conditions on Routes to:
routes N of 7.350 Apia 7.87.1
Algiers (36° 46' N, 3° 05' E) Balintang Channel 7.190
Routes to: Brisbane 7.73
Gibraltar 5.30 30 Cabo de Homos 7.270
Port Said 5.31 Callao 7.270
Alor, Selat 7.110 Estrecho de Magallanes 7.270
Alur Pelayaran, see proper name Guam 7.190
Amazonas, Rio Hobart 7.59
Routes to: 35 Hong Kong 7.190
English Channel 8.56 Honolulu 7.233
New York 8.56 Iquique 7.270
Recife 8.55.1 Juan de Fuca Strait 7.326
Ambon (3° 4 1 ' S , 128° 10' E) Manila 7.190
Routes to: 40 Melbourne 7.62
Hong Kong 7.143 Nagasaki 7.190
Singapore 7.133 Noumea 7.88
AMVER System of Ship Nuku'alofa 7.86.2
Reporting 1.31 Panama 7.274
Apia: Samoa 45 Papeete 7.85
(13°47'S, 171° 45'W) Prince Rupert 7.325
Routes E from 10.26 San Bernadino Strait 7.190
Routes to: San Diego 7.328
Auckland 7.87 San Francisco 7.327
Brisbane 7.78 50 Shanghai 7.190
Callao 7.277 Suva 7.88
Guam 7.207 Sydney 7.65
Hong Kong 7.203 Torres Strait 7.80
Honolulu 7.234 Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.190
Iquique 7.277 55 Valparaiso 2.270
Juan de Fuca Strait 7.318 Verde Island Passage 7.190
Manila 7.203 Wellington 7.84
New Zealand 7.87 Yap 7.190
Nuku'alofa 7.92 Yokohama 7.190
Panama 7.301 60 Australia
Papeete 7.94 Approaches from Indian
Prince Rupert 7.317 Ocean 6.120-6.122
San Diego 7.320 Passages from South Africa 6.153
San Francisco 7.319 East coast
Shanghai 7.207 65 Coastwise passages 7.51-7.52
Suva 7.91 Routes to:
Sydney 7.70 Eastern Archipelago 7.168
Torres Strait 7.83 Indian Ocean 6.175
Valparaiso 7.277 North coast
Verde Island Passage 7.203 70 Coastwise passages 6.121
284
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Australia—continued Bah, Selat 7.110

Routes to: Notes on 9.47.2
Bay of Bengal 6.140 Routes to:
Calcutta 9.134 Cape of Good Hope 9.125
Cape of Good Hope 9.132 5 South China Sea 9.32.5
Cape Town 6.156 Balik Papan (1° 21' S, 116° 56' E)
Colombo 9.133 Routes to:
Durban 6.156 Cape Calavite 7.147
Fremantle 9.131 Hong Kong 7.142
Hong Kong 9.136 10 Manila 7.147
Singapore 9.32.6, 9.135 Singapore 7.136
Sydney 9.130 Torres Strait 7.150
North-west coast Verde Island Passage 7.147
Coastwise passages 6.121 Balintang Channel
Routes to: 15 (20°00'N, 122°2O'E)
Bombay 6.174 Routes to:
Cape Town 6.156 Auckland 7.190
Colombo 6.174 Brisbane 7.178, 7.188
Durban 6.156 Melbourne 7.178, 7.188
Karachi 6.174 20 Panama, 7.313
Strait of Hormuz 6.174 Sydney 7.178, 7.188
South coast Torres Strait 7.184, 7.188
Fishing 6.125 Wellington 7.190
Routes to: Baltic ports
Aden 6.171 25 Sailing routes from 8.2.1-8.2.5
Cape Town 6.159 Bangka, Selat: Celebes
Durban 6.159 Sea 7.110
Eastern Archipelago 7.169 Bangka, Selat: Java Sea 7.110
Pacific Ocean 10.3.1-10.3.7 Directions
South-east coast 30 North-bound 9.35.1-9.35.4
Routes to: South-bound 9.49.8
Aden 9.149 Routes to:
Bay of Bengal 9.151 Selat Berhala 9.38.2
Cape of Good Hope 9.148 Selat Riau 9.36.1-9.36.3
Colombo 9.150 35 Selat Sunda 9.49.8
Singapore 9.152 Singapore 9.38.1-9.38.4,
West coast 9.42.2
Coastwise passages 6.121 South China Sea 9.43.1-9.43.2
Fishing 6.125 Bangkok (Bar)
Routes to: 40 (13°23'N, 100° 35'E)
Bay of Bengal, W side 6.141 Routes to:
Bombay 6.174 Cape Calavite 7.138
Cape Town 6.159 Hong Kong or ports farther
Colombo 6.174 N 10.39.1-10.39.2
Durban 6.159 45 Jakarta 7.139
Eastern Archipelago 7.170 Manila 7.138
Karachi 6.174 Selat Sunda 7.139
Rangoon 6.142 Singapore 7.113, 10.40.1-
Strait of Hormuz 6.174 10.40.2
Azores Current 2.15 50 Surabaya 7.139
Verde Island Passage 7.138
Banjul (13°32'N, 16° 54'W)
Bahia Blanca Route to Porto Grande 2.131
(39°10'S, 61°45'W) Barbados (Bridgetown)
Routes to: 55 (13°O6'N, 59°39'W)
Cabo Calcanhar 3.32-3.33 Routes to:
Cabo de Homos 3.33 Bishop Rock 2.85
Comodoro Rivadavia 3.33 Cabot Strait 2.103.1
Estrecho de Magallanes 3.33 Chesapeake Bay 2.103.1
Falkland Islands 3.35 60 Delaware Bay 2.103.1
Recife 3.32-3.33 Gibraltar 2.85
Rio de Janeiro 3.32-3.33 Halifax 2.103.1
Rio de la Plata 3.33 La Gironde 2.85
Salvador 3.32-3.33 Lisboa 2.85
Baja California 65 New York 2.103.1
Routes to: Ponta Delgada 2.125
Honolulu and Pacific ports 10.103 Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent
North America, W coast 10.102 Channel 4.29.7
Balabac Strait South America, NE coast 8.54
Route to Selat Lombok 7.165 70 Vigo 2.85
285
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Barcelona (41 20' N, 2 10' E) Belle Isle, Strait of—continued

Routes to: North Sea 2.54
Gibraltar 5.28 Norway 2.54
Port Said 5.31 Trondheim 2.54
Basilan Strait 5 Benggala, Selat 6.82
(6°50'N, 122°00'E) 7.110 Benguela Current 3.12
Routes to: Bergen (60° 24'N, 5° 18'E)
Panama 7.311 Routes to:
Selat Manipa 7.166 Hudson Strait 2.51.1
Singapore 7.125 10 Kap Farvel 2.49
Bass Strait 9.1.4 North America, E coast 2.62-2.64.2
Routes to: Strait of Belle Isle 2.54
Adelaide 9.162 Berhala, Selat 7.110
Spencer Gulf 9.163 Route to Selat Durian 9.38.3
Baur, Selat 15 Bermuda (32° 23' N, 64° 38' W)
Directions Caution 2.38
North-bound 9.40.3 Routes to:
South-bound 9.49.6 Bishop Rock 2.85
Bay of Bengal Gibraltar 2.85
Navigation under sail in 9.90 20 Habana 4.22
Routes in 6.70 Kingston 4.24
Routes to: La Gironde 2.85
Aden 9.94 Lisboa 2.85
Australia Ponta Delgada 2.125
North coast 6.140 25 Porto Grande 2.130
South-east coast 9.96 Vigo 2.85
West coast 6.141 Bight of Biafra
Bombay 9.93 Routes to:
Cape of Good Hope 9.95 Ascension Island 8.29.2
Cape Leeuvvin 9.96 30 Cape of Good Hope 8.30.6
Cape Town 6.69 Cape Town and ports
Durban 6.69 between 8.30.1-8.30.5
Fremantle 9.96 English Channel 8.28
New Zealand 9.96 Freetown and ports between 8.27.1-8.27.2
Storms 9.3.6 35 Saint Helena 8.29.1
Swell 6.21 South America 8.29.1-8.29.2
Bay of Biscay Bijagos, Arquipelago dos
Remarks 2.33 (75 miles SW of)
Currents 2.20 (10°40'N, 17°40'W)
Routes to: 40 Routes to:
Atlantic Ocean ports 8.14 Bonny River 3.42
English Channel 8.14 Cape Agulhas 3.42
Beaufort Wind Scale Cape of Good Hope
Table A (page 261) (145 miles S of) 3.42
Beirut (33°55'N, 35° 31'E) 45 Cape Palmas 3.42
Routes to: Cape Town 3.42
Gibraltar 5.30 Casablanca 2.99
Port Said 5.31 Dakar 2.99
Belize (17°20'N, 88° 01'W) Douala 3.42
Routes to: 50 Freetown 3.42
Crooked Island Passage 4.29.2 Gibraltar 2.99.1
English Channel 4.21, 8.48.1 lie d'Ouessant 2.97
Gulf of Mexico 8.48.3 Lagos 3.42
Mona Passage 4.29.5 Las Palmas 2.97
North America, E coast 8.48.2 55 Libreville 3.42
Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent Lobito 3.42
Channel 4.29.7 Pointe Noire 3.42
Sombrero Passage 4.29.6 Takoradi 3.42
Turks Island Passage 4.29.4 Bishop Rock (5 miles S of)
Belle Isle, Strait of 60 (49° 47' N, 6° 27' W)
(51° 44' N, 56° 00' W) 2.35 Routes to:
Routes to: Barbados 2.85
Bergen 2.54 Bermuda 2.85
Bishop Rock 2.55 Boston 2.62-2.64.4
Cape Wrath 2.55 65 Cabot Strait 2.62-2.64.4
Fastnet 2.55 Chesapeake Bay 2.62-2.64.4
Inishtrahull 2.55 Delaware Bay 2.62-2.64.4
La Gironde 2.55 Halifax 2.62-2.64.4
Lindesnes 2.54 Hudson Strait 2.51.1
Nordkapp 2.53 70 Kap Farvel 2.50
286
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Bishop Rock—continued Boston—continued

Mona Passage 2.85 Fastnet 2.62-2.64.4
New York 2.62-2.64.4 Gibraltar 2.62-2.63.4
North-East Providence Inishtrahull 2.62-2.64.4
Channel 2.84 La Gironde 2.62-2.64.4
Ponta Delgada 2.125 Lisboa 2.62-2.63.4
Porto Grande 2.130 Nordkapp 2.62-2.64
Rio Para 2.111 Trondheim 2.62-2.64.1
Saint John's 2.58 Vigo 2.62-2.63.4
Sombrero Passage 2.85 10 Bougainville Strait
Strait of Belle Isle 2.55 (6°40'S, 156° 15'E)
Turks Island Passage 2.85 Route to Torres Strait 7.183
Bluff (46° 38'S, 168° 21'E) Brazil Current 3.12
Routes to: Brisbane (Caloundra Head)
Brisbane 7.71 15 (26°49'S, 153° 10'E)
Hobart 7.57 Routes to:
Melbourne 7.60 Adelaide 6.127, 7.51
Sydney 7.63 Aden 6.175
Boleng, Selat 7.110 Apia 7.78
Bombay (18° 51' N, 72° 50' E) 20 Auckland 7.73
Routes to: Balintang Channel 7.178
Aden 6.77, 9.72 Bluff 7.71
Australia, W and NW Bombay 6.175
coasts 6.174 Cabo de Homos 7.270
Bay of Bengal 9.77 25 Calcutta 6.175
Brisbane 6.175 Callao 7.270
Cape Agulhas 6.66 Cape Calavite 7.166, 7.168
Cape Leeuwin 6.174 Cape Town 6.175
Cape of Good Hope 9.74 Colombo 6.175
Cape Town 6.66 30 Durban 6.175
Colombo 6.81, 9.75 Dutch Harbor 7.387
Darwin 6.173 East China Sea 7.181
Dondra Head 6.81 Estrecho de Magallanes 7.270
Durban 6.66 Guam 7.168, 7.174, 7.179
Fremantle 6.174 35 Hobart 7.51
Karachi 9.71 Hong Kong 7.138, 7.166, 7.168
Mahe Island 6.109 7.178
Mombasa 6.73 Honolulu 7.231.1
Port Hedland 6.174 Iquique 7.270
Port Louis 6.96.1 40 Japan 7.168, 7.174, 7.181
Torres Strait 6.173 Juan de Fuca Strait 7.334
Bonny River (4° 13' N, 7° 01' E) Karachi 6.175
Routes to: Madras 6.175
Arquipelago dos Bijagos 3.42 Manila 7.166, 7.168, 7.177
Cabot Strait 3.63 45 Melbourne 7.51
Cape Agulhas 3.42 Mombasa 6.175
Cape of Good Hope Nagasaki 7.168, 7.174, 7.175
(145 miles S of) 3.42 Noumea 7.75
Cape Palmas 3.42 Nuku'alofa 7.76
Cape Town 3.42 50 Panama 7.305
Colon 3.62 Papeete 7.74
Douala 3.42 Petropavlovsk 7.182
Estrecho de Magallanes 3.53 Ports NE of Japan 7.182
Freetown 3.42 Prince Rupert 7.334
Halifax 3.63 55 Rangoon 6.175
Lagos 3.42 San Bernadino Strait 7.177
Libreville 3.42 San Diego 7.333
Lobito 3.42 San Francisco 7.333
New York 3.63 Selat Manipa 7.166, 7.168
Pointe Noire 3.42 60 Shanghai 7.166, 7.168, 7.174
Recife 3.46 7.180, 7.195
Rio de Janeiro 3.46 Singapore 7.130, 7.168
Rio de la Plata 3.46 Strait of Hormuz 6.175
Salvador 3.46 Suva 7.77
Takoradi 3.42 65 Sydney 7.51
Boston (42° 20' N, 70° 46' W) Torres Strait 7.52-7.52.2
Routes to: Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.168, 7.174, 7.182
Bergen 2.62-2.64.2 Valparaiso 7.270
Bishop Rock 2.62-2.64.4 Verde Island Passage 7.166, 7.168, 7.177
Cape Wrath 2.62-2.64.3 70 Wellington 7.72
287
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Yap 7.168, 7.174, 7.176 Calavite, Cape—continued

Yokohama 7.168, 7.174, 7.181 Selat Lombok 7.164, 7.165
Buton Alur Pelayaran 7.110 Selat Manipa 7.166
Buton, Selat 7.110 Selat Sunda 7.163
5 Shanghai 7.195
Surabaya 7.147
Cabo Verde, Arquipelago de, see Sydney 7.166, 7.168
Porto Grande Tarakan 7.147
Cabot Strait Torres Strait 7.166, 7.173
(47° 32' N, 59° 30' W) 10 Ujung Pandang 7.147
Ice 2.27.3 Yokohama 7.197
Routes to: Calcanhar, Cabo (60 miles ENE
Barbados 2.103.1 of) (4° 40'S, 34°35'W)
Bergen 2.62-2.64.2 Routes to:
Bishop Rock 2.62-2.64.4 15 Bahia Blanca 3.32-3.33
Bonny River 3.63 Cabo de Homos 3.32-3.33
Cabo Calcanhar 1.105 Cabot Strait 2.105
Cape Agulhas 3.61 Chesapeake Bay 2.105
Cape of Good Hope Comodoro Rivadavia 3.32, 3.33
(145 miles S of) 3.61 20 Delaware Bay 2.105
Cape Palmas 3.63 Estrecho de Magallanes 3.32-3.33
Cape Town 3.61 Falkland Islands 3.35
Cape Wrath 2.62-2.64.3 Galleons Passage 2.107
Crooked Island Passage 2.103 Halifax 2.105
Douala 3.63 25 New York 2.105
Fastnet 2.62-2.64.4 Recife 3.32
Gibraltar 2.62-2.63.4 Rio Para 2.107
Inishtrahull 2.62-2.64.4 Rio de Janeiro 3.32
La Gironde 2.62-2.64.4 Rio de la Plata 3.32
Lagos 3.63 30 Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent
Libreville 3.63 Channel 2.107
Lisboa 2.62-2.63.4 Salvador 3.32
Lobito 3.63 Tobago 2.107
Mona Passage 2.103 Calcutta Approach
Nordkapp 2.62-2.64 35 (21° 00'N, 88° 13'E)
North-East Providence Routes to:
Channel 2.103 Brisbane 6.175
Pointe Noire 3.63 Cape Agulhas 6.69
Ponta1 Delgada 2.125 Cape Leeuwin 6.141
Porto Grande 2.130 40 Cape Town 6.69
Rio Para 2.104 Colombo (Sri Lanka) 9.97
Sombrero Passage 2.103 Darwin 6.140
Straits of Florida 2.103 Dondra Head 6.70
Takoradi 3.63 Durban 6.69
Trondheim 2.62-2.64.1 45 Fremantle 6.141
Turks Island Passage 2.103 Madras 6.70, 9.97
Vigo 2.62-2.63.4 Mergui 9.98
Caicos Passage Moulmein 9.98
(22° 15'N, 72° 20'W) Paradip 6.70
Routes to: 50 Port Hedland 6.141
Habana 4.29.3 Rangoon 6.70, 9.98
Kingston 4.29.3 Singapore 6.70, 9.99
New Orleans 4.29.3 Torres Strait 6.140
Calavite, Cape (5 miles W of) Calicut
(13°27'N, 120° 13'E) 55 Route to Aden 9.72
Routes to: California Current 7.33
Adelaide 7.169 Callao(12°02'S, 77° 11' W)
Balik Papan 7.147 Routes to:
Bangkok 7.138 Apia 7.277
Brisbane 7.166, 7.168 60 Auckland 7.276
Cape Leeuwin 7.163, 7.164, 7.170 Australia 10.115
Cebu 7.149 Cabo de Hornos 10.119
Darwin 7.166, 7.172 Central America 10.113
Fremantle 7.163, 7.164, 7.170 China 10.116
Ho Chi Minh City 7.138 65 Estrecho de Magallanes 7.225
Hong Kong 7.138 Honolulu 7.249
Iloilo 7.149 Iquique 7.225
Melbourne 7.169 Japan 10.116
Port Hedland 7.163, 7.164, 7.171 Juan de Fuca Strait 10.114
Sandakan 7.148 70 Mexico 7.225, 10.113
288
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Callao—continued Cape Town—continued

New Zealand 10.115 Bombay 6.65, 9.5.1-9.5.5
Panama 7.225, 10.113 Bonny River 3.42
Papeete 7.256 Bordeaux 8.40.2
Philippine Islands 10.116 5 Brisbane 6.175
San Diego 7.222 Cabo de Hornos 3.56
San Francisco 7.222, 10.114 Cabot Strait 3.61
South American ports: Calcutta 6.67
As far S as 27° S 10.117 Cape Palmas 3.42
South of 30° S 10.118 10 Casablanca 2.99.1
Suva 7.278 Central America 8.41.1-8.41.4
Sydney 7.276 Colombo 6.67, 9.4.1-9.4.3
Valparaiso 7.225 Colon 3.59
Wellington 7.276 Dakar 2.99.1
Canada, E coast 15 Darwin 6.154
Routes to: Douala 3.42
Cape of Good Hope 8.44.2 Durban 6.55
Cape Town 8.44.2 English Channel 2.97, 8.40.1
Caribbean Sea 8.44.5 Estrecho de Magallanes 3.56
English Channel 8.44.1 20 Falkland Islands 3.56
Gulf of Mexico 8.44.5-8.44.7 Freetown 3.42
Rio Amazonas 8.44.4 Fremantle 6.157, 9.1.5
South America 8.44.3 Galleons Passage 3.59
Canakkale Bogazi Gibraltar 2.99.1
(40° 09' N, 26° 24' E) 25 Halifax 3.61
Routes to: Hobart 6.157, 9.1.9
Gibraltar 5.30 lie d'Ouessant 2.97
Port Said 5.31 Karachi 6.60
Canary Current 2.15 Lagos 3.42
Cape of Good Hope 30 Las Palmas 2.97
Rounding 3.23.1-3.23.2, 9.1.2 Libreville 3.42
Cape of Good Hope (145 miles Lobito 3.42
S of) (36° 45'S, 19°00'E) Madras 6.67
Routes to: Mahe Island 6.106
Adelaide 6.157 35 Melbourne 6.157, 9.1.7
Aden 6.58 Mombasa 6.55, 6.58, 9.8
Bombay 6.65 Mozambique Channel 6.55
Brisbane 6.175 New York 3.61.1
Calcutta 6.67 New Zealand 6.160, 9.1.10
Colombo 6.67 40 North America 8.41.1-8.41.4
Darwin 6.154 Pacific Ocean 6.160
Fremantle 6.157 Paradip 6.67
Hobart 6.157 Pointe Noire 3.42
Karachi 6.60 Port Hedland 6.154
Madras 6.67 45 Port Louis (Mauritius) 6.90.1, 9.6
Melbourne 6.157 Rangoon 6.67
Mombasa 6.58 Recife 3.46
Mozambique Channel 6.55.2 Rio de Janeiro 3.50
Paradip 6.67 Rio de la Plata 3.52
Port Hedland 6.154 50 Saint Helena 8.40.1
Port Louis 6.90 Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent
Rangoon 6.67 Channel 3.60
Selat Sunda 6.150 Salvador 3.46
Singapore 6.152 Selat Sunda 6.150
Snares Islands 6.160 55 Singapore 6.152, 9.2.1-9.2.2
Strait of Hormuz 6.59 Snares Islands 6.160
Torres Strait 6.154 South America 8.42
Wellington 6.160 South China Sea 9.2.1-9.2.5
Cape Town (33° 53' S, 18° 26' E) Strait of Hormuz 6.59
Routes to: 60 Sydney 9.1.8
Adelaide 6.157, 9.1.6 Takoradi 3.42
Aden 6.55, 6.58, Tasmania 9.1.10
9.7.1-9.7.3 Torres Strait 6.154
Arquipelago dos Bijagos 3.42 Wellington 6.160
Ascension Island 8.40.1 65 West Africa 8.43
Australia: 9.1.1-9.1.8 West Indies 8.41.1-8.41.5
North and NW coasts 6.154 Caribbean Sea
West and S coasts 6.157 Currents 4.11,4.15.1
Bass Strait 9.1.3-9.1.4 Eastern part
Bay of Bengal 6.67, 9.3.1-9.3.5 70 Routes to:
289
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Caribbean Sea—continued Chesapeake Bay—continued

South America 4.27 Channel 2.103
Yucatan Channel 4.26 Rio Para 2.104
Entrance channels 4.16 Sombrero Passage 2.103
Navigation in 4.15 Straits of Florida 2.103
Routes : Trondheim\ 2.62-2.64.1
English Channel 4.21, 8.50 Turks Island Passage 2.103
United States, E coast 8.50 Vigo 2.62-2.63.4
Swell 4.5 China
Winds and Weather 4.1 10 Routes to Indian Ocean 10.42.1-10.42.6
Casablanca (33° 38' N, V 35' W) Ports N of Shanghai
Routes to: Routes to:
Arquipelago dos Bijagos 2.99 Brisbane 7.181
Cape Agulhas 2.99.1 Melbourne 7.181
Cape of Good Hope IS Sydney 7.181
(145 miles S of) 2.99.1 Torres Strait 7.187
Cape Palmas 2.99 China Strait 7.183
Cape Town 2.99.1 Climatic conditions 1.13
Chesapeake Bay 2.76 Clyde, River
Dakar 2.99 20 Routes to Atlantic ports 8.4
Delaware Bay 2.76 Cochin
Freetown 2.99 Route to Aden 9.72
Gibraltar 2.99 Colombia, N coast
lie d'Ouessant 2.98 Routes to:
Las Palmas 2.99 25 English Channel 8.49.1
New York 2.76 Gulf of Mexico 8.49.3
North-East Providence North America, E coast 8.49.2
Channel 2.76 Colombo (6° 58' N, 79° 58' E)
Ponta Delgada 2.125 Routes to:
Porto Grande 2.131 30 Aden 6.79, 9.79
Rio Para 2.111 Australia
Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent South-east coast 9.81
Channel 2.76 West and NW coasts 6.174
Tobago 2.76 Bombay 6.81, 9.78
Caseyr, Raas 6.58.3, 9.73 35 Brisbane 6.175
Cebu (10° 18'N, 123° 55'E) Cape Agulhas 6.68
Routes to: Cape Leeuwin 6.174
Cape Calavite 7.149 Cape of Good Hope 9.80
Hong Kong 7.144 Cape Town 6.68
Manila 7.149 40 Darwin 6.173
Singapore 7.125 Durban 6.68
Verde Island Passage 7.149 Fremantle 6.174, 9.81
Celebes Sea India, W coast 9.78
Route to South China Sea 9.47.6 Karachi 6.81
Ceram Sea 45 Mane Island 6.110
Routes to: Malacca Strait 9.82
Indian Ocean 9.50.4 Mombasa 6.75
Pacific Ocean 9.46.3-9.46.4 New Zealand 9.81
Chart Signs and Abbreviations, Port Hedland 6.174
Chart 5011 1.12 50 Port Louis 6.97
Chesapeake Bay Strait of Hormuz 6.80
(36° 56'N, 75° 58'W) Torres Strait 6.173
Routes to: Colon (9° 23' N, 79" 55' W)
Barbados 2.103.1 Routes to:
Bergen 2.62-2.64.2 55 Bonny River Entrance 3.62
Bishop Rock 2.62-2.64.4 Cabo Catoche 4.25
Cabo Calcanhar 2.105 Cabo San Antonio 4.25
Cape Wrath 2.62-2.64.3 Cape Agulhas 2.79
Casablanca 2.76 Cape of Good Hope
Crooked Island Passage 2.103 60 (145 miles S of) 2.79
Dakar 2.76 Cape Palmas 3.62
Fastnet 2.62-2.64.4 Cape Town 2.79
Freetown 2.76 Crooked Island Passage 4.29.2
Gibraltar 2.62-2.63.4 Douala 3.62
Inishtrahull 2.62-2.64.4 65 English Channel 4.21, 8.49.1
La Gironde 2.62-2.64.4 Galleons Passage 4.28
Lisboa 2.62-2.63.4 Gulf of Mexico 4.25, 8.49.3
Mona Passage 2.103 Lagos 3.62
Nordkapp 2.62-2.64 Libreville 3.62
North-East Providence 70 Lobito 3.62
290
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Colon—continued Dakar (14° 41' N, 17° 24' W)

Mona Passage 4.29.5 Routes to:
New Orleans 4.25, 8.49.3 Arquipelago dos Bijagos 2.99.1
North America, E coast 8.49.2 Cape Agulhas 2.99.1
Pointe Noire 3.62 5 Cape of Good Hope
Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent (145 miles S of) 2.99.1
Channel 4.29.7 Cape Palmas 2.99
Sombrero Passage 4.29.6 Cape Town 2.99.1
Takoradi 3.62 Casablanca 2.99
Tobago 4.28 10 Chesapeake Bay 2.76
Trinidad 4.28 Delaware Bay 2.76
Turks Island Passage 4.29.4 Freetown 2.99
Columbia River Gibraltar 2.99
Routes to: lie d'Ouessant 2.98.1
Honolulu 10.86 15 Las Palmas 2.99
San Francisco 10.88 New York 2.76
South America 10.88 North-East Providence
Sydney 10.87 Channel 2.76
Yokohama 10.86 Ponta Delgada 2.125
Comodoro Rivadavia 20 Porto Grande 2.131
(45° 51'S, 67° 26'W) Rio Para 2.111
Routes to: Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent
Bahia Blanca 3.33 Channel 2.76
Cabo Calcanhar 3.32-3.33 Tobago 2.76
Cabo de Hornos 3.33 25 Dampier, Selat 7.110
Estrecho de Magallanes 3.33 Darwin (12° 25' S, 130° 47'E)
Falkland Islands 3.35 Routes to:
Recife 3.32-3.33 Adelaide (W-about) 6.120, 6.128
Rio de Janeiro 3.32-3.33 Aden 6.168
Rio de la Plata 3.33 30 Bombay 6.173
Salvador 3.32-3.33 Calcutta 6.140
Coral waters, Navigation in 1.21 Cape Agulhas 6.156
Crooked Island Passage Cape Calavite 7.166, 7.172
(23° 15'N, 74° 25'W) Cape Leeuwin 6.120, 6.128
Routes to: 35 Cape Town 6.156
Belize 4.29.2 Colombo 6.173
Cabot Strait 2.103 Durban 6.156
Chesapeake Bay 2.103 Eastern Archipelago 7.172
Colon 4.29.2 Fremantle 6.120, 6.128
Delaware Bay 2.103 40 Guam 7.172, 7.174
Habana 4.29.2 Hobart 6.120, 6.126
Halifax 2.103 Hong Kong 7.138, 7.166, 7.172
Kingston 4.29.2 Karachi 6.173
New Orleans 4.29.2 Madras 6.140
New York 2.103 45 Manila 7.166, 7.172
Curacao (Willemstad) Melbourne 6.120, 6.124, 6.126
(12° 06'N, 68° 56'W) Mombasa 6.163
Routes to: Nagasaki 7.172, 7.174
English Channel 4.21 Port Hedland 6.120, 6.128
Galleons Passage 4.29.8 50 Port Louis 6.100
Mona Passage 4.29.5 Rangoon 6.140
Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent Selat Manipa 7.172
Channel 4.29.7 Selat Sunda 6.122
Sombrero Passage 4.29.6 Shanghai 7.172, 7.174
Currents which are named; see 55 Singapore 6.122, 7.127
proper name. Strait of Hormuz 6.173
Currents 1.19 Torres Strait 6.120, 6.128
Atlantic Ocean 2.14-2.20, 3.12 Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.172, 7.174
Bay of Biscay 2.20 Verde Island Passage 7.166, 7.172
Caribbean Sea 4.11, 4.15.1 60 Yap 7.172, 7.174
Gulf of Mexico 4.11,4.15.1 Yokohama 7.172, 7.174
Indian Ocean 6.31-6.36 Davidson Current 7.33
Mediterranean Sea 5.16 Davis Strait
North Sea 2.18 Directions and Ice 2.46
Pacific Ocean 7.32-7.36 65 Routes to Europe 2.51
Cyclones; see Tropical Storms 1.15, 7.10, 7.20 Delaware Bay
(38° 48' N, 75° 02' W)
Routes to:
Dagu Lanjiangsha (Taku Bar) Barbados 2.103.1
(38°56'N, 117°59'E) 70 Bergen 2.62-2.64.2
291
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Delaware Bay—continued Dry Tortugas—continued

Bishop Rock 2.62-2.64.4 South-bound routes to
Cabo Calcanhar 2.105 24° 30' N, 83° 05' W
Cape Wrath 2.62-2.64.3 Routes to:
Casablanca 2.76 North-East Providence
Crooked Island Passage 2.103 Channel 4.29.1
Dakar 2.76 Straits of Florida 4.29
Fastnet 2.62-2.64.4 Durban (29° 51'S, 31°O6'E)
Freetown 2.76 Routes to:
Gibraltar 2.62-2.63.4 10 Adelaide 6.158
Inishtrahull 2.62-2.64.4 Aden 6.57.1-6.58, 9.10.3
La Gironde 2.62-2.64.4 Australia 9.9.1
Lisboa 2.62-2.63.4 North-west and N coasts 6.155
Mona Passage 2.103 West and S coasts 6.158
Nordkapp 2.62-2.64 15 Bay of Bengal 6.67
North-East Providence Bombay 6.65
Channel 2.103 Brisbane 6.175
Ponta Delgada 2.125 Calcutta 6.67
Porto Grande 2.130 Cape Town 6.56, 9.11.1
Rio Para 2.104 20 Colombo 6.67
Sombrero Passage 2.103 Darwin 6.155
Straits of Florida 2.103 East Africa 9.10.1-9.10.2
Trondheim 2.62-2.64.1 Fremantle 6.158
Turks Island Passage 2.103 Hobart 6.158
Vigo 2.62-2.63.4 25 India 9.9.2
Denmark Strait, Ice in 2.27.5 Karachi 6.60
Depressions 1.16 Madras 6.67
Dhiorix Korinthou 5.26 Mahe Island 6.106
Distances quoted in routes 1.5 Melbourne 6.158
Distress and Rescue at Sea 1.12 30 Mombasa 6.56-6.58, 9.10.2
Dixon Entrance New Zealand 9.9.1
(54'30'N, 132°3O'W) Paradip 6.67
Route to Dutch Harbor 7.221 Port Hedland 6.155
Doldrums; see Intertropical Port Louis (Mauritius) 6.90.1, 9.10.1
Convergence Zone 35 Rangoon 6.67
Dondra Head (10 miles S of) Selat Sunda 6.151
(5° 45' N, 80° 36' E) Singapore 6.152, 9.9.2
Routes to: South China Sea 9.9.2
Aden 6.79 Strait of Hormuz 6.59
Bombay 6.81 40 Torres Strait 6.155
Calcutta 6.70 Durian, Selat 7.110
Karachi 6.81 Route to Singapore 9.38.4
Madras 6.70 Dutch Harbor
Mombasa 6.75 (53°56'N, 166°29'W)
Paradip 6.70 45 Routes to:
Rangoon 6.70 Brisbane 7.387
Singapore 6.70 Dixon Entrance 7.221
Strait of Hormuz 6.80 Honolulu 7.245
Douala (3° 54' N, 9° 32' E) Juan de Fuca Strait 7.221
Routes to: 50 Melbourne 7.387
Arquipelago dos Bijagos 3.42 Panama 7.221
Bonny River 3.42 San Diego 7.221
Cabot Strait 3.63 San Francisco 7.221, 10.90
Cape Agulhas 3.42 Sydney 7.387
Cape of Good Hope 55 Torres Strait 7.387
(145 miles S of) 3.42 Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.386
Cape Palmas 3.42 Yokohama 7.386
Cape Town 3.42
Colon 3.62
Freetown 3.42 60
Halifax 3.63 East Australian Current 7.34
Lagos 3.42 East China Sea
Libreville 3.42 Routes to Melbourne, Sydney
Lobito 3.42 and Brisbane 7.181
New York 3.63 65 East Greenland Current 2.15
Pointe Noire 3.42 Eastern Archipelago
Takoradi 3.42 Passages and straits in 7.110, 9.31
Dry Tortugas Principal routes through 7.162-7.167,
North-bound routes from 9.30-9.32, 9.48
24° 25' N, 83° 00' W 70 Routes to China coast 10.38
292
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Eight Degree Channel 9.63 Farvel, Kap—continued

El Nino phenomenon 7.35 Nordkapp 2.48
Elafonisou, Steno North Sea 2.49
(36° 25' N, 22° 57' E) Norway, W coast 2.49
Routes to: Vigo 2.50
Gibraltar 5.30 Fastnet Rock (5 miles S of)
Port Said 5.31 (51°18'N, 9°36'W)
English Channel Routes to:
See also Bishop Rock and lie Boston 2.62-2.64.4
d'Ouessant 10 Cabot Strait 2.62-2.64.4
Routes to: Chesapeake Bay 2.62-2.64.4
Arquipelago de Cabo Verde 8.8.1 Delaware Bay 2.62-2.64.4
Belize 4.21 Halifax 2.62-2.64.4
Bermuda 8.6.1 Hudson Strait "2.51.1
Cape of Good Hope 8.11.1 15 Kap Farvel 2.50
Colon 4.21 New York 2.62-2.64.4
Curacao 4.21 Saint John's 2.58
French W coast ports 8.10.2 Strait of Belle Isle 2.55
Gibraltar 8.10.4 Fernando de Noronha,
Gulf of Mexico 4.21, 8.7.3 20 Arquipelago de 2.39, 3.21
Kingston 4.21 Flores, Selat 7.110
Lisboa 8.10.3 Florida Current 2.15,4.11
North America 8.5.1-8.5.7 Florida, Straits of
Saint Helena 8.13.1-8.13.2 (27° 00' N, 79° 49' W) 2.81
South America 8.8.1-8.8.8 25 Routes to:
West African ports 2.98, 8.12.1-8.12.2 Bergen 2.82
West Indies 4.21, 8.7.1-8.7.6 Bishop Rock 2.82
Western approaches, Caution 2.19, 2.31 Cabot Strait 2.102
Equatorial Africa Cape Wrath 2.82
Routes to: 30 Chesapeake Bay 2.102
Cape Town 8.30.1 Delaware Bay 2.102
Cape of Good Hope 8.30.6 Dry Tortugas 4.29
English Channel 8.28 Fastnet 2.82
Freetown and intermediate Gibraltar 2.83
ports 8.27.1-8.27.2 35 Habana 4.29
South America 8.29.1-8.29.2 Halifax 2.102
Equatorial Counter-current Inishtrahull 2.82
Atlantic Ocean 2.16 La Gironde 2.82
Indian Ocean 6.35 Lisboa 2.83
Pacific Ocean 7.35 40 New Orleans 4.29
Equatorial Trough; see New York 2.102
Intertropical Nordkapp 2.82
Convergence Zone Ponta Delgada 2.125
Trondheim 2.82
45 Vigo 2.82
Falkland Current 3.12 Flotsam 7.48
Falkland Islands (Stanley) Fog, Atlantic Ocean 2.7
(51°40'S, 57°49'W) Freetown (8° 30' N, 13° 19' W)
Routes to: Routes to:
Bahia Blanca 3.35 50 Arquipelago dos Bijagos 2.98.2
Cabo Calcanhar 3.35 Ascension Island 8.26
Cabo de Homos 3.36 Bonny River 3.42
Cape Agulhas 3.57 Cape Agulhas 3.42
Cape of Good Hope Cape of Good Hope
(145 miles S of) 3.57 55 (145 miles S of) 3.42
Cape Town 3.57 Cape Palmas 3.42
Comodoro Rivadavia 3.35 Cape Town 3.42
Estrecho de Magallanes 3.34 Casablanca 2.99
Recife 3.35 Chesapeake Bay 2.76
Rio de Janeiro 3.35 60 Dakar 2.99
Rio de la Plata 3.35 Delaware Bay 2.76
Salvador 3.35 Douala 3.42
Farvel, Kap (75 miles S of) English Channel 2.98.2, 8.25
(58° 30' N, 44° 00' W) Gibraltar 2.99
Ice 2.27 65 Tie d'Ouessant 2.98.2
Routeing position off 2.47 Lagos 3.42
Routes to: Las Palmas 2.99
Biscay ports 2.50 Libreville 3.42
British Isles 2.50 Lobito 3.42
Lindesnes 2.49 70 New York 2.76
293
 INDIiX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Freetown—continued Gelasa, Selat—continued

North-East Providence Routes to:
Channel 2.76 Selat Riau 9.41.1-9.41.2
Pointe Noire 3.42 Selat Sunda 7.111,9.49.8
Porto Grande 2.131 5 Singapore 9.42.3
Rio Para 2.111 South China Sea 9.43.3
Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent Genova (44° 23' N, 8° 53' E)
Channel 2.76 Routes to:
Takoradi 3.42 Gibraltar 5.28
Tobago 2.76 to Port Said 5.31
Fremantle (32° 02' S, 115° 42' E) Ghana
Approaches 6.123 Routes to:
Routes to: Ascension Island 8.29.2
Adelaide 6.126, 6.128 Cape of Good Hope 8.30.6
Aden 6.171, 9.142 IS Cape Town and
Australia, SE coast 9.147 intermediate ports 8.30.1-8.30.5
Bombay 6.174 English Channel 8.28
Calcutta 6.141, 9.144 Freetown and intermediate
Cape of Good Hope 9.141 ports 8.27.1-8.27.2
Cape Agulhas 6.159 20 Saint Helena 8.29.1
Cape Calavite 7.163, 7.164, 7.170 South America 8.29.1-8.29.2
Cape Leeuwin 6.120, 6.128 Gibraltar, Strait of
Cape Town 6.159 (6 miles S of Europa Point)
Colombo 6.174, 9.143 (36° 00' N, 5° 21' W) 2.34
Darwin 6.120, 6.128 25 Routes to:
Durban 6.159 Algiers 5.29
Guam 7.170, 7.174 Arquipelago dos Bijagos 2.99.1
Hobart 6.120, 6.128 Barbados 2.85
Hong Kong 7.138, 7.163, 7.164, Barcelona 5.27.1
7.170, 7.174, 30 Beirut 5.29
9.146 Bermuda 2.85
Karachi 6.174 Boston 2.62-2.63.4, 2.66.1
Madras 6.141 Cabo de Hornos 8.17
Mahe Island 6.111.1 Cabot Strait 2.62-2.63.4
Manila 7.163, 7.164, 7.170 35 Canakkale Bogazi 5.29
Melbourne 6.123, 6.124, 6.126 Cape of Good Hope 8.17
Mombasa 6.163 Cape of Good Hope
Nagasaki 7.170, 7.174 (145 miles S of) 2.99.1
New Zealand 9.747 Cape Agulhas 2.99.1
Paradip 6.141 40 Cape Palmas 2.99
Port Hedland 6.120, 6.128 Cape Town 2.99.1
Port Louis (Mauritius) 6.101, 9.140 Casablanca 2.99
Rangoon 6.142 Chesapeake Bay 2.62-2.63.4, 2.66.1
Selat Lombok 7.170 Dakar 2.99
Selat Sunda 7.170 45 Delaware Bay 2.62-2.63.4, 2.66.1
Shanghai 7.163, 7.164, 7.170, English Channel 2.91, 8.15^8.15.2
7.174, 7.195 Freetown 2.99
Sinffaoore 7.127, 7.170, 9.145 Genova 5.27.1, 8.19.1
Strait of Hormuz 6.174 Gulf of Lions 5.27.1,8.19.1
Torres Strait 6.120, 6.128 50 Halifax 2.62.2-2.63.4,
Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.170, 7.174 2.66.1, 8.16
Verde Island Passage 7.164, 7.170 Hudson Strait 2.51
Yap 7.170, 7.174 lie d'Ouessant 2.91
Yokohama 7.170, 7.174 Izmir 5.29
55 Las Palmas 2.99
Lisboa 2.91
Malta 5.29, 8.21.1-8.21.3
Marseille 5.27.1
Galleons Passage Mona Passage 2.85
(10°57'N, 60°55'W) 60 Napoli 5.27.2, 8.20.1-
Routes to: 8.20.2
Colon 4.28 New York 2.62-2.63.4, 2.65,
Curacao 4.29.8 2.66.1, 8.16
Kingston 4.29.8 North-East Providence
New Orleans 4.29.8 65 Channel 2.85
Gelasa, Selat Palermo 5.27.3
(2'53'S, 107° 18'E) 7.110 Piraievs 5.29
Directions: Ponta Delgada 2.125
North-bound 9.40.1-9.40.4 Port Said 5.29
South-bound 9.49.4 70 Porto Grande 2.131
294
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Gibraltar, Strait of—continued Gulf of Aden

Recife (Landfall off) 2.119 Swell 6.22
Rio Para 2.111 Winds and Weather 6.6-6.7
Saint John's 2.58 Gulf of Mexico
Sardegna 8.20.1-8.20.2 5 Currents 4.11,4.15.1
Sicilia 8.20.1-8.20.2 Routes to:
Sombrero Passage 2.85 Atlantic Ocean 8.47
South America 8.17 Colon 4.25
Steno Elafonisou 5.29 English Channel 4.21
Stretto di Messina 5.27.3 to Swell 4.5
Tarabalus 5.29 Winds and Weather 4.1
Thessaloniki 5.29 Gulf of Oman
Trieste 5.29 Swell 6.23
Turks Island Passage 2.85 Winds and Weather 6.8
Venezia 5.29 15 Gulf Stream 2.15,4.11
Vigo 2.91
West Indies 8.17
Gironde, La
(45'40'N, 1°28'W) Habana (23° 10' N, 82° 22' W)
Routes to: 20 Routes to:
Barbados 2.85 Bermuda 4.23
Bermuda 2.85 Caicos Passage 4.29.3
Boston 2.62-2.64.4 Crooked Island Passage 4.29.2
Cabot Strait 2.62-2.64.4 North-East Providence
Chesapeake Bay 2.62-2.64.4 25 Channel 4.29.1
Delaware Bay 2.62-2.64.4 Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent
Halifax 2.62-2.64.4 Channel 4.29.7
Hudson Strait 2.51.1 Straits of Florida 4.29
Kap Farvel 2.50 Turks Island Passage 4.29.4
Mona Passage 2.85 30 Halifax (44° 31' N, 63° 30' W)
New York 2.62-2.64.4 Routes to:
North-East Providence Barbados 2.103.1
Channel 2.85 Bergen 2.62-2.64.2
Ponta Delgada 2.125 Bishop Rock 2.62-2.64.4
Rio Para 2.111 35 Bonny River 3.63
Saint John's 2.58 Cabo Calcanhar 2.105
Sombrero Passage 2.85 Cape Agulhas 3.61
Strait of Belle Isle 2.55 Cape of Good Hope
Turks Island Passage 2.85 (145 miles S of) 3.61
Gnomonic Ocean Charts 1.11 40 Cape Palmas 3.63
Great Barrier Reef Cape Town 3.61
Passages through 7.52.3 Cape Wrath 2.62-2.64.3
Guam Crooked Island Passage 2.103
(13'27'N, 144° 35'E) Douala 3.63
Routes to: 45 Fastnet 2.62-2.64.4
Apia 7.207 Gibraltar 2.62-2.63.4
Auckland 7.190 Inishtrahull 2.62-2.64.4
Brisbane 7.168, 7.174, 7.179 La Gironde 2.62-2.64.4
Cape Leeuwin 7.170, 7.174 Lagos 3.63
Darwin 7.172, 7.174 50 Libreville 3.63
Fremantle 7.170, 7.174 Lisboa 2.62-2.63.4
Hong Kong 7.145 Lobito 3.63
Honolulu 7.237 Mona Passage 2.103
Juan de Fuca Strait 7.337 Nordkapp 2.62-2.64
Manila 7.122 55 North Providence Channel 2.103
Melbourne 7.169, 7.174, 7.179 Pointe Noire 3.63
Panama 7.309 Ponta Delgada 2.125
Papeete 7.250 Porto Grande 2.130
Port Hedland 7.171, 7.174 Rio Para 2.104
Prince Rupert 7.337 60 Sombrero Passage 2.103
San Diego 7.337 Straits of Florida 2.103
San Francisco 7.337 Takoradi 3.63
Singapore 7.123 Trondheim 2.62-2.64.1
Suva 7.208 Turks Island Passage 2.103
Sydney 7.174, 7.179 65 Vigo 2.62-2.63.4
Torres Strait 7.173, 7.174, 7.185 Hawaiian Islands, see also
Verde Island Passage 7.122 Honolulu
Wellington 7.190 Sailing passages in vicinity 10.79
Yokohama 7.204 Harmattan 2.2
Guinea Current 2.16 70 Hinatuan Passage 7.110
295
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Ho Chi Minh City (Sai Gon) Hong Kong—continued

(10°18'N, 107° 04' E) Nakhodka 7.116
Routes to: North America 10.51
Cape Calavite 7.138 Panama 7.355, 10.51
Hong Hong and ports 5 Papeete 7.251
farther W 10.39.1-10.39.2 Port Hedland 7.138, 7.164, 7.166
Jakarta 7.139 7.171
Manila 7.138 Prince Rupert 7.357
Selat Sunda 7.139 San Diego 7.356
Singapore 7.113, 10.41.1- 10 San Francisco 7.356
10.41.2 Sandakan 7.141
Verde Island Passage 7.138 Selat Sunda 7.140
Hobart Shanghai 7.116
(42° 58' S, 147° 23' E) Singapore 7.115, 10.43.1-
Routes to: 15 10.43.2
Adelaide 6.127 South America, W coast 10.52.1-10.52.2
Auckland 7.59 Surabaya 7.140
Bluff 7.57 Suva 7.203
Brisbane 7.51 Sydney 7.138, 7.166, 7.168,
British Columbia 10.3.5 20 7.178, 10.46.1-
Cabo de Homos 7.270, 10.3.3 10.46.2
Callao 7.270 Tarakan 7.142
Cape Agulhas 6.159 Torres Strait 7.138, 7.166, 7.173,
Cape Leeuwin 6.126 7.184, 10.44.1-
Cape Town 6.159 25 10.44.2
Chile 10.3.4 Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.198.2
Darwin 6.120, 6.126 Ujung Pandang 7.142
Durban 6.159 Verde Island Passage 7.138, 7.144
Estrecho de Magallanes 7.270 Wellington 7.190
Fremantle 6.120, 6.123 30 Yap 7.145
Iquique 7.270 Yokohama 7.198.1, 10.48.1-
Melbourne 6.120 10.48.2
Panama 7.272 Honolulu (21° 17' N, 157° 53' W)
Port Hedland 6.120, 6.126 Routes to:
San Francisco 10.3.5 35 Apia 7.234
Sydney 7.51 Auckland 7.233
Torres Strait: Australia 10.81
E-about 7.51-5.52.2 Brisbane 7.231
W-about 6.120 Cabo de Homos 7.249, 10.85
Valparaiso 7.270 40 Callao 7.249
Wellington 7.58 Central America 10.84
Hong Kong China 10.82
(22'17'N, 114° 10'E) Dutch Harbor 7.245
Routes to: Estrecho de Magallanes 7.249
Adelaide 7.169, 7.174 45 Guam 7.237
Ambon 7.143 Hong Kong 7.241
Apia 7.203 Iquique 7.249
Auckland 7.190 Japan 10.82
Balik Papan 7.142 Juan de Fuca Strait 7.247
Brisbane 7.138, 7.166, 7.168, 50 Manila 7.240
7.178 New Zealand 7.233, 10.81
Cape Calavite 7.138 North America 10.84
Cape Leeuwin 7.138, 7.163, 7.164, Nuku'alofa 7.236
7.170 Panama 7.248
Cebu 7.144 55 Papeete (Tahiti) 7.238; 10.80
China, N of Hong Kong 10.50.1-10.50.3 Philippine Islands 10.82
Darwin 7.138, 7.166, 7.172, Prince Rupert 7.246
10.45.1-10.45.2 San Diego 7.247
Fremantle 7.170, 7.174 San Francisco 7.247, 10.83
Guam 7.145 60 Shanghai 7.242
Honolulu 7.241 Singapore 7.239.1
Iloilo 7.144 South America, W coast 7.249, 10.85
Jakarta 7.140 Suva (Fiji) 7.235, 10.81
Japan 7.198 Sydney 7.231
Juan de Fuca Strait 7.357 65 Torres Strait 7.232
Manila 7.138, 10.47.1- Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.244
10.47.2 Valparaiso 7.249
Melbourne 7.169,7.174. 7.178 Verde Island Passage 7.240
Nagasaki 7.198, 10.49.1- Wellington 7.233
10.49.2 70 Yap 7.237
296
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Honolulu—continued Ice 1.20

Yokohama 7.243 Cabot Strait 2.27.3
Hormuz, Strait of Caution when using radar 2.28.1
(26° 27' N, 56° 32' E) Davis Strait 2.46
Routes to: Denmark Strait 2.27.5
Aden 6.63.1 Indian Ocean 6.41-6.43
Australia, W coast 6.174 Information Services 2.28
Brisbane 6.175 Kap Farvel 2.27
Cape Agulhas 6.59 Newfoundland Banks 2.27.4
Cape Leeuwin 6.174 10 Norway, W coast 2.27.8
Cape Town 6.59 Pacific Ocean 7.41-7.44
Colombo 6.80 Saint Lawrence River 2.27.1
Darwin 6.173 South Atlantic Ocean 3.16-3.17
Dondra Head 6.80 Strait of Belle Isle 2.27.2
Durban 6.59 15 White Sea 2.27.6
Fremantle 6.174 Icebergs
Mombasa 6.59 Indian Ocean 9.1.1
Port Hedland 6.174 North Pacific Ocean 7.43
Torres Strait 6.173 South Atlantic Ocean 3.18
Homos, Cabo de (5 miles S of) 20 South Pacific Ocean 7.45, 10.2.2
(56° 04'S, 67° 15'W) Iloilo(10°42'N, 122° 36'E)
Rounding: 3.22 Routes to:
East-about 8.66.1 Cape Calavite 7.149
West-about 8.9.2 Hong Kong 7.144
Routes E to Indian Ocean and 25 Manila 7.149
Australia 8.70 Singapore 7.125
Routes to: Verde Island Passage 7.149
Auckland 7.276 India, W coast
Australia 10.131 Land and sea breezes 9.76
Bahia Blanca 3.33 30 Indian Ocean
C.ibo Calcanhar 3.32-3.33 Currents 6.31-6.36
Cape Agulhas 3.58 Ice 6.41-6.43
Cape of Good Hope Icebergs 9.1.1
(145 miles S of) 3.58 Areas to be Avoided 7;49
Cape Town 3.58, 8.69 35 Crossing under sail 9.1.3
Central America, W coast 10.128 Speed and sea conditions 6.25
China 10.131 Inishtrahull (5 miles N of)
Comodoro Rivadavia 3.33 (55°31'N, 7° 15' W)
English Cannel 8.66.1-8.66.5 Routes to:
Falkland Islands 3.36 40 Boston 2.62-2.64.4
Honolulu 7.249, 10.130 Cabot Strait 2.62-2.64.4
Japan 10.131 Chesapeake Bay 2.62-2.64.4
Mexico 10.128 Delaware Bay 2.62-2.64.4
New Zealand 10.131 Halifax 2.62-2.64.4
North America, E coast 8.67 45 Hudson Strait 2.51.1
Pacific Islands 10.132 Kap Farvel 2.50
Panama 10.128 New York 2.62-2.64.4
Papeete 7.260 Saint John's 2.58
Philippine Islands 10.131 Strait of Belle Isle 2.55
Recife 3.32, 3.33 50 Intertropical Convergence Zone,
Rio de Janeiro 3.32, 3.33 Equatorial Trough or
Rio de la Plata 3.33 Doldrums
Salvador 3.32, 3.33 Atlantic Ocean 2.1
San Francisco and ports Indian Ocean 6.10
farther N 10.129 55 North Pacific Ocean 7.2
South America: South Pacific Ocean 7.15
East coast 8.68 Iquique (20° 12' S, 70° 10' W)
Ports N of Valparaiso 10.127 Routes to:
Sydney 7.276 Apia 7.277
Valparaiso 10.126.1 SO Auckland 7.276
Wellington 7.276 Callao 7.225
Horse Latitudes 2.4 Estrecho de Magallanes 7.225
Hudson Strait Honolulu 7.249
(61° 00' N, 64° 50' W) Juan de Fuca Strait 7.225
Routes to European 65 Panama 7.225
ports 2.51.1 Papeete 7.257
Hurricanes San Diego 7.222, 7.225
Atlantic Ocean 2.5 San Francisco 7.222, 7.225
Pacific Ocean, see also Suva 7.278
Tropical Storms 7.10, 7.20 70 Sydney 7.276

297
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Iquique—continued Juan de Fuca Strait—continued

Valparaiso 7.225 Singapore 7.376
Wellington 7.276 South America 10.88
Irish Sea Suva 7.322
Sailing routes from 8.4 5 Sydney 7.334, 10.87
Irminger Current 2.15 Torres Strait 7.336
Izmir (28° 25' N, 27° 00' E) Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.379
Routes to: Valparaiso 7.225
Gibraltar 5.30 Wellington 7.330
Port Said 5.31 10 Yap 7.337
Yokohama 7.378, 10.86

Jailolo, Selat
(0°06'N, 129'10'E) 7.110 15 Kamchatka Current 7.33
Routes to: Karachi (24° 46' N, 66° 57' E)
Selat Manipa 7.167 Routes to:
Torres Strait 7.173.2 Aden 6.64
Jakarta (6° 03' S, 106° 53' E) Australia, W and NW
Routes to: 20 coasts 6.174
Bangkok 7.139 Bombay 9.70
Ho Chi Minh City 7.139 Brisbane 6.175
Hong Kong 7.140 Cape Agulhas 6.62
Manila 7.146 Cape Leeuwin 6.174
Selat Lombok 7.131 25 Cape Town 6.62
Selat Wetar 7.132 Colombo 6.81
Singapore 7.127 Darwin 6.173
South China Sea 7.111 Dondra Head 6.81
Verde Island Passage 7.146 Durban 6.62
Jamaica, see Kingston 30 Fremantle 6.174
Japan Mombasa 6.61
Routes to: Mozambique Channel 6.62
Brisbane 7.168, 7.174, 7.181 Port Hedland 6.174
Hong Kong 7.198 Port Louis 6.94
Indian Ocean 10.42.1-10.42.6 35 Torres Strait 6.173
Melbourne 7.169, 7.174, 7.181 Karimata, Selat
Sydney 7.168, 7.174, 7.181 (1°43'S, 108° 34'E) 7.110
Torres Strait 7.173, 7.174, 7.187 Directions:
Japan Current 7.33 N-bound 9.44.3, 9.44.5
Java Sea 40 S-bound 9.49.7
Passage through E part: Routes to:
N-bound 9.47.5 Selat Lombok 7.128
S-bound 9.51.4 Selat Sunda 9.49.8
Routes to: Kingston: Jamaica
Celebes Sea 9.47.5 45 (17°54'N, 76°44'W)
Indian Ocean 9.51.4 Routes to:
South China Sea 7.111 Bermuda 4.24
Jomard Entrance 7.183 Caicos Passage 4.29.3
Juan de Fuca Strait Caribbean Sea, S shore 8.52
(48°30'N, 124"47'W) 50 Crooked Island Passage 4.29.2
Routes to: Curacao 8.52
Apia 7.318 English Channel 4.21,8.51
Auckland 7.326 Galleons Passage 4.29.8
Brisbane 7.334 Halifax 8.51
Callao 7.225 55 Mona Passage 4.29.5
Chinese ports 7.377 New York 8.51
Dagu Lanjiangsha 7.377 Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent
Dutch Harbor 7.221 Channel 4.29.7
Estrecho de Magallanes 7.225 Sombrero Passage 4.29.6
Guam 7.337 60 Turks Island Passage 4.29.4
Hong Kong 7.377 Kuroshio Current 7.33
Honolulu 7.247, 10.86
Iquique 7.225
Manila 7.376
Nakhodka 7.380 65 Labrador Current 2.15, 2.17
Panama 7.225 Lagos (6° 23' N, 3° 24' E)
Papeete 7.254 Routes to:
San Diego 7.225 Arquipelago dos Bijagos 3.42
San Francisco 7.225, 10.88 Bonny River 3.42
Shanghai 7.377 70 Cabot Strait 3.63
298
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Lagos—continued Leeuwin, Cape—continued

Cape Agulhas 3.42 Singapore 7.127, 7.170
Cape of Good Hope Strait of Hormuz 6.174
(14S miles S of) 3.42 Torres Strait 6.120
Cape Palmas 3.42 Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.170, 7.174
Cape Town 3.42 Verde Island Passage 7.164, 7.170.
Colon 3.62 Yap 7.170, 7.174
Douala 3.42 Yokohama 7.170, 7.174
Estrecho de Magallanes 3.53 Leixoes
Freetown 3.42 10 (41° 10'N, 8°42'W)
Halifax 3.63 Route to Hudson Bay 2.51.1
Libreville 3.42 Leplia, Selat
Lobito 3.42 Directions:
New York 3.63 N-bound 9.40.2
Pointe Noire 3.42 15 S-bound 9.49.5
Recife 3.46 Libreville
Rio de Janeiro 3.46 (0° 25' N, 9° 17' E)
Rio de la Plata 3.46 Routes to:
Salvador 3.46 Arquipelago dos Bijagos 3.42
Takoradi 3.42 20 Bonny River 3.42
Lamakera, Selat 7.110 Cabot Strait 3.63
Las Palmas (28° 07' N, 15° 24' W) Cape Agulhas 3.42
Routes to: Cape of Good Hope
Arquipelago dos Bijagos 2.97 (145 miles S of) 3.42
Cape Agulhas 2.97 25 Cape Palmas 3.42
Cape of Good Hope Cape Town 3.42
(145 miles S of) 2.97 Colon 3.62
Cape Palmas 2.98.3 Douala 3.42
Cape Town 2.97 Freetown 3.42
Casablanca 2.99 30 Halifax 3.63
Dakar 2.99 Lagos 3.42
Freetown 2.98.2 Lobito 3.42
Gibraltar 2.99 New York 3.63
lie d'Ouessant 2.97 Pointe Noire 3.42
Ponta Delgada 2.125 35 Takoradi 3.42
Porto Grande 2.131 Limende, Selat
Recife, Landfall off 2.120 Directions:
Rio Para 2.111 N-bound 9.40.4
Leeuwin, Cape (20 miles WSW S-bound 9.49.6
of) (34° 28' S, 114°45'E) 40 Linapacan Strait 7.110
Dangers off 6.124 Lindesnes (4 miles S of)
Routes E from 6.126 (57° 55'N, 7° 03'E)
Routes to: Routes to:
Adelaide 6.120, 6.126 Hudson Strait 2.51.1
Aden 6.171 45 Kap Farvel 2.49
Bombay 6.174 Strait of Belle Isle 2.S4
Calcutta 6.141 Lions, Gulf of
Cape Calavite 7.163, 7.164, 7.170 Route to Gibraltar 8.24
Colombo 6.174 Lisboa (38° 36' N, 9° 24' W)
Darwin 6.120 50 Routes to:
Fremantle 6.120, 6.123 Barbados 2.85
Guam 7.170, 7.174 Bermuda 2.85
Hobart 6.126 Boston 2.62-2.63.4, 2.6
Hone rvonc 7.138, 7.163, 7.164, Cabot Strait 2.62-2.63.4
7.170, 7.174 55 Chesapeake Bay 2.62-2.63.4, 2.6
Karachi 6.174 Delaware Bay 2.62-2.63.4, 2.6
Madras 6.141 Gibraltar 2.91
Mahe Island 6.111.1 Halifax 2.62-2.63.4
Manila 7.163, 7.164, 7.170 Hudson Strait 2.51.1
Melbourne 6.126 60 lie d'Ouessant 2.91
Mombasa 6.163 Mona Passage 2.85
Nagasaki 7.170, 7.174 New York 2.62-2.63.4, 2.6
Paradip 6.141 North-East Providence
Port Hedland 6.124 Channel 2.85
Port Louis 6.101 65 Ponta Delgada 2.125
Rangoon 6.142 Recife, Landfall off 2.118
Selat Lombok 7.170 Rio Para 2.111
Selat Sunda 7.170 Saint John's 2.58
Shanghai 7.163, 7.164, 7.170, Sombrero Passage 2.85
7.174, 7.195 70 Turks Island Passage 2.85
299
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Lisboa—continued Magallanes, Estrecho de 3.22.1, 8.9.1

Vigo 2.91 East entrance
Load Line Rules 1.26 (3 miles S of Dungeness)
Lobito(12°19'S, 13°35'E) (52° 27' S, 68° 26' W)
Routes to: Routes to:
Arquipelago dos Bijagos 3.42 Bahia Blanca 3.33
Bonny River 3.42 Bonny River 3.53
Cabot Strait 3.63 Cabo Calcanhar 3.32-3.33
Cape Agulhas 3.42 Cape Agulhas 3.55
Cape of Good Hope 10 Cape of Good Hope
(145 miles S of) 3.42 (145 miles S of) 3.55
Cape Palmas 3.42 Cape Town 3.55
Cape Town 3.42 Comodoro Rivadavia 3.33
Colon 3.62 Falkland Islands 3.34
Douala 3.42 15 Lagos 3.53
Freetown 3.42 Pointe Noire 3.54
Halifax 3.63 Recife 3.32-3.33
Lagos 3.42 Rio de Janeiro 3.32-3.33
Libreville 3.42 Rio de la Plata 3.33
New York 3.63 20 Salvador 3.32-3.33
Pointe Noire 3.42 Takoradi 3.53
Takoradi 3.42 West entrance (5 miles NNW
Local Magnetic Anomalies 1.22 of Cabo Pilar) (52° 43' S,
Lombok, Selat 74°41'W)
(8°47'S, 115°44'E) 7.110 25 Routes to:
Directions 9.47.3 Auckland 7.276
Routes to: Callao 7.225
Adelaide 7.169.1 Honolulu 7.249
Balabac Strait 7.165 Iquique 7.225
Brisbane 7.52-7.52.2, 30 Juan de Fuca Strait 7.225
7.130.2 Panama 7.225
Cape Calavite 7.164-7.165 Papeete 7.259
Cape Leeuwin 7.170 San Diego 7.225
Cape San Agustin 7.165.1 San Francisco 7.224
Cape of Good Hope 9.125 35 Sydney 7.276
Fremantle 7.170 Valparaiso 7.225
Jakarta 7.131 Wellington 7.276
Karimata Strait 7.128 Magnetic Anomalies, Local 1.22
Manila 7.164, 7.165 Mahe Island: Seychelles Group
Melbourne 7.169 40 (4° 35' S, 55° 30' E)
Port Hedland 7.171 Routes to:
Selat Sunda 7.131 Aden 6.108
Sibutu Passage 7.164 Bombay 6.109
Singapore 7.128 Cape Leeuwin 6.111
South China Sea 9.32.5 45 Cape Town 6.106
Sydney 7.52-7.52.2, Colombo 6.110
7.130.2 Durban 6.106
Torres Strait 7.130.2 Fremantle 6.111
Verde Island Passage 7.164 Mombasa 6.107
Lucipara, Alur Pelayaran 9.35.3 50 Port Louis 6.95
Makasar, Selat 7.110
Directions:
Madras (13° 07'N, 80° 20' E) N-bound 9.47.5
Routes to: S-bound 9.51.4
Brisbane 6.175 55 Malabar coast
Calcutta 6.70, 9.91 Routes to Aden 9.72
Cape Agulhas 6.69 Malacca Strait 6.83, 7.110, 9.8
Cape Leeuwin 6.141 Malta (35° 55' N, 14° 33' E)
Cape Town 6.69 Routes to:
Darwin 6.140 60 Gibraltar 5.30, 8.22.1
Dondra Head 6.70 Port Said 5.31
Durban 6.69 Manila (14° 32' N, 120° 56' E)
Fremantle 6.141 Routes to:
Mergui 9.92 Adelaide 7.169
Moulmein 9.92 65 Apia 7.203
Paradip 6.70 Auckland 7.190
Port Hedland 6.141 Australia 10.63.1-10.63.2
Rangoon 6.70, 9.92 Balik Papan 7.147
Singapore 6.70 Bangkok 7.138
Torres Strait 6.140 70 Brisbane 7.166, 7.168, 7.
300
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Manila—continued Melbourne—continued
Cape Leeuwin 7.163, 7.164, 7.170 British Columbia 10.3.5
Cebu 7.149, 10.62 Cabo de Hornos 7.270, 10.3.2
Darwin 7.166, 7.172 Callao 7.270
Fremantle 7.163, 7.164, 7.170 5 Cape Agulhas 6.159
Guam 7.122 Cape Calavite 7.169
Ho Chi Minh City 7.138, Cape Leeuwin 6.124, 6.126
10.59.1-10.59.2 Cape Town 6.159
Hong Kong 7.138, Chile 10.3.4
10.60.1-10.60.2 10 Darwin 6.124, 6.126
Honolulu 7.240 Durban 6.159
Iloilo 7.149, Dutch Harbor 7.387
10.61.1-10.61.2 East China Sea 7.181
Indian Ocean 10.63.1-10.63.2 Estrecho de Magallanes 7.270
Jakarta 7.146 15 Fremantle 6.123, 6.124, 6.126
Juan de Fuca Strait 7.354 Guam 7.169, 7.174, 7.179
Melbourne 7.169, 7.177 Hobart 6.120
North America 10.51 Hong Kong 7.169, 7.174, 7.178
Panama 7.352, 10.51 Iquique 7.270
Papeete 7.251 20 Japan 7.169, 7.174, 7.181
Port Hedland 7.164, 7.166, 7.171 Manila 7.169, 7.177
Prince Rupert 7.354 Nagasaki 7.169, 7.174, 7.181
San Diego 7.353 New Zealand 10.3.6
San Francisco 7.353 Panama 7.302
Sandakan 7.148 25 Petropavlovsk 7.182
Selat Lombok 7.164-7.165 Port Hedland 6.124, 6.126
Selat Manipa 7.166 Ports NE of Japan 7.182
Selat Sunda 7.146, 7.163 San Bernadino Strait 7.177
Shanghai 7.195 San Francisco 10.3.5
Singapore 7.121, 10.58.1 30 Selat Lombok 7.169
South America 10.52.1-10.52.2 Selat Manipa 7.169
Surabaya 7.147 Selat Sunda 7.169
Suva 7.203 Shanghai 7.169, 7.174, 7.180
Sydney 7.166, 7.168, 7.177 Singapore 7.169, 7.174
Tarakan 7.147 35 Sydney 7.51, 10.3.7
Torres Strait 7.166, 7.173, 7.184 Torres Strait 6.126, 7.51-7.52.2
Ujung Pandang 7.147 Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.169, 7.174, 7.182
Wellington 7.190 Valparaiso 7.270
Xiamen 10.60.1-10.60.2 Verde Island Passage 7.169, 7.177
Yokohama 7.197 40 Wellington 7.61
Manipa, Selat Yap 7.169, 7.174, 7.176
(3°2O'S, 127° 22'E) 7.110 Yokohama 7.169, 7.174, 7.181
Routes to: Mergui
Brisbane 7.166, 7.168 Routes to:
Darwin 7.172 45 Calcutta 9.109
Manila 7.166 Madras 9.110
Melbourne 7.169 Messina, Stretto di
Port Hedland 7.171 (38*12'N, 15°36'E)
Selat Jailolo 7.167 Routes to:
Sydney 7.166, 7.168 50 Gibraltar 5.28
Torres Strait 7.173 Port Said 5.31
Mariner's Handbook, The 1.12 Mindoro Strait 7.110,9.57.2
Marseille (43° 18'N, 5° 20'E) Mombasa
Routes to: (4' 05' S, 39° 43' E)
Gibraltar 5.28 55 Routes to:
Port Said 5.31 Aden 6.58, 9.18.1-9.18.2
Mauritius, see Port Louis Australia 9.21.4
Mediterranean Sea N and W coasts 6.163
Currents 5.16 Bombay 6.72, 9.19.1-9.19.2
Swell 5.11 60 Brisbane 6.175
Winds and Weather 5.1-5.3.2 Calcutta 9.20.1-9.20.2
Melbourne (Port Phillip) Cape Agulhas 6.56, 6.58
(38° 20' S, 144° 34' E) Cape Leeuwin 6.163
Routes to: Cape Town 6.56, 6.58, 9.22.1
Adelaide 6.127, 6.128 65 Colombo 6.74, 9.20.1-9.20.2
Aden 6.171 Darwin 6.163
Auckland 7.62 Dondra Head 6.74
Balintang Channel 7.178 Durban 6.56, 6.58, 9.22.1
Bluff 7.60 Fremantle 6.163
Brisbane 7.51 70 Karachi 6.60
301
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Mombasa—continued Port Said 5.31

Mahe Island 6.107 Navarea Warnings 1.30
Port Hedland 6.163 Newfoundland coast; Notes on 2.36
Port Louis (Mauritius) 6.92, 9.21.1-9.21.3 New Orleans
Selat Sunda 6.161 5 Mississippi River Gulf
Singapore 6.162 Outlet Channel
Strait of Hormuz 6.59 (29° 25' N, 88° 58' W)
Torres Strait 6.163 Routes to:
Mona Passage Caicos Passage 4.29.3
(18°20'N, 67°50'W) 10 Crooked Island Passage 4.29.2
Routes to: English Channel 8.45
Belize 4.29.5 Galleons Passage 4.29.8
Bishop Rock 2.85 North-East Providence
Cabot Strait 2.103 Channel 4.29.1
Chesapeake Bay 2.103 15 Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent
Colon 4.29.5 Channel 4.29.7
Curasao 4.29.5 Straits of Florida 4.29
Delaware Bay 2.103 Turks Island Passage 4.29.4
Gibraltar 2.85 United States, E coast 8.45
Halifax 2.103 20 Mississippi River South Pass
Kingston 4.29.5 (28° 59' N, 89° 07' W)
La Gironde 2.85 Routes to:
Lisboa 2.85 Belize 8.46.2
New York 2.103 Colon 4.25, 8.46.1
Ponta Delgada 2.125 25 New York (40° 28' N, 73° 50' W)
Vigo 2.85 Routes to:
Monrovia (6° 21' N, 10° 50' W) Barbados 2.103.1
Route to Porto Grande 2.131 Bergen 2.62-2.64.2
Monsoons 1.14 Bishop Rock 2.62-2.64.4
Table B (page 262) 30 Bonny River 3.63
Moulmein Cabo Calcanhar 2.105
Routes to: Cape Agulhas 3.61.1
Calcutta 9.105 Cape of Good Hope
Cape of Good Hope 9.108 (145 miles S of) 3.61.1
Madras 9.106 35 Cape Palmas 3.63
Malacca Strait 9.107 Cape Town 3.61.1
Singapore 9.107 Cape Wrath 2.62-2.64.3
Mozambique Channel Casablanca 2.76
Routes through 6.57 Crooked Island Passage 2.103
Routes to: 40 Dakar 2.76
Aden 6.58 Douala 3.63
Cape Town 6.56 Fastnet 2.62-2.64.4
Durban 6.56 Freetown 2.76
Port Louis (Mauritius) 6.91 Gibraltar 2.62-2.63.4
Mozambique Current 6.36 45 Inishtrahull 2.62-2.64.4
La Gironde 2.62-2.64.4
Lagos 3.63
Nagasaki (32° 42' N, 129° 49' E) Libreville 3.63
Routes to: Lisboa 2.62-2.63.4
Adelaide 7.169, 7.174 50 Lobito 3.63
Auckland 7.190 Mona Passage 2.103
Brisbane 7.174, 7.181 Nordkapp 2.62-2.64
Cape Leeuwin 7.170, 7.174 North-East Providence
China coast 10.73 Channel 2.103
Darwin 7.172, 7.174 55 Pointe Noire 3.63
Fremantle 7.170, 7.174 Ponta Delgada 2.125
Hong Kong 7.198 Porto Grande 2.130
Melbourne 7.169, 7.174, 7.181 Rio Para 2.104
Port Hedland 7.171, 7.174 Sombrero Passage 2.103
Singapore 7.119 60 Straits of Florida 2.103
Sydney 7.168, 7.174, 7.181 Takoradi 3.63
Torres Strait 7.173, 7.174, 7.187 Trondheim 2.62-2.64.1
Wellington 7.190 Turks Island Passage 2.103
Nakhodka (42° 48' N, 132° 57' E) Vigo 2.62-2.63.4
Routes to: 65 New Zealand
Dutch Harbor 7.367 Routes to:
North America 7.367 Apia 7.87
Napoli (40° 50'N, 14M7'E) Australia 10.11-10.13
Routes to: British Columbia 10.16
Gibraltar 5.28, 8.23 70 Cabo de Hornos 10.14
302
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

New Zealand—continued North-East Providence Channel

Honolulu 7.233 (25° 50' N, 77° 00' W)
Japan 10.18 Routes to:
Noumea 7.88 Cabot Strait 2.103
Nuku'alofa 7.89 5 Casablanca 2.76
Papeete 7.85 Chesapeake Bay 2.103
San Francisco 10.16 Dakar 2.76
South America 10.15 Delaware Bay 2.103
South China Sea 10.18 Dry Tortugas 4.29.1
South Pacific Islands 10.17 10 Freetown 2.76
Suva 7.88 Gibraltar 2.85
Sydney and ports farther N 10.12 Habana 4.29.1
Newfoundland Banks Halifax 2.103
Caution 2.37 La Gironde 2.85
Currents 2.17 IS Lisboa 2.85
Ice 2.27.4 New Orleans 4.29.1
Nigeria New York 2.103
Routes to: Ponta Delgada 2.125
Ascension Island 8.29.2 Porto Grande 2.130
Cape of Good Hope 8.30.6 20 Vigo 2.85
Cape Town and North-east Monsoon
intermediate ports 8.30.1-8.30.5 Indian Ocean 6.4
English Channel 8.28 Pacific Ocean 7.5
Freetown and intermediate North-east Trade Wind
ports 8.27.1-8.27.2 25 Atlantic Ocean 2.3
Saint Helena 8.29.1 Pacific Ocean 7.4
South America 8.29.1-8.29.2 Northern Edge of Gulf Stream 2.17
Nine Degree Channel 9.63 North-west Monsoon
Nordkapp (5 miles NW of) Indian Ocean 6.11
(71°15'N, 25°40'E) 30 Pacific Ocean 7.16
Routes to: Norway
Boston 2.62-2.64 Ice on W coast 2.27.8
Cabot Strait 2.62-2.64 Routes to:
Chesapeake Bay 2.62-2.64 Atlantic Ocean ports 8.2.1-8.2.5
Delaware Bay 2.62-2.64 35 Cabo de Homos 8.2.5
Halifax 2.62-2.64 Cape of Good Hope 8.2.5
Hudson Strait 2.51.1 Kap Farvel 2.49
Kap Farvel 2.48.1 Strait of Belle Isle 2.54
New York 2.62-2.64 Norwegian Coastal Current 2.18
Strait of Belle Isle 2.53 40 Noumea (22° 18' S, 166° 25' E)
North America, E coast Routes to:
Routes to: Brisbane 7.75
Cape of Good Hope 8.44.2 New Zealand 7.88
Cape Town 8.44.2 Sydney 7.67
Caribbean Sea 8.44.5 45 Nuku'alofa
English Channel 8.44.1 (21°00'S, 175° 10'W)
Gulf of Mexico 8.44.5-8.44.7 Routes to:
Rio Amazonas 8.44.4 Apia 7.92
South America, E coast 8.44.3 Brisbane 7.76
North Atlantic Current 2.15, 2.18 50 Honolulu 7.236
North Atlantic Ocean New Zealand 7.86
Ice 2.25-2.26 Papeete 7.93
Transocean Routes: Suva 7.89
Direct 8.5.7 Sydney 7.68
Northern 8.5.2-8.5.3 55
Southern 8.5.4-8.5.6
North Equatorial Current
Atlantic Ocean 2.15,4.11 Obi, Selat 7.110
Pacific Ocean 7.33 Ocean Charts 1.10
North Pacific Current 7.33 60 Offshore Installations 1.27
North Polar regions, Weather 2.8 Ombai, Selat 7.110
North Sea Routes to:
Currents 2.18 Cape of Good Hope 9.125
Ice 2.27.9 Ceram Sea 9.46.2
Routes to: 65 South China Sea 9.32.4
Atlantic Ocean ports 8.3.1-8.3.2 Ouessant, lie d' (10 miles W of)
Strait of Belle Isle 2.27.2 (48° 28' N, 5° 23' W)
North Sub-tropical Current Caution 2.32
(Atlantic) 4.11 Routes to:
North Wall 2.17 70 Arquipelago dos Bijagos 2.97
303
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Ouessant, lie d'—continued Palmas, Cape—continued

Cape Agulhas 2.97 Colon 3.62
Cape of Good Hope Dakar 2.99
(145 miles S of) 2.97 Douala 3.42
Cape Palmas 2.98.3 5 Freetown 3.42
Cape Town 2.97 Gibraltar 2.99
Casablanca 2.98 Halifax 3.63
Dakar 2.98.1 lie d'Ouessant 2.98.3
Freetown 2.98.2 Lagos 3.42
Gibraltar 2.91 10 Las Palmas 2.98.3
Las Palmas 2.97 Libreville 3.42
Lisboa 2.91 Lobito 3.42
Ponta Delgada 2.125 New York 3.63
Porto Grande 2.130 Pointe Noire 3.42
Recife, Landfall off 2.117 15 Porto Grande 2.131
Rio Para 2.111 Takoradi 3.42
Vigo 2.91 Panaitan, Selat 9.33.3
Panama (Balboa)
(8° 53' N, 79° 30' W)
20 Passages S from 10.108
Pacific Islands (North), except Routes to:
Hawaii Apia 7.301
Notes and Cautions 10.74 Auckland 7.275
Routes to: Australia 10.107
Asia 10.75 25 Brisbane 7.306
North America 10.75 Cabo de Hornos 10.112
Other N Pacific Islands 10.76 Callao 7.225, 10.110
South America 10.75 Central America 10.105
South Pacific Islands 10.77 Dutch Harbor 7.221
Sydney 10.77 30 Estrecho de Magallanes (W
Torres Strait 10.78 of South America) 7.225
Pacific Islands (South) Golfo de Guayaquil 10.109
Routes to: Guam 7.310
Australia, S coast 10.19 Hong Kong 7.368
British Columbia 10.23 35 Honolulu 7.248
Cabo de Hornos 10.21 Iquique 7.225
Estrecho de Magallanes 10.21 Juan de Fuca Strait 7.225, 10.106
New Zealand 10.20 Manila 7.315
San Francisco 10.23 Matarani, Valparaiso and
Sydney 10.19 40 ports between 10.111
Talcahuano and ports to New Zealand 7.275, 10.107
Panama 10.22 Papeete 7.255
Pacific Ocean San Diego 7.225
Central E-bound route 7.300 San Francisco 7.225, 10.106
Currents 7.32-7.36 45 Shanghai 7.368
Ice 7.41-7.45 Singapore 7.316
Icebergs 7.43, 7.45, 10.2.2 Suva 7.301
Isolated dangers 7.46 Sydney 7.304
Northern route across 7.350 Torres Strait 7.307
Routes along NE shore 7.220 50 Valparaiso 7.225, 10.111
Routes to: Verde Island Pass 7.315
Ceram Sea 9.50.3 Wellington 7.275
South China Sea 9.46.5, 9.46.6 Yokohama 7.359
Southern route across 7.270 Panama, Gulf of
Swell 7.25-7.29 55 Passages S from 10.108
Palawan Passage Panama Canal
Route to Singapore 7.126 Length 4.25
Palermo Pantar, Selat 7.110
Route to Gibraltar 5.28.3 Papeete: Tahiti
Palmas, Cape (20 miles SSW of) 60 (17°30'S, 149° 36'W)
(4° 06' N, 7° 54' W) Routes to:
Routes to: Apia 7.94
Arquipelago dos Bijagos 3.42 Auckland 7.85
Bonny River 3.42 Australia 10.28
Cabot Strait 3.63 65 Brisbane 7.74
Cape Agulhas 3.42 Cabo de Hornos 7.260
Cape of Good Hope Callao 7.256
(145 miles S of) 3.42 Estrecho de Magallanes 7.259
Cape Town 3.42 Guam 7.250
Casablanca 2.99 70 Hong Kong 7.251
304
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Papeete: Tahiti—continued Pioneer Channel

Honolulu 7.238, 10.27 (4°40'S, 153°45'E)
Iquique 7.257 Route to Torres Strait 7.183
Juan de Fuca Strait 7.254 Piraievs (37° 56' N, 23° 37' E)
Manila 7.251 Routes to:
New Zealand 7.85, 10.28 Gibraltar 5.30
Nuku'alofa 7.93 Port Said 5.31
Panama 7.255 Planning a Passage 1.23
Prince Rupert 7.254 Pointe Noire (4° 46' S, 11° 49' E)
San Diego 7.254 10 Routes to:
San Francisco 7.254 Arquipelago dos Bijagos 3.42
Shanghai 7.252 Bonny River 3.42
Suva 7.90 Cabot Strait 3.63
Sydney 7.66 Cape Agulhas 3.42
Torres Strait 7.81 15 Cape of Good Hope
Valparaiso 7.258 (145 miles S of) 3.42
Verde Island Pass 7.251 Cape Palmas 3.42
Wellington 7.85.1 Cape Town 3.42
Yap 7.251 Colon 3.62
Yokohama 7.253 20 Douala 3.42
Para, Rio (0° 30' S, 47° 23' W) Freetown 3.42
Routes to: Estrecho de Magallanes 3.54
Bishop Rock 2.111 Halifax 3.63
Cabo Calcanhar 2.106.2 Lagos 3.42
Cabot Strait 2.104 25 Libreville 3.42
Casablanca 2.111 Lobito 3.42
Chesapeake Bay 2.104 New York 3.63
Dakar 2.111 Recife 3.46
Delaware Bay 2.104 Rio de Janeiro 3.46
Freetown 2.111 30 Rio de la Plata 3.46
Gibraltar 2.111 Salvador 3.46
Halifax 2.104 Takoradi 3.42
lie d'Ouessant 2.111 Polar Easterlies (Pacific Ocean) 7.9
La Gironde 2.111 Pollution of the Sea 1.32
Las Palmas 2.111 35 Ponta Delgada
Lisboa 2.111 (37° 44' N, 25° 39' W)
New York 2.104 Routes to:
Ponta Delgada 2.111 Barbados 2.125
Porto Grande 2.111, 2.130 Bermuda 2.125
Vigo 2.111 40 Bishop Rock 2.125
Paradip (20° 15' N, 86° 42' E) Cabot Strait 2.125
Routes to: Casablanca 2.125
Calcutta 6.70 Dakar 2.125
Cape Agulhas 6.69 Delaware Bay 2.125
Cape Leeuwin 6.141 45 Gibraltar 2.125
Cape Town 6.69 Halifax 2.125
Dondra Head 6.70 lie d'Ouessant 2.125
Durban 6.69 La Gironde 2.125
Fremantle 6.141 Las Palmas 2.125
Madras 6.70 50 Lisboa 2.125
Port Hedland 6.141 Mona Passage 2.125
Rangoon 6.70 New York 2.125
Singapore 6.70 North-East Providence
Penedos de Sao Pedro e Sao Channel 2.125
Paolo 2.39, 3.21 55 Porto Grande 2.125
Persian Gulf Rio Para 2.111, 2.125
Routes in 6.51 Saint John's 2.125
Routes to: Sombrero Passage 2.125
Aden 6.63 Straits of Florida 2.125
African coast 6.59 60 Turks Island Passage 2.125
Peru Current 7.34 Vigo 2.125
Petropavlovsk Port Hedland
(53°OO'N, 158° 38'E) (2O°12'S, 118° 32'E)
Routes to: Routes to:
Brisbane 7.182 65 Adelaide 6.126, 6.128
Melbourne 7.182 Bombay 6.174
Sydney 7.182 Calcutta 6.141
Torres Strait 7.187 Cape Agulhas 6.156
Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.201 Cape Calavite 7.163, 7.164, 7.171
Yokohama 7.201 70 Cape Leeuwin 6.124
305
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Port Hedland—continued Port Said—continued

Cape Town 6.156 Trieste 5.31
Colombo 6.174 Venezia 5.31
Darwin 6.120 Port Grande: Arquipelago de
Durban 6.156 5 Cabo Verde
Eastern Archipelago 7.171 (16° 54'N, 25° 02'W)
Fremantle 6.120 Routes to:
Guam 7.171, 7.174 Banjul 2.131
Hobart 6.126 Bermuda 2.130
Hong Kong 7.138, 7.164, 7.166, to Bishop Rock 2.130
7.171 Cabot Strait 2.130
Karachi 6.174 Cape Palmas 2.131
Madras 6.141 Casablanca 2.131
Manila 7.164, 7.166, 7.171 Dakar 2.131
Melbourne 6.124, 6.126 IS Delaware Bay 2.130
Mombasa 6.163 Freetown 2.131
Nagasaki 7.171, 7.174 Gibraltar 2.131
Paradip 6.141 Halifax 2.130
Rangoon 6.142 lie d'Ouessant 2.130
Selat Lombok 7.171 20 Las Palmas 2.131
Selat Manipa 7.171 Monrovia 2.131
Shanghai 7.171, 7.174 New York 2.130
Singapore 7.128, 7.171 North-East Providence
Strait of Hormuz 6.174 Channel 2.130
Torres Strait 6.120 25 Ponta Delgada 2.125
Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.171, 7.174 Recife, Landfall off 2.121
Verde Island Passage 7.164, 7.166, 7.171 Rio Para 2.111, 2.130
Yap 7.171, 7.174 Saint John's 2.130
Yokohama 7.171, 7.174 Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent
Port Louis: Mauritius 30 Channel 2.130
(20° 08' S, 57° 28' E) Tobago 2.130
Routes to: Ports NE of Japan
Aden 6.93, 9.15 Routes to:
Australia 9.12.1-9.12.2 Brisbane 7.182
Bombay 6.96 35 Melbourne 7.182
Cape Agulhas 6.90 Sydney 7.182
Cape Leeuwin 6.101 Torres Strait 7.187
Cape Town 6.90, 9.17.2 Portugal, W coast
Colombo 6.97 Routes to Atlantic ports and
Darwin 6.100 40 English Channel 8.14
Durban 6.90, 9.17.1 Portugal Current 2.15
Fremantle 6.101, 9.12.1 Positions, Departure and Arrival 1.4
Indian Ports 9.14 Prince Rupert
Karachi 6.94 (54°19'N, 13O°2O'W)
Mahe Island 6.95 45 Routes to:
Mombasa 6.92, 9.16 Apia 7.317
Mozambique Channel 6.91 Auckland 7.325
New Zealand 9.12.1 Brisbane 7.334
Selat Sunda 6.99 China, ports in 7.382
Singapore 6.98, 9.13 50 Dagu Lanjiangsha 7.382
South China Sea 9.13 Guam 7.337
Torres Strait 6.100 Hong Kong 7.382
Port Phillip, see Melbourne Honolulu 7.246, 10.86
Port Said (31° 21'N, 32° 23'E) Manila 7.381
Routes to: 55 Nakhodka 7.385
Algiers 5.31 Papeete 7.254
Barcelona 5.31 San Francisco 10.88
Beirut 5.31 Shanghai 7.382
Canakkale Bogazi 5.31 Singapore 7.381
Genova 5.31 60 South America 10.88
Gibraltar 5.30 Suva 7.321
Izmir 5.31 Sydney 7.334, 10.87
Malta 5.31 Torres Strait 7.336
Marseille 5.31 Tsugaru KaikyS 7.384
Napoli 5.31 65 Wellington 7.329
Piraievs 5.31 Yap 7.337
Steno Elafonisou 5.31 Yokohama 7.383, 10.86
Stretto di Messina 5.31
Tarabalus 5.31
Thessaloniki 5.31 70 Radio aids 1.6

306
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Rangoon (River entrance) Rio de Janeiro—continued

(16° 09' N, 96° 17' E) Falkland Islands 3.35
Routes to: Lagos 3.46
Australia, W coast 6.142 North America 8.60
Brisbane 6.175 5 Pointe Noire 3.46
Calcutta 6.70, 9.105 Recife 3.32, 8.59
Cape Agulhas 6.69 Rio de la Plata 3.32
Cape Leeuwin 6.142 Salvador 3.32, 8.59
Cape Town 6.69 Takoradi 3.46
Cape of Good Hope 9.108 JO Rio de la Plata
Darwin 6.140 (35°1O'S, 56°15'W)
Dondra Head 6.70 Routes to:
Durban 6.69 Bahia Blanca 3.33
Fremantle 6.142 Bonny River 3.46
Madras 6.70, 9.106 15 Cabo Calcanhar 3.32
Malacca Strait 9.107 Cabo de Hornos 3.33, 8.65
Paradip 6.70 Cape Agulhas 3.51
Port Hedland 6.142 Cape Town 3.51
Singapore 6.70, 9.107 Cape of Good Hope 8.63
Torres Strait 6.140 20 Cape of Good Hope
Recife (8° 04'S, 34°51'W) (145 miles S of) 3.51
Routes to: Comodoro Rivadavia 3.33
Bahia Blanca 3.32, 3.33 Europe 8.62
Bonny River 3.46 Falkland Islands 3.35, 8.64
Cabo Calcanhar 3.32 25 Lagos 3.46
Cabo de Homos 3.32, 3.33 North America 8.62
Cape Agulhas 3.46 Pointe Noire 3.46
Cape of Good Hope Recife 3.32
(145 miles S of) 3.46 Rio de Janeiro 3.32
Cape Town 3.46 30 Salvador 3.32
Comodoro Rivadavia 3.32, 3.33 Takoradi 3.46
English Channel 8.57.1 Rossel Spit 7.183
Estrecho de Magallanes 3.32-3.33 Roti, Selat 7.110
Falkland Islands 3.35 Routeing Charts 1.9
Lagos 3.46 35 Routes
New York and W Atlantic Categories of ships using 1.2
ports of farther N 8.57.2 Directions used in 1.3
Pointe Noire 3.46 Distances quoted in 1.5
Rio de Janeiro 3.32
Rio de la Plata 3.32 40
Salvador 3.32 Sagewin, Selat 7.110
Takoradi 3.46 Sailing ships
Recife, Landfall off Duration of passages 8.1.3
(8° 00' N, 34° 40' W) Saint George's Channel
Routes to: 45 (4°20'S, 152° 32'E)
English Channel 2.117 Route to Torres Strait 7.183
Gibraltar 2.119 Saint Helena
lie d'Ouessant 2.117 Routes to:
Las Palmas 2.120 Ascension Island 8.37
Lisboa 2.118 50 Cape Town 8.39
Porto Grande 2.121 Cape of Good Hope 8.39
Red Sea English Channel 8.37
Routes through 6.51, 9.55-9.57 South America 8.36
Riau, Selat 7.110 West Africa 8.38
Directions (S-bound) 9.49.2 55 Saint John's Harbour:
Route to Singapore 9.37.1-9.37.2 Newfoundland
Rio de Janeiro (47° 34' N, 52° 38' W)
(22° 59' S, 43° 10' W) Routes to:
Routes to: Bishop Rock 2.58
Bahia Blanca 3.32, 3.33 60 Cape Wrath 2.58
Bonny River 3.46 Fastnet 2.58
Cabo Calcanhar 3.32 Gibraltar 2.58
Cabo de Hornos 3.32-3.33 Inishtrahull 2.58
Cape Agulhas 3.49 La Gironde 2.58
Cape of Good Hope 65 Lisboa 2.58
(145 miles S of) 3.49 Ponta Delgada 2.125
Cape Town 3.49, 8.61 Porto Grande 2.130
Comodor Rivadavia 3.32, 3.33 Vigo 2.58
Estrecho de Magallanes 3.32-3.33 Saint Lawrence River
Europe 8.60 70 Ice 2.27.1
307
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Saint Lucia/Saint Vincent San Diego—continued

Channel (13° 30' N, 61° 00' W) Dutch Harbor 7.221
Routes to: East China Sea 7.374
Barbados 4.29.7 Estrecho de Magallanes 7.225
Belize 4.29.7 Fuzhou 7.372
Cabo Calcanhar 2.106 Guam 7.337
Cape Agulhas 7.79 Hong Kong 7.371
Cape of Good Hope Honolulu 7.247
(145 miles S of) 2.79 Iquique 7.222
Cape Town 2.79 10 Juan de Fuca Strait 7.225
Casablanca 2.76 Manila 7.369
Colon 4.29.7 Panama 7.225
Cura9ao 4.29.7 Papeete 7.254
Dakar 2.76 San Francisco 7.225
Freetown 2.76 15 Shanghai 7.372
Habana 4.29.7 Singapore 7.370
Kingston 4.29.7 Suva 7.324
New Orleans 4.29.7 Sydney 7.333
Porto Grande 2.130 Torres Strait 7.335
Rio Para 2.106.2 20 Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.375
Salayar, Selat 7.110 Valparaiso 7.223
Salvador (13° 00' S, 38° 32' W) Wellington 7.332
Routes to: Yap 7.337
Bahia Blanca 3.32, 3.33 Yokohama 7.373
Bonny River 3.46 25 San Francisco
Cabo Calcanhar 3.32 (37°45'N, 122° 40'W)
Cabo de Homos 3.32-3.33 Routes to:
Cape Agulhas 3.46 Aleutian Islands 10.90
Cape of Good Hope Apia 7.319
(145 miles S of) 3.46 30 Auckland 7.327
Cape Town 3.46 Australia:
Comodoro Rivadavia 3.32, 3.33 Ports S of Brisbane 10.96
Estrecho de Magallanes 3.32-3.33 Bo Hai 7.374
Europe 8.58 Brisbane 7.333
Falkland Islands 3.35 35 Cabo de Hornos 10.101
Lagos 3.46 Callao 7.222, 10.99
North America, E coast 8.58 China:
Pointe Noire 3.46 Ports N of Fuzhou 7.372, 10.93
Recife 3.32 Ports S of Fuzhou 7.371, 10.95
Rio de Janeiro 3.32 40 Columbia River 10.89
Rio de la Plata 3.32 Coquimbo 10.100
Takoradi 3.46 Coronel 10.100
Samoa, see Apia Dagu Lanjiangsha 7.374
San Agustin, Cape (18 miles E Dutch Harbor 7.221, 10.90
of) (6° 15' N, 126° 30'E) 45 East China Sea 7.374, 10.93
Route to Selat Lombok 7.165.1 Estrecho de Magallanes 7.224
San Bernadino Strait Fuzhou 7.372
(12°33'N, 124° 12'E) 7.110 Guam 7.337
Routes to: Hong Kong 7.371
Auckland 7.190 50 Honolulu 7.247, 10.91
Brisbane 7.177 Iquique 7.222, 10.99
Melbourne 7.177 Juan de Fuca Strait 7.225, 10.89
Panama 7.312 Manila 7.369, 10.95
Singapore 7.123 Nagasaki 10.94
South China Sea 9.46.5 55 Pacific Islands 10.97
Sydney 7.177 Panama 7.225, 10.98
Torres Strait 7.184 Papeete 7.254
Wellington 7.190 Prince Rupert 10.89
San Diego San Diego 7.225
(32°38'N, 117° 15'W) 60 Shanghai 7.372, 10.94
Routes to: Singapore 7.370
Apia 7.320 South China Sea 10.95
Auckland 7.328 Suva 7.323
Bo Hai 7.374 Sydney 7.333
Brisbane 7.333 65 Torres Strait 7.335
Callao 7.222 Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.375
China: Valparaiso 7.223, IO.IOI
Ports N of Fuzhou 7.372 Wellington 7.331
Ports S of Fuzhou 7.371 Yap 7.337
Dagu Lanjiangsha 7.374 70 Yokohama 7.373, 10.92

308
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Sandakan Singapore—continued
(5°49'N, 118°07'E) Basilan Strait 7.125
Routes to: Brisbane 7.130, 7.168
Cape Calavite 7.148 Calcutta 6.70, 9.7/7
Hong Kong 7.141 5 Cape Agulhas 6.152
Manila 7.148 Cape Leeuwin 7.127, 7.170
Singapore 7.125 Cape Town 6.152
Verde Island Passage 7.148 Cape of Good Hope 9.122
Sape, Selat 7.110 Cebu 7.125
Sapudi, Selat 7.110 10 China
Sardegna Ports N of Hong Kong 10.35.1-10.35.3
Route to Gibraltar 8.23 Colombo 9.116
Sea Darwin 6.122, 7.127, 9.119
Heights of waves 1.17 Dondra Head 6.70
Sea and Swell 15 Durban 6.152
Wave heights and frequencies 1.17.2 Dutch Harbor 7.351
Seasonal winds 1.14 Fremantle 7.127, 7.170, 9.121
Pacific Ocean, E part 7.3 Guam 7.123
Sele, Selat 7.110 Ho Chi Minh City 7.113,
Shanghai 20 10.36.1-10.36.2
(31'03'N, 122° 20'E) Hong Kong 7.114,
Routes coastwise S from 10.53.1-10.53.2 10.34.1-10.34.3
Routes to: Honolulu 7.239
Adelaide 7.169, 7.174 Iloilo 7.125
Apia 7.207 25 Jakarta 7.127
Auckland 7.190 Juan de Fuca Strait 7.351
Brisbane 7.166, 7.168, 7.180, Madras 6.70, 9.115
7.195 Manila 7.121,
Cape Calavite 7.195 10.33.1-10.33.2
Cape Leeuwin 7.170, 7.174 30 Melbourne 7.169, 7.174
Darwin 7.172, 7.174 Molucca Archipelago 10.31.1-10.31.3
Fremantle 7.170, 7.174 Mombasa 6.162
Hong Kong 7.116 Moulmein 9.118
Honolulu 7.242 Nagasaki 7.119
Indian Ocean 10.54.1-10.54.2 35 Palawan Passage 7.126
Juan de Fuca Strait 7.358 Panama 7.314
Manila 7.195 Paradip 6.70
Melbourne 7.169, 7.174, 7.180 Port Hedland 7.128, 7.171
Nagasaki 10.55.1-10.55.3 Port Louis 6.98
North America 7.358, 10.57 40 Prince Rupert 7.351
Panama 7.358 Rangoon 6.70, 9.118
Papeete 7.252 San Bernadino Strait 7.123
Port Hedland 7.171, 7.174 San Diego 7.351
Prince Rupert 7.358 San Francisco 7.351
San Diego 7.358 45 Sandakan 7.125
San Francisco 7.358 Selat Lombok 7.128
Singapore 7.118 Selat Sunda 7.127, 9.122
Suva 7.208 Selat Wetar 7.129
Sydney 7.168, 7.174, 7.180 Shanghai 7.117
Torres Strait 7.186, 7.199 50 Sulu Sea 7.125,
Verde Island Passage 7.195 10.32.1-10.32.3
Wellington 7.190 Surabaya 7.135
Yokohama 7.200, Surigao Strait 7.123
10.56.1-10.56.2 Sydney 7.130, 7.168,
Ship Reporting Systems 1.31 55 10.30.1-10.30.2
Sibutu Passage Tarakan 7.137
(4°50'N, 119°40'E) Torres Strait 7.130, 9.120
Route to Selat Lombok 7.164 Ujung Pandang 7.134
Sicilia Verde Island Passage 7.121
Route to Gibraltar 8.23 60 Yap 7.124
Singapore Yokohama 7.120
(1°12'N, 103° 51'E) Singapore Strait 7.110
Routes to: Directions 9.39.1-9.39.3
Adelaide 7.169, 7.174 Snares Islands
Aden 6.166, 9.123 65 (47°50'S, 167° 50'E)
Ambon 7.133 Solomon Sea
Australia, S coast 9.121 Routes to Torres Strait 7.183
Balik Papan 7.136 Somali Current 6.34
Bangkok 7.113, Sombrero Passage
10.37.1-10.37.2 70 (18° 25'N, 63° 45'W)
309
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Sombrero Passage—continued Sunda, Selat—continued

Routes to: S-bound 9.49.9
Belize 4.29.6 Routes to:
Bishop Rock 2.85 Adelaide 7.169
Cabot Strait 2.103 Aden 6.165, 9.123
Chesapeake Bay 2.103 Banda Sea 9.45.1-9.45.2
Colon 4.29.6 Bangkok 7.139
Curacao 4.29.6 Cape Agulhas 6.150.1
Delaware Bay 2.103 Cape Calavite 7.163
Gibraltar 2.85 10 Cape Leeuwin 7.170
Halifax 2.103 Cape Town 6.150.1
Kingston 4.29.6 Darwin 6.122
La Gironde 2.85 Durban 6.151
Lisboa 2.85 Fremantle 7.170
New York 2.103 15 Ho Chi Minh City 7.139
Ponta Delgada 2.125 Hong Kong 7.140
Vigo 2.85 Manila 7.146, 7.163
South Africa Melbourne 7.169
Routes to: Mombasa 6.161
Australia 6.153 20 Port Louis 6.99
Cabo de Hornos 10.2.1-10.2.4 Second Eastern Passage 9.45.1-9.45.2
South America, E coast Selat Bangka: Java Sea 9.34
Notes and cautions 3.31 Selat Gelasa 7.111,
Passages off 3.32-3.37 9.40.1-9.40.4
South America, NE coast 25 Selat Karimata 9.44.1-9.44.2
Routes to: Selat Lombok 7.131
English Channel 8.57.1 Selat Wetar 7.132
New York 8.57.2 Singapore 7.127, 9.32.2
North America, E coast 2.104-2.105 Torres Strait 6.122
North Atlantic Ocean, E 30 Verde Island Passage 7.146
part 2.111.1 Suqujra 6.58.2
South Atlantic Current 3.12 Surabaya (7° 12' S, 112° 44' E)
South Atlantic Ocean Routes to:
Routes in S part 3.48 Bangkok 7.139
South China Sea 35 Cape Calavite 7.147
Routes to: Ho Chi Minh City 7.139
Jakarta 7.111 Hong Kong 7.140
Java Sea 7.111 Manila 7.147
Selat Sunda 7.111, 9.32.8 Singapore 7.135
South Equatorial Current 40 Verde Island Passage 7.147
Atlantic Ocean 2.16, 3.12 Surigao Strait
Indian Ocean 6.36 (9°53'N, 125° 21'E) 7.110
Pacific Ocean 7.34 Route to Singapore 7.123
South Indian Ocean Current 6.36 Suva (18° 11' S, 178° 24'E)
South Sub-tropical Current 45 Routes to:
(Pacific Ocean) 7.34 Apia 7.91
South-east Trade Wind Brisbane 7.77
Atlantic Ocean 3.1 Callao 7.278
Indian Ocean 6.12 Guam 7.208
Pacific Ocean 7.3 50 Hong Kong 7.203
Southern Monsoon 6.12 Honolulu 7.235, 10.24
Southen Ocean Current Iquique 7.278
Atlantic Ocean 3.12 Juan de Fuca Strait 7.322
Indian Ocean 6.36 Manila 7.203
Pacific Ocean 7.34 55 New Zealand 7.88
South-west Monsoon Nuku'alofa 7.89
Atlantic Ocean 2.2 Panama 7.301
Indian Ocean 6.3 Papeete (Tahiti) 7.90, 10.25
Pacific Ocean 7.6 Prince Rupert 7.321
Speed 60 San Diego 7.324
Reduction due to sea San Francisco 7.323
conditions (Indian Ocean) 6.25 Sydney 7.69
Submarines 1.12 Torres Strait 7.82
Sulu Sea Valparaiso 7.278
Route to Singapore 7.125 65 Verde Island Passage 7.203
Sumba, Selat 7.110 Yap 7.203
Sunda, Selat Yokohama 7.206
(6°00'S, 105° 52'E) 7.110 Swell 1.17.1
Directions: Caribbean Sea 4.5
N-bound 9.33.1-9.33.7 70 Gulf of Mexico 4.5

310
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Swell—continued Takoradi—continued
Indian Ocean 6.21-6.25 Cabot Strait 3.63
Mediterranean Sea 5.11 Cape Agulhas 3.42
North Atlantic Ocean 2.11-2.12 Cape of Good Hope
Pacific Ocean 7.25-7.29 5 (145 miles S of) 3.42
South Atlantic Ocean 3.2 Cape Palmas 3.42
Sydney (33° 50'S, 151° 19'E) Cape Town 3.42
Routes to: Colon 3.62
Adelaide 6.127, 7.51, 10.4.1 Douala 3.42
Apia 7.70 10 Freetown 3.42
Auckland 7.65, 10.4.3 Estrecho de Magallanes 3.53
Australia, S coast 7.51, 10.4.1 Halifax 3.63
Balintang Channel 7.178 Lagos 3.42
Bass Strait 9.160 Libreville 3.42
Bluff 7.63 15 Lobito 3.42
Brisbane 7.51 New York 3.63
Cabo de Homos 7.270 Pointe Noire 3.42
Callao 7.270 Recife 3.46
Cape Calavite 7.166, 7.168 Rio de Janeiro 3.46
Cape of Good Hope 9.164 20 Rio de la Plata 3.46
Dutch Harbor 7.387 Salvador 3.46
East China Sea 7.181 Tarabalus (32° 56' N, 13° 12' E)
Estrecho de Magallanes 7.270 Routes to:
Guam 7.168, 7.174, 7.179 Gibraltar 5.30.1
Hobart 7.51, 10.4.2 25 Port Said 5.31
Hong Kong 7.138, 7.166, 7.168, Tarakan(3°15'N, 117° 54' E)
7.178, Routes to:
10.8.1-10.8.4 Cape Calavite 7.147
Honolulu 7.231 Hong Kong 7.142
Indian Ocean 9.164 30 Manila 7.147
Iquique 7.270, Singapore 7.137
10.5.3-10.5.4 Torres Strait 7.151
Juan de Fuca Strait 7.334 Verde Island Passage 7.147
Manila 7.166, 7.168, 7.177 Territorial Waters 1.12
Melbourne 7.51, 9.161, 10.4.1 35 Thessaloniki
Nagasaki 7.168, 7.174, 7.181 (40° 37' N, 22° 56' E)
New Zealand 10.4.3-10.4.5 Routes to:
North and South America 10.5.1-10.5.5 Gibraltar 5.30
Noumea 7.67, 10.6.4 Port Said 5.31
Nuku'alofa 7.68 40 Timor Sea
Panama 7.303, 10.5.4 Approaches to 6.122
Papeete (Tahiti) 7.66, 10.6.1 Tobago (15 miles N of North
Petropavlovsk 7.182 Point) (11° 35'N, 60° 35'W)
Ports NE of Japan 7.182 Routes to:
Prince Rupert 7.334 4S Cabo Calcanhar 2.106.1
San Bernadino Strait 7.177 Casablanca 2.76
San Diego 7.333 Colon 4.28
San Francisco 7.333, 10.5.5 Dakar 2.76
Selat Manipa 7.166, 7.168 Freetown 2.76
Shanghai 7.166, 7.168, 7.174, 50 Porto Grande 2.130
7.180, 7.195 Rio Para 2.106.3
Singapore 7.130, 7.168, 10.10 Torres Strait (3J miles W of
South America 10.5.2-10.5.4 Booby Island)
South Pacific Islands 10.6.3 (10°36'S, 141° 51' E) 7.53
Suva (Fiji) 7.69, 10.6.2 55 Routes to:
Torres Strait 7.51-7.52, Adelaide:
10.9.1-10.9.3 E-about 7.51-7.54
Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.168, 7.174, 7.182 W-about 6.126-6.128
Valparaiso 7.270 Aden 6.168
Verde Island Passage 7.166, 7.168, 7.177 60 Apia 7.83
Wellington 7.64, 10.4.4 Auckland 7.80
Yap 7.168, 7.174, 7.176 Balik Papan 7.150
Yokohama 7.168, 7.174, 7.175 Balintang Channel 7.184
Bombay 6.173
65 Brisbane 7.52
Tahiti, see Papeete Cabo de Homos 7.271
Takoradi (4° 53' N, 1° 44' W) Calcutta 6.140
Routes to: Callao 7.271
Arquipelago dos Bijagos 3.42 Cape Agulhas 6.156
Bonny River 3.42 70 Cape Calavite 7.166, 7.173
311
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Torres Strait—continued Trondheim—continued

Cape Leeuwin 6.120 Kap Farvel 2.49
Cape Town 6.156 New York 2.62-2.64.1
Colombo 6.173 Strait of Belle Isle 2.54.1
Darwin 6.120 5 Tropical storms 1.15
Durban 6.156 Table C (page 263)
Dutch Harbor 7.387 Atlantic Ocean 2.5
East China Sea 7.187 Indian Ocean 6.15
Eastern Archipelago 7.173-7.173.2 North Pacific Ocean 7.10
Estrecho de Magallanes 7.271 10 South Pacific Ocean 7.20
Fremantle 6.120 Tsugaru Kaikyo
Guam 7.173, 7.174, 7.185 (41-39'N, 140° 48'E)
Hobart: Directions 10.72.3
E-about 7.51-7.52.2 Routes to:
W-about 6.120 15 Adelaide 7.169
Hong Kong 7.138, 7.166, 7.173, Auckland 7.190
7.184 Brisbane 7.168, 7.174, 7.182
Honolulu 7.232 Cape Leeuwin 7.170, 7.174
Iquique 7.271 Darwin 7.172, 7.174
Japan and ports farther NE 7.187 20 Dutch Harbor 7.366
Juan de Fuca Strait 7.336 Fremantle 7.170, 7.174
Karachi 6.173 Hong Kong 7.198.2
Madras 6.140 Honolulu 7.244
Manila 7.166, 7.173, 7.184 Juan de Fuca Strait 7.365
Melbourne: 25 Melbourne 7.169, 7.174, 7.182
E-about 7.51-7.54 Panama 7.363
W-about 6.126,6.128 Petropavlovsk 7.201
Mombasa 6.163 Port Hedland 7.171, 7.174
Nagasaki 7.173, 7.174, 7.187 Prince Rupert 7.365
Panama 7.307 30 San Diego 7.364
Papeete 7.81 San Francisco 7.364
Petropavlovsk 7.187 Sydney 7.168, 7.174, 7.182
Port Hedland 6.120 Torres. Strait 7.173, 7.174, 7.184
Port Louis 6.100 Wellington 7.190
Prince Rupert 7.336 35 Tsushima Current 7.33
Rangoon 6.140 Turks Island Passage
San Bernadino Strait 7.184 (21° 48'N, 71'16'W)
San Diego 7.335 Routes to:
San Francisco 7.335 Belize 4.29.4
Selat Manipa 7.173 40 Bishop Rock 2.85
Selat Sunda 6.122 Cabot Strait 2.103
Shanghai 7.186, 7.199 Chesapeake 2.103
Singapore 7.130 Colon 4.29.4
Solomon Sea 7.183 Delaware Bay 2.103
Strait of Hormuz 6.173 45 Gibraltar 2.85
Suva 7.82 Habana 4.29.4
Sydney 7.51-7.52.2, 10.29 Halifax 2.103
Tarakan 7.151 Kingston 4.29.4
Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.173, 7.174, 7.187 La Gironde 2.85
Valparaiso 7.271 50 Lisboa 2.85
Verde Island Passage 7.166, 7.173, 7.184 New Orleans 4.29.4
Wellington 7.79 New York 2.103
Yap 7.167, 7.173, 7.184 Ponta Delgada 2.125
Yokohama 7.167, 7.173,7.187 Vigo 2.85
Traffic Separation Schemes 1.28 55
Trieste (45° 39' N, 13°44'E)
Routes to:
Gibraltar 5.30
Port Said 5.31
Trinidad (Port of Spain) 60 Unimak Pass
(10°38'N, 61°34'W) Route to San Francisco 10.90
Route to Colon 4.28 United States, E coast
Trondheim (63° 27' N, 10° 23' E) Routes to:
Routes to: Cape of Good Hope 8.44.2
Boston 2.62-2.64.1 65 Cape Town 8.44.2
Cabot Strait 2.62-2.64.1 Caribbean Sea 8.44.5
Chesapeake Bay 2.62-2.64.1 English Channel 8.44.1
Delaware Bay 2.62-2.64.1 Gulf of Mexico 8.44.5-8.44.7
Halifax 2.62-2.64.1 Rio Amazonas 8.44.4
Hudson Strait 2.51.1 70 South America 8.44.3
312
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Ujung Pandang Verde Island Passage—continued

(5°07'S, 119° 23'E) Sandakan 7.148
Routes to: Selat Lombok 7.164
Cape Calavite 7.147 Selat Sunda 7.146
Hong Kong 7.142 5 Shanghai 7.195
Manila 7.147 Singapore 7.121
Singapore 7.134 Surabaya 7.147
Verde Island Passage 7.147 Suva 7.203
Sydney 7.166, 7.168, 7.177
10 Tarakan 7.147
Torres Strait 7.166, 7.173, 7.184
Valparaiso (33° 02' S, 71° 37' W) Ujung Pandang 7.147
Routes to: Wellington 7.190
Apia 7.277 Yokohama 7.197
Auckland 7.276 15 Vigo(42°13'N, 8° 50' W)
Australia 10.124 Routes to:
Cabo de Homos 10.125 Barbados 2.85
Callao 7.225 Bermuda 2.85
Central America 10.121 Boston 2.62-2.63.4, 2.66.1
China 10.123 20 Cabot Strait 2.62-2.63.4
Estrecho de Magallanes 7.225 Chesapeake Bay 2.62-2.63.4, 2.66.1
Honolulu 7.249 Delaware Bay 2.62-2.63.4, 2.66.1
Iquique 7.225 Gibraltar 2.91
Japan 10.123 Halifax 2.62.1-2.63.4
Juan de Fuca Strait 7.225, 10.122 25 Hudson Strait 2.51.1
Mexico 10.121 lie d'Ouessant 2.91
New Zealand 10.124 Kap Farvel 2.50
Panama 7.225, 10.121 Lisboa 2.91
Papeete 7.258 Mona Passage 2.85
Philippine Islands 10.123 30 New York 2.62-2.63.4, 2.66.1
Prince Rupert 10.122 North-East Providence
San Diego 7.223 Channel 2.85
San Francisco 7.223, 10.122 Ponta Delgada 2.125
South America: Rio Para 2.111
Ports farther N 10.120 35 Saint John's 2.58
Ports farther S 10.125 Sombrero Passage 2.85
Suva 7.278.2 Turks Island Passage 2.85
Sydney 7.276 Vitiaz Strait
Wellington 7.276 (5°51'S, 147" 30'E)
Variables (Winds) 40 Route to Torres Strait 7.183
Atlantic Ocean 2.4
Indian Ocean 6.13
North Pacific Ocean 7.7
South Pacific Ocean 7.18 Waves
Venezia (45° 24' N, 12° 29' E) 45 Abnormal 1.18
Routes to: Sea 1.17
Gibraltar 5.30 Swell 1.17.1
Port Said 5.31 Weather Routeing 1.24
Verde Island Passage Wellington
(13°36'N, 121° 00'E) 50 (41°22'S, 174° 50'E)
Routes to: Routes to:
Adelaide 7.169 Apia 7.87
Apia 7.203 Auckland 7.84
Auckland 7.190 Balintang Channel 7.190
Balik Papan 7.147 55 Brisbane 7.72
Bangkok 7.138 Cabo de Hornos 7.270
Brisbane 7.166, 7.168, 7.177 Callao 7.270
Cape Leeuwin 7.164, 7.170 Estrecho de Magallanes 7.270
Cebu 7.149 Guam 7.190
Darwin 7.166,7.172 60 Hobart 7.58
Fremantle 7.164, 7.170 Hong Kong 7.190
Guam 7.122 Honolulu 7.233
Ho Chi Minh City 7.138 Iquique 7.270
Hong Kong 7.138,7.144 Juan de Fuca Strait 7.330
Honolulu 7.240 65 Manila 7.190
Iloilo 7.149 Melbourne 7.61
Jakarta 7.146 Nagasaki 7.190
Melbourne 7.169, 7.177 Noumea 7.88
Papeete 7.251 Nuku'alofa 7.86
Port Hedland 7.164, 7.166, 7.171 70 Panama 7.273
313
 INDEX TO GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ROUTES

Wellington—continued Yap—continued
Papeete 7.85.1 Brisbane 7.168, 7.174, 7.176
Prince Rupert 7.329 Cape Leeuwin 7.170, 7.174
San Bernadino Strait 7.190 Darwin 7.172, 7.174
San Diego 7.332 5 Fremantle 7.170, 7.174
San Francisco 7.331 Hong Kong 7.145
Shanghai 7.190 Honolulu 7.237
Suva 7.88 Juan de Fuca Strait 7.337
Sydney 7.64 Melbourne 7.169, 7.174, 7.176
Torres Strait 7.79 10 Panama 7.308
Tsugaru Kaikyo 7.190 Papeete 7.251
Valparaiso 7.270 Port Hedland 7.171, 7.174
Verde Island Passage 7.190 Prince Rupert 7.337
Yap 7.190 San Diego 7.337
Yokohama 7.190 15 San Francisco 7.337
West Australian Current 6.36 Singapore 7.124
West Indies Suva 7.203
Routes to: Sydney 7.168, 7.174, 7.176
English Channel 8.53.1-8.53.2 Torres Strait 7.173, 7.174, 7.184
North America, E coast 8.53.1 20 Wellington 7.190
Westerlies Yokohama 7.204
Atlantic Ocean 2.6 Yokohama
Indian Ocean 6.14 (35°26'N, 139" 43'E)
North Pacific Ocean 7.8 Routes to:
South Pacific Ocean 7.19 25 Adelaide 7.169, 7.174
Wetar, Selat Apia 7.205
(8°16'S, 127° 12'E) 7.110 Auckland 7.190
Routes to: Brisbane 7.168, 7.174, 7.181
Jakarta 7.132 Cape Calavite 7.197
Selat Sunda 7.132 30 Cape Leeuwin 7.170, 7.174
Singapore 7.129 Columbia River 10.64.1
White Sea Darwin 7.172, 7.174
Ice 2.27.6 Dutch Harbor 7.362
Winds Fremantle 7.170, 7.174
Beaufort scale: Table A (page 35 Guam 7.204, 10.69.3
261) Hakodate 10.72.1-10.72.3
Seasonal: Table B (page 262) Hong Kong 7.198,
Winds and Weather 10.70.1-10.70.2
Atlantic Ocean 2.1-2.8, 3.1 Honolulu 7.243, 10.66
Caribbean Sea 4.1 40 Indian Ocean 10.68.1-10.68.2
Gulf of Aden 6.6-6.7 Juan de Fuca Strait 7.361, 10.64.1
Gulf of Mexico 4.1 Manila 7.197
Gulf of Oman 6.8 Melbourne 7.169, 7.174, 7.181
Indian Ocean 6.1-6.5, 6.9-6.15 Panama 7.359
Mediterranean Sea 5.1-5.3.2 45 Papeete 7.253
Pacific Ocean 7.1-7.20 Petropavlovsk 7.201
World Wide Navigational Port Hedland 7.171, 7.174
Warning Service 1.30 Prince Rupert 7.361, 10.64.1
Wrath, Cape (5 miles N of) San Diego 7.360
(58° 43' N, 5" 00' W) 50 San Francisco 7.360,
Routes to: 10.65.1-10.65.2
Boston 2.62-2.64.3 Shanghai 7.200, 10.71
Cabot Strait 2.62-2.64.3 Singapore 7.120,
Chesapeake Bay 2.62-2.64.3 10.67.1-10.67.2
Delaware Bay 2.62-2.64.3 55 Suva 7.206
Halifax 2.62-2.64.3 Sydney 7.168, 7.174,
Hudson Strait 2.51.1 7.175,
Kap Farvel 2.50 10.69.1-10.69.3
New York 2.62-2.64.3 Torres Strait 7.173, 7.174, 7.187
Saint John's 2.58 60 Verde Island Passage 7.197
Strait of Belle Isle 2.55 Wellington 7.190
Xiamen 10.70.1-10.70.2
Yap (9° 28'N, 138° 09'E) Yap 7.204
Routes to: Yucatan Channel
Apia 7.203.1 65 Route to E part of Caribbean
Auckland 7.190 Sea 4.26

314